CA08100014E
155736-Catalog 155736-Catalog 155736-Catalog B5 unilog cesco-content
2016-10-06
: Pdf 90288-Attachment 90288-Attachment B5 unilog
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 621
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Electrical Sector Solutions Volume 12: Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions Eaton 1000 Eaton Boulevard Cleveland, OH 44122 United States Eaton.com © 2013 Eaton All Rights Reserved Printed in USA Publication No. CA08100014E / Z14331 October 2013 Eaton is a registered trademark. All other trademarks are property of their respective owners. The power of fusion. 1833 1874 1886 1893 1897 1899 1906 1908 1911 1914 1934 1961 1962 1963 1967 1977 1983 1984 1989 There’s a certain energy at Eaton. It’s the power of uniting some of the world’s most respected names to build a brand you can trust to meet your every power management need. Eaton is dedicated to ensuring that reliable, efficient and safe power is available when it’s needed most. Building on over 100 years of experience in electrical power management, the experts at Eaton deliver customized, integrated solutions to solve your most critical challenges. To learn more, visit Eaton.com/Electrical All of the above are trademarks of Eaton or its affiliates. Eaton has a license to use the Westinghouse brand name in Asia Pacific. ©2013 Eaton. Contents Molded Case Circuit Breakers Motor Control Switchgear Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Distribution System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Loadcenters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Meter Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Safety Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Dry-Type Distribution Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Busway (Low Voltage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 IQ Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Communication Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Programmable Logic Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Motor Control Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Distribution Switchboards (Low Voltage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 High Resistance Grounding System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Medium Voltage Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Network Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Transfer Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Factor Correction Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Eaton’s Electrical Services & Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sales & Service Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions Appendix 2—Alphabetical Product Index Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 Copyright Dimensions, Weights and Ratings Dimensions, weights and ratings given in this catalog are approximate and should not be used for construction purposes. Drawings containing exact dimensions are available upon request. All listed product specifications and ratings are subject to change without notice. Photographs are representative of production units. 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Terms and Conditions All prices and discounts are subject to change without notice. When price changes occur, they are published in Eaton’s Price and Availability Digest (PAD). All orders accepted by Eaton’s Electrical Sector are subject to the general terms and conditions as set forth in Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions. Technical and Descriptive Publications This catalog contains brief technical data for proper selection of products. Further information is available in the form of technical information publications and in illustrated brochures. If additional product information is required, contact your local Eaton Products Distributor, call 1-800-525-2000 or visit our website at www.eaton.com. Compliance with Nuclear Regulation 10 CFR 21 Eaton products are sold as commercial grade products not intended for application in facilities or activities licensed by the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission for atomic purposes, under 10 CFR 21. Further certification will be required for use of these products in a safety-related application in any nuclear facility licensed by the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 WARNING The installation and use of Eaton products should be in accordance with the provisions of the U.S. National Electrical Code® and/or other local codes or industry standards that are pertinent to the particular end use. Installation or use not in accordance with these codes and standards could be hazardous to personnel and/or equipment. These catalog pages do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide for every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise that are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes, the matter should be referred to the local Eaton Products Distributor or Sales Office. The contents of this catalog shall not become part of or modify any prior or existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The sales contract contains the entire obligation of Eaton’s Electrical Sector. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of Eaton. Any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or modify the existing warranty. 24 25 Copyright ©2013, Eaton, All Rights Reserved. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Introduction Eaton is a global leader in power distribution, power quality, control and automation, and monitoring products. At Eaton, we believe a reliable, efficient and safe power system is the foundation of every successful enterprise. Through innovative technologies, cutting-edge products and our highly skilled services team, we empower businesses around the world to achieve a powerful advantage. In addition, Eaton is committed to creating and maintaining powerful customer relationships built on a foundation of excellence. From the products we manufacture to our dedicated customer service and support, we know what’s important to you. Solutions Eaton takes the complexity out of power systems management with a holistic and strategic approach, leveraging our industry-leading technology, solutions and services. We focus on the following three areas in all we do: ● Reliability—maintain the appropriate level of power continuity without disruption or unexpected downtime ● Efficiency—minimize energy usage, operating costs, equipment footprint and environmental impact ● Safety—identify and mitigate electrical hazards to protect what you value most Using the Eaton Catalog Library As we grow, it becomes increasingly difficult to include all products in one or two comprehensive catalogs. Knowing that each user has their specific needs, we have created a library of catalogs for our products that when complete, will contain 15 volumes. Since the volumes will continuously be a work in progress and updated, each volume will stand alone. Refer to our volume directory, MZ08100001E, for a quick glance of where to look for the products you need. The 15 volumes include: ● ● ● ● ● ● Volume 1—Residential and Light Commercial (CA08100002E) Volume 2—Commercial Distribution (CA08100003E) Volume 3—Power Distribution and Control Assemblies (CA08100004E) Volume 4—Circuit Protection (CA08100005E) Volume 5—Motor Control and Protection (CA08100006E) Volume 6—Solid-State Motor Control (CA08100007E) ● ● ● ● ● Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions (CA08100008E) Volume 8—Sensing Solutions (CA08100010E) Volume 9—Original Equipment Manufacturer (CA08100011E) Volume 10—Enclosed Control (CA08100012E) Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls (CA08100013E) ● ● ● ● Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions (CA08105001E) Volume 13—Counters, Timers and Tachometers (CA08100015E)—Available in electronic format only Volume 14—Fuses (CA08100016E)—Available in electronic format only Volume 15—Solar Inverters and Electrical Balance of System (CA08100018E) These volumes are not all-inclusive of every product, but they are meant to be an overview of our product lines. For our full range of product solutions and additional product information, consult Eaton.com/electrical and other catalogs and product guides in our literature library. These references include: ● The Consulting Application Guide (CA08104001E) ● The Eaton Power Quality Product Guide (COR01FYA) If you don’t have the volume that contains the product or information that you are looking for, not to worry. You can access every volume of the catalog library at Eaton.com/electrical in the Literature Library. By installing our Automatic Tab Updater (ATU), you can be sure you always have the most recent version of each volume and tab. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com i Introduction Icons Green Leaf Eaton Green Solutions are products, systems or solutions that represent Eaton benchmarks for environmental performance. The green leaf symbol is our promise that the solution has been reviewed and documented as offering exceptional, industry-leading environmental benefits to customers, consumers and our communities. Though all of Eaton’s products and solutions are designed to meet or exceed applicable government standards related to protecting the environment, our products with the Green Leaf designation further provide “exceptional environmental benefit.” Learn Online When you see the Learn Online icon, go to Eaton.com/electrical and search for the product or training page. There you will find 100-level training courses, podcasts, webcasts or games and puzzles to learn more. Drawings Online When you see the Drawings Online icon, go to Eaton.com/electrical and find the products page. There you will find a tab that includes helpful product drawings and illustrations. Contact Us If you need additional help, you can find contact information under the Customer Care heading of Eaton.com/electrical. ii Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Introduction Continuous Support for the Installed Base 1 Introduction Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logo History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Eaton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Installed Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . One Source for All Your Aftermarket Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What’s New? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What Does the Shaded Area Mean? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Eaton’s Electrical Business on the World Wide Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . Eaton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T1-2 V12-T1-2 V12-T1-2 V12-T1-3 V12-T1-3 V12-T1-3 V12-T1-3 V12-T1-3 V12-T1-3 V12-T1-3 V12-T1-3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T1-1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Introduction Welcome Welcome to the latest edition of Eaton’s Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions catalog (formerly YES catalog). In this fifth expanded edition, you will find increased solutions to extend the life, modernize and upgrade your installed base of electrical distribution and industrial control equipment. 2009–Present Logo History 2000–2009 The installed base of Westinghouse and Cutler-Hammer® distribution and control equipment can be found everywhere. Whether in an industrial facility such as paper, chemical, pharmaceutical, auto and steel, or commercial installations including universities, hospitals, airports and just about any type of government building; you will find equipment that was manufactured by Eaton or one of its acquired companies. In some situations due to the age of the equipment, the original nameplate information may be difficult to obtain. This is why the logo history is provided. If all else fails, the logo on the front of the equipment will help you identify when it was manufactured. Knowing this, and the type of product, you can refer to the applicable section of the catalog to find the solutions available to support it. Eaton Eaton is backed by more than 100 years of history and experience. This experience has resulted in many innovations in distribution and industrial control products each incorporating leading-edge technology to provide the highest value to our customers. This same technology and engineering expertise is applied to solutions to upgrade existing installed older equipment. Our engineers and scientists are recognized throughout the industry and around the world as experts in a wide range of disciplines including: photoelectric optical technology, arc interruption, vacuum technology, digital and analog electronics, and communications technology. 1994–2000 1960–1994 1980–1994 1953–1960 1960–1980 1940–1953 1933–1960 1922–1940 1914–1933 1910–1922 1900–1914 1900–1910 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T1-2 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 1 Introduction The Installed Base Catalog Format The installed base of electrical distribution and control equipment is a product of the economic changes that have occurred over the last 15 or 20 years. Each section of the catalog includes the following elements: ● ● They could: ● ● ● ● ● Be operating beyond capacity Have higher fault currents because of additions Pose major safety issues Cause increased unscheduled outages having a direct impact on productivity It has also been a witness to: ● ● ● Reductions in budgets and people resources Increases in maintenance intervals Decreases in support from the original manufacturer Where do you go for help? One Source for All Your Aftermarket Needs The Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions catalog is a reference tool to help you identify existing electrical distribution and control equipment and then provide a wide range of solutions available from Eaton to support it. Regardless of the vintage or the original manufacturer, we can provide solutions that will extend the useful life of your existing equipment. What’s New? Our catalog has a new name to reflect our membership in the family of electrical solutions catalogs—the Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions catalog replaces the former YES (Your Electrical Solutions) catalog. It continues to offer cutting-edge engineered life extension solutions—it just has a new look and a new name. Additionally, as the number of available solutions has grown, so has the catalog. Incorporated in this latest edition are increased capabilities that have been introduced since the last printing in 2003. For example, in order to address ongoing safety concerns, Eaton has engineered the Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System™ and the universal remote power racking system. Also, there are new product offerings in the area of trip unit retrofit kits, low voltage power breakers and medium voltage vacuum replacement breakers, just to name a few. With changes to the molded-case circuit breaker product line, this catalog is simpler to use with an updated replacement breaker cross-reference section. Additionally, automatic transfer switches and power factor correction capacitors are included in brand-new tabs in this edition. Using the Catalog You can find information in several ways. The Table of Contents in the front and the detailed Alphabetical Product Index in the back will refer you to the correct section. The capabilities overview in Tab 2 highlights various capabilities, and provides the tab number where that capability is listed. Also included in this tab is a pictorial representation of a typical distribution system illustrating the various products and where they can be found. ● ● ● ● Product Description Product History Product History Time Line Replacement Capabilities Technology Upgrades (where applicable) Further Information Pricing Information 1 2 3 4 Where relevant, Additional Information, Customer Required Information, General Information and Support Services are included. What Does the Shaded Area Mean? In some sections of the catalog, you will again see tables and text that have been shaded. The shaded areas indicate obsolete or discontinued product, and although the product is no longer manufactured, it is still shown for historical reference. In the molded-case circuit breaker section (Tab 3), many of the tables have shaded areas. Although the product is no longer manufactured, cross-reference tables have been developed to provide alternative solutions using current manufactured molded-case circuit breakers. The cross-reference tables begin on Page V12-T3-115 and are in alphanumeric order, based on style or catalog number of the obsolete or discontinued product. Eaton’s Electrical Business on the World Wide Web Our Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions catalog is designed to be your everyday, at-your-fingertips, at-aglance reference for our wide range of products and services that support your installed base. But it’s just the paper “tip” of the electronic “iceberg” of continuously updated information that you can access, online, anytime. http://www.eaton.com 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Eaton Eaton’s electrical business is a global leader with expertise in power distribution and circuit protection; backup power protection; control and automation; lighting and security; structural solutions and wiring devices; solutions for harsh and hazardous environments; and engineering services. Eaton is positioned through its global solutions to answer today’s most critical electrical power management challenges. Eaton is a power management company providing energyefficient solutions that help our customers effectively manage electrical, hydraulic and mechanical power. A global technology leader, Eaton acquired Cooper Industries plc in November 2012. The 2012 revenue of the combined companies was $21.8 billion on a pro forma basis. Eaton has approximately 102,000 employees and sells products to customers in more than 175 countries. For more information, visit www.eaton.com. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T1-3 Distribution System Technology Upgrades for the Installed Base 2 Distribution System A Commitment to the Installed Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Components and Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Modernization and Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Products and Services Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T2-2 V12-T2-2 V12-T2-2 V12-T2-4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T2-1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Distribution System Capabilities Overview Distribution System A Commitment to the Installed Base Our employees are committed to supporting all Cutler-Hammer® and Westinghouse® Distribution and Control equipment, no matter when it was manufactured by Eaton’s electrical business, or how long it has been in service. Our dedicated Aftermarket Organization provides products, services and expertise through a focused management team, sales engineers and technicians that work to keep customers’ equipment operating. Eaton also offers multiple solutions to extend the life of other manufacturers’ equipment, including modernization, technology upgrades, reconditioning and repair. Support for other manufactures’ equipment include: ● ● ● ● ● ● General Electric® Square D® Federal Pacific® ITE® Siemens® Siemens-Allis™ Allen-Bradley® Allis-Chalmers 15 ● 16 Eaton’s innovative engineering provides the highest level of life extension to support the industry’s installed base, regardless of the original manufacturer. 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 ● Replacement Components and Renewal Parts A full line of replacement components and renewal parts is available for the existing installed base of Cutler-Hammer and Westinghouse equipment. These replacement components and renewal parts are new, not used or surplus material. The use of original production tooling, assembly fixtures, and original specifications and drawings guarantees compatibility with existing equipment. V12-T2-2 Equipment Modernization and Upgrades Cutler-Hammer equipment modernization and upgrades can extend the life of your existing equipment. They can economically upgrade CutlerHammer and Westinghouse products, as well as those of other manufacturers. These state-of-the-art upgrades are engineered to provide: ● ● ● ● ● Solutions for obsolete electrical equipment New technology for aging equipment Retrofit, repair and remanufacturing processes Monitoring, protection and control capabilities to your system Genuine new replacement components and renewal parts Switchgear Fluidized Epoxy Bus Motor Control Center Bucket Retrofits Freedom™ 2100, Advantage™ and IT. replacement starter units can be used to increase the capacity of a motor control center without investing in a completely new assembly. Competitive retrofits and new buckets are also available for other manufacturers’ units, using current Eaton technology. See Tab 14. Existing switchgear bus can be replaced or returned to our factory, regardless of the original manufacturer for reinsulation, using the custom fluidized epoxy bed process. It is available from 600V to 15 kV for switchgear, bus runs and other equipment. See Tab 17. Medium Voltage Starter Upgrades Breaker Reconditioning and Trip System Upgrades with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System™ Digitrip™ RMS trip unit retrofit kits are available for Eaton, Westinghouse and other manufacturers of low voltage power breakers. These retrofits will improve circuit protection while increasing breaker and electrical system reliability. See Tab 17. Power Breaker Replacement New DB, DS, DSII, Magnum™ DS and SPB power breakers are available for replacement, to fill existing cells, or in a cell retrofit package for upgrading existing older low voltage switchgear. These breakers are electrically and mechanically identical to the original vintages of DB, DS, DSII, Magnum DS and SPB breakers. See Tab 17. Vacuum contactors can be retrofitted or retrofilled into existing medium voltage air magnetic starters, achieving the benefits of vacuum technology without the expense of a completely new assembly. See Tab 13. Replacement Vacuum Breakers MVVR (Medium Voltage Vacuum Replacement) breakers provide a means to cost-effectively modernize existing air magnetic medium voltage switchgear while further increasing its effective life. See Tab 17. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Distribution System Capabilities Overview 2 1 2 3 4 SPD System Retrofits PowerNet Power Management Products Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer PowerNet™ system is designed to manage the power distribution system. This integrated power management system is the ideal tool to help manage energy costs, to troubleshoot power quality problems, and to ensure the reliability and integrity of the electrical distribution system. See Tab 11. Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer IQ Metering and Protective Relaying products are multifunctional communicating products based on microprocessor technology. They are designed to replace existing electromechanical devices and can be applied at low, medium and high voltage points in the electrical distribution system. These devices offer communications capabilities to link electrical distribution equipment to PowerNet Power Management Software. See Tab 10. Protect solid-state devices from the damaging effects of transient overvoltages. The Eaton SPD products can be installed in low voltage distribution gear or retrofitted into existing switchboards, panelboards and motor control centers to eliminate the effects of surges before it reaches sensitive equipment. See Tabs 4 and 17. Circuit breaker replacements and upgrades are designed for use in panelboards, switchboards, motor control centers, control panels, combination starters, individual enclosures, and bus duct plug-in units. See Tabs 3, 4, 9 and 14. 6 7 8 9 Genuine LV Control Renewal Parts Low Voltage High Resistance Grounding Systems Replacement Molded-Case Breakers and Accessories 5 10 Submetering Retrofits Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer IQ Energy Sentinel submetering device can be easily retrofitted on Series C® breakers, or those of other manufacturers, in existing equipment. When combined with the PowerNet system, the IQ Energy Sentinel can now provide submetering at numerous levels of monitoring and energy management. See Tabs 4 and 10. Installation and Startup Services Installation and startup services can be provided for Eaton equipment, as well as equipment manufactured by other organizations. See Tab 23. Genuine factory-warranted low voltage control renewal parts are available to support the complete line of CutlerHammer and Westinghouse design starters and contactors. Renewal parts include contact kits, coils, overload relays and heaters, to name a few. See Tab 13. Type C-HRG provides service continuity by providing a ground path for ground current via resistance that limits current magnitude and includes a means to trace the fault source. See Tab 16. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T2-3 2 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 9 14 15 10 16 17 18 11 Typical Distribution System Product and Services for Life Extension and Equipment Upgrades Overview 3 3 Distribution System 19 Tab Digitrip RMS Trip Unit Retrofit Kits . . . . . . . . . 17 Motor Control Center Bucket Retrofits . . . . . . 2 DHP-VR Vacuum Replacement Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Switchgear Fluidized Epoxy Bus . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Retrofit/Replace with Vacuum Contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Cell Retrofit with DSII/SPB Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Low Voltage High Resistance Grounding Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 PowerNet Communication System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Retrofit Front Panel with IQ Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Retrofit with IQ Energy Sentinel for Submetering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Retrofit with Surge Protective Devices (SPD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 9, 14, 15 Replacement Molded-Case Breakers and Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Rebuilding/ Remanufacturing Service . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 13, 15 Renewal/Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALL Service Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALL Power Factor Correction Capacitors . . . . . . . 21 Automatic Transfer Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Remote Power Racking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 12 15 15 MEDIUM VOLTAGE NON-SEGREGATED BUS 8 14 15 LOAD INTERRUPTER SWITCHGEAR 13 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 13 14 15 18 19 LOW VOLTAGE SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATION RECTIFIER AND EXCITER LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARD INDIVIDUAL/ GROUP MOUNTED 16 1 6 7 8 9 10 17 18 11 12 14 15 18 19 20 21 DRY-TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER 22 8 9 14 15 14 15 SAFETY SWITCH MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR 8 9 14 15 19 MEDIUM VOLTAGE STARTER 8 12 14 15 17 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD 8 14 15 14 15 14 15 DC DRIVE PROCESS RECTIFIER SYSTEM HIGH CURRENT LOW VOLTAGE PROCESS SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR MAGNETIC SHOEBREAK 8 10 12 14 15 8 11 14 15 BUS PLUG BUS PLUG ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY CONTROL 8 14 15 REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTER 8 11 14 15 LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFER SWITCH 14 15 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS UP TO 700 HP UP TO 1500 HP 8 14 15 PROGRAMMABLE 8 14 15 LOGIC CONTROLLER 8 10 11 12 14 15 14 15 14 15 ELECTRICAL OPERATOR INTERFACE 14 15 14 15 START LIGHTING SAFETY CONTROL SWITCH PANELBOARD 25 OFFICE BUILDING V12-T2-4 ENCLOSED CONTROL SAFETY SWITCH LIGHTING LIGHTING LIGHTING LIGHTING CONTROL PANELBOARD PANELBOARD PANELBOARD PANELBOARD COUNT CONTROL PROXIMITY SENSOR SAFETY SWITCH UP TO 300 HP 23 24 ENCLOSED CONTROL 16 8 9 10 11 12 14 15 14 15 TRANSFORMER GENERATOR 8 9 10 11 12 14 15 8 14 15 LOAD INTERRUPTER SWITCHGEAR 5 8 13 14 15 SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR FIELD APPLICATION PANEL MOTOR CONTROL CENTER 14 15 14 15 3 4 5 8 9 13 14 15 19 14 15 2 8 9 10 11 12 14 15 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS UP TO 300 HP 15 MEDIUM VOLTAGE TRANSFER EQUIPMENT VACUUM BREAKERS OR LOAD BREAK FUSED SWITCHES 14 15 16 19 15 kV SWITCHGEAR ARC RESISTANT SWITCHGEAR TRANSFORMER LOW VOLTAGE BUS ON-SITE GENERATION POWER TRANSFORMER POWERNET INTEGRATED MONITORING PROTECTION AND CONTROL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM 14 15 SECONDARY SPOT NETWORK WITH NETWORK PROTECTORS 15 14 15 9 14 15 4 8 9 14 15 19 8 12 13 14 15 14 EXCITATION CONTROL GROUNDING RESISTOR UTILITY SYSTEM 8 9 14 15 ADDITIONAL UTILITY SOURCES 15 34.5 kV SWITCHGEAR 15 13 14 15 LIMIT SWITCH 14 15 STOP SELECTOR SWITCH MANUFACTURING FACILITY Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com PHOTOELECTRIC SENSOR Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Family 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Product Description, History, Major Product Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nameplate Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identifying Factory Original Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement and Upgrade Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Guides Miniature Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Molded-Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Devices Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Molded-Case Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panelboard Replacement Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Control Center Replacement Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technology Upgrades for Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement and Service Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cross-Reference Westinghouse, Challenger and Bryant Replacements . . . . . . . . . . Breaker Replacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mining Breaker Replacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pricing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T3-2 V12-T3-3 V12-T3-3 V12-T3-4 1 2 V12-T3-5 3 V12-T3-6 4 V12-T3-10 5 V12-T3-15 6 V12-T3-61 V12-T3-63 V12-T3-63 V12-T3-80 V12-T3-81 V12-T3-88 V12-T3-91 V12-T3-95 7 8 9 V12-T3-112 10 V12-T3-113 11 V12-T3-115 V12-T3-162 V12-T3-168 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-1 3 1 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Molded-Case Circuit Breakers 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Family Product Description Product History Originally a Westinghouse Product The need for molded-case circuit breakers came about in 1918 when numerous applications for electrical motors resulted in a demand for a device that would ensure safe operation and, at the same time, protect electrical circuits. attempted to find a solution to the problem. Meetings with switch manufacturers were initiated in an effort to find a solution. Switch manufacturers were asked to develop a switching device that would interrupt a circuit under prolonged overload conditions. The device would have to be safe, reliable and tamperproof. It should also be resettable so as to be reusable after an interruption without replacing any parts. This search for better circuit protection resulted in many different but unacceptable approaches to the problem. These early meetings and subsequent efforts prepared the groundwork for the eventual development of the molded-case circuit breaker. Eaton’s molded-case circuit breakers are designed to provide circuit protection for low voltage distribution systems. They are described by NEMA® as “. . . a device for closing and interrupting a circuit between separable contacts under both normal and abnormal conditions,” and furthermore as “. . . a breaker assembled as an integral unit in supporting an enclosed housing of insulating material.” The NEC® describes them as “. . . a device designed to open and close a circuit by non-automatic means, and to open the circuit automatically on a predetermined overload of current, without injury to itself when properly applied within its rating.” During this period, individual motors were used for the first time in industrial plants to operate machine tools and in private homes to operate appliances. Plant electricians were constantly changing fuses blown during motor startups because of the lack of properly designed fuses for motor circuit protection. Homes experienced similar problems when electrical circuits were overloaded. Inspectors were concerned about fire hazards because of plug fuses being bridged with pennies and the installation of fuses with too high an ampere rating. Circuit breakers protect against overloads in conductors and protects against short circuits in connected apparatus such as motors and motor starters. Time Line—Major Product Introductions Circuit breakers are designed for use in panelboards, switchboards, motor control centers, control panels, combination starters, individual enclosures and bus duct plug-in units. Inspection authorities became involved and After intensive research and development, Westinghouse produced the DE-ION® arc extinguisher for use in large oil circuit breakers. Although too large in its initial form to be practical for small circuit breakers, the arc extinguisher was eventually modified into a usable size. The first compact, workable circuit breaker was developed in Year Product 1923 First compact, workable circuit breaker developed by Westinghouse 1927 Westinghouse introduced the first complete circuit breaker line, rated 10– 600A, 600V 1939 Along with ordering information and style numbers, the various maximum current ratings came to be known by frame designations: 50A 100A 100A 225A 600A Motor Circuit Protector (MCP) introduced—first sensitive, low level protection designed specifically for motor circuits 1973 SELTRONIC™ introduced—first molded-case circuit breaker with an electronic trip unit 1979 Current Limit-R circuit breaker introduced— first true current limiting trip unit 1982 Series C® Family introduced—new world-class standard, meeting increasing interrupting requirements without sacrificing compact size 21 1994 Westinghouse Distribution and Control Business Unit (DCBU) acquired by Eaton, integrated with Cutler-Hammer (the Cutler-Hammer line of molded case circuit breakers was sold when merged with Westinghouse) 22 1995 OPTIM™ Family introduced—first truly programmable molded-case circuit breaker 20 23 Since that initial introduction in 1927, Westinghouse continued to be at the forefront of circuit breaker technology with an unprecedented series of circuit protective enhancements and introductions as chronicled below. In 1994, Eaton, another world-class technology leader, acquired the Westinghouse Distribution and Control Business Unit (DCBU) and integrated it with their Cutler-Hammer business unit forming a powerful, new combination, poised to meet the challenges of the next 100 years. 1950 1960 1970 1980 1990 E-Frame F-Frame (non-interchangeable trip) G-Frame K-Frame L-Frame 1970 19 1920 1930 1940 1923 when the modified arc extinguisher was coupled with a thermal tripping mechanism. It was not until four years later, however, that Westinghouse research engineers found the ideal combination of materials and design that permitted circuit breakers to interrupt fault currents of 5000A at 120 Vac or Vdc. One year later, Westinghouse placed the first circuit breaker on the market. Its acceptance was instantaneous. 2002 Next Generation E125, J250 2004 Series G® First Global Breaker Line 24 25 V12-T3-2 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 1995 2000 2002 Present 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Breaker Identification Accessories Nameplate Data A circuit breaker is identified by data found on the nameplate. Most circuit breaker accessories are mounted internally and are not visible with a quick inspection. However, because many accessories rely on or supply an external signal, there may be electrical leads exiting the circuit breaker case. Inspect for these leads when obtaining full descriptive information for circuit breaker replacement. Examples of common accessories: This includes: ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Catalog number Shop order number Style number Amperage Number of poles Voltage class Temperature rating In most instances, the catalog number, style number or shop order number will supply enough information to identify the circuit breaker. However, it is always advisable to obtain all data from the nameplate to facilitate identification. A Catalog Number begins with a series of letters followed by numbers that identify: ● ● ● ● Circuit breaker type Number of poles Maximum amperage Example: Catalog number F3020 indicates a Type F circuit breaker, three poles, 20A A Shop Order Number begins with one or two numbers followed by a single letter and four additional numbers. A shop order number is listed in place of a catalog number and indicates that the circuit breaker was modified at the factory, i.e., addition of a shunt trip, special calibration, etc. Every shop order number must be researched with the factory to properly identify modifications. Call your Cutler-Hammer Field Sales office for this information. ● Shunt Trip Used to remotely trip the circuit breaker using an electrical signal. Typically two wires extend through the case. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Pre-Series C Breaker with Original Label (Labels updated in 1997) 8 9 Undervoltage Release (UVR) Trips the circuit breaker when voltage drops below a specified percentage of coil voltage (typically 70%). Typically two wires extend through the case. Auxiliary Switch Provides remote indication of the circuit breaker status (open/closed). Typically three wires extend through the case in a single-pole 1A/1B application. 7 10 11 12 Series C Breaker with Original Label (Labels updated in 1997) 13 14 Alarm Lockout Switch For remote indication of an automatic trip operation. Typically two or three wires extend through the case. 15 16 17 Vintage Label for Typical SELTRONIC Molded-Case Circuit Breaker 19 20 21 Example: 70E2121 22 Note: Eaton does not recommend replacing a circuit breaker identified by a Shop Order Number with a standard “off-the-shelf” circuit breaker without first identifying the modifications. They may be critical to safe and reliable operation. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 18 23 24 25 V12-T3-3 3 1 2 3 4 5 Factory Original Circuit Breakers Why Insist on Only Genuine, New MCCBs Purchased Through Authorized Distributors? Eaton defines “New” product as that which has not yet been installed in an electrical circuit, purchased through authorized channels in factory original condition and packaged in unopened Eaton cartons. ● 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ● 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers ● The only way to ensure safe and reliable operation of your system is to use genuine, new, Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer products exclusively. Eaton does not resell the component parts for molded-case circuit breakers, the only way for third-party breaker refurbishers to get parts for the breakers that they are rebuilding is to cannibalize other used breakers or to use counterfeit components. Neither is a very good option for the end user In some cases, unauthorized resellers of molded-case circuit breakers have been found to misrepresent used, rebuilt or surplus products. Only products purchased as “new” through authorized channels are covered under the Eaton warranty policy There have been instances where third-party refurbishers have rebuilt breakers using the wrong parts, with parts missing or the factory lubrication removed in the cleaning process—any of which may result in devices that may not be depended upon to function properly to protect equipment and personnel Identifying Genuine, Factory Original Westinghouse Circuit Breakers Manufactured by Eaton The features on a molded-case circuit breaker that identify it as genuine or counterfeit may or may not be readily apparent. In fact, there may be differences not detectable by an external investigation. A genuine Eaton brand molded-case circuit breaker manufactured by Eaton will have a serialized bar code unique to the breaker as well as an unbroken seal where the case comes together. This barcode and seal were placed at the factory and ensures the internal integrity of the breaker. If, for any reason the barcode is missing or the seal is broken, do not accept the breaker. (Seal does not appear on interchangeable trip breakers.) Another way to tell if a breaker has been tampered with is to examine the sealant used to cover the screws on the top rear of the breaker. If the sealant appears sloppy or is missing, it indicates that the unit may have been subjected to tampering. If front cover screw shows marks from use, someone has attempted to open the breaker. The front covers are either black or gray on genuine Westinghouse molded-case circuit breakers. Front Cover Screws Sealant Used to Cover Screws A UL® label on a genuine Westinghouse breaker is either exactly as shown in the photo or is stamped in white ink onto the frame in older pre-Series C breakers. Anything other than this may indicate fraud. Westinghouse moldedcase circuit breakers manufactured by Eaton are packed individually and shipped in Eaton labeled cartons. Anything other than this is not to be considered new and should be suspect. Unbroken Seal There is a manufacturing date code on the back of genuine molded-case circuit breakers stamped in silver and white. If this coding is missing, it may mean the breaker has been subjected to tampering. Frequently, this date code is wiped off in an attempt to represent the breaker as new. XX-XXX-XXXX Product Name Product Series UL Label Adpiscing elit sed diamnon euismod xxxxxxxxx Eaton Labeled Cartons 23 24 Manufacturing Date Code Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com Amet Elit Lorem Ipsum: dolor sit amet, consectetuer adi piscing elit, sed diam nonummy nibh euismod A www.eaton.com 22 V12-T3-4 Dolor Sit Made in U.S.A. 21 25 DOLOR SIT AMET CONSECT ETUER ADI Lorem ipsum: dolor sit amet, consectetuter adipleiscing, sed diam nonummy, nibheuis mod tincidunt. 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Series C and Series G MoldedCase Circuit Breakers When and Where to Use ● Generally a first choice wherever physically and electrically practical ● Where communications, arc flash protection, energy and power quality monitoring are desired ● As a direct replacement or add-on to already installed Series C or Series G product, including Westinghouse breakers (see Page V12-T3-114) ● For special applications such as DC engine generator Advantages ● The most current molded-case circuit breaker technology ● Higher interrupting capacities in each frame size ● Smaller and lighter for a given frame size than other options ● Generally less expensive than other replacement breaker options ● Readily available throughout range, high levels of stock ● Available from stock ● One-year warranty Current Production Replacement Circuit Breakers When and Where to Use ● As a direct, one-for-one replacement of current production pre-Series C product ● Where you know the catalog/style number but not the physical or electrical specifics about the application Advantages ● Ease of selection and certainty of replacement ● Guaranteed to be both a physical and electrical duplicate of original ● Still in production ● Newly manufactured ● UL listed ● Available from stock ● One-year warranty Replacement of Current Panelboard Molded-Case Circuit Breakers When and Where to Use ● When replacing Series C circuit breakers in a current design panelboard Advantages ● Newly manufactured and tested to the latest technology ● UL Listed ● Available from stock in most frame sizes ● One-year warranty. Refer to Page V12-T3-91 for Series C connector kits Replacement of Out-ofProduction Panelboard Molded-Case Circuit Breakers (Including Westinghouse) When and Where to Use ● When replacing out-ofproduction circuit breakers in an existing panelboard ● When replacing Westinghouse breakers. Refer to Pages V12-T3-81– V12-T3-90 and Page V12-T3-114 Advantages Newly manufactured and tested to the latest applicable standards ● Both physically and electrically interchangeable with the circuit breakers that they are designed to replace ● UL Listed ● Available from stock in most frame sizes ● One-year warranty ● Replacement of Out-ofProduction Motor Control Center Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Upgrades When and Where to Use ● When replacing out-ofproduction circuit breakers in an existing motor control center: 5 Star, Type W and F10 designs ● When upgrading Westinghouse breakers with a Series C technology upgrade breaker Advantages ● Newly manufactured and tested to the latest technology ● Series C retrofit kits are physically and electrically interchangeable with the circuit breakers that they are designed to replace ● UL Listed ● Available from stock in most frame sizes ● One-year warranty. Refer to Page V12-T3-91 Service for Molded-Case Circuit Breakers When and Where to Use ● Where circuit breaker has sustained minor physical damage to a handle, lug, etc., that otherwise would be fully functional ● Large frame circuit breaker (600A and above) that has experienced some normal wear, but is in generally good condition, as an economically driven alternative to new ● When replacing Westinghouse breakers. Refer to Page V12-T3-114 1 Advantages Prevents loss of circuit breakers due to minor damage ● Reduces overall breaker costs ● Prevents use of potentially unreliable third-party refurbishers ● Includes full one-year Eaton Electrical Inc. warranty ● Ensures reliability through dealing with the original manufacturer with a long and well-recognized tradition of product safety, integrity and quality ● Provides a simple and convenient solution 8 ● Contact Eaton’s Breaker Service Center: 1-877-BRK-SRVC. 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Contact: 1-800-OLD-UNIT. 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-5 3 1 2 3 4 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers QUICKLAG and Eaton Miniature Circuit Breaker Replacement Guide QUICKLAG and Eaton Plug-In Industrial Circuit Breakers—Dimensions in Inches Maximum Amperes Description 150A 125A 100A 30A HQP QPHW QHPX QHPW Width: 1.00 Height: 2.94 Depth: 2.38 Width: 1.00 Height: 2.94 Depth: 2.38 Width: 1.00 Height: 2.94 Depth: 2.38 Width: 1.00 Height: 2.94 Depth: 2.38 No previous circuit breaker existed QHPL QHP Current Design These circuit breakers replace the out-of-production circuit breakers listed below. 5 6 7 Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers 8 These circuit breakers are no longer manufactured. Recommended QUICKLAG circuit breakers listed above. 9 QUICKLAG Bolt-On Industrial Circuit Breakers—Dimensions in Inches 10 11 HQNPL, HQNPAL, HQNP, QPH HQNPA, QP, QPA, QPAH, QNPL, QNPAL, QNP, Type P, PL Maximum Amperes Description 150A 125A 100A 30A BAB QBHW HBAX HBAW Width: 1.00 Height: 2.94 Depth: 2.38 Width: 1.00 Height: 2.94 Depth: 2.38 Width: 1.00 Height: 2.94 Depth: 2.38 Width: 1.00 Height: 2.94 Depth: 2.38 QBH No previous circuit breaker existed HBA Current Design These circuit breakers replace the out-of-production circuit breakers listed below. 12 13 14 15 16 Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers These circuit breakers are no longer manufactured. Recommended QUICKLAG circuit breakers listed above. HQNB, HQNBA, QB, BA, QNBL, QNBAL 17 QUICKLAG and Eaton Cable-In/Cable-Out Industrial Circuit Breakers—Dimensions in Inches 18 Description 19 20 Maximum Amperes 60A 100A 100A 100A 30A 40A QC QCHW QHCX QHCW WMZ/FAZ Width: 1.00 Height: 3.75 Depth: 2.44 Width: 1.00 Height: 3.75 Depth: 2.44 Width: 1.00 Height: 3.75 Depth: 2.44 Width: 1.00 Height: 3.75 Depth: 2.44 Width: 0.70 Height: 4.10 Depth: 2.60 HQCL, HQCAL, HQC, HQCA, QCA QCH No previous circuit breaker existed QHCL, QHC WMT Current Design These circuit breakers replace the out-of-production circuit breakers listed below. QCR QCF 21 22 23 Width: 0.50 Height: 3.94 Depth: 2.44 Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers 24 These circuit breakers are no longer manufactured. Recommended QUICKLAG circuit breakers listed above. 25 Note: For supplementary protectors, the Eaton WMZS and FAZ Series replace the WMS supplementary protectors that are no longer manufactured. V12-T3-6 No previous circuit breaker existed Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers QUICKLAG Miniature Circuit Breakers QUICKLAG is the largest and most complete family of industrial thermal-magnetic miniature circuit breakers. They provide the exclusive features of steel frame calibration and arc chutes in every pole. with larger Westinghouse/ Cutler-Hammer current limiting circuit breakers. QUICKLAG circuit breakers are provided in ranges from 5 to 125A continuous in single-, two- and three-pole configurations with interrupting capacities from 10,000 AIC to 65,000 AIC. QUICKLAG circuit breakers have been series rated up to 200,000 AIC in conjunction Each QUICKLAG rating is available for plug-in (Type P), bolt-on (Type B) and cable-tocable connections (Type C) for line/load feed applications. They are also available with one of the industry’s widest selection of accessories, including shunt trip, and can be custom modified to meet special application requirements. 1 2 3 4 5 Circuit Breaker Selection Guide Circuit Breaker Type Circuit Breaker Type Code Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C No. of Poles Volts AC DC Federal Spec. W-C-375b HQP P 5–70 1 120/240 24, 48, 80 10a, 11a, 12a 6 UL Listed Interrupting Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes DC 1 AC Ratings Volts 120 120/240 240 24 48 80 — 10,000 — 5000 5000 2000 HQP P 10–125 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 10a, 12a — 10,000 — 5000 5000 5000 HQP P 10–100 2, 3 240 — 10b, 11b, 12b — — 10,000 — — — QPHW P 15–70 1 120/240 24, 48, 80 14a — 22,000 — 5000 5000 2000 QPHW P 15–125 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 14a — 22,000 — 5000 5000 5000 QPHW P 15–100 2, 3 240 — 14b — — 22,000 — — — QHPX P 15–70 1 120/240 24, 48, 80 — — 42,000 — 5000 5000 2000 QHPX P 15–100 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 — — 42,000 — 5000 5000 5000 QHPX P 15–100 3 240 — — — — 42,000 — — — QHPW P 15–30 1 120/240 24, 48, 80 15a — 65,000 — 5000 5000 2000 QHPW P 15–30 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 15a — 65,000 — 5000 5000 5000 QHPW P 15–30 3 240 — 15b — — 65,000 — — — QPGF P, GF 15–30 1 120 — 10a, 11a, 12a 10,000 — — — — — QPGF P, GF 15–50 2 120/240 — 10a, 11a, 12a — 10,000 — — — — QPHGF P, GF 15–30 1 120 — 10a, 11a, 12a 22,000 — — — — — QPHGF P, GF 15–50 2 120/240 — 10a, 11a, 12a — 22,000 — — — — QPGFEP P, GFEP 15–30 1 120 — — 10,000 — — — — — QPGFEP P, GFEP 15–50 2 120/240 — — — 10,000 — — — — QPHGFEP P, GFEP 15–30 1 120 — — 22,000 — — — — — QPHGFEP P, GFEP 15–30 2 120/240 — — 22,000 — — — — — BAB B 5–70 1 120/240 24, 48, 80 10a, 11a, 12a — 10,000 — 5000 5000 2000 BAB B 10–125 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 10a, 12a — 10,000 — 5000 5000 5000 BAB B 10–100 2, 3 240 — 10b, 11b, 12b — — 10,000 — — — QBHW B 15–70 1 120/240 24, 48, 80 14a — 22,000 — 5000 5000 2000 QBHW B 15–125 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 14a — 22,000 — 5000 5000 5000 QBHW B 15–100 2, 3 240 — 14b — — 22,000 — — — HBAX B 15–70 1 120/240 24, 48, 80 — — 42,000 — 5000 5000 2000 HBAX B 15–100 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 — — 42,000 — 5000 5000 5000 HBAX B 15–100 3 240 — — — — 42,000 — — — HBAW B 15–30 1 120/240 24, 48, 80 15a — 65,000 — 5000 5000 2000 HBAW B 15–30 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 15a — 65,000 — 5000 5000 5000 HBAW B 15–30 3 240 — 15b — — 65,000 — — — QBGF B, GF 15–30 1 120 — 10a, 11a, 12a 10,000 — — — — — QBGF B, GF 15–50 2 120/240 — 10a, 11a, 12a — 10,000 — — — — Notes 1 Two-pole DC interrupting rating based on two poles connected in series. Circuit breaker type codes: P Plug-in; B Bolt-on; C Cable-in/Cable-out; GF Ground Fault, 5 mA; GFEP Ground Fault, 30 mA. 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-7 3 1 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Circuit Breaker Selection Guide, continued UL Listed Interrupting Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes Circuit Breaker Type Circuit Breaker Type Code Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C No. of Poles Volts AC DC Federal Spec. W-C-375b 120 120/240 240 24 48 QBHGF B, GF 15–30 1 120 — 10a, 11a, 12a 22,000 — — — — — 3 QBHGF B, GF 15–30 2 120/240 — 10a, 11a, 12a — 22,000 — — — — QBGFEP B, GFEP 15–30 1 120 — — 10,000 — — — — — 4 QBGFEP B, GFEP 15–50 2 120/240 — — — 10,000 — — — — QBHGFEP B, GFEP 15–30 1 120 — — 22,000 — — — — — 2 5 DC 1 AC Ratings Volts 80 QBHGFEP B, GFEP 15–30 2 120/240 — — 22,000 — — — — — QC C 5–70 1 120/240 24, 48, 80 10a, 11a, 12a — 10,000 — 5000 5000 2000 6 QC C 10–100 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 10a, 12a — 10,000 — 5000 5000 5000 QC C 10–100 2, 3 240 — 10b, 11b, 12b — — 10,000 — — — 7 QC C 15–100 4 240 — 10b, 11b, 12b — — 10,000 — — — QCF C 10–60 1, 2 120/240 — — 10,000 10,000 — — — — 8 QCR C 10–60 1, 2 120/240 — — 10,000 10,000 — — — — QCHW C 15–70 1 120/240 24, 48, 80 14a — 22,000 — 5000 5000 2000 9 QCHW C 15–100 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 14a — 22,000 — 5000 5000 5000 QCHW C 15–100 2, 3 240 — 14b — — 22,000 — — — 10 QHCX C 15–70 1 120/240 24, 48, 80 — — 42,000 — 5000 5000 2000 QHCX C 15–100 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 — — 42,000 — 5000 5000 5000 QHCX C 15–100 3 240 — — — — 42,000 — — — QHCW C 15–30 1 120/240 24, 48, 80 15a — 65,000 — 5000 5000 2000 QHCW C 15–30 2 120/240 24, 48, 80 15a — 65,000 — 5000 5000 5000 QHCW C 15–30 3 240 — 15b — — 65,000 — — — QCGF C, GF 15–30 1 120 — — 10,000 — — — — — QCGF C, GF 15–50 2 120/240 — — 10,000 10,000 — — — — QCHGF C, GF 15–30 1 120 — — 22,000 — — — — — QCHGF C, GF 15–30 2 120/240 — — 22,000 22,000 — — — — QCGFEP C, GFEP 15–30 1 120 — — 10,000 — — — — — 15 QCGFEP C, GFEP 15–30 2 120/240 — — 10,000 10,000 — — — — QCHGFEP C, GFEP 15–30 1 120 — — 22,000 — — — — — 16 QCHGFEP C, GFEP 15–30 2 120/240 — — 22,000 22,000 — — — — 17 Notes 1 Two-pole DC interrupting rating based on two poles connected in series. Circuit breaker type codes: P Plug-in; B Bolt-on; C Cable-in/Cable-out; GF Ground Fault, 5 mA; GFEP Ground Fault, 30 mA. 11 12 13 14 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-8 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com Molded-Case Circuit Breakers CHB Circuit Breaker CHB Mounting Bases Originally a Cutler-Hammer Product Description The CHB breaker continues to be available as a replacement breaker for use in Cutler-Hammer Type PB panelboards. 15–50A When combined with the mounting base, CHB breakers were also used for surface and DIN rail mount cable-in/cable-out applications. (See photo below.) For “new” cable-in/ cable-out applications, Eaton recommends the use of our most current product offering: ● ● ● QUICKLAG Type QC breakers (1.00-inch per pole) QCR breakers—rear mount (0.50-inch per pole) QCF breakers—front mount (0.50-inch per pole) 3 Catalog Number 1 Single-pole CHB9L1 2 15–50A Two-pole CHB9L250 15–50A Three-pole CHB9L350 3 25–50A Single-pole CHB9H1 4 25–125A Two-pole CHB9H2125 25–100A Three-pole CHB9H3100 Low Ampere High Ampere 5 6 CHB Circuit Breaker Catalog Numbering System CHB 3 100 Bolt-on Circuit Breaker Poles 1-, 2- or 3- Ampere Rating 7 8 Accessories ST SW HID HM GF EPD H2 = = = = = = = Shunt-trip (requires extra pole space) Switched neutral application High intensity discharge lighting applications High magnetic trip Ground fault personnel protection Ground fault equipment protection 22,000 AIC (40, 50, 60A obsolete) 9 10 11 Replacement Capabilities QCR and QCF breakers provide a 50% space savings over 1.00-inch per pole designs of the same rating. 12 13 14 15 Single-Pole QUICKLAG Type QC Cable-In/ Cable-out Breaker—1.00 Inch per Pole Single-Pole Two-Pole Type QCF Cable-In/Cable-Out Breaker —0.50 Inch per Pole (Front-Connected) Single-Pole Two-Pole Type QCR Cable-In/Cable-Out Breaker —0.50 Inch per Pole (Rear-Connected) 16 17 18 19 CHB Breaker Mounting Base 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-9 3 1 2 3 4 5 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Series C Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Replacement Guide Series C Industrial Circuit Breakers—Dimensions in Inches (Per Three-Pole Breaker) Maximum Amperes Description 100A 8 9 10 11 12 13 225A 100A 100A EG GD ED, EDH, EDC EHD FDB, FD, HFD, FDC Width: 3.00 Height: 4.88 Depth: 2.94 Width: 3.00 Height: 4.88 Depth: 2.81 Width: 4.13 Height: 6.00 Depth: 3.38 Width: 4.13 Height: 6.00 Depth: 3.38 Width: 4.13 Height: 6.00 Depth: 3.38 EB 1 No previous circuit breaker existed EHB 1 FB 1, HFB Width: 4.13 Height: 6.00 Depth: 3.38 Width: 4.13 Height: 6.00 Depth: 3.38 FA, HFA Series C circuit breakers are the current GHC offering and, as such, are a logical first choice when upgrading or retrofitting equipment. All circuit breakers listed in a column are ELECTRICALLY INTERCHANGEABLE. 6 7 100A/125A Current Design Replacement Circuit Breakers These new UL labeled circuit breakers continue to be manufactured and are primarily applied to achieve exact physical and electrical replacement of previously installed Cutler-Hammer/ Westinghouse circuit breakers of the same style number and rating. Width: 4.13 Height: 6.00 Depth: 3.38 Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers These circuit breakers are no longer manufactured. *Indicates the last date of manufacture. As an option, any of these circuit breakers can be reconditioned at the original factory. For details, see Page V12-T3-5, or contact your local Eaton Field Sales office. E, EA QCC EH *1974 * 1968 * 1974 * 1974 Width: 4.13 Height: 6.00 Depth: 3.38 Width: 4.50 Height: 7.00 Depth: 3.38 Width: 4.13 Height: 6.50 Depth: 3.38 Width: 4.13 Height: 6.50 Depth: 3.38 CA, CAH, HCA 1 F, HF G 1974 1965 Width: 4.13 Height: 9.38 Depth: 4.06 Width: 8.25 Height: 9.38 Depth: 4.06 14 15 Width: 4.13 Height: 6.50 Depth: 2.69 16 17 Out-of-Production Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breakers Last Manufactured by Eaton in 1994 FS EC, EHC FS, FH, FC, HFC Width: 4.13 Height: 6.13 Depth: 3.38 Width: 4.13 Height: 6.13 Depth: 3.19 18 19 20 FL 21 22 Width: 4.13 Height: 9.31 Depth: 3.19 23 24 Note 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167. 25 V12-T3-10 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Series C Industrial Circuit Breakers—Dimensions in Inches (Per Three-Pole Breaker), Continued 1 Maximum Amperes 150A 225A, 250A 400A 600A 2 Current Design FDB, FD, HFD, FDC JG JD, HJD, JDC 250A JDB 250A DK 1 KD, HKD, KDC 1 KDB LG LD, HLD, LDB 3 4 5 Width: 4.13 Height: 6.00 Depth: 3.38 Width: 4.13 Height: 10.00 Depth: 4.06 Width: 4.13 Height: 10.00 Depth: 4.06 Width: 5.50 Height: 10.13 Depth: 4.06 Width: 5.50 Height: 10.13 Depth: 4.06 Width: 5.50 Height: 10.13 Depth: 4.06 Width: 8.25 Height: 10.75 Depth: 4.06 KB 2, HKB 2 JB 2 DA 2 LB 2, HLB 1 LBB 2 LC 2, HLC 250A 250A Width: 4.13 Height: 10.00 Depth: 4.06 Width: 4.13 Height: 10.00 Depth: 4.06 KA 2, HKA 2 JA 2 225A 225A Width: 5.50 Height: 10.13 Depth: 4.06 Width: 5.50 Height: 10.13 Depth: 4.06 6 7 Replacement Circuit Breakers FB 2, HFB Width: 4.13 Height: 6.00 Depth: 3.38 8 Width: 5.50 Height: 10.13 Depth: 4.06 Width: 5.50 Height: 10.13 Depth: 4.06 Width: 5.50 Height: 10.13 Depth: 4.06 Width: 8.25 Height: 10.75 Depth: 4.06 LA 2, HLA LAB 2 LA 2, HLA 9 10 11 Width: 8.25 Height: 10.75 Depth: 4.06 Width: 8.25 Height: 10.75 Depth: 4.06 12 Width: 8.25 Height: 10.75 Depth: 4.06 13 Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers FA, HFA JK J 225A JKL L, LM, HLM 14 225A *1974 Width: 4.13 Height: 6.50 Depth: 3.38 *Indicates the last date of manufacture. *1967 *1967 *1967 Width: 8.25 Height: 10.75 Depth: 4.06 Width: 8.25 Height: 10.13 Depth: 4.06 Width: 8.25 Height: 10.75 Depth: 4.06 K, HK 15 16 *1967 Width: 8.25 Height: 22.00 Depth: 5.50 KL, HKL 225A 17 SPCB 600A, SCB 600A *1986 (Consult Eaton) *1967 *1967 Width: 8.25 Height: 15.50 Depth: 4.06 Width: 8.25 Height: 5.75 Depth: 4.06 Width: 8.25 Height: 10.75 Depth: 4.06 JS, JH, JL JS KS-D, KS KS-D, KH-D, KS, KH KS-D, KH-D, KS, KH 19 20 Out-of-Production Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breakers Last Manufactured by Eaton in 1994 FS, FH, FC, HFC 18 LS(E), LH(E), LS(A), LH(A) 21 22 Width: 4.25 Height: 6.13 Depth: 3.19 Width: 4.25 Height: 12.00 Depth: 3.81 Width: 4.25 Height: 12.00 Depth: 3.81 Width: 5.50 Height: 10.13 Depth: 3.81 Notes 1 When upgrading a HLB, LBB to a Series C K-Frame in a panelboard application, also order TAD3 spacer kit. Width: 5.50 Height: 10.13 Depth: 3.81 2 Width: 5.50 Height: 10.13 Depth: 3.81 23 Width: 8.25 Height: 10.75 Depth: 3.81 24 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-11 25 3 1 2 3 4 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Series C Industrial Circuit Breakers—Dimensions in Inches (Per Three-Pole Breaker), Continued Maximum Amperes Description 1200A 1600A/2000A/2500A 1 NG ND, HND, NDC NG ND, HND, NDC RG RD Width: 8.25 Height: 16.00 Depth: 5.50 Width: 8.25 Height: 16.00 Depth: 5.50 Width: 15.50 Height: 16.00 Depth: 9.75 MA 2, HMA and MC 2, MCC 2 SELTRONIC™ 2 NC 2, HNC and NB 2, HNB PC, PCC PB Width: 8.25 Height: 16.00 Depth: 4.06 Width: 8.25 Height: 16.00 Depth: 5.50 Width: 12.06 Height: 22.06 Depth: 9.06 Width: 12.06 Height: 22.06 Depth: 9.06 LM, HLM and M MA, HMA 800A Current Design Series C circuit breakers are the MDL, HMDL current offering and, as such, are a logical first choice when upgrading or retrofitting equipment. All circuit breakers listed in a column are ELECTRICALLY INTERCHANGEABLE. 5 6 7 8 9 10 Width: 8.25 Height: 16.00 Depth: 4.06 Replacement Circuit Breakers These new UL labeled circuit MA 2, HMA, MD 2, MDS 2 and MC 2 breakers continue to be manufactured and are primarily applied to achieve exact physical and electrical replacement of previously installed Cutler-Hammer/ Westinghouse circuit breakers of the same style number and rating. PB/PC breakers are not UL Listed. 11 12 13 14 15 Width: 8.25 Height: 16.00 Depth: 4.06 Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers These circuit breakers are LM, HLM and M no longer manufactured. *Indicates the last date of manufacture. As an option, any of these circuit breakers can be reconditioned at the original factory. For details, see Page V12-T3-5, or contact your local Eaton Field Sales office. MA, HLM PA 1200A 16 *1967 *1967 *1968 *1967 *1974 17 Width: 8.25 Height: 22.00 Depth: 5.50 Width: 8.25 Height: 22.00 Depth: 5.50 Width: 8.25 Height: 16.00 Depth: 5.50 Width: 8.25 Height: 22.00 Depth: 5.50 Width: 12.00 Height: 22.00 Depth: 9.06 18 19 SPCB 1200A, SCB 1200A *1986 (Consult Eaton) Width: 8.25 Height: 16.00 Depth: 5.50 SPCB 2000–3000A, SCB 2000–3000A *1986 (Consult Eaton) Width: 12.06 Height: 22.06 Depth: 9.06 Out-of-Production Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breakers Last Manufactured by Eaton in 1994 20 MS, MH NS, NH Width: 8.25 Height: 16.00 Depth: 4.06 Width: 8.25 Height: 16.00 Depth: 5.50 No equivalent Cutler-Hammer brand frame size existed No equivalent Cutler-Hammer brand frame size existed 21 22 23 24 25 Notes 1 RD breaker replaces PC, PCC and PB breakers for 2000 and 2500A only. V12-T3-12 2 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Current Limiting Circuit Breakers—Dimensions in Inches (Per Three-Pole Breaker) 1 Maximum Amperes Description 100A 250A 400A 100A 225A FCL Current Limit-R (non-fused) LCL Current Limit-R (non-fused) LCL Current Limit-R (non-fused) FB TRI-PAC® (fused) LA TRI-PAC (fused) 2 Current Design All circuit breakers listed in a column are ELECTRICALLY INTERCHANGEABLE. 3 4 5 6 Width: 4.13 Height: 8.75 Depth: 3.38 Width: 8.25 Height: 16.00 Depth: 4.06 Width: 8.25 Height: 16.00 Depth: 4.06 Width: 4.13 Height: 8.75 Depth: 3.50 7 Width: 8.25 Height: 16.00 Depth: 4.75 8 Replacement Circuit Breakers 9 These new UL labeled circuit breakers continue to be manufactured and are primarily applied to achieve exact physical and electrical replacement of previously installed Cutler-Hammer/ Westinghouse circuit breakers of the same style number and rating. 10 11 Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers These circuit breakers are no longer manufactured. *Indicates the last date of manufacture. As an option, any of these circuit breakers can be reconditioned at the original factory. For details, see Page V12-T3-5, or contact your local Eaton Field Sales office. FA TRI-PAC F TRI-PAC K TRI-PAC 12 13 14 15 *1968 *1968 Width: 4.13 Height: 9.38 Depth: 3.19 Width: 4.63 Width: 8.25 Height: 11.81 Height: 19.63 Depth: 3.81 Depth: 4.06 *1968 16 17 Out-of-Production Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breakers Last Manufactured by Eaton in 1994 No Equivalent Cutler-Hammer Brand Frame Sizes Existed 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-13 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers 1 Current Limiting Circuit Breakers—Dimensions in Inches (Per Three-Pole Breaker) 2 Description 3 All circuit breakers listed in a column are ELECTRICALLY INTERCHANGEABLE. Maximum Amperes 400A 800A 1600A LA TRI-PAC® (Fused) NB TRI-PAC (Fused) PB TRI-PAC (Fused) Width: 8.25 Height: 16.00 Depth: 4.75 Width: 8.25 Height: 22.00 Depth: 5.50 Width: 12.06 Height: 22.13 Depth: 9.06 L TRI-PAC MA TRI-PAC PA TRI-PAC *1968 *1968 *1968 *1968 Width: 8.25 Height: 19.63 Depth: 4.06 Width: 8.25 Height: 26.91 Depth: 5.50 Width: 8.25 Height: 22.00 Depth: 5.50 Width: 12.00 Height: 22.00 Depth: 9.06 Current Design 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Replacement Circuit Breakers These new UL labeled circuit breakers continue to be manufactured and are primarily applied to achieve exact physical and electrical replacement of previously installed Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse circuit breakers of the same style number and rating. Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers These circuit breakers are no longer manufactured. KL *Indicates the last date of manufacture. As an option, any TRI-PAC of these circuit breakers can be reconditioned at the original factory. For details, see Page V12-T3-5, or contact your local Eaton Field Sales office. 14 15 16 17 18 Out-of-Production Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breakers Last Manufactured by Eaton in 1994 No equivalent Cutler-Hammer brand frame sizes existed 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-14 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities ■ Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 Type EB Single-, Two-, Three-Pole; 240 Vac Maximum; Thermal-Magnetic and Saf-T-Vue® 2 EB: 120, 240 Vac; 125/250 Vdc Two-Pole, 240 Vac, 125/250 Vdc 3 Three-Pole, 240 Vac, 125/250 Vdc 3 Standard Standard Standard Saf-T-Vue 4 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 15 EB1015 5 EB2015 EB3015 EB3015S 20 EB1020 5 EB2020 EB3020 EB3020S 25 EB1025 EB2025 EB3025 EB3025S 30 EB1030 EB2030 EB3030 EB3030S 35 EB1035 EB2035 EB3035 EB3035S 40 EB1040 EB2040 EB3040 EB3040S 45 EB1045 EB2045 EB3045 EB3045S 50 EB1050 EB2050 EB3050 EB3050S 60 EB1060 EB2060 EB3060 EB3060S 70 EB1070 EB2070 EB3070 EB3070S 80 EB1080 EB2080 EB3080 EB3080S 90 EB1090 EB2090 EB3090 EB3090S 100 EB1100 EB2100 EB3100 EB3100S Approximate shipping weight is 2 lbs Approximate shipping weight is 3 lbs Approximate shipping weight is 4.5 lbs Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C EHB: 277, 480 Vac; 250 Vdc 1 Single-Pole, 120 Vac, 125 Vdc 3 3 4 5 6 7 8 Type EHB Single-, Two-, Three-Pole; 480 Vac Maximum; Thermal-Magnetic and Saf-T-Vue 2 Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 2 Single-Pole, 277 Vac, 125 Vdc 3 Two-Pole, 480 Vac, 250 Vdc 3 Three-Pole, 480 Vac Standard Standard Standard Saf-T-Vue 4 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 15 EHB1015 6 EHB2015 EHB3015 EHB3015S 20 EHB1020 6 EHB2020 EHB3020 EHB3020S 25 EHB1025 EHB2025 EHB3025 EHB3025S 30 EHB1030 EHB2030 EHB3030 EHB3030S 35 EHB1035 EHB2035 EHB3035 EHB3035S 40 EHB1040 EHB2040 EHB3040 EHB3040S 45 EHB1045 EHB2045 EHB3045 EHB3045S 50 EHB1050 EHB2050 EHB3050 EHB3050S 60 EHB1060 EHB2060 EHB3060 EHB3060S 70 EHB1070 EHB2070 EHB3070 EHB3070S 80 EHB1080 EHB2080 EHB3080 EHB3080S 90 EHB1090 EHB2090 EHB3090 EHB3090S 100 EHB1100 EHB2100 EHB3100 EHB3100S Approximate shipping weight is 2 lbs Approximate shipping weight is 3 lbs Approximate shipping weight is 4.5 lbs 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Amperes 18 120 and 240 AC 10,000 asymmetrical, symmetrical 19 125/250 DC 5000 3 UL Listed Interrupting Ratings 7 Maximum Volts EB Breakers 20 EHB, FB Breakers 240 AC 20,000 asymmetrical, 18,000 symmetrical 277 AC (EHB) 15,000 asymmetrical, 14,000 symmetrical 480 AC 15,000 asymmetrical, 14,000 symmetrical 600 AC (FB) 15,000 asymmetrical, 14,000 symmetrical 250 DC 10,000 3 21 22 Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167. 2 Includes load terminals only. 3 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. 4 Not UL Listed. 5 Switching duty rated for 120 Vac fluorescent light applications only. 6 Switching duty rated for 277 Vac fluorescent light applications only. 7 Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to molded-case switches. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 23 24 25 V12-T3-15 3 1 2 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities ■ Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 Type FB, HFB Single-, Two-, Three-, Four-Pole; 480V Max.; Thermal-Magnetic MARK 75® Saf-T-Vue FB, HFB: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Single-Pole 277 Vac; 125 Vdc 2 Two-Pole 600 Vac; 250 Vdc 2 Four-Pole 34 600 Vac Three-Pole 600 Vac MARK 75 5 Standard MARK 75 6 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 15 HFB1015 8 FB2015 HFB2015 FB3015 FB3015S HFB3015L FB4015 20 HFB1020 8 FB2020 HFB2020 FB3020 FB3020S HFB3020L FB4020 25 HFB1025 FB2025 HFB2025 FB3025 FB3025S HFB3025L FB4025 30 HFB1030 FB2030 HFB2030 FB3030 FB3030S HFB3030L FB4030 35 HFB1035 FB2035 HFB2035 FB3035 FB3035S HFB3035L FB4035 40 HFB1040 FB2040 HFB2040 FB3040 FB3040S HFB3040L FB4040 45 HFB1045 FB2045 HFB2045 FB3045 FB3045S HFB3045L FB4045 50 HFB1050 FB2050 HFB2050 FB3050 FB3050S HFB3050L FB4050 7 60 HFB1060 FB2060 HFB2060 FB3060 FB3060S HFB3060L FB4060 70 HFB1070 FB2070 HFB2070 FB3070 FB3070S HFB3070L FB4070 8 80 HFB1080 FB2080 HFB2080 FB3080 FB3080S HFB3080L FB4080 90 HFB1090 FB2090 HFB2090 FB3090 FB3090S HFB3090L FB4090 100 HFB1100 FB2100 HFB2100 FB3100 FB3100S HFB3100L FB4100 110 — — — FB3110 FB3110S HFB3110 — 125 — — — FB3125 FB3125S HFB3125 — 150 — — — FB3150 FB3150S HFB3150 — 3 4 5 6 9 10 Standard Saf-T-Vue 6 MARK 75 7 Standard UL Listed Interrupting Ratings 9 11 Maximum Volts Amperes MARK 75 Type HFB 12 240 AC 13 14 75,000 asymmetrical, 65,000 symmetrical 277 AC 6 75,000 asymmetrical, 65,000 symmetrical 480 AC 30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical 250 DC (two-pole) 20,000 2j Special Breakers Type FB, Magnetic Only, Front Adjustable 15 Continuous Ampere Rating Two-Pole, 600 Vac Three-Pole, 600 Vac Magnetic Trip Range Amperes Catalog/Style Number Catalog/Style Number Catalog/Style Number Catalog/Style Number Catalog/Style Number 3 7–22 FB2022MRL HFB2022ML FB3022MRL FB3022SMRL HFB3022ML 5 15–45 FB2045MRL HFB2045ML FB3045MRL FB3045SMRL HFB3045ML 10 35–110 FB2110MRL HFB2110ML FB3110MRL FB3110SMRL HFB3110ML 25 32–80 2610D53G12 4994D96G12 2610D53G30 4998D89G30 2610D57G30 18 25 66–190 FB2190MRL HFB2190ML FB3190MRL FB3190SMRL HFB3190ML 30 50–150 1268C14G05 — 1268C14G06 — — 19 30 90–270 FB2270MRL HFB2270ML FB3270MRL FB3270SMRL HFB3270ML 50 66–190 1268C14G01 — 1268C14G02 — — 50 160–480 FB2480MRL HFB2480ML FB3480MRL FB3480SMRL HFB3480ML 70 100–270 2610D53G13 4994D96G13 2610D53G31 2610D58G31 4994D96G31 100 150–480 1268C14G03 — 1268C14G04 81E4647 65E4667 100 450–1550 FB21550MRL HFB21550ML FB31550MRL FB31550SMRL HFB31550ML 16 17 20 21 Standard MARK 75 Standard Saf-T-Vue MARK 75 7 Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167. 2 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. 3 Not UL Listed. 4 All four poles have thermal-magnetic trip elements. Can be supplied with three protected poles and one unprotected, non-automatic pole if required. Order by description with no price or dimensional differences. 5 15–30A rated 75,000 AIC. 40–100A rated 30,000A asymmetrical, 25,000A symmetrical. 6 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole. 7 Includes line and load terminals. MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002. 8 Switching duty rated for 277 Vac fluorescent light applications only. 9 Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to molded-case switches. j Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed. 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-16 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Accessories and Modifications Terminals Breakers include load terminals only. Terminals are UL Listed as suitable for wire type and size. When used with aluminum conductors, use joint compound. When line terminals are required, order by style number from the table at no charge with the breaker. Note: Magnetic only breakers include both line and load terminals. Note: Suffix “L” on catalog number indicates line and load terminals included. If factory installation is required, specify on order. Terminals Maximum Amperes Wire Type Wire Range Package of Three Line Terminals 1 Style Number Standard Pressure Type Terminals 20 (EB, EHB) Al/Cu #14–#10 624B100G14 100 Al/Cu #14–1/0 624B100G02 150 Al/Cu # 4–4/0 624B100G17 Al/Cu #14–#4 624B100G10 100 Al/Cu # 4–4/0 624B100G17 Terminal Style 624B100G02 Terminal Style 624B100G17 Collar Collar Nut Clip Conductor Insert collar enclosing conductor as shown. Locate nut on top of conductor and tighten securely with screw and washer. Caution: Collar must surround conductor. Terminal Style 624B100G10 Conductor LFB3070R 4 80–150 LFB3150R 5 Terminal Style 624B100G14 Collar Conductor Screw Washer Screw Assemble collar on top of conductor as shown. Tighten securely with screw and washer. Conductor Wire Clamp Assemble wire clamp to bottom of conductor as shown. For Magnetic Only Breakers 36 3 LFB3003MR 5 LFB3005MR 10 LFB3010MR 25 LFB3025MR 30 LFB3030MR LFB3050MR 70 LFB3070MR Federal Specification Classifications EB, EHB, FB and HFB breakers meet requirements of Federal Specification W-C-375b as follows: 100 LFB3100MR 150 LFB3150MR Notes 1 Style listed is for package of three terminals. 2 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the crossreference on Pages V12-T3-114– V12-T3-167. 3 Ratings through 70A can be supplied with terminals for Cu cable only (#14–#2). Order by description. 4 Superseded by LFD3070R. 5 Superseded by LFD3150R. 6 Replace with Series C HMCP and ELC current limiters or replace with MCP and EL current limiters ● ● ● 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 Note: Not UL Listed. ● 50 6 Available in all standard ratings of EB, EHB, FB and HFB breakers up to ratings of 100A. Factory adder 20%. Limiter Catalog Number 15–70 Note: Not UL Listed. Ambient Compensating Breakers To order, add suffix letter “A” to standard thermalmagnetic breaker catalog number. LFB Current Limiter Attachment 2 Insert collar enclosing conductor and center on extrusion on collar. Install clip with legs on top of conductor and snap end around bottom of collar. 1 Note: Not UL Listed. For Thermal-Magnetic Breakers 3 Extrusion Special Calibrations Special calibration price additions apply to ampere ratings not listed as standard or for ambients other than 40°C or 50°C. For frequencies other than 0–60 Hz AC, refer to Eaton. See Application Data 29-160 for information regarding special conditions. Maximum calibration for 400 Hz is 135A. 50°C Calibration Add suffix “V” to catalog number for complete breaker, listed above, when ordering breakers to be used in 50°C ambients. Note: Cannot be used with plug-in adapters. Ratings through 70A can be supplied with terminals for Cu cable only (#14–#2). Order by description. Breaker Rating, Amperes Washer Screw LFB Current Limiter Attachment The LFB current limiter is an attachment that bolts to the load end of a standard FB thermal-magnetic or magnetic only breaker, providing 200,000A interrupting capacity (AIC) at up to 600 Vac. Limiters for thermal-magnetic breakers are UL Listed. Current limiters must be applied as indicated in the table on Page V12-T3-16. Standard LFB terminals are suitable for Cu/AI cable. Ratings through 70A accept (1) #14–#2, and 100 and 150A accept (1) #1–4/0. Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals 50 ■ Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. EB: single-pole, Class 11a; two-, three-pole, Classes 10b, 11b, 12b EHB: single-pole, Class 13a; two-, three-pole, Class 13b FB: two-, three-pole, Class 18a HFB: single-pole, Class 13a; two-, three-pole, Class 22a For all three-phase delta, grounded B phase applications, contact Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center at 1-800-356-1243. 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-17 3 1 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Type CCV 120/240V Tenant Main Circuit Breaker 10,000A and 25,000A Interrupting Capacity, 100–225A Interrupting Capacity at 120/240 Vac ● Type CCV—10,000A rms symmetrical ● Type CCVH—25,000A rms symmetrical 2 3 4 Handles ● Trip-free with “ONTRIPPED-OFF” positions. Reset past “OFF” is required to latch breaker contacts after tripping 5 6 Type CCV Two-Pole 120/240V Tenant Main Circuit Breaker 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Product Description Ratings ● 120/240 Vac, two-pole, through 225 continuous amperes, calibrated at 40ºC Tripping Characteristics ● Thermal-magnetic trip, calibrated and sealed after assembly. Indirectly heated thermal tripping bimetal elements Terminals ● Standard lugs (wire connectors) suitable for either CU or AL wire Standards ● Complies with UL Standard 489, breakers are listed under UL File #E781 Backward Compatibility ● CCV and CCVH retains same profile and footprint of the CC and CCH breaker allowing use in the same applications Product Selection Ampere Rating Two-Pole Breaker Wire Size Range, Al/Cu 10,000 AIC 25,000 AIC 100 #2/0–300 kcmil CCV2100 CCVH2100 125 #2/0–300 kcmil CCV2125 CCVH2125 150 #2/0–300 kcmil CCV2150 CCVH2150 16 175 #2/0–300 kcmil CCV2175 CCVH2175 200 #2/0–300 kcmil CCV2200 CCVH2200 17 225 #2/0–300 kcmil CCV2225 CCVH2225 15 Terminal Options Terminal configurations available by adding the following designator on the suffix: W = No terminals X = Load side terminals only Y = Line side terminals only CCV as tenant main breaker with CC as aftermarket option. Cross-Reference CCV Catalog Number CC Catalog Number CCV Catalog Number CCV2100 CC2100 CCVH2100 CCH2100 CCV2100W CC2100W CCVH2100W CCH2100W CCV2100X CC2100X CCVH2100X CCH2100X CCV2100Y CC2100Y CCVH2100Y CCH2100Y CCV2125 CC2125 CCVH2125 CCH2125 CCV2125W CC2125W CCVH2125W CCH2125W CCV2125X CC2125X CCVH2125X CCH2125X CCV2125Y CC2125Y CCVH2125Y CCH2125Y CCV2150 CC2150 CCVH2150 CCH2150 CCV2150W CC2150W CCVH2150W CCH2150W CCV2150X CC2150X CCVH2150X CCH2150X CCV2150Y CC2150Y CCVH2150Y CCH2150Y CCV2175 CC2175 CCVH2175 CCH2175 CCV2175W CC2175W CCVH2175W CCH2175W CCV2175X CC2175X CCVH2175X CCH2175X CCV2175Y CC2175Y CCVH2175Y CCH2175Y CCV2200 CC2200 CCVH2200 CCH2200 CCV2200W CC2200W CCVH2200W CCH2200W CCV2200X CC2200X CCVH2200X CCH2200X CCV2200Y CC2200Y CCVH2200Y CCH2200Y CCV2225 CC2225 CCVH2225 CCH2225 CCV2225W CC2225W CCVH2225W CCH2225W CCV2225X CC2225X CCVH2225X CCH2225X CCV2225Y CC2225Y CCVH2225Y CCH2225Y 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-18 CC Catalog Number Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Type JB 1 ■ Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 Type JB 90–250A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Fixed Trip, Thermal-Magnetic, Saf-T-Vue JB: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc (Suitable for Reverse-Feed) Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Complete Breaker Includes Pressure Type Aluminum Terminals 2 2 Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes (Set on High Side, Adjustable to Lower Limits) Standard Saf-T-Vue 3 Standard Saf-T-Vue 3 Low High Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc Breaker Without Terminals 4 70 350 700 JB2070 JB2070S JB2070W JB2070SW 90 450 900 JB2090 JB2090S JB2090W JB2090SW 100 500 1000 JB2100 JB2100S JB2100W JB2100SW 125 625 1250 JB2125 JB2125S JB2125W JB2125SW 150 750 1500 JB2150 JB2150S JB2150W JB2150SW 175 875 1750 JB2175 JB2175S JB2175W JB2175SW 200 1000 2000 JB2200 JB2200S JB2200W JB2200SW 225 1125 2250 JB2225 JB2225S JB2225W JB2225SW 250 1250 2500 JB2250 JB2250S JB2250W JB2250SW Approx. shipping weight. 12 lbs Approx. shipping weight 12 lbs 70 350 700 JB3070 JB3070S JB3070W JB3070SW 90 450 900 JB3090 JB3090S JB3090W JB3090SW 100 500 1000 JB3100 JB3100S JB3100W JB3100SW 125 625 1250 JB3125 JB3125S JB3125W JB3125SW 150 750 1500 JB3150 JB3150S JB3150W JB3150SW 175 875 1750 JB3175 JB3175S JB3175W JB3175SW 200 1000 2000 JB3200 JB3200S JB3200W JB3200SW 225 1125 2250 JB3225 JB3225S JB3225W JB3225SW 250 1250 2500 JB3250 JB3250S JB3250W JB3250SW Approx. shipping weight 12 lbs 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 Magnetic Only Breakers, Front Adjustable 3 Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 4 9 Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only Approx. shipping weight 14 lbs 3 Breaker Only, No Terminals 5 Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes (Set on High Side, Adjustable to Lower Limits) Two-Pole 4 Standard Saf-T-Vue Standard Saf-T-Vue 16 Three-Pole Low High Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 250 350 700 JB2700MW JB2700SMW JB3700MW JB3700SMW 250 625 1250 JB21250MW JB21250SMW JB31250MW JB31250SMW 250 750 1500 JB21500MW JB21500SMW JB31500MW JB31500SMW 250 875 1750 JB21750MW JB21750SMW JB31750MW JB31750SMW 250 1125 2250 JB22250MW JB22250SMW JB32250MW JB32250SMW 250 1250 2500 JB22500MW JB22500SMW JB32500MW JB32500SMW Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167. 2 Terminals are shipped separately from breaker frame. 3 Not UL Listed. 4 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole. 5 Select desired terminal from table and order as separate item. 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-19 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities 1 UL Listed Interrupting Ratings 1 Accessories and Modifications Maximum Volts Amperes ■ 2 240 AC 30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical 480 AC 25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical 3 600 AC 15,000 asymmetrical, 14,000 symmetrical 250 DC 10,000 4 5 Terminals Maximum Amperes Catalog Number Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals 6 250 7 250 8 Number of Cables, Wire Range, Type (1) #4–350 kcmil Al/Cu TA250KB Optional Pressure Terminals (1) #4–350 kcmil Cu Note 1 Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed. 9 10 T250KB Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. Special Calibrations Special calibration price additions apply to ampere ratings not listed as standard or for ambients other than 40°C or 50°C. For frequencies other than 0–60 Hz AC, refer to Eaton. Note: Not UL Listed. 50°C Calibration Add suffix “V” to catalog number for complete breaker when ordering breakers to be used in 50°C ambients. Same price as standard 40°C breakers. For CSA®, see Page V12-T3-48. Type JB breakers meet requirements of Class 19a circuit breakers as defined by Federal Specification W-C-375b. 11 12 Note: Not UL Listed. UL Listed Interrupting Rating (see table) For all three-phase delta, grounded B phase applications, contact Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center at 1-800-356-1243. Terminals (see table) Two terminals are required per pole. Terminals are UL Listed for wire type and range listed left. When used with aluminum conductors, use joint compound. To order optional copper only terminals, add suffix “C” to complete breaker catalog number. Note: Terminals are shipped separately from breaker frame. Magnetic Only Breakers For description, refer to Application Data 29-160. Additional Accessories and Modifications Refer to Pages V12-T3-65– V12-T3-79. 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-20 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Types KB and HKB Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 Type KB and MARK 75 Type HKB 90–250A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip KB/MARK 75/HKB: Thermal-Magnetic, Saf-T-Vue 600 Vac; 250 Vdc ■ Magnetic Trip Setting Amperes 3 Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Low High Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 2 Complete Breaker Includes Pressure Type Aluminum Terminals 3 Frame Only Trip Unit Only Standard Catalog Number Saf-T-Vue 3 Catalog Number MARK 75 Catalog Number Standard Catalog Number Saf-T-Vue 4 Catalog Number MARK 75 Catalog Number Standard Saf-T-Vue MARK 75 Catalog Number 2 3 4 5 Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc 3 70 350 700 KB2070 KB2070S HKB2070 KB2250F KB2250FS HKB2250F HKB2070T 90 450 900 KB2090 KB2090S HKB2090 KB2250F KB2250FS HKB2250F HKB2090T 100 500 1000 KB2100 KB2100S HKB2100 KB2250F KB2250FS HKB2250F HKB2100T 125 625 1250 KB2125 KB2125S HKB2125 KB2250F KB2250FS HKB2250F HKB2125T 150 750 1500 KB2150 KB2150S HKB2150 KB2250F KB2250FS HKB2250F HKB2150T 175 875 1750 KB2175 KB2175S HKB2175 KB2250F KB2250FS HKB2250F HKB2175T 200 1000 2000 KB2200 KB2200S HKB2200 KB2250F KB2250FS HKB2250F HKB2200T 225 1125 2250 KB2225 KB2225S HKB2225 KB2250F KB2250FS HKB2250 HKB2225T 250 1250 2500 KB2250 KB2250S HKB2250 KB2250F KB2250FS HKB2250F HKB2250T Approx. shipping weight 12 lbs Approx. shipping weight 9 lbs 700 KB3070 KB3070S HKB3070 KB3250F KB3250FS HKB3250F HKB3070T 450 900 KB3090 KB3090S HKB3090 KB3250F KB3250FS HKB3250F HKB3090T 100 500 1000 KB3100 KB3100S HKB3100 KB3250F KB3250FS HKB3250F HKB3100T 125 625 1250 KB3125 KB3125S HKB3125 KB3250F KB3250FS HKB3250F HKB3125T 150 750 1500 KB3150 KB3150S HKB3150 KB3250F KB3250FS HKB3250F HKB3150T 175 875 1750 KB3175 KB3175S HKB3175 KB3250F KB3250FS HKB3250F HKB3175T 200 1000 2000 KB3200 KB3200S HKB3200 KB3250F KB3250FS HKB3250F HKB3200T 225 1125 2250 KB3225 KB3225S HKB3225 KB3250F KB3250FS HKB3250F HKB3225T 250 1250 2500 KB3250 KB3250S HKB3250 KB3250F KB3250FS HKB3250F HKB3250T Approx. shipping weight 2 lbs Magnetic Only, Front Adjustable Breakers 4 Two-Pole 4 Three-Pole Low High Catalog Number Catalog Number 250 350 700 HKB2700TM HKB3700TM 250 500 1000 HKB21000TM HKB31000TM 250 625 1250 HKB21250TM HKB31250TM 250 750 1500 HKB21500TM HKB31500TM 250 875 1750 HKB21750TM HKB31750TM 250 1125 2250 HKB22250TM HKB32250TM 250 1250 2500 HKB22500TM HKB32500TM 9 12 13 14 15 16 17 Trip Units Only Magnetic Trip Setting Amperes 5 8 11 350 90 Approx. shipping weight 11 lbs 7 10 70 Approx. shipping weight 14 lbs 6 Approx. shipping weight 2 lbs Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only Continuous Ampere Rating 1 18 19 20 21 22 Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167. 2 Terminals shipped separately from breaker frame. 3 Not UL Listed. 4 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole. 5 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limit. 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-21 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities 1 UL Listed Interrupting Ratings Accessories and Modifications Maximum Volts ■ 2 Standard Breakers 240 AC 30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical 3 480 AC 25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Amperes 600 AC 15,000 asymmetrical, 14,000 symmetrical 250 DC 10,000 MARK 75 Breakers 240 AC 75,000 asymmetrical., 65,000 symmetrical. 480 AC 30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical 600 AC 20,000 asymmetrical, 18,000 symmetrical 250 DC 20,000 1 Terminals 2 Maximum Amperes Number of Cables, Wire Range, Type Catalog Number Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals 250 (1) #4–350 kcmil Al/Cu TA250KB Optional Pressure Terminals 250 (1) #4–350 kcmil Cu Notes 1 Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed. 2 Terminals shipped separately from breaker frame. 12 T250KB Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. Magnetic Only, Front Adjustable Breakers (see table on Page V12-T3-21) Special Calibrations Special calibration price additions apply to ampere ratings not listed as standard or for ambients other than 40°C or 50°C. For frequencies other than 0–60 Hz AC, refer to Eaton. Note: Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole. 50°C Calibration Add suffix “V” to catalog number for complete breaker, listed on Page V12-T3-21, when ordering breakers to be used in 50°C ambients. For CSA, see Page V12-T3-48. 13 UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (see table) For all three-phase delta, grounded B phase applications, contact Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center at 1-800-356-1243. Terminals (see table) Two terminals are required per pole. Terminals are UL Listed for wire type and range listed below. When used with aluminum conductors, use joint compound. To order optional copper only terminals, add suffix “C” to complete breaker catalog number. Magnetic Only Breakers For description, refer to Application Data 29-160. To order these breakers, select frame, trip unit and terminals. Additional Accessories and Modifications Refer to Pages V12-T3-65– V12-T3-79. Note: Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole. 14 Type KB breakers meet requirements for Class 19a, as defined by Federal Specification W-C-375b. Type HKB breakers not defined in W-C-375b. 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-22 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Type JA 1 Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 Type JA 70–225A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Fixed Trip, Thermal-Magnetic, Saf-T-Vue JA: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc (Suitable for Reverse-Feed) ■ Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 2 Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes (Set on High Side, Adjustable to Lower Limits) Complete Breaker Includes Pressure Type Aluminum Terminals 2 Breaker Without Terminals Standard Saf-T-Vue Standard Saf-T-Vue Low High Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 3 Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc 3 70 350 700 JA2070 JA2070S JA2070W JA2070SW 90 450 900 JA2090 JA2090S JA2090W JA2090SW 100 500 1000 JA2100 JA2100S JA2100W JA2100SW 125 625 1250 JA2125 JA2125S JA2125W JA2125SW 150 750 1500 JA2150 JA2150S JA2150W JA2150SW 175 875 1750 JA2175 JA2175S JA2175W JA2175SW 200 1000 2000 JA2200 JA2200S JA2200W JA2200SW 225 1125 2250 JA2225 JA2225S JA2225W JA2225SW Approx. shipping weight 12 lbs Approx. shipping weight 12 lbs Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only 70 350 700 JA3070 JA3070S JA3070W JA3070SW 90 450 900 JA3090 JA3090S JA3090W JA3090SW 100 500 1000 JA3100 JA3100S JA3100W JA3100SW 125 625 1250 JA3125 JA3125S JA3125W JA3125SW 150 750 1500 JA3150 JA3150S JA3150W JA3150SW 175 875 1750 JA3175 JA3175S JA3175W JA3175SW 200 1000 2000 JA3200 JA3200S JA3200W JA3200SW 225 1125 2250 JA3225 JA3225S JA3225W JA3225SW 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Approx. shipping weight 14 lbs Approx. shipping weight 12 lbs Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes (Set on High Side, Adjustable to Lower Limits) Two-Pole 4 Three-Pole Standard Saf-T-Vue Standard Saf-T-Vue Low Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 15 16 14 Special Breakers 4 Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 4 High Magnetic Only Breakers, Front Adjustable—Without Terminals 5 225 350 700 JA2700MW JA2700SMW JA3700MW JA3700SMW 225 625 1250 JA21250MW JA21250SMW JA31250MW JA31250SMW 225 750 1500 JA21500MW JA21500SMW JA31500MW JA31500SMW 225 875 1750 JA21750MW JA21750SMW JA31750MW JA31750SMW 225 1125 2250 JA22250MW JA22250SMW JA32250MW JA32250SMW 18 19 Ambient Compensating Breakers 70 350 700 JA2070A — JA3070A — 100 500 1000 JA2100A — JA3100A — 125 625 1250 JA2125A — JA3125A — 150 750 1500 JA2150A — JA3150A — 175 875 1750 JA2175A — JA3175A — 200 1000 2000 JA2200A — JA3200A — 225 1125 2250 JA2225A — JA3225A — 17 20 21 22 Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167. 2 Terminals are shipped separately from breaker frame. 3 Not UL Listed. 4 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole. 5 Select desired terminal from table and order as separate item. 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-23 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities 1 UL Listed Interrupting Ratings Accessories and Modifications Maximum Volts Amperes ■ 2 240 AC 30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical 480 AC 25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical 3 600 AC 25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical 250 DC 10,000 4 Terminals Maximum Amperes Number of Cables, Wire Range, Type 5 Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals 6 Optional Copper Pressure Terminals 7 8 70–225 (1) #6–350 kcmil Cu, or (1) #4–350 kcmil Al 70–225 70–225 1 Note 1 Optional terminal. 9 10 Catalog Number TA225LA1 (1) #6–350 kcmil Cu T225LA (1) #6–250 kcmil Cu T225LBF Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. Special Calibrations (see table on Page V12-T3-23) Special calibration price additions apply to ampere ratings not listed as standard or for ambients other than 40°C or 50°C. For frequencies other than 0–60 Hz AC, refer to Eaton. See Application Data 29-160 for information regarding special conditions. Note: Not UL Listed. 50°C Calibration Add suffix “V” to catalog number for complete breaker when ordering breakers to be used in 50°C ambients. 11 For CSA, see Page V12-T3-48. 12 Type JA breakers meet requirements of Class 19a and 20a circuit breakers as defined by Federal Specification W-C-375b. 13 Terminals (see table) Two terminals are required per pole. Terminals are UL Listed for wire type and range listed left. When used with aluminum conductors, use joint compound. To order optional copper only terminals, add suffix “C” to complete breaker catalog number. Note: Terminals are shipped separately from breaker frame. Note: If upgrading a JA breaker to a Series C K-Frame in a panelboard application, order TAD3 spacer kit. UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (see table) Magnetic Only and Ambient Compensating Breakers For description, refer to Application Data 29-160. To order, select catalog number from table on Page V12-T3-23. For all three-phase delta, grounded B phase applications, contact Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center at 1-800-356-1243. 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-24 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Types KA and HKA 1 Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 Type KA 70–225A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip, Thermal-Magnetic, KA: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc Saf-T-Vue and MARK 75 Type HKA ■ Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Magnetic Trip Setting Amperes 2 Low High Complete Breaker Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals Includes Pressure Type Aluminum Terminals 3 Frame Only Standard Catalog Number 2 Trip Unit Only Saf-T-Vue Catalog Number MARK 75 Catalog Number Standard Catalog Number Saf-T-Vue Catalog Number MARK 75 Catalog Number Standard MARK 75 or Saf-T-Vue Catalog Number Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc 4 70 350 700 KA2070 KA2070S HKA2070 KA2225F KA2225FS HKA2225F HKA2070T 90 450 900 KA2090 KA2090S HKA2090 KA2225F KA2225FS HKA2225F HKA2090T 100 500 1000 KA2100 KA2100S HKA2100 KA2225F KA2225FS HKA2225F HKA2100T 125 625 1250 KA2125 KA2125S HKA2125 KA2225F KA2225FS HKA2225F HKA2125T 150 750 1500 KA2150 KA2150S HKA2150 KA2225F KA2225FS HKA2225F HKA2150T 175 875 1750 KA2175 KA2175S HKA2175 KA2225F KA2225FS HKA2225F HKA2175T 200 1000 2000 KA2200 KA2200S HKA2200 KA2225F KA2225FS HKA2225F HKA2200T 225 1125 2250 KA2225 KA2225S HKA2225 KA2225F KA2225FS HKA2225F HKA2225T Approx. shipping weight 12 lbs 3 4 5 6 7 8 Approx. shipping weight 9.5 lbs Approx. shipping weight 2 lbs 9 Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only 70 350 700 KA3070 KA3070S HKA3070 KA3225F KA3225FS HKA3225F HKA3070T 90 450 900 KA3090 KA3090S HKA3090 KA3225F KA3225FS HKA3225F HKA3090T 100 500 1000 KA3100 KA3100S HKA3100 KA3225F KA3225FS HKA3225F HKA3100T 125 625 1250 KA3125 KA3125S HKA3125 KA3225F KA3225FS HKA3225F HKA3125T 150 750 1500 KA3150 KA3150S HKA3150 KA3225F KA3225FS HKA3225F HKA3150T 175 875 1750 KA3175 KA3175S HKA3175 KA3225F KA3225FS HKA3225F HKA3175T 200 1000 2000 KA3200 KA3200S HKA3200 KA3225F KA3225FS HKA3225F HKA3200T 225 1125 2250 KA3225 KA3225S HKA3225 KA3225F KA3225FS HKA3225F HKA3225T Approx. shipping weight 14 lbs Approx. shipping weight 11 lbs 10 11 12 13 Approx. shipping weight 2.5 lb. Trip Units Only for Magnetic Only and Ambient Compensating Breakers 5 Continuous Ampere Rating Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes 2 Low 15 Two-Pole 4 Three-Pole High Catalog Number Catalog Number Magnetic Only, Front Adjustable Breakers 225 350 700 HKA2700TM HKA3700TM 225 625 1250 HKA21250TM HKA31250TM 225 750 1500 HKA21500TM HKA31500TM 225 875 1750 HKA21750TM HKA31750TM 225 1125 2250 HKA22250TM HKA32250TM 350 700 HKA2070TA HKA3070TA 100 500 1000 HKA2100TA HKA3100TA 125 625 1250 HKA2125TA HKA3125TA 150 750 1500 HKA2150TA HKA3150TA 175 875 1750 HKA2175TA HKA3175TA 200 1000 2000 HKA2200TA HKA3200TA 225 1125 2250 HKA2225TA HKA3225TA 17 18 20 21 22 23 Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167. 2 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limit. 3 Terminals are shipped separately from breaker frame. 4 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole. 5 Not UL Listed. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 16 19 Ambient Compensating Breakers 70 14 24 25 V12-T3-25 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities 1 UL Listed Interrupting Ratings Accessories and Modifications Maximum Volts ■ 2 Standard Breakers 240 AC 30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical 3 480 AC 25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical 600 AC 25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical 250 DC 10,000 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Amperes MARK 75 Breakers 240 AC 75,000 asymmetrical, 65,000 symmetrical 480 AC 40,000 asymmetrical, 35,000 symmetrical 600 AC 30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical 250 DC 20,000 1 Terminals Maximum Amperes Number of Cables, Wire Range, Type Catalog Numbers (1) #6–350 kcmil Cu, or (1) #4–350 kcmil Al TA225LA1 Optional Copper Pressure Terminals 225 (1) #6–350 kcmil Cu T225LA 225 2 (1) #6–250 kcmil Cu T225LBF Notes 1 Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed. 2 Optional terminal. 13 Special Calibrations Special calibration price additions apply to ampere ratings not listed as standard or for ambients other than 40°C or 50°C. For frequencies other than 0–60 Hz AC, refer to Eaton. See Application Data 29-160 for information regarding special conditions. Note: Not UL Listed. Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals 225 Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 50°C Calibration Add suffix “V” to catalog number for complete breaker when ordering breakers to be used in 50°C ambients. Note: Not UL Listed. Terminals (see table) Two terminals are required per pole. Terminals are UL Listed for wire type and range listed below. When used with aluminum conductors, use joint compound. To order optional copper only terminals, add suffix “C” to complete breaker catalog number. Type KA breakers meet requirements for Class 19a and 20a circuit breakers, and Type HKA meet requirements for Class 23a as defined by Federal Specification W-C-375b. For all three-phase delta, grounded B phase applications, contact Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center at 1-800-356-1243. Note: Terminals are shipped separately from breaker frame. Note: If upgrading a KA, HKA breaker to a Series C K-Frame in a panelboard application, also order TAD3 spacer kit. UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (see table) Magnetic Only Breakers For description, refer to Application Data 29-160. To order these breakers, select frame, trip unit and terminals. 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-26 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Type LBB Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 Type LBB 125–400A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Fixed Trip, Thermal-Magnetic, Saf-T-Vue LBB: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc (Suitable for Reverse-Feed) ■ Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes 2 Low Complete Breaker Includes Pressure Type Aluminum Terminals 3 Breaker Without Terminals Saf-T-Vue Standard Saf-T-Vue Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Two-Pole, 600 Vdc, 250 Vdc 4 125 625 1250 LBB2125 LBB2125S LBB2125W LBB2125SW 150 750 1500 LBB2150 LBB2150S LBB2150W LBB2150SW 175 875 1750 LBB2175 LBB2175S LBB2175W LBB2175SW 200 1000 2000 LBB2200 LBB2200S LBB2200W LBB2200SW 225 1125 2250 LBB2225 LBB2225S LBB2225W LBB2225SW 250 1250 2500 LBB2250 LBB2250S LBB2250W LBB2250SW 300 1500 3000 LBB2300 LBB2300S LBB2300W LBB2300SW 350 1750 3500 LBB2350 LBB2350S LBB2350W LBB2350SW 400 2000 4000 LBB2400 LBB2400S LBB2400W LBB2400SW Approx. shipping weight 13 lbs 4 5 6 7 8 9 Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only 125 625 1250 LBB3125 LBB3125S LBB3125W LBB3125SW 150 750 1500 LBB3150 LBB3150S LBB3150W LBB3150SW 175 875 1750 LBB3175 LBB3175S LBB3175W LBB3175SW 200 1000 2000 LBB3200 LBB3200S LBB3200W LBB3200SW 225 1125 2250 LBB3225 LBB3225S LBB3225W LBB3225SW 250 1250 2500 LBB3250 LBB3250S LBB3250W LBB3250SW 300 1500 3000 LBB3300 LBB3300S LBB3300W LBB3300SW 350 1750 3500 LBB3350 LBB3350S LBB3350W LBB3350SW 400 2000 4000 LBB3400 LBB3400S LBB3400W LBB3400SW Approx. shipping weight 15 lbs 2 3 Standard High Approx. shipping weight 13 lbs 1 Approx. shipping weight 15 lbs Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167. 2 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits. 3 Terminals are shipped separately from breaker. 4 Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole. 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-27 3 1 2 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 Magnetic Only, Ambient Compensating Breakers 2 ■ Two-Pole Breakers 4 Continuous Ampere Rating Three-Pole Breakers Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes 3 Standard Saf-T-Vue Standard Saf-T-Vue Low Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number High Magnetic Only Breakers, Front Adjustable—Without Terminals 5 400 350 700 LBB2700MW LBB2700SMW LBB3700MW LBB3700SMW 4 400 625 1250 LBB21250MW LBB21250SMW LBB31250MW LBB31250SMW 400 750 1500 LBB21500MW LBB21500SMW LBB31500MW LBB31500SMW 5 400 875 1750 LBB21750MW LBB21750SMW LBB31750MW LBB31750SMW 400 1125 2250 LBB22250MW LBB22250SMW LBB32250MW LBB32250SMW 6 400 1500 3000 LBB23000MW LBB23000SMW LBB33000MW LBB33000SMW 400 2000 4000 LBB24000MW LBB24000SMW LBB34000MW LBB34000SMW 7 Ambient Compensating Breakers—Includes Terminals 125 625 1250 LBB2125A LBB2125SA LBB3125A LBB3125SA 8 150 750 1500 LBB2150A LBB2150SA LBB3150A LBB3150SA 175 875 1750 LBB2175A LBB2175SA LBB3175A LBB3175SA 9 200 1000 2000 LBB2200A LBB2200SA LBB3200A LBB3200SA 225 1125 2250 LBB2225A LBB2225SA LBB3225A LBB3225SA 10 250 1250 2500 LBB2250A LBB2250SA LBB3250A LBB3250SA 300 1500 3000 LBB2300A LBB2300SA LBB3300A LBB3300SA 350 1750 3500 LBB2350A LBB2350SA LBB3350A LBB3350SA 400 2000 4000 LBB2400A LBB2400SA LBB3400A LBB3400SA 11 12 UL Listed Interrupting Ratings Accessories and Modifications 13 Maximum Volts ■ 14 15 16 Amperes 240 AC 50,000 asymmetrical, 42,000 symmetrical 480 AC 35,000 asymmetrical, 30,000 symmetrical 600 AC 25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical 250 DC 20,000 6 17 18 19 Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. Special Calibrations Special calibration price additions apply to ampere ratings not listed as standard or for ambients other than 40°C or 50°C. For frequencies other than 0–60 Hz AC, refer to Eaton. See Application Data 29-160 for information regarding special conditions. Maximum calibration for 400 Hz is 300A. Note: Not UL Listed. 20 50°C Calibration Add suffix “V” to catalog number for complete breaker when ordering breakers to be used in 50°C ambients. 21 22 Terminals Two terminals required per pole. Select from Page V12-T3-35. Note: Terminals are shipped separately from breaker. Note: If upgrading an LBB breaker to a Series C K-Frame in a panelboard application, also order TAD3 spacer kit. For CSA, see Page V12-T3-48. Type LBB breakers meet requirements for Class 21a circuit breakers, as defined by Federal Specification W-C-375b. UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (see table) For all three-phase delta, grounded B phase applications, contact Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center at 1-800-356-1243. Magnetic Only Breakers For description, refer to Application Data 29-160. To order, select catalog number from table above. Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the crossreference on Pages V12-T3-114– V12-T3-167. 2 Not UL Listed. 3 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits. 4 Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole. 5 Select desired terminals from V12-T3-30, and order as separate item. 6 Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed. Note: Not UL Listed. 23 24 25 V12-T3-28 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Types LB and HLB Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 Type LB and MARK 75 Type HLB 70–400A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip, LB: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc Thermal-Magnetic, Saf-T-Vue and MARK 75 ■ Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 3 Complete Breaker Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 1 2 Magnetic Trip Setting Amperes 2 Includes Pressure Type Aluminum Terminals 3 Trip Unit Only 3 Low Standard Catalog Number Saf-T-Vue Catalog Number MARK 75 Catalog Number Standard Catalog Number Saf-T-Vue Catalog Number MARK 75 Catalog Number Standard Saf-T-Vue, MARK 75 Catalog Number 4 5 Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc High Frame Only 4 70 350 700 LB2070 LB2070S — LB2400F LB2400FS HLB2400F HLB2070T 90 450 900 LB2090 LB2090S — LB2400F LB2400FS HLB2400F HLB2090T 100 500 1000 LB2100 LB2100S — LB2400F LB2400FS HLB2400F HLB2100T 125 625 1250 LB2125 LB2125S HLB2125 LB2400F LB2400FS HLB2400F HLB2125T 150 750 1500 LB2150 LB2150S HLB2150 LB2400F LB2400FS HLB2400F HLB2150T 175 875 1750 LB2175 LB2175S HLB2175 LB2400F LB2400FS HLB2400F HLB2175T 200 1000 2000 LB2200 LB2200S HLB2200 LB2400F LB2400FS HLB2400F HLB2200T 225 1125 2250 LB2225 LB2225S HLB2225 LB2400F LB2400FS HLB2400F HLB2225T 250 1250 2500 LB2250 LB2250S HLB2250 LB2400F LB2400FS HLB2400F HLB2250T 300 1500 3000 LB2300 LB2300S HLB2300 LB2400F LB2400FS HLB2400F HLB2300T 350 1750 3500 LB2350 LB2350S HLB2350 LB2400F LB2400FS HLB2400F HLB2350T 400 2000 4000 LB2400 LB2400S HLB2400 LB2400F LB2400FS HLB2400F HLB2400T 6 7 8 9 10 Approx. shipping weight 13 lbs Approx. shipping weight 10 lbs Approx. shipping weight 2 lbs 11 12 Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only 70 350 700 LB3070 LB3070S — LB3400F LB3400FS HLB3400F HLB3070T 90 450 900 LB3090 LB3090S — LB3400F LB3400FS HLB3400F HLB3090T 100 500 1000 LB3100 LB3100S — LB3400F LB3400FS HLB3400F HLB3100T 125 625 1250 LB3125 LB3125S HLB3125 LB3400F LB3400FS HLB3400F HLB3125T 150 750 1500 LB3150 LB3150S HLB3150 LB3400F LB3400FS HLB3400F HLB3150T 175 875 1750 LB3175 LB3175S HLB3175 LB3400F LB3400FS HLB3400F HLB3175T 200 1000 2000 LB3200 LB3200S HLB3200 LB3400F LB3400FS HLB3400F HLB3200T 225 1125 2250 LB3225 LB3225S HLB3225 LB3400F LB3400FS HLB3400F HLB3225T 250 1250 2500 LB3250 LB3250S HLB3250 LB3400F LB3400FS HLB3400F HLB3250T 300 1500 3000 LB3300 LB3300S HLB3300 LB3400F LB3400FS HLB3400F HLB3300T 350 1750 3500 LB3350 LB3350S HLB3350 LB3400F LB3400FS HLB3400F HLB3350T 400 2000 4000 LB3400 LB3400S HLB3400 LB3400F LB3400FS HLB3400F HLB3400T Approx. shipping weight 15 lbs Approx. shipping weight 12 lbs 13 14 15 16 17 Approx. shipping weight 2.5 lbs 18 19 Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-126–V12-T3-167. 2 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits. 3 Terminals are shipped separately from breaker. 4 Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole. 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-29 3 1 2 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 Special Breakers—Trip Units Only 2 ■ Continuous Ampere Rating UL Listed Interrupting Ratings Maximum Volts Amperes Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes 3 Trip Unit Only Two-Pole 4 Three-Pole Standard Breakers Low Catalog Number Catalog Number 240 AC 50,000 asymmetrical, 42,000 symmetrical 480 AC 35,000 asymmetrical, 30,000 symmetrical 600 AC 25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical 20,000 5 High Magnetic Only Breakers, Front Adjustable 4 400 350 700 HLB2700TM HLB3700TM 400 625 1250 HLB21250TM HLB31250TM 5 400 750 1500 HLB21500TM HLB31500TM 400 875 1750 HLB21750TM HLB31750TM 250 DC 6 400 1125 2250 HLB22250TM HLB32250TM MARK 75 Breakers 400 1125 2250 HLB22250TM HLB32250TM 240 AC 75,000 asymmetrical, 65,000 symmetrical 7 400 1500 3000 HLB23000TM HLB33000TM 480 AC 400 2000 4000 HLB24000TM HLB34000TM 40,000 asymmetrical, 35,000 symmetrical 600 AC 30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical 250 DC 20,000 5 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Ambient Compensating Breakers For all three-phase delta, grounded B phase applications, contact Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center at 1-800-356-1243. Terminals Two terminals are required per pole. Terminals are UL Listed for wire type and range listed below. When used with aluminum cable, use joint compound. To order optional copper only terminals, add suffix “C” to complete breaker catalog number. Note: Terminals are shipped separately from breaker. If upgrading an LB, HLB breaker to a Series C K-Frame in a panelboard application, also order TAD3 spacer kit. 70 350 700 HLB2070TA HLB3070TA 90 450 900 HLB2090TA HLB3090TA 100 500 1000 HLB2100TA HLB3100TA 125 625 1250 HLB2125TA HLB3125TA 150 750 1500 HLB2150TA HLB3150TA Terminals 175 875 1750 HLB2175TA HLB3175TA 200 1000 2000 HLB2200TA HLB3200TA Maximum Amperes 225 1125 2250 HLB2225TA HLB3225TA Standard Pressure Terminals 250 1250 2500 HLB2250TA HLB3250TA 225 (1) #6–350 kcmil Cu, or (1) #4–350 kcmil Al TA225LA1 HLB3300TA 350 (1) 250–500 kcmil Al/Cu TA350DA HLB3350TA 400 (2) 3/0–250 kcmil Cu only T400DA2 HLB3400TA Optional Copper Pressure Terminals 300 350 400 1500 3000 1750 3500 2000 4000 HLB2300TA HLB2350TA HLB2400TA 225 Accessories and Modifications Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. ■ Special Calibrations Special calibration price additions apply to ampere ratings not listed as standard or for ambients other than 40°C or 50°C. For frequencies other than 0–60 Hz AC circuits, refer to Eaton. See Application Data 29-160 for information regarding special conditions. Maximum calibration for 400 Hz is 300A. Note: Not UL Listed. 23 50°C Calibration Add suffix “V” to catalog number for complete breaker or trip unit only, when ordering breakers to be used in 50°C ambients. Note: Not UL Listed. Magnetic Only Breakers For description, refer to Application Data 29-160. To order, select trip unit from table above, frame and terminals. 225 350 6 Number of Cables, Wire Range, Type (1) #6–350 kcmil Cu T225LA (1) #6–250 kcmil Cu T225LBF (1) 250–500 kcmil Cu T350DA Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-126–V12-T3-167. 2 Not UL Listed. 3 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits. 4 Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole. 5 Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed. 6 Optional terminal. Note: Not UL Listed. For CSA, see Page V12-T3-48. Type LB breakers meet requirements for Class 21a circuit breakers, and Type HLB meet requirements for Class 23a, as defined by Federal Specification W-C-375b. 24 25 V12-T3-30 Catalog Number Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Type DA 1 Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 Type DA Breakers 250–400A, 240 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Fixed Trip, Thermal-Magnetic DA: 240 Vac; 250 Vdc (Suitable for Reverse-Feed) ■ Breakers With Line and Load Terminals Two-Pole 2 Catalog Number Three-Pole Catalog Number Two-Pole 2 Catalog Number Three-Pole Catalog Number 3 250 DA2250Y DA3250Y DA2250 DA3250 300 DA2300Y DA3300Y DA2300 DA3300 4 350 DA2350Y DA3350Y DA2350 DA3350 400 DA2400Y DA3400Y DA2400 DA3400 Approx. shipping weight 13 lbs Approx. shipping weight 15 lbs Approx. shipping weight 13 lbs Approx. shipping weight 13 lbs Accessories and Modifications Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services ■ Type DA breakers meet requirements of Federal Specification W-C-375b., Class 14b. UL Listed Interrupting Ratings Maximum Volts 240 AC 250 DC 2 Breakers With Line Terminals Only Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Terminals Terminals are UL Listed for the wire type and size listed below. When used with aluminum conductors, use joint compound. Terminals Number of Cables, Maximum Wire Range, Amperes Type Catalog Number Standard Pressure Terminals Amperes 350 (1) 250–500 kcmil TA350DA Al/Cu 25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical 400 (2) 3/0–250 kcmil Cu only 10,000 For all three-phase delta, grounded B phase applications, contact Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center at 1-800-356-1243. T400DA2 Optional Terminals (for Copper Cable) 350 (1) 250–500 kcmil T350DA Cu Note: If upgrading a DA breaker to a Series C K-Frame in a panelboard application, also order TAD3 spacer kit. For CSA, see Page V12-T3-48. Special Calibrations Special calibration price additions apply to ampere ratings not listed as standard or for ambients other than 40°C or 50°C. For frequencies other than 0–60 Hz AC circuits, refer to Eaton. See Application Data 29-160 for information regarding special conditions. Maximum 400 Hz calibrations: Type DA, 300A. 5 Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the crossreference on Pages V12-T3-114– V12-T3-167. 2 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Note: Not UL Listed. 13 50°C Calibration Add suffix “V” to catalog number for complete breaker when ordering breakers to be used in 50°C ambients. Same price as standard 40°C breakers. 14 15 16 Note: Not UL Listed. 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-31 3 1 2 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Type LAB Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 Type LAB 125–400A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Fixed Trip, Thermal-Magnetic, Saf-T-Vue LAB: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc (Suitable for Reverse-Feed) ■ 3 Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 4 Complete Breaker Includes Pressure Type Aluminum Terminals 3 Breaker Without Terminals Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes 2 Standard Saf-T-Vue Standard Saf-T-Vue Low High Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc 4 125 625 1250 LAB2125 LAB2125S LAB2125W LAB2125SW 150 750 1500 LAB2150 LAB2150S LAB2150W LAB2150SW 175 875 1750 LAB2175 LAB2175S LAB2175W LAB2175SW 200 1000 2000 LAB2200 LAB2200S LAB2200W LAB2200SW 225 1125 2250 LAB2225 LAB2225S LAB2225W LAB2225SW 7 250 1250 2500 LAB2250 LAB2250S LAB2250W LAB2250SW 300 1500 3000 LAB2300 LAB2300S LAB2300W LAB2300SW 8 350 1750 3500 LAB2350 LAB2350S LAB2350W LAB2350SW 400 2000 4000 LAB2400 LAB2400S LAB2400W LAB2400SW 5 6 9 Approx. shipping weight 22 lbs Approx. shipping weight 22 lbs Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only 10 125 625 1250 LAB3125 LAB3125S LAB3125W LAB3125SW 150 750 1500 LAB3150 LAB3150S LAB3150W LAB3150SW 11 175 875 1750 LAB3175 LAB3175S LAB3175W LAB3175SW 200 1000 2000 LAB3200 LAB3200S LAB3200W LAB3200SW 12 225 1125 2250 LAB3225 LAB3225S LAB3225W LAB3225SW 250 1250 2500 LAB3250 LAB3250S LAB3250W LAB3250SW 13 300 1500 3000 LAB3300 LAB3300S LAB3300W LAB3300SW 350 1750 3500 LAB3350 LAB3350S LAB3350W LAB3350SW 14 400 2000 4000 LAB3400 LAB3400S LAB3400W LAB3400SW Approx. shipping weight 24.5 lbs Approx. shipping weight 24.5 lbs Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167. 2 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits. 3 Terminals shipped separately from breaker. 4 Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole. 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-32 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities ■ Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 Special Breakers 2 1 Breaker Catalog Number Two-Pole 4 Continuous Ampere Rating Magnetic Trip Setting, Low Amperes 3 High Magnetic Only Breakers, Front Adjustable—Without 2 Three-Pole Standard Saf-T-Vue Standard Saf-T-Vue Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 3 4 Terminals 5 400 350 700 LAB2700MW LAB2700SMW LAB3700MW LAB3700SMW 400 625 1250 LAB21250MW LAB21250SMW LAB31250MW LAB31250SMW 400 750 1500 LAB21500MW LAB21500SMW LAB31500MW LAB31500SMW 400 875 1750 LAB21750MW LAB21750SMW LAB31750MW LAB31750SMW 400 1125 2250 LAB22250MW LAB22250SMW LAB32250MW LAB32250SMW 400 1500 3000 LAB23000MW LAB23000SMW LAB33000MW LAB33000SMW 400 2000 4000 LAB24000MW LAB24000SMW LAB34000MW LAB34000SMW 7 8 5 6 Ambient Compensating Breakers—Includes Terminals 125 625 1250 LAB2125A — LAB3125A — 150 750 1500 LAB2150A — LAB3150A — 175 875 1750 LAB2175A — LAB3175A — 200 1000 2000 LAB2200A — LAB3200A — 225 1125 2250 LAB2225A — LAB3225A — 250 1250 2500 LAB2250A — LAB3250A — 300 1500 3000 LAB2300A — LAB3300A — 350 1750 3500 LAB2350A — LAB3350A — 400 2000 4000 LAB2400A — LAB3400A — Accessories and Modifications Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. ■ Special Calibrations Special calibration price additions apply to ampere ratings not listed as standard or for ambients other than 40°C or 50°C. For frequencies other than 0–60 Hz AC circuits, refer to Eaton. See Application Data 29-160 for information regarding special conditions. Maximum calibration for 400 Hz is 300A. Note: Not UL Listed. 50°C Calibration Add suffix “V” to catalog number for complete breaker when ordering breakers to be used in 50°C ambients. For CSA, see Page V12-T3-48. Type LAB breakers meet requirements for Class 21a circuit breakers, as defined by Federal Specification W-C-375b. Terminals Two terminals required per pole. UL Listed Interrupting Ratings 6 Note: Terminals shipped separately from breaker. Maximum Volts Amperes 240 AC 50,000 asymmetrical, 42,000 symmetrical 480 AC 35,000 asymmetrical, 30,000 symmetrical 600 AC 25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical 250 DC 20,000 7 Select from the table on Page V12-T3-36. Magnetic Only and Ambient Compensating Breakers To order, select catalog number from “Special Breakers” table above. Additional Accessories and Modifications Refer to Pages V12-T3-65– V12-T3-79. 9 10 11 Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the crossreference on Pages V12-T3-114– V12-T3-167. 2 Not UL Listed. 3 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits. 4 Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole. 5 Select desired terminals from Page V12-T3-39 and order as separate item. 6 Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to molded-case switches. 7 Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed. 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 For all three-phase delta, grounded B phase applications, contact Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center at 1-800-356-1243. 20 21 22 23 Note: Not UL Listed. 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-33 3 1 2 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Types LA and HLA Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 Type LA and MARK 75 Type HLA 70–400A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip LA: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc ■ 3 Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 4 Magnetic Trip Setting Amperes 2 Low 400A Frame Breakers 6 High Complete Breaker Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals Includes Pressure Type Aluminum Terminals 3 Frame Only Standard Catalog Number MARK 75 Catalog Number Standard Catalog Number 4—Two-Pole, Saf-T-Vue Catalog Number Saf-T-Vue Catalog Number MARK 75 Catalog Number Trip Unit Only Standard, MARK 75, Saf-T-Vue Catalog Number 600 Vac, 250 Vdc 5 5 70 350 700 LA2070 LA2070S HLA2070 LA2400F LA2400FS HLA2400F HLA2070T 90 6 450 900 LA2090 LA2090S HLA2090 LA2400F LA2400FS HLA2400F HLA2090T 6 100 6 500 1000 LA2100 LA2100S HLA2100 LA2400F LA2400FS HLA2400F HLA2100T 125 625 1250 LA2125 LA2125S HLA2125 LA2400F LA2400FS HLA2400F HLA2125T 7 150 750 1500 LA2150 LA2150S HLA2150 LA2400F LA2400FS HLA2400F HLA2150T 175 875 1750 LA2175 LA2175S HLA2175 LA2400F LA2400FS HLA2400F HLA2175T 200 1000 2000 LA2200 LA2200S HLA2200 LA2400F LA2400FS HLA2400F HLA2200T 225 1125 2250 LA2225 LA2225S HLA2225 LA2400F LA2400FS HLA2400F HLA2225T 250 1250 2500 LA2250 LA2250S HLA2250 LA2400F LA2400FS HLA2400F HLA2250T 300 1500 3000 LA2300 LA2300S HLA2300 LA2400F LA2400FS HLA2400F HLA2300T 350 1750 3500 LA2350 LA2350S HLA2350 LA2400F LA2400FS HLA2400F HLA2350T 400 2000 4000 LA2400 LA2400S HLA2400 LA2400F LA2400FS HLA2400F HLA2400T 8 9 10 Approx. shipping weight 21.75 lbs 11 Approx. shipping weight 17.5 lbs Approx.shipping weight 2.25 lbs Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only 12 70 6 350 700 LA3070 LA3070S HLA3070 LA3400F LA3400FS HLA3400F HLA3070T 6 450 900 LA3090 LA3090S HLA3090 LA3400F LA3400FS HLA3400F HLA3090T 13 100 6 500 1000 LA3100 LA3100S HLA3100 LA3400F LA3400FS HLA3400F HLA3100T 125 625 1250 LA3125 LA3125S HLA3125 LA3400F LA3400FS HLA3400F HLA3125T 14 150 750 1500 LA3150 LA3150S HLA3150 LA3400F LA3400FS HLA3400F HLA3150T 175 875 1750 LA3175 LA3175S HLA3175 LA3400F LA3400FS HLA3400F HLA3175T 15 200 1000 2000 LA3200 LA3200S HLA3200 LA3400F LA3400FS HLA3400F HLA3200T 225 1125 2250 LA3225 LA3225S HLA3225 LA3400F LA3400FS HLA3400F HLA3225T 250 1250 2500 LA3250 LA3250S HLA3250 LA3400F LA3400FS HLA3400F HLA3250T 300 1500 3000 LA3300 LA3300S HLA3300 LA3400F LA3400FS HLA3400F HLA3300T 350 1750 3500 LA3350 LA3350S HLA3350 LA3400F LA3400FS HLA3400F HLA3350T 400 2000 4000 LA3400 LA3400S HLA3400 LA3400F LA3400FS HLA3400F HLA3400T 90 16 17 Approx. shipping weight 24.5 lbs 18 Approx. shipping weight 19 lbs Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167. 2 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits. 3 Terminals shipped separately from breaker. 4 Terminals, trip units and accessories are not interchangeable between 400 and 600A frames. 5 Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole. 6 These ratings have interrupting capacities reduced to 25,000A symmetrical at 240V, 20,000A symmetrical at 480V, and 15,000A symmetrical at 600V. 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-34 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com Approx. shipping weight 3 lbs Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. Special Breakers 2—Trip Units Only ■ Continuous Ampere Rating Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes 3 Low High 3 1 1 Two-Pole 4 Three-Pole Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 3 Magnetic Only Breakers, Front Adjustable—400A Frame Breakers 5 400 350 700 HLA2700TM HLA3700TM 400 625 1250 HLA21250TM HLA31250TM 400 750 1500 HLA21500TM HLA31500TM 400 875 1750 HLA21750TM HLA31750TM 400 1125 2250 HLA22250TM HLA32250TM 400 1500 3000 HLA23000TM HLA33000TM 400 2000 4000 HLA24000TM HLA34000TM 6 7 4 5 Ambient Compensating Breakers—400A Frame Breakers Only 5 70 6 350 700 HLA2070TA HLA3070TA 6 450 900 HLA2090TA HLA3090TA 100 6 500 1000 HLA2100TA HLA3100TA 125 625 1250 HLA2125TA HLA3125TA 150 750 1500 HLA2150TA HLA3150TA 175 875 1750 HLA2175TA HLA3175TA 200 1000 2000 HLA2200TA HLA3200TA 225 1125 2250 HLA2225TA HLA3225TA 250 1250 2500 HLA2250TA HLA3250TA 300 1500 3000 HLA2300TA HLA3300TA 350 1750 3500 HLA2350TA HLA3350TA 400 2000 4000 HLA2400TA HLA3400TA 90 8 9 10 11 12 Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167. 2 Not UL Listed. 3 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits. 4 Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole. 5 Terminals, trip units and accessories are not interchangeable between 400 and 600A frames. 6 These ratings have interrupting capacities reduced to 25,000A symmetrical at 240V, 20,000A symmetrical at 480V, and 15,000A symmetrical at 600V. 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-35 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Accessories and Modifications Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. ■ Special Calibrations Special calibration price additions apply to ampere ratings not listed as standard or for ambients other than 40°C or 50°C. For frequencies other than 0–60 Hz AC, refer to Eaton. See Application Data 29-160 for information regarding special conditions. Maximum 400 Hz calibration: 400A frame, 300A. Note: Not UL Listed. 50°C Calibration Add suffix “V” to catalog number for complete breaker or trip unit only, when ordering breakers to be used in 50°C ambients. Note: Not UL Listed. Terminals Two terminals required per pole. Select from table at right. Note: Terminals shipped separately from breaker. 15 16 Magnetic Only Breakers To order, select trip unit from the table on Page V12-T3-35, frame and terminals from table at right. Note: Not UL Listed. MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002. UL Listed Except as Noted Type LA breakers meet requirements for Class 21a circuit breakers, and Type HLA meet requirements for Class 23a as defined by Federal Specification W-C-375b. Terminals Two terminals are required per pole. copper only terminals, add suffix “C” to complete breaker catalog number. Terminals are UL Listed for wire type and range listed below. When used with aluminum cable, use joint compound. To order optional Note: Terminals shipped separately from breaker. Terminals, trip units and accessories are not interchangeable between 400 and 600A frames. Terminals Maximum Amperes Number of Cables, Wire Range, Type Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals 225 3 (1) #6–350 kcmil Cu, or (1) #4–350 kcmil Al TA225LA1 400 3 (1) #4–250 kcmil Al/Cu, plus (1) 3/0–600 kcmil Al/Cu TA400LA1 Optional Copper Pressure Terminals UL Listed Interrupting Ratings 1 225 3 (1) #6–350 kcmil Cu T225LA 225 34 (1) #6–250 kcmil Cu T225LBF Maximum Volts 400 3 (1) #4–250 kcmil Cu, plus (1) 3/0–600 kcmil Cu T401LA Amperes Standard Breakers 240 AC 50,000 asymmetrical, 42,000 symmetrical 480 AC 35,000 asymmetrical, 30,000 symmetrical 600 AC 25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical 250 DC 20,000 2 Notes 1 Interrupting capacities do not apply to molded-case switches. 2 Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed. 3 400A frame only. 4 Optional terminal. MARK 75 Breakers 240 AC 75,000 asymmetrical, 65,000 symmetrical 480 AC 40,000 asymmetrical, 35,000 symmetrical 600 AC 30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical 250 DC 20,000 2 For all three-phase delta, grounded B phase applications, contact Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center at 1-800-356-1243. 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-36 Catalog Number Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Types LA and HLA Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 Type LA and MARK 75 Type HLA 250–600A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two-, Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip LA: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc Thermal-Magnetic, Saf-T-Vue and MARK 75 Breakers ■ Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes 2 Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Low High Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 3 Complete Breaker Includes Pressure Type Aluminum Terminals 3 Frame Only Standard Catalog Number MARK 75 Catalog Number Standard Catalog Number Saf-T-Vue Catalog Number MARK 75 Catalog Number Standard Saf-T-Vue, MARK 75 Catalog Number Saf-T-Vue Catalog Number Trip Unit Only 600A Frame Breakers 4—Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc 5 1 2 3 4 5 250 1250 2500 2603D50G01 2603D50G13 1256C10G02 LA2600F LA2600FS HLA2600F 2603D46G07 300 1500 3000 2603D50G02 2603D50G14 1256C10G03 LA2600F LA2600FS HLA2600F 2603D46G08 350 1750 3500 2603D50G03 2603D50G15 1256C10G04 LA2600F LA2600FS HLA2600F 2603D46G09 350 1750 3500 2603D50G03 2603D50G15 1256C10G04 LA2600F LA2600FS HLA2600F 2603D46G09 400 2000 4000 2603D50G04 2603D50G16 1256C10G05 LA2600F LA2600FS HLA2600F 2603D46G10 500 2500 5000 LA2500 LA2500S HLA2500 LA2600F LA2600FS HLA2600F HLA2500T 600 3000 6000 LA2600 LA2600S HLA2600 LA2600F LA2600FS HLA2600F HLA2600T 8 9 Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only 250 1250 2500 2603D50G07 2603D50G019 1256C10G12 LA3600F LA3600FS HLA3600F 2603D46G26 300 1500 3000 2603D50G08 2603D50G020 1256C10G13 LA3600F LA3600FS HLA3600F 2603D46G27 350 1750 3500 2603D50G09 2603D50G021 1256C10G14 LA3600F LA3600FS HLA3600F 2603D46G28 400 2000 4000 2603D50G10 2603D50G022 1256C10G15 LA3600F LA3600FS HLA3600F 2603D46G29 500 2500 5000 LA3500 LA3500S HLA500 LA3600F LA3600FS HLA3600F HLA3500T 600 3000 6000 LA3600 LA3600S HLA3600 LA3600F LA3600FS HLA3600F HLA3600T 600A Frame Breakers Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes Low 4—Magnetic 7 10 11 12 Type Special Breakers 6—Trip Units Only Continuous Ampere Rating 6 High Two-Pole 5 Catalog Number Three-Pole Catalog Number 13 14 Only Breakers, Front Adjustable 600 1125 2250 2603D47G07 2603D47G26 600 1500 3000 2603D47G08 2603D47G27 600 2000 4000 2603D47G10 2603D47G29 600 2500 5000 HLA25000TM HLA35000TM 600 3000 6000 HLA26000TM HLA36000TM 16 17 15 600A Frame Breakers—Ambient Compensating Breakers 250 1250 2500 5683D88G07 5683D88G26 300 1500 3000 5683D88G08 5683D88G27 350 1750 3500 5683D88G09 5683D88G28 400 2000 4000 5683D88G10 5683D88G29 500 2500 5000 HLA2500TA HLA3500TA 600 3000 6000 HLA2600TA HLA3600TA 18 19 20 Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167. 2 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits. 3 Terminals shipped separately from breakers. Terminals, trip units and accessories are not interchangeable between 400 and 600A frames. Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole. Not UL Listed. 4 5 6 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-37 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Accessories and Modifications UL Listed Interrupting Ratings 1 Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. Maximum Volts ■ Special Calibrations Special calibration price additions apply to ampere ratings not listed as standard or for ambients other than 40°C or 50°C. For frequencies other than 0–60 Hz AC, refer to Eaton. See Application Data 29-160 for information regarding special conditions. Maximum 400 Hz calibration: 600A frame, 450A. 240 AC 50,000 asymmetrical, 42,000 symmetrical 480 AC 35,000 asymmetrical, 30,000 symmetrical 600 AC 25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical 250 DC 20,000 2 MARK 75 Breakers 240 AC 75,000 asymmetrical, 65,000 symmetrical 480 AC 40,000 asymmetrical, 35,000 symmetrical 600 AC 30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical 250 DC 20,000 2 Note: Not UL Listed. 50°C Calibration Add suffix “V” to catalog number for complete breaker or trip unit only, when ordering breakers to be used in 50°C ambients. Same price as standard 40°C breakers. For CSA, see Page V12-T3-48. Amperes Standard Breakers For all three-phase delta, grounded B phase applications, contact Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center at 1-800-356-1243. Terminals Two terminals are required per pole. Terminals are UL Listed for wire type and range listed below. When used with aluminum cable, use joint compound. To order optional copper only terminals, add suffix “C” to complete breaker catalog number. Magnetic Only Breakers To order, select frame, trip unit and terminals from tables on this page. Accessories and Modifications Refer to Pages V12-T3-65– V12-T3-79. Note: Terminals shipped separately from breakers. Terminals, trip units and accessories are not interchangeable between 400 and 600A frames. Terminals Maximum Amperes Number of Cables, Wire Range, Type Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals 600 3 (2) 250–500 kcmil Al/Cu TA600LA Optional Copper Pressure Terminals 600 3 (2) 250–500 kcmil Cu T600LA Notes 1 Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to molded case switches. 2 Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed. 3 For 600A frame breakers only. Type LA breakers meet requirements for Class 21a circuit breakers, and type HLA meet requirements for Class 23a as defined by Federal Specification W-C-375b. Note: Not UL Listed. MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002. 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-38 Catalog Number Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Type LAY 1 Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 Type LAY 250–600A, 240 Vac, Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip Thermal-Magnetic, 600A Frame 2 LAY: 240 Vac ■ Complete Breaker Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 5 Magnetic Trip Setting Amperes 3 Includes Pressure Type Aluminum Terminals 4 Frame Only Low High Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 250 1250 2500 LAY3250 LAY3600F 2603D46G26 300 1500 3000 LAY3300 LAY3600F 2603D46G27 350 1750 3500 LAY3350 LAY3600F 2603D46G28 400 2000 4000 LAY3400 LAY3600F 2603D46G29 500 2500 5000 LAY3500 LAY3600F HLA3500T 600 3000 6000 LAY3600 LAY3600F HLA3600T Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Accessories and Modifications Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. ■ Special Calibrations Special calibration price additions apply to ampere ratings not listed as standard or for ambients other than 40°C or 50°C. For frequencies other than 0–60 Hz AC, refer to Eaton. See Application Data 29-160 for information regarding special conditions. Maximum 400 Hz calibration: 600A frame, 450A. Note: Not UL Listed. 50°C Calibration Add suffix “V” to catalog number for complete breaker or trip unit only, when ordering breakers to be used in 50°C ambients. Same price as standard 40°C breakers. For CSA, see Page V12-T3-48. Type LAY breakers are not defined by Federal Specification W-C-375b. Note: Not UL Listed. For all three-phase delta, grounded B phase applications, contact Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center at 1-800-356-1243. Trip Unit Only 5 6 7 UL Listed Interrupting Ratings Maximum Volts Amperes 8 240 AC 9 115,000 asymmetrical, 100,000 symmetrical Terminals Two terminals are required per pole. 10 11 Terminals are UL Listed for wire type and range listed below. When used with aluminum cable, use joint compound. 12 13 Note: Terminals shipped separately from breaker. 14 Additional Accessories and Modifications 15 Refer to Pages V12-T3-65– V12-T3-79. 16 Number of Cables, Wire Range, Type Catalog Number 17 Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals 500 5 (2) 3/0–250 kcmil Al/Cu TA602LD 600 5 (2) 400–500 kcmil Al/Cu TA603LA 5 (2) 250–500 kcmil Al/Cu TA600LA 600 18 19 Optional Copper Pressure Terminals 600 6 3 4 Terminals Maximum Amperes 2 (2) 250–500 kcmil Cu T600LA 20 Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167. 2 Optional terminal. 3 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits. 4 Terminals shipped separately from breaker. 5 For 600A frame breakers only. 6 Not UL Listed. 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-39 3 1 2 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Types MA and HMA Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 Type MA 125–800A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc 2, Two- and Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip MA: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc ■ Magnetic Trip Setting Amperes 3 3 Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 4 Low High Complete Breaker Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 4 Includes Pressure Type Copper Terminals 4 Frame Only Standard Catalog Number Saf-T-Vue Catalog Number MARK 75 Catalog Number Standard Catalog Number Saf-T-Vue Catalog Number MARK 75 Catalog Number Standard Saf-T-Vue, MARK 75 Catalog Number Trip Unit Only Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc 25 5 125 625 1250 MA2125 MA2125S HMA2125 MA2800F MA2800FS HMA2800F HMA2125T 150 750 1500 MA2150 MA2150S HMA2150 MA2800F MA2800FS HMA2800F HMA2150T 6 175 875 1750 MA2175 MA2175S HMA2175 MA2800F MA2800FS HMA2800F HMA2175T 200 1000 2000 MA2200 MA2200S HMA2200 MA2800F MA2800FS HMA2800F HMA2200T 7 225 1125 2250 MA2225 MA2225S HMA2225 MA2800F MA2800FS HMA2800F HMA2225T 250 1250 2500 MA2250 MA2250S HMA2250 MA2800F MA2800FS HMA2800F HMA2250T 8 300 1500 3000 MA2300 MA2300S HMA2300 MA2800F MA2800FS HMA2800F HMA2300T 350 1750 3500 MA2350 MA2350S HMA2350 MA2800F MA2800FS HMA2800F HMA2350T 9 400 2000 4000 MA2400 MA2400S HMA2400 MA2800F MA2800FS HMA2800F HMA2400T 500 2500 5000 MA2500 MA2500S HMA2500 MA2800F MA2800FS HMA2800F HMA2500T 10 600 3000 6000 MA2600 MA2600S HMA2600 MA2800F MA2800FS HMA2800F HMA2600T 700 3000 6000 MA2700 6 MA2700S HMA2700 MA2800F MA2800FS HMA2800F HMA2700T 6 6 MA2800S HMA2800 MA2800F MA2800FS HMA2800F HMA2800T 6 MA2800WSK — — — — Incl. in Frame 11 800 3000 6000 MA2800 800 MCS 7 — MA2800WK Approx. shipping weight 37 lbs 12 Approx. shipping weight 24 lbs Approx. shipping weight 3.5 lbs Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only 13 125 625 1250 MA3125 MA3125S HMA3125 MA3800F MA3800FS HMA3800F HMA3125T 150 750 1500 MA3150 MA3150S HMA3150 MA3800F MA3800FS HMA3800F HMA3150T 14 175 875 1750 MA3175 MA3175S HMA3175 MA3800F MA3800FS HMA3800F HMA3175T 200 1000 2000 MA3200 MA3200S HMA3200 MA3800F MA3800FS HMA3800F HMA3200T 15 225 1125 7 2250 MA3225 MA3225S HMA3225 MA3800F MA3800FS HMA3800F HMA3225T 250 1250 2500 MA3250 MA3250S HMA3250 MA3800F MA3800FS HMA3800F HMA3250T 16 300 1500 3000 MA3300 MA3300S HMA3300 MA3800F MA3800FS HMA3800F HMA3300T 350 1750 3500 MA3350 MA3350S HMA3350 MA3800F MA3800FS HMA3800F HMA3350T 17 400 2000 4000 MA3400 MA3400S HMA3400 MA3800F MA3800FS HMA3800F HMA3400T 500 2500 5000 MA3500 MA3500S HMA3500 MA3800F MA3800FS HMA3800F HMA3500T 600 3000 6000 MA3600 MA3600S HMA3600 MA3800F MA3800FS HMA3800F HMA3600T 700 3000 6000 MA3700 6 MA3700S HMA3700 MA3800F MA3800FS HMA3800F HMA3700T 6 800 3000 6000 MA3800 6 MA3800S HMA3800 MA3800F MA3800FS HMA3800F HMA3800T 6 800 MCS 7 — MA3800WK MA3800WSK — — — — Incl. in Frame 18 19 Approx. shipping weight 44 lbs 20 Approx. shipping weight 28 lbs Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167. 2 Above 600A, DC rating applies to magnetic only breakers. 3 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits. 4 Terminals are shipped separately from breaker. 5 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole. 6 60 Hz AC only. 7 Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to high magnetic molded-case switches. 21 22 23 MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002. Also magnetic only trip units available: HMA8000TM 4000–8000A. 24 25 V12-T3-40 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com Approx. shipping weight 4 lbs Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 ■ Magnetic Only Breakers, Front Adjustable 2 Magnetic Trip Range 4 Trip Unit Only Two-Pole 4 Three-Pole Low High Catalog Number Catalog Number 800 625 1250 HMA21250TM HMA31250TM 800 1000 2000 HMA22000TM HMA32000TM 800 1500 3000 HMA23000TM HMA33000TM 800 2000 4000 HMA24000TM HMA34000TM 800 3000 6000 HMA26000TM HMA36000TM 800 4000 8000 HMA28000TM HMA38000TM Continuous Ampere Rating Ambient Compensating Breakers 2 Magnetic Trip Range 3 Type MA Accessories and Modifications Special Calibrations Special calibration price additions apply to ampere ratings not listed as standard or for ambients other than 40°C or 50°C. For frequencies other than 0–60 Hz AC (50 Hz AC minimum, 60 Hz AC maximum, refer to Eaton. See Application Data 29-160 for additional information regarding special conditions. 3 For CSA, see Page V12-T3-48. 1 Type MA breakers meet requirements for Class 21a circuit breakers, and Type HMA meet requirements for Class 23a, as defined by Federal Specification W-C-375b. For all three-phase delta, grounded B phase applications, contact Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center at 1-800-356-1243. Note: Not UL Listed. Trip Unit Only 2 3 4 5 6 7 Low High Catalog Number Catalog Number 125 625 1250 HMA2125TA HMA3125TA 150 750 1500 HMA2150TA HMA3150TA 175 875 1750 HMA2175TA HMA3175TA 50°C Calibration Add suffix “V” to catalog number for complete breaker or trip unit only, when ordering breakers to be used in 50°C ambients. 200 1000 2000 HMA2200TA HMA3200TA Note: Not UL Listed. 220 1125 2250 HMA2225TA HMA3225TA 10 250 1250 2500 HMA2250TA HMA3250TA Type MA UL Listed Interrupting Ratings 5 300 1500 3000 HMA2300TA HMA3300TA 1750 3500 HMA2350TA HMA3350TA Maximum Volts 11 350 400 2000 4000 HMA2400TA HMA3400TA Standard Breakers 500 2500 5000 HMA2500TA HMA3500TA 240 AC 50,000 asymmetrical, 42,000 symmetrical 600 3000 6000 HMA2600TA HMA3600TA 480 AC 35,000 asymmetrical, 30,000 symmetrical 700 3000 6000 HMA2700TA HMA3700TA 600 AC 25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical 800 3000 6000 HMA2800TA HMA3800TA 250 DC 6 20,000 7 14 240 AC 75,000 asymmetrical, 65,000 symmetrical 480 AC 40,000 asymmetrical, 35,000 symmetrical 15 Continuous Ampere Rating Two-Pole Three-Pole 8 9 Amperes 12 13 MARK 75 Breakers 600 AC 30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical 250 DC 6 20,000 7 16 Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167. 2 Not UL Listed. 3 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits. 4 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole. 5 Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to high magnetic molded-case switches. 6 Above 600A, DC rating applies to magnetic only breakers. 7 Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed. 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-41 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. ■ Terminals Two terminals are required per pole. Terminals are UL Listed for wire type and range listed below. When used with aluminum conductors, use joint compound. Note: Terminals are shipped separately from breaker. Magnetic Only and Ambient Compensating Breakers To order a complete breaker, select trip unit plus frame and terminals. Type MAY Accessories and Modifications Type MAY 600–800A, 240 Vac, Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip 1 Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes 3 Complete Breaker Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 4 Low Includes Pressure Type Aluminum Terminals 4 Catalog Number Frame Only Catalog Number Trip Unit Only Catalog Number High Three-Pole, 240 Vac Only Terminals 1 600 3000 6000 MAY3600 MAY3800F HMA3600T Maximum Amperes 700 e 3000 6000 MAY3700 MAY3800F HMA3700T e 3000 6000 MAY3800 MAY3800F HMA3800T Number of Cables, Wire Range, Type Catalog Number 800 Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals 7 600 (2) #1–500 kcmil Al/Cu TA700MA1 800 (Std.) (3) 3/0–400 kcmil Al/Cu TA800MA2 8 800 2 (2) 500–750 kcmil Al/Cu TA801MA Type MAY breakers are not defined by Federal Specification W-C-375b. Note: Not UL listed. Optional Copper Pressure Terminals 9 350 (1) #1–600 kcmil Cu T350MA 600 (2) 2/0–500 kcmil Cu T600MA1 10 800 (3) 3/0–300 kcmil Cu T800MA1 Type MAY UL Listed Interrupting Ratings Maximum Volts 240 Vac 11 Amperes 115,000 asymmetrical, 100,000 symmetrical For all three-phase delta, grounded B phase applications, contact Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center at 1-800-356-1243. 12 13 Additional Accessories and Modifications Refer to Pages V12-T3-65– V12-T3-79. Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the crossreference on Pages V12-T3-114– V12-T3-167. 2 Not UL Listed. 3 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits. 4 Terminals are shipped separately from breaker. e 60 Hz AC only. 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-42 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Types NB and NHB 1 Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 Type NB 700–1200A, 600V, 60 Hz AC 2, 250 Vdc 3, Two- and Three-Pole Interchangeable Trip NB: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc ■ Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes 4 Low High 2 Complete Breaker Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 5 Includes Pressure Type Copper Terminals 5 Frame Only Standard Catalog Number Saf-T-Vue Catalog Number MARK 75 Catalog Number Standard Catalog Number Saf-T-Vue Catalog Number MARK 75 Catalog Number Standard Saf-T-Vue, MARK 75 Catalog Number Trip Unit Only Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250V DC 36 700 3000 6000 NB2700 NB2700S HNB2700 NB21200F NB21200FS HNB21200F HNB2700T 800 3000 6000 NB2800 NB2800S HNB2800 NB21200F NB21200FS HNB21200F HNB2800T 900 4000 8000 NB2900 NB2900S HNB2900 NB21200F NB21200FS HNB21200F HNB2900T 1000 4000 8000 NB21000 NB21000S HNB21000 NB21200F NB21200FS HNB21200F HNB21000T 1200 4000 8000 NB21200 NB21200S HNB21200 NB21200F NB21200FS HNB21200F HNB21200T 600 3000 6000 — HNB31200F — — — Approx. shipping weight 43 lbs — Approx. shipping weight 29 lbs HNB3600T Approx. shipping weight 3.5 lbs Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only 700 3000 6000 NB3700 NB3700S HNB3700 NB31200F NB31200FS HNB31200F HNB3700T 800 3000 6000 NB3800 NB3800S HNB3800 NB31200F NB31200FS HNB31200F HNB3800T 900 4000 8000 NB3900 NB3900S HNB3900 NB31200F NB31200FS HNB31200F HNB3900T 1000 4000 8000 NB31000 NB31000S HNB31000 NB31200F NB31200FS HNB31200F HNB31000T 1200 4000 8000 NB31200 NB31200S HNB31200 NB31200F NB31200FS HNB31200F Approx. shipping weight 51 lbs Approx. shipping weight 32 lbs HNB31200T Approx. shipping weight 4 lbs Trip Unit Only Magnetic Trip Range 4 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Magnetic Only Breakers, Front Adjustable 78 Two-Pole 6 Three-Pole Low High Catalog Number Catalog Number 1200 3000 6000 HNB26000TM HNB36000TM 1200 4000 8000 HNB28000TM HNB38000TM 1200 5000 10000 HNB210000TM HNB310000TM 1200 6000 12000 HNB212000TM HNB312000TM Continuous Ampere Rating 3 13 14 15 16 Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167. 2 Higher frequency calibration not available. Minimum of 50 Hz calibration available on special order. 3 250 Vdc rating applied only to magnetic only type breakers. 4 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits. 5 Terminals shipped separately from breaker. 6 Two-pole breakers supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole. 7 Frames, terminals, studs, mounting hardware, dimensions and shipping weights are same as standard thermal-magnetic breakers. 8 Not UL Listed. 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-43 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Accessories and Modifications 1 UL Listed Interrupting Ratings 2 Standard Breakers 240 AC 50,000 asymmetrical, 42,000 symmetrical 3 480 AC 35,000 asymmetrical, 30,000 symmetrical 600 AC 25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical 250 DC 12 20,000 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Maximum Volts Amperes MARK 75 Breakers 240 AC 75,000 asymmetrical, 65,000 symmetrical 480 AC 40,000 asymmetrical, 35,000 symmetrical 600 AC 30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical 250 DC 12 20,000 3 Terminals 4 Maximum Amperes Number of Cables, Wire Range, Type, Catalog Number Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals 1000 (3) 3/0–400 kcmil Al/Cu TA1000NB1 1200 (4) 4/0–500 kcmil Al/Cu TA1200NB1 Optional Copper or Al/Cu Pressure Terminals 1000 (3) 3/0–500 kcmil Cu T1000NB1 1200 (4) 3/0–400 kcmil Cu T1200NB1 1200 (3) 500–750 kcmil Al/Cu TA1201NB1 12 13 Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. ■ Special Calibrations Special calibration price additions apply to ampere ratings not listed as standard or for ambients other than 40°C or 50°C. For frequencies other than 0–60 Hz AC (50 Hz AC minimum, 60 Hz AC maximum for ratings of 700A and above), refer to Eaton. See Application Data 29-160 for additional information regarding special conditions. Maximum 400 Hz calibration for type MA is 475A. Note: Not UL Listed. 50°C Calibration Add suffix “V” to catalog number for complete breaker or trip unit only, when ordering breakers to be used in 50°C ambients. For CSA, see Page V12-T3-48. Note: Not UL Listed. 14 Type NB breakers meet requirements for Class 21a circuit breakers, and Type HNB meet requirements for Class 23a, as defined by Federal Specification W-C-375b. 15 16 17 Terminals Two terminals are required per pole. Terminals are UL Listed for wire type and range listed below. When used with aluminum conductors, use joint compound. To order optional copper terminals, add suffix “C” to complete breaker catalog number. Note: Frames, terminals, studs, mounting hardware, dimensions and shipping weights are same as standard thermal magnetic breakers. Magnetic Only Breakers To order a complete breaker, select trip unit, plus frame and terminals. Note: Not UL Listed. Additional Accessories and Modifications Refer to Pages V12-T3-65– V12-T3-79. Notes 1 250 Vdc rating applied only to magnetic only type breakers. 2 Terminals shipped separately from breaker. 3 Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed. 4 MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002. For all three-phase delta, grounded B phase applications, contact Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center at 1-800-356-1243. 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-44 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Type NBY 1 Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 Type NBY 700–1200A, 240V, 60 Hz AC 2, Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip NBY: 240 Vac ■ Complete Breaker Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Magnetic Trip Setting Amperes 3 Low Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 4 Frame Only Trip Unit Only High Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 3 4 Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only 700 3000 6000 NBY3700 NBY31200F HNB3700T 800 3000 6000 NBY3800 NBY31200F HNB3800T 900 4000 8000 NBY3900 NBY31200F HNB3900T 1200 4000 8000 NBY31200 NBY31200F HNB31200T UL Listed Interrupting Ratings Maximum Volts Amperes 240 AC 115,000 asymmetrical, 100,000 symmetrical For all three-phase delta, grounded B phase applications, contact Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center at 1-800-356-1243. Terminals Two terminals are required per pole. Terminals are UL Listed for wire type and range listed below. When used with aluminum conductors, use joint compound. Note: Terminals shipped separately from breaker. Terminals Number of Cables, Max. Wire Range, Amperes Type, Catalog Number Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals (3) 3/0–400 kcmil Al/Cu TA1000NB1 1200 (4) 4/0–500 kcmil Al/Cu TA1200NB1 1200 (3) 500–750 kcmil TA1201NB1 Al/Cu 1000 2 Includes Pressure Type Aluminum Terminals 4 Accessories and Modifications Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. ■ Special Calibrations Special calibration price additions apply to ampere ratings not listed as standard or for ambients other than 40°C or 50°C. For frequencies other than 0–60 Hz AC (50 Hz AC minimum, 60 Hz AC maximum), refer to Eaton. See Application Data 29-160 for additional information regarding special conditions. Note: Not UL Listed. Alternate Copper Pressure Terminals 1000 (3) 3/0–500 kcmil Cu T1000NB1 1200 (4) 3/0–400 kcmil Cu T1200NB1 5 6 50°C Calibration Add suffix “V” to catalog number for complete breaker or trip unit only, when ordering for breakers to be used in 50°C ambients. Note: Not UL Listed. 7 8 9 10 For CSA, see Page V12-T3-48. Type NBY breakers are not defined by Federal Specification W-C-375b. Additional Accessories and Modifications Refer to Pages V12-T3-65– V12-T3-79. Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the crossreference on Pages V12-T3-114– V12-T3-167. 2 Higher frequency calibration not available. Minimum of 50 Hz calibration available on special order. 3 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits. 4 Terminals shipped separately from breaker. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-45 3 1 2 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Type PB Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 Type PB 600–25s00A, 600V, 60 Cycle AC 2, 250 Vdc 3, Two- and Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip Rear Connected PB ■ Breaker: 600 Vac Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 3 Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes 45 Complete Breaker Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Rear Connectors Includes Busbar Connectors 6 Frame Only Trip Unit Only Low High Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Two-Pole, 600 Vac Only 7 4 600 1500 5000 PB2600 PB22500F PB2600T 700 1500 5000 PB2700 PB22500F PB2700T 5 800 1500 5000 PB2800 PB22500F PB2800T 900 1500 5000 PB2900 PB22500F PB2900T 6 1000 1500 5000 PB21000 PB22500F PB21000T 1200 2000 6000 PB21200 PB22500F PB21200T 7 1400 2500 7000 PB21400 PB22500F PB21400T 1600 3000 8000 PB21600 PB22500F PB21600T 8 1800 3000 8000 PB21800 PB22500F PB21800T 2000 3000 8000 PB22000 PB22500F PB22000T Approx. shipping weight 132 lbs 98 lbs 18 lbs 3000 PB22500 PB22500F PB22500T 144 lbs 98 lbs 18 lbs 9 2500 8000 Approx. shipping weight 10 Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only—Not UL Listed 11 600 1500 5000 PB3600 PB32500F PB3600T 700 1500 5000 PB3700 PB32500F PB3700T 12 800 1500 5000 PB3800 PB32500F PB3800T 900 1500 5000 PB3900 PB32500F PB3900T 13 1000 1500 5000 PB31000 PB32500F PB31000T 1200 2000 6000 PB31200 PB32500F PB31200T 1400 2500 7000 PB31400 PB32500F PB31400T 14 1600 3000 8000 PB31600 PB32500F PB31600T 1800 3000 8000 PB31800 PB32500F PB31800T 15 2000 3000 8000 PB32000 PB32500F PB32000T Approx. shipping weight 155 lbs 108 lbs 23 lbs 16 2500 3000 PB32500 PB32500F PB32500T 173 lbs 108 lbs 23 lbs 8000 Approx. shipping weight 17 Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167. 2 Higher frequency calibration not available. Minimum of 50 Hz calibration available on special order. 3 Available only on magnetic only breakers. 4 Higher magnetic trip settings are available as special calibration. Refer to magnetic only breakers for specific trip ranges. 5 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits. 6 Shipped separately from breaker. 7 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole. 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-46 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Type PBF 1 Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 Type PBF Front-Connected 600–2000A, 600V, 60 Cycle AC 2, 250 Vdc 3, Two- and Three-Pole, PBF Front Connected: Interchangeable Trip 600 Vac ■ Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 2 3 Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes (Set on High Side, Adjustable to Lower Limits) Complete Breaker Shipped As: Includes Busbar Connectors 4 Frame Only Includes Busbar Connectors 4 Trip Unit Only Low High Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 4 5 Two-Pole, 600 Vac 5 600 1500 5000 PBF2600 PBF22000F PBF2600T 700 1500 5000 PBF2700 PBF22000F PBF2700T 800 1500 5000 PBF2800 PBF22000F PBF2800T 900 1500 5000 PBF2900 PBF22000F PBF2900T 1000 1500 5000 PBF21000 PBF22000F PBF21000T 1200 2000 6000 PBF21200 PBF22000F PBF21200T 1400 2500 7000 PBF21400 PBF22000F PBF21400T 1600 3000 8000 PBF21600 PBF22000F PBF21600T 1800 3000 8000 PBF21800 PBF22000F PBF21800T 2000 3000 8000 PBF22000 PBF22000F PBF22000T 9 10 Three-Pole, 600 Vac—Not UL Listed 600 1500 5000 PBF3600 PBF32000F PBF3600T 700 1500 5000 PBF3700 PBF32000F PBF3700T 800 1500 5000 PBF3800 PBF32000F PBF3800T 900 1500 5000 PBF3900 PBF32000F PBF3900T 1000 1500 5000 PBF31000 PBF32000F PBF31000T 1200 2000 6000 PBF31200 PBF32000F PBF31200T 1400 2500 7000 PBF31400 PBF32000F PBF31400T 1600 3000 8000 PBF31600 PBF32000F PBF31600T 1800 3000 8000 PBF31800 PBF32000F PBF31800T 2000 3000 8000 PBF32000 PBF32000F PBF32000T Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167. 2 Higher frequency calibration not available. Minimum of 50 Hz calibration available on special order. 3 Available only on magnetic only breakers. 4 Included with frame. 5 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole. 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-47 3 1 2 3 4 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Types PB and PBF Accessories and Modifications Interrupting Ratings Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 PB breakers are not UL Listed. Special Breakers 2 Magnetic Only, Front Adjustable 3 Trip Unit Only Maximum Volts ■ Continuous Ampere Rating Amperes 2 150,000 asymmetrical, 125,000 symmetrical 480 AC 2 115,000 asymmetrical, 100,000 symmetrical 600 AC 2 115,000 asymmetrical, 100,000 symmetrical 250 DC 2 75,000A 6 240 AC Magnetic Trip Range, Amperes 4 Two-Pole 5 Three-Pole Low Catalog Number Catalog Number For all three-phase delta, grounded B phase applications, contact Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center at 1-800-356-1243. High For Rear-Connected Type PB Breakers 2000 2000 6000 PB26000TM PB36000TM 6 Magnetic Only Breakers To order a complete breaker, select trip unit, plus frame and connectors. 2000 2500 7000 PB27000TM PB37000TM Note: Not UL Listed. 2000 3000 8000 PB28000TM PB38000TM 7 2000 3500 10,000 PB210000TM PB310000TM 2000 4000 12,000 PB212000TM PB312000TM 8 2500 4000 12,000 373D488G08 373D488G09 5 2000 1500 5000 PB25000TM PB35000TM 9 5000 PBF25000TM PBF35000TM 2000 2000 6000 PBF26000TM PBF36000TM 10 2000 2500 7000 PBF27000TM PBF37000TM 2000 3000 8000 PBF28000TM PBF38000TM 11 2000 3500 10,000 PBF210000TM PBF310000TM 2000 4000 12,000 PBF212000TM PBF312000TM 14 15 16 17 18 19 Busbar Connections—“T” Connector (For Cu/AI Bus) Catalog Number 1500 13 “T” Connector For Front-Connected Type PBF Breakers 2000 12 Busbar Connections BA2000PB Two required per pole. For rear bus connection of breakers through 2000A. Accepts up to four bus bolts. May be rotated 90°. Note: Shipped separately from breaker. Accessories and Modifications Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. ■ Special Calibrations Special calibration price additions apply to ampere ratings not listed as standard, or for ambients other than 40°C or 50°C. For frequencies other than 0–60 Hz AC, refer to Eaton. See Application Data 29-160 for information regarding special conditions. Note: Not UL Listed. 20 50°C Calibration Add suffix “V” to catalog number for complete breaker or trip unit only, when ordering breakers to be used in 50°C ambients. Type PB breakers meet the requirements for Class 25a circuit breakers as defined by Federal Specification W-C-375b. “C” Connector “C” Connector (For Cu/AI Bus) Breaker Amperes Catalog Number 2500 BA2500PB Two required per pole. For rear bus connection of 2500A breakers. Cable Connector Cable Connector Catalog Number 505C706G04 Fits “T” Connector and 2000A front-connected breakers. Accepts four 400–600 kcmil copper cables. Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167. 2 Not UL Listed. 3 Frames, connectors, dimensions and shipping weights are same as thermal-magnetic breakers. 4 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits. 5 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole. 6 Based on NEMA test procedure. 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-48 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Types LC, LCC, LCA, LCCA, MARK 75 Types HLC, HLCC, HLCA, HLCCA SELTRONIC with Solid-State Trip Units 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz Complete breaker requires frame and rating plug. See the table and terminals on Page V12-T3-60. Extra current transformer included for neutral. See accessories on Page V12-T3-65 for remote ground fault trip indicator. Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 Breakers for Standard Applications—Frame Only LCA: 600 Vac ■ Number of Poles 2 1 2 3 Standard (Long Delay and Short Time) Short Time Only 3 Long Delay, Short Time and Adjustable Short Delay Time (0.06–0.22 sec.) Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 4 Types LC 150 and LCA 150 (75–150A) 2 LC2150F LC2150FM LCA2150F 3 LC3150F LC3150FM LCA3150F 5 6 MARK 75 Types HLC 150 and HLCA 150 (75–150A) 2 HLC2150F HLC2150FM HLCA2150F 3 HLC3150F HLC3150FM HLCA3150F 7 Types LC 300 and LCA 300 (150–300A) 2 LC2300F LC2300FM LCA2300F 3 LC3300F LC3300FM LCA3300F 8 9 MARK 75 Types HLC 300 and HLCA 300 (150–300A) 2 HLC2300F HLC2300FM HLCA2300F 3 HLC3300F HLC3300FM HLCA3300F 10 Types LC 400 and LCA 400 (200–400A) 2 LC2400F LC2400FM LCA2400F 3 LC3400F LC3400FM LCA3400F 11 12 MARK 75 Types HLC 400 and HLCA 400 (200–400A) 2 HLC2400F HLC2400FM HLCA2400F 3 HLC3400F HLC3400FM HLCA3400F 13 Types LC 600 and LCA 600 (300–600A) 2 LC2600F LC2600FM LCA2600F 3 LC3600F LC3600FM LCA3600F 14 15 MARK 75 Types HLC 600 and HLCA 600 (300–600A) 2 HLC2600F HLC2600FM HLCA2600F 3 HLC3600F HLC3600FM HLCA3600F 16 Breakers for Applications at 100% Rating—Frame Only Number of Poles 2 Standard (Long Delay and Short Time) Short Time Only 3 Long Delay, Short Time and Adjustable Short Delay Time (0.06–0.22 sec.) Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number — LCCA3600F 18 Types LCC 600 and LCCA 600 (300–600A) 3 LCC3600F 19 MARK 75 Types HLCC 600 and HLCCA 600 (300–600A) 3 HLCC3600F — 17 HLCCA3600F 20 Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167. 2 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole. 3 UL Recognized component. 21 MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002. 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-49 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Types LCG, LCCG, LCGA, LCCGA, MARK 75 HLCG, HLCCG, HLCGA, HLCCGA SELTRONIC with Built-In Ground Fault Protection ■ Complete breaker requires frame and rating plug. See the table and terminals on Page V12-T3-60. Extra current transformer included for neutral. See accessories on Page V12-T3-65 for remote ground fault trip indicator. Types LCG 150 and LCGA 150 (75–150A) 3 Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. ■ Note: Available without extra CT for neutral. Order by description as similar to above except without neutral CT or external CT terminal connections at same price. Note the standard ground fault unit can also be used without the neutral CT. Note: These breakers use LC terminals. The fourth CT uses MC breaker terminals, Page V12-T3-53. Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. Breakers for Standard Application—Frame Only Number of Poles 2 3 Standard (Long Delay, Short Time) and Ground Fault Trip Long Delay, Short Time, Adjustable Short Delay Time and Ground Fault Trip Ground Fault Characteristics Pickup Setting Amperes Time Setting LCGA3150F 50–150 3.5–30 Cy HLCGA3150F 50–150 3.5–30 Cy LCGA3300F 60–300 3.5–30 Cy HLCGA3300F 60–300 3.5–30 Cy LCGA3400F 0–400 3.5–30 Cy 80–400 3.5–30 Cy 120–600 3.5–30 Cy 120–600 3.5–30 Cy Catalog Number LCG3150F MARK 75 Types HLCG 150 and HLCGA 150 (75–150A) 3 HLCG3150F 1 3 Types LCG 300 and LCGA 300 (150–300A) 3 3 LCG3300F MARK 75 Types HLCG 300 and HLCGA 300 (150–300A) 3 3 HLCG3300F Types LCG 400 and LCGA 400 (200–400A) 3 3 LCG3400F MARK 75 Types HLCG 400 and HLCGA 400 (200–400A) 3 HLCG3400F 3 HLCGA3400F Types LCG 600 and LCGA 600 (300–600 Amperes) 3 3 LCG3600F LCGA3600F MARK 75 Types HLCG 600 and HLCGA 600 (300–600A) 3 3 HLCG3600F HLCGA3600F Breakers for Application at 100% Rating—Frame Only Number of Poles 2 Standard (Long Delay, Short Time) and Ground Fault Trip Long Delay, Short Time, Adjustable Short Delay Time and Ground Fault Trip Catalog Number Ground Fault Characteristics Pickup Setting Amperes Time Setting 120–600 3.5–30 Cy 120–600 3.5–30 Cy Types LCCG 600 and LCCGA 600 (300–600A) 3 13 3 LCCG3600F LCCGA3600F MARK 75 Types HLCCG 600 and HLCCGA 600 (300–600A) 3 14 3 HLCCG3600F HLCCGA3600F Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167. 2 Two-pole breakers supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole. 3 For applications other than standard residual scheme, see Application Data 29-160. 15 16 MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002. 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-50 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Types LCG, LCCG, LCGA, LCCGA, MARK 75 HLCG, HLCCG, HLCGA, HLCCGA SELTRONIC with Built-In Ground Fault Protection Accessories and Modifications Field-Mountable Attachments Additional Accessories and Modifications 1 Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–V12-T3-79. Terminals 2 Note: Order separately. 12345 Description Style Number Two terminals are required per pole. Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external source 32 to 120 Vdc to 60 Hz 6 1371D11G22 Terminals are UL Listed for wire type and range listed below. When used with aluminum cable, use joint compound. 240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz 7 1371D11G32 Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external source, plus a 1A-1B auxiliary switch 32 to 120 Vdc to 60 Hz 6 1371D11G15 240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz 7 150, 300 and 400A Frames Only Maximum Amperes Number of Cables, Wire Range, Type Catalog Number 1371D11G25 Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from 24 Vdc source 1371D93G01 1A-1B auxiliary switch 1371D11G03 24 Vdc shunt trip and 1A-1B auxiliary switch 1371D94G08 Al/Cu Pressure Terminals 225 (1) #6–350 kcmil Cu, or (1) #4–350 kcmil Al TA225LA1 400 (1) #4–250 kcmil Al/Cu, plus (1) 3/0–600 kcmil Al/Cu TA400LA1 Optional Copper Pressure Terminals For CSA, see Page V12-T3-48. Type LC breakers meet requirements for Class 21a circuit breakers, and Type HLC meet requirements for Class 23a as defined by Federal Specification W-C-375b. UL Listed Interrupting Ratings 8 Maximum Volts Amperes Standard Breakers 225 (1) #6–350 kcmil Cu T225LA 225 (1) #6–250 kcmil Cu T225LBF 400 (1) #4–250 kcmil Cu, plus (1) 3/0–600 kcmil Cu T401LA 600A Frame Only Maximum Amperes Number of Cables, Wire Range, Type Catalog Number Al/Cu Pressure Terminals 240 AC 50,000 Asymmetrical, 42,000 Symmetrical 500 (2) 250–350 kcmil Al/Cu TA602LD 480 AC 35,000 Asymmetrical, 30,000 Symmetrical 600 (2) 400–500 kcmil Al/Cu TA603LA 600 AC 25,000 Asymmetrical, 22,000 Symmetrical 600 (std.) (2) 250–500 kcmil Al/Cu TA600LA MARK 75 Breakers Optional Copper Pressure Terminals 240 AC 75,000 Asymmetrical, 65,000 Symmetrical 480 AC 40,000 Asymmetrical, 35,000 Symmetrical 600 AC 30,000 Asymmetrical, 25,000 Symmetrical For all three-phase delta, grounded B phase applications, contact Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center at 1-800-356-1243. 600 (2) 250–500 kcmil Cu T600LA Notes 1 Only one attachment may be mounted per breaker. 2 Contact Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center for other combinations. 3 Molded-case switches do not use standard SELTRONIC attachments, and should be ordered by description for factory mounting. 4 Does not void listing of UL Listed breakers. 5 Left pole mounting. 6 Rated 48 volts minimum for ground fault applications requiring tripping at 55% of voltage. 7 Not for use on ground fault applications. 8 Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to molded-case switches. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002. 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-51 3 1 2 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Types MC, MCC, MCA, MCCA, MARK 75 Types HMC, HMCC, HMCA, HMCCA SELTRONIC with Solid-State Trip Units 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 Breakers for Standard Applications—Frame Only MCA: 600 Vac ■ Number of Poles 2 3 Standard (Long Delay and Short Time) Short Time Only 3 Long Delay, Short Time and Adjustable Short Delay Time (0.08 –0.30 seconds) Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Types MC and MCA (400–800A) 4 2 MC2800F MC2800FM MCA2800F 3 MC3800F MC3800FM MCA3800F 5 MARK 75 Types HMC and HMCA (400–800A) 2 HMC2800F HMC2800FM HMCA2800F 6 3 HMC3800F HMC3800FM HMCA3800F Breakers for Application at 100% Rating—Frame Only 7 Number of Poles 2 8 1 Standard (Long Delay and Short Time) Short Time Only 3 Long Delay, Short Time and Adjustable Short Delay Time (0.08 –0.30 seconds) Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number — MCCA3800F — HMCCA3800F Types MCC and MCCA (400–800A) 9 3 10 3 MCC3800F MARK 75 Types HMCC and HMCCA (400–800A) HMCC3800F Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. Effective 2/1/02, only the MARK 75 version is available. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167. 2 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current-carrying parts omitted from center pole. 3 UL Recognized component. 11 12 Type MC800 molded-case switch; refer to Page V12-T3-62. MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002. 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-52 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Types MCG, MCCG, MCGA, MCCGA and MARK 75 Types HMCG, HMCCG, HMCGA, HMCCGA SELTRONIC with Built-In Ground Fault Protection Accessories and Modifications Complete breaker requires frame and rating plug. See the table and terminals on Page V12-T3-60. Extra current transformer included for neutral. See accessories on Page V12-T3-65 for remote ground fault trip indicator. Description Style Number Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external source 32 to 120 Vdc to 60 Hz 7 1371D72G22 240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz 8 1371D72G32 Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external source, plus 1a-1b auxiliary switch 32 to 120 Vdc to 60 Hz 7 1371D72G15 4 240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz 8 1371D72G25 Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external 24 Vdc source 1370D85G01 5 1A-1B auxiliary switch 1371D72G03 Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 ■ Note: Available without extra CT for neutral. Order by description as similar to above except without neutral CT or external CT terminal connections at same price. Note: Order two of the desired terminals for each pole of the breaker and two for the neutral CT. The standard ground fault unit can also be used without the neutral CT. MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002. 1 Field-Mountable Attachments 3456 Number of Poles Standard (Long Delay, Short Time and Ground Fault Trip) Long Delay, Short Time, Adjustable Short Delay Time and Ground Fault Trip Catalog Number Ground Fault Characteristics Time Setting 80–800 3.5–30 Cy 80–800 3.5-30 Cy Types MCG and MCGA (400–800A) 2 3 MCG3800F MCGA3800F MARK 75 Types HMCG and HMCGA (400–800A) 2 3 HMCG3800F HMCGA3800F Breakers for Application at 100% Rating—Frame Only Number of Poles Standard (Long Delay, Short Time and Ground Fault Trip) Catalog Number Long Delay, Short Time, Adjustable Short Delay Time and Ground Fault Trip Catalog Number Types MCCG and MCCGA (400–800A) 3 MCCG3800F Ground Fault Characteristics Pickup Setting Amperes Time Setting 80–800 3.5–30 Cy 80–800 3.5–30 Cy 2 MCCGA3800F HMCCG3800F HMCCGA3800F 9 Type MC SELTRONIC breakers meet requirements for Class 21a, and MARK 75. Type HMC meet Class 23a as defined by Federal Spec. W-C-375b. 10 UL Listed Interrupting Capacity, rms Symmetrical Amperes 9 11 AC Volts Breaker 240 480 600 MC, MCG 42,000 30,000 22,000 HMC, HMCG 65,000 50,000 25,000 12 13 14 Terminals Terminals—Two Terminals Required Per Pole MARK 75 Types HMCCG and HMCCGA (400–800A) 2 3 6 8 Rating Plugs Select from the table on Page V12-T3-60. For CSA, see Page V12-T3-48. Pickup Setting Amperes 3 7 Additional Accessories and Modifications Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–V12-T3-79. Breakers for Standard Applications—Frame Only 2 Maximum Amperes Number of Cables, Wire Range, Type Catalog Number Al/Cu Pressure Terminals 15 16 600 (2) #1–500 kcmil TA700MA1 j 800 (std.) (3) 3/0–400 kcmil TA800MA2 j 800 (2) 500–750 kcmil TA801MA j 17 18 Optional Copper Pressure Terminals 600 (2) 2/0–500 kcmil T600MA1 800 (3) 3/0–300 kcmil T800MA1 Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. Effective 2/1/02, only the MARK 75 version is available. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167. 2 For applications other than standard residual scheme, see Application Data 29-160. 3 Does not void listing of UL Listed breakers. 4 Only one of the attachments may be mounted per breaker. 5 For other possible combinations, refer to factory. 6 Molded-case switches do not use standard SELTRONIC attachments and should be ordered by description. 7 Rated 48V minimum for ground fault applications requiring tripping at 55% of voltage. 8 Not for ground fault applications. 9 Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to molded-case switches. j Type Al/Cu pressure terminal. Also used on breakers with ground fault and on separately mounted neutral current transformers. MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002. 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-53 3 1 2 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Types NC, NCA, NCG, NCGA, MARK 75 Type HNC, HNCA, HNCG, HNCGA SELTRONIC with Solid-State Trip Units, 600 Vac Complete breaker requires frame and rating plug. See the table and terminals on Page V12-T3-60. Extra current transformer included for neutral. See accessories on Page V12-T3-65 for remote ground fault trip indicator. Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 Type NC, NCA, MARK 75 Type HNC, HNCA SELTRONIC with Solid-State Trip Units, 600 Vac—Frame Only 2 NC: 600 Vac ■ Number of Poles 3 4 Standard (Long Delay and Short Time) Short Time Only 4 Long Delay, Short Time and Adjustable Short Delay Time (0.08 –0.30 Seconds) Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Types NC and NCA (800–1200A) 5 2 NC21200F NC21200FM NCA21200F 3 NC31200F NC31200FM NCA31200F 6 Mark 75 Types HNC and HNCA (800–1200A) 2 HNC21200F HNC21200FM HNCA21200F 7 3 HNC31200F HNC31200FM HNCA31200F 8 9 10 Types NCG, NCGA, and MARK 75 Types HNCG, HNCGA SELTRONIC with Built-In Ground Fault Protection Complete breaker requires frame and rating plug. See the table and terminals on Page V12-T3-60. Extra current transformer included for neutral. See accessories on Page V12-T3-65 for remote ground fault trip indicator. Note: The standard ground fault unit above can also be used without the neutral CT. Order two of the desired terminals for each pole of the breaker and two for the neutral CT. Types NCG, NCGA and MARK 75 Type HNCG, HNCGA SELTRONIC with Built-In Ground Fault Protection— Frame Only 11 Number of Poles 12 Standard (Long Delay, Short Time and Ground Fault Trip) Long Delay, Short Time, Adjustable Short Delay Time, and Ground Fault Trip Catalog Number Catalog Number Pickup Setting Amperes Time Setting NCGA31200F 120–1200 3.5–30 Cy HNCGA31200F 120–1200 3.5–30 Cy Types NCG and NCGA (800–1200A) 13 3 Ground Fault Characteristics 5 NCG31200F MARK 75 Types HNCG and HNCGA (800–1200A) 5 14 3 HNCG31200F Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. Effective 2/1/02, only the MARK 75 version is available. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167. 2 Complete breaker requires frame and rating plug. See the table on Page V12-T3-60. For terminals, see the table on Page V12-T3-55. 3 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current-carrying parts omitted from center pole. 4 UL Recognized component. 5 For applications other than standard residual scheme, see Application Data 29-160. 15 16 17 Type NC 1200A molded-case switch; refer to Page V12-T3-62. MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002. 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-54 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Types NC, NCA, NCG, NCGA, MARK 75 Type HNC, HNCA, HNCG, HNCGA SELTRONIC with Solid-State Trip Units, 600 Vac Accessories and Modifications Field-Mountable Attachments—Left Handed 12345 Rating Plugs Select from the table on Page V12-T3-60. 1 Terminals 2 Note: Two terminals required per pole. Description Style Number Terminals 9 Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external source 32 to 120 Vdc to 60 Hz 6 1372D39G13 Maximum Amperes 240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz 7 1372D39G23 Al/Cu Pressure Terminals Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external source, plus a 1A-1B auxiliary switch 32 to 120 Vdc to 60 Hz 6 1372D39G16 Number of Cables, Wire Range, Type Catalog Number 1000 (3) 3/0–400 kcmil TA1000NB1 j 1200 (std.) (4) 4/0–500 kcmil TA1200NB1 j (3) 500–750 kcmil TA1201NB1 j 1372D39G26 1200 Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external 24 Vdc source 1371D94G05 Optional Copper Pressure Terminals 1A-1B auxiliary switch 1371D39G03 1000 (3) 3/0–500 kcmil T1000NB1 24 Vdc shunt trip and 1A-1B auxiliary switch 1371D94G08 1200 (4) 3/0–400 kcmil T1200NB1 240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz 7 For CSA, see Page V12-T3-48. UL Listed Interrupting Capacity, rms Symmetrical Amperes 8 AC Volts Breaker 240 480 600 NC, NCG 42,000 30,000 22,000 HNC, HNCG 65,000 50,000 25,000 4 5 6 7 8 Additional Accessories and Modifications Type NC SELTRONIC breakers meet requirements for Class 21a, and MARK 75. Type HNC meet Class 23a as defined by Federal Spec. W-C-375b. 3 Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–V12-T3-79. Note: MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002. Notes 1 For other possible combinations, refer to factory. 2 Molded-case switches do not use standard SELTRONIC attachments and should be ordered by description. 3 Does not void listing of UL Listed breakers. 4 Only one of the attachments may be mounted per breaker. 5 Left pole mounting. 6 Rated 48V minimum for ground fault applications requiring tripping at 55% of voltage. 7 Not for ground fault applications. 8 Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to molded-case switches. 9 Also used on breakers with ground fault and on separately mounted neutral current transformers. j Type Al/Cu pressure terminal. 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-55 3 1 2 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Types PC, PCA, PCC, PCCA 2000, 2500 and 3000A SELTRONIC with Solid-State Trip Units, 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz Complete breaker requires frame and rating plug. See the table on Page V12-T3-60 and rear connectors (connectors are included in 3000A and all front-connected frames.) Suitable for reverse-feed applications. Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 Breakers for Standard Applications—Frame Only PC: 600 Vac ■ Number of Poles 2 4 Standard (Long Delay and Short Time) Short Time Only 3 Long Delay, Short Time Trip, and Adjustable Short Delay Time (0.08 –0.30 seconds) Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Type PC 2000, 1000 to 2000A Rear-Connected Breakers 5 6 4 Type PCA 2000 4 Rear-Connected Breakers 2 PC22000F PC22000FM PCA22000F 3 PC32000F PC32000FM PCA32000F Front-Connected Breakers 7 Front-Connected Breakers 2 PCF22000F PCF22000FM PCFA22000F 3 PCF32000F PCF32000FM PCFA32000F Type PC 2500, 1400 to 2500A 4 Rear-Connected Breakers 8 9 Type PCA 2500 4 Rear-Connected Breakers 2 PC22500F PC22500FM PCA22500F 3 PC32500F PC32500FM PCA32500F Front-Connected Breakers 10 Front-Connected Breakers 2 PCF22500F PCF22500FM PCFA22500F 3 PCF32500F PCF32500FM PCFA32500F Type PC 3000, 1600 to 3000A 4 11 12 Type PCA 3000 4 2 PC23000F PC23000FM PCA23000F 3 PC33000F PC33000FM PCA33000F Breakers for Standard Application at 100% Rating—Frame Only 13 Number of Poles 2 14 Standard (Long Delay and Short Time) Short Time Only 3 Long Delay, Short Time Trip, and Adjustable Short Delay Time (0.08 –0.30 seconds) Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Type PCC 2000, 1000 to 2000A 15 5—Rear-Connected Breakers 2 PCC22000F PCC22000FM PCCA22000F 3 PCC32000F PCC32000FM PCCA32000F Front Connected Breakers 16 17 2 PCCF22000F PCCF22000FM PCCFA22000F 3 PCCF32000F PCCF32000FM PCCFA32000F Type PCC 2500, 1400 to 2500A 18 5—Rear-Connected Breakers 2 PCC22500F PCC22500FM PCCA22500F 3 PCC32500F PCC32500FM PCCA32500F Front-Connected Breakers 19 2 PCCF22500F PCCF22500FM PCCFA22500F 3 PCCF32500F PCCF32500FM PCCFA32500F 20 Type PC 3000, 1600 to 3000A 5 2 PCC23000F PCC23000FM PCCA23000F 21 3 PCC33000F PCC33000FM PCCA33000F Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167. 2 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole. 3 UL Recognized component. 4 UL Listed for standard applications. 5 These breakers are UL Listed for application at 100% of rating per NEC exceptions when used in a properly ventilated and listed enclosure. 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-56 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Accessories and Modifications Drawout Mounting Breakers, Three-Pole Only Breaker frame and complete drawout frame with safety tripping interlock. Order by description. Secondary contacts supplied as required at no extra charge. Order required rating plug separately. Refer to Page V12-T3-79. Note: Includes breakers without adjustable short delay time. Rating Plugs Select from the table on Page V12-T3-60. Stationary portion of drawout frame only for future breaker installations, three-pole only. Refer to Page V12-T3-79. Special Type PCC Breakers for SCR Power Supplies These drawout mounting breakers are designed with a 2 to 4 times magnetic trip adjustment and special time delay trip characteristics to provide maximum protection and coordination with SCR power supplies on offshore drilling rigs. Suitable for application at 100% of rating. Order by description. Secondary contacts supplied as required. Order standard rating plugs separately. UL Listed Interrupting Capacity rms Symmetrical Amperes (Standard and Ground Fault Breakers) 1 1 AC Volts Breaker 240 480 600 PC, PCC 125,000 100,000 100,000 2 3 Note 1 Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to molded-case switches. 4 Additional Accessories and Modifications 5 Refer to Pages V12-T3-65– V12-T3-79. 6 7 Availability: PCC2000, PCC2500 drawout-mounting breakers. 8 Type PC and PCC meet requirements of Class 25a as defined in Federal Spec. W-C-375b. 9 10 For CSA, see Page V12-T3-48. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-57 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Types PCG, PCGA, PCCG, PCCGA SELTRONIC with Built-In Ground Fault Protection Includes Extra Current Transformer for Neutral (Optional Remote Ground Fault Trip Indicator Kit, Page V12-T3-65) Complete breaker requires frame and rating plug. See the table on Page V12-T3-60 and rear connectors (except frontconnected frames and 3000A frames include connectors). Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. ■ Note: Available without extra CT for neutral. Order by description as similar to above except without neutral CT or external CT terminal connections at same price. Older catalog numbers: PCFGX—”X” means without fourth CT. Note: The standard ground fault unit listed can also be used without the neutral CT. Breakers for Standard Application—Frame Only Number of Poles Standard (Long Delay, Short Time and Ground Fault Trip) Long Delay, Short Time, Ground Fault Trip, and Adjustable Short Delay Time (0.08 –0.30 Seconds) Catalog Number Catalog Number Type PCG 2000 12—Rear-Connected Breakers 3 PCG32000F Ground Fault Characteristics Pickup Setting Time Setting Type PCGA 2000 12 1000 to 2000A 2—Rear-Connected Breakers PCGA32000F 200–1200 3.5–30 cycles PCFGA32000F 200–1200 3.5–30 cycles Front-Connected Breakers 3 PCFG32000F Type PCG 2500 12—Rear-Connected Breakers 3 PCG32500F Type PCGA 2500 12 1400 to 2500A 2—Rear-Connected Breakers PCGA32500F 240–1200 3.5–30 cycles PCFGA32500F 240–1200 3.5–30 cycles 300–1200 3.5–30 cycles Front-Connected Breakers 3 PCFG32500F Type PCG 3000 12 3 PCG33000F Type PCGA 3000 12 1600 to 3000A 2 PCGA33000F Breakers for Application at 100% Rating—Frame Only Number of Poles Standard (Long Delay, Short Time and Ground Fault Trip) Long Delay, Short Time, Ground Fault Trip, and Adjustable Short Delay Time (0.08 –0.30 Seconds) Catalog Number Catalog Number Type PCCG 2000 3—Rear-Connected Breakers 3 PCCG32000F Ground Fault Characteristics Pickup Setting Time Setting Type PCCGA 2000 3 1000 to 2000A 2—Rear-Connected Breakers PCCGA32000F 200–1200 3.5–30 cycles PCCFGA32000F 200–1200 3.5–30 cycles Front-Connected Breakers 3 PCCFG32000F Type PCCG 2500 3—Rear-Connected Breakers 3 PCCG32500F Type PCCGA 2500 3 1400 to 2500A 2—Rear-Connected Breakers PCCGA32500F 240–1200 3.5–30 cycles PCCFGA32500F 240–1200 3.5–30 cycles 300–1200 3.5–30 cycles 13 Front-Connected Breakers 14 Type PCCG 3000 3 15 Notes 1 UL Listed for standard applications. 2 For application other than standard residual schemes, refer to Application Data 29-160. 3 These breakers are UL Listed for application at 100% of rating per NEC exceptions when used in a properly ventilated and listed enclosure. 3 3 16 PCCFG32500F PCCG33000F Type PCCGA 3000 3 1600 to 3000A 2 PCCGA33000F 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-58 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Types PCG, PCGA, PCCG, PCCGA SELTRONIC with Built-In Ground Fault Protection Accessories and Modifications PC breakers are not UL Listed. Field-Mountable Attachments 123 Busbar Connections “T” Connector Description Style Number Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external source 32 to 120 Vdc to 60 Hz 4 1372D35G22 240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz 5 1372D35G32 Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external source plus 1A-1B auxiliary switch 32 to 120 Vdc to 60 Hz 4 1372D35G15 240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz 5 1372D35G25 2A-2B auxiliary switch 1372D35G18 Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external 24 Vdc source 1371D95G01 1A-1B auxiliary switch 1372D35G03 1A-1B auxiliary switch and 24 Vdc shunt trip 1371D95G04 2A-2B auxiliary switch and 24 Vdc shunt trip 1371D95G07 3A-3B auxiliary switch and 24 Vdc shunt trip 1371D95G10 1 Busbar Connections—“T” Connector (For Cu/AI Bus) Catalog Number 3 BA2000PB 4 Two required per pole. For rear bus connection of breakers through 2000A. Accepts up to four bus bolts. May be rotated 90°. 5 Note: Shipped separately from breaker. 6 “C” Connector “C” Connector (For Cu/AI Bus) Breaker Amperes Catalog Number 2500 BA2500PB Two required per pole. For rear bus connection of 2500A breakers. Rear Bus Connectors Cable Connector Connector Style/Catalog Number PC2000 7, PCC2000 7 BA2000PB PC2500 7, PCC2500 7 BA2500PB PC3000, PCC3000 Included in frame Racking Crank for Drawout Frames To engage or withdraw the moving portion of the drawout. A standard 0.50-inch hex socket with extension can be used for this purpose. Racking Crank Style Number 7 8 Rear Bus Connectors Two required per pole. Fixed mounting breakers. Breaker Frame 6 2 9 10 Cable Connector Catalog Number 11 505C706G04 12 Cell Switches Mounted on Drawout Frames, All Ratings A maximum of four switches can be provided. Order by description. Each switch provides a NO and NC contact that transfers before reaching the test position when being withdrawn, and after the test position when being racked in. Fits “T” Connector and 2000A front-connected breakers. Accepts four 400–600 kcmil copper cables. 13 Notes 1 For other possible combinations, contact your local Eaton Field Sales office. 2 Only one of these attachments may be mounted per breaker. 3 Left pole mounting. 4 Rated 48V minimum for ground fault applications. 5 Not for ground fault applications. 6 Also apply to equivalent ratings of PCG and PCCG ground fault breakers. 7 Not required for front-connected frames. 14 15 16 17 765A767G01 18 19 Approximate Shipping Weights, PC and PCC Breakers (Three-Pole) Breaker Rating PC, PCC PCF, PCCF PCG, PCCG PCFG, PCCFG 2000 136 lbs 163 lbs 160 lbs 185 lbs 2500 145 lbs 175 lbs 170 lbs 200 lbs 3000 220 lbs — 245 lbs — 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-59 3 1 2 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities SELTRONIC Rating Plug Selection Data Rating plugs listed below are for both standard breakers and breakers with built-in ground fault protection. Rating Plug Selection Data Rating Plugs Only (For Two- or Three-Pole Frames) Rating Plugs Only (For Two- or Three-Pole Frames) 3 4 5 6 Continuous Ampere Rating 1 Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes Fixed Rating Plugs Adjustable Rating Plugs 23 Low Catalog Number Catalog Number High For 150A Frames: LC, LCA, LCG, LCGA, HLC, HLCA, HLCG, HLCGA 75 225 Continuous Ampere Rating 1 Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes Fixed Rating Plugs Adjustable Rating Plugs 23 Low Catalog Number Catalog Number High For 1200A Frames: NC, NCA, NCG, NCGA, HNC, HNCA, HNCG, HNCGA 750 1LC75 — 800 1600 6400 12NC800 A12NC800 4 90 270 900 1LC90 — 900 1800 7200 12NC900 A12NC900 100 300 1000 1LC100 A1LC100 4 1000 2000 8000 12NC1000 A12NC1000 125 375 1250 1LC125 A1LC125 1200 2400 9600 12NC1200 A12NC1200 5 150 450 1500 1LC150 A1LC150 5 For 2000A Frames: PC, PCA, PCC, PCCA, PCG, PCGA, PCCG, PCCGA 7 For 300A Frames: LC, LCA, LCG, LCGA, HLC, HLCA, HLCA, HLCG, HLCGA 1000 2000 8000 20PC1000 — 150 450 1500 3LC150 — 1200 2400 9600 20PC1200 — 8 175 525 1750 3LC175 — 1400 2800 11,200 20PC1400 — 200 600 2000 3LC200 — 1600 3200 12,800 20PC1600 A20PC1600 9 225 675 2250 3LC225 A3LC225 1800 3600 14,400 20PC1800 A20PC1800 250 750 2500 3LC250 A3LC250 2000 4000 16,000 20PC2000 A20PC2000 5 10 275 825 2750 3LC275 A3LC275 For 2500A Frames: PC, PCA, PCC, PCCA, PCG, PCGA, PCCG, PCCGA 300 900 3000 3LC300 A3LC300 5 1400 2800 11,200 25PC1400 — 11 For 400A Frames: LC, LCA, LCG, LCGA, HLC, HLCA, HLCG, HLCGA 1600 3200 12,800 25PC1600 — 200 600 2000 4LC200 — 1800 3600 14,400 25PC1800 A25PC1800 12 225 675 2250 4LC225 — 2000 4000 16,000 25PC2000 A25PC2000 250 750 2500 4LC250 — 2500 5000 20,000 25PC2500 A25PC2500 5 13 300 900 3000 4LC300 A4LC300 For 3000A Frames: PC, PCA, PCC, PCCA, PCG, PCGA, PCCG, PCCGA 350 1050 3500 4LC350 A4LC350 1600 3200 12,800 30PC1600 — 400 1200 4000 4LC400 A4LC400 5 1800 3600 14,400 30PC1800 — 2000 4000 16,000 30PC2000 — 2500 5000 20,000 30PC2500 A30PC2500 3000 6000 24,000 30PC3000 A30PC3000 5 14 15 For 600A Frames: LC, LCA, LCG, LCGA, HLC, HLCA, HLCG, HLCGA, LCC, LCCA, HLCC, HLCCA, LCCG, LCCGA, HLCCG, HLCCGA 300 900 3000 6LC300 — 350 1050 3500 6LC350 — 16 400 1200 4000 6LC400 A6LC400 4 450 1350 4500 6LC450 A6LC450 17 500 1500 5000 6LC500 A6LC500 600 1800 6000 6LC600 A6LC600 5 18 19 20 For 800A Frames: MC, MCA, MCG, MCGA, HMC, HMCA, HMCG, HMCGA, MCC, MCCA, HMCC, HMCCA, MCCG, MCCGA, HMCCG, HMCCGA, MDS 400 1200 4000 8MC400 — 500 1500 5000 8MC500 A8MC500 6 600 1800 6000 8MC600 A8MC600 700 2100 7000 8MC700 A8MC700 800 2400 8000 8MC800 A8MC800 5 21 Notes 1 Ampere rating when used in short time only frames: LC-150: 150A MC-800: 800A PC-3000: 3000A LC-300: 300A NC-1200: 1200A LCL-250: 250A LC-400: 400A PC-2000: 2000A LCL-400: 400A LC-600: 600A PC-2500: 2500A 2 Magnetic trip range of adjustable rating plugs: LC, HLC, MC, HMC: 3 to 10 times ampere setting NC, HNC, PC, PCC, LCL-400: 2 to 8 times ampere setting LCL-250: 3 to 9 times ampere setting 3 Adjustable 70 to 100% except as noted. 4 Adjustable 75 to 100%. 5 Adjustable 50 to 100%. 6 Adjustable 80 to 100%. Contact Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center for old style (three prong) ground fault rating plugs. 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-60 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Molded-Case Switches 1 Molded-case switches are UL Listed devices and are available only as high magnetic trip type with fixed trip setting. Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 Molded-Case Switches with High Magnetic Trip (Fixed Trip Setting) 2 ■ Number of Poles Maximum Volts Maximum Amperes Molded-Case Switch Terminal Data Switch Catalog Number 23 MCS Type Maximum Switch Amperes Wire Type Number of Wires Wire Range Terminal Type or Catalog Number 2 240 400 DA2400WK Standard Terminals 3 240 400 DA3400WK DA, LB, LBB 400 Cu only 2 3/0–250 kcmil T400DA2 1 120 100 EB1100LK EB, EHB, FB 100 Cu 1 #14–1/0 Pressure 2 240 100 EB2100LK FB 150 Cu/Al 1 #4–4/0 Pressure 3 240 100 EB3100LK JA, KA 225 Cu/Al 1 #4–350 kcmil TA225LA1 3 240 100 EB3100SLK JB, KB Cu/Al 1 #4–350 kcmil TA250KB 1 277 100 EHB1100LK 2 480 100 EHB2100LK 3 480 100 EHB3100LK 3 480 100 EHB3100SLK 2 600 100 FB2100LK 2 600 150 FB2150LK 250 Optional Terminals 3 4 5 6 7 8 DA, LB, LBB 400 — — — — EB, EHB, FB 100 Cu/Al 1 #4–4/0 Pressure FB 150 — — — — JA, KA 225 Cu 1 #6–350 kcmil T225LA JB, KB 250 Cu 1 #4–350 kcmil T250KB 9 10 3 600 100 FB3100LK 3 600 150 FB3150LK 3 600 150 FB3150SLK 4 277/480 100 FB4100LK 4 277/480 150 FB4150LK Frame Rating Trip Setting (Amperes) Tolerance (%) 12 100 1000 ±20 13 11 Molded-Case Switches with High Magnetic Trip— Trip Setting and Tolerance 2 600 225 JA2225WK EB 2 600 225 JA2225WSK EHB/FB 100 1200 ±20 150 1500 ±20 3 600 225 JA3225WK FB 3 600 225 JA3225WSK DA/LB/LBB 400 4000 +10 –0 2 600 250 JB2250WK JA/KA 225 2250 2 600 250 JB2250WSK +10 –0 15 3 600 250 JB3250WK JB/KB 250 2500 3 600 250 JB3250WSK +10 –0 16 2 600 225 KA2225WK 2 600 225 KA2225WSK 3 600 225 KA3225WK 3 600 225 KA3225WSK 2 600 250 KB2250WK 2 600 250 KB2250WSK 3 600 250 KB3250WK 3 600 250 KB3250WSK 2 600 400 LB2400WK 2 600 400 LB2400WSK 3 600 400 LB3400WK 3 600 400 LB3400WSK 2 600 400 LBB2400WK 2 600 400 LBB2400WSK 3 600 400 LBB3400WK 3 600 400 LBB3400WSK 14 Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167. 2 Catalog number suffix identification: K = Molded-case switch with high magnetic trip (fixed trip setting) S = Saf-T-Vue cover L = With line and load terminals W = No terminals 3 Molded-case switch dimensions are the same as the equivalent thermal-magnetic breaker. Refer to Dimension Sheet 29-171. 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-61 3 1 2 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 Molded-Case Switches with High Magnetic Trip Molded-Case Switch Terminal Data (Fixed Trip Setting) ■ Number of Poles Maximum Volts Maximum Amperes Switch Catalog Number 23 CA2225KW MCS Type Maximum Switch Amperes Wire Range Terminal Type or Wire Number Catalog Type of Wires Number 3 2 240 225 3 240 225 CA3225KW Standard Terminals (Aluminum Body) 4 2 600 400 LA2400WK CA 225 #1–300 kcmil Cu/Al 1 TA225CA2 2 600 400 LA2400WSK LA400, LAB 400 Cu/Al 1 TA400LA1 2 600 600 LA2600WK #4–250 kcmil, plus 3/0–600 kcmil 2 600 600 LA2600WSK LA600, LC600 600 250/500 kcmil Cu/Al 2 TA600LA 3 600 400 LA3400WK MC, MA 800 3/0–400 kcmil Cu/Al 3 TA800MA2 3 600 400 LA3400WSK NC, NB 1200 4/0–500 kcmil Cu/Al 4 TA1200NB1 3 600 400 LA3600WK NC, NB 1200 — — — 3 600 400 LA3600WSK PC2000, PCC2000 2000 BA2000PB rear bus connector 2 600 400 LAB2400WK 2 600 400 LAB2400WSK 5 6 7 — PC2500, PCC2500 2500 BA2500PB rear bus connector PC3000, PCC3000 3000 Rear bus connector included in frame 8 3 600 400 LAB3400WK 3 600 400 LAB3400WSK Optional Terminals 9 2 600 600 LC2600WK 4 CA 225 — — — — 3 600 600 LC3600WK 4 LA400, LAB 400 Cu 1 T401LA 2 600 600 LCC2600WK 4 #4–250 kcmil, plus 3/0–600 kcmil 3 600 600 LCC3600WK 4 LA600, LC600 600 250/500 kcmil Cu 2 T600LA 2 600 800 MA2800WK MC, MA 800 3/0–300 kcmil Cu 3 T800MA1 11 2 600 800 MA2800WSK NC, NB 1200 3/0–400 kcmil Cu 4 T1200NB1 3 600 800 MA3800WK Cu/Al 3 12 3 600 800 MA3800WSK 2 600 800 MC2800WK 4 3 600 800 MC3800WK 4 10 13 4 2 600 800 MCC2800WK 3 600 800 MCC3800WK 4 2 600 1200 NB21200WK 2 600 1200 NB21200WSK 3 600 1200 NB31200WK 3 600 1200 NB31200WSK 2 600 1200 NC21200WK 4 16 3 600 1200 NC31200WK 4 2 600 2000 PB22000WK 17 2 600 2500 PB22500WK 3 600 2000 PB32000WK 14 15 18 3 600 2500 PB32500WK 2 600 2000 PBF22000K 3 600 2000 PBF32000WK 19 25 600 2000 PC22000WK 25 600 2500 PC22500WK 20 25 600 3000 PC23000K 35 600 2000 PC32000WK 35 600 2500 PC32500WK 21 22 23 24 35 600 3000 PC33000K 25 600 2000 PCC22000WK 25 600 2500 PCC22500WK 25 600 3000 PCC23000K 35 600 2000 PCC32000WK 35 600 2500 PCC32500WK 35 600 3000 PCC33000K 25 600 2000 PCF22000K 35 600 2000 PCF32000K NC, NB 1200 500–750 kcmil PC2000, PCC2000 2000 BA2000PB rear bus connector PC2500, PCC2500 2500 BA2500PB rear bus connector PC3000, PCC3000 3000 Rear bus connector included in frame Molded-Case Switches With High Magnetic Trip— Trip Setting and Tolerance Frame Rating Trip Setting (Amperes) Tolerance (%) CA 225 2250 +20 –10 LA (400) 400 4000 +10 –0 LA/LC 600 6000 +10 –0 MA/MC 800 8000 +10 –0 NB/NC 1200 12,000 +10 –0 PB/PC 2000–3000 12,000 +10 –0 Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167. 2 Catalog number suffix identification: K = Molded-case switch with high magnetic trip (fixed trip setting) S = Saf-T-Vue cover W = No terminals 3 Molded-case switch dimensions are the same as the equivalent thermal-magnetic breaker. Refer to Dimension Sheet 29-171. 4 For molded-case switch types LC, LCC—use LA attachments; MC and MCC—use MA attachments; NC—use NB attachments. 5 For molded-case switch types PC, PCC and PCF, rating plug is included and use SELTRONIC PC attachments. 25 V12-T3-62 TA1201NB1 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Type MCP Motor Circuit Protector Terminals Sizes 0–4 MCP with Current Limiter The motor circuit protector (MCP) is designed specifically for the protection of motor circuits. It operates on the magnetic principle with a current sensing coil in each of the three poles, with the trippoint adjustable from the front. MCPs are the fastest devices available for clearing low level faults and offer circuit breaker features and convenience— resettable, quick-make quick-break, deadfront and protection against single phasing. Note: Sizes 0–4 only. Terminals Terminals are included with both the MCP and the current limiter. Standard terminals are aluminum alloy, with non-aluminum terminals optional for use with only the MCP. Both standard and optional terminals will accommodate aluminum or copper conductors. Note: Except 400A Size 5. Non-aluminum terminal suitable for copper only. When using aluminum conductors, use of joint compound is recommended. Wire ranges are listed in the terminal table above. Standard Aluminum Optional Non-Aluminum Size 0, 1, 2 #14–#4 #14–1/0 Size 3 #6–3/0 #14–1/0 Size 4 #4–4/0 #4–4/0 Size 5 (250) #4–350 kcmil #4–350 kcmil Size 5 (400) — (2) 3/0–250 kcmil Limiters to 50 #14–#2 — Limiters to 100 #1–4/0 — Limiters to 150 #1–4/0 — 2 3 4 5 6 Motor Circuit Protectors ■ Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 Size 5 MCP 532500 MCPs are rated to correspond to NEMA starter size. Current Limiter Attachment The EL current limiter is an attachment that bolts to the load end of the MCP to provide increased interrupting capacity. The combination is UL Listed as a recognized component for application at up to 200,000A symmetrical at 600 Vac. It is coordinated with the MCP so that normal short circuits will be cleared automatically by the MCP, opening all three poles, and only the rare high fault will cause the limiter to function. Current limiters must be applied as shown in the terminal table above. 1 Terminals MCP or Limiter (Amperes) 7 Starter Size Trip Range, Amperes Continuous Ampere Rating With Standard Aluminum Alloy Terminals Catalog Number With Optional Non-Aluminum Terminals 2 Catalog Number 0 7–22 3 MCP0322R MCP0322CR 0 18–58 7 MCP0358R MCP0358CR 0 50–150 15 MCP03150R MCP03150CR 1 100–300 30 MCP13300R MCP13300CR 2 160–480 50 MCP23480R MCP23480CR 3 275–1000 100 MCP331000R MCP331000CR 4 450–1550 150 MCP431550R MCP431550CR 4 575–1800 150 MCP431800R MCP431800CR 5 1250–2500 250 MCP532500 MCP532500C 5 2000–4000 400 — MCP534000C UL Listed The MCP is UL Listed as a recognized component and requires additional listing by the control manufacturer in combination with a contactor and overload relay. Accessories for MCP For MCP Size Use Accessories For Sizes 0–4 FB 5 (250A) KB 5 (400A) LB 9 10 11 12 13 Base Mounting Hardware No charge when ordered with MCP. Order separately when required. 14 Base Mounting Hardware 16 Description Style Number Current Limiters Sizes 0–4 21C6782G18 Limiter Catalog Numbers For MCP Catalog Numbers 7 Size 5 (250A) 673B125G12 Size 5 (400A) 21C6782G22 EL3003R MCP0322R Modifications for MCP 3 EL3007R MCP0358R Description EL3015R MCP03150R EL3030R MCP13300R EL3050R MCP23480R EL3100R MCP331000R EL3150R MCP431550R EL3150R MCP431800R Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the crossreference on Pages V12-T3-114– V12-T3-167. 2 Catalog numbers ending in CR were previously listed ending in RC. This is a catalog number change only, not a material change. 3 Not UL Listed. 4 Mounts only in right pole; only one Modification marked can be used in MCP (Sizes 0–4). 5 On 400A Size 5, an external resistor is supplied for voltages above 240 Vac and 24 Vdc. 6 On Sizes 0–4 and 250A Size 5, an external resistor is supplied for customer mounting, except for 120 Vac, 12, 24, 125 Vdc. 7 Also applicable to MCPs with optional terminals. Modifications for MCP These modifications must be factory installed. Consult factory for pricing. Auxiliary switches 2As and 2Bs 4—1A and 1B, Shunt trip 4 Undervoltage release 456 Moisture-fungus treatment Accessories for MCP For handle mechanisms refer to Pages V12-T3-95– V12-T3-112. Note: On 400A Size 5, an external resistor is supplied for voltages, above 240 Vac and 24 Vdc. Interrupting Ratings Maximum application current shall be determined by testing the MCP in combination with a contactor and overload relay. Additional capacity can be obtained by using the current limiter attachment. 8 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-63 15 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 3 1 2 3 4 5 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Series C 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Series C 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Earth Leakage The Series C units (prefix only listed below) that included a breaker and integral Earth Leakage module have been replaced by the Series G solution that has the flexibility to add the Earth Leakage module in the field. The Series G solution has an extended range of 15–630A. Ampere Range—15–400A Ampere Rating Series C Four-Pole Series G MCCB Series G MCCB Alt Series G Earth Leakage Module 15 EL4FD3015L EGS4015FFG EGC4015FFG ELEBN4125G 20 EL4FD3020L EGS4020FFG EGC4020FFG ELEBN4125G 25 EL4FD3025L EGS4025FFG EGC4025FFG ELEBN4125G EL4HFD 30 EL4FD3030L EGS4030FFG EGC4030FFG ELEBN4125G ELHFD EL4HFW 35 EL4FD3035L EGS4035FFG EGC4035FFG ELEBN4125G ELHFW EL4HJW 40 EL4FD3040L EGS4040FFG EGC4040FFG ELEBN4125G EL4HKW 45 EL4FD3045L EGS4045FFG EGC4045FFG ELEBN4125G EL4JW 50 EL4FD3050L EGS4050FFG EGC4050FFG ELEBN4125G Catalog Prefix Three-Pole ELFD ELFW ELHMCP ELHJD Four-Pole EL4FD EL4FW 6 ELHJW ELHKD EL4KW 60 EL4FD3060L EGS4060FFG EGC4060FFG ELEBN4125G 7 ELHKW — 70 EL4FD3070L EGS4070FFG EGC4070FFG ELEBN4125G ELJD — 80 EL4FD3080L EGS4080FFG EGC4080FFG ELEBN4125G 8 ELJW — 90 EL4FD3090L EGS4090FFG EGC4090FFG ELEBN4125G ELKD — 100 EL4FD3100L EGS4100FFG EGC4100FFG ELEBN4125G 9 ELKW — 110 EL4FD3110L EGS4110FFG EGC4110FFG ELEBN4125G 125 EL4FD3125L EGS4125FFG EGC4125FFG ELEBN4125G 150 EL4FD3150L JGE4150FAG JGC4150FAG ELJBN4150W 50 EL4FW3050JL GES4050AFM — ELEBE4125G 11 50 EL4FWC3050JL GEC4050AFM — ELEBE4125G 15 EL4HFD3015L EGH4015FFG — ELEBN4125G 12 20 EL4HFD3020L EGH4020FFG — ELEBN4125G 25 EL4HFD3025L EGH4025FFG — ELEBN4125G 13 30 EL4HFD3030L EGH4030FFG — ELEBN4125G 35 EL4HFD3035L EGH4035FFG — ELEBN4125G 14 40 EL4HFD3040L EGH4040FFG — ELEBN4125G 45 EL4HFD3045L EGH4045FFG — ELEBN4125G 15 50 EL4HFD3050L EGH4050FFG — ELEBN4125G 60 EL4HFD3060L EGH4060FFG — ELEBN4125G 16 70 EL4HFD3070L EGH4070FFG — ELEBN4125G 80 EL4HFD3080L EGH4080FFG — ELEBN4125G 17 90 EL4HFD3090L EGH4090FFG — ELEBN4125G 100 EL4HFD3100L EGH4100FFG — ELEBN4125G 18 110 EL4HFD3110L EGH4110FFG — ELEBN4125G 125 EL4HFD3125L EGH4125FFG — ELEBN4125G 19 150 EL4HFD3150L JGH3150FAG — ELJBN4150W Note: Please contact Eaton customer service for assistance with crossing from the obsolete product to the new Series G. 10 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-64 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Portable Test Kit and Remote Ground Fault Trip Indicator Remote Ground Fault Trip Indicator 3 Face Mounting Bracket 1 Portable Test Kit 2 3 4 Provides verification of performance of all frame sizes of SELTRONIC breakers while devices are still in service under varying load and/or phase unbalance. The tester operates on 120V, 50/60 Hz, and includes complete instructions and test times for testing the long time, instantaneous operation and optional ground fault operation of the breaker. Portable Test Kit Style Number STK2 For use only with SELTRONIC circuit breakers (LCG, HLCG, MCG, HMCG, NCG, HNCG, PCG and PCCG) with built-in ground fault protection. Face Mounting Bracket for Ground Fault Indicator 5 Style Number 6 1264C67G01 Note: UL Listed as a recognized component. 7 The SELTRONIC ground fault indicator is a remotely mounted device with a combination indicating light/ reset/test button that will light when the breaker trips on a ground fault. Tripping from overloads or short circuits will not activate the device. A separate 120V, 50/60 Hz power source is required to power the light and internal relay, which has 1NO/1NC contacts for customer connected alarm, etc. Designed for panel mounting, it can be face-mounted by ordering the optional mounting bracket below. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Remote Ground Fault Indicator Style Number Catalog Number 1259C14G01 GFAU 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-65 3 1 2 3 4 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Accessories Rear-Connected Studs For complete stud assembly, order a stud and an appropriate tube based on thickness of customer’s Rear Connected Stud mounting panel. A short stud must be assembled adjacent to a long stud to maintain clearances required by Underwriters Laboratories. 400A LA studs of the same length have sufficient clearance; however, customer connections may make it necessary to use a short stud adjacent to a long stud. Two studs are required per pole. Refer to DS29171 Dimension Sheets for stud sizes and extensions behind breaker. For DA, EB, EHB, FB, JA, KA, JB, KB, LB, LBB, HFB, HKA, HKB and HLB Breakers 1 Mounting Panel Thickness, Inches Stud 2 Length Tube 3 Style Number Length Style Number 5 DA, LB, LBB and HLB Breakers 3/4–1 Short 656D565G03 27/32 313C909H17 6 3/4–1 Long 656D565G04 3-25/32 313C909H20 1/2–3/4 Short 656D565G03 1-3/32 313C909H18 7 1/2–3/4 Long 656D565G04 4-1/32 313C909H21 1/4–1/2 Short 656D565G03 1-11/32 313C909H19 1/4–1/2 Long 656D565G04 4-9/32 313C909H22 8 EB, EHB, FB and HFB (100A Maximum) 9 1 Short 451D874G01 1-1/16 32B9446H20 1 Long 451D874G02 3-7/16 32B9446H24 10 1-1/16–15/16 Short 451D874G01 1-3/8 32B9446H21 1-1/16–15/16 Long 451D874G02 3-3/4 32B9446H25 11 3/8–5/8 Short 451D874G01 1-11/16 32B9446H22 3/8–5/8 Long 451D874G02 4-1/16 32B9446H26 1/4–5/16 Short 451D874G01 2 32B9446H23 1/4–5/16 Long 451D874G02 4-3/8 32B9446H27 12 FB, HFB 150 Ampere Breakers 13 1 Short 374D883G01 1-1/16 374D883H06 14 1 Long 374D883G02 4-5/16 374D883H10 11/16–15/16 Short 374D883G01 1-3/8 374D883H07 15 11/16–15/16 Long 374D883G02 4-5/8 374D883H11 3/8–5/8 Short 374D883G01 1-11/16 374D883H08 3/8–5/8 Long 374D883G02 4-15/16 374D883H12 16 1/4–5/16 Short 374D883G01 2 374D883H09 1/4–5/16 Long 374D883G02 5-1/4 374D883H13 17 JA, KA and HKA Breakers 3/4–1 Short 656D565G01 27/32 456D983H05 18 3/4–1 Long 656D565G02 3-25/32 456D983H08 1/2–3/4 Short 656D565G01 1-3/32 456D983H06 19 1/2–3/4 Long 656D565G02 4-1/32 456D983H09 1/4 –1/2 Short 656D565G01 1-11/32 456D983H07 20 1/4 –1/2 Long 656D565G02 4-9/32 456D983H10 JB, KB and HKB Breakers 21 3/4–1 Short 5010D23G01 27/32 456D983H05 3/4–1 Long 5010D23G02 3-7/8 5010D23H05 1/2–3/4 Short 5010D23G01 1-3/32 456D983H06 22 23 1/2–3/4 Long 5010D23G02 4-1/8 5010D23H06 1/4 –1/2 Short 5010D23G01 1-11/32 456D983H07 1/4 –1/2 Long 5010D23G02 4-3/8 5010D23H07 Notes 1 For insulated panels only; two required per pole. 2 Not UL Listed. 3 Included at no charge when ordered with stud. 24 25 V12-T3-66 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities 3 For LAB, LA, MA, HLA, HMA and HNB Breakers 1 Stud Ampere Rating Diameter, Inches and Thread Extension Back of Breaker, Inches Stud Style Number 3-7/32 1241 345 1 2 LAB, LA, HLA, LC and HLC Breakers 225 2 1/2–13 225 2 1/2–13 6-9/32 1241 346 225 23 1/2–13 4-31/32 1241 392 400 2 3/4–16 5-15/32 5B7383G15 400 2 3/4–16 7-31/32 5B7383G16 400 2 3/4–16 10-15/32 5B7383G17 600 4 1–12 5-29/32 314C960G07 600 4 1–12 5-13/32 314C960G08 600 4 1–12 5-29/32 314C960G09 6 7 3 4 5 MA, HMA, MC, HMC, MD and MDS Breakers 225 1/2–13 3-21/32 314C960G01 400 3/4–16 5-29/32 314C960G04 400 3/4–16 8-13/32 314C960G05 400 3/4–16 10-29/32 314C960G06 600 1–12 5-29/32 314C960G07 600 1–12 8-13/32 314C960G08 600 1–12 10-29/32 314C960G09 800 1-1/8–12 5-29/32 314C960G10 800 1-1/8–12 8-13/32 314C960G11 800 1-1/8–12 10-29/32 314C960G12 8 9 10 11 12 NB, HNB, NC and HNC Breakers 800 1-1/8–12 5-1/2 623B222G01 800 1-1/8–12 8 623B222G02 800 1-1/8–12 10-1/2 623B222G03 1200 1-1/4–12 5-1/2 373B375G04 1200 1-1/4–12 10-1/2 373B375G03 13 14 15 Notes 1 For insulated panels only; two required per pole. 2 150, 250, 300 and 400A frames only. 3 This is a special stud that includes six contact nuts for use where bus contact nuts must be used. 4 600A frames only. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-67 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities 1 Panelboard Connecting Straps For connecting line end of breakers to panelboard bus. 2 Panelboard Connecting Strap 3 For DA, EB, EHB, FB, JA, KA, JB, KB, LB, LBB, HFB, HKB and HLB Breakers Ampere Rating Connector Type 1 Style Number EB, EHB, FB and HFB Breakers Narrow Distribution Panelboards 2 4 50 50 5 100 6 Outside Center 624B624H01 624B624H02 3 LAB, LA, HLA, LC, HLC 150, 300 and 400A Frames 150 Center 673B142G04 400 Center 32B4570G02 673B142G03 400 Outside 314C541G01 Outside 208B297H01 Mounting bracket (two required) 3 50 Center 1253C72G01 LA, HLA, LC and HLC 600A Frames 3 50 Outside 1253C72G03 600 Center 624B609G01 600 Outside 506C052G01 1253C73G03 Center 1253C73G01 10 150 Outside 1253C73G05 1253C73G06 Outside Three-pole mounting bracket Two-pole mounting bracket DA, LB, LBB and HLB Breakers 208B297H01 Mounting bracket (two required) MA, HMA, MC, HMC, MD and MDS Breakers 3 800 Short 314C996G01 624B600H01 800 Medium 314C996G02 624B600H02 800 Long 314C996G03 Mounting bracket (four required) 3 400 Center 314C940G04 400 Outside 505C680G01 1200 Short 505C606G04 1200 Medium 505C606G05 JA, KA and HKA Breakers 3 1200 Long 505C606G06 225 Center 314C940G03 Mounting bracket (four required) 225 Outside 180C074G01 Notes 1 Not UL Listed. 2 Bus spacing 2.75 inches in box 5.75 inches deep (600V maximum). 3 Bus spacing 3.50 inches. Mounting bracket (one required) 208B264H01 208B264H01 JB, KB and HKB Breakers 3 250 Center 2600D26G01 250 Outside 2600D26G02 Mounting bracket (one required) 1576707 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-68 315C270H01 NB, HNB, NC and HNC Breakers 3 Mounting bracket (one required) 16 1253C74G02 673B142G02 Center 15 1253C74G01 Outside Two-pole mounting bracket 150 14 Center 225 673B142G09 100 13 225 Three-pole mounting bracket 9 12 Style Number CA Breaker Power Panelboards (Convertible) 3 673B142G10 100 11 Connector Type 1 Outside Power Panelboards (Convertible) 8 Ampere Rating 100 150 7 673B142G02 Center For CA, LAB, LA, MA, HLA, HMA and HNB Breakers Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 315C270H01 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Plug-In Adapter Kits For rear-connected applications such as switchboards. Facilitates ease of installation and front removal of breaker. Includes conductor for mounting on breaker, plug-in mounting blocks with matching conductor, rear studs and mounting hardware. Order two mounting blocks style number when line and load are required; order one mounting block style number when either line or load is required. Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 Flat Bus Type Flat Bus Type ■ Description Style Number EB, EHB, FB Thermal-Magnetic Breakers 2 Flat Bus Type—One Mounting Block, Line or Load Two-pole, 100A 1480D13G05 Two-pole, 150A 1480D13G05 Three-pole, 100A 1480D13G06 Three-pole, 150A 1480D13G06 FB and HFB Magnetic Only, HFB Thermal-Magnetic 2 Flat Bus Type—One Mounting Block, Line or Load Two-pole, 100A 1480D13G05 Two-pole, 150A 1480D13G05 Three-pole, 100A 1480D13G06 Three-pole, 150A 1480D13G06 JB, KB, HKB Breakers 1 Flat Bus Type— Two Mounting Blocks, Line and Load Two-pole 506C144G17 Three-pole 506C144G18 One Mounting Block, Line Only Two-pole 1260C86G01 Three-pole 1260C86G02 Two-pole 1260C86G03 Three-pole 1260C86G04 LAB, LA, HLA, LC and HLC (150, 250, 300 and 400A Frame) (Threaded Studs Type)— Two Mounting Blocks, Line and Load Threaded Stud Type Threaded Studs Type Description Style Number 4 JA, KA and HKA Breakers (Threaded Studs Type)—Two Mounting Blocks, Line and Load 313C644G29 Three-pole 313C644G30 3 Two-pole 314C932G01 Three-pole 314C932G02 4 One Mounting Block, Line or Load LA, HLA, LC and HLC (600A Frames) 2 (Threaded Studs)—Two Mounting Blocks, Line and Load 313C644G50 Three-pole 313C644G51 6 Two-pole 506C059G03 7 Three-pole 506C059G04 One Mounting Block, Line or Load One Mounting Block, Line or Load Flat Bus Type Two-pole 1288C19G01 Three-pole 1288C19G02 MA, HMA, MC, HMC, MD, MDS, NB, HNB, NC, HNC and NB TRI-PAC Breakers 4 (Flat Bus Type)— One Mounting Block, Line or Load MA, HMA, MC, HMC, MD, MDS two-pole 2614D53G05 MA, HMA, MC, HMC, MD, MDS three-pole 2614D53G06 NB, HNB, NC, HNC, NB TRI-PAC two-pole 2614D53G03 NB, HNB, NC, HNC, NB TRI-PAC three-pole 2614D53G04 Mounting Plates 14 179C207H01 178C781H01 LA, LAB, HLA, LC, HLC 504C824H01 MA, HMA, MC, MMC, NB, HNB, NC, HNC 1290C73H01 313C644G45 Three-pole 313C644G46 One Mounting Block, Line or Load Two-pole 314C932G03 Three-pole 314C932G04 Notes 1 These accessories are no longer available. 2 These plug-in adapter kits are UL Listed as recognized components. 3 700–1200A adapter kit is front removable, bolt-on design— not plug-in type. 4 Not UL Listed. 313C644G27 Two-pole, 700–800A 176C544G01 3 Three-pole, 125–600A 313C644G28 Three-pole, 700–800A 176C544G02 3 313C370G03 Two-pole, 700–800A 507C049G01 3 Three-pole, 125–600A 313C370G04 Three-pole, 700–800A 507C049G02 3 16 17 18 19 21 22 23 One Mounting Block, Line or Load Two-pole, 125–600A 15 20 MA, HMA, MC, HMC, MD and MDS Breakers 3 Threaded Studs—Two Mounting Blocks, Line and Load Two-pole, 125–600A 12 507C047H01 DA, LB, LBB, ALB Two-pole 11 JB, KB 504C823H01 450D010G16 10 EB, EHB, FB, HFB Predrilled panels for: JA, KA DA, LB, LBB, HLB Breakers 2 Flat Bus Type— Two Mounting Blocks, Line and Load 9 13 313C644G26 Three-pole 8 Style Number Description 313C644G25 450D010G15 5 Two-pole Three-pole Two-pole 2 Two-pole Two-pole One Mounting Block, Line or Load 1 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-69 3 1 2 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Extended Line Terminal Shields For shielding line side terminal connections. One shield required per breaker. Order separately when needed. Sold only in lots of 10, including hardware. For complete installation, order: 1. Front-connected, non-automatic PB breaker. (Order similar to standard front connected, except omit load conductor extensions.) Extended Line Terminal Shields 1 2. Fuse mounting base. Breaker Frame Style Number 3. Fuses (from distributor). 4 JB, KB, HKB 1266C07G01 MA, HMA, MC, HMC 208B966G01 5 NB, HNB, NC, HNC 208B966G02 LAB, LA, (Saf-T-Vue) 314C420G02 JA, KA, LB, LBB (Saf-T-Vue) 314C420G04 LAB, LA, HLA, LC, HLC 314C420G05 DA 314C420G06 JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB (standard breaker) 314C420G06 EB, EHB, FB, HFB 625B229G08 2 3 Line Terminal Shield 6 7 8 9 10 Handle Locks Non-Padlockable For prevention of unintentional operation of breaker. Fits over breaker handle and may be removed. Padlockable For prevention of unauthorized operation of breaker. Is nonremovable once installed on breaker. Meets Underwriters Laboratories and California Code requirements. Handle Locks Base Mounting Hardware No charge when ordered with breaker. Order separately when needed. Line Terminal Shield Breaker Frame Style Number Non-Padlockable FA, EA, CA, EB, EHB, FB, HFB 29B2721H01 LAB, LA, LC, HLC, MA, NB, HLA, HMA, HNB, 28B4596G01 MC, HMC, NC, HNC Base Mounting Hardware Description Handle Locks 15 Style Number GB, GC, GHB, GHC 1294C01H01 DA, JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB 29B2721H04 11 Single-Pole Breakers EB, EHB, HFB 3 624B375G01 Padlockable 12 EB, EHB, HFB 4 624B375G02 CA 506C438G01 Two- and Three-Pole Breakers FA, EA, EB, EHB, FB, HFB, MCP150 765A754G01 13 LAB, LA, HLA, LC, HLC, MA, NB, HMA, HNB, MC 21C6782G05 DA, JA, KA, LB, LBB, HKA, HLB, MCP400 673B796G02 HMC, NC, HNC 1091716 JB, KB, HKB, MCP250 673B796G01 14 PB, PC, PCC 624B375G22 LAB, LA, HLA, LC, HLC 373B591G02 DA, JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB 21C6782G22 MA, HMA, MC, HMC, MD, MDS 6591C30G02–OFF EB, EHB, FB, HFB, MCP 21C6782G18 JB, KB, HKB 673B125G12 MA, HMA, MC, HMC, MD, MDS 6591C30G05–ON/OFF NB, HNB, NC, HNC 6591C30G01–OFF NB, HNB, NC, HNC 6591C30G04–ON/OFF PA, SPCB, PB, Tri-Pac PB, PC 6591C30G03–OFF 15 CA two-pole 16 17 CA three-pole 21C6782G28 21C6782G29 Fuse Mounting Base for PB Breakers 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Notes 1 Not UL Listed. 2 One of style 625B229G08 is one package of 10. 3 Individually mounted. 4 Group mounted. 5 All breakers are trip free and will trip with handle locks attached. Cannot be used when handle extension is used. For 2000A non-automatic breakers only. Fuse Mounting Base for PB Breakers Style Number 6635C78G02 1 For use with non-automatic, three-pole circuit breaker. Includes fuse mounting base and hardware to mount standard Class L current limiting fuses, 801–2000A (fuses not included). Note: Interrupters used with fuse mounting base will accept all standard PB accessories. See Dimension Sheet 29-171 for mounting details. V12-T3-70 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Cable Connectors The fuse mounting base will accept the following terminals for front cable connection (omit “T” connectors from rear connected breakers). Cable Connectors Wire Range, Type Number of Cables Style Number (3) 3/0–400 kcmil Cu 672B655G01 (4) 400–500 kcmil Cu 180C046G03 Molded Type Handle Extension For LAB, LA and HLA Breakers 1 Style Number 372B399G01 For MA, HMA, MC, HMC, NB, HNB, NC and HNC Breakers 1 Style Number 1251C65G01 2 For PB, PC, PCC and PA/RD Breakers 1 Style Number 6635C78G02 2 Modifications Only two internally mounted modifications—shunt trip, undervoltage release, auxiliary switch, alarm switch—may be mounted in EB through PB. Only one of these modifications may be mounted in FB, HFB magnetic only, two-pole EB, EHB, FB and SELTRONIC breakers. None are available in single-pole breakers except alarm switch in EB, EHB and HFB. Contact Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center for possible special combinations of the following modifications not in tabulations. Contact factory for pricing if accessories are factory installed. Factory-Mounted Shunt Trips Factory-mounted shunt trips only can be supplied for the following breakers: CA, HCA, CAH, HFB magnetic only and PB/PBF non-automatic breakers (molded-case switches). They are 120 Vac rated, suitable for 55% pickup for ground fault application. Right hand mounting is standard and they are not UL Listed. 1 Notes 1 Not UL listed. 2 Included with frame at no charge. 6 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 Shunt Trip For tripping breaker from a remote point. A solenoid device mounts within breaker case. Breaker trips when coil is energized. 10 Shunt trips should not be used as circuit interlocks using maintained contact pilot devices. 12 11 13 A cutoff switch breaks the circuit to the momentary rated coil when the breaker opens. Available for control voltages up to 250 Vdc or 600 Vac. Voltage and frequency must be specified. Standard leads extend 18.00 inches outside the breaker. Longer leads may be specified. 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-71 3 1 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. Shunt Trip for Field Mounting 123 Shunt Trip ■ 4 Breaker Type Catalog Number 2 Voltage/Hz EB, EHB, FB, HFB 5 (Thermal-Magnetic Only) JB, KB, HKB JA, KA, HKA, DA, LB, LBB, HLB LA, LAB, HLA MA, HMA NB, HNB PB TRI-PAC and PA 3 Right-Hand Mounting 600/50–60 Hz 2609D39G15 2609D42G15 2605D15G15 2606D56G15 2606D57G15 2606D58G15 2606D59G15 4 480/50–60 Hz 2609D39G16 2609D42G16 2605D15G16 2606D56G16 2606D57G16 2606D58G16 2606D59G16 240/50–60 Hz 2609D39G17 2609D42G17 2605D15G17 2606D56G17 2606D57G17 2606D58G17 2606D59G17 5 208/50–60 Hz 2609D39G18 2609D42G18 2605D15G18 2606D56G18 2606D57G18 2606D58G18 2606D59G18 120/50–60 Hz 2609D39G19 2609D42G19 2605D15G19 2606D56G19 2606D57G19 2606D58G19 2606D59G19 6 60/50–60 Hz 2609D39G20 2609D42G20 2605D15G20 2606D56G20 2606D57G20 2606D58G20 2606D59G20 48/50–60 Hz 2609D39G21 2609D42G21 2605D15G21 2606D56G21 2606D57G21 2606D58G21 2606D59G21 7 24/50–60 Hz 2609D39G22 2609D42G22 2605D15G22 2606D56G22 2606D57G22 2606D58G22 2606D59G22 250 DC 2609D39G23 2609D42G23 2605D15G23 2606D56G23 2606D57G23 2606D58G23 2606D59G23 8 125 DC 2609D39G24 2609D42G24 2605D15G24 2606D56G24 2606D57G24 2606D58G24 2606D59G24 60 DC 2609D39G25 2609D42G25 2605D15G25 2606D56G25 2606D57G25 2606D58G25 2606D59G25 48 DC 2609D39G26 2609D42G26 2605D15G26 2606D56G26 2606D57G26 2606D58G26 2606D59G26 24 DC 2609D39G27 2609D42G27 2605D15G27 2606D56G27 2606D57G27 2606D58G27 2606D59G27 12 DC 2609D39G28 2609D42G28 2605D15G28 2606D56G28 2606D57G28 2606D58G28 2606D59G28 9 10 Left-Hand Mounting 600/50–60 Hz 2609D39G01 2609D42G01 2605D15G01 2606D56G01 2606D57G01 2606D58G01 2606D59G01 480/50–60 Hz 2609D39G02 2609D42G02 2605D15G02 2606D56G02 2606D57G02 2606D58G02 2606D59G02 240/50–60 Hz 2609D39G03 2609D42G03 2605D15G03 2606D56G03 2606D57G03 2606D58G03 2606D59G03 12 208/50–60 Hz 2609D39G04 2609D42G04 2605D15G04 2606D56G04 2606D57G04 2606D58G04 2606D59G04 120/50–60 Hz 2609D39G05 2609D42G05 2605D15G05 2606D56G05 2606D57G05 2606D58G05 2606D59G05 13 60/50–60 Hz 2609D39G06 2609D42G06 2605D15G06 2606D56G06 2606D57G06 2606D58G06 2606D59G06 48/50–60 Hz 2609D39G07 2609D42G07 2605D15G07 2606D56G07 2606D57G07 2606D58G07 2606D59G07 14 24/50–60 Hz 2609D39G08 2609D42G08 2605D15G08 2606D56G08 2606D57G08 2606D58G08 2606D59G08 250 DC 2609D39G09 2609D42G09 2605D15G09 2606D56G09 2606D57G09 2606D58G09 2606D59G09 15 125 DC 2609D39G10 2609D42G10 2605D15G10 2606D56G10 2606D57G10 2606D58G10 2606D59G10 60 DC 2609D39G11 2609D42G11 2605D15G11 2606D56G11 2606D57G11 2606D58G11 2606D59G11 16 48 DC 2609D39G12 2609D42G12 2605D15G12 2606D56G12 2606D57G12 2606D58G12 2606D59G12 24 DC 2609D39G13 2609D42G13 2605D15G13 2606D56G13 2606D57G13 2606D58G13 2606D59G13 17 12 DC 2609D39G14 2609D42G14 2605D15G14 2606D56G14 2606D57G14 2606D58G14 2606D59G14 11 Notes 1 120 Vac ratings suitable for 55% pickup for ground fault applications. 2 Not field mountable on non-automatic breakers (molded-case switches). 3 Field mounting voids breakers’ UL listing except on LA, HLA, MA, HMA, NB, HNB, PB, KB, HKB, KA, HKA, LB, HLB and SELTRONIC breakers. 4 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-168. 5 Available similar to this except “Leads out the load end—(not UL Listed).” Order by description. 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-72 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Shunt Trip Coil Data Left-Hand Mounting Kits for SELTRONIC Breakers Left-Hand Mounting Kits for SELTRONIC Breakers Breaker Type Description Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external 32 to 120 Vdc and Vac to 60 Hz source 12 Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external 240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz source 23 Style Number MC, HMC 1371D72G22 NC, HNC 1372D39G13 PC, PCC 1372D35G22 LC, HLC 1371D11G22 MC, HMC 1371D72G32 NC, HNC 1372D39G23 PC, PCC 1372D35G32 LC, HLC 1371D11G32 Shunt Trip Voltage Rating For All Breakers Listed in Previous Table and on Previous Page Except CA and SELTRONIC Coil Inrush 1 2 SELTRONIC Coil Inrush Amperes Volt-Amperes Amperes Volt-Amperes 600 AC 0.105 63.0 — — 480 AC 0.085 40.8 — — 240 AC 1.7 408.0 — — 208 AC 1.4 291.2 — — 120 AC 0.88 105.6 15 18 60 AC 9.10 546.0 — — 48 AC 7.50 360.0 — — 24 AC 3.95 94.8 — — 250 DC 2.5 625.0 — — 125 DC 0.975 121.9 — — 60 DC 0.525 31.5 — — 48 DC 1.3 62.4 — — 24 DC (FB) 6 144.0 — — 24 DC (KB) 3.8 91.2 — — 24 DC (others) 8 192 — — 12 DC 6 72 — — 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Notes 1 Rated 48V minimum for ground fault applications. 2 Also available for 24 Vdc. Order by description. 3 Not for ground fault. 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-73 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 21 Note: Undervoltage release attachments are not designed for, and should not be used as, circuit interlocks. For further information, Contact Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center at 1-800-356-1243. Factory-Mounted Undervoltage Releases All of the above undervoltage releases can be specified for factory mounting. Contact factory for pricing. These attachments have the leads out the side and are UL Listed when factory mounted unless other non-UL Listed modifications are used. Note: Right-hand mounting is considered standard unless specified otherwise except JA, KA, DA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB and SELTRONIC available for left-hand only. JB, KB, HKB are obsolete. Factory-mounted undervoltage releases only can be supplied for the following breakers: ● ● ● 22 23 Replacement Capabilities Standard Undervoltage Release For undervoltage protection. A solenoid device mounts within a breaker case. Coil must be energized before closing breaker. Trips breaker when voltage drops below 35 to 70% of coil rating. Picks up and seals in at 85% of coil rating. For line voltages up to 250 Vdc or 600 Vac. Externally mounted resistors are supplied for certain ratings. Standard leads extend 18.00 inches outside of breaker. Longer leads may be specified. 19 20 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers ● SELTRONIC breakers (120 Vac, 60 Hz only standard), MC, HMC, NC, HNC, PC, PCC, LC, HLC SELTRONIC breakers with remote trip provisions, MC, HMC 2 , NC, HNC 2 , PC, PCC 2 , LC, HLC 2 EB 3 , EHB 3 , FB 3 , HFB 3 , FB 45 and HFB magnetic only 45 No UVR available for CA, CAH and HCA Standard Undervoltage Release Undervoltage Release Attachment Kits for Field Mounting 67 Breaker Type Attachment Voltage, Hz JA, KA, DA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB LA, LAB, HLA MA, HMA NB, HNB PB, PA 4 For Right-Hand Mounting 24, 60 — 60A9355G17 — — — 48, 60 — 60A9355G08 — — 5674D29G16 120, 60 — 60A9355G01 457D727G01 373D632G01 5674D29G09 208, 60 — 60A9355G02 457D727G19 373D632G19 5674D29G10 240, 60 — 60A9355G03 457D727G02 373D632G02 5674D29G11 480, 60 — 60A9355G05 457D727G03 373D632G03 5674D29G13 600, 60 — 60A9355G06 457D727G04 373D632G04 5674D29G14 12 DC — 458D020G01 457D727G09 372D032G01 4976D85G01 24 DC — 458D020G02 457D727G10 372D032G02 4976D85G02 48 DC — 458D020G03 457D727G11 372D032G03 4976D85G03 60 DC — 458D020G04 457D727G21 — 4976D85G04 125 DC — 458D020G07 457D727G12 372D032G04 4976D85G07 250 DC — 458D020G08 457D727G13 372D032G05 4976D85G08 For Left-Hand Mounting 48, 60 — 60A9355G16 — — 5674D29G08 120, 60 458D070G01 60A9355G09 457D727G05 373D632G05 5674D29G01 208, 60 458D070G05 60A9355G10 457D727G20 373D632G20 5674D29G02 240, 60 458D070G02 60A9355G11 457D727G06 373D632G06 5674D29G03 480, 60 458D070G03 60A9355G13 457D727G07 373D632G07 5674D29G05 600, 60 458D070G04 60A9355G14 457D727G08 373D632G08 5674D29G06 12 DC 458D070G09 458D020G11 457D727G14 372D032G06 4976D85G11 24 DC 458D070G10 458D020G12 457D727G15 372D032G07 4976D85G12 48 DC 458D070G11 458D020G13 457D727G16 372D032G08 4976D85G13 60 DC — 458D020G14 457D727G22 — 4976D85G14 125 DC 458D070G12 458D020G17 457D727G17 372D032G09 4976D85G17 250 DC 458D070G13 458D020G18 457D727G18 372D032G10 4976D85G18 Notes 1 Cannot be used with other attachments except a small 1A-1B auxiliary switch rated 250V can be supplied in right-hand pole. 2 Provided with two leads (total of four) for use with a remote normally open contact (pushbutton, etc.) to trip the breaker. No external power required. 3 Not available on ambient compensating breakers. 4 Not UL Listed. 5 Right-hand mounting only. 6 Not field mountable on non-automatic breakers (molded-case switches). 7 Field mounting voids UL listing of breaker except on LA, HLA, MA, HMA, NB, HNB, PB, KA, HKA, LB and HLB. 24 25 V12-T3-74 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Undervoltage Release Coil Data 1 Breaker Type JA, KA, HKA, DA, LB, LBB and HLB EB, EHB, FB, HFB, JB, KB and HKB Voltage Rating Hz Coil Amperes External Series Resistance (Ohms) Total VA Coil Amperes External Series Resistance (Ohms) LA, LAB, HLA and PB Total VA Coil Amperes External Series Resistance (Ohms) Total VA 600 AC 0.020 25,000 12.0 0.012 50,000 7.2 0.029 20,000 17.4 480 AC 0.016 20,000 7.7 0.013 30,000 6.3 0.014 — 6.8 240 AC 0.021 6000 5.1 0.013 — 3.2 0.036 — 8.7 208 AC 0.019 6000 4.0 0.018 — 3.8 0.036 — 7.5 120 AC 0.023 — 2.8 0.023 — 2.8 0.073 — 8.8 60 AC 0.203 250 12.2 — — — — — — 48 AC 0.245 150 11.8 — — — 0.152 — 7.3 24 AC 0.250 50 6.0 — — — — — — 250 DC 0.026 5000 6.5 0.013 16,500 3.3 0.035 5000 8.8 125 DC 0.026 — 3.3 0.013 6500 1.7 0.039 1500 4.9 60 DC 0.248 200 14.9 0.013 1500 0.8 0.034 — 2.1 48 DC 0.260 150 12.5 0.012 600 0.6 0.040 — 2.0 24 DC 0.141 — 3.4 0.023 — 0.6 0.069 — 1.7 12 DC 0.286 — 3.5 0.048 — 0.6 0.136 — 1.7 MA and HMA NB and HNB MC, HMC, NC, HNC, PC, PCC, LC and HLC Coil Amperes External Series Resistance (Ohms) Total VA Coil Amperes External Series Resistance (Ohms) Total VA Coil Amperes External Series Resistance (Ohms) Total VA 600 AC 0.012 50,000 7.2 0.016 35,000 9.6 — — — 480 AC 0.013 30,000 6.3 0.013 30,000 6.3 — — — 240 AC 0.013 — 3.2 0.013 — 3.2 — — — 208 AC 0.018 — 3.8 0.018 — 3.8 — — — 120 AC 0.023 — 2.8 0.023 — 2.8 0.5 — 6 60 AC — — — — — — — — — 48 AC — — — — — — — — — 24 AC — — — — — — — — — 250 DC 0.013 16,500 3.3 0.013 16,500 3.3 — — — 125 DC 0.013 6500 1.7 0.013 6500 1.7 — — — 60 DC 0.013 1500 0.8 — — — — — — 48 DC 0.012 600 0.6 0.012 600 0.6 — — — 24 DC 0.02 — 0.6 0.023 — 0.6 — — — 12 DC 0.048 — 0.6 0.048 — 0.6 — — — 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-75 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 Alarm Switch Contact Rating (Non-Inductive) ● ● 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Replacement Capabilities Alarm Switch Availability: EB through PC. For light or alarm indication when breaker trips. Does not function with manual operation. Automatically resets when breaker is relatched. Standard leads extend 18.00 inches outside of breaker. Longer leads may be specified. Not field mountable. 7 8 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers ● MC, HMC, LA, LAB, HLA, LC, HLC: 10A, 120 Vac; 5A, 240 Vac EB, EHB, FB, HFB: 5A, 120 Vac All other breakers: 10A, 120–240 Vac Auxiliary Switch For auxiliary control circuits. Miniature switches mount within breaker. Commonly used for remote indication of open or closed breaker and electrically interlocking component control circuits. “A” contacts are closed when breaker is closed. “B” contacts are open when breaker is closed. Standard leads extend 18.00 inches outside of breaker. Longer leads may be specified. Factory-Mounted Auxiliary Switches All of the above auxiliary switches can be specified for factory mounting at the same price as listed for the kit. These attachments have the leads out the side of the breaker and are UL Listed when factory mounted unless other non-UL Listed modifications are used (except as noted). Switch with 2A-2B Contacts Switch Schematic Note: Right-hand mounting standard for EB, EHB, FB, HFB, JB, KB and HKB. All others are left-hand mounting as standard unless otherwise specified. Red Lead Factory-mounted switches only can be supplied for the following breaker: ● Black Lead JB, LBB, LAB, JA, DA, FB l magnetic only 2m and HFB magnetic only 2m Blue Lead Alarm Switch Breaker Frame Normal Pole Mounting Contact Operation (Specify Type Desired) DA 1 Left Make or break EB 1, EHB 1, FB 1, HFB 23 Mechanism Make or break JA 1, KA 1, LB 1, LBB 1, HKA, HLB Left Make or break JB 1, KB 1, HKB 1 Left Make or break LAB 1, LA 1, MA 1, NB 1, HLA, HMA, HNB Left Make or break LC 1, HLC Left 4 Make or break MC 1, HMC Left only 4 NC 1, HNC Left only Make or break 4 Make or break PB Left Make or break PC, PCC Left 45 Make or break Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. Auxiliary Switch Attachment Kits for Field Mounting 678 ■ Maximum Breaker Type AC Voltage Rating j k 9 For Left-Hand Mounting For Right-Hand Mounting Non-inductive Amperes 1A-1B 2A-2B 1A-1B 2A-2B 240 5 4979D06G03 4979D06G09 4979D06G03 4979D06G08 JA, KA, DA, HKA, LB 480 10 458D067G03 — 458D067G08 — LBB, HLB 240 5 — 656D527G01 2 — 656D527G09 2 JB, KB, HKB 480 10 2600D97G03 — 2600D97G08 — 17 JB, KB, HKB 240 5 — 2609D45G03 9 — 2609D45G08 9 LA, LAB, HLA 480 10 655D555G12 655D555G13 655D555G05 655D555G06 18 MA, HMA 480 10 458D013G12 458D013G13 458D013G05 458D013G06 NB, HNB 480 10 4980D16G12 4980D16G13 4980D16G05 4980D16G06 19 PB, PA 480 10 2602D32G11 2602D32G12 2602D32G14 2602D32G15 MC, HMC, MCG, HMCG 480 6 (10 at 24) 1371D72G03 1371D72G06 — — 20 NC, HNC, NCG, HNCG 480 6 (10 at 24) 1372D39G03 1372D39G06 — — PC, PCC, PCG, PCCG 480 6 (10 at 24) 1372D35G03 1372D35G06 — — LC, HLC, LCG, HLCG 480 6 (10 at 24) 1371D11G03 1371D11G06 — — 16 Note: Right-hand mounting standard for EB, EHB, FB, HFB, JB, KB and HKB. All others are left-hand mounting as standard unless otherwise specified. 21 EB, EHB, FB, HFB Notes 1 Alarm switches are no longer available for these frames. 2 Not UL Listed. 3 Not available for magnetic only, ambient compensating, or breakers with undervoltage release. 4 When alarm switch is used in conjunction with auxiliary switch, the auxiliary switch is rated 250 Vac, 5A maximum. 22 23 24 5 6 7 8 Except when other attachments are used, must be mounted in right pole. Not for use on molded-case switches. All switches are multiples of 1A-1B with a common electrical connection (see diagram above right). Field mounting voids UL listing of breaker except on LA, HLA, MA, HMA, NB, HNB, KB, HKB, KA, HKA, LB, HLB and SELTRONIC breakers. 9 j k l m These accessories are no longer available. For DC applications, refer to factory. Thermal-magnetic only. Auxiliary switches are no longer available for these frames. Right-hand mounting only. 25 V12-T3-76 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. ■ A. Walking Beam Type B. Sliding Bar Type (Field Mountable) Center Studs 1 2 Moisture-Fungus-Corrosion Treatment Availability: EB through PC. Treatment can be provided to meet customer’s specific atmospheric conditions. Moisturefungus treating material used meets JAN-T-152; treatment meets MIL-V-173a. Requests and orders should specify government specifications or conditions to be met. Note: Not UL Listed. Mechanical Interlocks (A-C) For mechanically interlocking a pair of breakers so that only one may be closed at one time, but both may be open simultaneously. Note: Not UL Listed. 3 Sliding Bar Type 4 Availability: HFB through PC. Walking Beam Availability: EB through PC. Mounts on panel (not included) at rear of breaker. Standard breaker spacing: center to center; LAB, LA, LC, HLC, MA, MC, NB, NC, HLA, HMA, HMC, HNB and HNC 8.50-inch center to center; PB, PC and PCC 12.25-inch center to center; DA, JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB and HLB 5.75 inch center to center; EB, EHB, FB, JB, KB, HFB and HKB 4.375 inch center to center. Order as a set of two special factory drilled breakers and one walking beam interlock. Specify breaker type, panel thickness and center to center dimension of breakers. Note: Not UL Listed. 2000A maximum for PB breaker. Not available on drawout breakers. Mounts on panel (not included) fitting over front of breakers. Standard breaker spacing: HLC, HLA, HMA, HMC, HNB and HNC 8.50-inch center to center; HKA and HLB 5.75-inch center to center; HFB 4.1875-inch center to center. C. Kirk Key Interlock Kirk Key Interlock Availability: EB through PC. Permits interlocking of two breakers or one breaker with other devices. Before breaker can be closed, key must be inserted and turned in breaker interlock. Breaker must be opened before key can be removed. It can then be inserted in interlock or other devices to permit their closure. Requests and orders should completely outline interlocking scheme, ultimate user and address. 5 Center Studs Availability: 600A frames (LA) through (NB) 1200A frames except SELTRONIC and current limiting breakers. 6 Provides connections for dual voltage generators, so that same trip unit can be used for protection at both voltages. At higher voltage, the trip unit carries full load current. At lower voltage, half the current bypasses the trip unit through the center studs. Trip rating cannot exceed 50% of frame rating. 8 Field Discharge Switch Availability: 400, 600A frame (LA). Breaker is used exclusively to discharge the field of a DC motor or generator, usually through a resistor. When the two outer poles open, the center pole closes. Note: Not UL Listed. 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Note: Not available on motor operated breakers. (No CA, LCL, FCL breakers.) 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-77 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Motor Operators Motor operators provide complete remote control by means of a pushbutton or a similar pilot device. Note: The pilot device must be maintained contact type for EB, EHB, FB, HFB, DA, JA, KA, JB, KB, HKB and LB mechanisms, momentary contact type for all others. Positive switching action is accomplished by use of an operating arm engaging the breaker handle. The unit is energized momentarily to actuate the lever arm moving it to either the ON or OFF position. The control is broken by an internal cutoff switch. Means for emergency manual operations is provided. For LAB, LA, HLA Breakers For EB, EHB, FB and HFB Motor operations are available with motors rated 120 Vac, 208 Vac and 240 Vac. Note: LA and larger available for 125 Vdc. The 480V operators use a 120 Vac motor in conjunction with a 480/240V to 120V dual voltage transformer. (On LA and larger operators, the transformer is supplied for separate mounting by the customer.) Note: The motor operator is intended only for infrequent operation in line with Underwriters Laboratories endurance standards for molded-case breakers. Minimum 1 kVA transformer is required for use with all motor operations. Back Mounting Plates Breaker Type 120, 208, 240, 480 Vac Style Number For DA, JA, KA, JB, LB, LBB, HKA, HKB and HLB Breakers For MA, HMA, NB, HNB Breakers For PB Breakers Motor Operator Selection 12 Breaker Type Style Number—AC Voltage EB, EHB, FB, HFB 656D148G11 656D148G04 656D148G02 656D148G13 — — DA, JA, KA, HKA 657D819G23 657D819G10 657D819G08 657D819G24 — — LB, LBB, HLB 657D819G25 657D819G16 657D819G14 657D819G26 — — LAB, LA, HLA, LC, HLC 2607D97G37 2607D97G40 2607D97G38 2607D97G39 2607D97G51 2607D97G42 MA, HMA, MC, HMC 5664D54G75 5664D54G78 5664D54G76 5664D54G77 5664D54G96 5664D54G81 NB, HNB, NC, HNC. SPCB1200 1494D60G31 1494D60G32 1494D60G33 1494D60G34 1494D60G35 1494D60G36 PB, PC, PCC, PA, SPCB2000 5661D52G01 5661D52G04 5661D52G02 5661D52G03 5661D52G17 — 120 208 Style Number—DC Voltage 240 480 125 24 Motor Data Inrush Current, Ampere (Peak) Continuous Current (rms) Breaker Type Motor Type Hp 120V 208V 240V 120V 208V 240V Operating Time, Open or Close EB, EHB, FB, HFB Split-phase 1/75 10 4 5 2.3 1.17 1.65 1.5 seconds DA, JA, KA, JB, KB, LB, LBB, HKB, HLB Split-phase 1/50 14 6 7 3.5 1.6 1.75 1.5 seconds LAB, LA, HLA Reversing — 8 5 4 — — — 12 cycles MA, HMA, NB, HNB, SPCB1200 Reversing — 11 7 6 — — — 12 cycles PB, PA, SPCB2000 Reversing — 20 12 11 — — — 10 cycles Notes 1 AC voltage rated operators are UL Listed as recognized components. 2 See Dimension Sheet 29-170. EB, EHB, FB, HFB 503C707G01 DA, JA, KA, LB, HLB 503C981G01 V12-T3-78 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 21 22 23 24 25 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Drawout Frame These drawout frames are for use with standard threepole Cutler-Hammer moldedcase circuit breakers. They consist of two separate parts: stationary mounting frame and movable carrier frame. Slide rails are drawer-type, and a screw mechanism is used to engage or withdraw the movable carrier frame. The drawout frames have three positions: connected, test and disconnected. The frames do not include a safety tripping interlock or secondary contacts. These are optional items and may be ordered at additional cost. Breakers mounted in the drawout frames can be equipped with standard breaker accessories including shunt trip, undervoltage release, auxiliary switch, alarm switch and motor operator. Optional Features Safety Interlock This feature trips the breaker as the movable carrier frame is withdrawn, and must be factory installed. Order as follows. Note: Safety interlock not available on MC, NC, HMC, HNC, LC and HLC. For LA, MA and NB Breakers Order standard stationary mounting frame. Order breaker and movable carrier frame assembled with safety interlock. Drawout Frame Selection Data 12 Stationary Mounting Frame Style Number Movable Carrier Frame Style Number HLA600, HLC600, LA600, LD, HLD 3 2603D84G01 2608D35G06 HMA, HMC, MDL, HMDL 3 2603D85G01 2608D34G10 HNB, HNC, ND, HND 3 2603D85G01 2608D34G08 PB, PC, PCC 2000A 4 2601D18G04 Order by description 5 PB 2500A, PC, PCC 2500A and 3000A 4 2601D18G05 Order by description 5 4 Notes 1 Safety interlock not available on MC, NC, HMC, HNC, LC and HLC. 2 SELTRONIC circuit breakers with built-in ground fault require a special breaker frame with leads out the side in place of standard terminal block. Order by description the breaker frame and carrier as one assembly. 3 These units are UL Listed. 4 Not UL Listed. 5 Factory installed only. 5 Ordering Information Note: SELTRONIC circuit breakers with built-in ground fault require a special breaker frame with leads out the side in place of standard terminal block. Order by description the breaker frame and carrier as one assembly. Standard Installation Order one stationary mounting frame and one movable carrier frame. Order breakers without terminals or rear connectors. Order any attachments desired (shunt trip, undervoltage release, etc.) Order secondary contacts as required: ● ● ● ● 1 Breaker Type A shunt trip, an undervoltage release or an alarm switch requires two contacts A 1A-1B auxiliary switch requires three contacts A motor operator requires a maximum of four contacts Others as required With Safety Interlock Order stationary mounting frame and movable carrier frame as directed under optional features. Racking Crank A special crank to engage or withdraw the moving portion of the drawout. A standard 0.50-inch hex socket with extension can be used for this purpose. 2 3 6 7 8 9 Racking Crank 10 Style Number 11 765A767G01 Cell Switches Mounted on Drawout Frames, All Ratings Up to four switches can be provided. Order by description. 12 13 Each switch provides NO and NC contact that transfers before reaching the test position when being withdrawn, and after the test position when being racked in. Contact factory for pricing. 14 15 16 17 18 19 Secondary Contacts These are used to disconnect auxiliary circuits when attachments such as shunt trip or motor operator are used. Available in multiples of four contacts with a maximum of 24 contacts for the LA 600 or 32 contacts for the MA and NB. They must be factory mounted. Order by description as similar to stationary or moving frame and specify number of contacts required. 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-79 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Panelboard “Only” Replacement Breaker Selection Guide ■ Panelboard “Only” replacement breakers are generally for use as replacement for out-ofproduction panelboard branch circuit breakers where both physical and electrical interchangeability is required. Where possible, consideration should be given to application of either current Series C or Series G circuit breakers. 120 Vac 240 Vac Breaker Type Amperes Sym. Asym. Sym. Asym. Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. Panelboard “Only” Replacement Breaker Selection Guide Panelboard Replacement Breaker Interrupting Ampere Rating For additional information, consult the charts on Pages V12-T3-84 and V12-T3-85 or contact your local Eaton Field Sales office or the Breaker Service Centers. Replacement Chart 1 Current Panelboard Circuit Breaker Type Out-ofVac Production (50/60 Hz) Circuit Breaker Type 240 480 600 REA 1 EA 1 ■ RE E1 ■ REH EH 1 RFA 1 FA 1 RHFA HFA 1 F1 RF J2 ■ RK 1 K2 ■ RHK HK 2 ■ RKL 1 KL 2 ■ RHKL HKL 2 ■ 18 RLM RHLM HLM 19 HLA JK 2 ■ HLA 1 JKL 2 ■ 20 LM 2 RE 15–100 REA ■ 23 24 480 Vac Asym. Sym. Asym. Sym. 600 Vac Asym. 125 (Single-Pole) 250 Vdc — 10,000 10,000 — — — — — — 7500 7500 7500 7500 — — — — — — 5000 5000 15–20 — — — 10,000 10,000 — — — — — — REA 15–100 7500 7500 7500 7500 — — — — — — 5000 5000 REH 15–100 — — 18,000 20,000 10,000 10,000 14,000 15,000 — — — 10,000 RF 15–100 — — 18,000 20,000 — — 14,000 15,000 14,000 15,000 — 10,000 RFA 15–150 — — 18,000 20,000 — — 14,000 15,000 14,000 15,000 — 10,000 RHF 15–100 — — 65,000 75,000 — — 25,000 30,000 18,000 20,000 — 20,000 RHFA 15–100 — — 65,000 75,000 — — 25,000 30,000 18,000 20,000 — 20,000 RJ 70–225 — — 22,000 25,000 — — 18,000 20,000 14,000 15,000 — 10,000 HLA 70–225 — — 42,000 50,000 — — 30,000 35,000 22,000 25,000 — 20,000 HLA 125–400 — — 42,000 50,000 — — 30,000 35,000 22,000 25,000 — 20,000 RK 70–225 — — 42,000 50,000 — — 22,000 25,000 22,000 25,000 — 10,000 RKL 125–400 — — 42,000 50,000 — — 30,000 35,000 22,000 25,000 — 20,000 RLM 125–800 — — 42,000 50,000 — — 30,000 35,000 22,000 25,000 — 20,000 RHK 70–225 — — 65,000 75,000 — — 35,000 40,000 25,000 30,000 — 20,000 RHKL 125–400 — — 65,000 75,000 — — 35,000 40,000 25,000 30,000 — 20,000 RHLM 125–800 — — 65,000 75,000 — — 35,000 40,000 25,000 30,000 — 20,000 — RHF3100 is a newly manufactured, three-pole, 100A trip panelboard replacement breaker for an out-of-production HF3100. R ■ Designates new panelboard “only” replacement breaker. HF Identifies the out-ofproduction circuit breaker frame. Number of poles. 100 Trip ampere rating. 22 277 (Single-Pole) Sym. — 3 21 — An Example: HF RJ 2 — ■ ■ RHF 1 15–20 ■ ■ 1 RE Replacement of all out-ofproduction panelboard circuit breakers are designated by the easily identifiable addition of an ”R“ prefix to the out-of-production circuit breaker catalog number that they replace. ■ 1 3 Notes: 1. Panelboard “only” replacement circuit breakers have noninterchangeable trip units and the same interrupting capacity as the out-of-production circuit breakers that they replace. 2. The RE breaker has off-center terminals just like the E breaker it is replacing. 3. For out-of-production breakers, the “B” suffix denotes 277 Vac rating for the panelboard replacement breaker. (Example: RE3020B) 4. Some panelboard “only” replacement breakers do not have the same physical dimensions or mounting holes as the breakers that they replace. For example, the types REH and RHFA are 6.00 inches in length and the breakers that they replace, EH and HFA, are 6.50 inches in length. Mounting hardware is provided with each breaker to resolve these differences, and must be installed to ensure a proper fit. 5. Panelboard “only” replacement breakers can be installed in the following styles of out-ofproduction Westinghouse panelboards: 6. ABH A2B NHEB NA1B NA1B-LX NDP Notes 1 Last manufacture date—1974. 2 Last manufacture date—1967. 3 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the crossreference on Pages V12-T3-114– V12-T3-167 or call 803-481-6843 for other panelboard solutions. 25 V12-T3-80 NEB NHDP NH1B NLAB-AB NLAB-ABH Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities 3 Panelboard “Only” Replacement Circuit Breaker Guide—Dimensions in Inches (Per Three-Pole Breaker) 1 Maximum Amperes Description 100A 225A 2 Current Design Panelboard ”only“ replacement circuit breakers These circuit breakers, when used in a panelboard, are direct replacements for the circuit breakers listed below both electrically and physically. RE 1, REA 2 REH RFA 3, RHFA RF 4, RHF 3 4 5 6 7 Width: 4.13 Height: 6.00 Depth: 3.38 Width: 4.13 Height: 6.00 Depth: 3.38 Width: 4.13 Height: 6.00 Depth: 3.38 Width: 4.13 Height: 9.38 Depth: 3.81 EH FA, HFA F, HF 8 9 Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers These circuit breakers are no longer manufactured These circuit breakers, when used in a panelboard, are directly replaced by the circuit breakers listed above. *Indicates last date of manufacture. E, EA 10 11 *1974 *1974 *1974 *1974 Width: 4.13 Height: 6.00 Depth: 3.38 Width: 4.13 Height: 6.50 Depth: 3.38 Width: 4.13 Height: 6.50 Depth: 3.38 Width: 4.13 Height: 9.38 Depth: 3.81 12 13 Notes 1 Obsolete—no replacement. 2 Obsolete—use REH (available in three-pole only). 3 Obsolete—use RHFA (available in three-pole only). 4 Obsolete—use RHF (available in three-pole only). 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-81 3 1 2 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Panelboard “Only” Replacement Circuit Breaker Guide—Dimensions in Inches (Per Three-Pole Breaker), continued Maximum Amperes 225A 400A 400A 800A RJ RK 1, RHK RKL 2, RHKL RLM 3, RHLM Width: 8.25 Height: 10.13 Depth: 4.06 Width: 8.25 Height: 15.50 Depth: 4.06 Width: 8.25 Height: 16.00 Depth: 4.06 Width: 8.25 Height: 22.00 Depth: 5.50 KL, HKL LM, HLM Current Design 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers J K, HK 13 14 15 16 17 18 *1967 *1967 *1967 *1967 Width: 8.25 Height: 10.13 Depth: 4.06 Width: 8.25 Height: 15.50 Depth: 4.06 Width: 8.25 Height: 16.00 Depth: 4.06 Width: 8.25 Height: 22.00 Depth: 5.50 19 Further Information Publication Number Description 20 IL 15558 Mounting information for the RE, REA breakers IL 15559 Mounting information for the RF, RHF breakers 21 IL 15562 Mounting information for the REH, RFA, RHFA breakers IL 15563 Mounting information for the RJ breaker 22 IL 15564 Mounting information for the RK, RHK breakers IL 15565 Mounting information for the RKL, RHKL breakers 23 IL 15566 Mounting information for the RLM, RHLM breakers 24 Notes 1 Obsolete—use RHK (available in three-pole only). 2 Obsolete—use RHKL (available in three-pole only). 3 Obsolete—use RHLM (available in three-pole only). 25 V12-T3-82 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 Type REA, Single-, Two- and Three-Pole, Type REA 240 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic ■ Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Type REH Single-Pole, 120 Vac Two-Pole, 240 Vac Three-Pole, 240 Vac Maximum Amperes Wire Type Wire Range Style Number 2 1 2 Standard Pressure Type Terminals 20 (EB, EHB) Al/Cu #14–#10 624B100G14 100 Al/Cu #14–1/0 624B100G02 150 Al/Cu #4–4/0 624B100G17 10 REA1010 — — Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals 15 REA1015 REA2015 REA3015 50 Al/Cu #14–#4 624B100G10 20 REA1020 REA2020 REA3020 100 Al/Cu #4–4/0 624B100G17 25 REA1025 REA2025 REA3025 30 REA1030 REA2030 REA3030 40 REA1040 REA2040 REA3040 50 REA1050 REA2050 REA3050 60 REA1060 REA2060 REA3060 70 REA1070 REA2070 REA3070 80 REA1080 REA2080 REA3080 90 REA1090 REA2090 REA3090 100 REA1100 REA2100 REA3100 Type REH, Single-, Two- and Three-Pole, 480 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Type RE Catalog Number Terminals Catalog Number Single-Pole, 277 Vac Two-Pole, 480 Vac Three-Pole, 480 Vac 10 REH1010 — — 5 REH1015 REH2015 REH3015 20 REH1020 REH2020 REH3020 25 REH1025 REH2025 REH3025 30 REH1030 REH2030 REH3030 40 REH1040 REH2040 REH3040 50 REH1050 REH2050 REH3050 60 REH1060 REH2060 REH3060 70 REH1070 REH2070 REH3070 80 REH1080 REH2080 REH3080 90 REH1090 REH2090 REH3090 100 REH1100 REH2100 REH3100 All accessories and modifications available for Replacement Breakers Types EB, EHB and FB are also available for Panelboard Replacement Breakers Types RE, REH, RFA, RF, RHF, REA and RHFA. For accessories and modifications, refer to Pages V12-T3-65– V12-T3-79. Terminals See table on Page V12-T3-83. 50°C Calibration Add suffix “V” to catalog number for breakers to be used in 50°C ambients. Same price as standard 40°C breakers. Note: Not UL Listed. Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167 or call 803-481-6843 for other panelboard solutions. 2 Package of three. Two-Pole, 240 Vac Three-Pole, 240 Vac 10 RE1010 — — 15 RE1015 RE2015 RE3015 20 RE1020 RE2020 RE3020 25 RE1025 RE2025 RE3025 30 RE1030 RE2030 RE3030 40 RE1040 RE2040 RE3040 50 RE1050 RE2050 RE3050 60 RE1060 RE2060 RE3060 70 RE1070 RE2070 RE3070 80 RE1080 RE2080 RE3080 90 RE1090 RE2090 RE3090 100 RE1100 RE2100 RE3100 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Catalog Number Single-Pole, 120 Vac 4 5 Accessories and Modifications Type RE, Single-, Two- and Three-Pole, 240 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 3 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-83 3 1 ■ Replacement Capabilities Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 Panelboard Replacement Circuit Breakers (Includes Terminals on Load Side Only) Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 2 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Catalog Number Two-Pole, 600 Vac Three-Pole, 600 Vac Type RFA Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic Type RFA 15 RFA2015 RFA3015 20 RFA2020 RFA3020 25 RFA2025 RFA3025 30 RFA2030 RFA3030 5 35 RFA2035 RFA3035 40 RFA2040 RFA3040 6 50 RFA2050 RFA3050 60 RFA2060 RFA3060 7 70 RFA2070 RFA3070 80 RFA2080 RFA3080 8 90 RFA2090 RFA3090 100 RFA2100 RFA3100 9 125 RFA2125 RFA3125 150 RFA2150 RFA3150 4 10 Type RF Type RF Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic 15 RF2015 RF3015 11 20 RF2020 RF3020 25 RF2025 RF3025 12 30 RF2030 RF3030 35 RF2035 RF3035 40 RF2040 RF3040 50 RF2050 RF3050 60 RF2060 RF3060 70 RF2070 RF3070 80 RF2080 RF3080 90 RF2090 RF3090 100 RF2100 RF3100 13 14 15 16 Type RHFA Type RHFA Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic 15 RHFA2015 RHFA3015 17 20 RHFA2020 RHFA3020 25 RHFA2025 RHFA3025 18 30 RHFA2030 RHFA3030 35 RHFA2035 RHFA3035 19 40 RHFA2040 RHFA3040 50 RHFA2050 RHFA3050 20 60 RHFA2060 RHFA3060 70 RHFA2070 RHFA3070 21 80 RHFA2080 RHFA3080 90 RHFA2090 RHFA3090 22 100 RHFA2100 RHFA3100 125 RHFA2125 RHFA3125 23 150 RHFA2150 RHFA3150 Note 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167 or call 803-481-6843 for other panelboard solutions. 24 25 V12-T3-84 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities ■ 3 Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 Panelboard Replacement Circuit Breakers (Includes Terminals on Load Side Only) Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 1 Catalog Number Two-Pole, 600 Vac Three-Pole, 600 Vac 2 3 Type RHF Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic Type RHF Type RJ Type RK Type RKL 15 RHF2015 RHF3015 20 RHF2020 RHF3020 25 RHF2025 RHF3025 30 RHF2030 RHF3030 40 RHF2040 RHF3040 50 RHF2050 RHF3050 60 RHF2060 RHF3060 70 RHF2070 RHF3070 80 RHF2080 RHF3080 90 RHF2090 RHF3090 100 RHF2100 RHF3100 8 9 4 5 6 7 Type RJ Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic 70 RJ2070 RJ3070 90 RJ2090 RJ3090 100 RJ2100 RJ3100 125 RJ2125 RJ3125 150 RJ2150 RJ3150 175 RJ2175 RJ3175 200 RJ2200 RJ3200 225 RJ2225 RJ3225 225 MCS RJ2225K RJ3225K 10 11 12 13 Type RK Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic 70 RK2070 RK3070 90 RK2090 RK3090 100 RK2100 RK3100 125 RK2125 RK3125 150 RK2150 RK3150 175 RK2175 RK3175 200 RK2200 RK3200 225 RK2225 RK3225 225 MCS RK2225K RK3225K 14 15 16 17 18 Type RKL Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic 125 RKL2125 RKL3125 150 RKL2150 RKL3150 175 RKL2175 RKL3175 200 RKL2200 RKL3200 225 RKL2225 RKL3225 250 RKL2250 RKL3250 300 RKL2300 RKL3300 350 RKL2350 RKL3350 400 RKL2400 RKL3400 400 MCS RKL2400K RKL3400K 19 20 21 22 Note 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167 or call 803-481-6843 for other panelboard solutions. 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-85 3 1 ■ Replacement Capabilities Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 Panelboard Replacement Circuit Breakers (Includes Terminals on Load Side Only) Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 2 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Catalog Number Two-Pole, 600 Vac Three-Pole, 600 Vac Type RLM Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic Type RLM 125 RLM2125 RLM3125 150 RLM2150 RLM3150 175 RLM2175 RLM3175 200 RLM2200 RLM3200 5 225 RLM2225 RLM3225 250 RLM2250 RLM3250 6 275 RLM2275 RLM3275 300 RLM2300 RLM3300 7 350 RLM2350 RLM3350 400 RLM2400 RLM3400 8 500 RLM2500 RLM3500 600 RLM2600 RLM3600 9 600 MCS RLM2600K RLM3600K 700 RLM2700 RLM3700 800 RLM2800 RLM3800 4 10 Type RHK Type RHK Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic 11 70 RHK2070 RHK3070 90 RHK2090 RHK3090 12 100 RHK2100 RHK3100 125 RHK2125 RHK3125 150 RHK2150 RHK3150 175 RHK2175 RHK3175 200 RHK2200 RHK3200 225 RHK2225 RHK3225 225 MCS RHK2225K RHK3225K 13 14 15 Type RHKL Type RHKL Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic 125 RHKL2125 RHKL3125 16 150 RHKL2150 RHKL3150 175 RHKL2175 RHKL3175 17 200 RHKL2200 RHKL3200 225 RHKL2225 RHKL3225 18 250 RHKL2250 RHKL3250 300 RHKL2300 RHKL3300 19 350 RHKL2350 RHKL3350 400 RHKL2400 RHKL3400 20 400 MCS RHKL2400K RHKL3400K Note 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167 or call 803-481-6843 for other panelboard solutions. 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-86 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1 Panelboard Replacement Circuit Breakers (Includes Terminals on Load Side Only) Type RHLM ■ 1 Catalog Number Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Two-Pole, 600 Vac Three-Pole, 600 Vac 2 3 Type RHLM Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic 125 RHLM2125 RHLM3125 150 RHLM2150 RHLM3150 175 RHLM2175 RHLM3175 200 RHLM2200 RHLM3200 225 RHLM2225 RHLM3225 250 RHLM2250 RHLM3250 275 RHLM2275 RHLM3275 300 RHLM2300 RHLM3300 325 RHLM2325 RHLM3325 350 RHLM2350 RHLM3350 400 RHLM2400 RHLM3400 450 RHLM2450 RHLM3450 500 RHLM2500 RHLM3500 550 RHLM2550 RHLM3550 600 RHLM2600 RHLM3600 600 MCS RHLM2600K RHLM3600K 700 RHLM2700 RHLM3700 800 RHLM2800 RHLM3800 Accessories and Modifications All accessories and modifications available for replacement breakers types KA, LA and MA are also available for panelboard replacement breakers types RJ, RK, RKL, RLM, RHK, RHKL and RHLM. For additional accessories and modifications, refer to Pages V12-T3-65– V12-T3-79. Terminals 50°C Calibration Add suffix “V” to catalog number for breakers to be used in 50°C ambients. Same price as standard 40°C breakers. Note: Not UL Listed. Special Breakers Magnetic only (includes load terminals). Available for all ampere ratings for two- and three-pole RJ, RK, RKL, RLM, RHK, RHKL and RHLM. RJ TA225LA1 High magnetic moldedcase switches (K suffix) are available to replace out-ofproduction non-automatic breakers (N suffix). RK TA225LA1 Note: Not UL Listed. RHK TA225LA1 RKL TA400LA1 Panelboard Circuit Breakers RHKL Terminals 2 RLM TA700MA1 (for <600A) TA800MA1 (for 700–800A) 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Panelboard and Switchboard Replacement Breaker Ordering Instructions 13 1. Choose the breaker frame and amperage. 15 3. Call your local distributor with catalog numbers and request Eaton’s Free Express Service. Compatible with Panelboards and Switchboards from: Westinghouse Distribution and Control Business Unit 1987–1998 1991–1998 1994–2000 14 2000–2009 2. Select the proper connector kit (if needed). TA400LA1 RHLM 4 16 2009–Present Connector Kits for Pow-RLine 4 Panelboards and Pow-R-Line C Switchboards Breaker Type Catalog Number Single Twin F-Frame — KPRL4FD J-Frame KPRL4JDS KPRL4JDT K-Frame KPRL4KDS KPRL4KDT L-Frame KPRL4LD — M-Frame KPRL4MC — N-Frame KPRL4ND — For further information, reference Page V12-T3-168 in this catalog. Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the crossreference on Pages V12-T3-114– V12-T3-167 or call 803-481-6843 for other panelboard solutions. 2 Packaged individually. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-87 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ■ Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. Replacement Capabilities Cutler-Hammer motor control center replacement circuit breakers are newly manufactured and tested to the latest applicable standards at the Eaton molded-case circuit breaker plant in Beaver, PA. This plant has a long and wellrecognized tradition of product safety, integrity and quality. The motor control center replacement circuit breaker solution eliminates the need to consider alternative approaches. Eaton customers are ensured that the high standards of product quality and reliability do not have to be sacrificed when replacing Westinghouse out-ofproduction circuit breakers. All motor control center replacement circuit breakers are easily identified by the prefix “RMC” added to the out-of-production type circuit breaker catalog number they replace. Replacement Motor Control Center Breakers Motor Control Center Replacement Breaker Interrupting Ampere Ratings Breaker Type 23 Amperes 240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac 250 Vac Replacement Chart RMCF 15–100 18,000 14,000 14,000 10,000 Current MCC Circuit Breaker Type Out-ofProduction Circuit Breaker Type 1 RMCFA 234 15–150 18,000 14,000 14,000 10,000 RMCHF 23 15–100 65,000 25,000 18,000 20,000 Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 600 RMCHFA 234 15–150 65,000 25,000 18,000 20,000 RMCFA FA ■ Example: Example: An RMCF3100 is a newly manufactured, three-pole, 100A trip panelboard replacement circuit breaker. It replaces an out-ofproduction F circuit breaker. RMC Designates new motor control center replacement circuit breaker. 17 RMCHFA HFA ■ RMCF F ■ 18 RMCHF HF ■ 19 20 21 F Identifies the out-ofproduction circuit breaker frame. 3 Number of poles. 100 Trip unit ampere rating. Contact 1-800-OLD-UNIT for replacement or Page V12-T3-91 for Series C retrofit kits. 22 23 24 Notes 1 Last manufacture date—1974. 2 Motor control center replacement breakers do not have the same physical dimensions or mounting holes as the breakers they replace. Types RMCFA and RMCHFA are 6.00 inches long and the breakers they replace, FA and HFA, are 6.50 inches long. Types RMCF and RMCHF are 6.00 inches long and the breakers they replace, F and HF, are 9.375 inches long. A mounting plate is provided with each breaker to resolve these differences, and must be installed to ensure a proper fit. 3 Motor control center replacement circuit breakers have noninterchangeable trip units and the same interrupting capacity as the out-of-production circuit breakers they replace. 4 RMCFA and RMCHFA two-pole breakers are supplied in a three-pole frame with current carrying parts omitted from the center pole. 25 V12-T3-88 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities 3 Types RMCFA, RMCF, RMCHFA and RMCHF—Motor Control Center Replacement ■ Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. Motor Control Center Replacement Circuit Breakers Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Type RMCFA Type RMCF 1 1 2 Catalog Number Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole 3 Type RMCFA—15–100A Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic 15 — RMCFA2015 RMCFA3015 20 — RMCFA2020 RMCFA3020 25 — RMCFA2025 RMCFA3025 30 — RMCFA2030 RMCFA3030 35 — RMCFA2035 RMCFA3035 40 — RMCFA2040 RMCFA3040 50 — RMCFA2050 RMCFA3050 60 — RMCFA2060 RMCFA3060 70 — RMCFA2070 RMCFA3070 80 — RMCFA2080 RMCFA3080 90 — RMCFA2090 RMCFA3090 100 — RMCFA2100 RMCFA3100 9 10 4 5 6 7 8 Type RMCF—15–150A Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic 15 — RMCHF2015 RMCHF3015 20 — RMCHF2020 RMCHF3020 25 — RMCHF2025 RMCHF3025 30 — RMCHF2030 RMCHF3030 35 — RMCHF2035 RMCHF3035 40 — RMCHF2040 RMCHF3040 50 — RMCHF2050 RMCHF3050 60 — RMCHF2060 RMCHF3060 70 — RMCHF2070 RMCHF3070 80 — RMCHF2080 RMCHF3080 90 — RMCHF2090 RMCHF3090 100 — RMCHF2100 RMCHF3100 125 — RMCHF2125 RMCHF3125 150 — RMCHF2150 RMCHF3150 11 12 13 14 15 16 Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For more information, call 1-800-OLD-UNIT for Cutler-Hammer motor control solutions. 17 See Page V12-T3-91 for Series C retrofit kits. 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-89 3 1 ■ Replacement Capabilities Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. Motor Control Center Replacement Circuit Breakers Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 2 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers 1 Catalog Number Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Type RMCHFA—15–100A Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic Type RMCHFA 15 — RMCHFA2015 RMCHFA3015 20 — RMCHFA2020 RMCHFA3020 25 — RMCHFA2025 RMCHFA3025 30 — RMCHFA2030 RMCHFA3030 5 35 — RMCHFA2035 RMCHFA3035 40 — RMCHFA2040 RMCHFA3040 6 50 — RMCHFA2050 RMCHFA3050 60 — RMCHFA2060 RMCHFA3060 7 70 — RMCHFA2070 RMCHFA3070 80 — RMCHFA2080 RMCHFA3080 8 90 — RMCHFA2090 RMCHFA3090 100 — RMCHFA2100 RMCHFA3100 9 125 — RMCHFA2125 RMCHFA3125 150 — RMCHFA2150 RMCHFA3150 4 10 Type RMCHF—15–100A Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic Type RMCHF 15 — RMCHF2015 RMCHF3015 11 20 — RMCHF2020 RMCHF3020 25 — RMCHF2025 RMCHF3025 12 30 — RMCHF2030 RMCHF3030 35 — RMCHF2035 RMCHF3035 40 — RMCHF2040 RMCHF3040 50 — RMCHF2050 RMCHF3050 60 — RMCHF2060 RMCHF3060 70 — RMCHF2070 RMCHF3070 80 — RMCHF2080 RMCHF3080 90 — RMCHF2090 RMCHF3090 100 — RMCHF2100 RMCHF3100 13 14 15 16 Notes 1 These frames are obsolete. For more information, call 1-800-OLD-UNIT for Cutler-Hammer motor control solutions. 17 See Page V12-T3-91 for Series C retrofit kits. 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-90 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Technology Upgrades Type W Series C Retrofit Kit Series C Retrofit Kits Series C Retrofit Kits are to be used to upgrade existing Type W and 5 Star motor control center units by changing out the old breakers with new Series C models. These kits can be applied to both starter and feeder units. Some of the breakers that these kits will upgrade include: ● MCP, F, FA, FB, HFB, K, KA, KB, HKB, L, LA, LB and HLB breakers ● ● Type W Series C Retrofit Kit ● ● ● ● 5 Star Series C Retrofit Kit ● ● ● ● ● Series C device, 65 kA (either HMCP or thermalmagnetic breaker) Operating handle, including tripped indication and push-to-trip mechanism Label stating that the MCC unit has been retrofitted with Series C device suitable for 65 kA (similar to UL quality label) Templates for desired frame size Assembly instructions Customer benefits: ● ● ● Ease of ordering—one catalog number for all required parts Series C technology— higher AIC rating All new components associated with the breaker, including new stab assembly, operating mechanism and door, if required ● The Type W Series C retrofit kit includes: 5 Star Series C Retrofit Kit The 5 Star Series C retrofit kit includes: 310+ Electronic Trip Unit The 310+ electronic trip unit has advantages and upgraded features over the Series C 310 electronic trip unit as follows: ● ● ● ● Series C device, 65 kA (either HMCP or thermalmagnetic breaker) Operating handle, including tripped indication and push-to-trip mechanism Label stating that the MCC unit has been retrofitted with Series C device suitable for 65 kA (similar to UL quality label) Templates for proper hole placement for desired frame size Series C breaker mounting hardware New door and hardware New stab assembly Assembly instructions ● ● Adjustable Ir continuous current setting eliminates the need for rating plugs Cause of trip information can be extracted from the breaker Zone selective interlocking option for breaker coordination Ground fault alarm only option to keep critical equipment on-line when a ground fault is present Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System™ to improve worker safety Note: Available only for the LG, NG, RG/RD 310+ models. The 310+ electronic trip unit is available for the following MCCB breakers: ● ● ● ● ● ● Series C FDE Series G JG Series G LG Series G NG Series G RG Series C RD (available as a field retrofit kit) Series C to Series G Upgrades The Series C 250A JD and 600A LD breakers are being replaced by Series G 250A JG and 600A LG breakers respectively. There are several advantages in moving from these Series C to Series G breakers. 3 Series G 250A JG Molded-Case Circuit Breaker ● Smaller breaker footprint than Series C JD ● Breaker is duel rated, UL and IEC ● Interruption ratings up to 200 kAIC at 480 Vac ● Accessories are field installable thru-cover ● Now available with an electronic, 310+ trip unit ● Can accommodate the ANSI C12.1 Power Monitoring/Metering Module (PM3) Series G 600A LG Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: ● Smaller breaker footprint Series C LD ● Breaker is duel rated, UL and IEC ● Interruption ratings up to 200 kAIC at 480 Vac ● Accessories are field installable thru-cover ● Upgraded from 310 electronic trip unit to a 310+ electronic trip unit ● Can accommodate the ANSI C12.1 Power Monitoring Metering Module (PM3) Advantages of 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology Versus the 310 Electronic Trip Unit: ● Adjustable Ir continuous current setting eliminates the need for rating plugs ● Cause of trip information can be extracted from the breaker ● Zone selective interlocking option for breaker coordination ● Ground fault alarm only option to keep critical equipment on-line when a ground fault is present ● Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System to improve worker safety (not available in the JG 310+ electronic trip unit) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-91 3 1 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities F10 Series C Retrofit Kit 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 F10 Series C Retrofit Kit The F10 Series C retrofit kit includes: ● ● 9 ● 10 11 12 ● ● Series C device, 65 kA (either HMCP or thermalmagnetic breaker) Operating handle mechanism, including tripped indication push-to-trip Label stating that the MCC unit has been retrofitted with Series C device suitable for 65 kA (similar to UL quality label) Templates for desired frame size Assembly instructions 13 Series C Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Interrupting Rating (kAIC) Frame Type 240V 480V 600V Trip Rating Amperes Catalog Number HFD 100 65 25 15 HFD3015 HFD 100 65 25 20 HFD3020 HFD 100 65 25 25 HFD3025 HFD 100 65 25 30 HFD3030 HFD 100 65 25 40 HFD3040 HFD 100 65 25 50 HFD3050 HFD 100 65 25 60 HFD3060 HFD 100 65 25 70 HFD3070 HFD 100 65 25 80 HFD3080 HFD 100 65 25 90 HFD3090 HFD 100 65 25 100 HFD3100 HFD 100 65 25 125 HFD3125 HFD 100 65 25 150 HFD3150 FDC 200 100 35 15 FDC3015 FDC 200 100 35 20 FDC3020 FDC 200 100 35 25 FDC3025 FDC 200 100 35 30 FDC3030 FDC 200 100 35 40 FDC3040 FDC 200 100 35 50 FDC3050 FDC 200 100 35 60 FDC3060 FDC 200 100 35 70 FDC3070 FDC 200 100 35 80 FDC3080 FDC 200 100 35 90 FDC3090 FDC 200 100 35 100 FDC3100 FDC 200 100 35 125 FDC3125 FDC 200 100 35 150 FDC3150 HJD 100 65 25 175 HJD3175 HJD 100 65 25 200 HJD3200 HJD 100 65 25 225 HJD3225 16 HJD 100 65 25 250 HJD3250 JDC 200 100 35 175 JDC3175 17 JDC 200 100 35 200 JDC3200 JDC 200 100 35 225 JDC3225 18 JDC 200 100 35 250 JDC3250 HKD 100 65 35 300 HKD3300 19 HKD 100 65 35 350 HKD3350 14 15 20 21 HKD 100 65 35 400 HKD3400 KDC 200 100 50 300 KDC3300 KDC 200 100 50 350 KDC3350 KDC 200 100 50 400 KDC3400 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-92 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Series C Motor Circuit Protectors Starter Size Series C Retrofit Kit Catalog Numbering System Magnetic Trip Range Amperes Continuous Rating Amperes Catalog Number 0 9–30 3 HMCP003A0 0 21–70 7 HMCP007C0 0 45–150 15 HMCP015E0 0 40–60 25 HMCP025D0 1 90–300 30 HMCP030H1 2 80–120 50 HMCP050G2 2 150–500 50 HMCP050K2 2 115–170 70 HMCP070J2 2 210–700 70 HMCP070M2 3 160–240 100 HMCP100L3 3 300–1000 100 HMCP100R3 4 450–1500 150 HMCP150T4 4 750–2500 150 HMCP150U4 4, 5 350–700 250 HMCP250A5 5 450–900 250 HMCP250C5 5 500–1000 250 HMCP250D5 5 625–1250 250 HMCP250F5 5 750–1500 250 HMCP250G5 5 875–1750 250 HMCP250J5 5 1000–2000 250 HMCP250K5 5 1125–2250 250 HMCP250L5 5 1250–2500 250 HMCP250W5 5 500–1000 400 HMCP400D5 5 625–1250 400 HMCP400F5 5 750–1500 400 HMCP400G5 5 875–1750 400 HMCP400J5 5 1000–2000 400 HMCP400K5 5 1125–2250 400 HMCP400L5 5 1250–2500 400 HMCP400M5 5 1500–3000 400 HMCP400N5 5 1750–3500 400 HMCP400R5 5, 6 2000–4000 400 HMCP400X5 1 FT HMCP030H1 C 12 N MCC Type FT = Type W FS = 5 Star FR = F10 Device Catalog Number 2 Device Panel Modifications D = With device panel N = No device panel C = Copper lugs for HMCP L = Lugs for moldedcase breaker Use tables. Door Size Height of door in inches, 6.00-inch increments How to Order Step 1: Select the correct Series C molded-case circuit breaker from the table on Page V12-T3-92 or the Series C motor circuit protector from the table on this page. Step 2: Create a catalog number based on the MCC type, device selected, modifications, door size and device panel. Step 3: Select price from PL04304002E. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-93 3 1 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities OPTIM 550 Trip Units for Upgrading Thermal/Magnetic Trips Cutler-Hammer PowerNet™ and Zone Interlock Kits (OPTIM 550 Only) K-, L- and N-Frames PowerNet Communication Kit 2 The Cutler-Hammer PowerNet communications kit can be ordered to add PowerNet communications to an existing OPTIM 550 breaker in the field. An 18.00-inch wiring pigtail is routed to the rear of the breaker: two wires for PowerNet and two wires for 24 Vdc (45 mA load). It is recommended that the power supply be an “isolated high quality” unit. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Digitrip OPTIM 550 Replacement of the OPTIM 550 trip units and the associated accessories allows a customer to easily upgrade an existing Series C, K- or L-Frame molded-case circuit breaker equipped with a standard thermalmagnetic trip unit, without the need to purchase a new circuit breaker. ● ● ● ● ● Key features and benefits of the OPTIM 550 trip unit include: 10 set points providing for premium protection and coordination Cause-of-Trip indication (LEDs and digital memory) Load monitoring to provide information for energy management Diagnostics to assist in system troubleshooting Communications and zone interlocking options—field or factory installed OPTIM 550 Trip Units for Upgrading Thermal/Magnetic Trips Maximum Ampere Rating (Sensor) Catalog Number Type of OPTIM 550 Trip Unit LSI LSIA LSIG KD, HKD, KDC, CKD and CHKD Breaker Frames 13 125 KEP3125T52 KEP3125T57 KEP3125T56 250 KEP3250T52 KEP3250T57 KEP3250T56 14 400 KEP3400T52 KEP3400T57 KEP3400T56 15 125 LEP3125T52 LEP3125T57 LEP3125T56 250 LEP3250T52 LEP3250T57 LEP3250T56 16 400 LEP3400T52 LEP3400T57 LEP3400T56 600 LEP3600T52 LEP3600T57 LEP3600T56 PowerNet and Zone Interlock Kits PowerNet Zone Interlocking/ Ground 1 PowerNet and Zone Interlocking/Ground 1 Factory Install Suffix Catalog Number Factory Install Suffix Catalog Number Factory Install Suffix Catalog Number K-Frame PN ICK550K ZG ZGK550K ZGP ZGPK550K L-Frame PN ICK550L ZG ZGK550L ZGP ZGPK550L N-Frame PN ICK550N ZG ZGK550N ZGP ZGPK550N Circuit Breaker Notes 1 Includes a ground fault alarm signal that can drive the ground fault alarm unit (catalog number GFAU). Instruction leaflet numbers (K) 29C506, (L) 29C897, (N) 29C898. LD, HLD, LDC, CLD, CHLD and CLDC Breaker Frames 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-94 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Handle Mechanisms 1 Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. ■ MCCB Handle Mechanism Introduction Eaton offers a broad range of handle mechanisms for molded-case circuit breakers. Each of these has been designed specifically for safe, dependable operation and ease of installation. 2 3 Vari-Depth Type—Page V12-T3-105 Flex-Shaft Type—Page V12-T3-107 5 Slide Plate Type—Page V12-T3-99 6 Handle mechanisms are used in a wide variety of applications including enclosed molded-case circuit breakers, control panels and motor control centers. Whether replacing a damaged handle mechanism with a like unit, switching from fuses to circuit breakers in order to limit downtime, or upgrading to take advantage of the many benefits associated with applying communicating, programmable molded-case circuit breaker technology, Eaton has the handle mechanism solution that is right for you. 4 7 8 9 Universal Rotary Type— Page V12-T3-110 Type MC Motor Control— Page V12-T3-103 Type SM Safety Handle— Page V12-T3-101 10 11 12 Series C Rotary Type— Page V12-T3-109 13 14 G-Frame Vari-Depth 15 Type AMT Vari-Depth— Page V12-T3-104 16 17 Universal Direct—Page V12-T3-111 G Direct—Page V12-T3-111 18 19 20 Euro IEC Direct—Page V12-T3-111 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-95 3 1 2 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Handle Mechanism Selection and Availability Guide Door Mounted Circuit Breaker and Switch Type Flange Mounted VariDepth Series C 1 Rotary Slide Plate MC Series C 1 Flex Shaft SM AMT Fixed Width AMT Vari-Depth Series C Breakers 3 F-Frame/F HMCP 2 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ J-Frame/J HMCP ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 K-Frame/K HMCP ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ L-Frame/L HMCP ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 5 M-Frame ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 6 R-Frame 7 GB/GHB/GC/GHC/GD/GMCP ■ LA/LAB/HLA ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 8 LC/HLC/LCG ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ MA/HMA ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ MC/HMC ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NB/HNB ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NC/HNC ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 9 10 11 ■ N-Frame ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Other Industrial Breakers ■ PB ■ PC/PCC FB TRI-PAC ■ ■ LA TRI-PAC ■ ■ ■ ■ 12 NB TRI-PAC ■ ■ ■ ■ 13 FCL ■ ■ ■ LCL ■ ■ ■ 14 EB/EHB/FB/HFB ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ JA/KA/HKA/DA/LB/LBB/HLB ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 15 Disconnect Switches DE-ION® 30, 60, 100 ■ ■ 16 DS 30, 60, 100, 200 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ DS 400, 600 ■ 17 Visi-Flex Model “T” 30, 60, 100 ■ 18 ■ PB TRI-PAC ■ Notes 1 For application only with Series C molded-case circuit breakers and HMCPs. 2 Series C F-Frame includes EHD, ED, FDB, FD, HFD and FDC designations. 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-96 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities table are from the mounting surface of the breaker or the disconnect to the inside of the enclosure cover. Vari-Depth Type General purpose vari-depth handle mechanisms are suitable for use with Type 1 fabricated enclosures. They are designed for use with breakers or disconnect switches when used in deep enclosures. Standard mechanisms do not include an internal lockoff device. Mechanisms with this feature are, however, offered as an optional item. The internal lockoff provides a means of padlocking the breaker or the switch in the OFF position while the enclosure door is open. Required for a standard application are a padlockable operating handle, a shaft and a mechanism. Two variable depth shafts are offered to better cover the wide range of depths of various enclosures...these are referred to in the table as the standard and the long shaft. The dimensions for panel depth given in the following ordered in place of the standard handle. 1 The adapter bushing, a component of the special handle kit, may be ordered separately. 2 Handle 3 6.5 4 Standard Shaft 5 10.0 6 These mechanisms may also be used in conjunction with Type 4, 7 and 9 cast enclosures. When used with these enclosures, the special handle kits shown as accessory items must be Long Shaft 7 Mechanism 8 9 Vari-Depth Type Vari-Depth Type Catalog Numbers Mechanism 12 For Complete Applications, Order Mechanism, Handle and Shaft 10 Handle 3 Shaft Standard– (No Internal Lockoff) Style Number Special– (With Internal Lockoff) Style Number Type 1, 3R, 12 (With Hardware) Style Number Standard Panel Depth Standard Style Number Long Panel Depth Long Style Number Circuit Breakers F4 11 12 373D958G22 373D958G23 504C323G07 5–10-1/4 47A4446G36 10-1/2–14 47A4446G37 EB, EHB, FB, HFB, MCP 373D958G05 373D958G06 504C323G07 5–10-1/4 47A4446G36 10-1/2–14 47A4446G37 CA 458D493G20 458D493G21 504C323G07 4-3/4–9-3/4 47A4446G36 9-3/4–13-1/2 47A4446G37 Series C J-Frame and HMCP J 5092A62G03 5092A62G04 504C323G07 5-7/8–11-1/8 47A4446G36 11-1/8–14-7/8 47A4446G37 Series C K-Frame and HMCP K 5092A62G01 5092A62G02 504C323G07 5-7/8–11-1/8 47A4446G36 11-1/8–14-7/8 47A4446G37 Series C L-Frame and HMCP L 5092A62G05 5092A62G06 504C323G07 6-1/8–11-1/4 47A4446G36 11-1/4–15 47A4446G37 JA, KA, HKA, DA, LB, LBB, HLB 458D493G03 458D493G11 504C323G07 5-7/8–11-1/8 47A4446G36 11-1/8–14-7/8 47A4446G37 LA, HLA, LC, HLC 458D493G04 458D493G12 504C323G07 6-1/8–11-1/4 47A4446G36 11-1/4–15 47A4446G37 TRI-PAC FB 373D958G10 373D958G11 504C323G07 5–10-1/4 47A4446G36 10-1/4–14 47A4446G37 FCL 373D958G16 373D958G17 504C323G07 5–10-1/4 47A4446G36 10-1/4–14 47A4446G37 MA, HMA, MC, HMC, Series C MD, MDS Frame (not MDL) 458D493G05 458D493G13 504C323G07 6-11/16–11-13/16 47A4446G36 11-13/16–15-9/16 47A4446G37 NB, HNB, NC, HNC 373D958G07 373D958G08 504C323G07 7-15/16–13-1/4 47A4446G36 12-15/16–16-15/16 47A4446G37 TRI-PAC LA 374D075G02 374D075G01 504C323G07 6-1/8–11-1/4 47A4446G36 11-1/4–15 47A4446G37 TRI-PAC NB 373D958G12 373D958G13 504C323G07 7-15/16–13-1/4 47A4446G36 12-15/16–16-15/16 47A4446G37 LCL 458D493G22 458D493G23 504C323G07 6-11/16–11-13/16 47A4446G36 11-13/16–15-9/16 47A4446G37 20 21 Series C F-Frame and HMCP Circuit Breakers 47A4446G34 — 5 5-3/4–11 5 11–14-3/4 47A4446G37 Type DS 30, 60, 100A 4987D14G02 — 504C323G07 5-3/8–10-5/8 47A4446G36 10-3⁄/8–14-5/16 47A4446G37 Type DS 200A 4987D14G01 — 504C323G07 6-11/16–11-3/16 47A4446G36 10-7/8–14-7/8 47A4446G37 200A DE-ION 458D493G04 458D493G12 504C323G07 6-1/8–11-1/4 47A4446G36 11-1/4–15 47A4446G37 30, 60, 100A DE-ION 5 Notes 1 Includes hardware. 2 When used with plug-in adapter kits or rear-connected studs, special mounting hardware is required. Refer to Eaton. 3 UL File No. E56845 Vol. 1 Section 4. 4 Extra long shaft includes support bracket for Series C F-Frame with no internal lockoff. Order 373D958G24, which includes the mechanism, shaft and bracket. Order handle separately. Panel depth 16-3/8–24-1/4. 5 Mechanism style includes a handle and a standard shaft. A long shaft may be ordered separately if required. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-97 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 22 23 24 25 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities 1 Vari-Depth Type Special Handles 2 Meet Type 4 sheet steel requirements. These handles are similar to standard handles, except they include an internal neoprene gasket. Due to gasketing effect between handle and housing, handle will not indicate a tripped position when used with circuit breakers. 3 4 5 6 7 Handle Kits UL File No. E56845 Vol. 1 Section 4. Handle Kits These kits are for use with Type 4, 7 and 9 cast enclosures. They include a special operating handle, mounting bolts and an adapter bushing (bushing may be purchased separately). Kits may be used with standard mechanisms and shafts. Instruction drawing 314C809 applies for assembly. Handle Kits 8 Description Style Number Standard finish 504C323G08 9 For Type 4, 9 enclosure 314C794G10 For Type 7 enclosure 314C794G09 Adapter bushing only 314C794G04 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-98 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Slide Plate Type These compact slide plate handle mechanisms are especially designed for use with AB DE-ION circuit breakers and disconnect switches when they are mounted in a shallow enclosure. They are suitable for use on Type 1 applications. Because of the mechanisms’ simplified installation— three mounting holes—and preassembled construction, these units are commonly used where high volume, standardized enclosures are being fabricated. The mechanism styles listed on this page are for use on enclosures that have covers hinged on the right side. If these mechanisms are used on enclosures that have covers hinged on the left side, the door interlock will not function. Vertical and Horizontal Mounting Standard Slide Plate Mechanism Catalog Numbers Vertical Mounting Horizontal Mounting 1 Padlocks in OFF Position Style Number Padlocks in ON or OFF Position Style Number Padlocks in OFF Position Style Number 2 KL and HKL frame MA, HMA, MC and HMC breaker LA, HLA, LC and HLC breaker JA, KA, HKA, DA, LB, LBB and HLB breaker NB, HNB, NC and HNC breaker JB, KB and HKB breaker LCL breaker 314C386G01 314C386G08 314C386G04 3 EH breaker 2P with long handle EH breaker 3P with long handle F-Frame 2P F- and HF-Frame 3P Type AQB and NQB 100A frames and Type PF 15–100A frame 314C386G02 Enclosure Cover Hinged on Right Circuit Breakers 4 5 314C386G09 314C386G05 6 7 EH standard 2P 314C386G03 EH standard 3P and FA magnetic only 2 and 3P FA 2 and 3P thermal-magnetic EB, EHB, FB, HFB 3P MCP, HMCP (0-4) 2P FCL breaker 314C386G10 314C386G06 8 9 505C294G03 — — F-Frame Series C + HMCP-F 314C386G03 314C386G10 314C386G06 J-Frame Series C + HMCP-J K-Frame Series C + HMCP-K 314C386G02 314C386G09 314C386G05 L-Frame Series C + HMCP-L, MDL 314C386G18 314C386G08 314C386G04 M-Frame Series C 314C386G01 314C386G08 314C386G04 R-Frame 1 505C294G03 — — 225A TRI-PAC Type K 400A TRI-PAC Type KL LA TRI-PAC NB TRI-PAC 314C386G01 314C386G08 314C386G04 100A TRI-PAC 314C386G02 314C386G09 314C386G05 FB TRI-PAC 314C386G03 314C386G10 314C386G06 15 60–100A Visi-Flex 314C386G01 314C386G08 314C386G04 16 30A and Special 60A Visi-Flex 314C386G02 314C386G09 314C386G05 PB, TRI-PAC PB, PC, PCC, PCF Series C Circuit Breakers TRI-PAC switches 10 11 12 13 14 Visi-Flex Switches (Model T) 2 DE-ION Switches and Disconnect Switches 30–60A (long handle) DE-ION 100A (long handle) DE-ION 200A disconnect switch 200 DS switch 314C386G01 314C386G08 314C386G04 30–60A disconnect switch 100A disconnect switch 314C386G02 314C386G09 314C386G05 30, 60, 100A DS switch 314C386G03 314C386G10 314C386G06 400 and 60A DS switch 314C386G15 — — Notes 1 Does not padlock in OFF position. Type 3R version available as special. Contact Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center. 2 Handle mechanisms cannot be used on Visi-Flex switches with 200A fuse kits. 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-99 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Outdoor or Hazardous Type This handle mechanism is designed for use with fabricated or cast, Type 3, 4 or 5 enclosures. A butterfly cam type mechanism may be used on enclosures with either right- or left-hand hinged covers or on enclosures with bolted covers. The mechanism has a provision for padlocking. Will accept up to three locks. Assembly of this mechanism is accomplished by welding it to the enclosure door or the cover. Refer to IL29C287 for drilling plan. For PB, PC and RD, refer to drawing 372D690. 9 Outdoor or Hazardous Location Type Mechanisms for Outdoor or Hazardous Locations Complete Handle Mechanisms Type 3, 4, 5 Drilling Plan Reference Padlocks in OFF Position Style Number Padlocks in ON or OFF Position Style Number Series C F-Frame EB, EHB, FB, HFB 48A3656 48A3656G03 48A3656G04 JA, KA, LA, MA, HKA, HLA, HMA, LB, HLB 452D028 452D028G01 — 48A3656 48A3656G03 48A3656G04 Description Circuit Breakers DE-ION Switches 30, 60, 100A Accessories Door Interlock Kits Description Drilling Plan Reference Style Number 3 point—for mechanisms, style numbers: 314C386G01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 08, 09, 10 208B624 28A2656G08 2 point—for PB mechanism, style number 505C294G03 372D690 1532990 Note: For use with slide plate mechanisms used in larger panels where regular interlock is not adequate. 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-100 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Type SM Safety Handle Type SM Safety Handle Mechanism Catalog Numbers Catalog Number 1 1 Right-Hand Mounting Enclosure Cover Hinged On Left Left-Hand Mounting Enclosure Cover Hinged On Right Series C—F-Frame, MCP, HMCP F, EB, EHB, FB, HFB breakers, and Type DS 30, 60, 100A non-fusible switches SM150R SM150L 3 Type DS 30, 60, 100A fusible switches SM100SFR SM100SFL 4 FB TRI-PAC, FB breaker with current limiter, or Type FCL SM101PR SM101PL 30, 60, 100A DE-ION switches SM100R SM100L DA, JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB breakers SM225R SM225L Series C—J-Frame, HMCP J SM250JR SM250JL Series C—K-Frame, HMCP K SM400KR SM400KL LAB, LA, HLA, LC, HLC breakers (400 and 600A) SM400R SM400L Type SM safety handle mechanism is designed to prevent tampering by unauthorized individuals and provides the optimum in personnel safety. When properly applied, these mechanisms conform to Type 12 and J.I.C. requirements, and are well-suited for use by the automotive and machine tool industries. Series C—L-Frame, HMCP L, MDL SM600R SM600L Series C—M-Frame, MD, MDS SM800R SM800L MA, HMA, MC, HMC breakers SM800R SM800L TRI-PAC LA breaker SM400PR SM400PL TRI-PAC NB SM800PR SM800PL NB, HNB, NC, HNC breakers SM1200R SM1200L Type DS 200A non-fusible switch SM200SR SM200SL Type DS 200A fusible switch SM200SFR SM200SFL Type LCL SM400LCLR SM400LCLL Completely preassembled in a rugged cast housing, the Type SM safety handle mechanism includes a predrilled mounting plate for simplified customer installation. Standard handles are 5.125 inches long and can be padlocked in the OFF position with as many as three padlocks. A shorter handle 3.875 inches long can be supplied on SM100, SM101 or SM150 mechanisms when specified. Further Information IL 13322 DH3R door hardware All Type SM safety handle mechanisms can be used on any size enclosure. Order handle mechanism from the table at right, plus desired door hardware for complete application. Dress nameplate required to meet automotive specifications is available from accessories section. IL 13287 Electrical interlock Handle Mechanism for Use With: Enclosed Breaker with SM Handle 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Publication Number Description IL 14439 F-Frame, EB, EHB, FB, FCL, HFB, MCP, FB-P, 30–100A DS switch IL 29C274 J- and K-Frame IL 29C284 L-Frame IL 13282 JA, KA, JB, KB, LAB, LA, MA, NB, HLA, NB-P, 200A DS switch IL 13327 DH1L door hardware IL 13326 DH1R door hardware IL 13325 DH2R door hardware IL 13324 DH3L door hardware 13 14 15 16 17 18 Notes 1 Must be ordered with door hardware; if not, door-operated defeater kit is required. 19 Mechanisms for Type 4 Applications—Mechanisms with stainless steel parts and special gasketing can be supplied. Order by description. 30% adder. 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-101 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Auxiliary Latch Kits 1 Type SM Safety Handle Door Hardware 2 Three choices of door hardware and an auxiliary handle are offered to provide the best latching scheme for individual needs. The door hardware is designed with a provision for padlocking, and a coin-proof slot that requires the use of a tool to open the door, for maximum security. 3 4 Door Hardware 7 Description Right Hand Left Hand With sliding latches for smaller panels up to approximately 30.00 inches high DH1R 1 DH1L 2 Style Number Door hardware using sliding latches, right- or left-hand mounting 656D669G01 Door hardware using roller latches, right-hand mounting 370D801G04 Left-hand mounting 370D802G04 Electrical Interlock Kit 8 With 2-roller latches for intermediate panels up to approximately 40.00 inches high 9 DH2R 1 DH2L 2 Provides 1NC and 1NO contacts (SPDT switch) for use with auxiliary circuits. Mounts to end of mechanism housing as shown. Electrical Interlock Kit 10 Electrical Interlock Kit Style Number 622B747G01 11 With 3-roller latches for larger panels, approximately 40.00 inches and higher 12 DH3R 1 DH3L 2 Door Operated Interlock Defeater Kit 13 Auxiliary handle for larger panels 14 DH4R 1 DH4L 2 Required when door hardware is not used; operates as door closes. Additional method of securing door such as screw latch, also required (to be supplied by box manufacturer). Door Operated Interlock Defeater Kit 15 18 Auxiliary Latch Kits Description Catalog Number 6 17 Slide and Roller Latches Select desired hardware from the table below. Additional latches can be ordered from accessories section if desired. Type 1, 12 only. 5 16 Provide an additional latch for use with applications where 2-point latching may not be adequate. Style Number 623B214G02 Dress Nameplates Required to meet automotive specifications. Mounts from inside enclosure and covers operating mechanism mounting bolts, making mechanism non-removable when enclosure door is closed. Dress Nameplate Notes 1 Enclosure cover hinged on left. 2 Enclosure cover hinged on right. Dress Nameplate 19 Description Style Number For SM100, SM150 mechanisms 373D260G05 20 For SM200, and larger mechanisms 373D260G05 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-102 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Type MC Motor Control Type MC Motor Control Catalog Numbers 1 Catalog Number 23 Handle Mechanism 1 For Use With Type 1 Enclosure Type 12 Enclosure Series C F-Frame HMCP F SMCU150FD CMCU150FD EB, EHB, FB, HFB breakers and MCP (Size 0–4) SMCU150FD CMCU150FD FB TRI-PAC SMCU100FBP CMCU100FBP FCL breakers SMCU100FCL CMCU100FCL 30, 60,100A DS switch fusible, non-fusible SMCU100DS CMCU100DS 200A DS switch fusible, non-fusible SMCU200DS CMCU200DS Mounting directly to the front of the disconnect, these mechanisms provide positive operation and handle indication. Both disconnect and mechanism mount simultaneously with mounting hardware supplied with the mechanism. For security, the handle can be padlocked in the OFF position with up to three 0.375-inch hasp padlocks. Also, the mechanism is interlocked with the enclosure door so that the disconnect must be OFF before the door can be opened. A defeater is provided to bypass this interlock. Catalog numbers listed include the mechanism, mounting hardware and door interlock clip. 3 4 5 6 225A Mechanism Type MC handle mechanisms are linear drive, fixed depth mechanisms designed for through-door mounting in standardized or shallow depth enclosures such as motor control centers or enclosed circuit breakers. 2 Series C J-Frame HMCP J SMCU250JD CMCU250JD Series C K-Frame HMCP K, DA, JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB SMCU400KD CMCU400KD Breakers, Size 5 MCP (400A) SMCU225KA CMCU225KA Series C L-Frame HMCP L, MDL SMCU600LD CMCU600LD Series C M-Frame not MDL SMCU800MA CMCU800MA LAB, LA, HLA, LC, HLC breakers (400 and 600A frame) SMCU400LA SMCU400LA LA TRI-PAC SMCU400LAP SMCU400LAP MA, HMA, MC, HMC Breakers (800A frame) SMCU800MA SMCU800MA NB, HNB, NC, HNC Breakers (1200A frame) SMCU1200NB SMCU1200NB LCL225 and 400 SMCU400LCL SMCU400LCL Series C L-Frame HMCP L SMCU600LD SMCU600LD 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Further Information Publication Number Description IL 14572 F-Frame, EB, EHB, FB, MCP, HFB IL 29C273 J- and K-Frame IL 29C283 L-Frame IL 14571 FB-P IL 14938 JB, KB IL 14573 30, 60, 100A DS switch IL 14574 200A DS switch 14 15 16 17 18 Notes 1 Mechanisms are shown mounted on breaker for illustration purposes only. Breakers are not included. 2 These mechanisms are recognized under the component program of Underwriters Laboratories. 3 Selection data for handle mechanism only; circuit breaker not included. 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-103 3 1 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities AMT Vari-Depth Fixed Width Type—Type AMT for Below Handle Mounting 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Complete Assembly 12 Catalog Number Breaker or Switch Type Backplate and Yoke Assembly Catalog Number Rod and Brace Assembly Catalog Number Pivot Mechanism Assembly Catalog Number Operating Handle Assembly Catalog Number Below the Handle—Fixed Width—with Short Brace and/or Rod as Listed (For all enclosures including Hoffman A-25 Enclosures) Series C F-Frame HMCP F 3 AMTFDBSFH AMTFD-B AMTR AMTPM-FH Series C J-Frame HMCP J 3 AMTJDBSFH AMTKB-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-FSH AMTOP Series C K-Frame HMCP K 3 AMTKDBSFH AMTLB-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-FSH AMTOP Series C L-Frame HMCP L 3 AMTLDBSFH AMTLD-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-FS AMTOP DS-30, 60, 100 unfused AMTDSBSFH AMTDS100-B AMTR AMTPM-FH AMTOP AMTOP DS-30, 60, 100 fused 4 AMTDSFBSFH AMTDS100F-B AMTR AMTPM-FH AMTOP DS-30, 60, 100 fused 5 AMTDSF1BSFH AMTDS100F1-B AMTR AMTPM-FH AMTOP DS-200 unfused AMTDS2BSFH AMTDS200-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-FSH AMTOP DS-200 fused AMTDS2FBSFH AMTDS200F-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-FSH AMTOP 12 Below the Handle—Fixed Width—with Short Brace and/or Rod as Listed (Not for use with Hoffman A-25 Enclosures) EB, EHB, FB, HFB, MCP (0-4) AMTFBBSF AMTFD-B AMTR AMTPM-F AMTOP 13 JB, KB, MCP (250A) AMTKBBSF AMTKB-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-FS AMTOP 14 JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB, DA MCP (400A) AMTLBBSF AMTLB-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-FS AMTOP FB TRI-PAC, FCL AMTFBPBSF AMTFBP-B AMTR AMTPM-F AMTOP Optional rod and brace 6 15 16 AMTRB2 long rod and brace AMTRB3 extended rod and brace Standard Door Hardware 78 Catalog Number 17 DH1R DH2R 18 DH3R 19 Door Hardware Adapter Kit 9 20 Catalog Number AMTDHA 21 Door Hardware Kit for Hoffman A-25 Enclosure jk Catalog Number HDH-2R l HDH-3R m Further Information Publication Number IL 29C277 Description AMT Vari-Depth Handle Mechanism Notes 1 AMTR is rod only; AMTRI is rod and brace assembly. 2 Complete assembly not available, order components parts listed above. 3 Also for use with equivalent HMCP Frame. 4 For switches using 30, 60, 100A, 600V NEC Class H, R or J fuses. 5 For switches using 30, 60, 100A, 250V NEC Class H or R fuses. 6 AMTR and AMTRB1 for use with enclosure depth of 6.50–14.25 inches. For 12.25–18.25 inch depth, use optional AMTRB2. For 18.00–24.00 inch depth, use optional AMTRB3. 7 8 9 j k l m Requires adapter kit shown in Door Hardware Adapter Kit table. For standard door hardware description, see Page V12-T3-102. Required on standard door hardware only when used with any AMT handle mechanisms. Kit consists of special door hardware and door interlock pin. Available for righthand flange mounting only. For use with AMT fixed width mechanisms only. 2-point latch for use with panels up to approximately 40.00 inches high. 3-point latch for use with panels approximately 40.00 inches and higher. 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-104 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities AMT Vari-Depth Vari-Width Type— Type AMT for Above Handle Mounting The Type AMT is an extra heavy-duty handle mechanism designed for mounting in flange-type enclosures, and has provisions for mounting in various depth enclosures and for varying the width relationship between the disconnect device and the external handle. A door interlock is provided to prevent opening the enclosure door with the disconnect in the ON position or to close the disconnect with the enclosure door open. The external handle can be locked in the OFF position with up to three padlocks. The AMT mechanism is supplied for mounting in right-hand flange enclosures but can be easily converted for left-hand mounting. AMT mechanisms are available for above the handle mounting or below the handle mounting. Mechanisms for below the handle mounting are also available as fixed width units. When door hardware is used with an AMT handle mechanism, a door hardware adapter kit is required. MD, MSMVari-Width Type—Type AMT for Above Handle Mounting 1 2 3 Complete Assembly 12 Catalog Number Breaker or Switch Type 4 Backplate and Yoke Assembly Catalog Number Operating Rod and Brace Assembly Catalog Number Flange Mounted Pivot Mechanism Assembly 34 Catalog Number External Operating Handle Catalog Number Above the Handle Mounting with Short Rod and Brace Series C F-Frame 5 EB, EHB, FB, HFB, MCP (0–4) AMTFDASV AMTFB AMTRB1 AMTPM AMTOP Series C J-Frame 5 AMTJDASV AMTJD AMTRB1 AMTPM AMTOP Series C K-Frame 5 AMTKDASV AMTKD AMTRB1 AMTPM AMTOP Series C L-Frame, MDL 5 AMTLDASV AMTLD AMTRB1 AMTPM AMTOP JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB, DA, MCP (400A) AMTLBASV AMTLB AMTRB1 AMTPM AMTOP LA, HLA, LC, HLC AMTLAASV AMTLA AMTRB1 AMTPM AMTOP MD, MDS, MA, HMA, MC, HMC, Series C M-Frame, LCL AMTMAASV AMTMA AMTRB1 AMTPM AMTOP NB, HNB, NC, HNC AMTNBASV AMTNB AMTRB1 AMTPMNB AMTOP FB TRI-PAC, FCL AMTFBASV AMTFB AMTRB1 AMTPM AMTOP LA TRI-PAC AMTLAPASV AMTLAP AMTRB1 AMTPM AMTOP NB TRI-PAC AMTNBPASV AMTNBP AMTRB1 AMTPMNB AMTOP DS-30, 60, 100 unfused AMTDSASV AMTDS100 AMTRB1 AMTPM AMTOP DS-30, 60, 100 fused 6 AMTDSFASV AMTDS100F AMTRB1 AMTPM AMTOP DS-30, 60, 100 fused 7 AMTDSF1ASV AMTDS100F1 AMTRB1 AMTPM AMTOP DS-200 unfused AMTDS2ASV AMTDS200 AMTRB1 AMTPM AMTOP DS-200 fused AMTDS2FASV AMTDS200F AMTRB1 AMTPM AMTOP AMTFB AMTRB2 AMTPM AMTOP Above the Handle Mounting with Long Rod and Brace Series C F-Frame 5 EB, EHB, FB, HFB, MCP (0–4) AMTFDALV 5 AMTJDALV AMTJD AMTRB2 AMTPM AMTOP Series C K-Frame 5 AMTKDALV AMTKD AMTRB2 AMTPM AMTOP Series C J-Frame 5 AMTLDALV AMTLD AMTRB2 AMTPM AMTOP JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB, DA, MCP (400A) AMTLBALV AMTLB AMTRB2 AMTPM AMTOP Accessories LA, HLA, LC, HLC AMTLAALV AMTLA AMTRB2 AMTPM AMTOP Spacer kit to Vari-Width (not for use with fixed mechanisms) catalog number AMTSK1 for up to 1.00-inch variation. MD, MDS, MA, HMA, MC, HMC, Series C M-Frame, LCL AMTMAALV AMTMA AMTRB2 AMTPM AMTOP NB, HNB, NC, HNC AMTNBALV AMTNB AMTRB2 AMTPMNB AMTOP FB TRI-PAC, FCL AMTFBALV AMTFB AMTRB2 AMTPM AMTOP LA TRI-PAC AMTLAPALV AMTLAP AMTRB2 AMTPM AMTOP Note: This spacer kit is for up to NB TRI-PAC AMTNBPALV AMTNBP AMTRB2 AMTPMNB AMTOP 1.00-inch variation and consists of multiples of thin spacers to be used as required. A maximum of two kits per installation may be used. Due to the possible variation in dimensions, hardware is not supplied. Use standard 1/4–20 bolts. DS-30, 60, 100 unfused AMTDSALV AMTDS100 AMTRB2 AMTPM AMTOP DS-30, 60, 100 fused 6 AMTDSFALV AMTDS100F AMTRB2 AMTPM AMTOP DS-30, 60, 100 fused 7 AMTDSF1ALV AMTDS100F1 AMTRB2 AMTPM AMTOP DS-200 unfused AMTDS2ALV AMTDS200 AMTRB2 AMTPM AMTOP DS-200 fused AMTDS2FALV AMTDS200F AMTRB2 AMTPM AMTOP Further Information Pub. Number Description IL 14946 AMT Vari-Depth handle mechanism Series C L-Frame, MDL Notes 1 Assembled Type AMT for above handle mounting (breaker not included). 2 Complete assembly not available, order components parts listed above. 3 Width spacer kit not included. 4 This spacer kit is for up to 1.00-inch variation and consists of multiples of thin spacers to be used as required. A maximum of two kits per installation may be used. Due to the possible variation in dimensions, hardware is not supplied. Use standard 1/4–20 bolts. 5 6 7 Also for use with equivalent HMCP frame. For switches using 30, 60, 100A, 600V NEC Class H, R or J fuses. For switches using 30, 60, 100A, 600V NEC Class H or R fuses. 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-105 3 1 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Vari-Width Type—Type AMT for Below Handle Mounting 2 3 4 5 6 Complete Assembly 12 Catalog Number Breaker or Switch Type Backplate and Yoke Assembly Catalog Number Rod and Brace Assembly Catalog Number Flange Mounted Pivot Mechanism Assembly 34 Catalog Number External Operating Handle Assembly Catalog Number AMTOP Below the Handle Mounting with Short Rod and Brace 7 Series C F-Frame 5 EB, EHB, FB, HFB, MCP (0–4) AMTFDBSV AMTFD-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-B Series C J-Frame 5 AMTJDBSV AMTJD-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-B AMTOP 8 Series C K-Frame 5 AMTKDBSV AMTKD-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-B AMTOP Series C L-Frame MDL 5 AMTLDBSV AMTLD-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-B AMTOP 9 JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB, DA, MCP (400A) AMTLBBSV AMTLB-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-B AMTOP AMTOP 10 11 12 LA, HLA, LC, HLC AMTLABSV AMTLA-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-B MD, MDS, MA, HMA, MC, HMC, Series C M-Frame, LCL AMTMABSV AMTMA-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-B AMTOP NB, HNB, NC, HNC AMTNBBSV AMTNB-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-B AMTOP FB TRI-PAC, FCL AMTFBPBSV AMTFBP-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-B AMTOP LA TRI-PAC AMTLAPBSV AMTLAP-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-B AMTOP NB TRI-PAC AMTNBPBSV AMTNBP-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-B AMTOP DS-30, 60, 100 unfused AMTDSBSV AMTDS100-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-B AMTOP DS-30, 60, 100 fused 6 AMTDSFBSV AMTDS100F-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-B AMTOP 13 DS-30, 60, 100 fused 7 AMTDSF1BSV AMTDS100F1-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-B AMTOP DS-200 unfused AMTDS2BSV AMTDS200-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-B AMTOP 14 DS-200 fused AMTDS2FBSV AMTDS200F-B AMTRB1 AMTPM-B AMTOP Below the Handle Mounting with Long Rod and Brace AMTOP Series C F-Frame 5 EB, EHB, FB, HFB, MCP (0–4) AMTFDBLV AMTFD-B AMTRB2 AMTPM-B Series C J-Frame 5 AMTJDBLV AMTJD-B AMTRB2 AMTPM-B AMTOP Series C K-Frame 5 AMTKDBLV AMTKD-B AMTRB2 AMTPM-B AMTOP Series C L-Frame MDL 5 AMTLDBLV AMTLD-B AMTRB2 AMTPM-B AMTOP JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB, DA, MCP (400A) AMTLBBLV AMTLB-B AMTRB2 AMTPM-B AMTOP 17 LA, HLA, LC, HLC AMTLABLV AMTLA-B AMTRB2 AMTPM-B AMTOP MD, MDS, MA, HMA, MC, HMC, Series C M-Frame, LCL AMTMABLV AMTMA-B AMTRB2 AMTPM-B AMTOP 18 NB, HNB, NC, HNC AMTNBBLV AMTNB-B AMTRB2 AMTPM-B AMTOP FB TRI-PAC, FCL AMTFBPBLV AMTFBP-B AMTRB2 AMTPM-B AMTOP 19 LA TRI-PAC AMTLAPBLV AMTLAP-B AMTRB2 AMTPM-B AMTOP NB TRI-PAC AMTNBPBLV AMTNBP-B AMTRB2 AMTPM-B AMTOP 20 DS-30, 60, 100 unfused AMTDSBLV AMTDS100-B AMTRB2 AMTPM-B AMTOP DS-30, 60, 100 fused 6 AMTDSFBLV AMTDS100F-B AMTRB2 AMTPM-B AMTOP 21 DS-30, 60, 100 fused 7 AMTDSF1BLV AMTDS100F1-B AMTRB2 AMTPM-B AMTOP DS-200 unfused AMTDS2BLV AMTDS200-B AMTRB2 AMTPM-B AMTOP DS-200 fused AMTDS2FBLV AMTDS200F-B AMTRB2 AMTPM-B AMTOP 15 16 22 23 24 25 Notes 1 AMTR is rod only; AMTRI is rod and brace assembly. 2 Complete assembly not available, order components parts listed above. 3 Width spacer kit not included. 4 This spacer kit is for up to 1-inch variation and consists of multiples of thin spacers to be used as required. A maximum of two kits per installation may be used. Due to the possible variation in dimensions, hardware is not supplied. Use standard 1/4–20 bolts. 5 Also for use with equivalent HMCP Frame. 6 For switches using 30, 60, 100A, 600V NEC Class H, R or J fuses. 7 For switches using 30, 60, 100A, 600V NEC Class H or R fuses. V12-T3-106 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Accessories Spacer kit to Vari-Width (not for use with fixed mechanisms) catalog number AMTSK1 for up to 1.00-inch variation. Flex Shaft Note: This spacer kit is for up to 1.00-inch variation and consists of multiples of thin spacers to be used as required. A maximum of two kits per installation may be used. Due to the possible variation in dimensions, hardware is not supplied. Use standard 1/4–20 bolts. Ordering Information ● Complete assembly not available, order components parts as listed on Pages V12-T3-104, V12-T3-105 and V12-T3-106 ● Order spacer kits or door hardware adapter as required ● Individual component parts may be ordered by catalog number through 10 feet (3m) for use with various size enclosures. Flex Shaft The Flex Shaft is an extra heavy-duty mechanism that includes a flexible shaft in various lengths, 3 feet (0.9m) a significant time savings compared to installation of other types of flange handle mechanisms. The Flex Shaft mechanism also takes up less interior enclosure space than competitive designs and the handle fits standard flange cutouts. Flex Shaft handle can be remotely mounted from breaker, where an operator can use it by “funneling” the cable through conduit. The Flex Shaft handle will accept up to three padlock shackles, each with a maximum diameter of 0.375-inch (9.5 mm). Can be used with Type 1, 3R and 12 fabricated enclosures. An optional handle is available for Flex Shaft that is suitable for use with Type 4 and 4X environments. Flex Shaft comes preset from the factory, requiring only minor field adjustments on installation, which takes about 10 minutes— Flex Shaft is UL Listed under File E64983 and meets CSA requirements. Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m) 3.00 (0.9) E125 EHMFS03 J250 JHMFS03 G F F (Dual) J 4.00 (1.2) 5.00 (1.5) 6.00 (1.8) 7.00 (2.1) 8.00 (2.4) 9.00 (2.7) 10.00 (3.0) EHMFS04 EHMFS05 EHMFS06 — — — — JHMFS04 JHMFS05 JHMFS06 JHMFS07 JHMFS08 JHMFS09 JHMFS10 F0S03C F0S04C F0S05C F0S06C — — — — F1S03C F1S04C F1S05C F1S06C F1S07C F1S08C F1S09C F1S10C F1S03CD F1S04CD F1S05CD F1S06CD F1S07CD F1S08CD F1S09CD F1S10CD F2S03C F2S04C F2S05C F2S06C F2S07C F2S08C F2S09C F2S10C K F3S03C F3S04C F3S05C F3S06C F3S07C F3S08C F3S09C F3S10C L and MDL — F4S04C F4S05C F4S06C — — — F4S10C N — F5S04C F5S05C F5S06C — — — F5S10C R — F6S04 F6S05 F6S06 — — — — MD — F7S04C F7S05C F7S06C — — — F7S10C Catalog Number Flex Shaft Accessories (F- through R-Frame) NEMA 12 Safety Door Hardware for Flex Shaft 4 Handle Length in Inches (mm) Catalog Number 5 4.00 (101.6) C361KJ4 6.00 (152.4) C361KJ6 Roller latch 6 C361KR Notes 1 Type 4/4X handle mechanisms are available. Add Suffix X to complete catalog number. Add Suffix I to complete catalog number for IEC handle. Add Suffix L (Standard on F, J, K and L) to complete catalog number for 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) handle. Original narrow handle design (no C suffix) is available. Remove C from catalog number. 2 When selecting the length of shaft, ensure minimum bending radius of 4.00 inches (101.6 mm) is maintained to operate properly. The standard method of shipment includes the mechanism preset at the factory; however, minor field adjustments may be required. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Flex Shaft Ordering Information (Three-Pole Only) 123 Breaker Frame 1 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Dual breakers operator available on F-Frame only. Customer: Consult with box manufacturer for correct door hardware and any adapters required for assembly. The 0.25 inch x 0.50 inch (6.35 x 12.7 mm) standard mill rectangular locking bar is not supplied with these kits. Third roller latch for use with 4.00- or 6.00-inch (101.6 or 152.4 mm) handle when 3-point latching is required. 16 Refer to handle mechanisms in the moldedcase circuit breaker section of Volume 4— Circuit Protection Catalog, CA08100005E, Tab 2. 20 3 4 5 6 17 18 19 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-107 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities The Type C371 circuit breaker operating mechanisms are designed for installation in control enclosures where main or branch circuit protective devices are required. All circuit breaker mechanisms are suitable for right-hand mounting. Auxiliary contacts are not available for mounting on operating mechanisms. Where required, have them installed in circuit breaker. Type C371 is UL Listed under File E62635. Type C371 Ordering Information—Dimensions in Inches (mm) Operating Mechanism With 4.00-Inch Handle Frame Size Variable Depth Mounting Range Min./Max. 12 Operating For Type 1–12 Mechanism Only 3 Enclosure Catalog Number Catalog Number For Type 4 Enclosure Catalog Number HMCP and Series C EHD, FDB, FD, FDC, HFD, ED 150 6.50–160 (165.1–406.4) C371E C371E1 C371E2 HMCP and Series C HJD, JD, JDB, JDC 250 6.50–16.63 (165.1–422.4) C371F C371F5 C371F6 HMCP and Series C DK, HKD, KD, KDB 400 6.50–16.63 (165.1–422.4) C371F C371F5 C371F6 Series C HLD, LD, LDC 600 8.50–22.00 (215.9–558.8) C371G C371G5 C371G6 Series C MD, MDS 800 8.75–22.00 (222.3–558.8) C371K C371K5 C371K6 Series C HND, ND, NDC 1200 9.75–22.00 (247.7–558.8) C371K C371K5 C371K6 Circuit Breaker or Motor Circuit Protector Handle Only—Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 9 Circuit Breaker Frame Size (Amperes) NEMA Enclosure Type 150 10 11 250–1200 12 13 14 Catalog Number 1, 3R, 3, 12 4.00 (101.6) C371H1 4/4X 4.00 (101.6) C371H2 1, 3R, 3, 12 4.00 (101.6) C371H3 4/4X 4.00 (101.6) C371H4 1, 3R, 3, 12 4.00 (101.6) C371H5 4/4X 4.00 (101.6) C371H6 1, 3R, 3, 12 4.00 (101.6) C371H7 4/4X 4.00 (101.6) C371H8 Channel Support Kit (Rod Not Supplied) 4 Flange-Mounted Instruction Leaflets Catalog Number Breaker Frame C371CS6 15 Operating Handle Length Instruction Leaflet Number Flex Shaft E125 IL0510TE0002 Catalog Number J250 IL0510TE0005 G TBD Disconnect switches (30, 60, 100, 200A sizes) C371CS1 F 15609 J 15605 Circuit breakers (150, 250, 400A sizes) C371CS1 K 15604 L and M 15606 N 15606 R 15606 Connecting Rods 16 Application 17 18 Circuit breakers (600, 800, 1200A sizes) 19 5 C371CS2 Notes 1 For increased maximum allowable depth, see connecting rods table to the left. 2 Dimensions shown are from panel flange surface. 3 Does not include handle. 4 For use to prevent bending of the operating handle mounting surface. This is especially useful when the operating handle is mounted on a channel in a multi-door enclosure. Included in 600–1200A. 5 Increase maximum allowable depth by 5.00 inches (127.0 mm). Refer to handle mechanisms in the moldedcase circuit breaker section of Volume 4— Circuit Protection Catalog, CA08100005E, Tab 2. 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-108 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Series C Rotary Ordering Information Series C Rotary and Universal Rotary 1 Complete Catalog Number 1 Separate Catalog Number Standard Handle 2 Breaker Mechanism 3 Shaft 4 IEC IP65 56 IEC IP66 56 2 6.00 (152.4) HM1R06 6648C22G01 6648C23G11 4217B37G04 WHM1R06 WHM1R06X 12.00 (304.8) HM1R12 6648C22G01 6648C23G11 4217B37G01 WHM1R12 WHM1R12X 3 16.00 (406.4) HM1R16 6648C22G01 6648C23G11 4217B37G02 WHM1R16 WHM1R16X 24.00 (609.6) HM1R24 6648C22G01 6648C23G11 4217B37G03 WHM1R24 WHM1R24X 4 6.00 (152.4) HM2R06 6648C22G01 6648C23G21 4217B37G04 WHM2R06 WHM2R06X 5 12.00 (304.8) HM2R12 6648C22G01 6648C23G21 4217B37G01 WHM2R12 WHM2R12X 16.00 (406.4) HM2R16 6648C22G01 6648C23G21 4217B37G02 WHM2R16 WHM2R16X 24.00 (609.6) HM2R24 6648C22G01 6648C23G21 4217B37G03 WHM2R24 WHM2R24X 7 6.00 (152.4) HM3R06 6648C22G01 6648C23G25 4217B37G04 WHM3R06 WHM3R06X 12.00 (304.8) HM3R12 6648C22G01 6648C23G25 4217B37G01 WHM3R12 WHM3R12X 8 16.00 (406.4) HM3R16 6648C22G01 6648C23G25 4217B37G02 WHM3R16 WHM3R16X 24.00 (609.6) HM3R24 6648C22G01 6648C23G25 4217B37G03 WHM3R24 WHM3R24X 9 10 Shaft Length Inches (mm) Catalog Number F-Frame Series C Rotary Series C rotary and universal rotary handle mechanisms are for use with molded-case circuit breakers (G, F, J, K, L, MDL), molded-case switches and motor circuit protectors. Series C rotary is suitable for use with Type 1, 3R, 12 and 4/4X enclosure types. Type 4/4X application requires special handle, see “Ordering Information.” The universal rotary is suitable for use with Type 1 and 12 enclosure types. All rotary handle mechanisms include a handle “Lock Off,” to prevent turning the breaker ON while in the OFF position. All rotary handles indicate ON/OFF/ Tripped/Reset positions; however, Universal Rotary has the added feature of international markings for ON (I) and OFF (O). Series C rotary handle is metal. Universal rotary is made of molded material. Series C rotary handle is black and universal rotary is available in black or yellow/red. Series C rotary handle was ergonomically designed with extra clearance for a “gloved hand” to operate. Handle has a 45º rotation. Universal Rotary has a 90º rotation (“pipe valve” operation) where ON is vertical and OFF is horizontal. Shafts include a support brace to ensure proper alignment. J-Frame K-Frame L- and MDL-Frame 6 6.00 (152.4) HM4R06 6648C22G11 6648C23G19 4217B37G04 WHM4R06 WHM4R06X 12.00 (304.8) HM4R12 6648C22G11 6648C23G19 4217B37G01 WHM4R12 WHM4R12X 16.00 (406.4) HM4R16 6648C22G11 6648C23G19 4217B37G02 WHM4R16 WHM4R16X 24.00 (609.6) HM4R24 6648C22G11 6648C23G19 4217B37G03 WHM4R24 WHM4R24X 6.00 (152.4) HM7R06 6648C22G21 6648C23G17 4217B37G04 — — 12.00 (304.8) HM7R12 6648C22G21 6648C23G17 4217B37G01 — — 16.00 (406.4) HM7R16 6648C22G21 6648C23G17 4217B37G02 — — 24.00 (609.6) HM7R24 6648C22G21 6648C23G17 4217B37G03 — — 14 6.00 (152.4) HM5R06 6648C22G21 6648C23G08 4217B37G04 WHM5R06 WHM5R06X 12.00 (304.8) HM5R12 6648C22G21 6648C23G08 4217B37G01 WHM5R12 WHM5R12X 15 16.00 (406.4) HM5R16 6648C22G21 6648C23G08 4217B37G02 WHM5R16 WHM5R16X 24.00 (609.6) HM5R24 6648C22G21 6648C23G08 4217B37G03 WHM5R24 WHM5R24X 11 12 MD/MDS 13 N-Frame 16 17 Notes 1 Complete catalog number includes the standard handle, mechanism, shaft and support brace/bracket. 2 Handle is designed suitable for Types 1, 3R and 12 enclosures. Use style number 6648C22G03 for Type 4/4X handle or add X Suffix to complete catalog number. 3 Breaker mechanism includes a shaft support bracket and its parts. 4 Longer shafts,16.00-inch (406.4 mm) and 24.00-inch (609.6 mm), include an adjustable support extension. 5 IEC handle mechanism supplied with metric thread mounting hardware. 6 Complete catalog number includes a handle, mechanism and shaft. 18 Refer to handle mechanisms in the molded-case circuit breaker section of Volume 4—Circuit Protection Catalog, CA08100005E, Tab 2. 20 19 In addition, the 16.00-inch (406.4 mm) and 24.00-inch (609.6 mm) extra long shafts include an adjustable support bracket. 21 Series C rotary and universal rotary, are UL Listed and meet CSA requirements. Universal rotary also meets IEC947-1/2 for international compliance. Rotary UL File Number is E64983. 23 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 22 24 25 V12-T3-109 3 1 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Universal Rotary Universal Rotary Ordering Information Shaft Length in Inches (mm) Handle Color Complete Catalog Number 2 E125 Frame 6.00 (152.4) Black EHMVD06B 3 12.00 (304.8) Black EHMVD12B 6.00 (152.4) Red EHMVD06R 12.00 (304.8) Red EHMVD12R 6.00 (152.4) Black FJHMVD06B 4 J250 Frame 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 12.00 (304.8) Black FJHMVD12B Universal Rotary 6.00 (152.4) Red FJHMVD06R Type 4/4X handles are similar to standard handles except that they include an internal neoprene gasket. Type 4/4X handle style number is 6648C22G03. Due to gasketing effect between the handle and the housing, the handle may not indicate a tripped position. 12.00 (304.8) Red FJHMVD12R 6.00 (152.4) Black GHMVD06B 12.00 (304.8) Black GHMVD12B 6.00 (152.4) Red GHMVD06R 12.00 (304.8) Red GHMVD12R 6.00 (152.4) Black FHMVD06B Series C Rotary Accessories As an option, an auxiliary switch is offered so that the control panel builder may electrically indicate the status of the breaker. This accessory would be mounted on the mechanism and comes with 24.00-inch (609.6 mm) pigtail leads. 12.00 (304.8) Black FHMVD12B 6.00 (152.4) Red FHMVD06R 12.00 (304.8) Red FHMVD12R 6.00 (152.4) Black JHMVD06B 12.00 (304.8) Black JHMVD12B 6.00 (152.4) Red JHMVD06R 12.00 (304.8) Red JHMVD12R G-Frame F-Frame J-Frame K-Frame Series C Auxiliary Switch 6.00 (152.4) Black KHMVD06B Catalog Number 12.00 (304.8) Black KHMVD12B 5108A61G01 6.00 (152.4) Red KHMVD06R 12.00 (304.8) Red KHMVD12R 6.00 (152.4) Black LHMVD06B 12.00 (304.8) Black LHMVD12B 6.00 (152.4) Red LHMVD06R 12.00 (304.8) Red LHMVD12R 16 L- and MDL-Frames 17 18 19 Through-the-Door Instruction Leaflets Number Breaker Frame Series C Rotary 20 E125 — IL0510TE0001 J250 — IL0510TE0001 G — 29C250 F 15594 29C250 21 22 Universal Rotary J 15599 29C250 K 15600 29C250 23 L and MDL 15601 29C250 N 15602 — 24 Note: Refer to handle mechanisms in the molded-case circuit breaker section of Volume 4—Circuit Protection Catalog, CA08100005E, Tab 2. 25 V12-T3-110 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms Universal Direct Euro IEC Direct The Universal Direct handle mechanism is designed exclusively for the new Cutler-Hammer E125 and J250 circuit breakers. It is available as standard with a door interlock to prevent opening the enclosure while the circuit breaker is in the ON position. It is also available without a door interlock. Universal Direct Ordering Information The Euro IEC Direct handle mechanism can be used on F- through R-Frames. Frame Black Handle Catalog Number Red Handle Catalog Number F HMCC1B HMCC1R J HMCC2B HMCC2R K HMCC3B HMCC3R L and M HMCC4B HMCC4R N HMCC5B HMCC5R R HMCC6B HMCC6R The G Direct is available with a black or a yellow handle, and with or without a shroud. It is suitable for use with Type 1 enclosures. It is for use only with the G-Frame (GD, GC, GHC, GMCP). An escutcheon ring and an interlock clip are provided as standard. The standard design includes a lock-off feature. G Direct Direct (close-coupled) handle mechanisms mount directly to the circuit breaker. They are used in shallow enclosures where the standard variable depth through-the-door type mechanism is not practical or cannot be used. They are typically for applications where high volume, standardized enclosures are being fabricated. The Universal Direct handle mechanism is UL 489 Listed, IEC947-1/2 and meets CSA requirements. The Euro IEC Direct handle mechanism is IEC-240-1. G Direct is UL Listed and meets CSA requirements. 1 Universal Direct Domestic International Frame With Interlock (White) Catalog Number Without Interlock (White) Catalog Number Without Interlock (Charcoal With Global Label) Catalog Number E125 EHMCCBI EHMCCB EHMCCR J250 JHMCCBI JHMCCB JHMCCR 2 3 4 Euro IEC Direct Ordering Information 5 6 7 8 9 G Direct Ordering Information 1 Black Handle Yellow Handle Frame With Shroud Catalog Number Without Shroud Catalog Number GD/GHC HRGCC1S HRGCC10 GMCP HRGMC1S HRGMC10 Without Shroud Catalog Number 10 HRGCC3S HRGCC30 HRGMC3S HRGMC30 11 With Shroud Catalog Number 12 Direct (Close-Coupled) Instruction Leaflets Instruction Leaflet Number Frame Universal Direct Euro IEC Direct G Direct E125 29C255 — — J250 29C256 — — G — — 15567 F — 29C288A — J — 29C288A — K — 29C288A — L and MDL — 29C289 — N — 29C290 — R — 29C291 — 13 14 15 16 17 Notes 1 Suitable for use on two- or three-pole G-Frame. 18 Refer to handle mechanisms in the molded-case circuit breaker section of Volume 4— Circuit Protection Catalog, CA08100005E, Tab 2. 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-111 3 1 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Handle Extensions 2 3 4 5 6 Handle Extension 7 Handle extension is not included with J-, K-, L- and M-Frame breakers. It must be purchased separately. 8 Handle Extension 9 10 11 Frame Style Number J, K HEX3 L, M HEX4 Handle extension is included with breaker with N- and R-Frame breakers. 12 Handle Extension Frame Style Number 13 N HEX5 R HEX6 14 Note: Refer to handle mechanisms in the moldedcase circuit breaker section of Volume 4—Circuit Protection Catalog, CA08100005E, Tab 2. 15 16 Replacement and Service Capabilities Breaker Service Center Factory Service for Mining and Industrial Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Eaton owns and operates two fully authorized Breaker Service Centers (BSC) in Skelton, WV, and Evansville, IN. They are available to support all nonwarranty service needs for Cutler-Hammer industrial molded-case breakers 600A and above and all frames of mining duty breakers. Custom Service Replace frame or trip unit, with or without accessories. The Breaker Service Centers, as extensions of our manufacturing plants, are the only facilities authorized to provide breaker service solutions for Eaton, Cutler-Hammer and historic Westinghouse molded-case circuit breakers. Staff are dedicated to providing genuine factory-supported solutions to our customers. Facilities ● Dedicated sites supported by engineering and manufacturing ● Staffed by factory trained technicians with experience servicing molded-case circuit breakers ● State-of-the-art cleaning and testing equipment This is just another example of how Eaton supports a complete offering of solutions for circuit breakers. See the following for the benefits of choosing the BSC and our service offerings. Offerings Basic Tune-Up Clean, test and re-certify. Basic Modification Replace accessories and attachments including terminals, trip units, UVRs, shunt trips and auxiliary switches. 17 18 Basic Service Replace components including covers, handles and stationary contacts. 19 20 Full Service Replace both frame and trip unit, with or without accessories. Factory Modifications For new or existing operational breakers ● ● ● Trip unit upgrades Addition of accessories and attachments UL modifications to factory-sealed breakers The Breaker Service Centers are open to help you. Give us a call at 1-877-BRK-SRVC or contact your local Eaton authorized distributor or sales office for more information. Know What You’re Getting— Here’s the Reality of Third-Party Repair ● Breakers are serviced using least worn, counterfeit or reverse engineered components ● You get no technical support from the original manufacturer ● There is no option for an upgrade to new technology ● You could end up with a breaker that doesn’t perform as expected Reasons to Use Eaton’s Breaker Service Centers ● Eaton is a world leader in circuit breaker technology and manufacturing ● The Breaker Service Centers are staffed by factory trained technicians ● One year warranty. ● Eaton uses only genuine replacement parts and components ● Full engineering support—original product specifications and manufacturing data ● State-of-the-art cleaning equipment—uses a non-destructive cleaning process while maintaining integrity of the breaker ● Modern test equipment— the breaker service center uses the same hi-tech test equipment used by engineering, development and manufacturing facilities. This allows the breaker service center to match original test conditions at the factory ● Exchange option— we can upgrade to the newest technology ● Competitive price—all the benefits of third-party prices For more information on Eaton products and services, call 1-877-386-2273. Select option 1 for technical support and select option 6 for Eaton’s Electrical Services & Systems, or visit our website at www.eaton.com/electrical. 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-112 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Cross-Reference 1 Westinghouse and Challenger 2 Cross-Reference for Cutler-Hammer Industrial MCB/MCCBs Circuit Breaker Brand and Type Circuit Breaker Brand and Type Westinghouse Challenger Cutler-Hammer Westinghouse Challenger Cutler-Hammer BAB CBB BAB HMC CSHM HMC BAB-H CBB-H BAB-H HMCC CSHMC HMCC CA CD CA HNB — HNB CAH CDH CAH HNC CSHN HNC CHKD CKHC CHKD HND CNH HND CHLD CLHC CHLD JB, KB — JB, KB CHND CNHC CHND JD CJ JD CKD CKC CKD JDB CJS JDB CKDC CKVC CKDC JDC CJV JDC CLD CLC CLD KD CK KD CLDC CLVC CLDC KDB CKS KDB CND CNC CND KDC CKV KDC CNDC CNVC CNDC LA — LA CRD CRC CRD LA-P CTL LA-P CRDC CRVC CRDC LC CSL LC DK CDK DK LCC CSLC LCC EB — EB LCL CXL LCL ED CED ED LCY CSLY LCY EDC CEV EDC LD CL LD EDH CEH EDH LDB CK LDB EHB — EHB LDC CLV LDC EHD CE EHD MA — MA FB — FB MC CSM MC FB-P CTB FB-P MCC CSMC MCC FCL CXF FCL MCY CSMY MCY FD CF FD MDS CSMD MDS FDB CFS FDB MDSC CSMDC MDSC FDC CFV FDC MDSY CSMDY MDSY GB CG GB NB — NB GC CGL GC NB-P CTN NB-P GDB CGDB GDB NC CSN NC GHB CH GHB NCY CSNY NCY GHBS CSCB GHBS ND CN ND GHC CHL GHC NDC CNV NDC HCA CDT HCA PB-P CTP PB-P HFB — HFB PC CSP PC HFD CFH HFD PCC CSPC PCC HJD CJH HJD QBGF CBBGF QBGF HKB — HKB QBGFEP CBBGFEP QBGFEP HKD CKH HKD QBHGF CBBHGF QBHGF HLA — HLA QBHGFEP CBBHGFEP QBHGFEP HLC CSHL HLC QBHW CBBH QBHW HLCC CSHLC HLCC QBHW-H CBBH-H QBHW-H HLD CLH HLD RD CR RD HMA — HMA RDC CRV RDC 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-113 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities 1 Westinghouse, Challenger and Bryant 2 Cross-Reference for Cutler-Hammer Residential MCBs 3 Westinghouse Challenger Bryant Cutler-Hammer BR C BR BR 4 BRD A BRD BRD BRH HC BRH BRH 5 BRHH VC BRHH BRHH — XC — BRX 6 BRO C BRO BRO 7 8 9 10 Circuit Breaker Brand and Type GFCB HAGF GFCB GFCB GFCBH HAGFH GFCBH GFCBH GFEP HAGFEP GFEP GFEP GFEPH HAGFHEP GFEPH GFEPH — CM — BW — CMH — BWH — CMV — BWHH — CB — CC WFL QFL — QFL WFP QFP — QFP 11 12 13 Notes for Replacement Breaker and Mining Breaker Replacement Tables (Pages V12-T3-113–V12-T3-167) 1. Many of the suggested 6. The HFB two-pole Series C replacements breaker is on a three-pole are electrical frame. The Series C replacements only, replacement is a true and may have different two-pole. dimensions, mountings, 7. Continuous amperes handle forces and throw and/or trip range may be (which would require a little different on the a handle mechanism replacement Series C. change). The MARK 75 replacement would have the same dimensions, mountings, handle forces and throw. Only threepole MARK 75 available. 2. Replacement breaker frames, trips, plugs and some of the terminals and attachments are not interchangeable with the Series C. Obsoleted frames and trips, etc., may require a complete breaker change. 3. Replacing with a Higher IC MARK 75 or Series C breaker does not increase the IC rating of the assembly (panelboard, switchboard, etc.). 4. Saf-T-Vue is no longer available on the replacement breaker line. Eaton Canada does make the Series C with Saf-T-Vue and may be sourced through our Canadian Distribution Center at 905-631-4318. 14 15 16 5. Suggested replacements also apply to breakers that had suffixes such as “L,” line and load terminals, “V” 50C calibration and “W” without terminals. 17 18 19 8. Replacement breaker MARK 75 breakers with interchangeable trip units are to be supplied as frame, trip, terminals and attachment as separate items (except when accessories must be factory installed). No single-phase, ambient compensated, Saf-T-Vue, reverse-feed, or SELTRONIC magnetic only are available on replacement breakers. 9. JA, DA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB and HLB breakers when replaced with a Series C breaker “K” frame, when bussed on the line side such as a panelboard, requires a TAD3 spacer kit. 10. Contact the local Eaton Satellite for complete panelboard replacement or new interior replacement. Use Panelboard Replacement Breakers where possible. MARK 75 and three-pole only replacements are available. Contact the Breaker Service Center at 1-877-275-7782 for reconditioned breaker solutions. Note: If accessories are to be factory installed, contact the factory for pricing. 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-114 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Cross-Reference 1 Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacement Breaker Replacements Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) 1256C10G03 1256C10G03 O — — LD2300 1–3, 5, 8 1256C10G04 1256C10G04 O — — LD2350 1–3, 5, 8 1256C10G05 1256C10G05 O — — LD2400 1–3, 5, 8 1256C10G12 1256C10G12 A — — KD3250 1–3, 5, 8 1256C10G13 1256C10G13 A — — LD3300 1–3, 5, 8 1256C10G14 1256C10G14 A — — LD3350 1–3, 5, 8 1256C10G15 1256C10G15 A — — LD3400 1–3, 5, 8 1268C14G01 1268C14G01 O — — HMCP050G2C 1–3, 7 1268C14G02 1268C14G02 O — — HMCP050G2C 1–3, 7 1268C14G03 1268C14G03 O 65E4667 65E466 HMCP100L3C 1–3, 7 1268C14G04 1268C14G04 O 65E4667 65E4667 HMCP100L3C 1–3, 7 1268C14G05 1268C14G05 O — — HMCP050G2C 1–3, 7 1268C14G06 1268C14G06 O — — HMCP050G2C 1–3, 7 2603D46G07 2603D46G07 O — — KT2250T 2, 8 2603D46G08 2603D46G08 O — — LT2300T 2, 8 2603D46G09 2603D46G09 O — — LT2350T 2, 8 2, 8 2603D46G10 2603D46G10 O — — LT2400T 2603D46G26 2603D46G26 A — — KT3250T 2, 8 2603D46G27 2603D46G27 A — — LT3300T 2, 8 2603D46G28 2603D46G28 A — — LT3350T 2, 8 2603D46G29 2603D46G29 A — — LT3400T 2, 8 2603D47G07 2603D47G07 O — — — 2, 8 2603D47G08 2603D47G08 O — — — 2, 8 2603D47G10 2603D47G10 O — — — 2, 8 2603D47G26 2603D47G26 A — — — 2, 8 2603D47G27 2603D47G27 A — — — 2, 8 2603D47G29 2603D47G29 A — — — 2, 8 2603D50G01 2603D50G01 O — — KD2250 1–3, 5, 8 2603D50G02 2603D50G02 O — — LD2300 1–3, 5, 8 2603D50G03 2603D50G03 O — — LD2350 1–3, 5, 8 2603D50G04 2603D50G04 O — — LD2400 1–3, 5, 8 2603D50G07 2603D50G07 O — — KD3250 1–3, 5, 8 2603D50G08 2603D50G08 O 1256C10G13 1256C10G13 LD3300 1–3, 5, 8 2603D50G09 2603D50G09 O 1256C10G14 1256C10G14 LD3350 1–3, 5, 8 2603D50G10 2603D50G10 O 1256C10G15 1256C10G15 LD3400 1–3, 5, 8 2603D50G13 2603D50G13 O — — KD2250 1–5, 8 2603D50G14 2603D50G14 O — — LD2300 1–5, 8 2603D50G15 2603D50G15 O — — LD2350 1–5, 8 2603D50G16 2603D50G16 O — — LD2400 1–5, 8 2603D50G19 2603D50G19 O 1256C10G12 1256C10G12 KD3250 1–5, 8 2603D50G20 2603D50G20 O 1256C10G13 1256C10G13 LD3300 1–5, 8 2603D50G21 2603D50G21 O 1256C10G14 1256C10G14 LD3350 1–5, 8 2603D50G22 2603D50G22 O 1256C10G15 1256C10G15 LD3400 1–5, 8 2610D53G12 2610D53G12 O 4994D96G30 4994D96G30 HMCP025D0C 1–3, 7 2610D53G13 2610D53G13 O 4994D96G31 4994D96G31 HMCP070J2C 1–3, 7 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 2 25 V12-T3-115 3 1 2 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) 2610D53G30 2610D53G30 O 4994D96G30 4994D96G30 HMCP025D0C 1–3, 7 2610D53G31 2610D53G31 O 4994D96G31 4994D96G31 HMCP070J2C 1–3, 7 2610D58G31 2610D58G31 O — — — 1–4, 7 373D488G08 373D488G08 O 373D488G09 373D488G09 — 2, 8 4994D96G12 4994D96G12 O 4994D96G30 4994D96G30 HMCP025D0C 1–3, 7 4994D96G13 4994D96G13 O 4994D96G31 4994D96G31 HMCP070J2C 1–3, 7 5 4994D96G30 4994D96G30 A — — HMCP025D0C 1–3, 7 4994D96G31 4994D96G31 A — — HMCP070J2C 1–3, 7 6 4998D89G30 4998D89G30 O — — — 1–4, 7 5683D88G07 5683D88G07 O — — KT2250T 2, 8 4 7 5683D88G08 5683D88G08 O — — LT2300T 2, 8 5683D88G09 5683D88G09 O — — LT2350T 2, 8 8 5683D88G10 5683D88G10 O — — LT2400T 2, 8 5683D88G26 5683D88G26 O 2603D46G26 2603D46G26 KT3250T 2, 8 9 5683D88G27 5683D88G27 O 2603D46G27 2603D46G27 LT3300T 2, 8 5683D88G28 5683D88G28 O 2603D46G28 2603D46G28 LT3350T 2, 8 5683D88G29 5683D88G29 O 2603D46G29 2603D46G29 LT3400T 2, 8 65E4667 65E4667 A — — HMCP100L3C 1–3, 7 11 81E4647 81E4647 O — — — 1–4, 7 DA2250 375D152G11 O — — DK2250 1–3, 5, 8, 9 12 DA2250Y 376D872G11 O — — DK2250Y 1–3, 5, 8, 9 DA2300 375D152G12 O — — DK2300 1–3, 5, 8, 9 DA2300Y 376D872G12 O — — DK2300Y 1–3, 5, 8, 9 10 13 14 DA2350 375D152G13 O — — DK2350 1–3, 5, 8, 9 DA2350Y 376D872G13 O — — DK2350Y 1–3, 5, 8, 9 DA2400 375D152G14 O — — DK2400 1–3, 5, 8, 9 15 DA2400WK 752B050G01 O — — DK2400KW 1–3, 5, 8 DA2400Y 376D872G14 O — — DK2400Y 1–3, 5, 8, 9 DA3250 375D152G26 O — — DK3250 1–3, 5, 8, 9 16 DA3250Y 376D872G26 O — — DK3250Y 1–3, 5, 8, 9 DA3300 375D152G27 O — — DK3300 1–3, 5, 8, 9 17 DA3300Y 376D872G27 O — — DK3300Y 1–3, 5, 8, 9 DA3350 375D152G28 O — — DK3350 1–3, 5, 8, 9 18 DA3350Y 376D872G28 O — — DK3350Y 1–3, 5, 8, 9 DA3400 375D152G29 O — — DK3400 1–3, 5, 8, 9 19 DA3400WK 752B050G06 O — — DK3400KW 1–3, 5, 8 DA3400Y 376D872G29 O — — DK3400Y 1–3, 5, 8, 9 20 EB1015 4990D03G02 O — — EHD1015 1–3, 5 EB1020 4990D03G03 O — — EHD1020 1–3, 5 21 EB1025 4990D03G04 O — — EHD1025 1–3, 5 EB1030 4990D03G05 O — — EHD1030 1–3, 5 EB1035 4990D03G06 O — — EHD1035 1–3, 5 22 23 EB1040 4990D03G07 O — — EHD1040 1–3, 5 EB1045 4990D03G14 O — — EHD1045 1–3, 5 EB1050 4990D03G08 O — — EHD1050 1–3, 5 24 EB1060 4990D03G09 O — — EHD1060 1–3, 5 EB1070 4990D03G10 O — — EHD1070 1–3, 5 25 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. V12-T3-116 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) EB1080 4990D03G65 O — — EHD1080 1–3, 5 EB1090 4990D03G11 O — — EHD1090 1–3, 5 EB1100 4990D03G12 O — — EHD1100 1–3, 5 EB1100LK 1226C25G01 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8 EB2015 4990D03G18 O — — EHD2015 1–3, 5 EB2020 4990D03G19 O — — EHD2020 1–3, 5 EB2025 4990D03G20 O — — EHD2025 1–3, 5 EB2030 4990D03G21 O — — EHD2030 1–3, 5 EB2035 4990D03G22 O — — EHD2035 1–3, 5 EB2040 4990D03G23 O — — EHD2040 1–3, 5 EB2050 4990D03G24 O — — EHD2050 1–3, 5 EB2060 4990D03G25 O — — EHD2060 1–3, 5 EB2070 4990D03G26 O — — EHD2070 1–3, 5 EB2080 4990D03G32 O — — EHD2080 1–3, 5 EB2090 4990D03G27 O — — EHD2090 1–3, 5 EB2100 4990D03G28 O — — EHD2100 1–3, 5 EB2100LK 1226C25G02 O — — EHD2100KL 1–3, 5, 8 EB3015 4990D03G34 O HFB3015L 4997D19G34 EHD3015 1–3, 5 EB3015S 4991D35G02 O HFB3015L 4997D19G34 EHD3015 1–5 EB3020 4990D03G35 O HFB3020L 4997D19G35 EHD3020 1–3, 5 EB3020S 4991D35G03 O HFB3020L 4997D19G35 EHD3020 1–5 EB3025 4990D03G36 O HFB3025L 4997D19G36 EHD3025 1–3, 5 EB3025S 4991D35G04 O HFB3025L 4997D19G36 EHD3025 1–5 EB3030 4990D03G37 O HFB3030L 4997D19G37 EHD3030 1–3, 5 EB3030S 4991D35G05 O HFB3030L 4997D19G37 EHD3030 1–5 EB3035 4990D03G38 O HFB3035L 4997D19G38 EHD3035 1–3, 5 EB3035S 4991D35G06 O HFB3035L 4997D19G38 EHD3035 1–5 EB3040 4990D03G39 O HFB3040L 4997D19G39 EHD3040 1–3, 5 EB3040S 4991D35G07 O HFB3040L 4997D19G39 EHD3040 1–5 EB3045 4990D03G46 O HFB3045L 4997D19G54 EHD3045 1–3, 5 EB3045S 4990D03G40 O HFB3045L 4997D19G54 EHD3045 1–5 EB3050 4991D35G08 O HFB3050L 4997D19G40 EHD3050 1–3, 5 EB3050S 4990D03G41 O HFB3050L 4997D19G40 EHD3050 1–5 EB3060 4991D35G09 O HFB3060L 4997D19G41 EHD3060 1–3, 5 EB3060S 4990D03G42 O HFB3060L 4997D19G41 EHD3060 1–5 EB3070 4991D35G10 O HFB3070L 4997D19G42 EHD3070 1–3, 5 EB3070S 4990D03G48 O HFB3070L 4997D19G42 EHD3070 1–5 EB3080 4990D03G43 O HFB3080L 4997D19G55 EHD3080 1–3, 5 EB3080S 4991D35G11 O HFB3080L 4997D19G55 EHD3080 1–5 EB3090 4990D03G43 O HFB3090L 4997D19G43 EHD3090 1–3, 5 EB3090S 4991D35G11 O HFB3090L 4997D19G43 EHD3090 1–5 EB3100 4990D03G44 O HFB3100L 4997D19G44 EHD3100 1–3, 5 EB3100LK 1226C25G03 O — — EHD3100KL 1–3, 5, 8 EB3100S 4991D35G12 O HFB3100L 4997D19G44 EHD3100 1–5 EB3100SLK 1226C25G04 O — — EHD3100KL 1–3, 5, 8 EHB1015 4989D52G02 O — — EHD1015 1–3, 5 EHB1020 4989D52G03 O — — EHD1020 1–3, 5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 1 25 V12-T3-117 3 1 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) EHB1025 4989D52G04 O — — EHD1025 1–3, 5 EHB1030 4989D52G05 O — — EHD1030 1–3, 5 EHB1035 4989D52G06 O — — EHD1035 1–3, 5 EHB1040 4989D52G07 O — — EHD1040 1–3, 5 EHB1050 4989D52G08 O — — EHD1050 1–3, 5 EHB1060 4989D52G09 O — — EHD1060 1–3, 5 5 EHB1070 4989D52G10 O — — EHD1070 1–3, 5 EHB1080 4989D52G14 O — — EHD1080 1–3, 5 6 EHB1090 4989D52G11 O — — EHD1090 1–3, 5 EHB1100 4989D52G12 O — — EHD1100 1–3, 5 2 3 4 7 EHB1100LK 1226C25G11 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8 EHB2015 4989D52G18 O — — EHD2015 1–3, 5 8 EHB2020 4989D52G19 O — — EHD2020 1–3, 5 EHB2025 4989D52G20 O — — EHD2025 1–3, 5 9 EHB2030 4989D52G21 O — — EHD2030 1–3, 5 EHB2035 4989D52G22 O — — EHD2035 1–3, 5 10 EHB2040 4989D52G23 O — — EHD2040 1–3, 5 EHB2045 4989D52G29 O — — EHD2045 1–3, 5 11 EHB2050 4989D52G24 O — — EHD2050 1–3, 5 EHB2060 4989D52G25 O — — EHD2060 1–3, 5 12 EHB2070 4989D52G26 O — — EHD2070 1–3, 5 EHB2090 4989D52G27 O — — EHD2090 1–3, 5 EHB2100 4989D52G28 O — — EHD2100 1–3, 5 EHB2100LK 1226C25G12 O — — EHD2100KL 1–3, 5, 8 EHB3015 4989D52G34 O HFB3015L 4997D19G34 EHD3015 1–3, 5 EHB3015S 4991D35G18 O HFB3015L 4997D19G34 EHD3015 1–5 EHB3020 4989D52G35 O HFB3020L 4997D19G35 EHD3020 1–3, 5 EHB3020S 4991D35G19 O HFB3020L 4997D19G35 EHD3020 1–5 EHB3025 4989D52G36 O HFB3025L 4997D19G36 EHD3025 1–3, 5 13 14 15 16 EHB3025S 4991D35G20 O HFB3025L 4997D19G36 EHD3025 1–5 EHB3030 4989D52G37 O HFB3030L 4997D19G37 EHD3030 1–3, 5 17 EHB3030S 4991D35G21 O HFB3030L 4997D19G37 EHD3030 1–5 EHB3035 4989D52G38 O HFB3035L 4997D19G38 EHD3035 1–3, 5 18 EHB3035S 4991D35G22 O HFB3035L 4997D19G38 EHD3035 1–5 EHB3040 4989D52G39 O HFB3040L 4997D19G39 EHD3040 1–3, 5 19 EHB3040S 4991D35G23 O HFB3040L 4997D19G39 EHD3040 1–5 EHB3045 4989D52G45 O HFB3045L 4997D19G54 EHD3045 1–3, 5 20 EHB3045S NO STYLE O HFB3045L 4997D19G54 EHD3045 1–5 EHB3050 4993D67G40 O HFB3050L 4997D19G40 EHD3050 1–3, 5 21 EHB3050S 4991D35G24 O HFB3050L 4997D19G40 EHD3050 1–5 EHB3060 4993D67G41 O HFB3060L 4997D19G41 EHD3060 1–3, 5 22 EHB3060S 4991D35G25 O HFB3060L 4997D19G41 EHD3060 1–5 EHB3070 4993D67G42 O HFB3070L 4997D19G42 EHD3070 1–3, 5 23 EHB3070S 4991D35G26 O HFB3070L 4997D19G42 EHD3070 1–5 EHB3080 4993D67G46 O HFB3080L 4997D19G55 EHD3080 1–3, 5 24 EHB3080S NO STYLE O HFB3080L 4997D19G55 EHD3080 1–5 EHB3090 4993D67G43 O HFB3090L 4997D19G43 EHD3090 1–3, 5 25 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. V12-T3-118 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) EHB3090S 4991D35G27 O HFB3090L 4997D19G43 EHD3090 1–5 EHB3100 4993D67G44 O HFB3100L 4997D19G44 EHD3100 1–3, 5 EHB3100LK 1226C25G13 O — — EHD3100KL 1–3, 5, 8 EHB3100S 4991D35G28 O — — EHD3100 1–5 EHB3100SLK 1226C25G14 O — — EHD3100KL 1–3, 5, 8 FB2015 4975D71G18 O — — FD2015 1–3, 5 FB2020 4975D71G19 O — — FD2020 1–3, 5 FB2022MRL 2610D53G03 O — — HMCP003A0C 1–3, 7 FB2025 4975D71G20 O — — FD2025 1–3, 5 FB2030 4975D71G21 O — — FD2030 1–3, 5 FB2035 4975D71G22 O — — FD2035 1–3, 5 FB2040 4975D71G23 O — — FD2040 1–3, 5 FB2045MRL 2610D53G04 O — — HMCP007C0C 1–3, 7 FB2050 4975D71G24 O — — FD2050 1–3, 5 FB2060 4975D71G25 O — — FD2060 1–3, 5 FB2070 4975D71G26 O — — FD2070 1–3, 5 FB2080 4975D71G02 O — — FD2080 1–3, 5 FB2090 4975D71G27 O — — FD2090 1–3, 5 FB2100 4975D71G28 O — — FD2100 1–3, 5 FB2100LK 1226C25G21 O — — FD2100KL 1–3, 5, 8 1–3, 7 FB2110MRL 2610D53G05 O — — HMCP015E0C FB2150LK 1226C25G22 O — — FD2150KL 1–3, 5, 8 FB21550MRL 2610D53G08 O — — HMCP150T4C 1–3, 7 FB21800MRL 2610D53G11 O — — HMCP150U4C 1–3, 7 FB2190MRL 2610D53G06 O — — HMCP030H1C 1–3, 7 FB2270MRL 2610D53G10 O — — HMCP030H1C 1–3, 7 FB2480MRL 2610D53G07 O — — HMCP050K2C 1–3, 7 FB3015 4975D71G34 O HFB3015L 4997D19G34 FD3015 1–3, 5 FB3015S 4991D35G34 O HFB3015L 4997D19G34 FD3015 1–5 FB3020 4975D71G35 O HFB3020L 4997D19G35 FD3020 1–3, 5 FB3020S 4991D35G35 O HFB3020L 4997D19G35 FD3020 1–5 FB3022MRL 2606D95G21 O HFB3022ML 4994D96G21 HMCP003A0C 1–3, 7 FB3022SMRL 2610D58G21 O HFB3022ML 4994D96G21 HMCP003A0C 1–4, 7 FB3025 4975D71G36 O HFB3025L 4997D19G36 FD3025 1–3, 5 FB3025S 4991D35G36 O HFB3025L 4997D19G36 FD3025 1–5 FB3030 4975D71G37 O HFB3030L 4997D19G37 FD3030 1–3, 5 FB3030S 4991D35G37 O HFB3030L 4997D19G37 FD3030 1–5 FB3035 4975D71G38 O HFB3035L 4997D19G38 FD3035 1–3, 5 FB3040 4975D71G39 O HFB3040L 4997D19G39 FD3040 1–3, 5 FB3040S 4991D35G39 O HFB3040L 4997D19G39 FD3040 1–5 FB3045L 4975D71G05 O HFB3045L 4997D19G54 FD3045 1–3, 5 FB3045MRL 2610D53G22 O HFB3045ML 4994D96G22 HMCP007C0C 1–3, 7 FB3045S NO STYLE O HFB3045L 4997D19G54 FD3045 1–5 FB3045SMRL 2610D58G22 O HFB3045ML 4994D96G22 HMCP007C0C 1–4, 7 FB3050 4975D71G40 O HFB3050L 4997D19G40 FD3050 1–3, 5 FB3050S 4991D35G40 O HFB3050L 4997D19G40 FD3050 1–5 FB3060 4975D71G41 O HFB3060L 4997D19G41 FD3060 1–3, 5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 1 25 V12-T3-119 3 1 2 3 4 5 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number FB3060S 4991D35G41 O HFB3060L 4997D19G41 FD3060 1–5 FB3070 4975D71G42 O HFB3070L 4997D19G42 FD3070 1–3, 5 FB3070S 4991D35G42 O HFB3070L 4997D19G42 FD3070 1–5 FB3080 4975D71G06 O HFB3080L 4997D19G55 FD3080 1–3, 5 MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number FB3080S NO STYLE O HFB3080L 4997D19G55 FD3080 1–5 FB3090 4975D71G43 O HFB3090L 4997D19G43 FD3090 1–3, 5 FB3090S 4991D35G43 O HFB3090L 4997D19G43 FD3090 1–5 FB3100 4975D71G44 O HFB3100L 4997D19G44 FD3100 1–3, 5 FB3100LK 1226C25G23 O — — FD3100KL 1–3, 5, 8 FB3100S 4991D35G44 O HFB3100L 4997D19G44 FD3100 1–5 7 FB3110 4975D71G07 O — — FD3110 1–3, 5 FB3110MRL 2610D53G23 O HFB3110ML 4994D96G23 HMCP015E0C 1–3, 7 8 FB3110S NO STYLE O — — FD3110 1–5 FB3110SMRL 2610D58G23 O — — HMCP015E0C 1–4, 7 9 FB3125 4975D71G45 O — — FD3125 1–3, 5 FB3125S 4991D35G45 O — — FD3125 1–4, 5 10 FB3150 4975D71G46 O — — FD3150 1–3, 5 FB3150LK 1226C25G24 O — — FD3150KL 1–3, 5, 8 11 FB3150S 4991D35G46 O — — FD3150 1–5 FB3150SLK 1226C25G25 O — — FD3150KL 1–3, 5, 8 12 FB31550MRL 2610D53G26 O HFB31550ML 4994D96G26 HMCP150T4C 1–3, 7 6 13 14 15 16 FB31550SMRL 2610D58G26 O HFB31550ML 4994D96G26 HMCP150T4C 1–4, 7 FB31800MRL 2610D53G29 O — — HMCP150U4C 1–3, 7 FB31800SMRL 2610D58G29 O — — HMCP150U4C 1–4, 7 FB3190MRL 2610D53G24 O HFB3190ML 4994D96G24 HMCP030H1C 1–3, 7 FB3190SMRL 2610D58G24 O HFB3190ML 4994D96G24 HMCP030H1C 1–4, 7 FB3270MRL 2610D53G28 O HFB3270ML 4994D96G28 HMCP030H1C 1–3, 7 FB3270SMRL 2610D58G28 O HFB3270ML 4994D96G28 HMCP030H1C 1–4, 7 FB3480MRL 2610D53G25 O HFB3480ML 4994D96G25 HMCP050K2C 1–3, 7 FB3480SMRL 2610D58G25 O HFB3480ML 4994D96G25 HMCP050K2C 1–4, 7 FB4015 4975D71G50 O — — FD4015 1–3, 5 17 FB4020 4975D71G51 O — — FD4020 1–3, 5 FB4025 4975D71G52 O — — FD4025 1–3, 5 18 FB4030 4975D71G53 O — — FD4030 1–3, 5 FB4035 4975D71G54 O — — FD4035 1–3, 5 19 FB4040 4975D71G55 O — — FD4040 1–3, 5 FB4045 NO STYLE O — — FD4045 1–3, 5 20 FB4050 4975D71G56 O — — FD4050 1–3, 5 FB4060 4975D71G57 O — — FD4060 1–3, 5 21 FB4070 4975D71G58 O — — FD4070 1–3, 5 FB4080 NO STYLE O — — FD4080 1–3, 5 22 FB4090 4975D71G59 O — — FD4090 1–3, 5 FB4100 4975D71G60 O — — FD4100 1–3, 5 23 FB4100LK 1226C25G26 O — — FD4100KL 1–3, 5, 8 FB4150LK 1226C25G27 O — — FD4150KL 1–3, 5, 8 24 HFB1015 4976D04G02 O — — HFD1015 1–3, 5 HFB1020 4976D04G03 O — — HFD1020 1–3, 5 25 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. V12-T3-120 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) HFB1025 4976D04G04 O — — HFD1025 1–3, 5 HFB1030 4976D04G05 O — — HFD1030 1–3, 5 HFB1035 4976D04G06 O — — HFD1035 1–3, 5 HFB1040 4976D04G07 O — — HFD1040 1–3, 5 HFB1045 4976D04G49 O — — HFD1045 1–3, 5 HFB1050 4976D04G08 O — — HFD1050 1–3, 5 HFB1060 4976D04G09 O — — HFD1060 1–3, 5 HFB1070 4976D04G10 O — — HFD1070 1–3, 5 HFB1080 4976D04G50 O — — HFD1080 1–3, 5 HFB1090 4976D04G11 O — — HFD1090 1–3, 5 HFB1100 4976D04G12 O — — HFD1100 1–3, 5 HFB2015 4976D04G18 O — — FD3015 1–3, 5, 6 HFB2020 4976D04G19 O — — FD3020 1–3, 5, 6 HFB2022ML 2610D57G03 O — — HMCP003A0C 1, 2, 3, 7 HFB2025 4976D04G20 O — — FD3025 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 HFB2030 4976D04G21 O — — FD3030 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 HFB2035 4976D04G22 O — — FD3035 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 HFB2040 4976D04G23 O — — FD3040 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 HFB2045 4976D04G51 O — — FD3045 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 HFB2045ML 2610D57G04 O — — HMCP007COC 1, 2, 3, 7 HFB2050 4976D04G24 O — — FD3050 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 HFB2060 4976D04G25 O — — FD3060 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 HFB2070 4976D04G26 O — — FD3070 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 HFB2080 4976D04G52 O — — FD3080 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 HFB2090 4976D04G27 O — — FD3090 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 HFB2100 4976D04G28 O — — FD3100 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 HFB2125 4976D04G29 O — — FD3125 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 HFB2150 4976D04G30 O — — FD3150 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 HFB2110ML 2610D57G05 O — — HMCP015E0C 1, 2, 3, 7 HFB21550ML 2610D57G08 O — — HMCP150T4C 1, 2, 3, 7 HFB21800ML 2610D57G11 O — — HMCP150U4C 1, 2, 3, 7 HFB2190ML 2610D57G06 O — — HMCP030H1C 1, 2, 3, 7 HFB2270ML 2610D57G10 O — — HMCP030H1C 1, 2, 3, 7 HFB2480ML 2610D57G07 O — — HMCP050K2C 1, 2, 3, 7 HFB3015 4976D04G34 O HFB3015L 4997D19G34 FD3015 1, 2, 3, 5 HFB3020 4976D04G35 O HFB3020L 4997D19G35 FD3020 1, 2, 3, 5 HFB3022ML 2610D57G21 A — — HMCP003A0C 1, 2, 3, 7 HFB3025 4976D04G36 O HFB3025L 4997D19G36 FD3025 1, 2, 3, 5 HFB3030 4976D04G37 O HFB3030L 4997D19G37 FD3030 1, 2, 3, 5 HFB3035 4976D04G38 O HFB3035L 4997D19G38 FD3035 1, 2, 3, 5 HFB3040 4976D04G39 O HFB3040L 4997D19G39 FD3040 1–3, 5 HFB3045 4976D04G54 O HFB3045L 4997D19G54 FD3045 1–3, 5 HFB3045ML 2610D57G22 A — — HMCP007C0C 1–3, 7 HFB3050 4976D04G40 O HFB3050L 4997D19G40 FD3050 1–3, 5 HFB3060 4976D04G41 O HFB3060L 4997D19G41 FD3060 1–3, 5 HFB3070 4976D04G42 O HFB3070L 4997D19G42 FD3070 1–3, 5 HFB3080 4976D04G55 O HFB3080L 4997D19G55 FD3080 1–3, 5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 1 25 V12-T3-121 3 1 2 3 4 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) HFB3090 4976D04G43 O HFB3090L 4997D19G43 FD3090 1–3, 5 HFB3100 4976D04G44 O HFB3100L 4997D19G44 FD3100 1–3, 5 HFB3110 4976D04G56 O — — FD3110 1–3, 5 HFB3110ML 2610D57G23 A — — HMCP015E0C 1–3, 7 HFB3125 4976D04G45 O — — FD3125 1–3, 5 HFB3150 4976D04G46 O — — FD3150 1–3, 5 5 HFB31550ML 2610D57G26 O — — HMCP150T4C 1–3, 7 HFB31800ML 2610D57G29 O — — HMCP150U4C 1–3, 7 6 HFB3190ML 2610D57G24 A — — HMCP030H1C 1–3, 7 HFB3270ML 2610D57G28 A — — HMCP030H1C 1–3, 7 7 8 9 10 HFB3480ML 2610D57G25 A — — HMCP050K2C 1–3, 7 HKA2070 1255C59G02 O — — JD2070 1–3, 5, 8, 9 HKA2070T 2602D83G02 O — — — 2, 8 HKA2070TA 459D987G02 O — — JT2070T 2, 8 HKA2090 1255C59G03 O — — JD2090 1–3, 5, 8, 9 HKA2090T 657D789G03 O — — — 2, 8 HKA2090TA 459D987G03 O — — — 2, 8 HKA2100 1255C59G04 O — — KD2100 1–3, 5, 8, 9 HKA2100T 2602D83G04 O — — — 2, 8 HKA2100TA 459D987G04 O — — — 2, 8 12 HKA2125 1255C59G05 O — — KD2125 1–3, 5, 8, 9 HKA21250TM 2602D84G05 O — — — 2, 8 13 HKA2125T 2602D83G05 O — — — 2, 8 HKA2125TA 459D987G05 O — — — 2, 8 14 HKA2150 1255C59G06 O — — KD2150 1–3, 5, 8, 9 HKA21500TM 2602D84G06 O — — — 2, 8 15 HKA2150T 2602D83G06 O — — — 2, 8 HKA2150TA 459D987G06 O — — — 2, 8 HKA2175 1255C59G07 O — — KD2175 1–3, 5, 8, 9 HKA21750TM 2602D84G07 O — — — 2, 8 11 16 HKA2175T 2602D83G07 O — — — 2, 8 17 HKA2175TA 459D987G07 O — — — 2, 8 HKA2200 1255C59G08 O — — KD2200 1–3, 5, 8, 9 18 HKA2200T 2602D83G08 O — — — 2, 8 HKA2200TA 459D987G08 O — — — 2, 8 19 HKA2225 1255C59G09 O — — KD2225 1–3, 5, 8, 9 HKA22250TM 2602D84G09 O — — — 2, 8 20 HKA2225F 2602D86G05 O — — KD2400F 2, 8 HKA2225T 2602D83G09 O — — KT2225T 2, 8 21 HKA2225TA 459D987G09 O — — KT2225T 2, 8 HKA2700TM 2602D84G02 O — — — 2, 8 22 HKA3070 1255C59G17 O — — JD3070 1–3, 5, 8, 9 HKA3070T 657D788G17 A — — — 2, 5 HKA3070TA 459D987G17 O HKA3070T 657D789G17 — 2, 8 HKA3090 1255C59G18 O — — JD3090 1–3, 5, 8, 9 24 HKA3090T 2602D83G18 A — — — 2, 5 HKA3090TA 459D987G18 O HKA3090T 657D789G18 — 2, 8 25 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. 23 V12-T3-122 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) HKA3100 1255C59G19 O — — KD3100 1–3, 5, 8, 9 HKA3100T 2602D83G19 A — — — 2, 5 HKA3100TA 459D987G19 O HKA3100T 657D789G19 — 2, 8 HKA3125 1255C59G20 O — — KD3125 1–3, 5, 8, 9 HKA3125T 2602D83G20 A — — — 2, 5 HKA3125TA 459D987G20 O HKA3125T 657D789G20 — 2, 8 HKA3150 1255C59G21 O — — KD3150 1–3, 5, 8, 9 HKA3150T 2602D83G21 A — — — 2, 5 HKA3150TA 459D987G21 O HKA3150T 657D789G21 — 2, 8 HKA3175 1255C59G22 O — — KD3175 1–3, 5, 8, 9 HKA3175T 2602D83G22 A — — — 2, 5 HKA3175TA 459D987G22 O HKA3175T 657D789G22 — 2, 8 HKA3200 1255C59G23 O — — KD3200 1–3, 5, 8, 9 HKA3200T 2602D83G23 A — — — 2, 5 HKA3200TA 459D987G23 O HKA3200T 657D789G23 — 2, 8 HKA3225 1255C59G24 O — — KD3225 1–3, 5, 8, 9 HKA3225F 2602D86G06 O — — KD3400F 2, 8 HKA3225T 2602D83G24 A — — — 2, 5 HKA3225TA 459D987G24 O HKA3225T 657D789G24 — 2, 8 HKB2070 1291C44G01 O — — JD2070 1–3, 5 HKB2070T 1293C31G01 O — — — 2, 5 HKB2090 1291C44G02 O — — JD2090 1–3, 5 HKB2090T 1293C31G02 O — — — — HKB2100 1291C44G03 O — — JD2100 1–3, 5 HKB21000TM 1293C35G03 O — — — — HKB2100T 1293C31G03 O — — — — HKB2125 1291C44G04 O — — JD2125 1–3, 5 HKB21250TM 1293C35G04 O — — — — HKB2125T 1293C31G04 O — — — — HKB2150 1291C44G05 O — — JD2150 1–3, 5 HKB21500TM 1293C35G05 O — — — — HKB2150T 1293C31G05 O — — — — HKB2175 1291C44G06 O — — JD2175 1–3, 5 HKB21750TM 1293C35G06 O — — — — HKB2175T 1293C31G06 O — — — — HKB2200 1291C44G07 O — — JD2200 1–3, 5 HKB2200T 1293C31G07 O — — — — HKB2225 1291C44G08 O — — JD2225 1–3, 5 HKB22250TM 1293C35G07 O — — — — HKB2225T 1293C31G08 O — — — — HKB2250 1291C44G09 O — — JD2250 1–3, 5 HKB22500TM 1293C35G09 O — — — — HKB2250F 2601D44G15 O — — JD2250F — HKB2250T 4974D52G12 O — — — — HKB2700TM 1293C35G01 O — — — — HKB3070 1291C44G16 O — — JD3070 1–3, 5 HKB3070T 1293C32G01 O — — — — 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 1 25 V12-T3-123 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) HKB3090 1291C44G17 O — — JD3090 1–3, 5 HKB3090T 1293C32G02 O — — — — 1–3, 5 HKB3100 1291C44G18 O — — JD3100 HKB31000TM 1293C36G03 O — — — — HKB3100T 1293C32G03 O — — — — HKB3125 1291C44G19 O — — JD3125 1–3, 5 HKB31250TM 1293C36G04 O — — — — HKB3125T 1293C32G04 O — — — — HKB3150 1291C44G20 O — — JD3150 1–3, 5 HKB31500TM 1293C36G05 O — — — — HKB3150T 1293C32G05 O — — — — HKB3175 1291C44G21 O — — JD3175 1–3, 5 8 HKB31750TM 1293C36G06 O — — — — HKB3175T 1293C32G06 O — — — — 9 HKB3200 1291C44G22 O — — JD3200 1–3, 5 HKB3200T 1293C32G06 O — — — — 10 HKB3225 1291C44G23 O — — JD3225 1–3, 5 HKB32250TM 1293C36G08 O — — — — 11 HKB3225T 1293C32G07 O — — — — HKB3250 1291C44G24 O — — JD3250 1–3, 5 12 HKB32500TM 1293C36G09 O — — — 2, 5 HKB3250F 2601D44G16 O — — JD3250F — HKB3250FS NO STYLE O — — JD3250F — HKB3250T 1293C32G08 O — — — — HKB3700TM 1293C36G01 O — — — — HLA2070T 2602D98G02 O — — — 2, 8 13 14 15 HLA2070TA 457D581G02 O — — — 2, 8 HLA2090T 2602D98G03 O — — — 2, 8 HLA2090TA 457D581G03 O — — — 2, 8 16 HLA2100T 2602D98G04 O — — — 2, 8 2, 8 17 18 HLA2100TA 457D581G04 O — — — HLA2125 1255C74G05 O — — KD2125 1–3, 5, 8 HLA21250TM 2602D97G03 O — — — 2, 8 HLA2125T 2602D98G05 O — — — 2, 8 2, 8 HLA2125TA 457D581G05 O — — — 19 HLA2150 1255C74G06 O — — KD2150 1–3, 5, 8 HLA21500TM 2602D97G04 O — — — 2, 8 20 HLA2150T 2602D98G06 O — — — 2, 8 HLA2150TA 457D581G06 O — — — 2, 8 HLA2175 1255C74G07 O — — KD2175 1–3, 5, 8 HLA21750TM 2602D97G05 O — — — 2, 8 HLA2175T 2602D98G07 O — — — 2, 8 2, 8 21 22 HLA2175TA 457D581G07 O — — — 23 HLA2200 1255C74G08 O — — KD2200 1–3, 5, 8 HLA2200T 2602D98G08 O — — — 2, 8 24 HLA2200TA 457D581G08 O — — — 2, 8 HLA2225 1255C74G09 O — — KD2225 1–3, 5, 8 25 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. V12-T3-124 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) HLA22250TM 2602D97G06 O — — — 2, 8 HLA2225T 2602D98G09 O — — — 2, 8 HLA2225TA 457D581G09 O — — — 2, 8 HLA2250 1255C74G10 O — — KD2250 1–3, 5, 8 HLA2250T 2602D98G10 O — — — 2, 8 HLA2250TA 457D581G10 O — — — 2, 8 HLA2300 1255C74G11 O — — KD2300 1–3, 5, 8 HLA23000TM 2602D97G07 O — — — 2, 8 HLA2300T 2602D98G11 O — — — 2, 8 HLA2300TA 457D581G11 O — — — 2, 8 HLA2350 1255C74G12 O — — KD2350 1–3, 5, 8 HLA2350T 2602D98G12 O — — — 2, 8 HLA2350TA 457D781G12 O — — — 2, 8 HLA2400 1255C74G13 O — — KD2400 1–3, 5, 8 HLA24000TM 2602D97G08 O — — — 2, 8 HLA2400F 673B352G01 O — — KD2400F 1–3, 5, 8 HLA2400T 2602D98G13 O — — — 2, 8 HLA2400TA 457D581G13 O — — — 2, 8 HLA2500 1256C10G10 O — — LD2500 1–3, 5, 8 HLA25000TM 2603D47G12 O — — — 2, 8 HLA2500T 2603D46G12 O — — — 2, 8 HLA2500TA 5683D88G12 O — — — 2, 8 HLA2600 1256C10G07 O — — LD2600 1–3, 5, 8 HLA26000TM 2603D47G13 O — — — 2, 8 HLA2600F 375D400G09 O — — LD2600F 1–3, 5, 8 HLA2600T 2603D46G13 O — — — 2, 8 HLA2600TA 5683D88G13 O — — — 2, 8 HLA2700TM 2602D97G02 O — — — 2, 8 HLA3070T 2602D98G21 A — — — 2, 8 HLA3070TA 457D581G21 O HLA3070T 370D749G21 — 2, 8 HLA3090T 2602D98G22 A — — — 2, 8 HLA3090TA 457D581G22 O HLA3090T 370D749G22 — 2, 8 HLA3100T 2602D98G23 A — — — 2, 8 HLA3100TA 457D581G23 O HLA3100T 370D749G23 — 2, 8 HLA3125 504C740G20 A — — KD3125 1–3, 5, 8 HLA31250TM 2602D97G25 A — — — 2, 8 HLA3125T 2602D98G24 A — — — 2, 8 HLA3125TA 457D581G24 O HLA3125T 370D749G24 — 2, 8 HLA3150 504C740G21 A — — KD3150 1–3, 5, 8 HLA31500TM 2602D97G26 A — — — 2, 8 HLA3150T 2602D98G25 A — — — 2, 8 HLA3150TA 457D581G25 O HLA3150T 370D749G25 — 2, 8 HLA3175 504C740G22 A — — KD3175 1–3, 5, 8 HLA31750TM 2602D97G27 A — — — 2, 8 HLA3175T 2602D98G26 A — — — 2, 8 HLA3175TA 457D581G26 O HLA3175T 370D749G26 — 2, 8 HLA3200 504C740G23 A — — KD3200 1–3, 5, 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 1 25 V12-T3-125 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number HLA3200T 2602D98G27 A — — — 2, 8 HLA3200TA 457D581G27 O HLA3200T 370D749G27 — 2, 8 HLA3225 504C740G24 A — — KD3225 1–3, 5, 8 HLA32250TM 2602D97G28 A — — — 2, 8 HLA3225T 2602D98G28 A — — — 2, 8 HLA3225TA 457D581G28 O HLA3225T 370D749G28 — 2, 8 MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number HLA3250 504C740G25 A — — KD3250 1–3, 5, 8 HLA3250T 2602D98G29 A — — — 2, 8 HLA3250TA 457D581G29 O HLA3250T 370D749G29 — 2, 8 HLA3300 504C740G26 A — — KD3300 1–3, 5, 8 HLA33000TM 2602D97G29 A — — — 2, 8 HLA3300T 2602D98G30 A — — — 2, 8 2, 8 8 HLA3300TA 457D581G30 O HLA3300T 370D749G30 — HLA3350T 2602D98G31 A — — — 2, 8 9 HLA3350TA 457D581G31 O HLA3350T 370D749G31 — 2, 8 HLA3400 504C740G28 A — — KD3400 1–3, 5, 8 10 HLA34000TM 2602D97G30 A — — — 2, 8 HLA3400F 673B352G02 A — — KD3400F 1–3, 5, 8 11 HLA3400T 2602D98G32 A — — — 2, 8 HLA3400TA 457D581G32 O HLA3400T 370D749G32 — 2, 8 12 HLA3500 177C429G16 A — — LD3500 1–3, 5, 8 HLA35000TM 2603D47G31 A — — — 2, 8 13 HLA3500T 2603D46G31 A — — — 2, 8 HLA3500TA 5683D88G31 O HLA3500T 375D259G31 — 2, 8 14 HLA3600 177C429G17 A — — LD3600 1–3, 5, 8 HLA36000TM 2603D47G32 A — — — 2, 8 15 HLA3600F 2603D48G06 A — — LD3600F 1–3, 5, 8 HLA3600T 2603D46G32 A — — — 2, 8 HLA3600TA 5683D88G32 O HLA3600T 375D259G32 — 2, 8 HLA3700TM 455D565G24 A — — — 2, 8 HLB2070T 5680D04G07 O — — — 2, 8 16 17 HLB2070TA 5680D04G31 O — — — 2, 8 HLB2090T 5680D04G08 O — — — 2, 8 18 HLB2090TA 5680D04G32 O — — — 2, 8 HLB2100T 5680D04G09 O — — — 2, 8 19 HLB2100TA 5680D04G33 O — — — 2, 8 HLB2125 179C848G04 O — — KD2125 1–3, 5, 8, 9 20 HLB21250TM 5680D04G56 O — — — 2, 8 HLB2125T 5680D04G10 O — — — 2, 8 21 HLB2125TA 5680D04G34 O — — — 2, 8 HLB2150 179C848G05 O — — KD2150 1–3, 5, 8, 9 22 HLB21500TM 5680D04G57 O — — — 2, 8 HLB2150T 5680D04G11 O — — — 2, 8 23 HLB2150TA 5680D04G35 O — — — 2, 8 HLB2175 179C848G06 O — — KD2175 1–3, 5, 8, 9 24 HLB21750TM 5680D04G58 O — — — 2, 8 HLB2175T 5680D04G12 O — — — 2, 8 25 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. V12-T3-126 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) HLB2175TA 5680D04G36 O — — — 2, 8 HLB2200 179C848G07 O — — KD2200 1–3, 5, 8, 9 HLB2200T 5680D04G13 O — — — 2, 8 HLB2200TA 5680D04G37 O — — — 2, 8 HLB2225 179C848G08 O — — KD2225 1–3, 5, 8, 9 HLB22250TM 5680D04G59 O — — — 2, 8 HLB2225T 5680D04G14 O — — — 2, 8 HLB2225TA 5680D04G38 O — — — 2, 8 HLB2250 179C848G09 O — — KD2250 1–3, 5, 8, 9 HLB2250T 5680D04G15 O — — — 2, 8 HLB2250TA 5680D04G39 O — — — 2, 8 HLB2300 179C848G10 O — — KD2300 1–3, 5, 8, 9 HLB23000TM 5680D04G60 O — — — 2, 8 HLB2300T 5680D04G16 O — — — 2, 8 HLB2300TA 5680D04G40 O — — — 2, 8 HLB2350 179C848G11 O — — KD2350 1–3, 5, 8, 9 HLB2350TA 5680D04G41 O — — — 2, 8 HLB2400 179C848G12 O — — KD2400 1–3, 5, 8, 9 HLB24000TM 5680D04G61 O — — — 2, 8 HLB2400F 5680D03G09 O — — KD2400F 1–3, 5, 8, 9 2, 8 HLB2400T 5680D04G18 O — — — HLB2400TA 5680D04G42 O — — — 2, 8 HLB2700TM 5680D04G55 O — — — 2, 8 HLB3070T 5680D04G19 O — — — 2, 8 HLB3070TA 5680D04G43 O — — — 2, 8 HLB3090T 5680D04G20 O — — — 2, 8 HLB3090TA 5680D04G44 O — — — 2, 8 HLB3100T 5680D04G21 O — — — 2, 8 HLB3100TA 5680D04G45 O — — — 2, 8 HLB3125 179C848G19 O — — KD3125 1–3, 5, 8, 9 HLB31250TM 5680D04G63 O — — — 2, 8 HLB3125T 5680D04G22 O — — — 2, 8 HLB3125TA 5680D04G46 O — — — 2, 8 HLB3150 179C848G20 O — — KD3150 1–3, 5, 8, 9 HLB31500TM 5680D04G64 O — — — 2, 8 HLB3150T 5680D04G23 O — — — 2, 8 HLB3150TA 5680D04G47 O — — — 2, 8 HLB3175 179C848G21 O — — KD3175 1–3, 5, 8, 9 HLB31750TM 5680D04G65 O — — — 2, 8 HLB3175T 5680D04G24 O — — — 2, 8 HLB3175TA 5680D04G48 O — — — 2, 8 HLB3200 179C848G22 O — — KD3200 1–3, 5, 8, 9 HLB3200T 5680D04G25 O — — — 2, 8 HLB3200TA 5680D04G49 O — — — 2, 8 HLB3225 179C848G23 O — — KD3225 1–3, 5, 8, 9 HLB32250TM 5680D04G66 O — — — 2, 8 HLB3225T 5680D04G26 O — — — 2, 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 1 25 V12-T3-127 3 1 2 3 4 5 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) HLB3225TA 5680D04G50 O — — — 2, 8 HLB3250 179C848G24 O — — KD3250 1–3, 5, 8, 9 HLB3250T 5680D04G27 O — — — 2, 8 HLB3250TA 5680D04G51 O — — — 2, 8 HLB3300 179C848G25 O — — KD3300 1–3, 5, 8, 9 HLB33000TM 5680D04G67 O — — — 2, 8 HLB3300T 5680D04G28 O — — — 2, 8 HLB3300TA 5680D04G52 O — — — 2, 8 6 HLB3350TA 5680D04G53 O — — — 2, 8 HLB3400 179C848G27 O — — KD3400 1–3, 5, 8, 9 7 HLB34000TM 5680D04G68 O — — — 2, 8 HLB3400F 5680D03G10 O — — KD3400F 1–3, 5, 8, 9 8 HLB3400T 5680D04G30 O — — — 2, 8 HLB3400TA 5680D04G54 O — — — 2, 8 9 HLB3700TM 5680D04G62 O — — — 2, 8 HLC2150F 1242C92G01 O — — KD3400F/KES3150LS 1–3, 5, 8 10 HLC2150FM 1242C92G03 O — — KD3400F/KES3150LS 1–3, 5, 8 HLC2300F 1242C92G05 O — — KD3400F/KES3400LS 1–3, 5, 8 11 HLC2300FM 1242C92G07 O — — KD3400F/KES3400LS 1–3, 5, 8 HLC2400F 1242C92G09 O — — KD3400F/KES3400LS 1–3, 5, 8 12 HLC2400FM 1242C92G11 O — — KD3400F/KES3400LS 1–3, 5, 8 HLC2600F 1242C92G13 O — — LD3600F/LES3600LS 1–3, 5, 8 13 14 15 16 HLC2600FM 1242C92G15 O — — LD3600F/LES3600LS 1–3, 5, 8 HLC3150F 1242C92G02 A — — KD3400F/KES3150LS 1–3, 5, 8 HLC3150FM 1242C92G04 O HLC3150F 1284C66G02 KD3400F/KES3150LS 1–3, 5, 8 HLC3300F 1242C92G06 A — — KD3400F/KES3400LS 1–3, 5, 8 1–3, 5, 8 HLC3300FM 1242C92G08 O HLC3300F 2612D41G46 KD3400F/KES3400LS HLC3400F 1242C92G10 A — — KD3400F/KES3400LS 1–3, 5, 8 HLC3400FM 1242C92G12 O HLC3400F 2613D44G08 KD3400F/KES3400LS 1–3, 5, 8 HLC3600F 1242C92G14 A — — LD3600F/LES3600LS 1–3, 5, 8 HLC3600FM 1242C92G16 O HLC3600F 2612D41G48 LD3600F/LES3600LS 1–3, 5, 8 HLCA2150F 1242C92G23 O — — KD3400F/KES3150LSI 1–3, 5, 8 HLCA2300F 1242C92G27 O — — KD3400F/KES3400LSI 1–3, 5, 8 HLCA2400F 1242C92G31 O — — KD3400F/KES3400LSI 1–3, 5, 8 HLCA2600F 1242C92G35 O — — LD3600F/LES3600LSI 1–3, 5, 8 HLCA3150F 1242C92G24 A — — KD3400F/KES3150LSI 1–3, 5, 8 HLCA3300F 1242C92G28 A — — KD3400F/KES3400LSI 1–3, 5, 8 20 HLCA3400F 1242C92G32 A — — KD3400F/KES3400LSI 1–3, 5, 8 HLCA3600F 1284C66G36 A — — LD3600F/LES3600LSI 1–3, 5, 8 21 HLCC3600F 6590C11G14 A — — CLD3600F/LES3600LS 1–3, 5, 8 HLCCA3600F 6590C11G36 A — — CLD3600F/LES3600LSI 1–3, 5, 8 HLCCG3600F 1242C94G04 A — — CLD3600F/LES3600LSG 1–3, 5, 8 17 18 19 22 HLCCGA3600F 1242C94G12 A — — CLD3600F/LES3600LSIG 1–3, 5, 8 HLCG3150F 1242C89G01 A — — KD3400F/KES3150LSG 1–3, 5, 8 HLCG3300F 1242C89G02 A — — KD3400F/KES3400LSG 1–3, 5, 8 24 HLCG3400F 1242C89G03 A — — KD3400F/KES3400LSG 1–3, 5, 8 HLCG3600F 1371D17G40 A — — LD3600F/LES3600LS 1–3, 5, 8 25 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. 23 V12-T3-128 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) HLCGA3150F 1242C89G09 A — — KD3400F/KES3150LSIG 1–3, 5, 8 HLCGA3300F 1242C89G10 A — — KD3400F/KES3400LSIG 1–3, 5, 8 HLCGA3400F 1242C89G11 A — — KD3400F/KES3400LSIG 1–3, 5, 8 HLCGA3600F 1270C61G12 A — — LD3600F/LES3600LSIG 1–3, 5, 8 HMA2125 1252C22G01 O — — KD2125 1–3, 5, 8 HMA21250TM 457D455G07 O — — — 2, 8 HMA2125T 371D371G05 O — — — 2, 8 HMA2125TA 457D458G05 O — — — 2, 8 HMA2150 1252C22G02 O — — KD2150 1–3, 5, 8 HMA2150T 371D371G06 O — — — 2, 8 HMA2150TA 457D458G06 O — — — 2, 8 HMA2175 1252C22G03 O — — KD2175 1–3, 5, 8 HMA2175T 371D371G07 O — — — 2, 8 HMA2175TA 457D458G07 O — — — 2, 8 HMA2200 1252C22G04 O — — KD2200 1–3, 5, 8 HMA22000TM 457D455G08 O — — — 2, 8 HMA2200T 371D371G08 O — — — 2, 8 HMA2200TA 457D458G08 O — — — 2, 8 HMA2225 1252C22G05 O — — KD2225 1–3, 5, 8 HMA2225T 371D371G09 O — — — 2, 8 HMA2225TA 457D458G09 O — — — 2, 8 HMA2250 1252C22G06 O — — KD2250 1, 2, 3, 5, 8 HMA2250T 371D371G10 O — — — 2, 8 HMA2250TA 457D458G10 O — — — 2, 8 HMA2300 1252C22G07 O — — MDL2300 1–3, 5, 8 HMA23000TM 457D455G09 O — — — 2, 8 HMA2300T 371D371G11 O — — — 2, 8 HMA2300TA 457D458G11 O — — — 2, 8 HMA2350 1252C22G08 O — — MDL2350 1–3, 5, 8 HMA2350T 371D371G12 O — — — 2, 8 HMA2350TA 457D458G12 O — — — 2, 8 HMA2400 1252C22G09 O — — MDL2400 1–3, 5, 8 HMA24000TM 457D455G10 O — — — 2, 8 HMA2400T 371D371G13 O — — — 2, 8 HMA2400TA 457D458G13 O — — — 2, 8 HMA2500 1252C22G10 O — — MDL2500 1–3, 5, 8 HMA2500T 371D372G06 O — — — 2, 8 HMA2500TA 457D459G06 O — — — 2, 8 HMA2600 1252C22G11 O — — MDL2600 1–3, 5, 8 HMA2600T 371D372G08 O — — — 2, 8 HMA2600TA 457D459G08 O — — — 2, 8 HMA2700 1252C22G12 O — — MDL2700 1, 2, 3, 5, 8 HMA2700T 371D373G10 O — — — 2, 8 HMA2700TA 457D460G10 O — — — 2, 8 HMA2800 1252C22G13 O — — MDL2800 1, 2, 3, 5, 8 HMA28000TM 457D455G12 O — — — 2, 8 HMA2800F 373B237G03 O — — MDL2800F — 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 1 25 V12-T3-129 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) HMA2800T 371D373G12 O — — — 2, 8 HMA2800TA 457D460G12 O — — — 2, 8 HMA3125 1252C22G16 A — — KD3125 1, 2, 3, 5, 8 HMA31250TM 457D455G23 A — — — 2, 8 HMA3125T 371D371G21 A — — — 2, 8 HMA3125TA 457D458G21 O HMA3125T 371D371G21 — 2, 8 HMA3150 1252C22G17 A — — KD3150 1, 2, 3, 5, 8 HMA3150T 371D371G22 A — — — 2, 8 HMA3150TA 457D458G22 O HMA3150T 371D371G22 — 2, 8 HMA3175 1252C22G18 A — — KD3175 1, 2, 3, 5, 8 HMA3175T 371D371G23 A — — — 2, 8 HMA3175TA 457D458G23 O HMA3175T 371D371G23 — 2, 8 8 HMA3200 1252C22G19 A — — KD3200 1, 2, 3, 5, 8 HMA32000TM 457D455G24 A — — — 2, 8 9 HMA3200T 371D371G24 A — — — 2, 8 HMA3200TA 457D458G24 O HMA3200T 371D371G24 — 2, 8 10 HMA3225 1252C22G20 A — — KD3225 1, 2, 3, 5, 8 HMA3225T 371D371G25 A — — — 2, 8 11 HMA3225TA 457D458G25 O HMA3225T 371D371G25 — 2, 8 HMA3250 1252C22G21 A — — KD3250 1, 2, 3, 5, 8 HMA3250T 371D371G26 A — — — 2, 8 2, 8 12 HMA3250TA 457D458G26 O HMA3250T 371D371G26 — 13 HMA3300 1252C22G22 A — — MDL3300 1, 2, 3, 5, 8 HMA33000TM 457D455G25 A — — — 2, 8 14 HMA3300T 371D371G27 A — — — 2, 8 HMA3300TA 457D458G27 O HMA3300T 371D371G27 — 2, 8 15 HMA3350 1252C22G23 A — — MDL3350 1, 2, 3, 5, 8 HMA3350T 371D371G28 A — — — 2, 8 HMA3350TA 457D458G28 O HMA3350T 371D371G28 — 2, 8 16 HMA3400 1252C22G24 A — — MDL3400 1, 2, 3, 5, 8 HMA34000TM 457D455G26 A — — — 2, 8 17 18 19 20 21 22 HMA3400T 371D371G29 A — — — 2, 8 HMA3400TA 457D458G29 O HMA3400T 371D371G29 — 2, 8 HMA3500 1252C22G25 A — — MDL3500 1, 2, 3, 5, 8 HMA3500T 371D372G22 A — — — 2, 8 HMA3500TA 457D459G22 O HMA3500T 371D372G22 — 2, 8 HMA3600 1252C22G26 A — — MDL3600 1, 2, 3, 5, 8 HMA36000TM 457D455G27 A — — — 2, 8 HMA3600T 371D372G24 A — — — 2, 8 HMA3600TA 457D459G24 O HMA3600T 371D372G24 — 2, 8 HMA3700 1252C22G27 A — — MDL3700 1, 2, 3, 5, 8 HMA3700T 371D373G26 A — — — 2, 8 2, 8 HMA3700TA 457D460G26 O HMA3700T 371D373G26 — 23 HMA3800 1252C22G28 A — — MDL3800 1, 2, 3, 5, 8 HMA38000TM 457D455G28 A — — — 2, 8 24 HMA3800F 2600D43G10 A — — MDL3800F 2, 8 HMA3800T 371D373G28 A — — — 2, 8 25 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. V12-T3-130 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) HMA3800TA 457D460G28 O HMA3800T 371D373G28 — 2, 8 HMC2800F 6590C16G05 O — — MDL3800F/MES3800LS 1, 2, 3, 5, 8 HMC2800FM 6590C16G07 O — — MDL3800F/MES3800LS 1, 2, 3, 5, 8 HMC3800F 6590C16G06 A — — MDL3800F/MES3800LS 1, 2, 3, 5, 8 HMC3800FM 6590C16G08 O HMC3800F 6590C16G06 MDL3800F/MES3800LS 1, 2, 3, 5, 8 HMCA2800F 6590C16G17 A — — MDL3800F/MES3800LSI 1, 2, 3, 5, 8 HMCA3800F 6590C16G18 A — — MDL3800F/MES3800LSI 1–3, 5, 8 HMCC3800F 6590C14G06 A — — CMDL3800F/MES3800LS 1–3, 5, 8 HMCCA3800F 6590C14G18 A — — CMDL3800F/MES3800LSI 1–3, 5, 8 HMCCG3800F 1242C62G09 A — — CMDL3800F/MES3800LSG 1–3, 5, 8 HMCCGA3800F 1242C62G11 A — — CMDL3800F/MES3800LSIG 1–3, 5, 8 HMCG3800F 1242C60G09 A — — MDL3800F/MES3800LSG 1–3, 5, 8 HMCGA3800F 1242C60G11 A — — MDL3800F/MES3800LSIG 1–3, 5, 8 HNB21000 1234C26G15 O — — ND212T33W/12NES1000T+ 1–3, 5, 8 HNB210000TM 371D590G13 O — — — 2, 8 HNB21000T 371D589G13 O — — — 2, 8 HNB21200 1234C26G17 O — — ND212T33W/12NES1200T+ 1–3, 5, 8 HNB212000TM 371D590G14 O — — — 2, 8 HNB21200F 2610D64G19 O — — ND212T33W 1–3, 5, 8 HNB21200T 371D589G15 O — — — 2, 8 HNB26000TM 371D590G11 O — — — 2, 8 HNB2700 1234C26G12 O — — ND2800T33W/8NES700T+ 1–3, 5, 8 HNB2700T 371D589G10 O — — — 2, 8 HNB2800 1234C26G13 O — — ND2800T33W/8NES800T+ 1–3, 5, 8 HNB28000TM 371D590G12 O — — — 2, 8 HNB2800T 371D589G11 O — — — 2, 8 HNB2900 1234C26G14 O — — ND212T33W/12NES900T+ 1–3, 5, 8 HNB2900T 371D589G12 O — — — 2, 8 HNB31000 1234C26G33 A — — ND312T33W/12NES1000T+ 1–3, 5, 8 HNB310000TM 371D590G29 A — — — 2, 8 HNB31000T 371D589G29 A — — — 2, 8 HNB31200 1234C26G35 A — — ND312T33W/12NES1200T+ 1–3, 5, 8 HNB312000TM 371D590G30 A — — — 2, 8 HNB31200F 625B494G08 A — — ND312T33W 1–3, 5, 8 HNB31200T 371D589G31 A — — — 2, 8 HNB36000TM 371D590G27 A — — — 2, 8 HNB3700 1234C26G30 A — — ND3800T33W/8NES700T+ 1–3, 5, 8 HNB3700T 371D589G26 A — — — 2, 8 HNB3800 1234C26G31 A — — ND3800T33W/8NES800T+ 1–3, 5, 8 HNB38000TM 371D590G28 A — — — 2, 8 HNB3800T 371D589G27 A — — — 2, 8 HNB3900 1234C26G32 A — — ND312T33W/12NES900T+ 1–3, 5, 8 HNB3900T 371D589G28 A — — — 2, 8 HNC21200F 2613D29G06 O — — ND212T33W 1–3, 5, 8 HNC21200FM 2613D29G08 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8 HNC31200F 2613D29G05 A — — ND312T33W 1–3, 5, 8 HNC31200FM 2613D29G07 O HNC31200F 2613D29G05 — 1–3, 5, 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 1 25 V12-T3-131 3 1 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number HNCA21200F 2613D29G18 O HNCA31200F 2613D29G17 ND212T32W 1–3, 5, 8 HNCA31200F 2613D29G17 A — — ND312T32W 1–3, 5, 8 HNCG31200F 1242C72G04 A — — ND312T35W 1–3, 5, 8 HNCGA31200F 1242C72G12 A — — ND312T36W 1–3, 5, 8 JA2070 371D957G02 O — — JDB2070 1–3, 5, 8, 9 JA2070A 456D988G80 O — — JDB2070 1–3, 8, 9 5 JA2070S 657D791G46 O — — JDB2070 1–5, 8, 9 JA2070SW 657D791G26 O — — JDB2070W 1–5, 8, 9 6 JA2070W 657D791G02 O — — JDB2070W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 JA2090 371D957G03 O — — JDB2090 1–3, 5, 8, 9 7 JA2090A 456D988G81 O — — JDB2090 1–3, 8, 9 JA2090S 657D791G47 O — — JDB2090 1–5, 8, 9 8 JA2090SW 657D791G27 O — — JDB2090W 1–5, 8, 9 JA2090W 657D791G03 O — — JDB2090W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 9 JA2100 371D957G04 O — — KDB2100 1–3, 5, 8, 9 JA2100A 456D988G82 O — — KDB2100 1–3, 8, 9 2 3 4 MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number 10 JA2100S 657D791G48 O — — KDB2100 1–5, 8, 9 JA2100SW 657D791G28 O — — KDB2100W 1–5, 8, 9 11 JA2100W 657D791G04 O — — KDB2100W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 JA2125 371D957G05 O — — KDB2125 1–3, 5, 8, 9 12 JA21250MW 371D957G67 O — — HM2P400F5W 1–3, 8, 9 JA21250SMW NO STYLE O — — HM2P400F5W 1–4, 8, 9 JA2125A 456D988G83 O — — KDB2125 1–3, 8, 9 13 14 JA2125S 657D791G49 O — — KDB2125 1–5, 8, 9 JA2125SW 657D791G29 O — — KDB2125W 1–5, 8, 9 JA2125W 657D791G05 O — — KDB2125W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 15 JA2150 371D957G06 O — — KDB2150 1–3, 5, 8, 9 JA21500MW 371D957G68 O — — HM2P400G5W 1–3, 8, 9 JA21500SMW NO STYLE O — — HM2P400G5W 1–4, 8, 9 16 JA2150A 456D988G84 O — — KDB2150 1–3, 8, 9 JA2150S 657D791G50 O — — KDB2150 1–5, 8, 9 1–5, 8, 9 17 JA2150SW 657D791G30 O — — KDB2150W JA2150W 657D791G06 O — — KDB2150W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 18 JA2175 371D957G07 O — — KDB2175 1–3, 5, 8, 9 JA21750MW 371D957G69 O — — HM2P400J5W 1–3, 8, 9 JA21750SMW NO STYLE O — — HM2P400J5W 1–4, 8, 9 JA2175A 456D988G85 O — — KDB2175 1–3, 8, 9 JA2175S 657D791G51 O — — KDB2175 1–5, 8, 9 JA2175SW 657D791G31 O — — KDB2175W 1–5, 8, 9 JA2175W 657D791G07 O — — KDB2175W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 JA2200 371D957G08 O — — KDB2200 1–3, 5, 8, 9 JA2200A 456D988G86 O — — KDB2200 1–3, 8, 9 JA2200S 657D791G52 O — — KDB2200 1–5, 8, 9 23 JA2200SW 657D791G32 O — — KDB2200W 1–5, 8, 9 JA2200W 657D791G08 O — — KDB2200W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 24 JA2225 371D957G09 O — — KDB2225 1–3, 5, 8, 9 JA22250MW 371D957G70 O — — HM2P400L5W 1–3, 8, 9 25 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. 19 20 21 22 V12-T3-132 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) JA22250SMW NO STYLE O — — HM2P400L5W 1–4, 8, 9 JA2225A 456D988G87 O — — KDB2225 1–3, 8, 9 JA2225S 657D791G53 O — — KDB2225 1–5, 8, 9 JA2225SW 657D791G33 O — — KDB2225W 1–5, 8, 9 JA2225W 657D791G09 O — — KDB2225W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 JA2225WK 752B047G01 O — — KDB2400KW 1–3, 5, 8, 9 JA2225WSK 752B047G02 O — — KDB2400KW 1–3, 5, 8, 9 JA2250W NO STYLE O — — KDB2250W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 JA2700MW 371D957G66 O — — HM2P400D5W 1–3, 5, 7, 8, 9 JA2700SMW NO STYLE O — — HM2P400D5W 1–5, 7–9 JA3070 371D957G12 O — — JDB3070 1–3, 8, 9 JA3070A 456D988G90 O — — JDB3070 1–3, 8, 9 JA3070S 657D791G56 O — — JDB3070 1–5, 8, 9 JA3070SW 657D791G36 O — — JDB3070W 1–5, 8, 9 JA3070W 657D791G12 O — — JDB3070W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 JA3090 371D957G13 O — — JDB3090 1–3, 8, 9 JA3090A 456D988G91 O — — JDB3090 1–3, 8, 9 JA3090S 657D791G57 O — — JDB3090 1–5, 8, 9 JA3090SW 657D791G37 O — — JDB3090W 1–5, 8, 9 JA3090W 657D791G13 O — — JDB3090W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 JA3100 371D957G14 O — — KDB3100 1–3, 8, 9 JA3100A 456D988G92 O — — KDB3100 1–3, 8, 9 JA3100S 657D791G58 O — — KDB3100 1–5, 8, 9 JA3100SW 657D791G38 O — — KDB3100W 1–5, 8, 9 JA3100W 657D791G14 O — — KDB3100W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 JA3125 371D957G15 O — — KDB3125 1–3, 8, 9 JA31250MW 371D957G74 O — — HMCP400F5W 1–3, 8, 9 JA31250SMW NO STYLE O — — HMCP400F5W 1–4, 8, 9 JA3125A 456D988G93 O — — KDB3125 1–3, 8, 9 JA3125S 657D791G59 O — — KDB3125 1–5, 8, 9 JA3125SW 657D791G39 O — — KDB3125W 1–5, 8, 9 JA3125W 657D791G15 O — — KDB3125W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 JA3150 371D957G16 O — — KDB3150 1–3, 8, 9 JA31500MW 371D957G75 O — — HMCP400G5W 1–3, 8, 9 JA31500SMW 82E2537 O — — HMCP400G5W 1–4, 8, 9 JA3150A 456D988G94 O — — KDB3150 1–3, 8, 9 JA3150S 657D791G60 O — — KDB3150 1–5, 8, 9 JA3150SW 657D791G40 O — — KDB3150W 1–5, 8, 9 JA3150W 657D791G16 O — — KDB3150W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 JA3175 371D957G17 O — — KDB3175 1–3, 8, 9 JA31750MW 371D957G76 O — — HMCP400J5W 1–3, 8, 9 JA31750SMW 82E0668 O — — HMCP400J5W 1–4, 8, 9 JA3175A 456D988G95 O — — KDB3175 1–3, 8, 9 JA3175S 657D791G61 O — — KDB3175 1–5, 8, 9 JA3175SW 657D791G41 O — — KDB3175W 1–5, 8, 9 JA3175W 657D791G17 O — — KDB3175W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 JA3200 371D957G18 O — — KDB3200 1–3, 8, 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 1 25 V12-T3-133 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) JA3200A 456D988G96 O — — KDB3200 1–3, 8, 9 JA3200S 657D791G62 O — — KDB3200 1–5, 8, 9 JA3200SW 657D791G42 O — — KDB3200W 1–5, 8, 9 JA3200W 657D791G18 O — — KDB3200W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 JA3225 371D957G19 O — — KDB3225 1–3, 8, 9 JA32250MW 371D957G77 O — — HMCP400L5W 1–3, 8, 9 JA32250SMW 82E8642 O — — HMCP400L5W 1–4, 8, 9 JA3225A 456D988G97 O — — KDB3225 1–3, 8, 9 JA3225S 657D791G63 O — — KDB3225 1–5, 8, 9 JA3225SW 657D791G43 O — — KDB3225W 1–5, 8, 9 1–3, 5, 8, 9 JA3225W 657D791G19 O — — KDB3225W JA3225WK 752B047G06 O — — KDB3400KW 1–3, 5, 8, 9 8 JA3225WSK 752B047G07 O — — KDB3400KW 1–3, 5, 8, 9 JA3250W NO STYLE O — — KDB3250W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 9 JA3700MW NO STYLE O — — HMCP400D5W 1–3, 5, 7–9 10 11 12 13 14 15 JA3700SMW NO STYLE O — — HMCP400D5W 1–5, 7–9 JB2070 NO STYLE O — — JDB2070 1–3, 5 JB2070S NO STYLE O — — JDB2070 1–5 JB2070SW NO STYLE O — — JDB2070W 1–5 JB2070W 752B417G34 O — — JDB2070W 1–3, 5 JB2090 NO STYLE O — — JDB2090 1–3, 5 JB2090S NO STYLE O — — JDB2090 1–5 JB2090SW NO STYLE O — — JDB2090W 1–5 JB2090W 752B417G35 O — — JDB2090W 1–3, 5 JB2100 NO STYLE O — — JDB2100 1–3, 5 JB2100S NO STYLE O — — JDB2100 1–5 JB2100SW NO STYLE O — — JDB2100W 1–5 JB2100W 752B417G01 O — — JDB2100W 1–3, 5 1–3, 5 JB2125 NO STYLE O — — JDB2125 JB21250MW 752B416G02 O — — HM2P250F5W 1–3 JB21250SMW 752B416G14 O — — HM2P250F5W 1–4 17 JB2125S NO STYLE O — — JDB2125 1–5 JB2125SW NO STYLE O — — JDB2125W 1–5 18 JB2125W 752B417G02 O — — JDB2125W 1–3, 5 JB2150 NO STYLE O — — JDB2150 1–3, 5 19 JB21500MW 752B416G03 O — — HM2P250G5W 1–3 JB21500SMW 752B416G15 O — — HM2P250G5W 1–4 20 JB2150S NO STYLE O — — JDB2150 1–5 JB2150SW NO STYLE O — — JDB2150W 1–5 21 JB2150W 752B417G03 O — — JDB2150W 1–3, 5 JB2175 NO STYLE O — — JDB2175 1–3, 5 22 JB21750MW 752B416G04 O — — HM2P250J5W 1–3 JB21750SMW 752B416G16 O — — HM2P250J5W 1–4 23 JB2175S NO STYLE O — — JDB2175 1–5 JB2175SW NO STYLE O — — JDB2175W 1–5 24 JB2175W 752B417G04 O — — JDB2175W 1–3, 5 JB2200 NO STYLE O — — JDB2200 1–3, 5 25 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. 16 V12-T3-134 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) JB2200S 81E6623 O — — JDB2200 1–5 JB2200SW NO STYLE O — — JDB2200W 1–5 JB2200W 752B417G05 O — — JDB2200W 1–3, 5 JB2225 NO STYLE O — — JDB2225 1–3, 5 JB22250MW 752B416G05 O — — HM2P250L5W 1–3 JB22250SMW 752B416G17 O — — HM2P250L5W 1–3, 4 JB2225S NO STYLE O — — JDB2225 1–5 JB2225SW NO STYLE O — — JDB2225W 1–5 JB2225W 752B417G06 O — — JDB2225W 1–3, 5 JB2250 NO STYLE O — — JDB2250 1–3, 5 JB22500MW 752B416G06 O — — HM2P250W5W 1–3 JB22500SMW 752B416G18 O — — HM2P250W5W 1–3, 4 JB2250S NO STYLE O — — JDB2250 1–5 JB2250SW NO STYLE O — — JDB2250W 1–5 JB2250SWK NO STYLE O — — JDB2250KW 1–3, 5, 8 JB2250W 752B417G07 O — — JDB2250W 1–3, 5 JB2250WK 752B046G01 O — — JDB2250KW 1–3, 5, 8 JB2700MW 752B416G01 O — — HM2P250A5W 1–3 JB2700SMW 752B416G13 O — — HM2P250A5W 1–4 JB3070 NO STYLE O — — JDB3070 1–3, 5 JB3070S NO STYLE O — — JDB3070 1–5 JB3070SW NO STYLE O — — JDB3070W 1–5 JB3070W 752B417G08 O — — JDB3070W 1–3, 5 JB3090 NO STYLE O — — JDB3090 1–3, 5 JB3090S NO STYLE O — — JDB3090 1–5 JB3090SW NO STYLE O — — JDB3090W 1–5 JB3090W 752B417G09 O — — JDB3090W 1–3, 5 JB3100 NO STYLE O — — JDB3100 1–3, 5 JB3100S NO STYLE O — — JDB3100 1–5 JB3100SW NO STYLE O — — JDB3100W 1–5 JB3100W 752B417G10 O — — JDB3100W 1–3, 5 JB3125 NO STYLE O — — JDB3125 1–3, 5 JB31250MW 752B416G08 O — — HMCP250F5W 1–3 JB3100W 752B417G10 O — — JDB3100W 1–3, 5 JB3125 NO STYLE O — — JDB3125 1–3, 5 JB31250MW 752B416G08 O — — HMCP250F5W 1–3 JB31250SMW 752B416G20 O — — HMCP250F5W 1–4 JB3125S NO STYLE O — — JDB3125 1–5 JB3125SW NO STYLE O — — JDB3125W 1–5 JB3125W 752B417G11 O — — JDB3125W 1–3, 5 JB3150 NO STYLE O — — JDB3150 1–3, 5 JB31500MW 752B416G09 O — — HMCP250G5W 1–3 JB31500SMW 752B416G21 O — — HMCP250G5W 1–4 JB3150S NO STYLE O — — JDB3150 1–5 JB3150SW NO STYLE O — — JDB3150W 1–5 JB3150W 752B417G12 O — — JDB3150W 1–3, 5 JB3175 69E1870 O — — JDB3175 1–3, 5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 1 25 V12-T3-135 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) JB31750MW 752B416G10 O — — HMCP250J5W 1–3 JB31750SMW 752B416G22 O — — HMCP250J5W 1–4 JB3175S NO STYLE O — — JDB3175 1–5 JB3175SW NO STYLE O — — JDB3175W 1–5 JB3175W 752B417G13 O — — JDB3175W 1–3, 5 JB3200 69E9992 O — — JDB3200 1–3, 5 1–5 JB3200S NO STYLE O — — JDB3200 JB3200SW NO STYLE O — — JDB3200W 1–5 JB3200W 752B417G14 O — — JDB3200W 1–3, 5 JB3225 80E9836 O — — JDB3225 1–3, 5 1–3 JB32250MW 752B416G11 O — — HMCP250L5W JB32250SMW 752B416G23 O — — HMCP250L5W 1–4 JB3225S 63E6442 O — — JDB3225 1–5 JB3225SW 752B417G15 O — — JDB3225W 1–5 JB3225W 80E8211 O — — JDB3225W 1–3, 5 JB3250 752B416G12 O — — JDB3250 1–3, 5 JB32500MW 752B416G24 O — — HMCP250W5W 1–3 JB32500SMW NO STYLE O — — HMCP250W5W 1–4 11 JB3250S NO STYLE O — — JDB3250 1–5 JB3250SW NO STYLE O — — JDB3250W 1–5 12 JB3250W 752B417G16 O — — JDB3250W 1–3, 5 8 9 10 13 14 JB3250WK 752B046G06 O — — JDB3250KW 1–3, 5, 8 JB3250WSK 752B046G07 O — — JDB3250KW 1–3, 5, 8 JB3700MW 752B416G07 O — — HMCP250A5W 1–3 JB3700SMW 752B416G19 O — — HMCP250A5W 1–4 KA2070 1255C53G02 O — — JD2070 1–3, 5, 8, 9 15 KA2070S 1255C54G02 O — — JD2070 1–5, 8, 9 KA2090 1255C53G03 O — — JD2090 1–3, 5, 8, 9 KA2090S 1255C54G03 O — — JD2090 1–5, 8, 9 16 KA2100 1255C53G04 O — — KD2100 1–3, 5, 8, 9 17 18 19 20 KA2100S 1255C54G04 O — — KD2100 1–5, 8, 9 KA2125 1255C53G05 O — — KD2125 1–3, 5, 8, 9 KA2125S 1255C54G05 O — — KD2125 1–5, 8, 9 KA2150 1255C53G06 O — — KD2150 1–3, 5, 8, 9 KA2175 1255C53G07 O — — KD2175 1–3, 5, 8, 9 KA2175S 1255C54G07 O — — KD2175 1–5, 8, 9 KA2200 1255C53G08 O — — KD2200 1–3, 5, 8, 9 KA2200S 1255C54G08 O — — KD2200 1–5, 8, 9 KA2225 1255C53G09 O — — KD2225 1–3, 5, 8, 9 KA2225F 2602D86G01 O — — KD2400F 2, 8 KA2225FS 2602D86G03 O — — KD2400F 2, 4, 8 KA2225S 1255C54G09 O — — KD2225 1–5, 8, 9 KA2225WK 752B047G03 O — — KD2400KW 1–3, 5, 8, 9 23 KA2225WSK 752B047G04 O — — KD2400KW 1–3, 5, 8, 9 KA2150S 1255C54G06 O — — KD2150 1–5, 8, 9 24 KA3070 1255C53G17 O — — JD3070 1–3, 5, 8, 9 KA3070S 1255C54G17 O — — JD3070 1–5, 8, 9 25 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. 21 22 V12-T3-136 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) KA3090 1255C53G18 O — — JD3090 1–3, 5, 8, 9 KA3090S 1255C54G18 O — — JD3090 1–5, 8, 9 KA3100 1255C53G19 O — — KD3100 1–3, 5, 8, 9 KA3100S 1255C54G19 O — — KD3100 1–5, 8, 9 KA3125 1255C53G20 O — — KD3125 1–3, 5, 8, 9 KA3125S 1255C54G20 O — — KD3125 1–5, 8, 9 KA3150 1255C53G21 O — — KD3150 1–3, 5, 8, 9 KA3150S 1255C54G21 O — — KD3150 1–5, 8, 9 KA3175 1255C53G22 O — — KD3175 1–3, 5, 8, 9 KA3175S 504C335G22 O — — KD3175 1–5, 8, 9 KA3200 504C335G23 O — — KD3200 1–3, 5, 8, 9 KA3200S 504C335G23 O — — KD3200 1–5, 8, 9 KA3225 504C336G24 O — — KD3225 1–3, 5, 8, 9 KA3225F 2602D86G02 O — — KD3400F 2, 8 KA3225FS 2602D86G04 O — — KD3400F 2, 4, 8 KA3225S 504C335G24 O — — KD3225 1–5, 8, 9 KA3225WK 752B047G08 O — — KD3400KW 1–3, 5, 8, 9 KA3225WSK 752B047G09 O — — KD3400KW 1–3, 5, 8, 9 KB2070 1291C40G01 O — — JD2070 1–3, 5 KB2090 1291C40G02 O — — JD2090 1–3, 5 KB2100 1291C40G03 O — — JD2100 1–3, 5 KB2125 1291C40G04 O — — JD2125 1–3, 5 KB2150 1291C40G05 O — — JD2150 1–3, 5 KB2175 1291C40G06 O — — JD2175 1–3, 5 KB2200 1291C40G07 O — — JD2200 1–3, 5 KB2225 1291C40G08 O — — JD2225 1–3, 5 KB2250 1291C40G09 O — — JD2250 1–3, 5 KB2250F 2601D44G13 O — — JD2250F — KB2250FS 2601D44G17 O — — JD2250F — KB2250WK 752B046G03 O — — JD2250KW 1–3, 5, 8 KB2250WSK 752B046G04 O — — JD2250KW 1–3, 5, 8 KB3070 1291C40G16 O — — JD3070 1–3, 5 KB3090 1291C40G17 O — — JD3090 1–3, 5 KB3100 1291C40G18 O — — JD3100 1–3, 5 KB3125 1291C40G19 O — — JD3125 1–3, 5 KB3150 1291C40G20 O — — JD3150 1–3, 5 KB3175 1291C40G21 O — — JD3175 1–3, 5 KB3200 1291C40G22 O — — JD3200 1–3, 5 KB3225 1291C40G23 O — — JD3225 1–3, 5 KB3250 1291C40G24 O — — JD3250 1–3, 5 KB3250F 2601D44G14 O — — JD3250F — KB3250WK 752B046G08 O — — JD3250KW 1–3, 5, 8 KB3250WSK 752B046G09 O — — JD3250KW 1–3, 5, 8 LA2070 1255C72G02 O — — KD2070 1–3, 5, 8 LA2070S 1255C73G02 O — — KD2070 1–5, 8 LA2090 1255C72G03 O — — KD2090 1–3, 5, 8 LA2090S 1255C73G03 O — — KD2090 1–5, 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 1 25 V12-T3-137 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) LA2100 1255C72G04 O — — KD2100 1–3, 5, 8 LA2100S 1255C73G04 O — — KD2100 1–5, 8 LA2125 1255C72G05 O — — KD2125 1–3, 5, 8 LA2125S 1255C73G05 O — — KD2125 1–5, 8 LA2150 1255C72G06 O — — KD2150 1–3, 5, 8 LA2150S 1255C73G06 O — — KD2150 1–5, 8 1–3, 5, 8 LA2175 1255C72G07 O — — KD2175 LA2175S 1255C73G07 O — — KD2175 1–5, 8 LA2200 1255C72G08 O — — KD2200 1–3, 5, 8 LA2200S 1255C73G08 O — — KD2200 1–5, 8 LA2225 1255C72G09 O — — KD2225 1–3, 5, 8 LA2225S 1255C73G09 O — — KD2225 1–5, 8 8 LA2250 1255C72G10 O — — KD2250 1–3, 5, 8 LA2250S 1255C73G10 O — — KD2250 1–5, 8 9 LA2300 1255C72G11 O — — KD2300 1–3, 5, 8 LA2300S 1255C73G11 O — — KD2300 1–5, 8 10 LA2350 1255C72G12 O — — KD2350 1–3, 5, 8 LA2350S 1255C73G12 O — — KD2350 1–5, 8 11 LA2400 1255C72G13 O — — KD2400 1–3, 5, 8 LA2400F 2602D99G01 O — — KD2400F 1–3, 5, 8 LA2400FS 2602D99G03 O — — KD2400F 1–5, 8 LA2400S 1255C73G13 O — — KD2400 1–5, 8 13 LA2400WK 752B042G01 O — — KD2400KW 1–3, 5, 8 LA2400WSK 752B042G02 O — — KD2400KW 1–3, 5, 8 14 LA2500 2603D50G05 O — — LD2500 1–3, 5, 8 LA2500S 2603D50G17 O — — LD2500 1–5, 8 15 LA2600 2603D50G06 O — — LD2500 1–3, 5, 8 LA2600F 2603D48G01 O — — LD2600F 1–3, 5, 8 LA2600FS 2603D48G03 O — — LD2600F 1–5, 8 16 LA2600S 2600D50G18 O — — LD2600 1–5, 8 LA2600WK 752B043G01 O — — LD2600KW 1–3, 5, 8 17 LA2600WSK 752B043G02 O — — LD2600KW 1–3, 5, 8 LA3070 1255C72G17 O HLA3070 504C740G17 KD3070 1–3, 5, 8 18 LA3070S 504C612G17 O HLA3070 504C740G17 KD3070 1–5, 8 12 19 20 21 LA3090 1255C72G18 O HLA3090 504C740G18 KD3090 1–3, 5, 8 LA3090S 504C612G18 O HLA3090 504C740G18 KD3090 1–5, 8 LA3100 1255C72G19 O HLA3100 504C740G19 KD3100 1–3, 5, 8 LA3100S 504C612G19 O HLA3100 504C740G19 KD3100 1–5, 8 LA3125 1255C72G20 O HLA3125 504C740G20 KD3125 1–3, 5, 8 LA3125S 504C612G20 O HLA3125 504C740G20 KD3125 1–5, 8 LA3150 1255C72G21 O HLA3150 504C740G21 KD3150 1–3, 5, 8 22 LA3150S 504C612G21 O HLA3150 504C740G21 KD3150 1–5, 8 LA3175 1255C72G22 O HLA3175 504C740G22 KD3175 1–3, 5, 8 23 LA3175S 504C612G22 O HLA3175 504C740G22 KD3175 1–5, 8 LA3200 1255C72G23 O HLA3200 504C740G23 KD3200 1–3, 5, 8 24 LA3200S 504C612G23 O HLA3200 504C740G23 KD3200 1–5, 8 LA3225 1255C72G24 O HLA3225 504C740G24 KD3225 1–3, 5, 8 25 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. V12-T3-138 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) LA3225S 504C612G24 O HLA3225 504C740G24 KD3225 1–5, 8 LA3250 1255C72G25 O HLA3250 504C740G25 KD3250 1–3, 5, 8 LA3250S 504C612G25 O HLA3250 504C740G25 KD3250 1–5, 8 LA3300 1255C72G26 O HLA3300 504C740G26 KD3300 1–3, 5, 8 LA3300S 504C612G26 O HLA3300 504C740G26 KD3300 1–5, 8 LA3350 1255C72G27 O HLA3350 504C740G27 KD3350 1–3, 5, 8 LA3350S 504C612G27 O HLA3350 504C740G27 KD3350 1–5, 8 LA3400 1255C72G27 O HLA3400 504C740G28 KD3400 1–3, 5, 8 LA3400F 2602D99G02 O HLA3400F 673B352G02 KD3400F 1–3, 5, 8 LA3400FS 673B352G02 O HLA3400F 673B352G02 KD3400F 1–5, 8 LA3400S 1255C73G28 O HLA3400 504C740G28 KD3400 1–5, 8 LA3400WK 752B042G06 O — — KD3400KW 1–3, 5, 8 LA3400WSK 752B042G07 O — — KD3400KW 1–3, 5, 8 LA3500 376D551G11 O HLA3500 177C429G16 LD3500 1–3, 5, 8 LA3500S 376D551G23 O HLA3500 177C429G16 LD3500 1–5, 8 LA3600 376D551G12 O HLA3600 177C429G17 LD3600 1–3, 5, 8 LA3600F 375D400G02 O HLA3600F 375D400G10 LD3600F 1–3, 5, 8 LA3600FS 375D400G04 O HLA3600F 375D400G10 LD3600F 1–5, 8 LA3600S 376D551G24 O HLA3600 177C429G17 LD3600 1–5, 8 LA3600WK 752B043G06 O — — LD3600KW 1–3, 5, 8 LA3600WSK 752B043G07 O — — LD3600KW 1–3, 5, 8 LAB2125 372D300G05 O — — KDB2125 1–3, 5, 8 LAB21250MW 371D426G03 O — — HM2P400F5W 1–3, 5, 8 LAB21250SMW 371D426G23 O — — HM2P400F5W 1–5, 8 LAB2125A 372D301G45 O — — KDB2125 1–3, 5, 8 LAB2125S 372D300G37 O — — KDB2125 1–5, 8 LAB2125SW 371D333G37 O — — KDB2125W 1–5, 8 LAB2125W 371D333G05 O — — KDB2125W 1–3, 5, 8 LAB2150 372D300G06 O — — KDB2150 1–3, 5, 8 LAB21500MW 371D426G04 O — — HM2P400G5W 1–3, 5, 8 LAB21500SMW 371D426G24 O — — HM2P400G5W 1–5, 8 LAB2150A 372D301G46 O — — KDB2150 1–3, 5, 8 LAB2150S 372D300G38 O — — KDB2150 1–5, 8 LAB2150SW 371D333G38 O — — KDB2150W 1–5, 8 LAB2150W 371D333G06 O — — KDB2150W 1–3, 5, 8 LAB2175 372D300G07 O — — KDB2175 1–3, 5, 8 LAB21750MW 371D426G05 O — — HM2P400J5W 1–3, 5, 8 LAB21750SMW 371D426G25 O — — HM2P400J5W 1–5, 8 LAB2175A 372D301G47 O — — KDB2175 1–3, 5, 8 LAB2175S 372D300G39 O — — KDB2175 1–5, 8 LAB2175SW 371D333G39 O — — KDB2175W 1–5, 8 LAB2175W 371D333G07 O — — KDB2175W 1–3, 5, 8 LAB2200 372D300G08 O — — KDB2200 1–3, 5, 8 LAB2200A 371D301G48 O — — KDB2200 1–3, 5, 8 LAB2200S 372D300G40 O — — KDB2200 1–5, 8 LAB2200SW 371D333G40 O — — KDB2200W 1–5, 8 LAB2200W 371D333G08 O — — KDB2200W 1–3, 5, 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 1 25 V12-T3-139 3 1 2 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) LAB2225 372D300G09 O — — KDB2225 1–3, 5, 8 LAB22250MW 371D426G06 O — — HM2P400L5W 1–3, 5, 8 LAB22250SMW 371D426G26 O — — HM2P400L5W 1–5, 8 LAB2225A 372D301G49 O — — KDB2225 1–3, 5, 8 LAB2225S 372D300G41 O — — KDB2225 1–5, 8 LAB2225SW 371D333G41 O — — KDB2225W 1–5, 8 5 LAB2225W 371D333G09 O — — KDB2225W 1–3, 5, 8 LAB22400A NO STYLE O — — KDB2400 1–3, 5, 8 6 LAB2250 372D300G10 O — — KDB2250 1–3, 5, 8 LAB2250A 372D301G50 O — — KDB2250 1–3, 5, 8 7 LAB2250S 372D300G42 O — — KDB2250 1–5, 8 LAB2250SW 371D333G42 O — — KDB2250W 1–5, 8 8 LAB2250W 371D333G10 O — — KDB2250W 1–3, 5, 8 LAB2300 372D300G11 O — — KDB2300 1–3, 5, 8 9 LAB23000MW 371D426G07 O — — HM2P400N5W 1–3, 5, 8 LAB23000SMW 371D426G27 O — — HM2P400N5W 1–5, 8 LAB2300A 372D301G51 O — — KDB2300 1–3, 5, 8 LAB2300S 372D300G43 O — — KDB2300 1–5, 8 4 10 11 12 13 LAB2300SW 371D333G43 O — — KDB2300W 1–5, 8 LAB2300W 371D333G11 O — — KDB2300W 1–3, 5, 8 LAB2350 372D300G12 O — — KDB2350 1–3, 5, 8 LAB2350A 372D301G52 O — — KDB2350 1–3, 5, 8 LAB2350S 372D300G44 O — — KDB2350 1–5, 8 LAB2350W 371D333G12 O — — KDB2350W 1–3, 5, 8 LAB2400 372D300G13 O — — KDB2400 1–3, 5, 8 LAB24000MW 371D426G08 O — — HM2P400X5W 1–3, 5, 8 LAB24000SMW 371D426G28 O — — HM2P400X5W 1–5, 8 LAB2400S 372D300G45 O — — KDB2400 1–5, 8 LAB2400SW 371D333G45 O — — KDB2400W 1–5, 8 16 LAB2400W 371D333G13 O — — KDB2400W 1–3, 5, 8 LAB2400WK 752B042G03 O — — KDB2400KW 1–3, 5, 8 17 LAB2400WSK 752B042G04 O — — KDB2400KW 1–3, 5, 8 LAB2700MW 371D426G02 O — — HM2P400D5W 1–3, 5, 8 LAB2700SMW 371D426G22 O — — HM2P400D5W 1–3, 5, 8 14 15 18 LAB3125 372D300G20 O HLA3125 504C740G20 KDB3125 1–3, 5, 8 19 LAB31250MW 371D426G13 O HLA31250MW — HMCP400F5W 1–3, 5, 8 LAB31250SMW 371D426G33 O HLA31250MW — HMCP400F5W 1–5, 8 20 LAB3125A 372D301G60 O HLA3125 504C740G20 KDB3125 1–3, 5, 8 LAB3125S 372D300G52 O HLA3125 504C740G20 KDB3125 1–5, 8 21 LAB3125SW 371D333G52 O HLA3125W — KDB3125W 1–5, 8 LAB3125W 371D333G20 O HLA3125W — KDB3125W 1–3, 5, 8 LAB3150 372D300G21 O HLA3150 504C740G21 KDB3150 1–3, 5, 8 LAB31500MW 371D426G14 O HLA31500MW — HMCP400G5W 1–3, 5, 8 LAB31500SMW 371D426G34 O HLA31500MW — HMCP400G5W 1–5, 8 LAB3150A 372D301G61 O HLA3150 504C740G21 KDB3150 1–3, 5, 8 24 LAB3150S 372D300G53 O HLA3150 504C740G21 KDB3150 1–5, 8 LAB3150SW 371D333G53 O HLA3150W — KDB3150W 1–5, 8 25 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. 22 23 V12-T3-140 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) — KDB3150W 1–3, 5, 8 504C740G22 KDB3175 1–3, 5, 8 HLA31750MW — HMCP400J5W 1–3, 5, 8 O HLA31750MW — HMCP400J5W 1–5, 8 372D301G62 O HLA3175 504C740G22 KDB3175 1–3, 5, 8 372D300G54 O HLA3175 504C740G22 KDB3175 1–5, 8 Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number LAB3150W 371D333G21 O HLA3150W LAB3175 372D300G22 O HLA3175 LAB31750MW 371D426G15 O LAB31750SMW 371D426G35 LAB3175A LAB3175S LAB3175SW 371D333G54 O HLA3175W — KDB3175W 1–5, 8 LAB3175W 371D333G22 O HLA3175W — KDB3175W 1–3, 5, 8 LAB3200 372D300G23 O HLA3200 504C740G23 KDB3200 1–3, 5, 8 LAB3200A 372D301G63 O HLA3200 504C740G23 KDB3200 1–3, 5, 8 LAB3200S 372D300G55 O HLA3200 504C740G23 KDB3200 1–5, 8 LAB3200SW 371D333G55 O HLA3200W — KDB3200W 1–5, 8 LAB3200W 371D333G23 O HLA3200W — KDB3200W 1–3, 5, 8 LAB3225 372D300G24 O HLA3225 504C740G24 KDB3225 1–3, 5, 8 LAB32250MW 371D426G16 O HLA32250MW — HMCP400L5W 1–3, 5, 8 LAB32250SMW 371D426G36 O HLA32250MW — HMCP400L5W 1–5, 8 LAB3225A 372D301G64 O HLA3225 504C740G24 KDB3225 1–3, 5, 8 LAB3225S 372D300G56 O HLA3225 504C740G24 KDB3225 1–5, 8 LAB3225SW 371D333G56 O HLA3225W — KDB3225W 1–5, 8 LAB3225W 371D333G24 O HLA3225W — KDB3225W 1–3, 5, 8 LAB3250 372D300G25 O HLA3250 504C740G25 KDB3250 1–3, 5, 8 LAB3250A 372D301G65 O HLA3250 504C740G25 KDB3250 1–3, 5, 8 LAB3250S 372D300G57 O HLA3250 504C740G25 KDB3250 1–5, 8 LAB3250SW 371D333G57 O HLA3250W — KDB3250W 1–5, 8 LAB3250W 371D333G25 O HLA3250W — KDB3250W 1–3, 5, 8 LAB3300 372D300G26 O HLA3300 504C740G26 KDB3300 1–3, 5, 8 LAB33000MW 371D426G17 O HLA33000MW — HMCP400N5W 1–3, 5, 8 LAB33000SMW 371D426G37 O HLA33000MW — HMCP400N5W 1–5, 8 LAB3300A 372D301G66 O HLA3300 504C740G26 KDB3300 1–3, 5, 8 LAB3300S 372D300G58 O HLA3300 504C740G26 KDB3300 1–5, 8 LAB3300SW 371D333G58 O HLA3300W — KDB3300W 1–, 5, 8 LAB3300W 371D333G26 O HLA3300W — KDB3300W 1–3, 5, 8 LAB3350A 372D301G67 O HLA3350 504C740G27 KDB3350 1–3, 5, 8 LAB3350S 372D300G59 O HLA3350 504C740G27 KDB3350 1–5, 8 LAB3350SW 371D333G59 O HLA3350W — KDB3350W 1–5, 8 LAB3400 372D300G28 O HLA3400 504C740G28 KDB3400 1–3, 5, 8 LAB34000MW 371D426G18 O HLA34000MW — HMCP400X5W 1–3, 5, 8 LAB34000SMW 371D426G38 O HLA34000MW — HMCP400X5W 1–5, 8 LAB3400A 372D301G68 O HLA3400 504C740G28 KDB3400 1–3, 5, 8 LAB3400S 372D300G60 O HLA3400 504C740G28 KDB3400 1–5, 8 LAB3400SW 371D333G60 O HLA3400W — KDB3400W 1–5, 8 LAB3400W 371D333G28 O HLA3400W — KDB3400W 1–3, 5, 8 LAB3400WK 752B042G08 O — — KDB3400KW 1–3, 5, 8 LAB3400WSK 752B042G09 O — — KDB3400KW 1–3, 5, 8 LAB3700MW 371D426G12 O HLA3700MW — HMCP400D5W 1–3, 5, 8 LAB3700SMW 371D426G32 O HLA3700MW — HMCP400D5W 1–5, 8 LAY3250 NO STYLE O — — HKD3250 — 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 1 25 V12-T3-141 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) LAY3300 NO STYLE O — — HLD3300 — LAY3350 NO STYLE O — — HLD3350 — LAY3400 NO STYLE O — — HLD3400 — LAY3500 NO STYLE O — — HLD3500 — LAY3600 NO STYLE O — — HLD3600 — — LAY3600F 1240C53G01 O — — HLD3600F LB2070 179C800G01 O — — KD2070 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LB2070S 179C803G01 O — — KD2070 1–5, 8, 9 LB2090 179C800G02 O — — KD2090 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LB2090S 179C803G02 O — — KD2090 1–5, 8, 9 LB2100 179C800G03 O — — KD2100 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LB2100S 179C803G03 O — — KD2100 1–5, 8, 9 8 LB2125 179C800G04 O — — KD2125 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LB2125S 179C803G04 O — — KD2125 1–5, 8, 9 9 LB2150 179C800G05 O — — KD2150 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LB2150S 179C803G05 O — — KD2150 1–5, 8, 9 10 LB2175 179C800G06 O — — KD2175 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LB2175S 179C803G06 O — — KD2175 1–5, 8, 9 11 LB2200 179C800G07 O — — KD2200 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LB2200S 179C803G07 O — — KD2200 1–5, 8, 9 12 LB2225 179C800G08 O — — KD2225 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LB2225S 179C803G08 O — — KD2225 1–5, 8, 9 13 LB2250 179C800G09 O — — KD2250 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LB2250S 179C803G09 O — — KD2250 1–5, 8, 9 14 LB2300 179C800G10 O — — KD2300 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LB2300S 179C803G10 O — — KD2300 1–5, 8, 9 15 LB2350 179C800G11 O — — KD2350 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LB2400 179C800G12 O — — KD2400 1–3, 5, 8, 9 16 17 18 LB2400F 5680D03G07 O — — KD2400F 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LB2400FS 5680D03G11 O — — KD2400F 1–5, 8, 9 1–5, 8, 9 LB2400S 179C803G12 O — — KD2400 LB2400WK 752B048G02 O — — KD2400KW 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LB2400WSK 752B048G04 O — — KD2400KW 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LB3070 179C800G16 O — — KD3070 1–3, 5, 8, 9 1–5, 8, 9 LB3070S 179C803G16 O — — KD3070 19 LB3090 179C800G17 O — — KD3090 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LB3090S 179C803G17 O — — KD3090 1–5, 8, 9 20 LB3100 179C800G18 O — — KD3100 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LB3100S 179C803G18 O — — KD3100 1–5, 8, 9 21 LB3125 179C800G19 O — — KD3125 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LB3125S 179C803G19 O — — KD3125 1–5, 8, 9 LB3150 179C800G20 O — — KD3150 1–3, 5, 8, 9 1–5, 8, 9 22 LB3150S 179C803G20 O — — KD3150 23 LB3175 179C800G21 O — — KD3175 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LB3175S 179C803G21 O — — KD3175 1–5, 8, 9 24 LB3200 179C800G22 O — — KD3200 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LB3200S 179C803G22 O — — KD3200 1–5, 8, 9 25 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. V12-T3-142 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) LB3225 179C800G23 O — — KD3225 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LB3225S 179C803G23 O — — KD3225 1–5, 8, 9 LB3250 179C800G24 O — — KD3250 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LB3250S 179C803G24 O — — KD3250 1–5, 8, 9 LB3300 179C800G25 O — — KD3300 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LB3300S 179C803G25 O — — KD3300 1–5, 8, 9 LB3350 179C800G26 O — — KD3350 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LB3400 179C800G27 O — — KD3400 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LB3400F 5680D03G08 O — — KD3400F 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LB3400FS 5680D03G12 O — — KD3400F 1–5, 8, 9 LB3400S 179C803G27 O — — KD3400 1–5, 8, 9 LB3400WK 752B048G07 O — — KD3400KW 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LB3400WSK 752B048G09 O — — KD3400KW 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB2125 179C806G04 O — — KDB2125 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB21250MW 179C811G02 O — — HM2P400F5W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB21250SMW 179C832G02 O — — HM2P400F5W 1–5, 8.9 LBB2125A 179C807G04 O — — KDB2125 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB2125S 179C827G04 O — — KDB2125 1–5, 8, 9 LBB2125SA 179C828G04 O — — KDB2125 1–5, 8, 9 LBB2125SW 179C830G04 O — — KDB2125W 1–5, 8, 9 LBB2125W 179C809G04 O — — KDB2125W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB2150 179C806G05 O — — KDB2150 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB21500MW 179C811G03 O — — HM2P400G5W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB21500SMW 179C832G03 O — — HM2P400G5W 1–5, 8, 9 LBB2150A 179C807G05 O — — KDB2150 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB2150S 179C827G05 O — — KDB2150 1–5, 8, 9 LBB2150SA 179C828G05 O — — KDB2150 1–5, 8, 9 LBB2150SW 179C830G05 O — — KDB2150W 1–5, 8, 9 LBB2150W 179C809G05 O — — KDB2150W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB2175 179C806G06 O — — KDB2175 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB21750MW 179C811G04 O — — HM2P400J5W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB21750SMW 179C832G04 O — — HM2P400J5W 1–5, 8, 9 LBB2175A 179C807G06 O — — KDB2175 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB2175S 179C827G06 O — — KDB2175 1–5, 8, 9 LBB2175SA 179C828G06 O — — KDB2175 1–5, 8, 9 LBB2175SW 179C830G06 O — — KDB2175W 1–5, 8, 9 LBB2175W 179C809G06 O — — KDB2175W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB2200 179C806G07 O — — KDB2200 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB2200A 179C807G07 O — — KDB2200 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB2200S 179C827G07 O — — KDB2200 1–5, 8, 9 LBB2200SA 179C828G07 O — — KDB2200 1–5, 8, 9 LBB2200SW 179C830G07 O — — KDB2200W 1–5, 8, 9 LBB2200W 179C809G07 O — — KDB2200W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB2225 179C806G08 O — — KDB2225 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB22250MW 179C811G05 O — — HM2P400L5W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB22250SMW 179C832G05 O — — HM2P400L5W 1–5, 8, 9 LBB2225A 179C807G08 O — — KDB2225 1–3, 5, 8, 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 1 25 V12-T3-143 3 1 2 3 4 5 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) LBB2225S 179C827G08 O — — KDB2225 1–5, 8, 9 LBB2225SA 179C828G08 O — — KDB2225 1–5, 8, 9 LBB2225SW 179C830G08 O — — KDB2225W 1–5, 8, 9 LBB2225S 179C827G08 O — — KDB2225 1–5, 8, 9 Catalog Number LBB2225SA 179C828G08 O — — KDB2225 1–5, 8, 9 LBB2225SW 179C830G08 O — — KDB2225W 1–5, 8, 9 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB2225W 179C809G08 O — — KDB2225W LBB2250 179C806G09 O — — KDB2250 1–3, 5, 8, 9 6 LBB2250A 179C807G09 O — — KDB2250 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB2250S 179C827G09 O — — KDB2250 1–5, 8, 9 7 LBB2250SA 179C828G09 O — — KDB2250 1–5, 8, 9 LBB2250SW 179C830G09 O — — KDB2250W 1–5, 8, 9 1–3, 5, 8, 9 8 9 LBB2250W 179C809G09 O — — KDB2250W LBB2300 179C806G10 O — — KDB2300 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB23000MW 179C811G06 O — — HM2P400N5W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB23000SMW 179C832G06 O — — HM2P400N5W 1–5, 8, 9 10 LBB2300A 179C807G10 O — — KDB2300 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB2300S 179C827G10 O — — KDB2300 1–5, 8, 9 11 LBB2300SA 179C828G10 O — — KDB2300 1–5, 8, 9 LBB2300SW 179C830G10 O — — KDB2300W 1–5, 8, 9 1–3, 5, 8, 9 12 13 14 15 LBB2300W 179C809G10 O — — KDB2300W LBB2350 179C806G11 O — — KDB2350 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB2350A 179C807G11 O — — KDB2350 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB2350SA 179C828G11 O — — KDB2350 1–5, 8, 9 LBB2350SW 179C830G11 O — — KDB2350W 1–5, 8, 9 LBB2350W 179C809G11 O — — KDB2350W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB2400 179C806G12 O — — KDB2400 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB24000MW 179C811G07 O — — HM2P400X5W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB24000SMW 179C832G07 O — — HM2P400X5W 1–5, 8, 9 16 LBB2400A 179C807G12 O — — KDB2400 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB2400S 179C827G12 O — — KDB2400 1–5, 8, 9 17 LBB2400SA 179C828G12 O — — KDB2400 1–5, 8, 9 LBB2400SW 179C830G12 O — — KDB2400W 1–5, 8, 9 18 LBB2400W 179C809G12 O — — KDB2400W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB2400WK 752B048G01 O — — KDB2400KW 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB2400WSK 752B048G03 O — — KDB2400KW 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB2700MW 179C811G01 O — — HM2P400D5W 1–3, 5, 7–9 LBB2700SMW 179C832G01 O — — HM2P400D5W 1–5, 7–9 LBB3125 179C806G19 O — — KDB3125 1–3, 5, 8, 9 21 LBB31250MW 179C811G17 O — — HMCP400F5W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB31250SMW 179C832G17 O — — HMCP400F5W 1–5, 8, 9 22 LBB3125A 179C807G19 O — — KDB3125 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB3125S 179C827G19 O — — KDB3125 1–5, 8, 9 23 LBB3125SA 179C828G19 O — — KDB3125 1–5, 8, 9 LBB3125SW 179C830G19 O — — KDB3125W 1–5, 8, 9 19 20 24 LBB3125W 179C809G19 O — — KDB3125W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB3150 179C806G20 O — — KDB3150 1–3, 5, 8, 9 25 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. V12-T3-144 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) LBB31500MW 179C811G18 O — — HMCP400G5W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB31500SMW 179C832G18 O — — HMCP400G5W 1–5, 8, 9 LBB3150A 179C807G20 O — — KDB3150 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB3150S 179C827G20 O — — KDB3150 1–5, 8, 9 LBB3150SA 179C828G20 O — — KDB3150 1–5, 8, 9 LBB3150SW 179C830G20 O — — KDB3150W 1–5, 8, 9 LBB3150W 179C809G20 O — — KDB3150W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB3175 179C806G21 O — — KDB3175 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB31750MW 179C811G19 O — — HMCP400J5W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB31750SMW 179C832G19 O — — HMCP400J5W 1–5, 8, 9 LBB3175A 179C807G21 O — — KDB3175 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB3175S 179C827G21 O — — KDB3175 1–5, 8, 9 LBB3175SA 179C828G21 O — — KDB3175 1–5, 8, 9 LBB3175SW 179C830G21 O — — KDB3175W 1–5, 8, 9 LBB3175W 179C809G21 O — — KDB3175W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB3200 179C806G22 O — — KDB3200 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB3200A 179C807G22 O — — KDB3200 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB3200S 179C827G22 O — — KDB3200 1–5, 8, 9 LBB3200SA 179C828G22 O — — KDB3200 1–5, 8, 9 LBB3200SW 179C830G22 O — — KDB3200W 1–5, 8, 9 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB3200W 179C809G22 O — — KDB3200W LBB3225 179C806G23 O — — KDB3225 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB32250MW 179C811G20 O — — HMCP400L5W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB32250SMW 179C832G20 O — — HMCP400L5W 1–5, 8, 9 LBB3225S 179C827G23 O — — KDB3225 1–5, 8, 9 LBB3225SA 179C828G23 O — — KDB3225 1–5, 8, 9 LBB3225SW 179C830G23 O — — KDB3225W 1–5, 8, 9 LBB3225W 179C809G23 O — — KDB3225W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB3250 179C806G24 O — — KDB3250 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB3250A 179C807G24 O — — KDB3250 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB3250S 179C827G24 O — — KDB3250 1–5, 8, 9 LBB3250SA 179C828G24 O — — KDB3250 1–5, 8, 9 LBB3250SW 179C830G24 O — — KDB3250W 1–5, 8, 9 LBB3250W 179C809G24 O — — KDB3250W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB3300 179C806G25 O — — KDB3300 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB33000MW 179C811G21 O — — HMCP400N5W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB33000SMW 179C832G21 O — — HMCP400N5W 1–5, 8, 9 LBB3300A 179C807G25 O — — KDB3300 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB3300S 179C827G25 O — — KDB3300 1–5, 8, 9 LBB3300SA 179C828G25 O — — KDB3300 1–5, 8, 9 LBB3300SW 179C830G25 O — — KDB3300W 1–5, 8, 9 LBB3300W 179C809G25 O — — KDB3300W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB3350 179C806G26 O — — KDB3350 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB3350A 179C807G26 O — — KDB3350 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB3350SA 179C828G26 O — — KDB3350 1–5, 8, 9 LBB3350W 179C809G26 O — — KDB3350W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB3400 179C806G27 O — — KDB3400 1–3, 5, 8, 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 1 25 V12-T3-145 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) LBB34000MW 179C811G22 O — — HMCP400X5W 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB34000SMW 179C832G22 O — — HMCP400X5W 1–5, 8, 9 LBB3400A 179C807G27 O — — KDB3400 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB3400S 179C827G27 O — — KDB3400 1–5, 8, 9 LBB3400SA 179C828G27 O — — KDB3400 1–5, 8, 9 LBB3400SW 179C830G27 O — — KDB3400W 1–5, 8, 9 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB3400W 179C809G27 O — — KDB3400W LBB3400WK 752B048G06 O — — KDB3400KW 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB3400WSK 752B048G08 O — — KDB3400KW 1–3, 5, 8, 9 LBB3700MW 179C811G16 O — — HMCP400D5W 1–3, 5, 7–9 1–5, 7–9 LBB3700SMW 179C832G16 O — — HMCP400D5W LC2150F 1242C91G01 O — — KD3400F/KES3150LS 1–3, 5, 8 LC2150FM 1242C91G03 O — — KD3400F/KES3150LS 1–3, 5, 8 LC2300F 1242C91G05 O — — KD3400F/KES3400LS 1–3, 5, 8 LC2300FM 1242C91G07 O — — KD3400F/KES3400LS 1–3, 5, 8 LC2400F 1242C91G09 O — — KD3400F/KES3400LS 1–3, 5, 8 10 LC2400FM 1242C91G11 O — — KD3400F/KES3400LS 1–3, 5, 8 LC2600F 1242C91G13 O — — LD3600F/LES3600LS 1–3, 5, 8 11 LC2600FM 1242C91G15 O — — LD3600F/LES3600LS 1–3, 5, 8 LC2600WK 752B043G03 O — — LD2600WK 1–3, 5, 8 12 LC3150F 1242C91G02 O HLC3150F 1284C66G02 KD3400F/KES3150LS 1–3, 5, 8 LC3150FM 1242C91G04 O HLC3150F 1284C66G02 KD3400F/KES3150LS 1–3, 5, 8 13 LC3300F 1242C91G06 O HLC3300F 2612D41G46 KD3400F/KES3400LS 1–3, 5, 8 LC3300FM 1242C91G08 O HLC3300F 2612D41G46 KD3400F/KES3400LS 1–3, 5, 8 14 LC3400F 1242C91G10 O HLC3400F 2613D44G08 KD3400F/KES3400LS 1–3, 5, 8 LC3400FM 1242C91G12 O HLC3400F 2613D44G08 KD3400F/KES3400LS 1–3, 5, 8 15 LC3600F 1242C91G14 O HLC3600F 2612D41G48 LD3600F/LES3600LS 1–3, 5, 8 LC3600FM 1242C91G16 O HLC3600F 2612D41G48 LD3600F/LES3600LS 1–3, 5, 8 LC3600WK 752B043G08 O — — LD3600WK 1–3, 5, 8 16 LCA2150F 1242C91G23 O — — KD3400F/KES3150LSI 1–3, 5, 8 LCA2150FM 1242C91G25 O — — KD3400F/KES3150LSI 1–3, 5, 8 LCA2300F 1242C91G27 O — — KD3400F/KES3400LSI 1–3, 5, 8 17 18 LCA2300FM 1242C91G29 O — — KD3400F/KES3400LSI 1–3, 5, 8 LCA2400F 1242C91G31 O — — KD3400F/KES3400LSI 1–3, 5, 8 LCA2400FM 1242C91G33 O — — KD3400F/KES3400LSI 1–3, 5, 8 19 LCA2600F 1242C91G35 O — — LD3600F/LES3600LSI 1–3, 5, 8 LCA2600FM 1242C91G37 O — — LD3600F/LES3600LSI 1–3, 5, 8 20 LCA3150F 1242C91G24 O HLCA3150F 1242C92G24 KD3400F/KES3150LSI 1–3, 5, 8 21 LCA3150FM 1242C91G26 O HLCA3150F 1242C92G24 KD3400F/KES3150LSI 1–3, 5, 8 LCA3300F 1242C91G28 O HLCA3300F 1242C92G28 KD3400F/KES3400LSI 1–3, 5, 8 LCA3300FM 1242C91G30 O HLCA3300F 1242C92G28 KD3400F/KES3400LSI 1–3, 5, 8 LCA3400F 1242C91G32 O HLCA3400F 1242C92G32 KD3400F/KES3400LSI 1–3, 5, 8 LCA3400FM 1242C91G34 O HLCA3400F 1242C92G34 KD3400F/KES3400LSI 1–3, 5, 8 23 LCA3600F 1242C91G36 O HLCA3600F 1284C66G36 LD3600F/LES3600LSI 1–3, 5, 8 LCA3600FM 1242C91G38 O HLCA3600F 1284C66G36 LD3600F/LES3600LSI 1–3, 5, 8 24 LCC2600WK NO STYLE O — — — 1–3, 5, 8 LCC3600F 6590C10G14 O HLCC3600F 6590C11G14 CLD3600F/LES3600LS 1–3, 5, 8 25 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. 22 V12-T3-146 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number LCC3600WK NO STYLE O — — — 1–3, 5, 8 LCCA3600F 6590C10G36 O HLCCA3600F 6590C11G36 CLD3600F/LES3600LSI 1–3, 5, 8 LCCG3600F 1242C93G04 O HLCCG3600F 1242C94G04 CLD3600F/LES3600LSG 1–3, 5, 8 LCCGA3600F 1242C93G12 O HLCCGA3600F 1242C94G12 CLD3600F/LES3600LSIG 1–3, 5, 8 LCG3150F 1242C88G01 O HLCG3150F 1242C89G01 KD3400F/KES3150LSG 1–3, 5, 8 LCG3300F 1242C88G02 O HLCG3300F 1242C89G02 KD3400F/KES3400LS 1–3, 5, 8 Catalog Number LCG3400F 1242C88G03 O HLCG3400F 1242C89G03 KD3400F/KES3400LSG 1–3, 5, 8 LCG3600F 1242C88G04 O HLCG3600F 1371D17G40 LD3600F/LES3600LSG 1–3, 5, 8 LCGA3150F 1242C88G09 O HLCGA3150F 1242C89G09 KD3400F/KES3150LSIG 1–3, 5, 8 LCGA3300F 1242C88G10 O HLCGA3300F 1242C89G10 KD3400F/KES3400LSIG 1–3, 5, 8 LCGA3400F 1242C88G11 O HLCGA3400F 1242C89G11 KD3400F/KES3400LSIG 1–3, 5, 8 LCGA3600F 1242C88G12 O HLCGA3600F 1270C61G12 LD3600F/LES3600LSIG 1–3, 5, 8 LCY3600F 6590C12G04 O — — HLD3600F/LES3600LS 1–3, 5, 8 LCYA3600F 6590C12G08 O — — HLD3600F/LES3600LSI 1–3, 5, 8 LCYG3600F 1242C95G04 O — — HLD3600F/LES3600LSG 1–3, 5, 8 LCYGA3600F 1242C95G08 O — — HLD3600F/LES3600LSIG 1–3, 5, 8 MA2125 1252C17G01 O — — KD2125 1–3, 5, 8 MA2125S 1252C21G01 O — — KD2125 1–5, 8 MA2150 1252C17G02 O — — KD2150 1–3, 5, 8 MA2150S 1252C21G02 O — — KD2150 1–5, 8 MA2175 1252C17G03 O — — KD2175 1–3, 5, 8 MA2175S 1252C21G03 O — — KD2175 1–5, 8 MA2200 1252C17G04 O — — KD2200 1–3, 5, 8 MA2200S 1252C21G04 O — — KD2200 1–5, 8 MA2225 1252C17G05 O — — KD2225 1–3, 5, 8 MA2225S 1252C21G05 O — — KD2225 1–5, 8 MA2250 1252C17G06 O — — KD2250 1–3, 5, 8 MA2250S 1252C21G06 O — — KD2250 1–5, 8 MA2300 1252C17G07 O — — MDL2300 1–3, 5, 8 MA2300S 1252C21G07 O — — MDL2300 1–5, 8 MA2350 1252C17G08 O — — MDL2350 1–3, 5, 8 MA2350S 1252C21G08 O — — MDL2350 1–5, 8 MA2400 1252C17G09 O — — MDL2400 1–3, 5, 8 MA2400S 1252C21G09 O — — MDL2400 1–5, 8 MA2500 1252C17G10 O — — MDL2500 1–3, 5, 8 MA2500S 1252C21G10 O — — MDL2500 1–5, 8 MA2600 1252C17G11 O — — MDL2600 1–3, 5, 8 MA2600S 1252C21G11 O — — MDL2600 1–5, 8 MA2700 1252C17G14 O — — MDL2700 1–3, 5, 8 MA2700S 1252C21G14 O — — MDL2700 1–5, 8 MA2800 1252C17G15 O — — MDL2800 1–3, 5, 8 MA2800F 2600D43G01 O — — MDL2800F 1–3, 5, 8 MA2800FS 2600D43G03 O — — MDL2800F 1–5, 8 MA2800S 1252C21G15 O — — MDL2800 1–5, 8 MA2800WK 752B071G01 O — — MDL2800WK 1–3, 5, 8 MA2800WSK 752B071G02 O — — MDL2800WK 1–3, 5, 8 MA3125 1252C17G16 O HMA3125 504C741G16 KD3125 1–3, 5, 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 1 25 V12-T3-147 3 1 2 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) MA3125S 1252C21G16 O HMA3125 504C741G16 KD3125 1–5, 8 MA3150 1252C17G17 O HMA3150 504C741G17 KD3150 1–3, 5, 8 MA3150S 1252C21G17 O HMA3150 504C741G17 KD3150 1–5, 8 MA3175 1252C17G18 O HMA3175 504C741G18 KD3175 1–3, 5, 8 MA3175S 1252C21G18 O HMA3175 504C741G18 KD3175 1–5, 8 MA3200 1252C17G19 O HMA3200 504C741G19 KD3200 1–3, 5, 8 5 MA3200S 1252C21G19 O HMA3200 504C741G19 KD3200 1–5, 8 MA3225 1252C17G20 O HMA3225 504C741G20 KD3225 1–3, 5, 8 6 MA3225S 1252C21G20 O HMA3225 504C741G20 KD3225 1–5, 8 MA3250 1252C17G21 O HMA3250 504C741G21 KD3250 1–3, 5, 8 7 MA3250S 1252C21G21 O HMA3250 504C741G21 KD3250 1–5, 8 MA3300 1252C17G22 O HMA3300 504C741G22 MDL3300 1–3, 5, 8 8 MA3300S 1252C21G22 O HMA3300 504C741G22 MDL3300 1–5, 8 MA3350 1252C17G23 O HMA3350 504C741G23 MDL3350 1–3, 5, 8 9 MA3350S 1252C21G23 O HMA3350 504C741G23 MDL3350 1–5, 8 MA3400 1252C17G24 O HMA3400 504C741G24 MDL3400 1–3, 5, 8 10 MA3400S 1252C21G24 O HMA3400 504C741G24 MDL3400 1–5, 8 MA3500 1252C17G25 O HMA3500 504C741G25 MDL3500 1–3, 5, 8 11 MA3500S 1252C21G25 O HMA3500 504C741G25 MDL3500 1–5, 8 MA3600 1252C17G26 O HMA3600 504C741G26 MDL3600 1–3, 5, 8 12 MA3600S 1252C21G26 O HMA3600 504C741G26 MDL3600 1–5, 8 MA3700 1252C17G27 O HMA3700 504C741G27 MDL3700 1–3, 5, 8 MA3700S 1252C21G27 O HMA3700 504C741G27 MDL3700 1–5, 8 MA3800 1252C17G28 O HMA3800 504C741G28 MDL3800 1–3, 5, 8 MA3800F 2600D43G02 O HMA3800F 373B237G04 MDL3800F — MA3800FS 2600D43G04 O HMA3800F 373B237G04 MDL3800F 1–5, 8 MA3800S 1252C21G28 O HMA3800 504C741G28 MDL3800 1–5, 8 MA3800WK 752B071G06 O — — MDL3800WK 1–3, 5, 8 4 13 14 15 MA3800WSK 752B071G07 O — — MDL3800WK 1–3, 5, 8 16 MAY3600 NO STYLE O — — HMDL3600 — MAY3700 NO STYLE O — — HMDL3700 — 17 MAY3800 NO STYLE O — — HMDL3800 — MAY3800F 1240C54G01 O — — HMDL3800F — 18 MC2800F 6590C16G01 O — — MDL3800F/MES3800LS 1–3, 5, 8 MC2800FM 6590C16G03 O — — MDL3800F/MES3800LS 1–3, 5, 8 19 MC2800WK 752B071G03 O — — MDL2800WK 1–3, 5, 8 MC3800F 6590C16G02 O HMC3800F 6590C16G06 MDL3800F/MES3800LS 1–3, 5, 8 20 MC3800FM 6590C16G04 O HMC3800F 6590C16G06 MDL3800F/MES3800LS 1–3, 5, 8 MC3800WK 752B071G08 O — — MDL3800WK 1–3, 5, 8 21 MCA2800F 6590C16G13 O — — MDL3800F/MES3800LSI 1–3, 5, 8 MCA3800F 6590C16G14 O HMCA3800F 6590C16G18 MDL3800F/MES3800LSI 1–3, 5, 8 22 MCC2800WK NO STYLE O — — — 1–3, 5, 8 MCC3800F 6590C14G02 O HMCC3800F 6590C14G06 CMDL3800F/MES3800LS 1–3, 5, 8 MCC3800WK NO STYLE O — — — 1–3, 5, 8 MCCA3800F 6590C14G14 O HMCCA3800F 6590C14G18 CMDL3800F/MES3800LSI 1–3, 5, 8 24 MCCG3800F 1242C62G01 O HMCCG3800F 1242C62G09 CMDL3800F/MES3800LSG 1–3, 5, 8 MCCGA3800F 1242C62G03 O HMCCGA3800F 1242C62G11 CMDL3800F/MES3800LSIG 1–3, 5, 8 25 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. 23 V12-T3-148 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number MCG3800F 1242C60G01 O HMCG3800F 2612D86G08 MDL3800F/MES3800LSG 1–3, 5, 8 MCGA3800F 1270C62G03 O HMCGA3800F 1242C60G11 MDL3800F/MES3800LSIG 1–3, 5, 8 MCP03150CR 2610D55G04 A — — HMCP015E0C 1–3, 5, 7, 8 MCP03150R 2610D54G24 A — — HMCP015E0 1–3, 5, 7, 8 Series C Catalog Number MCP0322CR 2610D55G02 A — — HMCP003A0C 1–3, 5, 7, 8 MCP0322R 2610D54G22 A — — HMCP003A0 1–3, 5, 7, 8 MCP0358CR 2610D55G03 A — — HMCP007C0C 1–3, 5, 7, 8 MCP0358R 2610D54G23 A — — HMCP007C0 1–3, 5, 7, 8 MCP13300CR 2610D55G05 A — — HMCP030H1C 1–3, 5, 7, 8 MCP13300R 2610D54G25 A — — HMCP030H1 1–3, 5, 7, 8 MCP23480CR 2610D55G06 A — — HMCP050K2C 1–3, 5, 7, 8 MCP23480R 2610D54G26 A — — HMCP050K2 1–3, 5, 7, 8 MCP331000CR 2610D55G07 A — — HMCP100R3C 1–3, 5, 7, 8 MCP331000R 2610D54G27 A — — HMCP100R3 1–3, 5, 7, 8 MCP431550CR 2610D55G09 A — — HMCP150T4C 1–3, 5, 7, 8 MCP431550R 2610D54G28 A — — HMCP150T4 1–3, 5, 7, 8 MCP431800CR 2610D55G08 A — — HMCP150U4C 1–3, 5, 7, 8 MCP431800R 2610D54G30 A — — HMCP150U4 1–3, 5, 7, 8 MCP532500 752B418G21 O — — HMCP250W5 1–3, 5, 7, 8 MCP532500C 752B418G11 O — — HMCP250W5C 1–3, 5, 7, 8 MCP534000 673B019G15 O HLB34000M 179C850G22 HMCP400X5 1–3, 5, 7, 8 MCP534000C 673B019G21 O HLB34000M 179C850G22 HMCP400X5C 1–3, 5, 7, 8 NB21000 1234C24G15 O — — ND212T33W/12NES1000T+ 1–3, 5, 8 NB21000S 1234C25G16 O — — ND212T33W/12NES1000T+ 1–5, 8 NB21200 1234C24G17 O — — ND212T33W/12NES1200T+ 1–3, 5, 8 NB21200F 2610D64G01 O — — ND212T33W — NB21200FS 4997D20G03 O — — ND212T33W/12NES1200T+ 1–5, 8 NB21200S 1234C25G18 O — — ND212T33W/12NES1200T+ 1–5, 8 NB21200WK 752B682G01 O — — ND312WK 1–3, 5, 8 NB21200WSK 752B682G02 O — — ND312WK 1–3, 5, 8 NB2700 1234C24G12 O — — ND2800T33W/8NES700T+ 1–3, 5, 8 NB2700S 1234C25G13 O — — ND2800T33W/8NES700T+ 1–5, 8 NB2800 1234C24G13 O — — ND2800T33W/8NES800T+ 1–3, 5, 8 NB2800S 1234C25G14 O — — ND2800T33W/8NES800T+ 1–5, 8 NB2900 1234C25G14 O — — ND212T33W/12NES900T+ 1–3, 5, 8 NB2900S 1234C25G15 O — — ND212T33W/12NES900T+ 1–5, 8 NB31000 1234C24G33 O HNB31000 177C099G33 ND312T33W/12NES1000T+ 1–3, 5, 8 NB31000S 1234C25G33 O HNB31000 177C099G33 ND312T33W/12NES1000T+ 1–5, 8 NB31200 1234C24G35 O HNB31200 177C099G35 ND312T33W/12NES1200T+ 1–3, 5, 8 NB31200F 2610D64G02 O HNB31200F 625B494G08 ND312T33W — NB31200FS 2610D64G04 O HNB31200F 625B494G08 ND312T33W 1–5, 8 NB31200S 1234C25G35 O HNB31200 177C099G35 ND312T33W/12NES1200T+ 1–5, 8 NB31200WK 752B682G06 O — — ND312WK 1–3, 5, 8 NB31200WSK 752B682G07 O — — ND312WK 1–3, 5, 8 NB3700 1234C24G30 O HNB3700 177C099G30 ND3800T33W/8NES700T+ 1–3, 5, 8 NB3700S 1234C25G30 O HNB3700 177C099G30 ND3800T33W/8NES700T+ 1–5, 8 NB3800 1234C24G31 O HNB3800 177C099G31 ND3800T33W/8NES800T+ 1–3, 5, 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 1 25 V12-T3-149 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) NB3800S 1234C25G31 O HNB3800 177C099G31 ND3800T33W/8NES800T+ 1–5, 8 NB3900 1234C24G32 O HNB3900 177C099G32 ND312T33W/12NES900T+ 1–3, 5, 8 NB3900S 1234C25G32 O HNB3900 177C099G32 ND312T33W/12NES900T+ 1–5, 8 NBY31000 NO STYLE O — — HND312T33W/12NES1000T+ — — NBY31200F 1240C62G01 O — — HND312T33W/12NES1200T+ NBY3700 NO STYLE O — — HND3800T33W/8NES700T+ — NBY3800 NO STYLE O — — HND3800T33W/8NES800T+ — NBY3900 NO STYLE O — — HND312T33W/12NES900T+ — NC21200F 2613D29G10 O — — ND212T33W 1–3, 5, 8 NC21200FM 2613D29G12 O — — ND212T33W 1–3, 5, 8 NC21200WK 752B682G03 O — — ND312WK 1–3, 5, 8 NC31200F 2613D29G09 O HNC31200F 2613D29G05 ND312T33W 1–3, 5, 8 8 NC31200FM 2613D29G11 O HNC31200F 2613D29G05 ND312T33W 1–3, 5, 8 NC31200WK 752B682G08 O — — ND312WK 1–3, 5, 8 9 NCA21200F 2613D29G22 O OMIT OMIT ND312T32W 1–3, 5, 8 NCA31200F 2613D29G21 O HNCA31200F 2613D29G17 ND312T32W 1–3, 5, 8 NCG31200F 1242C72G18 O HNCG31200F 2612D87G07 ND312T35W 1–3, 5, 8 NCGA31200F 1242C72G11 O HNCGA31200F 1373D87G12 ND312T36W 1–3, 5, 8 11 PB21000 177C181G29 O — — RD316T33W/16RES10T+ 1–3, 5, 8 PB210000TM 373D488G04 O — — — 2, 8 12 PB21200 177C181G30 O — — RD316T33W/16RES12T+ 1–3, 5, 8 PB212000TM 373D488G06 O — — — 2, 8 PB21400 177C181G31 O — — RD316T33W/16RES14T 1–3, 5, 8 PB21600 177C181G32 O — — RD316T33W/16RES16T 1–3, 5, 8 PB21800 177C181G33 O — — — — PB22000 177C181G34 O — — RD320T33W/20RES20T 1–3, 5, 8 10 13 14 15 PB22000WK 752B076G01 O — — RD320WK 1–3, 5, 8 PB22500F 654D456G05 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PB22500WK 752B076G02 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8 16 PB25000TM 373D487G02 O — — — 2, 8 PB2600 177C181G25 O — — RD316T33W/16RES08T 1–3, 5, 8 17 PB26000TM 373D487G04 O — — — 2, 8 PB2700 177C181G26 O — — RD316T33W/16RES08T 1–3, 5, 8 18 PB27000TM 373D487G06 O — — — 2, 8 PB2800 177C181G27 O — — RD316T33W/16RES08T 1–3, 5, 8 19 PB28000TM 373D488G02 O — — — 2, 8 PB2900 177C181G28 O — — — — 20 PB31000 177C181G41 A — — RD316T33W/16RES10T+ 1–3, 5, 8 PB31200 177C181G42 A — — RD316T33W/16RES12T+ 1–3, 5, 8 21 PB31400 177C181G43 A — — RD316T33W/16RES14T+ 1–3, 5, 8 PB31600 177C181G44 A — — RD316T33W/16RES16T+ 1–3, 5, 8 22 PB31800 177C181G45 A — — — — PB32000 177C181G46 A — — RD320T33W/20RES20T+ 1–3, 5, 8 23 PB32000WK 752B076G12 A — — RD320WK 1–3, 5, 8 PB32500F 654D456G06 A — — RD325T33W 1–3, 5, 8 24 PB32500WK 752B076G13 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PB3600 177C181G37 A — — — — 25 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. V12-T3-150 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number PB3700 177C181G38 A — — — — PB3800 177C181G39 A — — RD316T33W+/16RES08T 1–3, 5, 8 PB3900 177C181G40 A — — — — PBF21000 177C771G05 O — — RD316T33W/16RES10T+ 1–3, 5, 8 PBF210000TM 506C131G32 O — — — 2, 8 PBF21200 177C771G06 O — — RD316T33W/16RES12T+ 1–3, 5, 8 PBF212000TM 506C131G33 O — — — 2, 8 PBF21400 177C771G07 O — — RD316T33W/16RES14T 1–3, 5, 8 PBF21600 177C771G08 O — — RD316T33W/16RES16T 1–3, 5, 8 PBF21800 177C771G09 O — — — — PBF22000 177C771G10 O — — RE320T33W/20RES20T 1–3, 5, 8 PBF22000F 5663D38G03 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PBF22000K PBF22000K O — — RD320WK 1–3, 5, 8 PBF25000TM 506C131G28 O — — — 2, 8 PBF2600 177C771G01 O — — — — PBF26000TM 506C131G29 O — — — 2, 8 PBF2700 177C771G02 O — — — — PBF27000TM 506C131G30 O — — — 2, 8 PBF2800 177C771G03 O — — RD316T33W/16RES08T 1–3, 5, 8 PBF28000TM 506C131G31 O — — — 2, 8 PBF2900 177C771G04 O — — — — PBF31000 177C771G17 A — — RD316T33W+ 1–3, 5, 8 PBF31200 177C771G18 A — — RD316T33W+ 1–3, 5, 8 PBF31400 177C771G19 A — — RD316T33W+ 1–3, 5, 8 PBF31600 177C771G20 A — — RD316T33W+ 1–3, 5, 8 PBF31800 177C771G21 A — — — — PBF32000 177C771G22 A — — RD320T33W+ 1–3, 5, 8 PBF32000F 5663D38G01 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PBF32000WK 752B076G13 A — — RD320WK 1–3, 5, 8 PBF3600 177C771G13 A — — RD316T33W/16RES08T+ 1–3, 5, 8 PBF3700 177C771G14 A — — RD316T33W/16RES08T+ 1–3, 5, 8 PBF3800 177C771G15 A — — RD316T33W/16RES08T+ 1–3, 5, 8 PBF3900 177C771G16 A — — RD316T33W/16RES10T+ 1–3, 5, 8 PC22000F 6590C19G01 O — — RD320T33W 1–3, 5, 8 PC22000FM 6590C19G03 O — — RD320T33W 1–3, 5, 8 PC22000WK 753B081G04 O — — RD320WK 1–3, 5, 8 PC22500F 6590C19G05 O — — RD325T33W 1–3, 5, 8 PC22500FM 6590C19G07 O — — RD325T33W 1–3, 5, 8 PC22500WK 752B076G05 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PC23000F 6590C19G09 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PC23000FM 6590C19G11 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PC23000K 753B081G06 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PC32000F 6590C19G02 A — — RD320T33W 1–3, 5, 8 PC32000FM 6590C19G04 O PC32000F 6590C19G02 RD320T33W 1–3, 5, 8 PC32000WK 753B081G15 A — — RD320WK 1–3, 5, 8 PC32500F 6590C19G06 A — — RD325T33W 1–3, 5, 8 PC32500FM 6590C19G08 O PC32500F 6590C19G06 RD325T33W 1–3, 5, 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 1 25 V12-T3-151 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) PC32500WK 753B081G16 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PC33000F 6590C19G10 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PC33000FM 6590C19G12 O PC33000F 6590C19G10 — 1–3, 5, 8 PC33000K 753B081G17 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PCA22000F 6590C19G17 O — — RD320T32W 1–3, 5, 8 1–3, 5, 8 PCA22500F 6590C19G21 O — — RD325T32W PCA22500FM 6590C19G07 O — — RD325T32W 1–3, 5, 8 PCA23000F 6590C19G25 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PCA32000F 6590C19G18 A — — RD320T32W 1–3, 5, 8 PCA32500F 6590C19G22 A — — RD325T32W 1–3, 5, 8 PCA33000F 6590C19G26 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PCC22000F 6590C20G01 O — — CRD320T33W 1–3, 5, 8 1–3, 5, 8 PCC22000FM 6590C20G03 O — — CRD320T33W PCC22000WK 752B076G09 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PCC22500F 6590C20G05 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PCC22500FM 6590C20G07 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8 10 PCC22500WK 753B081G05 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PCC23000F 6590C20G09 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8 11 PCC23000FM 6590C20G11 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PCC23000K 753B081G11 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PCC32000F 6590C20G02 A — — CRD320T33W 1–3, 5, 8 PCC32000FM 6590C20G04 O PCC32000F 6590C20G02 CRD320T33W 1–3, 5, 8 9 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 PCC32000WK 753B081G20 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PCC32500F 6590C20G06 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PCC32500FM 6590C20G08 O PCC32500F 6590C20G06 — 1–3, 5, 8 PCC32500WK 753B081G21 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PCC33000F 6590C20G10 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PCC33000FM 6590C20G12 O PCC33000F 6590C20G10 — 1–3, 5, 8 PCC33000K 753B081G22 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PCCA22000F 6590C20G17 O — — CRD320T32W 1–3, 5, 8 PCCA22500F 6590C20G21 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PCCA23000F 6590C20G25 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PCCA32000F 6590C20G18 A — — CRD320T32W 1–3, 5, 8 PCCA32500F 6590C20G22 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PCCA33000F 6590C20G26 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PCCF22000F 6590C18G01 O — — CRD320T33W 1–3, 5, 8 PCCF22000FM 6590C18G03 O — — CRD320T33W 1–3, 5, 8 20 PCCF22500F 6590C18G05 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PCCF22500FM 6590C18G07 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8 21 PCCF32000F 6590C18G02 A — — CRD320T33W 1–3, 5, 8 PCCF32000FM 6590C18G04 O PCCF32000F 6590C18G02 CRD320T33W 1–3, 5, 8 22 PCCF32500F 6590C18G06 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PCCF32500FM 6590C18G08 O PCCF32500F 6590C18G06 — 1–3, 5, 8 23 PCCFA22000F 1225C07G13 O — — CRD320T32W 1–3, 5, 8 PCCFA22500F 6590C18G17 O — — — 1–3, 5, 8 24 PCCFA32000F 6590C18G14 A — — CRD320T32W 1–3, 5, 8 PCCFA32500F 6590C18G18 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8 25 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. V12-T3-152 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) PCCFG32000F 1242C76G17 A — — CRD320T35W 1–3, 5, 8 PCCFG32500F 1242C76G18 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PCCFGA32000F 1242C78G21 A — — CRD320T36W 1–3, 5, 8 PCCFGA32500F 1242C78G22 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PCCG32000F 1242C75G25 A — — CRD320T35W 1–3, 5, 8 PCCG32500F 1242C75G26 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PCCG33000F 1242C75G27 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PCCGA32000F 1242C75G31 A — — CRD320T36W 1–3, 5, 8 PCCGA32500F 1242C75G32 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PCCGA33000F 1242C75G33 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PCF22000F 6590C17G01 O — — RD320T33W 1–3, 5, 8 PCF22000FM 6590C17G03 O — — RD320T33W 1–3, 5, 8 PCF22000K 753B081G08 O — — RD320WK 1–3, 5, 8 PCF22500FM 6590C17G07 O — — RD325T33W 1–3, 5, 8 PCF32000F 6590C17G02 A — — RD320T33W 1–3, 5, 8 PCF32000FM 6590C17G04 O PCF32000F 6590C17G02 RD320T33W 1–3, 5, 8 PCF32000K 753B081G19 A — — RD320WK 1–3, 5, 8 PCF32500F 6590C17G06 A — — RD325T33W 1–3, 5, 8 PCF32500FM 6590C17G08 O PCF32500F 6590C17G06 RD325T33W 1–3, 5, 8 PCFA22000F 6590C17G13 O — — RD320T32W 1–3, 5, 8 PCFA22500F 6590C17G17 O — — RD325T32W 1–3, 5, 8 PCFA32000F 6590C17G14 A — — RD320T32W 1–3, 5, 8 PCFA32500F 6590C17G18 A — — RD325T32W 1–3, 5, 8 PCFG32000F 1242C76G01 A — — RD320T35W 1–3, 5, 8 PCFG32500F 1242C76G02 A — — RD325T35W 1–3, 5, 8 PCFGA32000F 1242C76G05 A — — RD320T36W 1–3, 5, 8 PCFGA32500F 1242C76G06 A — — RD325T36W 1–3, 5, 8 PCG32000F 1242C75G01 A — — RD320T35W 1–3, 5, 8 PCG32500F 1242C75G02 A — — RD325T35W 1–3, 5, 8 PCG33000F 1242C75G03 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8 PCGA32000F 1242C75G07 A — — RD320T36W 1–3, 5, 8 PCGA32500F 1242C75G08 A — — RD325T36W 1–3, 5, 8 PCGA33000F 1242C75G09 A — — — 1–3, 5, 8 RE1010 1375D81G01 O — — — 3, 10 RE1015 1375D81G02 O — — Reconditioned E1015 10 RE1020 1375D81G03 O — — Reconditioned E1020 10 RE1025 1375D81G04 O — — Reconditioned E1025 10 RE1030 1375D81G05 O — — Reconditioned E1030 10 RE1040 1375D81G07 O — — Reconditioned E1040 10 RE1050 1375D81G08 O — — Reconditioned E1050 10 RE1060 1375D81G09 O — — Reconditioned E1060 10 RE1070 1375D81G10 O — — Reconditioned E1070 10 RE1080 1375D81G11 O — — Reconditioned E1080 10 RE1090 1375D81G12 O — — Reconditioned E1090 10 RE1100 1375D81G13 O — — Reconditioned E1100 10 RE2015 1375D81G18 O — — Reconditioned E2015 10 RE2020 1375D81G19 O — — Reconditioned E2020 10 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 1 25 V12-T3-153 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) RE2025 1375D81G20 O — — Reconditioned E2025 10 RE2030 1375D81G21 O — — Reconditioned E2030 10 RE2040 1375D81G23 O — — Reconditioned E2040 10 RE2050 1375D81G24 O — — Reconditioned E2050 10 RE2060 1375D81G25 O — — Reconditioned E2060 10 RE2070 1375D81G26 O — — Reconditioned E2070 10 RE2080 1375D81G27 O — — Reconditioned E2080 10 RE2090 1375D81G28 O — — Reconditioned E2090 10 RE2100 1375D81G29 O — — Reconditioned E2100 10 RE3015 1375D81G34 O — — Reconditioned E3015 10 RE3020 1375D81G35 O — — Reconditioned E3020 10 RE3025 1375D81G36 O — — Reconditioned E3025 10 RE3030 1375D81G37 O — — Reconditioned E3030 10 RE3040 1375D81G39 O — — Reconditioned E3040 10 9 RE3050 1375D81G40 O — — Reconditioned E3050 10 RE3060 1375D81G41 O — — Reconditioned E3060 10 10 RE3070 1375D81G42 O — — Reconditioned E3070 10 RE3080 1375D81G43 O — — Reconditioned E3080 10 11 RE3090 1375D81G44 O — — Reconditioned E3090 10 RE3100 1375D81G45 O — — Reconditioned E3100 10 — 12 13 REA1010 1375D82G01 O — — — REA1015 1375D82G02 O — — Reconditioned EA1015 10 REA1020 1375D82G03 O — — Reconditioned EA1020 10 REA1025 1375D82G04 O — — Reconditioned EA1025 10 14 REA1030 1375D82G05 O — — Reconditioned EA1030 10 REA1035 1375D82G06 O — — Reconditioned EA1035 10 15 REA1040 1375D82G07 O — — Reconditioned EA1040 10 REA1050 1375D82G08 O — — Reconditioned EA1050 10 REA1060 1375D82G09 O — — Reconditioned EA1060 10 16 REA1070 1375D82G10 O — — Reconditioned EA1070 10 17 18 19 20 21 22 REA1080 1375D82G11 O — — Reconditioned EA1080 10 REA1090 1375D82G12 O — — Reconditioned EA1090 10 REA1100 1375D82G13 O — — Reconditioned EA1100 10 REA2015 1375D82G18 O — — Reconditioned EA2015 10 REA2020 1375D82G19 O — — Reconditioned EA2020 10 REA2025 1375D82G20 O — — Reconditioned EA2025 10 REA2030 1375D82G21 O — — Reconditioned EA2030 10 REA2040 1375D82G23 O — — Reconditioned EA2040 10 REA2050 1375D82G24 O — — Reconditioned EA2050 10 REA2060 1375D82G25 O — — Reconditioned EA2060 10 REA2070 1375D82G26 O — — Reconditioned EA2070 10 REA2080 1375D82G27 O — — Reconditioned EA2080 10 REA2090 1375D82G28 O — — Reconditioned EA2090 10 REA2100 1375D82G29 O — — Reconditioned EA2100 10 REA3015 1375D82G34 O — — Use REH3015 10 24 REA3020 1375D82G35 O — — Use REH3020 10 REA3025 1375D82G36 O — — Use REH3025 10 25 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. 23 V12-T3-154 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) REA3030 1375D82G37 O — — Use REH3030 10 REA3040 1375D82G39 O — — Use REH3040 10 REA3050 1375D82G40 O — — Use REH3050 10 REA3060 1375D82G41 O — — Use REH3060 10 REA3070 1375D82G42 O — — Use REH3070 10 REA3080 1375D82G43 O — — Use REH3080 10 REA3090 1375D82G44 O — — Use REH3090 10 REA3100 1375D82G45 O — — Use REH3100 10 REH1010 1375D83G01 O — — — 3, 10 REH1015 1375D83G02 O — — Reconditioned EH1015 10 REH1020 1375D83G03 O — — Reconditioned EH1020 10 REH1025 1375D83G04 O — — Reconditioned EH1025 10 REH1030 1375D83G05 O — — Reconditioned EH1030 10 REH1040 1375D83G07 O — — Reconditioned EH1040 10 REH1050 1375D83G08 O — — Reconditioned EH1050 10 REH1060 1375D83G09 O — — Reconditioned EH1060 10 REH1070 1375D83G10 O — — Reconditioned EH1070 10 REH1080 1375D83G11 O — — Reconditioned EH1080 10 REH1090 1375D83G12 O — — Reconditioned EH1090 10 REH1100 1375D83G13 O — — Reconditioned EH1100 10 REH2015 1375D83G18 O — — Reconditioned EH2015 10 REH2020 1375D83G19 O — — Reconditioned EH2020 10 REH2025 1375D83G20 O — — Reconditioned EH2025 10 REH2030 1375D83G21 O — — Reconditioned EH2030 10 REH2040 1375D83G23 O — — Reconditioned EH2040 10 REH2050 1375D83G24 O — — Reconditioned EH2050 10 REH2060 1375D83G25 O — — Reconditioned EH2060 10 REH2070 1375D83G26 O — — Reconditioned EH2070 10 REH2080 1375D83G27 O — — Reconditioned EH2080 10 REH2090 1375D83G28 O — — Reconditioned EH2090 10 REH2100 1375D83G29 O — — Reconditioned EH2100 10 REH3015 1375D83G34 A — — — 3, 10 REH3020 1375D83G35 A — — — 3, 10 REH3025 1375D83G36 A — — — 3, 10 REH3030 1375D83G37 A — — — 3, 10 REH3040 1375D83G39 A — — — 3, 10 REH3050 1375D83G40 A — — — 3, 10 REH3060 1375D83G41 A — — — 3, 10 REH3070 1375D83G42 A — — — 3, 10 REH3080 1375D83G43 A — — — 3, 10 REH3090 1375D83G44 A — — — 3, 10 REH3100 1375D83G45 A — — — 3, 10 RF2015 1375D86G02 O — — Reconditioned F2015 3, 10 RF2020 1375D86G03 O — — Reconditioned F2020 3, 10 RF2025 NO STYLE O — — Reconditioned F2025 3, 10 RF2030 1375D86G05 O — — Reconditioned F2030 3, 10 RF2040 1375D86G07 O — — Reconditioned F2040 3, 10 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 1 25 V12-T3-155 3 1 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) RF2050 1375D86G08 O — — Reconditioned F2050 3, 10 RF2060 1375D86G09 O — — Reconditioned F2060 3, 10 RF2070 1375D86G10 O — — Reconditioned F2070 3, 10 RF2080 1375D86G11 O — — Reconditioned F2080 3, 10 RF2090 1375D86G12 O — — Reconditioned F2090 3, 10 RF2100 1375D86G13 O — — Reconditioned F2100 3, 10 5 RF3015 1375D86G18 O RHF3015 1375D87G18 — 3, 10 RF3020 1375D86G19 O RHF3020 1375D87G19 — 3, 10 6 RF3025 1375D86G20 O RHF3025 1375D87G20 — 3, 10 RF3030 1375D86G21 O RHF3030 1375D87G21 — 3, 10 7 RF3040 1375D86G23 O RHF3040 1375D87G23 — 3, 10 RF3050 1375D86G24 O RHF3050 1375D87G24 — 3, 10 8 RF3060 1375D86G25 O RHF3060 1375D87G25 — 3, 10 RF3070 1375D86G26 O RHF3070 1375D87G26 — 3, 10 9 RF3080 1375D86G27 O RHF3080 1375D87G27 — 3, 10 RF3090 1375D86G28 O RHF3090 1375D87G28 — 3, 10 10 RF3100 1375D86G29 O RHF3100 1375D87G29 — 3, 10 RFA2010 1375D84G01 O — — — 3, 10 11 RFA2015 1375D84G02 O — — Reconditioned FA2015 3, 10 RFA2020 1375D84G03 O — — Reconditioned FA2020 3, 10 12 RFA2025 1375D84G04 O — — Reconditioned FA2025 3, 10 RFA2030 1375D84G05 O — — Reconditioned FA2030 3, 10 RFA2040 1375D84G07 O — — Reconditioned FA2040 3, 10 RFA2045 1375D84G16 O — — Reconditioned FA2045 3, 10 RFA2050 1375D84G08 O — — Reconditioned FA2050 3, 10 RFA2060 1375D84G09 O — — Reconditioned FA2060 3, 10 RFA2070 1375D84G10 O — — Reconditioned FA2070 3, 10 RFA2080 1375D84G11 O — — Reconditioned FA2080 3, 10 RFA2090 1375D84G12 O — — Reconditioned FA2090 3, 10 16 RFA2100 1375D84G13 O — — Reconditioned FA2100 3, 10 RFA2100K 1375D84G17 O — — — 3, 10 17 RFA3010 1375D84G21 O RHFA3010 1375D85G21 — — RFA3015 1375D84G22 O RHFA3015 1375D85G22 — 3, 10 RFA3020 1375D84G23 O RHFA3020 1375D85G23 — 3, 10 2 3 4 13 14 15 18 19 20 21 22 23 RFA3025 1375D84G24 O RHFA3025 1375D85G24 — 3, 10 RFA3030 1375D84G25 O RHFA3030 1375D85G25 — 3, 10 RFA3040 1375D84G27 O RHFA3040 1375D85G27 — 3, 10 RFA3045 1375D84G36 O RHFA3045 1375D85G36 — 3, 10 RFA3050 1375D84G28 O RHFA3050 1375D85G28 — 3, 10 RFA3060 1375D84G29 O RHFA3060 1375D85G29 — 3, 10 RFA3070 1375D84G30 O RHFA3070 1375D85G30 — 3, 10 RFA3080 1375D84G31 O RHFA3080 1375D85G31 — 3, 10 RFA3090 1375D84G32 O RHFA3090 1375D85G32 — 3, 10 RFA3100 1375D84G33 O RHFA3100 1375D85G33 — 3, 10 — RFA3100K 1375D84G37 O — — — 24 RHF2015 1375D87G02 O — — Reconditioned HF2015 10 RHF2020 1375D87G03 O — — Reconditioned HF2020 10 25 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. V12-T3-156 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) RHF2030 1375D87G05 O — — Reconditioned HF2030 10 RHF2040 1375D87G07 O — — Reconditioned HF2040 10 RHF2050 1375D87G08 O — — Reconditioned HF2050 10 RHF2060 1375D87G09 O — — Reconditioned HF2060 10 RHF2070 1375D87G10 O — — Reconditioned HF2070 10 RHF2080 1375D87G11 O — — Reconditioned HF2080 10 RHF2090 1375D87G12 O — — Reconditioned HF2090 10 RHF2100 1375D87G13 O — — Reconditioned HF2100 10 RHF3015 1375D87G18 A — — — 10 RHF3020 1375D87G19 A — — — 10 RHF3025 1375D87G20 A — — — 10 RHF3030 1375D87G21 A — — — 10 RHF3040 1375D87G23 A — — — 10 RHF3050 1375D87G24 A — — — 10 RHF3060 1375D87G25 A — — — 10 RHF3070 1375D87G26 A — — — 10 RHF3080 1375D87G27 A — — — 10 RHF3090 1375D87G28 A — — — 10 RHF3100 1375D87G29 A — — — 10 RHFA2015 1375D85G02 O — — Reconditioned FA2015 10 RHFA2020 1375D85G03 O — — Reconditioned FA2020 10 RHFA2025 1375D85G04 O — — Reconditioned FA2025 10 RHFA2030 1375D85G05 O — — Reconditioned FA2030 10 RHFA2040 1375D85G07 O — — Reconditioned FA2040 10 RHFA2050 1375D85G08 O — — Reconditioned FA2050 10 RHFA2060 1375D85G09 O — — Reconditioned FA2060 10 RHFA2070 1375D85G10 O — — Reconditioned FA2070 10 RHFA2080 1375D85G11 O — — Reconditioned FA2080 10 RHFA2090 1375D85G12 O — — Reconditioned FA2090 10 RHFA2100 1375D85G13 O — — Reconditioned FA2100 10 RHFA2150 1375D85G15 O — — Reconditioned FA2150 10 RHFA3015 1375D85G22 A — — — 10 RHFA3020 1375D85G23 A — — — 10 RHFA3025 1375D85G24 A — — — 10 RHFA3030 1375D85G25 A — — — 10 RHFA3040 1375D85G27 A — — — 10 RHFA3050 1375D85G28 A — — — 10 RHFA3060 1375D85G29 A — — — 10 RHFA3070 1375D85G30 A — — — 10 RHFA3080 1375D85G31 A — — — 10 RHFA3090 1375D85G32 A — — — 10 RHFA3100 1375D85G33 A — — — 10 RHFA3150 1375D85G35 A — — — 10 RHK2070 1376D14G02 O — — Reconditioned HK2070 10 RHK2090 1376D14G03 O — — Reconditioned HK2090 10 RHK2100 1376D14G04 O — — Reconditioned HK2100 10 RHK2125 1376D14G05 O — — Reconditioned HK2125 10 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 1 25 V12-T3-157 3 1 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) RHK2150 1376D14G06 O — — Reconditioned HK2150 10 RHK2175 1376D14G07 O — — Reconditioned HK2175 10 RHK2200 1376D14G08 O — — Reconditioned HK2200 10 RHK2225 1376D14G09 O — — Reconditioned HK2225 10 RHK2225K NO STYLE O — — — — RHK3070 1376D14G22 A — — — 10 5 RHK3090 1376D14G23 A — — — 10 RHK3100 1376D14G24 A — — — 10 6 RHK3125 1376D14G25 A — — — 10 RHK3150 1376D14G26 A — — — 10 7 RHK3175 1376D14G27 A — — — 10 RHK3200 1376D14G28 A — — — 10 8 RHK3225 1376D14G29 A — — — 10 RHK3225K NO STYLE O — — — — 9 RHKL2125 1376D15G05 O — — Reconditioned KL2125 10 RHKL2150 1376D15G06 O — — Reconditioned KL2150 10 10 RHKL2175 1376D15G07 O — — Reconditioned KL2175 10 RHKL2200 1376D15G08 O — — Reconditioned KL2200 10 11 RHKL2225 1376D15G09 O — — Reconditioned KL2225 10 RHKL2250 1376D15G10 O — — Reconditioned KL2250 10 12 RHKL2300 1376D15G12 O — — Reconditioned KL2300 10 RHKL2350 1376D15G14 O — — Reconditioned KL2350 10 RHKL2400 1376D15G15 O — — Reconditioned KL2400 10 RHKL2400K NO STYLE O — — — — 14 RHKL3125 1376D15G25 A — — — 10 RHKL3150 1376D15G26 A — — — 10 15 RHKL3175 1376D15G27 A — — — 10 RHKL3200 1376D15G28 A — — — 10 RHKL3225 1376D15G29 A — — — 10 16 RHKL3250 1376D15G30 A — — — 10 2 3 4 13 17 RHKL3300 1376D15G32 A — — — 10 RHKL3350 1376D15G34 A — — — 10 RHKL3400 1376D15G35 A — — — 10 18 RHKL3400K NO STYLE A — — — 10 RHLM2125 1376D16G05 O — — Reconditioned LM2125 10 19 RHLM2150 1376D16G06 O — — Reconditioned LM2150 10 RHLM2175 1376D16G07 O — — Reconditioned LM2175 10 20 RHLM2200 1376D16G08 O — — Reconditioned LM2200 10 RHLM2225 1376D16G09 O — — Reconditioned LM2225 10 21 RHLM2250 1376D16G10 O — — Reconditioned LM2250 10 RHLM2275 1376D16G11 O — — Reconditioned LM2275 10 22 RHLM2300 1376D16G12 O — — Reconditioned LM2300 10 RHLM2350 1376D16G14 O — — Reconditioned LM2350 10 23 RHLM2400 1376D16G15 O — — Reconditioned LM2400 10 RHLM2450 1376D16G16 O — — Reconditioned LM2450 10 24 RHLM2500 1376D16G17 O — — Reconditioned LM2500 10 RHLM2550 1376D16G18 O — — Reconditioned LM2550 10 25 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. V12-T3-158 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number RHLM2600 1376D16G19 O — — Reconditioned LM2600 10 RHLM2600K 1376D16G20 O — — — — RHLM2700 NO STYLE O — — Reconditioned LM2700 10 RHLM2800 1376D16G22 O — — Reconditioned LM2800 10 RHLM3125 1376D16G35 A — — — 10 RHLM3150 1376D16G36 A — — — 10 RHLM3175 1376D16G37 A — — — 10 RHLM3200 1376D16G38 A — — — 10 RHLM3225 1376D16G39 A — — — 10 RHLM3250 1376D16G40 A — — — 10 RHLM3275 1376D16G41 A — — — 10 RHLM3300 1376D16G42 A — — — 10 RHLM3325 1376D16G43 A — — — 10 RHLM3350 1376D16G44 A — — — 10 RHLM3400 1376D16G45 A — — — 10 RHLM3450 1376D16G46 A — — — 10 RHLM3500 1376D16G47 A — — — 10 RHLM3550 1376D16G48 A — — — 10 RHLM3600 1376D16G49 A — — — 10 RHLM3600K 1376D16G50 O — — — — RHLM3700 1376D16G51 A — — — 10 RHLM3800 1376D16G52 A — — — 10 RJ2070 1376D10G02 O — — Reconditioned J2070 3, 10 RJ2090 1376D10G03 O — — Reconditioned J2090 3, 10 RJ2100 1376D10G04 O — — Reconditioned J2100 3, 10 RJ2125 1376D10G05 O — — Reconditioned J2125 3, 10 RJ2150 1376D10G06 O — — Reconditioned J2150 3, 10 RJ2175 1376D10G07 O — — Reconditioned J2175 3, 10 RJ2200 1376D10G08 O — — Reconditioned J2200 3, 10 RJ2225 1376D10G09 O — — Reconditioned J2225 3, 10 RJ2225K NO STYLE O — — — — RJ3070 1376D10G22 A — — — 3, 10 RJ3090 1376D10G23 A — — — 3, 10 RJ3100 1376D10G24 A — — — 3, 10 RJ3125 1376D10G25 A — — — 3, 10 RJ3150 1376D10G26 A — — — 3, 10 RJ3175 1376D10G27 A — — — 3, 10 RJ3200 1376D10G28 A — — — 3, 10 RJ3225 1376D10G29 A — — — 3, 10 RJ3225K NO STYLE O — — — — RK2070 1376D11G02 O — — Reconditioned K2070 3, 10 RK2090 1376D11G03 O — — Reconditioned K2090 3, 10 RK2100 1376D11G04 O — — Reconditioned K2100 3, 10 RK2125 1376D11G05 O — — Reconditioned K2125 3, 10 RK2150 1376D11G06 O — — Reconditioned K2150 3, 10 RK2175 1376D11G07 O — — Reconditioned K2175 3, 10 RK2200 1376D11G08 O — — Reconditioned K2200 3, 10 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 1 25 V12-T3-159 3 1 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number RK2225 1376D11G09 O — — Reconditioned K2225 3, 10 RK2225K 1376D11G10 O — — — — RK3070 1376D11G22 O RHK3070 1376D14G22 — 3, 10 RK3090 1376D11G23 O RHK3090 1376D14G23 — 3, 10 RK3100 1376D11G24 O RHK3100 1376D14G24 — 3, 10 RK3125 1376D11G25 O RHK3125 1376D14G25 — 3, 10 5 RK3150 1376D11G26 O RHK3150 1376D14G26 — 3, 10 RK3175 1376D11G27 O RHK3175 1376D14G27 — 3, 10 6 RK3200 1376D11G28 O RHK3200 1376D14G28 — 3, 10 RK3225 1376D11G29 O RHK3225 1376D14G29 — 3, 10 7 RK3225K 1376D11G30 O — — — — RKL2125 1376D12G05 O — — Reconditioned L2125 3, 10 8 RKL2150 1376D12G06 O — — Reconditioned L2150 3, 10 RKL2175 1376D12G07 O — — Reconditioned L2175 3, 10 9 RKL2200 1376D12G08 O — — Reconditioned L2200 3, 10 RKL2225 1376D12G09 O — — Reconditioned L2225 3, 10 10 RKL2250 1376D12G10 O — — Reconditioned L2250 3, 10 RKL2275 NO STYLE O — — — 3, 10 11 RKL2300 1376D12G12 O — — Reconditioned L2300 3, 10 RKL2350 1376D12G14 O — — Reconditioned L2350 3, 10 12 RKL2400 1376D12G15 O — — Reconditioned L2400 3, 10 RKL2400K NO STYLE O — — — — RKL3125 1376D12G25 O RHKL3125 1376D15G25 — 3, 10 RKL3150 1376D12G26 O RHKL3150 1376D15G26 — 3, 10 2 3 4 13 14 RKL3175 1376D12G27 O RHKL3175 1376D15G27 — 3, 10 RKL3200 1376D12G28 O RHKL3200 1376D15G28 — 3, 10 15 RKL3225 1376D12G29 O RHKL3225 1376D15G29 — 3, 10 RKL3250 1376D12G30 O RHKL3250 1376D15G30 — 3, 10 RKL3300 1376D12G32 O RHKL3300 1376D15G32 — 3, 10 16 RKL3350 1376D12G34 O RHKL3350 1376D15G34 — 3, 10 RKL3400 1376D12G35 O RHKL3400 1376D15G35 — 3, 10 17 RLM2125 1376D13G05 O — — Reconditioned LM2125 3, 10 RLM2150 1376D13G06 O — — Reconditioned LM2150 3, 10 RLM2175 1376D13G07 O — — Reconditioned LM2175 3, 10 3, 10 18 RLM2200 1376D13G08 O — — Reconditioned LM2200 19 RLM2225 1376D13G09 O — — Reconditioned LM2225 3, 10 RLM2250 1376D13G10 O — — Reconditioned LM2250 3, 10 20 RLM2275 1376D13G11 O — — Reconditioned LM2275 3, 10 RLM2300 1376D13G12 O — — Reconditioned LM2300 3, 10 21 RLM2350 1376D13G14 O — — Reconditioned LM2350 3, 10 RLM2400 1376D13G15 O — — Reconditioned LM2400 3, 10 RLM2500 1376D13G17 O — — Reconditioned LM2500 3, 10 22 23 RLM2600 1376D13G19 O — — Reconditioned LM2600 3, 10 RLM2600K 1376D13G20 O — — — — RLM2700 1376D13G21 O — — Reconditioned LM2700 3, 10 24 RLM3150 1376D13G36 O RHLM3150 1376D16G36 — 3, 10 RLM3175 1376D13G37 O RHLM3175 1376D16G37 — 3, 10 25 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. V12-T3-160 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Breaker Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number MARK 75 Style Number Series C Catalog Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) RLM3200 1376D13G38 O RHLM3200 1376D16G38 — 3, 10 RLM3225 1376D13G39 O RHLM3225 1376D16G39 — 3, 10 RLM3250 1376D13G40 O RHLM3250 1376D16G40 — 3, 10 RLM3275 1376D13G41 O RHLM3275 1376D16G41 — 3, 10 RLM3300 1376D13G42 O RHLM3300 1376D16G42 — 3, 10 RLM3350 1376D13G44 O RHLM3350 1376D16G44 — 3, 10 RLM3400 1376D13G45 O RHLM3400 1376D16G45 — 3, 10 RLM3500 1376D13G47 O RHLM3500 1376D16G47 — 3, 10 RLM3600 1376D13G49 O RHLM3600 1376D16G49 — 3, 10 RLM3600K 1376D13G50 O — — — — RLM3700 1376D13G51 O RHLM3700 1376D16G51 — 3, 10 RLM3800 1376D13G52 O RHLM3800 1376D16G52 — 3, 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-161 3 1 2 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Mining Breaker Replacement Cross-Reference Replacement Breaker Replacements Mining and 1000V Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number E2 Style Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) 1227C36G09 1227C36G09 O 1227C36G11 E2N312W 1–3, 5, 7, 8 3 1227C36G10 1227C36G10 O 1227C36G12 E2N310W 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1227C36G11 1227C36G11 A — E2NM312W 1–3, 5, 7, 8 4 1227C36G12 1227C36G12 A — E2NM310W 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1227C36G13 1227C36G13 O — E2N310WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8 5 1227C36G14 1227C36G14 O — E2N312WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1227C36G19 1227C36G19 O — E2N312MW 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1227C37G15 1227C37G15 O — E2N310WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1227C37G16 1227C37G16 O — E2N312WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1227C37G17 1227C37G17 O 1227C36G12 E2N310W 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1227C37G18 1227C37G18 O 1229C37G19 E2N310WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1227C37G19 1227C37G19 O — E2N310WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1227C37G21 1227C37G21 O — E2N312WS10 1227C37G22 1227C37G22 O 1227C36G12 E2N312W 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1227C37G23 1227C37G23 O 1229C37G20 E2N312WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1227C37G27 1227C37G27 O — E2N312MW 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1227C37G28 1227C37G28 O 1229C37G18 E2N312MWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1228C81G01 1228C81G01 A — — 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1228C81G02 1228C81G02 A — — 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1228C81G03 1228C81G03 A — — 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1228C81G04 1228C81G04 A — — 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1228C82G01 1228C82G01 A — — 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1228C82G02 1228C82G02 A — — 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1228C82G03 1228C82G03 A — — 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1228C82G04 1228C82G04 A — — 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1229C37G13 1229C37G13 O — E2N310WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1229C37G14 1229C37G14 O — E2N312WU66 1229C37G15 1229C37G15 O 1229C37G19 E2N310WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1229C37G16 1229C37G16 O — E2N312WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1229C37G17 1229C37G17 O 1227C37G28 E2N312MWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 17 1229C37G18 1229C37G18 A — E2NM312MWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1229C37G19 1229C37G19 A — E2NM310WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 18 1229C37G20 1229C37G20 A — E2NM312WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1259C52G12 1259C52G12 O — E2FM050YM 1–3, 5, 7, 8 19 1259C52G13 1259C52G13 O — E2FM050KM 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1259C52G14 1259C52G14 O — E2FM100KM 1–3, 5, 7, 8 20 1259C52G15 1259C52G15 O — E2FM150TM 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1259C52G16 1259C52G16 O — E2FM050YM 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1259C52G17 1259C52G17 O — E2FM100KM 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1278C71G03 1278C71G03 O 5685D48G87 E2KE3225W 1–3, 5, 7, 8 16 21 22 23 24 25 1278C71G04 1278C71G04 O 5685D48G86 E2KE3225W 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1278C71G07 1278C71G07 O — E2KE3225WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1278C71G08 1278C71G08 O — E2KE3225WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1278C71G11 1278C71G11 O — E2KE3225MW 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1278C71G12 1278C71G12 O — E2KE3225MW 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1278C72G02 1278C72G02 O 5685D48G85 E2KE34002W 1–3, 5, 7, 8 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. V12-T3-162 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Mining Breaker Replacement Cross-Reference 1 Replacement Breaker Replacements Mining and 1000V Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number E2 Style Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) 1278C72G04 1278C72G04 O — E2KE34002WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1278C72G06 1278C72G06 O — E2KE3400M2W 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1278C73G01 1278C73G01 O — E2N3600WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1278C73G02 1278C73G02 O — E2N3800WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1278C73G03 1278C73G03 O 5685D48G84 E2N3600WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1278C73G04 1278C73G04 O 2609D60G28 E2N3600WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1278C73G05 1278C73G05 O — E2N3600WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1278C73G07 1278C73G07 O — E2N3800WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1278C73G08 1278C73G08 O 5685D48G83 E2N3800W 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1278C73G09 1278C73G09 O 2609D60G29 E2N3800WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1278C73G11 1278C73G11 O — E2N3800MW 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1278C73G12 1278C73G12 O 2609D60G57 E2N3800MWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1278C73G13 1278C73G13 O — E2N3800MW 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1278C73G14 1278C73G14 O 2609D60G58 E2N3800MWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C67G01 1284C67G01 O 1284C68G01 E2KE3150W 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C67G02 1284C67G02 O 1284C68G02 E2KE3150WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C67G03 1284C67G03 O 1284C68G03 E2KE3150WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C67G04 1284C67G04 O 1284C68G04 E2KE3150WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C67G05 1284C67G05 O 1284C68G05 E2LE3300W 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C67G06 1284C67G06 O 1284C68G06 E2LE3300WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C67G07 1284C67G07 O 1284C68G07 E2LE3300WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C67G08 1284C67G08 O 1284C68G08 E2LE3300WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C67G09 1284C67G09 O 1284C68G09 E2LE3600W 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C67G10 1284C67G10 O 1284C68G10 E2LE3600WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C67G11 1284C67G11 O 1284C68G11 E2LE3600WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C67G12 1284C67G12 O 1284C68G12 E2LE3600WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C68G01 1284C68G01 A — E2KEM3150W 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C68G02 1284C68G02 A — E2KEM3150WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C68G03 1284C68G03 A — E2KEM3150WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C68G04 1284C68G04 A — E2KEM3150WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C68G05 1284C68G05 A — E2KEM3400W 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C68G06 1284C68G06 A — E2KEM3400WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C68G07 1284C68G07 A — E2KEM3400WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C68G08 1284C68G08 A — E2KEM3400WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C68G09 1284C68G09 A — E2LEM3600W 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C68G10 1284C68G10 A — E2LEM3600WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C68G11 1284C68G11 A — E2LEM3600WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C68G12 1284C68G12 A — E2LEM3600WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C80G01 1284C80G01 O 1284C68G01 E2KE3150W 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C80G02 1284C80G02 O 1284C68G02 E2KE3150WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C80G03 1284C80G03 O 1284C68G03 E2KE3150WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C80G04 1284C80G04 O 1284C68G04 E2KE3150WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C80G05 1284C80G05 O 1284C68G05 E2LE3300W 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C80G06 1284C80G06 O 1284C68G06 E2LE3300WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C80G07 1284C80G07 O 1284C68G07 E2LE3300WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C80G08 1284C80G08 O 1284C68G08 E2LE3300WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 2 25 V12-T3-163 3 1 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Mining Breaker Replacement Cross-Reference Replacement Breaker Replacements Mining and 1000V Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number E2 Style Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) 1284C80G09 1284C80G09 O 1284C68G09 E2LE3600W 1–3, 5, 7, 8 3 1284C80G10 1284C80G10 O 1284C68G10 E2LE3600WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C80G11 1284C80G11 O 1284C68G11 E2LE3600WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 4 1284C80G12 1284C80G12 O 1284C68G12 E2LE3600WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1–3, 5, 7, 8 2 1284C81G01 1284C81G01 O 1284C83G01 E2N3800W 5 1284C81G02 1284C81G02 O 1284C83G02 E2N3800WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C81G03 1284C81G03 O 1284C83G03 E2N3800WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 6 1284C81G04 1284C81G04 O 1284C83G04 E2N3800WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C82G01 1284C82G01 O 1284C83G01 E2N3800W 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C82G02 1284C82G02 O 1284C83G02 E2N3800WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1–3, 5, 7, 8 7 1284C82G03 1284C82G03 O 1284C83G03 E2N3800WU66 1284C82G04 1284C82G04 O 1284C83G04 E2N3800WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C83G01 1284C83G01 A — E2NM3800W 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C83G02 1284C83G02 A — E2NM3800WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C83G03 1284C83G03 A — E2NM3800WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1284C83G04 1284C83G04 A — E2NM3800WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1291C26G01 1291C26G01 O — E2K3225AWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1291C26G02 1291C26G02 O — E2K3225DWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1291C26G03 1291C26G03 O 1291C26G12 E2K3225AWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1291C26G04 1291C26G04 O 1291C26G13 E2K3225DWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 12 1291C26G05 1291C26G05 O 1291C26G14 E2K3400MAWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1291C26G06 1291C26G06 O 1291C26G15 E2K3400MDWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 13 1291C26G07 1291C26G07 O — E2K3400MAWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1291C26G08 1291C26G08 O 1291C26G16 E2K3400MAWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 14 1291C26G12 1291C26G12 A — E2KEM3225WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1291C26G13 1291C26G13 A — E2KEM3225WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 15 1291C26G14 1291C26G14 A — E2KEM3225MWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1291C26G15 1291C26G15 A — E2KEM3225MWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 16 1291C26G16 1291C26G16 A — E2KEM3225MWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1291C26G17 1291C26G17 O — E2KE3225WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 17 1291C26G18 1291C26G18 O — E2KE3225WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1291C26G19 1291C26G19 O 1291C26G12 E2KE3225WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 18 1291C26G20 1291C26G20 O 1291C26G13 E2KE3225WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1291C26G21 1291C26G21 O — E2KE3225MWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 19 1291C26G22 1291C26G22 O 1291C26G15 E2KE3225MWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1291C32G01 1291C32G01 O — E2LE3400WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 20 1291C32G02 1291C32G02 O 1291C32G07 E2LE3400WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1291C32G03 1291C32G03 O OMIT E2LE3400WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 21 1291C32G04 1291C32G04 O 1291C32G09 E2LE3400MWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1291C32G05 1291C32G05 O — E2KE3400WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1291C32G06 1291C32G06 O 1291C32G07 E2KE34002WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1291C32G07 1291C32G07 A — E2KEM34002WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 8 9 10 11 22 1291C32G08 1291C32G08 O 1291C32G09 E2KE3400M2WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 23 1291C32G09 1291C32G09 A — E2KEM3400M2WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G01 1366D21G01 O — E2F030EM 1–3, 5, 7, 8 24 1366D21G02 1366D21G02 O — E2F050YM 1–3, 5, 7, 8 25 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. V12-T3-164 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Mining Breaker Replacement Cross-Reference 1 Replacement Breaker Replacements Mining and 1000V Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number E2 Style Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) 1366D21G03 1366D21G03 O — E2F050YM+ 625B229G08 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G04 1366D21G04 O — E2F100KM 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G05 1366D21G05 O — E2F100KMU62+ 625B229G08 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G06 1366D21G06 O — E2F050YM+ 625B229G08 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G07 1366D21G07 O — E2F100KMU62+ 625B229G08 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G08 1366D21G08 O — E2F030EM 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G09 1366D21G09 O — E2F030EM+ 625B229G08 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G10 1366D21G10 O — E2F030EMU62+ 625B229G08 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G11 1366D21G11 O — E2F030EMS22+ 625B229G08 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G12 1366D21G12 O — E2F030EMU62 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G13 1366D21G13 O — E2F030EM 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G14 1366D21G14 O — E2F3030 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G15 1366D21G15 O — E2F3030U62 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G16 1366D21G16 O — E2F3030S22 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G17 1366D21G17 O — E2F050YM 1–3, 5, 7, 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1366D21G18 1366D21G18 O — E2F100KM 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G19 1366D21G19 O — E2F100KM+ 625B229G08 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G20 1366D21G20 O — E2F100KMU62+ 625B229G08 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G22 1366D21G22 O — E2F100KMS22+ 625B229G08 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G23 1366D21G23 A — E2F100KM+ 625B229G08 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G24 1366D21G24 A — E2F100KMU62+ 625B229G08 1–3, 5, 7, 8 15 16 1366D21G27 1366D21G27 O — E2F100KMU62 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G28 1366D21G28 O — E2F3100 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G29 1366D21G29 O — E2F3100U62 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G30 1366D21G30 A — E2F100KM 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G31 1366D21G31 A — E2F100KMU62 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G32 1366D21G32 A — E2F100KMS22 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G33 1366D21G33 O — E2F3100S22 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G34 1366D21G34 O — E2F050YMU62 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G35 1366D21G35 O — E2F050YM+ 625B229G08 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G36 1366D21G36 O — E2F050YMU62+ 625B229G08 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G37 1366D21G37 O — E2F050YMS22 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G38 1366D21G38 A — E2F050YMU62 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G39 1366D21G39 A — E2F050YM+ 625B229G08 1–3, 5, 7, 8 12 13 14 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com V12-T3-165 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Mining Breaker Replacement Cross-Reference Replacements Replacement Breaker Mining and 1000V Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number E2 Style Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) 1366D21G40 1366D21G40 A — E2F050YMU62+ 625B229G08 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G41 1366D21G41 A — E2F050YMS22 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G42 1366D21G42 A — E2F030EMU62+ 625B229G08 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G43 1366D21G43 O — E2F100KMS22+ 625B229G08 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G44 1366D21G44 A — E2F100KMS22+ 625B229G08 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G45 1366D21G45 O — E2F100RMS22 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1366D21G46 1366D21G46 O — E2F3015U62 1–3, 5, 7, 8 7 1373D88G13 1373D88G13 O 1373D89G09 E2N312W 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1373D88G14 1373D88G14 O 1373D89G10 E2N312WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8 8 1373D88G15 1373D88G15 O 1373D89G11 E2N312WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1373D88G16 1373D88G16 O 1373D89G12 E2N312WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 9 1373D88G17 1373D88G17 O 1373D89G09 E2N312W 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1373D88G18 1373D88G18 O 1373D89G10 E2N312WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8 10 1373D88G19 1373D88G19 O 1373D89G11 E2N312WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1373D88G20 1373D88G20 O 1373D89G12 E2N312WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 11 1373D89G09 1373D89G09 A — E2NM312W 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1373D89G10 1373D89G10 A — E2NM312WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8 12 1373D89G11 1373D89G11 A — E2NM312WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 1373D89G12 1373D89G12 A — E2NM312WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 13 2600D43G11 2600D43G11 O 1264C99G03 — — 2600D43G12 2600D43G12 O 1264C99G03 — — 14 2600D43G14 2600D43G14 O 1264C99G03 — — 2602D86G11 2602D86G11 O 1264C99G05 — — 15 2602D86G12 2602D86G12 O 1264C99G05 — — 2602D86G13 2602D86G13 O 1264C99G05 — — 2602D86G14 2602D86G14 O 1264C99G05 — — 2602D99G05 2602D99G05 O 1264C99G02 — — 2602D99G06 2602D99G06 O 1264C99G02 — — 2602D99G07 2602D99G07 O 1264C99G02 — — 2602D99G08 2602D99G08 O 1264C99G02 — — 2603D48G07 2603D48G07 O 2603D48G09 — — 16 17 18 2603D48G08 2603D48G08 O 2603D48G09 — — 19 2609D60G01 2609D60G01 O — E2K3225AWS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8 2609D60G02 2609D60G02 O — E2K3225DWS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8 20 2609D60G03 2609D60G03 O — E2LE3400WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8 2609D60G04 2609D60G04 O — E2N3600WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8 21 2609D60G05 2609D60G05 O — E2N3800WS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8 2609D60G08 2609D60G08 O — E2FM100KM 1–3, 5, 7, 8 22 2609D60G09 2609D60G09 O — E2FM100KMU13 1–3, 5, 7, 8 2609D60G10 2609D60G10 O — E2FM050YM 1–3, 5, 7, 8 23 2609D60G17 2609D60G17 O — E2N3600WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 2609D60G18 2609D60G18 O — E2N3800WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 24 2609D60G19 2609D60G19 O — E2N3600W 1–3, 5, 7, 8 2609D60G20 2609D60G20 O 2609D60G29 E2N3800WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 25 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. V12-T3-166 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities Mining Breaker Replacement Cross-Reference 1 Replacement Breaker Replacements Mining and 1000V Catalog Number Style Number Status 1 MARK 75 Catalog Number E2 Style Number Notes (See Page V12-T3-114) 2609D60G28 2609D60G28 A — E2LEM36002WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 2609D60G29 2609D60G29 A — E2NM3800WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 2609D60G40 2609D60G40 O — E2K3400MAW 1–3, 5, 7, 8 2609D60G41 2609D60G41 O — E2K3400MDW 1–3, 5, 7, 8 2609D60G44 2609D60G44 O — E2LE3400MW 1–3, 5, 7, 8 2609D60G46 2609D60G46 O — E2N3800MW 1–3, 5, 7, 8 2609D60G47 2609D60G47 O — E2N3800MWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 2609D60G48 2609D60G48 O — E2N3800MW 1–3, 5, 7, 8 2609D60G49 2609D60G49 O 2609D60G58 E2N3800MWU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 2609D60G57 2609D60G57 A — E2NM3800MW 1–3, 5, 7, 8 2609D60G58 2609D60G58 A — E2NM312MW 1–3, 5, 7, 8 2609D60G61 2609D60G61 O — E2LE3400MWS86 1–3, 5, 7, 8 2609D60G63 2609D60G63 O — E2LE34002WU66 1–3, 5, 7, 8 2609D60G64 2609D60G64 O — E2K3400MAW 1–3, 5, 7, 8 2609D60G66 2609D60G66 O — E2K3400MAWS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8 2609D60G67 2609D60G67 O 2609D60G70 E2K3400MAW 1–3, 5, 7, 8 2609D60G69 2609D60G69 O — E2K3400MAWS10 1–3, 5, 7, 8 2609D60G70 2609D60G70 A — E2KEM3225MW 1–3, 5, 7, 8 2610D64G07 2610D64G07 O 2610D64G13 — — 2610D64G08 2610D64G08 O 2610D64G13 — — 2610D64G09 2610D64G09 O 2610D64G13 — — 2610D64G10 2610D64G10 O 2610D64G13 — — 5685D48G45 5685D48G45 O — E2FM100KMU13+ 625B229G08 1–3, 5, 7, 8 5685D48G71 5685D48G71 O 5685D48G83 E2N3800W 1–3, 5, 7, 8 5685D48G72 5685D48G72 O 5685D48G84 E2N3600W 1–3, 5, 7, 8 5685D48G73 5685D48G73 O 5685D48G85 E2LE3400W 1–3, 5, 7, 8 5685D48G74 5685D48G74 O 5685D48G86 E2K3225DW 1–3, 5, 7, 8 5685D48G75 5685D48G75 O 1291C26G12 E2K3225AW 1–3, 5, 7, 8 5685D48G83 5685D48G83 A — E2NM3800W 1–3, 5, 7, 8 5685D48G84 5685D48G84 A — E2LEM36002W 1–3, 5, 7, 8 5685D48G85 5685D48G85 A — E2KEM34002W 1–3, 5, 7, 8 5685D48G86 5685D48G86 A — E2KEM3225W 1–3, 5, 7, 8 5685D48G87 5685D48G87 A — E2KEM3225W 1–3, 5, 7, 8 5685D48G88 5685D48G88 O — E2FM100KM+ 625B229G08 1–3, 5, 7, 8 5685D48G89 5685D48G89 O — E2FM050YM+ 625B229G08 1–3, 5, 7, 8 5685D48G90 5685D48G90 O — E2FM050YMU13 1–3, 5, 7, 8 2609D99G06 2609D99G06 O — — — 5685D48G42 5685D48G42 O — — — 5685D48G36 5685D48G36 O — — — 5685D48G30 5685D48G30 O — — — 5685D48G24 5685D48G24 O — — — 5685D48G18 5685D48G18 O — — — 5685D48G12 5685D48G12 O — — — 5685D48G06 5685D48G06 O — — — 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Note 1 O = Obsolete, A = Available. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com 2 25 V12-T3-167 3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Replacement Capabilities 1 Pricing Information 2 Vista/VISTALINE Discount Symbol RCB-2 Price and Availability Digest (PAD) 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T3-168 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—July 2016 www.eaton.com Panelboards Westinghouse PRL3 4 Panelboards Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product History Time Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FDP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB/PH/PH-L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRL1 and PRL2 Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRL1a and PRL2a Panelboards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRL3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRL3a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRL4B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRL4F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surge Protection Device—SPD Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pow-R-Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panelboard Retrofits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pow-R-Line 1R and 2R Renovation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Support Services—Satellite Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pricing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T4-2 V12-T4-2 V12-T4-3 V12-T4-4 V12-T4-9 V12-T4-10 V12-T4-11 V12-T4-12 V12-T4-13 V12-T4-14 V12-T4-15 V12-T4-15 V12-T4-16 V12-T4-17 V12-T4-18 V12-T4-19 V12-T4-20 V12-T4-20 V12-T4-20 V12-T4-21 V12-T4-21 V12-T4-22 V12-T4-22 V12-T4-22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T4-1 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Panelboards Product Description Panelboards and switchboards are enclosed assemblies for lighting and distribution that accept incoming power and consist of a series of circuit breakers and/or fusible switches. These devices protect each circuit by providing overcurrent and short-circuit protection. Product History In 1994, Eaton acquired the Distribution and Control Business Unit (DCBU) of Westinghouse and integrated it with their Cutler-Hammer® business unit forming a powerful new combination. This product history tracks the evolution of panelboard and switchboard products for both manufacturers. In the 1920s, prior to the development of circuit breakers, Westinghouse sold panelboards designed for main and branch circuit fuses. Circuit breakers were first introduced in 1927 and put Westinghouse in the forefront of circuit breaker technology. A few years later the first Westinghouse “NOFUSE” circuit breakers were introduced. “NOFUSE” panelboards were initially available in ratings up to 225A at 250V. Panelboards were designed at higher ratings as circuit breakers’ ratings became available. By 1958, panelboards were available at ratings up to 800A and 600V. The most significant panelboard types were the CDP and FDP panels. For more than 34 years, these two types encompassed most Westinghouse moldedcase circuit breakers and fusible switches. 22 In 1962, Eaton’s electrical business entered the panelboard and switchboard market with the purchase of Mullenbach. Soon after the Mullenbach acquisition, Cutler-Hammer entered into an agreement with Westinghouse to supply breakers and fusible devices for panelboards and switchboards, and Eaton also began manufacturing Westinghouse-type panelboards under the agreement. This relationship made in the early 1960s provided users of both trade name products access to aftermarket service for add-on branch devices and hardware. Classic CutlerHammer panelboards and switchboards were designed and listed for use with Westinghouse breakers. In 1988, Westinghouse redesigned the panelboard and switchboard line to incorporate the new Series C® design breakers. This new design became a true family of products. These new panelboards and switchboards became today’s Pow-R-Line® family, which are manufactured in state-ofthe-art facilities strategically located throughout the United States. Eaton’s unique Satellite Plants support aftermarket services for all current Pow-R-Line panelboard and switchboard products. Aftermarket service for outof-production panelboards and switchboards for both the classic Westinghouse and Cutler-Hammer designs is supported by the Aftermarket Center in Sumter, SC, (see Page V12-T4-22), and is staffed with experienced and knowledgeable representatives. Cutler-Hammer NFB Westinghouse FDP Cutler-Hammer MP40 Westinghouse Pow-R-Line 3 Cutler-Hammer CHB Westinghouse WEB Cutler-Hammer EE Westinghouse CDP 23 24 25 V12-T4-2 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 4 Panelboards Product History Time Line Page Product V12-T4-7 Westinghouse A2B 1935 1940 1945 1950 1955 1960 1965 1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 Present 1 2 Westinghouse NM/NMM 3 V12-T4-7 Westinghouse NA1B V12-T4-7 Westinghouse NLAB V12-T4-7 Westinghouse NAB V12-T4-7 Westinghouse ABH V12-T4-7 Westinghouse NDP V12-T4-4 Cutler-Hammer CDP V12-T4-7 Westinghouse CDP/FDP V12-T4-7 Westinghouse NQB/NQC/NQP V12-T4-7 Westinghouse NEB/NHEB 7 V12-T4-7 Westinghouse WCA/WEB/WEHB/ WFB/WGB/WGHB 8 V12-T4-4 Cutler-Hammer CHP/CHB V12-T4-4 Cutler-Hammer NFB V12-T4-5 Cutler-Hammer MP40/MP100 V12-T4-7 Westinghouse B10B/Q10P V12-T4-5 Cutler-Hammer PB V12-T4-5 Cutler-Hammer PH V12-T4-6 Cutler-Hammer EE V12-T4-7 Westinghouse W10B/W10P V12-T4-6 Cutler-Hammer EP V12-T4-8 Westinghouse PRL3 V12-T4-8 Westinghouse PRL1, PRL2 V12-T4-8 Cutler-Hammer PRL1a, 2a V12-T4-8 Cutler-Hammer PRL3a V12-T4-8 Westinghouse PRL4B, F V12-T4-5 Cutler-Hammer PRL5P 4 5 6 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T4-3 4 Panelboards Replacement Capabilities 1 Replacement Capabilities Original Cutler-Hammer Panelboard Breaker Replacement Chart 2 How to Select Replacement Breakers A complete line of new, UL® Listed products, physically and electrically interchangeable moldedcase circuit breakers is offered by Eaton. Cutler-Hammer Panelboard Type Original Branch Circuit Breaker New Panelboard Type New Breaker Panelboard Replacement Breaker 1 CHP 2 CHB 2 NPLAB 2 NLAB 2 NA1B 2 CH CHB P QL E EA EH E EA EH EB EHB EHC EC CA CC FB HFB FD FC FH FS HFC CCH CHH E EA EH EB EHB F FA HF HFA FB HFB CA DA JA KA HKA HK HKL LA HLA LAB LM HLM MA HMA NB HNB CC CCH CHH PRL1a PRL1a PRL1a PRL1a PRL3a PRL3a PRL3a PRL3a PRL3a PRL3a PRL3a or PRL4B PRL3a or PRL4B PRL3a or PRL4B PRL3a or PRL4B PRL3a or PRL4B PRL3a or PRL4B PRL3a or PRL4B PRL3a or PRL4B PRL3a or PRL4B PRL3a or PRL4B PRL3a or PRL4B PRL3a or PRL4B PRL3a or PRL4B PRL3a or PRL4B PRL3a or PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B CH CHB — — — — — — — — EHD EHD FD EHD CA CC FD FD FD FD HFD FD HFD — CHH — — — EHD EHD — — — — FDB FD CA DK KDB KD HKD — — LD LD LDB — — MDL MDL ND ND CC — CHH — — — — REH REH REH REH REH REH — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — REH REH REH — — RHF RHFA RHF RHFA — — — — — — — RHK RHKL — — — RHLM RHLM — — — — — — — 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Replacement Solutions To properly select the breaker for your existing panelboard: 1. Identify the panel type and the existing branch breaker. NH1B 2 NDP 2 HNDP 2 NFB 2. Select the appropriate breaker from the direct replacement solution column. As shown, three options are available. Option 1: Series C breakers are available as direct replacement for installation in CutlerHammer panelboards. They are available at your local distributors and are the most economical solution. Option 2: Original, but still-in-production breakers, (sometimes referred to as replacement breakers) are available from Eaton national warehouses. These are identical to the existing branch breakers. Option 3: Panelboard replacement breakers, available for out-ofproduction moldedcase breakers, are physically and electrically interchangeable with the existing breaker. Available in three-pole only. Refer to Pages V12-T3-80 through V12-T3-87 for further information. 3. For additional information, contact Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center at 1-800-356-1243 or your local Eaton Satellite plant. 25 V12-T4-4 CDP 3 Notes 1 New breakers that are a direct physical and electrical replacement for out-of-production breakers. Available in three-pole only. See Pages V12-T3-80 through V12-T3-87 for further information. 2 Connectors not available. 3 Not rated for 100% rated breakers. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 4 Panelboards Replacement Capabilities Original Cutler-Hammer Panelboard Breaker Replacement Chart, continued 1 Replacement Solutions Replacement Solutions Cutler-Hammer Panelboard Type Original Branch Circuit Breaker New Panelboard Type New Breaker Cutler-Hammer Panelboard Type Original Branch Circuit Breaker New Panelboard Type New Breaker MP40 1 CC PRL4B ED MP40 1 LC PRL4B LD CCH PRL4B — LS (A) PRL4B LD CHH PRL4B ED LH (A) PRL4B HLD EB PRL4B EHD MA PRL4B MDL EHB PRL4B EHD HMA PRL4B MDL EC PRL4B EHD MC PRL4B MDL EHC PRL4B FD HMC PRL4B MDL FB PRL4B FDB MS PRL4B MDL HFB PRL4B FD MH PRL4B MDL FC PRL4B FDB NB PRL4B ND HFC PRL4B HFD HNB PRL4B ND FH PRL4B HFD NC PRL4B ND FS PRL4B FD HNC PRL4B ND 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 JA PRL4B KDB NS PRL4B ND JB PRL4B JB NH PRL4B ND JS PRL4B HJD MP100 PRL4B HJD M50 Fusible switch PRL4F JH M50 Fusible switch JH PRL4B HJD PH 2 CH PRL3a CH JL PRL4B JDC CHB PRL3a CHB KA PRL4B KD KB PRL4B JD HKB PRL4B JD KS-D PRL4B KD KH-D PRL4B KD DA PRL4B DK LA PRL4B LD HLA PRL4B LD HLA PRL4B LD LAB PRL4B LDB LB PRL4B KD LBB PRL4B KDB HLB PRL4B KD PB 23 CC PRL3a CC CCH PRL3a CCH CHH PRL3a CHH EB PRL3a EHD EHB PRL3a EHD EC PRL3a EHD EC PRL3a EHD EHD PRL3a EHD FC PRL3a FD FS PRL3a FD FH PRL3a HFD FD PRL3a FD CH PRL1a CH CHB PRL1a CHB 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Notes 1 See also Page V12-T4-12. 2 See also Page V12-T4-11. 3 Connectors not available. 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T4-5 4 1 2 Panelboards Replacement Capabilities Plug-In Power Panelboards and Switchboards Replacement Solutions Cutler-Hammer Panelboard Type EE 12 3 Replacement Solutions Original Branch Circuit Breaker New Panelboard Type New Breaker Cutler-Hammer Panelboard Type Original Branch Circuit Breaker EP 13 FS PRL5P FD FH PRL5P HFD New Panelboard Type New Breaker FS PRL5P FD FH PRL5P HFD FL PRL5P HDC FL PRL5P FDC 4 JS PRL5P JD JS PRL5P JD JH PRL5P HJD JH PRL5P HJD 5 JL PRL5P JDC JL PRL5P JDC KS PRL5P KD KS PRL5P KD KH PRL5P HKD KH PRL5P HKD LS PRL5P LD LS PRL5P LD 7 LS(A) PRL5P LD LS(A) PRL5P LD LS(E) PRL5P LD LS(E) PRL5P LD 8 LH(B) PRL5P HLD LH(B) PRL5P HLD LH(A) PRL5P HLD LH(A) PRL5P HLD LL(E) PRL5P LDC LL(E) PRL5P LDC LS(B) PRL5P LD LS(B) PRL5P LD LH(E) PRL5P HLD LH(E) PRL5P HLD MS PRL5P MDL MS PRL5P MDL NS PRL5P ND NS PRL5P ND 6 9 10 11 12 13 MH PRL5P — MH PRL5P — CC PRL5P CC NH PRL5P HND CCH PRL5P — CC PRL5P CC CHH PRL5P CHH CCH PRL5P — CHH PRL5P CHH Notes 1 Not rated for 100% rated breakers. 2 See also Page V12-T4-13. 3 See also Page V12-T4-14. 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T4-6 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Panelboards Replacement Capabilities 4 Original Westinghouse Panelboard Breaker Replacement Chart Westinghouse Panelboard Type 1 Replacement Solutions Existing Branch Circuit Breaker New Panelboard Type New Breaker Panelboard Replacement Breaker 1 PRL3a PRL3a PRL1a PRL1aLX PRL1aLX PRL1a PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4B PRL4F PRL2a PRL2a PRL3a PRL3a PRL3a PRL3a PRL3a PRL3a PRL2a PRL1a PRL1aLX PRL3a PRL3a PRL1a PRL1a PRL1a PRL1a PRL1a PRL1a PRL1a PRL1a PRL2a PRL1a PRL1a PRL1a PRL1a PRL3a PRL3a PRL3a PRL3a PRL2a PRL2a — — BAB BAB BAB — — EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC FB-P TRI-PAC JDB, JD, HJD, JDC ED, EDH, EDC REH REH — — — HBAW, HBAX REH, RHF, RHFA 6 5 DK, KD, HKD, KDC LD, HLD LA-P TRI-PAC LD, HLD, LDC MDL LCL ND, HND NB-P TRI-PAC — HQP BAB — — — — — — — — — — — HQP HQP — BAB HQP HQP QPHW QBHW QHPW BAB HQP QBHW QPHW CA EB, EHD EHB, EHD FB, FDB GB GHB 5 Panelboards Manufactured Between 1937 and 1988 ABH 2 A2B 2 B10B 2 B10B-LX 2 B10B-LXX 2 B65B 2 CDP/HCDP 23 CDP/HCDP 34 FDP 7 H10P 2 H10B 2 NAB 2 NA1B 2 NDP 2 NEB 2 NHDP 2 NHEB 2 NH1B 2 NLAB 2 NLAB-LX 2 NLAB-AB 2 NLAB-ABH 2 NPLAB 2 NPLAPQ 2 NQC 2 NQB 2 NQP 2 Q10P 2 Q22P 2 Q22B 2 Q65P 2 W10B 2 W10P 2 W22B 2 W22P 2 WCA WEB WEHB WFB WGB 2 WGHB 2 E E BA BA BA HBA E, EA, EH, F, FA EB, EHB, EHD, FB, HFB, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC FB-P TRI-PAC JB, KB, HKB, JDB, JD, HJD, JDC CA, CAH, HCA DA, LB, LBB, HLB 6 JA, KA, HKA, DK, KD, HKD, KDC LA, LAB, HLA (400A) LA-P TRI-PAC LA, LC, HLA (600A) MA, HMA, MC, HMC LCL NB, HNB, NC, HNC NB-P TRI-PAC® Fusible switches HQP BA E E E, EA, EAH EA EH EH, FA E-277 QC QC QC QC QP QP QC BA QP QP QPH QBH HP BA HQP QBH QPH CA EB EHB FB GB GHB Notes 1 Not rated for 100% rated breakers. Available in three-pole only. See Pages V12-T3-80 through V12-T3-87 for further information. 2 Connectors not available. 3 See also Page V12-T4-9. 4 Only breakers of the same frame size can be installed across from each other (i.e., in the same horizontal plane). For other configurations, contact the Aftermarket Center in Sumter, SC (see Page V12-T4-22). 5 6 7 2 3 4 5 5 5 6 5 5 7 5 8 5 5 5 9 5 5 10 5 Fusible switches — — REH REH REH REH REH REH, RHFA REH — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Contact your local Eaton Field Sales office. KD breakers can be mounted across from LB breakers if a TAD3 line side adapter is used. All hardware works with this configuration. See also Page V12-T4-10. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 24 25 V12-T4-7 4 1 2 3 Panelboards Replacement Capabilities Original Westinghouse Panelboard Breaker Replacement Chart, continued Westinghouse Panelboard Type Original Branch Circuit Breaker Replacement Solutions New Panelboard Type New Breaker Panelboard Replacement Breaker BAB, QBHW PRL1a 1 BAB, QBHW — 1 BAB, QBHW — Panelboards Manufactured After 1988 PRL1 1 HQP, QPHW PRL1a PRL2 1 GB, GHB, GHBS PRL2a 1 GB, GHB, GHBS-D — PRL3 2 BAB, QBH PRL3a 3 BAB, QBHW — GB, GHB, GHBS PRL3a 3 GB, GHB, GHBS-D — 5 EHD, FD, FDB, HFD, FDC PRL3a 3 EHD, FD, FDB, HFD, FDC — ED, EDH, EDC PRL3a 3 ED, EDH, EDC — 6 CA, HCA, CAH PRL3a 3 ED — EHD, FD, FDB, HFD, FDC PRL4B EHD, FD, FDB, HFD, FDC — 7 ED, EDH, EDC PRL4B ED, EDH, EDC — CA, CAH, HCA PRL4B CA, CAH, HCA — 8 FCL, FB-P, FDB/LFB PRL4B FCL, FB-P, FDB/LFB — JD, JDB, HJD, JDC PRL4B JD, JDB, HJD, JDC — 9 DK, KDB, KD, HKD, KDC PRL4B DK, KDB, KD, HKD, KDC — LCL PRL4B LCL — 10 LA-P TRI-PAC PRL4B LA-P TRI-PAC — LC, HLC, LA, HLA PRL4B LC, HLC, LA, HLA — 11 LD, HLD, LDC, MD, MDS, ND, HND, NDC PRL4B LD, HLD, LDC, MDL, ND, HND, NDC — MC, HMC, MA, HMA PRL4B MC, HMC, MA, HMA — 12 NC, HNC, NB, HNB PRL4B NC, HNC, NB, HNB — NB-P TRI-PAC PRL4B NB-P TRI-PAC — BAB, QBGF, QBHW, QBHGF, GB, GHB PRL4B BAB, QBGF, QBHW, QBHGF, GB, GHB — Fusible switches 6 PRL4F — Fusible switches 4 13 14 15 16 PRL4B 4 PRL4F 5 Notes 1 See also Page V12-T4-15. 2 See also Page V12-T4-16. 3 See also Page V12-T4-17. 4 See also Page V12-T4-18. 5 See also Page V12-T4-19. 6 400A, 600A, 800A, 1200A, FDP connectors are NOT compatible with FDPW switches. 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T4-8 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Panelboards Replacement Capabilities CDP 4 CDP Panel Layout 1 Originally a Westinghouse Product 2 7-1/2" 3 5X 7X 9X 13X 13X Solid Neutral Bar 225A 400A 600A 800A 1200, 1600A 10X 13X 17X Thru-Feed Lugs 225A 250–400A 600, 800A 13X 15X 17X 19X 21X 23X 12 18 24 30 36 42 4 5 6 7 8 ● ● Determine the amount of space available in the panelboard for adding circuit breakers. 1.38 inches (35.1 mm) of panel height = one X space Determine the type of breaker needed for the required ampere rating and number of poles Ratings ● 1600A maximum Replacement Capabilities Breakers Refer to renewal parts data RP01400002E for a complete list of available parts including branch device retrofit kits, which include the device, as well as, the bus connectors and the required mounting hardware. Contact the Aftermarket Center in Sumter, SC (see Page V12-T4-22). 2X 1-Pole EB EHB, HFB / 1-Pole EB EHB, HFB 2-Pole EB EHB, FB 0 2-Pole EB EHB, FB 3-Pole EB EHB, FB 3-Pole EHB, FB 3X 2- and 3-Pole HFB 2- and 3-Pole HFB 2X 2-Pole CA, CAH 2-Pole CA, CAH 3X 3-Pole CA, CAH 3-Pole CA, CAH 2- or 3-Pole JB, KB, HKB 2- or 3-Pole JB, KB, HKB 3X 5" 3X 4X 9" 6X 8" 6X 11" 5X 7X 9X 12X 2- or 3-Pole DA LBB, LB HLB 13 225A Main Lug 250–400A Section 600A 800, 1200, 1600A 14 5" 15 9" 2- or 3-Pole LC, HLC LA 2- or 3-Pole MC, HMC LCL NC, HNC 11 12 2- or 3-Pole DA LBB, LB HLB 2- or 3-Pole LC, HLC LA 10 30" Wide Box 1X 9 16 8" 17 11" 18 48" Wide Box The panel layouts shown on this and the following pages will aid in determining the space available for the addition of molded-case circuit breakers into your existing CDP panelboards. 48" Wide Box Westinghouse CDP 30" Wide Box Total Number of Poles 19 20 21 7-1/2" 22 One X space = 1.38 inches (35.1 mm). Blank fillers are required for unused X space. 23 Notes 1 When only one EB, EHB or HFB single-pole breaker is required in conjunction with other frame size breakers, the single-pole breaker space required changes from 1X to 2X. 2 Must use three-pole connector kit. 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T4-9 4 2 Replacement Capabilities FDP FDP Panel Layout Originally a Westinghouse Product 7-1/2" Top Gutter 225A Solid 400A Neutral 600A Bar 800A 1200, 1600A 5X 7X 9X 13X 13X 3 4 5 4X 30A 30A 4X 60A 60A 4X 100A 100A 5X 100A 6 6X Main or Branch 200A (Horizontal Mounted) 7 4X 30A 30A 4X 60A 60A 5X 100A 8 10 11 12 The panel layouts shown on this and the following pages will aid in determining the space available for the addition of fusible switches into your existing FDP panelboards. ● 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 2P, 3P 240 Vac 2P 250 Vdc 2P, 3P 240V or 600 Vac 2P 250 Vdc 2P, 3P 600 Vac 100A Westinghouse FDP ● Determine the amount of space available in the panelboard for adding fusible switches. 1.38 inches (35.1 mm) of panel height = one X space Determine the type of fusible switch needed for the required ampere rating and number of poles Ratings ● 1600A maximum 11X 16X 21X Side Gutters Tables B and C 9 Side Gutters Tables F and G 1 Panelboards Main or Branch 400 or 600A (Horizontal Mounted) Main or Branch 800 or 1200A (Horizontal Mounted) Main or Branch 800 or 1200A (Vertical Mounted) 5X 8X 9X 12X Main Lug 225A Section 250–400A 600A 800, 1200, 1600A 7-1/2" Bottom Gutter One X space = 1.38 inches (35.1 mm). Blank fillers are required for unused X space. FDP and CDP Bus Dimensions Replacement Capabilities Fusible Switches Refer to renewal parts data RP01400002E for a complete list of available parts including branch device retrofit kits, which include the device, as well as, the bus connectors and the required mounting hardware. Contact the Aftermarket Center in Sumter, SC (see Page V12-T4-22). Vertical Busbar 1.38" TYP. 3.50" 23 2P, 3P 240 or 600 Vac 2P 250 Vdc 3.50" 24 25 Mounting Rails 19.50" V12-T4-10 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Panelboards Replacement Capabilities 4 PB/PH/PH-L 1 Originally a Cutler-Hammer Product 2 3 4 5 6 21 Inches Wide Cutler-Hammer PH-L 15 or 21 Inches Wide Cutler-Hammer PB 7 Ratings ● PB 400A maximum ● PH 800A main lug only or 600A main breaker ● PH-L 225A maximum 8 9 10 Replacement Capabilities Breakers Refer to renewal parts data RP01400003E for a complete list of available parts including branch device retrofit kits, which include the device, as well as, the bus connectors and the required mounting hardware. Contact the Aftermarket Center in Sumter, SC (see Page V12-T4-22). 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 21 or 26 Inches Wide Cutler-Hammer PH 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T4-11 4 MP40 MP40 Panel Layout Originally a Cutler-Hammer Product 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 2P EC EHC, FC 3X 3P EC, EMC, FC, 2P or 3P HFB 3P EC, EMC, FC, 2P or 3P HFB 2X 2P CC CCH 0 3X 3P CC, CCH, 2P or 3P JB, KB, HKB 0 ● Determine the amount of space available in the panelboard for adding circuit breakers. 1.38 inches (35.1 mm) of panel height = one X space Determine the type of breakers needed for the required ampere rating and number of poles Ratings ● 1600A maximum Replacement Capabilities Breakers Refer to renewal parts data RP01400003E for a complete list of available parts including branch device retrofit kits, which include the device, as well as, the bus connectors and the required mounting hardware. Contact the Aftermarket Center in Sumter, SC (see Page V12-T4-22). 2P or 3P DA, LBB, LB, HLB 0 2P or 3P LA, HLA, LC, HLC This space is not usable when C.B. to left is used as a main 0 8-1/2" 6X 6X 5" Side Gutters 2P EC EHC, FC 26" Wide 1P EB EHB, HFB Cutler-Hammer MP40 ● Nameplate / 1P EB EHB, HFB 4X The panel layouts shown on this and the following pages will aid in determining the space available for the addition of molded-case circuit breakers into your existing MP40 panelboards. Neutral 8-1/2" 38" Wide 9 15 1600A 2P or 3P MC, HMC 2P or 3P NC, HNC 1 6X 3X 225, 600A 4X 800, 1200A 9X 1600A 2 Main Lugs Bottom Gutter 6.50" up through 400A 12.0" 600–1600A 30" Wide 8 13 7X 2X 7 12 225– 1200A 1X 6 11 4X 1X 5 10 None 26" Wide 4 0X 5" Side Gutters 3 Top Gutter 6.50" through 400A 12.0" 600–1600A 30" Wide 2 Replacement Capabilities 38" Wide 1 Panelboards Notes 1 If the panelboard has a main breaker, no neutral, no split bus, or no sub-feed or feed-through lugs, add 1X to provide space for a nameplate. 2 Breakers of the same frame size, regardless of poles, may be mounted opposite of each other. 3 Only Type NC and HNC breakers require a 11.38-inch (289.1 mm) deep box. Standard box depth is 10.50 inches (266.7 mm). 4 When 1600A lug mains are for (4)–600 kcmil maximum copper cables per phase, the X unit space can be reduced to 4X. 24 25 V12-T4-12 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Panelboards Replacement Capabilities EE 4 EE Panelboard Panel Layout Originally a Cutler-Hammer Product 1 48" 42" 2 10" Gutter 7" 7" 3 Neutral—No X Space (May Be At Bottom) 4 20X 10X 400–600A Main Switch 400–600A Branch Switch 10X 7X 14X 1200A Lug Unit / 200A Branch Switch (600V With R Fusing) 7X 10" 10X Cutler-Hammer EE Panelboard The panel layouts shown on this and the following pages will aid in determining the space available for the addition of molded-case circuit breakers and fusible switches into your existing EE panelboards. ● ● Determine the amount of space available in the panelboard for adding replacement devices. 1.38 inches (35.1 mm) of panel height = one X space Determine the type of replacement device needed for the required ampere rating and number of poles Ratings ● 1200A maximum Replacement Capabilities Breakers and Fusible Switches Refer to renewal parts data RP01400003E for a complete list of available parts including branch device retrofit kits, which include the device, as well as, the bus connectors and the required mounting hardware. Contact the Aftermarket Center in Sumter, SC (see Page V12-T4-22). 8X 6X 6X 20X 800A Main Switch / 800A Branch Switch 600A Branch Lug Unit 600A Branch Lug Unit 12X MS, MH Main Breaker / NS, NH Main Breaker LS, LH 0 Breaker LS, LH 0 Breaker 7X 200A Branch 0 Switch 240V—R&T Fuse 600V—T-Fuse Only 400A Branch Lug Unit 6X 100A 0 Branch Switch 30A, 60A Branch Switch 10" 7 8 8X 9 6X 10 11 6X 12 8X 13 5X CC, CCH, CHH 0 FS, FH, JS, JH, JL CC, CCH, CHH 0 FS, FH, JS, JH, JL 3X 4X KS, KH 0 Breaker KS, KH 0 Breaker 4X 12X MS, MH Main Breaker 6 10X 3X 6X 5 14 15 16 6X 17 10" Gutter 18 Notes 1 Main device must be mounted at neutral end of double-bus panel. 2 May be used in 30.00-inch (762.0 mm) wide single bus interiors. 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T4-13 4 1 2 Panelboards Replacement Capabilities EP EP Panelboard Panel Layout Originally a Cutler-Hammer Product 42" 10" 3 2-Pole FS, FH, FL, 2-Pole FS, FH, FL, CC, CCH, CHH CC, CCH, CHH 3-Pole FS, FH, FL, 3-Pole FS, FH, FL, 3X CC, CCH, CHH CC, CCH, CHH 2P FS, FH, 2P FS, FH, Blank Wireway / 2X CC, CCH CC, CCH 2P FS, FH, 2P FS, FH, Blank Wireway / 2X CC, CCH CC, CCH 2-Pole 2-Pole Blank Wireway / 2X CHH CHH 3-Pole 3-Pole 3X Blank Wireway / CHH CHH 2X 4 5 6 7 3X 8 11 12 13 ● 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 ● Determine the amount of space available in the panelboard for adding circuit breakers. 1.38 inches (35.1 mm) of panel height = one X space Determine the type of breaker needed for the required ampere rating and number of poles 10" 3-Poles FS, FH, CC, CHH 3 Poles JS, JH, JL 3X Filler Plate 7" 2X 3X 2X 2X 2X 3X Blank Wireway / 3X 2-3 Pole LSB, LHB, LLB, LC 6X 6X 12X 800A MS, MH, MC Main Breaker 1 6X 6X 12X 800A MS, MH, MC, HMC Branch Breaker 6X 6X 12X 1200A NS, NH, NC, HNC Branch or Main Breaker 1 6X Cutler-Hammer EP Panelboard The panel layouts shown on this and the following pages will aid in determining the space available for the addition of molded-case circuit breakers into your existing EP panelboards. 3-Poles FS, FH, CC, CHH 3X 9 10 Neutral—No X Space Top or Bottom 7" 10" 0 10" 48" Notes 1 Blank wireway fillers are required opposite any dual breaker unit or adapter. 2 May be used in 30.00-inch (762.0 mm) wide single bus interiors. 3 Main device must be mounted at neutral end of double-bus panel. Ratings ● 1200A maximum Replacement Capabilities Breakers Refer to renewal parts data RP01400003E for a complete list of available parts including branch device retrofit kits, which include the device, as well as, the bus connectors and the required mounting hardware. Contact the Aftermarket Center in Sumter, SC (see Page V12-T4-22). 24 25 V12-T4-14 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Panelboards Replacement Capabilities PRL1 and PRL2 Panelboards Originally a Westinghouse Product 4 PRL1a and PRL2a Panelboards 1 Current Product 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 PRL2 with Trim Ratings ● 600A maximum Replacement Capabilities Breakers Refer to renewal parts data RP01400002E for a complete list of available parts including branch device bus connectors mounting hardware. For further information, contact the Aftermarket Center in Sumter, SC. Refer to Page V12-T4-22. PRL1a 11 Ratings ● 400A maximum Replacement Capabilities Breakers Refer to renewal parts data RP01400001E and RP01414001E for a complete list of available parts including branch device bus connectors and mounting hardware. Renewal parts are available from your Eaton Satellite plant. Refer to Page V12-T4-22. 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T4-15 4 1 2 Panelboards Replacement Capabilities PRL3 PRL3 Panel Layout Originally a Westinghouse Product No Neutral 2X 100–600A 2X 100, 225A Neutral Section 8X 400, 600A 3 Sub Chassis 4 Poles 10X-12 13X-18 15X-24 17X-30 19X-36 21X-42 5 6 8 12 Westinghouse PRL3 The panel layouts shown on this and the following pages will aid in determining the space available for the addition of molded-case circuit breakers into your existing PRL3 panelboards. 13 14 16 ● Determine the amount of space available in the panelboard for adding circuit breakers. 1.38 inches (35.1 mm) of panel height = one X space Determine the type of breaker needed for the required ampere rating and number of poles 17 Ratings ● 600A maximum 18 Replacement Capabilities Breakers Refer to renewal parts data RP01400002E for a complete list of available parts including branch device retrofit kits, which include the device, as well as, the bus connectors and the required mounting hardware. Contact the Aftermarket Center in Sumter, SC (see Page V12-T4-22). 19 20 21 22 1-Pole 2-Pole 2-Pole 2-Pole ● 15 1-Pole 1-Pole 9 11 (100A Max.) 400A Maximum Bus Rating 7 10 BAB /0 QBH / GB 12 GHB 12 23 3-Pole 2- and 3-Pole Main Lug Section Horizontal Mounting Main Breaker Section Vertically Mounted 1X 2X 3X EHD (100A Max.) FDB FD HFD FDC (150A Max.) 3X CA, CAH, HCA 3 (225A Max.) 2X 100, 225A 7X 400, 600A 3X 2P EHD (100A Max.) 4 3X 2P FDB, FD, HFD, FDC 4 (150A Max.) 4X 3P EHD (100A Max.) 4 4X 3P FDB, FD, HFD, FDC (150A Max.) 4 4X 2P and 3P CA, CAH, HCA 4 (225A Max.) 7X EHD (100A Max.) 7X FDB, FD, HFD, FDC (150A Max.) 9X CA, CAH (225A Max.) 9X FCL, FB-P 5 (100A Max.) 14X JD, JDB, HJD, JDC (250A Max.) 14X DK, KD, KDB, HKD, KDC (400A Max.) 19X LC, HLC, LA (600A Max.) 22X LCL 6 , LA-P 7 (400A Max.) Notes 1 If panel contains only BAB or QBH branch breakers, use a PRL1 panelboard. 2 BAB and QBH breakers with shunt trips require one additional pole space, i.e.; one-pole is two-pole size, two-pole is three-pole size, and three-pole is four-pole size. 3 GB and GHB breakers cannot be mixed on same subchassis as BAB or QBH. 4 If panel contains only GB or GHB branch breakers, use a PRL2 panelboard. 5 Not recommended for motor loads. Use JD circuit breaker. 6 Horizontally mounted 15–150A main breakers EHD, FDB, FD, HFD and FDC will be furnished as branch breaker construction. Branch breakers one, two or three poles as required, may be located opposite these main breakers. 7 FBP and LAP top mounting only. 8 100% rated breaker. 9 LCL main breaker requires 6.50-inch (165.1 mm) deep box. 24 25 V12-T4-16 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Panelboards Replacement Capabilities PRL3a PRL3a Panel Layout Current Product Main Lugs 4.01" 4.01" Neutral 2P 10.00" 3.92" PRL3a The panel layouts shown on this and the following pages will aid in determining the space available for the addition of molded-case circuit breakers into your existing PRL3a panelboards. ● ● 4 Determine the amount of space available in the panelboard for adding circuit breakers. 1.38 inches (35.1 mm) of panel height = one X space Determine the type of breaker needed for the required ampere rating and number of poles 4.01" 3.92" 5X 100A Oversized #6–350 kcmil 100A Subfeed (2) #14–1/0 5X 250A Std #6–350 kcmil 6X 250A Oversized 4/0–500 kcmil 6X 250A Subfeed (2) #6–350 kcmil 8X 400A Std (2) 4/0–500 10X 400A Oversized (2) 3/0–750 kcmil 8X 600A Std (2) 4/0–500 10X 600A Oversized (2) 3/0–750 kcmil 5X 8X 11X Same Cable Size as MLO (1)–1P 1X (2)–1P (2)–1P (3)–1P (3)–1P 2X (3)–1P (1)–3P 3X (1)–3P 3X 2P 2P 2X 3P 3P 3X 4.01" QUICKLAG BAB–5.70" GHB–5.68" GHB Twin Subfeed Breaker Single Subfeed Breaker Through Feed Lugs X 4 5 ED, EDH, EDC 225A Max. Note: Line Side May Be Either Left or Right. Distance From Load Side of Breaker To Box Will Always Be 3.92 inches 7 EHD 100A Max. FD, HFD, FDC, FDB 150A Max. 8 9 Same Cable Size as MLO 12X Bus Connected 19X 16X Cable Connected (Wireout) 3X 6 Ckt. 5X 12 Ckt. 8X 18 Ckt. 24 Ckt. 10X 4.01" 3 6 3X (1)–1P (1)–2P Split Bus Meter Loop 2 2X (1)–1P 3.92" 1 2X 3X GHB–5.68" 4.01" 100A Std #14–1/0 3P ASCO 920 (Split Bus) BAB–5.70" 2X 10 ASCO 920 (30–225A) 225A Max. 100A Max. For Lug Size See Main Lug Size Chart BAB, QBGF, QBHW, QBHGF 100A Max. or GB, GHB 100A Max. Note: May Have Multiple Sections Per Panel, Max. 24 Ckts. Per Section. 20X JD, JDB, HJD, JDC, 250A Max. X Size Per Main Breaker Layout X Size Per MLO Size Chart Not Available With Subfeed Breaker 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Ratings ● 600A maximum 18 Replacement Capabilities Breakers Refer to renewal parts data RP01400001E and RP01414001E for a complete list of available parts including branch device retrofit kits, which include the device, as well as, the bus connectors and the required mounting hardware. Retrofit kits and renewal parts are available from your Eaton Satellite plant. Refer to Page V12-T4-22. 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T4-17 4 2 Replacement Capabilities PRL4B PRL4B Panel Layout Current Product (Originally a Westinghouse Product) 400 A Maximum Bus Rating 1P 1P 2P 2P 3P 3P 2P 2P 3P 3P 7 PRL4B 15 21 22 23 24 ● Determine the amount of space available in the panelboard for adding circuit breakers. 1.38 inches (35.1 mm) of panel height = one X space Determine the type of breaker needed for the required ampere rating and number of poles Ratings ● 1200A maximum 36" Wide Box 3X 2X CA, CAH, HCA 225 A Max. 3X 2 or 3P 4X DK, KD, KDB HKD, KDC 6X LC, LCC, HLC, HLCC, LCY, LD, LDB, HLD, LDC, LA Load 2 or 3P 2 or 3P 2 or 3P 2 or 3P 2 or 3P 44" Wide Box ● 14 20 2 or 3P The panel layouts shown on this and the following pages will aid in determining the space available for the addition of molded-case circuit breakers into your existing PRL4B panelboards. EHD 1 100 A Max. FDB, FD 1 HFD, FDC 1 225 A Max. 2X JD, JDB, HJD, JDC 250 A Max. 2 or 3P 10 19 42 100 A Max. 3X 2 or 3P 9 18 20X QBH QBHGF GB 0 GHB 0 2 or 3P 8 17 30 BAB 1X 24" Wide Box 6 16 16X 36" Wide Box 24" Wide Box 5 13 Poles 18 QBGF 4 12 11X Sub Panel / 3 11 Breaker To Fusible Transition, All Widths 1X Filler 2 or 3P 2 or 3P 44" Wide Box 1 Panelboards 400 A Max. 600 A Max. 3X FCL, FB-P 100 A Max. 3X JD, JDB, HJD, JDC 250 A Max. 6X LCL, LA-P, 400 A Max. MC, MCC, HMC, HMCC, MCY, MA 800 A Max. 6X NC, HNC, NB, NCY 1200 A Max. 4X DK, KD, KDB, HKD, KDC 6X NB-P 800 A Max. 400 A Max. One X space = 1.38 inches (35.1 mm). Blank fillers are required for unused X space. Notes 1 Maximum amperes connected to any one connector cannot exceed 140A. 2 GB and GHB breakers cannot be mixed on the same subchassis as BAB or QBHW. 3 When only one single-pole breaker of the group is required on either side of chassis, the single-pole breaker space required changes from 1X to 2X. Replacement Capabilities Breakers Refer to renewal parts data RP01400001E and RP01414001E for a complete list of available parts including branch device retrofit kits, which include the device, as well as, the bus connectors and the required mounting hardware. Retrofit kits and renewal parts are available from your Eaton Satellite plant. Refer to Page V12-T4-22. 25 V12-T4-18 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Panelboards Replacement Capabilities PRL4F 4 PRL4F Panel Layout Current Product (Originally a Westinghouse Product) 1 2 1X 30A 30A 4X 3 60A 60A 4X 4 100A 250V Max. 100A 250V Max. 4X 5 5X 6 100A 200A Main or Branch Switch 100A 600 Vac 36" Wide Box 36" Wide Box Fusible To Breaker Transition, All Widths 7 6X 8 100A 600 Vac 5X 9 10 PRL4F 400 or 600A Branch Switch The panel layouts shown on this and the following pages will aid in determining the space available for the addition of fusible switches into your existing PRL4F panelboards. ● 12 800 or 1200A Branch Switch 11X 44" Wide Box Determine the amount of space available in the panelboard for adding fusible switches. 1.38 inches (35.1 mm) of panel height = one X space Determine the type of fusible switch needed for the required ampere rating and number of poles 11 400 or 600A Main or Branch Switch 44" Wide Box ● 11X 13 14 15 16X 16 17 Ratings ● 1200A maximum 18 Replacement Capabilities Fusible Switches Refer to renewal parts data RP01400001E and RP01414001E for a complete list of available parts including branch device retrofit kits, which include the device, as well as, the bus connectors and the required mounting hardware. Retrofit kits and renewal parts are available from your Eaton Satellite plant. Refer to Page V12-T4-22. 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T4-19 4 1 2 Panelboards Technology Upgrades Technology Upgrades Pow-R-Command™ Surge Protection Devices— SPD Series 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Eaton SPD Series— Surge Protection Device The Eaton SPD Series of surge protection products ensures that equipment is protected with the safest, most reliable and most advanced UL 1449 3rd Edition certified surge protectors. The array of features, options and configurations ensures that there is a unit for all electrical applications, including service entrances, distribution switchboards, panelboards and point-of-use applications. Field installation is required. Benefits ● The SPD Series can be externally mounted to existing distribution equipment ● Surge ratings: 50, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 250, 300 and 400 kA ● Standard NEMA 1 enclosure, optional NEMA 4 and 4X ● Surface or flush mounting ● Full range of diagnostic and monitoring options ● Remote mountable display panel ● Available with optional internal disconnect Pow-R-Command Lighting Control Eaton’s Pow-R-Command is a family of microprocessorbased lighting control systems designed for today’s modern facilities. They may be used as a standalone, or networked for the control of lighting and other branch circuits. Existing facilities can be retrofitted to include various Pow-R-Command scenarios allowing customers varying degrees of control. For more information on upgrading your building to include the energy savings and control of Pow-R-Command lighting control systems, contact your local Eaton Field Sales office. System Features Day/Date/Time of Day scheduling ● Holiday scheduling— up to 30 days/year ● Astronomical time scheduling ● Real-time clock ● Hardware diagnostics ● Off warning by blinking lights ● Manual load override control ● Brownout and power failure recovery ● Telephone override of schedules ● Switch override of schedules ● Remote access to system ● Dimming systems for fluorescent fixtures ● Priority load management ● For more information about the SPD Series surge protection, contact your local Eaton Field Sales office. 24 25 V12-T4-20 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 4 Panelboards Replacement Capabilities Panelboard Retrofits Armed with the necessary information about the existing installation and the needed upgrade, the professional staff at your local Satellite plant can offer the assistance and application support to ensure an accurate quotation and on-time delivery of a quality retrofit product. Pow-R-Line 1R and 2R Renovation Panel Application Description ● ● ● ● Standards and Certifications ● ● ● Another Custom-Assembled Panelboard Capability from Your Local Eaton Satellite Save time and money when upgrading and expanding existing electrical services by using existing panelboard enclosures and conduit runs. Retrofitting existing panelboards can be an effective solution for: ● ● ● ● ● ● Providing additional circuits for load growth Replacing obsolete equipment Upgrading protective device interrupting ratings Accommodating system change and additions Adding ground fault circuit interrupters Adding lighting controls Adding surge protection devices The unique capabilities of the Eaton Satellite plants can provide special configurations to meet the special needs encountered in retrofit applications. Renovation Panel Product Description ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Pow-R-Line 1R and 2R renovation panelboards, or custom-built panelboard interiors and trims can be provided to retrofit most any manufacturer’s existing panelboard enclosure. UL 67 Federal Specification W-P-115c CSA® C22.2 No. 29 The Pow-R-Line 1R and 2R retrofit panelboard is designed specifically for use in the renovation of existing electrical systems. This innovative solution employs a chassis design that enables the use of the existing back box, conduit and cables. An exclusive depth-adjusting mechanism and an integrated trim assembly provides for fast, trouble-free mounting of the new panelboard interior into any existing enclosure. Type PRL1a ● Lighting and appliance branch panelboards Fully rated or series rated Interrupting capacities to 100 kA symmetrical Suitable for use as service entrance equipment where specified on the order 240 and 480 Vac Single-phase three-wire or single-phase two-wire Three-phase three-wire or three-phase four-wire 225A maximum 100A maximum branch breakers Fits existing box depths from 4.50 to 6.00 inches (114.3 to 152.4 mm) deep Integrally mounted neutral assembly Ground bar and bonding conductor included Neutral and ground convertible from left-right Bolt-on branch breakers Factory assembled— custom and standard trims available Chassis Features Designed to accommodate minimal box widths at 14.00 inches (355.6 mm). Innovative telescoping chassis accommodates depths from 4.50 to 6.00 inches (114.3 to 152.4 mm) without the need for box modifications. Universal mounting locations allow the neutral and grounds to be relocated from top to bottom or left to right side of back plate. High quality laser cut trim with lock. Trim and door mount directly to the chassis assembly. Concealed trim hardware is not dependent on back box for mounting. Refer to publication CA01417001E for complete information. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 The panelboard chassis is designed for the use of main lugs or a main breaker and can accommodate 18, 30 or 42 branch circuits. 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Pow-R-Line 1R Retrofit Chassis 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T4-21 4 Panelboards Satellite Locations 1 Product Support Services 2 Satellite Locations Baltimore 7451 Coca Cola Drive Suite C Hanover, MD 21076 (410) 796-7777 Fax (410) 796-7755 3 4 Seattle 1604 15th Street SW Suite 114 Auburn, WA 98001 (253) 833-5021 Fax (253) 833-5058 5 6 Chicago 220 Windy Point Drive Glendale Heights, IL 60139 (630) 260-6303 Fax (630) 690-7453 New Jersey 96 Stemmers Lane Westampton, NJ 08060 (609) 835-4230 Fax (609) 835-4777 Hartford 40A International Drive Windsor, CT 06095 (860) 298-1305 Fax (860) 298-1306 Cleveland 12875 Corporate Drive Parma, OH 44130 (216) 433-0616 Fax (216) 433-0545 7 8 9 10 11 12 San Francisco 20923 Cabot Boulevard Hayward, CA 94545 (510) 784-8981 Fax (510) 784-8980 Los Angeles 11120 Philadelphia Street Mira Loma, CA 91752 (951) 685-5788 Fax (951) 685-3775 13 14 15 16 17 Denver 2450 Airport Boulevard Unit C, Dock 8 Aurora, CO 80011 (303) 366-2080 Fax (303) 366-9993 Phoenix 921 South Park Lane Suite 1 Tempe, AZ 85281 (480) 449-4222 Fax (480) 449-4223 The Eaton satellite concept is unique to the industry and remains the only manufacturer to provide this service. Eaton manufactures and delivers standard and custom assembled panelboards and switchboards within days. A phone call is all that is necessary for immediate order entry. Further Information Dallas 631 Westport Parkway Suite 100 Grapevine, TX 76051 (817) 251-6797 Fax (817) 251-6249 Houston 10810 West Little York Suite 100 Houston, TX 77041 (713) 939-9696 Fax (713) 939-0427 Main manufacturing plant. Raleigh 9400 Globe Center Drive Suite 121 Morrisville, NC 27560 (919) 544-7074 Fax (919) 572-9751 Sumter (803) 481-6843 Atlanta 7000 Highlands Parkway SE Suite 102 Smyrna, GA 30082 (678) 309-4260 Fax (770) 433-1863 Orlando 9436 South Ridge Park Court Suite 100 Orlando, FL 32819 (407) 264-9306 Fax (407) 264-9310 Pricing Information Price List for MP40 and MP-200—PL01400003E Publication Number Description RP01400003E Renewal Parts Data for MP40 and MP-200 RP01400003E Renewal Parts Data for PB, PH, PH-L, EP and EE 19 RP01400002E Renewal Parts Data for CDP/HCDP, FDP, PRL1-LX, PRL1, PRL2 and PRL3 RP01400001E Renewal Parts Data for PRL1a, PRL2a, PRL3a, PRL4B, PRL4F and PRL5P 20 RP01414001E Panelboard Renewal Parts Supplement 18 St. Louis 56 Soccer Park Road Fenton, MO 63026 (636) 717-3445 Fax (636) 717-3505 Price List for PB, PH, PH-L, EP and EE—PL01400003E Price List for CDP/HCDP, FDP, PRL1-LX, PRL1, PRL2 and PRL3—PL01400002E Price List for PRL1a, PRL2a, PRL3a, PRL4B, PRL4F and PRL5P—PL01400001E Discount Symbol CE9 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T4-22 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Loadcenters BR Renovation and CH Loadcenters 5 Loadcenters Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type CH Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type BR Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product History Time Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type CH Replacement Parts and Mechanical Interlocks. . . . . . . . . Type CH Vintage Replacement Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type BR Replacement Parts and Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Classified Replacement Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type CL and CHQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type CHNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type CTL and CHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Renovation Loadcenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-On Neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Retrofit Interiors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surge Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pricing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T5-2 V12-T5-2 V12-T5-2 V12-T5-2 V12-T5-3 V12-T5-3 V12-T5-4 V12-T5-10 V12-T5-12 V12-T5-20 V12-T5-20 V12-T5-20 V12-T5-20 V12-T5-21 V12-T5-21 V12-T5-22 V12-T5-23 V12-T5-25 V12-T5-26 V12-T5-26 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T5-1 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Loadcenters Product Description Loadcenters are enclosed assemblies used for power distribution and circuit protection in residential, commercial and light industrial applications. The assembly consists of an enclosure, an interior assembly and a cover. The interior assembly consists of a backpan where the bus assembly is mounted. Incoming power is terminated at main lugs or a main circuit breaker. Load circuit protection is provided by molded-case circuit breakers that plug onto the 15 16 17 18 Extra 1.50-Inch (38.1 mm) Knockout for Bundling Provides for easier installation, less installation time. Top or Bottom Feed ■ Straight-in wiring saves labor and material ■ Only one panel for either application— no modifications necessary 21 22 23 Type CH Family Eaton’s electrical business began manufacturing the CH series of loadcenters and circuit breakers in 1962. Changes have occurred over the years due to code changes, UL® listed Type BR Family With the acquisition of Westinghouse’s Distribution and Control Business Unit (DCBU) in 1994, Eaton gained the circuit breaker and loadcenter manufacturing and marketing operations of Westinghouse. Prior to 1989, these products were manufactured by Westinghouse’s Bryant subsidiary in Bridgeport, CT. The products from this facility bore the Westinghouse and Bryant nameplates. In 1988, Westinghouse purchased Challenger Electric, redesigned the product, and moved all production from Bridgeport to Jackson, MS. As Eaton integrated the product lines in 1995, all loadcenter production shifted to the Lincoln, IL, facility. “Tangential” Center Knockout for easier installation Single Keyhole Mounting Just one keyhole at top and bottom for easier mounting and leveling. Unique Sandalwood Finish Immediately recognizable, aesthetically appealing, scratchresistant powder coating. Separately Packaged Covers Commercial Grade Main Breaker ■ 35 kAIC series rated main breaker in 150 and 200A loadcenters ■ 42 and 100 kAIC series ratings available Drywall Marking on Enclosure Indicates proper mounting depth for flush applications. One-Piece Silver Flash Plated Copper Bus Provides superior conductivity throughout the entire product line. 19 20 Product History requirements and product enhancements. Three major design changes occurred in 1969, 1982 and 1995. The 3/4-inch wide feeder circuit breakers, silver flash plated copper bus, sandalwood (tan) painted box and industryleading warranties have been the trademarks of this premium product through the years. Type CH Loadcenter 13 14 bus assembly. Loadcenters are used on services providing no more than 240 Vac, and are available with bus rated from 40 to 600A. Loadcenter covers are available as surface, flush or combination. ■ Full line of “true” surface and combination covers ■ Built-in flush leveling feature ■ Choice of circuit identification by breaker labels or circuit directory Neutral Design (for styles as indicated) ■ Bonding strap is easily removable for sub-panel applications providing a ground and neutral ■ Factory-bonded for service entrance applications providing a split neutral ■ Ample additional 2/0 lugs provided; no kits necessary ■ 200% size neutral Steel Backpan ■ Provides positive, reliable breaker mounting ■ One-piece designed for stability Convertible Styles Available ■ Uses field-installable main breaker or main lug kits ■ Flexible inventory—same breaker is used in loadcenter and circuit breaker enclosures Improved Endwall Knockouts Larger KOs are balanced to enhance installed appearance and to ease use of existing wiring. 24 25 V12-T5-2 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 5 Loadcenters Product History Time Line 1 Originally a Cutler-Hammer Product—3/4-Inch Non-Interchangeable Product Line 2 Door latch is tan plastic, twin neutrals, CH8_S or F. (Blank is 1 letter indicating box size, i.e., B, C, E, J, K.) 3 4 Metal latch, single neutral, CH7_S or F. (Blank is 2 letters indicating box size, i.e., BB, CC, JJ, KK.) 5 Cover catalog numbers CH7_S or F. (Blank is 1 letter indicating box size, i.e., B, C, D, 3, G, J, K.) 6 7 Originally a Westinghouse Product—1-Inch Interchangeable Product Line 8 9 10 Replacement Capabilities 11 Replacement Capabilities 12 Type Loadcenter Generations Part 2 CH CH1 CH2 BR BR1 BR2 BR3 Breakers ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Surge arresters ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Covers ■ ■ ■ ■ Deadfronts (NEMA® 3R) ■ ■ ■ ■ Door assemblies (NEMA 3R) ■ ■ ■ ■ MCB kits ■ ■ ■ ■ Neutral bars ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Ground bars ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Breaker accessories ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Labels ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Lugs ■ ■ ■ ■ Door locks ■ ■ ■ ■ Door latches ■ Paint ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Closure plates ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Hubs ■ ■ ■ ■ Spare parts kit ■ Whole house AC surge protection ■ ■ ■ 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 ■ 20 21 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Notes 1 CH and BR are the current product designations. CH1, CH2, BR1, BR2 and BR3 are used only to identify previous generations of the product described in the replacement capabilities chart above. These are not actual product designations. 2 Catalog number of loadcenter required to obtain correct part. 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T5-3 5 1 CHSF2125 Loadcenters Type CH Type CH Replacement Parts Description Ordering Quantity 1 Catalog Number 2 Subfeed lug blocks—two-pole, 125A, 3/4-inch (19.1 mm) spaces needed 1 CHSF2125 Subfeed lug blocks—three-pole, 125A, 3/4-inch (19.1 mm) spaces needed 1 CHSF3125 3 Neutral/ground lug—add-on neutral or ground lug 1 NL20 1 NL30 1 NL300 Filler plates—3/4-inch (19.1 mm) space circuit breaker space 25 CHFP CSR main circuit breaker filler plate (with hardware) 1 CSRFP Door lock—12–42 circuits, and 100–225A 1 TDL Sandlewood spray paint 1 SPCSW ANSI-61 light gray touchup paint for outdoor loadcenters 1 SPC61 Isolated neutral assembly (computer circuits) 1 BINA Circuit directory—adhesive backed 10 TCD Cover screws 25 LCCS Cover replacement latch 14-5/16 inch (363.55 mm) wide loadcenters only 1 CHRLS Circuit marking strip (next to breakers) 10 CHMS Circuit identification label (preprinted breaker labels next to breakers) 25 CHBL Series rated caution label 25 SRL 10 Branch circuit numbering strip 20 CHNS Bonding strap with screw 1 BSSUSE 11 125A retainer bracket for sub-fed devices 1 CH125RB 4 CHSF3125 5 6 7 CHFP 8 9 TDL BINA 12 Replacement lock 400A devices 1 52-2751 Replacement latch for NEMA 3R—four circuits and above 1 CH3RLATCH Lock for vintage CH7 cover 1 CH9FL 13 14 CHRLS 15 16 Mechanical Interlocks 17 Fits Loadcenter Catalog Numbers Mechanical Interlock Panel Cover Catalog Number Type Flush Surface A CH12L125B, CH16L125B, CH12L3125B, CH14B100B CH8BFM CH8BSM CH20L125C, CH24L125C, CH18L3125C, CH24L3125C, CH22B100C, CH22N100C CH8CFM CH8CSM 19 CH24L150D, CH32L150D, CH24L3225D, CH30L3150D CH8DFM CH8DSM CH42L225G, CH42L3225G CH8GFM CH8GSM 20 Inner cover of Box B raintight — CH8BRM CH8CRM 18 CH8BRM Type A Inner cover of Box C raintight — CH24B150E, CH24B200E CH8EFM CH8ESM CH32B150J, CH32B200J, CH3242B200J, CH32N200J, CH32B225J CH8JFM CH8JSM 22 CH42B200K, CH42N200K, CH42B225K CH8KFM CH8KSM CHPC32B150L, CHPC32B200L, CHPC32N200L CHPC8B32LFM — 23 CHPC42B150L, CHPC42B200L, CHPC42N200L CHPC8B42LFM — 21 CH8EFM Type B 24 B CH8B150RF, CH8B200RF, CH8N200RF, CH24B150R, CH24B200R CH3RDF7M — CH32B150R, CH32B200R, CH32N200R, CH32B225R CH3RDF9M — CH42B200R, CH42N200R, CH42B225R CH3RDF10M — Note 1 Must be purchased in multiples of ordering quantities indicated. 25 V12-T5-4 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 5 Loadcenters Type CH Replacement Rainproof Conduit Hubs DS100H1 Conduit Size Description Inches (mm) Ordering Quantity 1 Catalog Number Group 1—for use with 70, 100 and 125A MLO and MCB loadcenters and circuit breaker enclosures, and the following 150 and 200A panels: CH8B150RF, CH8B200RF 0.75 (19.1) 1 DS075H1 1.00 (25.4) 1 DS100H1 1.25 (31.8) 1 DS125H1 1.50 (38.1) 1 DS150H1 2.00 (50.8) 1 DS200H1 2.00 (50.8) 1 DS200H2 2.50 (63.5) 1 DS250H2 3.00 (76.2) 1 DS300H2 Adapter kit—allows Installing a Group 1 hub on devices arranged for Group 2 hubs — 1 DS900AP Group 1—small blank hub closure plate — 1 DS900CP1 Group 2 —þlarge blank hub closure plate — 1 DS900CP2 Group 2—for use with 150, 200 and 225A MLO and MCB loadcenters and circuit breaker enclosure except for the following 150 and 200A panels: CH8B150RF, CH8B200RF Length Inches (mm) Ordering Quantity 2 Catalog Number dssssds 2.54 (64.5) 1 GBK5 2 dssssdsj 3.59 (91.2) 1 GBK520 2 Description (See Legend) 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 2 4.29 (109.0) 1 GBK10 5.34 (135.6) 1 GBK1020 2 1 GBK13 2 f d f f f k f d f k f f f k f dssssdssssss dssssdssssssj 4.61 (117.1) dssssdssssssssss 5.69 (144.5) 1 GBK14 2 dssssdssssssssssj 6.74 (171.2) 1 GBK1420 2 dssssdsssssssssssssssss 8.14 (206.8) 1 GBK21 2 dssssdsssssssssssssssssj 9.19 (233.4) 1 GBK2120 2 ssssssssdssssssdsssssss 7.94 (201.7) 1 CH9GP21 34 Ground Bar Legend s = (3) #14–#10 Cu/Al or (1) #14–#4 Cu/Al j = (1) #6–2/0 Cu/Al = (1) 1/0–14 or (3) #10–12 Cu/Al = (1) #14–1/0 Cu/Al or (3) #14–#10 Cu/Al d = Mounting hole 11 12 13 14 f k 15 16 Replacement Grounded “B” Phase Adapters 17 Replacement Neutral Bar Accessories Maximum Amperes Three-Phase Loadcenter Types of Panels Kit Catalog Number 5 Description Catalog Number 5 125 12–32 circuit main lug CHGRD1 Split neutral kit for 22 circuit 125A maximum CHSN125C 225 Main lug and CHH main breaker panels CHGRD2 Split neutral kit for 32 circuit 200A maximum CHSN225J CC main CB panels CHGRD3 Split neutral kit for 42 circuit 200A maximum CHSN225K Replacement neutral for all C type boxes CHN125C Replacement neutral for all D type boxes CHN125D Replacement neutral for all L type boxes CHN225L Isolated Neutral Assembly (computer circuits) BINA Replacement Neutral Lugs for Vintage Loadcenters Catalog Number Description 2 8 Replacement Ground Bar Kits GBK14 1 Vintage 1 (CH1) 125A CH9CM1 Vintage 1 (CH1) 225A CH9CM2 Vintage 2 (CH2) 125A CH9SU3 Vintage 2 (CH2) 225A CH9SU2 18 19 20 21 22 Notes 1 Must be purchased in multiples of ordering quantities indicated. 2 Distance between mounting holes is 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm). 3 For single- and three-phase 400A loadcenters. 4 Distance between mounting holes is 2-13/32 inches. 5 Cannot be used in Safety Breaker Panels. Classic Plus Panels only. 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T5-5 5 1 CHHT Loadcenters Type CH Breaker Replacement Accessories Description 2 Catalog Number 25 CHHT Handle Ties 2 Handle tie bar for physically joining the handles of two adjacent single-pole Type CH circuit breakers (molded plastic handle cover) 3 Ordering Quantity 1 CHPL Handle Lockoffs 34 Padlockable device for locking the handle of single-, two- or three-pole Type CH circuit breakers (escutcheon mounted) 5 1 CHPL Padlockable device for locking the handle of a single-, two- or three-pole Type CHGFI circuit breaker (escutcheon mounted) 5 1 CHPLGF Padlockable device for locking the handle of main circuit breaker Types CC and CCH into the ON or OFF position.(screw mounted) 6 1 CCPL 5 Padlockable device for locking the handle of main breaker Types BW and CSR into the ON or OFF position (escutcheon mounted) 5 1 MCBPL 6 Device used to secure handle in ON or OFF position for single-pole Type CH circuit breakers (handle mounted) 8 10 CHLO Hold-down retainer kit for single-, two-, three-pole Type CH circuit breakers. For 6–24 circuit 125A single- and three-phase, 12–42 circuit single-phase 225A and 24–42 circuit three-phase 225A MLO Type CH loadcenters 1 CH125RB Hold-down retainer kit for single-, two-, three-pole Type CH circuit breakers for 2–4 circuit MLO CH loadcenters. 1 CH125RB24 1 CH9MB270 4 7 8 CHPLGF Handle Lockdogs 47 Hold-Down Kits 9 MCBPL Mounting Bases CHLO 9 Mounting base for two-pole Type CH circuit breaker—70A maximum Main Breaker Lug Kits Types CC and CCH main breaker lug kit (2) 300 kcmil 1 CCL300 Type CSR main breaker lug kit (2) 300 kcmil 1 MCBL300 10 CHML 10 CHPLOFF 12 10 CHPLOFFA 10 CHL1P 13 10 CHL2P 10 11 14 CH125RB Mechanical Interlock Type CH for two-, three- and four-pole breakers CH9MB270 15 16 17 CHML 18 19 20 Notes 1 Must be purchased in multiples of ordering quantities indicated. 2 Handle ties: typically used to join two similar independent single-pole breakers to form a two-pole noncommon trip breaker. 3 Handle lockoffs: devices that use a padlock to lock the circuit breaker’s handle in the ON or OFF position. 4 Requires one additional pole space. 5 Escutcheon mounted: device mounted semipermanently to the face of the circuit breaker and secured by the loadcenter deadfront. 6 Screw mounted: device permanently mounted to the face of the circuit breaker by the use of a non-removable screw. 7 Handle lockdogs: devices that are used to secure a circuit breaker’s handle in the ON or OFF position. Handle lockdogs are not padlockable devices. 8 Handle mounted: device mounted above or below handle using spring pressure. 9 Hold-down kits: devices used to secure the circuit breaker to the loadcenter for back-feed main application. See NEC Article 384.16(g). 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T5-6 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 5 Loadcenters Type CH Renewal Parts List for Type CH Loadcenter Covers and Deadfronts 1 Single-Phase with Main Circuit Breaker Catalog Number Combination Covers Surface Covers NEMA 3R Covers NEMA 3R Deadfronts Catalog Number Combination Covers Surface Covers NEMA 3R Covers NEMA 3R Deadfronts CH1420B100B CH8BF CH8BS — — CH30B125R — — CH3RDOOR10 CH3RDF6 CH1420B100R —— — CH3RDOOR5 CH3RDF4 CH3242B200J CH8JF CH8JS — — CH14B100B CH8BF CH8BS — — CH3242B200R — — CH3RDOOR12 CH3RDF9 CH14B100R — — CH3RDOOR5 CH3RDF4 CH32B150J CH8JF CH8JS — — CH1824B100C CH8CF CH8CS — — CH32B150R — — CH3RDOOR12 CH3RDF9 CH1824B100R — — CH3RDOOR8 CH3RDF5 CH32B200J CH8JF CH8JS — — CH18B100C CH8CF CH8CS — — CH32B200R — — CH3RDOOR12 CH3RDF9 CH18B100R — — CH3RDOOR8 CH3RDF5 CH32B225J CH8JF CH8JS — — CH20H100C CH8CF CH8CS — — CH32B225R — — CH3RDOOR12 CH3RDF9 CH20H100R — — CH3RDOOR7 CH3RDF5 CH32H150L CH8LF CH8LS — — CH22B100C CH8CF CH8CS — — CH32H150R — — CH3RDOOR6 CH3RDF10 CH22B100R — — CH3RDOOR7 CH3RDF5 CH32H200L CH8LF CH8LS — — CH22B125C CH8CF CH8CS — — CH32H200R — — CH3RDOOR6 CH3RDF11 CH22B125R — — CH3RDOOR8 CH3RDF5 CH42B200K CH8KF CH8KS — — CH24B150E CH8EF CH8ES — — CH42B200R — — CH3RDOOR13 CH3RDF10 CH24B150R — — CH3RDOOR11 CH3RDF7 CH42B225K CH8KF CH8KS — — CH24B200E CH8EF CH8ES — — CH42B225R — — CH3RDOOR13 CH3RDF10 CH24B200R — — CH3RDOOR11 CH3RDF7 CH42H200L CH8LF CH8LS — — CH28H100D CH8DF CH8DS — — CH42H200R — — CH3RDOOR6 CH3RDF11 CH28H100R — — CH3RDOOR9 CH3RDF6 CH42H225L CH8LF CH8LS — — CH28H125D CH8DF CH8DS — — CH42H225R — — CH3RDOOR6 CH3RDF11 CH28H125R — — CH3RDOOR9 CH3RDF6 CH42PM300 CH7PMF (flush) CH7PMS — — CH30B100D CH8DF CH8DS — — CH42PM400 CH7PMF (flush) CH7PMS — — CH30B100R — — CH3RDOOR10 CH3RDF6 CH8B150RF — — CH3RDOOR11 CH3RDF7 CH30B125D CH8DF CH8DS — — CH8B200RF — — CH3RDOOR11 CH3RDF7 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T5-7 5 1 Loadcenters Type CH Single-Phase with Main Lugs Catalog Number Combination Covers Surface Covers NEMA 3R Covers NEMA 3R Deadfronts Catalog Number Combination Covers Surface Covers NEMA 3R Covers NEMA 3R Deadfronts CH4L125RP — — CH3RDOOR2 CH3RDF2 CH2L125SP — CH82S — — 3 CH12L125B CH8BF CH8BS — — CH2L40FP — — — — CH12L125R — — CH3RDOOR5 CH3RDF4 CH2L40RP — — BKRCVR — 4 CH12L200D CH8DF CH8DS — — CH2L40SP — — — — CH12L200R — — CH3RDOOR9 CH4RDF6 CH2L70FP — — — — 5 CH1624L125B CH8BF CH8BS — — CH2L70RP — — BKRCVR — CH1624L125R — — CH3RDOOR5 CH3RDF4 CH2L70SP — — — — 6 CH16L125B CH8BF CH8BS — — CH3242L225D CH8DF CH8DS — — CH16L125R — — CH3RDOOR5 CH3RDF4 CH3242L225R — — CH3RDOOR11 CH3RDF6 7 CH16L200D CH8DF BH8DS — — CH32L150D CH8DF CH8DS — — CH16L200R — — CH3RDOOR11 CH3RDF6 CH32L150R — — CH3RDOOR11 CH3RDF6 8 CH20L125C CH8CF CH8CS — — CH32L225D CH8DF CH8DS — — CH20L125R — — CH3RDOOR8 CH3RDF5 CH32L225R — — CH3RDOOR11 CH3RDF6 CH24L125C CH8CF CH8CS — — CH42L225G CH8GF CH8GS — — CH24L125R — — CH3RDOOR8 CH3RDF5 CH42L225R — — CH3RDOOR12 CH3RDF8 CH24L150D CH8DF CH8DS — — CH42PL400 CH7PF (flush) CH7PS — — CH24L150R — — CH3RDOOR11 CH3RDF6 CH4L125FP CH84F (flush) — — — CH24L225D CH8DF CH8DS — — CH4L125SP — CH84S — — CH24L225R — — CH3RDOOR11 CH3RDF6 CH8L125FP CH88F (flush) — — — CH2L125FP CH82F (FLUSH) — — — CH8L125RP — — CH3RDOOR4 CH3RDF3 CH2L125RE2P — — — — CH8L125SP — CH88S — — CH2L125RP — — CH3RDOOR1 CH3RDF1 2 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Single-Phase Convertible Catalog Number Combination Covers Surface Covers NEMA 3R Covers NEMA 3R Deadfronts CH22N125C CH8CF CH8CS — — 16 CH22N125R — — — — CH32N200J CH8JF CH8JS — — 17 CH32N200R — — CH3RD00R12 CH3RDF9 CH42N225K CH8KF CH8KS — — 18 CH42N225R — — — — CH8N200RF — — — CH3RDF7 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T5-8 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 5 Loadcenters Type CH Three-Phase with Main Circuit Breakers Three-Phase with Main Lugs Catalog Number Combination Covers Surface Covers NEMA 3R Covers NEMA 3R Deadfronts Catalog Number Combination Covers Surface Covers NEMA 3R Covers NEMA 3R Deadfronts CH30B3150L CH8LF CH8LS — — CH12L3125B CH8BF CH8BS — — CH30B3150R — — CH3RDOOR6 CH3RDF11 CH12L3125R — — CH3RDOOR5 CH3RDF4 CH30B3200L CH8LF CH8LS — — CH18L3125C CH8CF CH8CS — — CH30B3200R — — CH3RDOOR6 CH3RDF11 CH18L3125R — — CH3RDOOR8 CH3RDF5 CH30B3225L CH8LF CH8LS — — CH24L3125C CH8CF CH8CS — — CH30B3225R — — CH3RDOOR6 CH3RDF11 CH24L3125R — — CH3RDOOR8 CH3RDF5 CH30H3200L CH8LF CH8LS — — CH24L3225D CH8DF CH8DS — — CH30H3200R — — CH3RDOOR6 CH3RDF11 CH24L3225R — — CH3RDOOR11 CH3RDF6 CH424PM300 CH7PMF (flush) CH7PMS — — CH30L3150D CH8DF CH8DS — — CH424PM400 CH7PMF (flush) CH7PMS — — CH30L3150R — — CH3RDOOR11 CH3RDF6 CH42B3200L CH8LF CH8LS — — CH30L3225D CH8DF CH8DS — — CH42B3200R — — CH3RDOOR6 CH3RDF11 CH30L3225R — — CH3RDOOR11 CH3RDF6 CH42B3225L CH8LF CH8LS — — CH424PL400 CH7PF (flush) CH7PS — — CH42B3225R — — CH3RDOOR6 CH3RDF11 CH42L3225R — — CH3RDOOR12 CH3RDF8 CH42H3200L CH8LF CH8LS — — CH42L3225G CH8GF CH8GS — — CH42H3200R — — CH3RDOOR6 CH3RDF11 CH6L3125FP CH86F (flush) — — — CH42H3225L CH8LF CH8LS — — CH6L3125RP — — CH3RDOOR3 CH3RDF3 CH42H3225R — — CH3RDOOR6 CH3RDF11 CH6L3125SP — CH86F — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T5-9 5 1 2 Loadcenters Type CH Renewal Parts List for Vintage Type CH Loadcenter Covers and Deadfronts Single-Phase with Main Circuit Breaker Single-Phase with Main Lugs Flush Covers Surface Covers Flush Covers w/ Mechanical w/ Mechanical Interlock Interlock Catalog Number Surface Covers Flush Covers Surface Covers Flush Covers w/ Mechanical w/ Mechanical Interlock Interlock Catalog Number Surface Covers CH22CCM100N CH7CCS CH7CCF CH7CCSM CH7CCFM CH2S — — — — CH30JJM150N CH7JJS CH7JJF — — CH2F — — — — 4 CH30JJM200N CH7JJS CH7JJF — — CH2R — — — — CH40KKM200N CH7KKS CH7KKF — — CH2AS — — — — 5 CH14BBM100 CH7BBS CH7BBF CH7BBSM CH7BBFM CH2AF — — — — CH14BBM100R — — — — CH2AR — — — — CH18CCM100 CH7CCS CH7CCF — — CH2BS — — — — 6 CH18CCM100R — — — — CH2BF — — — — CH22CCM125 CH7CCS CH7CCF — — CH2BR — — — — 7 CH22CCM125R — — — — CH4S — — — — CH20JJM150 CH7JJS CH7JJF — — CH4F — — — — CH20JJM150R — — — — CH4R — — — — 8 CH20JJM200 CH7JJS CH7JJF — — CH8S — — — — CH20JJM200R — — — — CH8F — — — — 9 CH24JJM150 CH7JJS CH7JJF — — CH8R — — — — CH24JJM150R — — — — CH12BB CH7BBS CH7BBF CH7BBSM CH7BBFM — 3 CH24JJM200 CH7JJS CH7JJF — — CH12BBR — — — 10 CH24JJM200R — — — — CH12EE200 CH7EES CH7EEF — — CH30JJM150 CH7JJS CH7JJF — — CH12EE200R — — — — 11 CH30JJM150R — — — — CH16BB CH7BBS CH7BBF CH7BBSM CH7BBFM CH30JJM200 CH7JJS CH7JJF — — CH16BBR — — — — CH30JJM200R — — — — CH16EE200 CH7EES CH7EEF — — 12 CH30KKM225 CH7KKS CH7KKF — — CH16EE200R — — — — CH30KKM225R — — — — CH20CC CH7CCS CH7CCF CH7CCSM CH7CCFM 13 CH40KKM200 CH7KKS CH7KKF — — CH20CCR — — — — CH40KKM200R — — — — CH24CC CH7CCS CH7CCF CH7CCSM CH7CCFM CH42KKM225 CH7KKS CH7KKF — — CH24CCR — — — — CH42KKM225R — — — — CH24EE150 CH7EES CH7EEF CH7EESM CH7EEFM CH42PM300 CH7PMS CH7PMF — — CH24EE150R — — — — CH42PM400 CH7PMS CH7PMF — — CH24EE225 CH7EES CH7EEF — — CH20CCM100H2 CH7CCS CH7CCF — — CH24EE225R — — — — 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 CH20CCM100H2R — — — — CH30EE CH7EES CH7EEF CH7EESM CH7EEFM CH26EEM125H2 CH7EES CH7EEF — — CH30EER — — — — CH26EEM125H2R — — — — CH30EE225 CH7EES CH7EEF — — CH20CCM100H4 CH7CCS CH7CCF — — CH30EE225R — — — — CH20CCM100H4R — — — — CH42GG CH7GGS CH7GGF CH7GGSM CH7GGFM CH26EEM100H4 CH7EES CH7EEF — — CH42GGR — — — — CH26EEM100H4R — — — — CH42PL400 CH7PS CH7PF — — CH26EEM125H4 CH7EES CH7EEF — — CH48S — — — — CH26EEM125H4R — — — — CH48F — — — — CH30JJM150H CH7JJS CH7JJF — — CH48R — — — — CH30JJM150HR — — — — CH816S — — — — CH30JJM200H CH7JJS CH7JJF — — CH816F — — — — CH30JJM200HR — — — — CH816R — — — — CH40KKM200H CH7KKS — CH7KKF — — — — — CH1624BB CH7BBS — CH7BBF — — — — — CH7EES CH7EEF — — — — — — CH40KKM200HR CH42KKM225H CH7KKS CH7KKF — — CH1624BBR CH3042EE225 CH42KKM225HR — — — — CH3042EE225R CH1420BBM100 CH7BBS CH7BBF — — CH1420BBM100R — — — — CH1824CCM100 CH7CCS CH7CCF — — CH1824CCM100R — — — — CH3040JJM200 CH7JJS CH7JJF — — CH3040JJM200 — — — — 25 V12-T5-10 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 5 Loadcenters Type CH Three-Phase with Main Lugs Three-Phase with Main Circuit Breaker Catalog Number Surface Covers Flush Covers Surface Covers Flush Covers w/ Mechanical w/ Mechanical Interlock Interlock CH64S — — — — CH304JJM150 CH7JJS CH7JJF — — CH64R — — — — CH304JJM150R — — — — CH124BB CH7BBS CH7BBF CH7BBSM CH7BBFM CH304JJM200 CH7JJS CH7JJF — — CH124BBR — — — — CH304JJM200R — — — — CH184CC CH7CCS CH7CCF CH7CCSM CH7CCFM CH304LLM225 CH7LLS CH7LLF — — CH184CCR — — — — CH424KKM200 CH7KKS CH7KKF — — CH244CC CH7CCS CH7CCF CH7CCSM CH7CCFM CH424KKM200R — — — — CH244CCR — — — — CH424LLM225 CH7LLS CH7LLF — — CH244EE225 CH7EES CH7EEF CH7EESM CH7EEFM CH424PM300 CH7PMS CH7PMF — — CH244EE225R — — — — CH424PM400 CH7PMS CH7PMF — — CH304EE CH7EES CH7EEF CH7EESM CH7EEFM CH304JJM200H CH7JJS CH7JJF — — CH304EER — — — — CH304JJM200HR — — — — CH304EE225 CH7EES CH7EEF — — CH424KKM200H CH7KKS CH7KKF — — CH304EE225R — — — — CH424KKM200HR — — — — CH424GG225 CH7GGS CH7GGF CH7GGSM CH7GGFM CH424LLM225H CH7LLS CH7LLF — — CH424GG225R — — — — CH424PL400 CH7PS CH7PF — — Catalog Number Surface Covers Flush Covers Surface Covers Flush Covers w/ Mechanical w/ Mechanical Interlock Interlock 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Type CH Loadcenter Interior Assemblies Catalog Number Ampere Rating Maximum Number 1.00-Inch (25.4 mm) Spaces Single-Pole UL File Reference Main Terminal Wire Size Range (per phase) Cu/Al 60ºC or 75ºC Standard Package Quantity Single-Phase, Single-Row Breaker Mounting—Copper Bus 120/24 Vac, Three-Wire 12 13 CH9MB270 70 2 2 E8741 (1) #8–#2 AWG Cu/Al 1 CH2L125INT 125 2 2 E8741 (1) 2/0–#6 AWG Cu/Al 20 14 15 Single-Phase, Double-Row Breaker Mounting—Copper Bus 120/240 Vac, Three-Wire CH4L125INT 125 4 4 E8741 (1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al 20 CH8L125INT 125 8 8 E8741 (1) 2/0–#6 AWG Cu/Al 20 CH12L125INT 125 12 12 E8741 (1) 2/0–#6 AWG Cu/Al 20 CH16L125INT 125 16 16 E8741 (1) 2/0–#6 AWG Cu/Al 20 CH12L200INT 200 12 12 E8741 (1) 300 kcmil–#4 AWG Cu/Al 20 CH16L200INT 200 16 16 E8741 (1) 300 kcmil–#4 AWG Cu/Al 10 CH24L225INT 225 24 24 E8741 (1) 300 kcmil–#4 AWG Cu/Al 10 CH32L225INT 225 32 32 E8741 (1) 300 kcmil–#4 AWG Cu/Al 10 CH42L225INT 225 42 42 E8741 (1) 300 kcmil–#4 AWG Cu/Al 10 16 17 18 19 Three-Phase, Double-Row Breaker Mounting—Copper Bus 208Y/120 Vac, Four-Wire—240 Vac, Three-Wire—120/240 Vac, Four-Wire Delta CH12L3125INT 125 12 12 E8741 (1) 2/0–#6 AWG Cu/Al 10 CH18L3125INT 125 18 18 E8741 (1) 2/0–#6 AWG Cu/Al 10 CH24L3125INT 125 24 24 E8741 (1) 2/0–#6 AWG Cu/Al 10 CH24L3225INT 225 24 24 E8741 (1) 300 kcmil–#4 AWG Cu/Al 10 CH30L3225INT 225 30 30 E8741 (1) 300 kcmil–#4 AWG Cu/Al 10 CH42L3225INT 225 42 42 E8741 (1) 300 kcmil–#4 AWG Cu/Al 10 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T5-11 5 1 BRSF125 Loadcenters Type BR Type BR Replacement Parts and Covers Number of Poles 2 3BRS225 4 3 5 Main Lugs 6 Number of 1.00-Inch (25.4 mm) Spaces Needed Wire Size Range Cu/Al 60°C or 75°C Ordering Quantity 2 Catalog Number 125 2 #8–2/0 1 BRSF125 150 2 #8–2/0 1 BRSF150 2 Main and Subfeed Lug Blocks 2 3 Ampere Rating BRL200 225 4 #2–300 kcmil 1 BRS225 150 3 #8–2/0 1 3BRSF150 2 225 6 #2–300 kcmil 1 3BRS225 Two-pole, 200A stud mounted (includes deadfront filler plate) #1–300 kcmil 1 BRL200 Neutral/ground lug Add-on neutral or ground lug #2/0 maximum 1 NL20 #3/0 maximum 1 NL30 300 kcmil maximum 1 NL300 7 Filler Plates 8 1.00-inch (25.4 mm) circuit breaker space 25 BRFP BW main circuit breaker space (with hardware) 1 BWFP Door lock —12–42 circuits, and 100–225A 1 TDL 9 TDL 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Door lock—4–8 circuits, 125A 1 CH9FL ANSI-61 light gray touchup paint for current loadcenters 1 SPC61 Isolated neutral assembly (computer circuits) 1 BINA Circuit directory—adhesive backed 10 TCD Cover screws 25 LCCS Cover replacement latch (gray) 14-5/16 (363.5 mm) wide loadcenters only 1 BRRL Circuit marking strip (next to breaker) 10 BRMS Circuit identification label (preprinted breaker labels) 25 CHBL Series rated caution label 25 SRL Bonding strip with screw 1 BSSUSE Mechanical Interlock Cover Covers mechanically interlock two breakers—Type BW or BWH main breaker with a Type BR branch breaker. BR4040B200 17 18 19 20 Mechanical Interlock Covers Fits Loadcenter Catalog Number Mechanical Interlock Panel Cover Catalog Number BR816B200RF BR3RDF5M BR2040B200R BR3RDF11M BR3040B200R BR3RDF12M BR4040B200R BR3RDF13M BR2040B200 BRCOV20D1FM BR3040B200 BRCOV30G1FM BR4040B200 BRCOV40L1FM Notes 1 Must be purchased in multiples of ordering quantities indicated. 2 #8–2/0 wire size range is 75°C rated only. 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T5-12 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 5 Loadcenters Type BR DS300H2 Replacement Rainproof Conduit Hubs Conduit Size Inches (mm) Description Group 1—for use with 70, 100 and 125A MLO and MCB loadcenters and circuit breaker enclosures and the following 150 and 200A panels: BR48B200RF Group 2—for use with 150, 200 and 225A MLO and MCB loadcenters and circuit breaker enclosures except for the following 200A loadcenters: BR48B200RF. Also for use with 400 and 600A loadcenters and New York City loadcenters manufactured after November 1, 2005 Type H conduit hubs for loadcenters PL0724R and S3100RN GBK14 Ordering Quantity 1 Catalog Number 0.75 (19.1) 1 DS075H1 1.00 (25.4) 1 DS100H1 1.25 (31.8) 1 DS125H1 1.50 (38.1) 1 DS150H1 2.00 (50.8) 1 DS200H1 2.00 (50.8) 1 DS200H2 2.50 (63.5) 1 DS250H2 3.00 (76.2) 1 DS300H2 0.75 (19.1) 1 RH75P 1.00 (25.4) 1 RH100P 1.25 (31.8) 1 RH125P 1.50 (38.1) 1 RH150P Adapter kit—Allows Installing a Group 1 hub on devices arranged for Group 2 hubs — 1 DS900AP Group 1 small blank hub plate with bump — 1 DS900CP1 Group 2 Large blank hub plate with bump — 1 DS900CP2 Length Inches (mm) Ordering Quantity 1 Catalog Number dssssds 2.54 (64.5) 1 GBK5 2 dssssdsj Replacement Ground Bar Kits 3.59 (91.2) 1 GBK520 2 dssssdssssss 4.29 (109.0) 1 GBK10 2 dssssdssssssj 5.34 (135.6) 1 GBK1020 2 4.61 (117.1) 1 GBK13 2 2 dssssdssssssssss 5.69 (144.5) 1 GBK14 dssssdssssssssssj 6.74 (171.2) 1 GBK1420 2 dssssdsssssssssssssssss 8.14 (206.8) 1 GBK21 2 dssssdsssssssssssssssssj 9.19 (233.4) 1 GBK2120 2 f k f d f k f f f k f d f k f f f k f BRGBK39512 f d f f f k f d f k f f f Description (See Legend) 5.78 (146.8) 1 BRGBK39512 34 1.84 (46.7) 1 GB4NM 5 sssss Ground Bar Legend 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 s (3) #14–10 Cu/Al or (1) #14–4 Cu/Al j (1) #6–2/0 Cu/Al (1) #14–1/0 Cu/Al or (3) #14–10 Cu/Al (1) #14–6 Cu/Al or (2) #14–12 Cu/Al d Mounting Hole fk 18 19 Notes 1 Must be purchased in multiples of ordering quantities indicated. 2 Distance between mounting holes is 1.75 inches (44.5 mm). 3 For single- and three-phase 400 and 600A applications. 4 Distance between mounting holes is 2.34 inches (59.5 mm). 5 For non-metallic enclosures. Snaps into molded base. 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T5-13 5 1 THS1 Loadcenters Type BR Replacement Breaker Accessories Ordering Quantity 1 Catalog Number Handle tie bar for physically joining the handles of two adjacent single-pole Type BR circuit breakers (metal cylinder pin type) 10 BHT Handle tie bar for joining two independent outside poles of Types BQ and BQC Quadplex and outside poles of two Type BD duplex circuit breakers 10 THOW Description 2 3 Handle Ties 2 BHLW2 Handle tie bar for joining two adjacent outside poles of Types BQ and BQC Quadplex and outside poles of two Type BD duplex circuit breakers 10 4 5 BRQLW 6 7 THS1 Handle Lockoffs 3 Padlockable device for locking the handle of single-, two- or three-pole Type BR Circuit Breakers and single-pole of a Type BD Duplex or one independent outside pole of a Type BQ or BQC Quadplex circuit breakers (escutcheon mounted) 5 10 BRLW Padlockable device for locking the handle of a single-pole Type BR circuit breaker.(handle mounted) 5 10 BRLW1 Padlockable device for locking the handle of a two- and three-pole Type BR circuit breaker (handle mounted) MCBPL (Installed) 5 10 BRLW2 Padlockable device for locking the handle of a single-pole Type BD Duplex, BQ or BQC Quadplex breaker (handle mounted) 5 10 BRDL1 Padlockable device for locking the handle of the two center poles and the two outer poles of a two-pole Types BQ and BQC quadplex circuit breakers (escutcheon mounted) 4 10 BRQLW 8 Padlockable device for locking the handle of main circuit breaker Types CC and CHH into the ON or OFF position (screw mounted) 6 1 CCPL Padlockable device for locking the handle of main breaker Types BW and BWH into the ON or OFF position (escutcheon mounted) 4 1 MCBPL 9 Handle Lockdog 7 Device used to secure handle in ON or OFF position for single-, two- or three-pole Type BR circuit breakers and single-pole of Type BD duplex and one independent outside pole of Type BQ or BQC Quadplex circuit breakers (escutcheon mounted) 5 10 BHLW Device used to secure handle in ON or OFF position for single-pole Type BR circuit breakers (handle mounted) 5 10 BHLW1 10 11 12 Device used to secure handle in ON or OFF position for two- and three-pole Type BR circuit breakers (handle mounted) BHLW 14 BREQS125 BHLW2 10 BHGW Device used to secure handle in ON or OFF position for one independent outside pole of Types BQ and BQC Quadplex or single-pole Type BD duplex circuit breakers (handle mounted) 5 10 HLW1 Hold-down retainer kit for three-pole Type BR circuit breakers in S3100 and 3100R loadcenters only 1 BRHDB Hold-down screw kit for two-pole Type BR circuit breakers in single-phase MLO loadcenters through 125A 1 BREQS125 Hold-down screw kit for two-pole Type BR circuit breakers in MLO loadcenters 150–225A (single-phase only) 1 BRHDK125 Hold-down screw kit for two-pole Types BJ and BJH circuit breakers in MLO loadcenters 125–225A 1 BJHDS Hold-down screw kit for three-pole Types BJ and BJH circuit breakers in MLO loadcenters 125–225A 1 BJHDS3P Types CC and CHH main breaker lug kit (2) 300 kcmil 1 CCL300 Types BW/BWH main breaker lug kit (2) 300 kcmil 1 MCBL300 10 BRML Main Breaker Lug Kits 16 17 10 Device used to secure handle in ON or OFF position for single-pole Type GFCB ground fault circuit breakers (handle mounted) 5 Hold-Down Kits 8 BRLW2 13 15 5 Mechanical Interlock BRHDK125 Types BR for two-, three- and four-pole breakers 18 19 Notes 1 Must be purchased in multiples of ordering quantities indicated. 2 Handle ties: typically used to join two similar independent single-pole breakers to form a two-pole noncommon trip breaker. 3 Handle lockoffs: devices that use a padlock to lock the circuit breaker’s handle in the ON or OFF position. 4 Escutcheon mounted: device mounted semipermanently to the face of the circuit breaker and secured by the loadcenter deadfront. 5 Handle mounted: device mounted directly to the handle by the use of a set screw. 6 Screw mounted: device permanently mounted to the face of the circuit breaker by the use of a non-removable screw. 7 Handle lockdogs: devices that are used to secure a circuit breaker’s handle in the ON or OFF position. Handle Lockdogs are not padlockable devices. 8 Hold-down kits: devices used to secure the circuit breaker to the loadcenter for back-feed main application. See NEC Article 384.16(g). 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T5-14 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 5 Loadcenters Type BR Renewal Parts for Type BR Loadcenter Covers and Deadfronts 1 Single-Phase with Main Circuit Breakers Catalog Number Combination Covers Surface Covers NEMA 3R Covers NEMA 3R Deadfronts Catalog Number Combination Covers Surface Covers NEMA 3R Covers NEMA 3R Deadfronts B4242DFN 315-003-28 — — — BR2040B150R — — BR3RDOOR8 BR3RDF11 B4242DR1N — — Not available — BR2040B200 BRCOVC35 — — — B4242DSN — 315-003-27 — — BR2040B200R — — BR3RDOOR9 BR3RDF11 B4242EFN 315-003-28 — — — BR2040H200 BRCOVC35 — — — B4242ESN — 315-003-27 — — BR2430B150 BRCOVC40 — — — BR1020B100RF — — BR3RDOOR2 BR3RDF1 BR2440B200 BRCOVC41 — — — — — — BR1212B100 BRCOVC12 — — — BR3030BC100 BRCOVC59 BR1220B100 BRCOVC12 — — — BR3030B150 BRCOVC40 — BR3RDOOR2 BR1224B100R BR1224B100SFG 47-37466 BR3030B150R — — BR3RDOOR10 BR3RDF12 BR3030BC150 BRCOVC40 — — — BRCOVC16 — — — BR3040B150 BRCOVC40 — — — BR1620B100 BRCOVC16 — — — BR3040B200 BRCOVC41 — — — BR1624B100 BRCOVC16 — — — BR3040B200R — — BR3RDOOR11 BR3RDF12 BR1624B100R — — BR3RDOOR3 BR3RDF2 BR3040H200 BRCOVC41 — — — BRCOVC17 — — — BR304242F 315-003-28 — — — — — — BR304242S — 315-003-27 — — BR1632B200 BRCOVC31 — — — BR4040B200 BRCOVC44 — — — BR2020B100 BRCOVC22 — — — BR4040BC200 BRCOVC44 — — — 7 8 BR1616B100 BRCOVC29 4 6 BR3RDF1 BR1624B125 3 5 47-37469 BR1630B150 2 9 10 11 BR2024B100R — — BR3RDOOR4 BR3RDF4 BR4040B200R — — BR3RDOOR12 BR3RDF13 BR2024B125 BRCOVC23 — — — BR4040H200 BRCOVC44 — — — BR2024B125R — — BR3RDOOR4 BR3RDF4 BR4242B225 BRCOVC53 (2) — — — BR2024H100 BRCOVC22 — — — BR4242B225R — — BR3RDOOR13 BR3RDF15 BR2030B150 BRCOVC32 — — — BR48B200RF — — BR3RDOOR15 BR3RDF14 BR2030B150R — — BR3RDOOR8 BR3RDF11 BR816B100 BRCOVC10 — — — BR2030H150 BRCOVC32 — — — BR816B150RF — — BR3RDOOR5 BR3RDF5 BR2040B150 BRCOVC40 — — — BR816B200RF — — BR3RDOOR6 BR3RDF5 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T5-15 5 1 2 3 4 5 Loadcenters Type BR Convertible Catalog Number Combination Covers Surface Covers NEMA 3R Covers NEMA 3R Deadfronts 3BR1224N125 BRCOVC20 — — — 3BR1224N125R — — BR3RDOOR29 BR3RDF2 3BR1224N125S 3BR3030N100 — BRCOVS20 BRCOVC37 — — — — — 3BR3030N100R — — BR3RDOOR30 — 3BR3030N100S — BRCOVS37 — — BR1224N125 BR1224N125R BRCOVC13 — — — — BR3RDOOR2 — BR3RDF1 6 BR1224NC125R BR1224N200 BRCOVC30 — — — 7 BR1224N200R — — BR3RDOOR6 BR3RDF5 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 BR1624N125 BR1624N125R BR1632N200 BR3RDOOR2 BRCOVC17 — — — BRCOVC31 — BR1632N200SFG BR2024N125 BR2024N125R BR2040N200 BR2040N200R BR2440N200 BRCOVC23 — — — BRCOVC35 — — — BRCOVC41 — — BR3RDOOR3 — — BR3RDF2 — 47-37460 47-37375 — — BR3RDOOR4 — BR3RDOOR9 — BR3RDF4 — BR3RDF11 — BR3040N200 BRCOVC41 — — — BR3040N200R — — BR3RDOOR11 BR3RDF12 BR4040N200 BRCOVC44 — — — BR4040N200R — — BR3RDOOR12 BR3RDF13 BR816N200RF — — BR4040NL200G BRCOVC44 + BWFP — BR3RDOOR6 — BR3RDF5 — Manufactured Housing Loadcenters Single-Phase with Main Circuit Breaker Catalog Number Cover Number BR1020B100GK MBCOVC10 BR1020B100PK MBCOVC10 BR1220B100GK MBCOVC11 BR1220B100PK MBCOVC11 BR1224B100PK MBCOVC24 BR1224B100GK MBCOVC24 BR1224B100GK MBCOVC25 1 BR1224B150GK MBCOVC12 BR1224B150PK MBCOVC12 BR1630B150GK MBCOVC13 BR1630B150PK MBCOVC13 BR1224B200GK MBCOVC14 BR1224B200PK MBCOVC14 BR1632B200GK MBCOVC15 BR1632B200PK MBCOVC15 BR2040B200GK MBCOVC16 BR2040B200PK MBCOVC16 BR1020B100PKW MBCOVC17 1 BR1220B100PKW MBCOVC18 1 BR1224B100PKW MBCOVC25 1 BR1224B150PKW MBCOVC19 1 BR1630B150PKW MBCOVC20 1 BR1224B200PKW MBCOVC21 1 BR1632B200PKW MBCOVC22 1 BR2040B200PKW MBCOVC23 1 Note 1 These covers are painted white (standard color is gray). 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T5-16 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 5 Loadcenters Type BR Single-Phase with Main Lugs Catalog Number Combination Covers Surface Covers NEMA 3R Covers NEMA 3R Deadfronts Catalog Number Combination Covers 1224DRIN — — 1224DSN — Not available 2442DSN — 2460FGNM — 2460FNM 2460RNM Surface Covers NEMA 3R Covers NEMA 3R Deadfronts Not available — BR24L70RP — — BR24L70SGP — — Not available — — Not available — — Not available — — — — — BR24L70SP — Not available — — BR1224L125RIS BRCOVC66 — — — — BR1224L125RISBP BRCOVC66 — — — — BR2024L125RIS BRCOVC66 2460SGNM — — — — BR3040L200 BRCOVC36 — — — 2460SNM — — — — BR3040L200G BRCOVC36 — — — 4242DFN 315-003-06 — — — BR3040L200R — — BR3RDOOR9 BR3RDF8 4242DRIN — Not available — — BR4040L200 BRCOVC42 — — — 4242DSN — 315-003-05 — — BR4040L200R — — BR3RDOOR11 BR3RDF9 4242ESN — 315-003-05 — — BR4242L225 BRCOVC45 — — — BR1212L125 BRCOVC11 — — — BR4242L225R — — BR3RDOOR14 BR3RDF10 BR1224L125 BRCOVC11 — — — BR48L125FDP BRCOVC62 (flush) — — — 2 3 4 5 BR1224L125DG BRCOVC11 — — — BR48L125FGP BRCOVC63 (flush) — — — BR1224L125G BRCOVC11 — — — BR48L125FP BRCOVC61 (flush) — — — BR1224L125R — — BR3RDOOR1 BR3RDF3 BR48L125RP — — BR3RDOOR26 BR3RDF22 BR1224L200 BRCOVC15 — — — BR48L125SGP — BRCOVS60 — — BR1224L200R — — BR3RDOOR7 BR3RDF6 BR48L125SP — BRCOVS59 — — BR1616L125 BRCOVC14 — — — BR612L125FDGP BRCOVC08 — — — BR1624L125 BRCOVC14 — — — BR612L125FDP BRCOVC08 — — — — — — BR612L125FGP BRCOVC63 — — — — BR3RDOOR2 BR3RDF1 BR612L125FP BRCOVC08 — — — BR1630L150 BRCOVC25 — — — BR612L125RP — — BR3RDOOR27 BR3RDF23 BR2020L125 BRCOVC18 — — — BR612L125SDGP — BRCOVS08 — — BRCOVC18 — — — BR612L125SDP — BRCOVS08 — — BRCOVC18 — — — BR612L125SGP — BRCOVS60 — — BR2024L125R — — BR3RDOOR3 BR3RDF2 BR612L125SP — BRCOVS59 — — BR2030L150 BRCOVC25 — — — BR816L125FDGP BRCOVC64 (flush) — — — 16 BRCOVC25 — — — BR816L125FDP BRCOVC64 (flush) — — — BRCOVC25 — — — BR816L125FGP BRCOVC09 — — — BR2040L200R — — BR3RDOOR6 BR3RDF7 BR816L125FP BRCOVC09 — — — BR2424L125 BRCOVC24 — — — BR816L125RP BR3RDOOR28 BR3RDF23 BRCOVC24 — — — BR816L125SDGP — — — BR816L125SDP — BRCOVS61 — — BRCOVS61 — — 13 15 BR2040L200 BRCOVC33 10 14 BR2040L200G BR2424L125G 8 12 BRCOVC14 — BR2024L125 7 11 BR1624L125G BR2024L125G 6 9 BR1624L125R BR2440L200 1 17 18 BR24L125FP BRCOVC60 (FLUSH) — — — BR816L125SGP BRCOVS09 — — BR24L125RP — — BR3RDOOR25 BR3RDF21 BR816L125SP BRCOVS09 — — BR24L125RSE2P — — — BR3RDF21 BR816L200RF — — BR3RDOOR7 BR3RDF6 BR24L125RSEP — — — BR3RDF21 BR816LC125FDP BRCOVC64 (flush) — — — BR24L125SP — BRCOVS62 — — TT120FLGNM — — — — BR24L70FGP Not available — — — TT120SLGNM — — — — 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T5-17 5 1 Loadcenters Type BR Three-Phase with Main Lugs Three-Phase with Main Circuit Breaker Catalog Number Combination Covers Surface Covers NEMA 3R Covers NEMA 3R Deadfronts Catalog Number Combination Covers Surface Covers NEMA 3R Covers 31836DFN Not available — — — 3B4242DFN 315-003-28 — — — 31836DR1N — — Not available — 3B4242DR1N — — Not available — 3 31836DSN — Not available — — 3B4242DSN — 315-003-27 — — 32442DSN — Not available — — 3B4242EFN 315-003-28 — — — 4 34242DFN 315-003-06 — — — 3B4242ESN — 315-003-27 — — 34242DR1N — — Not available — 3BR1224B100 BRCOVC19 — — — 5 34242DSN — 315-003-05 — — 3BR1224B100R — — BR3RDOOR29 BR3RDF2 34242EFN 315-003-06 — — — 3BR1224B100S — BRCOVS19 — — 6 34242ESN — 315-003-05 — — 3BR1224H100 BRCOVC19 — — — 3BR1224L125 BRCOVC21 — — — 3BR1224H100S — BRCOVS19 — — 7 3BR1224L125R — — BR3RDOOR29 BR3RDF2 3BR3042B125 BRCOVC54 — — — 3BR1224L125S — BRCOVS21 — — 3BR3042B125S — BRCOVS54 — — 8 3BR1224L200 BRCOVC34 — — — 3BR3042B150 BRCOVC55 — — — 3BR1224L200R — — BR3RDOOR16 BR3RDF7 3BR3042B150R — — BR3RDOOR20 BR3RDF17 9 3BR1224L200S — BRCOVS34 — — 3BR3042B150S — BRCOVS55 — — 3BR1836L150 BRCOVC27 — — — 3BR3042B200 BRCOVC56 — — — 10 3BR1836L150R — — BR3RDOOR17 BR3RDF7 3BR3042B200R — — BR3RDOOR21 BR3RDF17 3BR1836L150S — BRCOVS27 — — 3BR3042B200S — BRCOVS56 — — 11 3BR1836L200 BRCOVC34 — — — 3BR3042H150 BRCOVC55 — — — 3BR1836L200R — — BR3RDOOR16 BR3RDF7 3BR3042H150S — BRCOVS55 — — 12 3BR1836L200S — BRCOVS34 — — 3BR3042H200 BRCOVC56 — — — 3BR2442L150 BRCOVC39 — — — 3BR3042H200S — BRCOVS56 — — 13 3BR2442L150R — — BR3RDOO18 BR3RDF16 3BR4242B200 BRCOVC57 — — — 3BR2442L150S — BRCOVS39 — — 3BR4242B200R — — BR3RDOOR22 BR3RDF19 14 3BR2442L200 BRCOVC43 — — — 3BR4242B200S — BRCOVS57 — — 3BR2442L200S —- BRCOVS43 — — 3BR4242B225 BRCOVC58 — — — 15 3BR3042L200 BRCOVC43 — — — 3BR4242B225R — — BR3RDOOR23 BR3RDF19 3BR3042L200R — — BR3RDOO19 BR3RDF18 3BR4242B225S — BRCOVS58 — — 2 16 17 18 19 NEMA 3R Deadfronts 3BR3042L200S — BRCOVS43 — — 3BR4242H200 BRCOVC57 — — — 3BR4242L200 BRCOVC48 — — — 3BR4242H200S — BRCOVS57 — — 3BR4242L200R — — BR3RDOOR21 BR3RDF20 3BR4242L200S — BRCOVS48 — — 3BR4242L225 BRCOVC49 — — — 3BR4242L225R — — BR3RDOOR24 BR3RDF20 3BR4242L225S — BRCOVS49 — — 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T5-18 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 5 Loadcenters Type BR Replacement Interior Assembly BR Loadcenter Interior Assembly 1 Type BR Loadcenter Interior Assemblies Ampere Rating Maximum Number 1.00-Inch (25.4 mm) Spaces Single Poles UL File Reference Main Terminal Size (Per Phase) Standard Package Quantity Catalog Number Single-Phase Single Row Breaker Mounting—Aluminum Bus—120/240 Vac, Three-Wire 2 3 70 2 4 — (1) #8–#2 AWG Cu/Al 20 24INT70B 125 2 4 E8741 (1) 1/0–#14 AWG Cu 2/0–12 AWG All 20 24INT125B 4 125 6 12 E52977 (1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al 20 612INT125SRB 5 6 Single-Phase Double Row Breaker Mounting—Aluminum Bus—120/240 Vac, Three-Wire 125 4 8 E8741 (1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al 20 48INT125B 125 6 12 E8741 (1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al 20 612INT125B 125 8 16 E8741 (1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al 20 816INT125B 125 12 12 E52977 (1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al 20 1212INT125B 125 12 24 E52977 (1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al 20 1224INT125B 125 16 24 E52977 (1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al 20 1624INT125B 125 20 24 E52977 (1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al 10 2024INT125B 125 24 24 E52977 (1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al 10 2424INT125B 200 8 16 E52977 (1) 300 kcmil–#1 AWG Cu/Al 20 816INT200B 200 12 24 E52977 (1) 300 kcmil–#1 AWG Cu/Al 20 1224INT200B 200 30 40 E52977 (1) 300 kcmil–#1 AWG Cu/Al 10 3040INT200B 200 42 42 E52977 (1) 300 kcmil–#1 AWG Cu/Al 10 4242INT225B 11 12 Single-Phase Double Row Breaker Mounting—Copper Bus—120/240 Vac, Three-Wire 125 8 16 E5297 (1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al 20 816INT125BC 125 12 12 E5297 (1) 2/0–#14 AWG Cu/Al 20 1212INT125BC 200 12 24 E5297 (1) 300 kcmil–#1 AWG Cu/Al 20 1224INT200BC Three-Phase Double Row Breaker Mounting—Aluminum Bus—208Y/120 Vac, Four-Wire—240 Vac, Three-Wire— 120/240 Vac, Four-Wire Delta 125 12 34 E52977 (1) 2/0–#8 AWG Cu/Al 10 1224INT3125B 150 18 36 E52977 (1) 300 kcmil–#2 AWG Cu/Al 10 1836INT3150B 150 24 42 E52977 (1) 300 kcmil–#2 AWG Cu/Al 10 2442INT3150B 200 30 42 E52977 (1) 300 kcmil–#2 AWG Cu/Al 10 3042INT3200B 225 42 42 E52977 (1) 300 kcmil–#2 AWG Cu/Al 10 4242INT3225B Three-Phase Double Row Breaker Mounting—Copper Bus—208Y/120 Vac, Four-Wire—240 Vac, Three-Wire— 120/240 Vac, Four-Wire Delta 125 12 24 E52977 (1) 2/0–#8 AWG Cu/Al 10 1224INT3125BC 200 12 24 E52977 (1) 300 kcmil–#2 AWG Cu/Al 10 1224INT3200BC 7 8 9 10 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T5-19 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Loadcenters Replacement Breakers Product Description Eaton UL classified replacement circuit breakers are available in both 3/4-inch Type CHQ and 1.00-inch Type CL, single- and two-pole configurations. These breakers are classified as direct replacements by Underwriters Laboratories. In addition to a UL listing, they also come with a 15-year warranty. Specified vs. UL Classified Specified breakers are listed by the manufacturer of the panelboard for use in a particular panel. This doesn’t mean that the panelboard manufacturer produced the specified breaker; it merely means that the panelboard manufacturer has tested the breaker in the panel. In fact, through the years, Eaton has manufactured thousands of breakers for other panelboard manufacturers. UL classified breakers are produced by one manufacturer for use in place of the breakers specified on the panelboard. Like specified breakers, UL classified breakers have been tested in the panels for which they are approved. Testing Classified breakers are tested extensively in numerous General Electric®, Siemens®, Murray®, Thomas & Betts®, Square D® and CrouseHinds® panels. The tests are conducted with witnesses from Underwriters Laboratories and involve short circuit, temperature and insertion/withdrawal applications. This level of testing ensures that the breakers meet identified standards and have been found suitable by UL for the specified purpose. Listed Breaker—The listing of a circuit breaker is by an independent third party. Eaton classified breakers are listed by UL. Labeled Breaker—A breaker with a label affixed by an independent third party. Single-Pole Requires One 3/4-Inch (19.1 mm) Space 10 per Shelf Carton Catalog Number 16 17 20 Classified Circuit Breaker— A breaker that is considered suitable, by a qualified thirdparty organization, for use in another manufacturer’s panelboard. 3/4-Inch (19.1 mm) per Pole 120 Vac, Non-CTL 10 kAIC 15 19 Definitions Specified Circuit Breaker— Each manufacturer lists the brands of circuit breakers that can be used in their panelboards. Often, manufacturers will not list competitors as specified, even though they are suitable replacements. Non-CTL Plug-On Replacement Circuit Breakers, Type CHNT 10 kAIC, 120/240 Vac For use as replacement in loadcenters built prior to 1968 and within the current style loadcenters as indicated in the loadcenter section. 14 18 Understanding Classified Breaker Terminology Ampere Rating Wire Size Range Cu/Al 60ºC or 75°C 15–15 #14–8 CHNT1515 12 15–20 #14–8 CHNT1520 12 20–20 #14–8 CHNT2020 12 120/240 Vac 120/240 Vac CTL Plug-On Circuit Breakers, Type CHT Twin 10 kAIC, 120/240 Vac All circuit breakers have rejection feature. Use only with loadcenters marked for use with CHT breakers. Type CH and CHT Circuit Breakers Mounted in Twin Breaker Panel Twin (CTL) 3/4-Inch (19.1 mm) per Pole 120 Vac Class CTL 10 kAIC Single-Pole Requires One 3/4-Inch (19.1 mm) Space 10 per Shelf Carton Catalog Number 21 Ampere Rating Wire Size Range Cu/Al 60ºC or 75°C 15–15 #14–8 CHT1515 12 23 15–20 #14–8 CHT1520 12 20–20 #14–8 CHT2020 12 24 Notes 1 Switching duty rated. 2 HACR rated. 22 120/240 Vac 120/240 Vac 25 V12-T5-20 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 5 Loadcenters Type CH Type CH Renovation Loadcenter Product Selection 1 Single-Phase—Main Circuit Breaker Loadcenters 35 kAIC 1 Product Description Eaton’s Renovation Loadcenter is designed for the service contractor. With the addition of a fivecircuit terminal block factory mounted in the top left corner of the loadcenter, the service contractor can terminate short-circuit wires instead of having to use expensive wire nuts. Also, the Renovation Loadcenter incorporates a twin-stacked neutral design that places the neutral and ground terminations higher in the loadcenter. Both of these features were added without increasing any size from a standard loadcenter. These features will eliminate the need for wire nuts and make for a much neater installation. There is a provision to field mount a second five-circuit terminal block (RN5TB) in the top right corner of the loadcenter. Choose amongst Eaton’s Type CH breaker family for use in the Renovation Panel. Renovation Panel 2 Single-Phase, Three-Wire—120/240 Vac—Factory-Bonded Stacked Split Neutral Cover Catalog Number 2 3 Combination Surface 4 Max. Number Main Main 3/4-Inch Breaker Ampere (19.1 mm) Enclosure Box Type Rating of Poles Type Size Wire Size Range Cu/Al 60 or 70ºC for Main Breakers Loadcenter Catalog Number CH 100 20 Indoor C #6–1/0 CH22B100CRN CH8CFF CH8CS CSH 150 32 Indoor J #2–300 kcmil CH32B150JRN CH8JF CH8JS CSH 200 32 Indoor J #2–300 kcmil CH32B200JRN CH8J CH8JS CSH 200 42 Indoor K #2–300 kcmil CH42B200KRN CH8KF CH8KS 5 6 7 Branch Circuit Breakers (CH) See Volume 1—Residential and Light Commercial, CA08100002E, Tab 1. 8 9 Renovation Loadcenter Description Catalog Number Five-circuit terminal block kit Ground bar kits (two maximum per panel) RN5TB (See Page V12-T5-5) 10 11 Notes 1 100A main breaker is rated 10 kAIC. 2 Combination style covers may be used in surface or flush applications. 12 All main circuit breaker loadcenters are listed for use as service entrance equipment. Loadcenters are factory-bonded for service entrance applications. Remove bonding strap for separate neutral and ground bars for sub-feed applications. 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T5-21 5 Loadcenters Type CH 1 Plug-On Neutral Loadcenter 2 Product Description 3 4 5 6 7 Features and Benefits ● ● Code changes and higher safety standards are leading to more arc fault and ground fault circuit interrupter installations. Eaton offers a unique product solution that enables a direct connection of the breaker to the neutral bar, eliminating the need for wiring a pigtail. ● ● ● Time savings up to 25% per AFCI/GFCI installation Eliminates nuisance tripping due to loose pigtail connections Clean gutter space Easier troubleshooting due to less wiring Backed by a limited lifetime warranty Product Selection Plug-On Neutral Loadcenter 8 9 Main Breaker Plug-On Neutral Loadcenters Main Breaker Type Main Ampere Rating Max. Number 3/4-Inch Circuits Max. Number of Poles Enclosure Type Box Size Wire Size Range Cu/Al Catalog Number Combination Surface CSH 35 kAIC 100 24 24 Indoor E #2–300 kcmil CH24BPN100E CH8EF CH8ES 200 32 32 Indoor J #2–300 kcmil CH32BPN200J CH8JF CH8JS 200 42 42 Indoor K #2–300 kcmil CH42BPN200K CH8KF CH8KS 200 60 120 1 Indoor N #2–300 kcmil CH60BPN200N CH8NF — 10 Cover Catalog Number 11 12 13 Main Lug Only/Convertible Plug-On Neutral Loadcenters—With Factory Installed Main Lugs 15 Max. Ampere Rating Max. Number 3/4-Inch Poles Enclosure Type Box Size 125 24 Indoor 16 225 32 Indoor 14 Main Breaker Kit Wire Size Range For Main Breaker Cover Catalog Number Catalog Number Wire Size Range for Main Lug Combination Surface E CH24NLPN125E #6–300 kcmil CSH2100N #2–300 kcmil CH8NLEF CH8NLES J CH32NLPN225J #6–300 kcmil #2–300 kcmil CH8NLJF CH8NLJS #2–300 kcmil CH8NLKF CH8NLKS CSH2125N CSH2125N CSH2200N 17 CSH2100N 225 42 Indoor 18 K CH42NLPN225K #6–300 kcmil CSH2125N CSH2150N CSH2200N 19 Note 1 Requires the use of type CHNT breakers. 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T5-22 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Loadcenters Type CH Type CH Retrofit Interior Kits Type CH Retrofit Adjustable Interior Type CH Retrofit Interior Collar and Assembly with Trim Product Description Replacing existing loadcenters and panelboards can be a time consuming and expensive job. CH retrofit kits can be the solution to save time and money. The kit consists of a standard trim to fit the interior, a picture frame trim to fit the existing box, and a field-adjustable interior assembly that includes neutral and ground bars. These are especially applicable when the existing box is flush mounted in drywall, plaster or block wall. The existing box, and many times existing wiring, can remain. Features and Benefits Standards and Certifications Upgrading Existing Electrical Infrastructure is Simple ● Replaces vintage brands that have hard to find, expensive replacement breakers ● Allows safety upgrade to arc fault and ground fault breakers ● Maximizes number of circuits available with compact design ● Meets 2008 NEC wire bending requirements ● Eco-friendly in asbestosfilled environments ● Exclusive design Interiors are UL Recognized under UL 67, Panelboard standard. Save Time and Money Throughout the Installation ● Uses existing panel box and wires ● Eliminates expensive drywall/paint repair ● Saves 2–3 hours compared to a complete panel changeout—get off the job faster ● Eliminates precise measurements with field-adjustable kit Product Selection To select the retrofit kit: 1. From the existing box size determine which retrofit groups are suitable (may be more than one). 2. Use type of interior, number of phases, and type of main to find the selection chart. 5 3. Select part number from chart (if main breaker, replace XXX with specific amp rating). 4. Note that the overlap of the existing wall is the retro cover size minus the existing box size. If specific measurements are needed, communicate that you need a custom trim size. 5. Contact the Lincoln Flex Center at 800-330-6479 for pricing, lead-times and order entry instructions. ● ● 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Retro Size Groups 9 10 11 12 13 Detailed Product Guide All standard retrofit kits are suitable for a range of existing box sizes: ● 1 14 15 Box width ranging from 14.50 to 22.00 inches (368.3 to 558.8 mm) Box depth ranging from 4.25 inches (108.0 mm) for CH to 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) Box height ranging from 21.00 to 45.00 inches (533.4 to 1143.0 mm) 16 17 18 19 For box dimensions outside of these ranges, contact the Lincoln Flex Center at 800-330-6479. Be sure to provide the existing incoming line wire size. 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T5-23 5 1 2 3 Loadcenters Type CH Retrofit Stocking Kits (BR and CH Kits Available) 12 Five recommended groups: existing box height determines retro group size. Retrofit Kit Interior Catalog Number Description Collar Catalog Number Cover Catalog Number Existing Enclosure Parameters—Inches (mm) Height Width Depth Existing Box Height Determines Retro Size Group—Inches (mm) BR-Aluminum Bus/CH-Copper Bus BR 125A MLO 12/24 circuit retro kit RAABR12L125 Included Included 14.00–18.00 (355.6–457.2) 10.50–12.50 (266.7–317.5) 3.50–5.25 (88.9–133.35) Retro size AA/size 14.00–21.00 (355.6–533.4) BR 100A MCB 10/20 circuit retro kit RAABR10B100 Included Included 14.00–18.00 (355.6–457.2) 10.50–12.50 (266.7–317.5) 3.50–5.25 (88.9–133.35) Retro size AA/size 14.00–21.00 (355.6–533.4) BR 125A MLO 12/24 circuit retro kit RAABR12L125A Included Included 14.00–21.00 (355.6–533.4) 10.50–15.50 (266.7–393.7) 3.50–5.25 (88.9–133.35) Retro size AA/size 14.00–21.00 (355.6–533.4) BR 100A MCB 10/20 circuit retro kit RAABR10B100A Included Included 14.00–21.00 (355.6–533.4) 10.50–15.50 (266.7–393.7) 3.50–5.25 (88.9–133.35) Retro size AA/size 14.00–21.00 (355.6–533.4) CH interior 125A MCB 22 circuits RACH22B125I RACHFRAME CH8CF 21.00–30.00 (533.4–762.0) 13.00–22.00 (330.2–558.8) 4.25–6.00 (108.0–152.4) Retro size A/size 21.00–30.00 (533.4–762.0) CH interior 125A MLO 24 circuits RACH24L125I RACHFRAME CH8CF 21.00–30.00 (533.4–762.0) 13.00–22.00 (330.2–558.8) 4.25–6.00 (108.0–152.4) Retro size A/size 21.00–30.00 (533.4–762.0) CH interior 150A MCB 24 circuits RBCH24B150I RACHFRAME CH8EF 29.00–36.00 (736.6–914.4) 13.00–22.00 (330.2–558.8) 4.25–6.00 (108.0–152.4) Retro size B/size 29.00–36.00 (736.6–914.4) 9 CH interior 225A MLO 32 circuits RBCH32L225I RACHFRAME CH8DF 29.00–36.00 (736.6–914.4) 13.00–22.00 (330.2–558.8) 4.25–6.00 (108.0–152.4) Retro size B/size 29.00–36.00 (736.6–914.4) 10 CH interior 200A MCB 32 circuits RCCH32B200I RCCHFRAME CH8JF 34.00–41.00 (863.3–1041.4) 13.00–22.00 (330.2–558.8) 4.25–6.00 (108.0–152.4) Retro size C/size 34.00– 41.00 (863.3–1041.4) CH interior 225A MLO 42 circuits RCCH42L225I RCCHFRAME CH8GF 34.00–41.00 (863.3–1041.4) 13.00–22.00 (330.2–558.8) 4.25–6.00 (108.0–152.4) Retro size C/size 34.00– 41.00 (863.3–1041.4) CH interior 200A MCB 42 circuits RDCH42B200I RDCHFRAME CH8KF 37.00–45.00 (939.8–1143.0) 13.00–22.00 (330.2–558.8) 4.25–6.00 (108.0–152.4) Retro size D/size 37.00–45.00 (939.8–1143.0) CH interior 225A MLO 42 circuits RDCH42L225I RDCHFRAME CH8KF 37.00–45.00 (939.8–1143.0) 13.00–22.00 (330.0–558.8) 4.25–6.00 (108.0–152.4) Retro size D/size 37.00–45.00 (939.8–1143.0) 4 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 Notes 1 Other options are available. 2 CH retrofit interiors and collar cartons are color coded to ensure accuracy of kit. 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T5-24 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Loadcenters Type CH Surge Panel Surge Panel Replacement Covers for Surge Panels Product Description Catalog Number Cover Number Replacement Module Eaton’s Type CH Surge Loadcenter includes a factory-mounted and wired surge suppressor device. There is a knockout in the cover that allows the user to view the status indication lights on the surge suppressor. The CH Surge Loadcenter reduces the surge current, helping to protect sensitive home electronic equipment. CHSUR22B100D CHPC8DF CHSPT2ULTRA CHSUR24L125D CHPC8DF CHSPT2ULTRA CHPC22B100D CHPC8DF CHSPT2ULTRA CHPC24L125D CHPC8DF CHSPT2ULTRA CHPC12L125C CHPC8CF CHSPT2ULTRA CHPC30B100J CHPC8JF CHSPT2ULTRA CHPC32L150J CHPC8JF CHSPT2ULTRA CHSUR32B150L CHPC8B32LF CHSPT2ULTRA CHSUR32B200L CHPC8B32LF CHSPT2ULTRA CHSUR32L225L CHPC8B32LF CHSPT2ULTRA CHPC32B125L CHPC8B32LF CHSPT2ULTRA CHPC32B150L CHPC8B32LF CHSPT2ULTRA CHPC32B200L CHPC8B32LF CHSPT2ULTRA CHPC32N200L CHPC8B32LF CHSPT2ULTRA CHSUR42B200L CHPC8B42LF CHSPT2ULTRA CHPC42B150L CHPC8B42LF CHSPT2ULTRA CHPC42B200L CHPC8B42LF CHSPT2ULTRA CHPC42N200L CHPC8B42LF CHSPT2ULTRA CHSUR42L225L CHPC8L42LF CHSPT2ULTRA CHPC42L225L CHPC8L42LF CHSPT2ULTRA Save labor by installing a factorymounted surge protective device. Factory-Installed Surge Protection ● Includes a CHSPULTRA and a two-pole 15A circuit breaker ● Increases the effectiveness of surge protection due to reduced lead length ● A modified deadfront allows for easy viewing of indicating lights 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Surge Ready ● Provides a mounting provision for CHSPULTRA ● A modified deadfront allows for easy viewing of indicating lights 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T5-25 5 1 2 3 4 5 Loadcenters Type CH Further Information Publication Number Description CA08100002E Volume 1—Residential and Light Commercial Catalog, Tab 1 CA08100011E Volume 9—OEM Product Guide Pricing Information Price and Availability Digest (PAD) Vista/VISTALINE™ Discount Symbol 22CD 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T5-26 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Meter Centers Group Metering Lineup 6 Meter Centers Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meter Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Residential Meter Stacks—Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Residential Meter Stacks—Ringless. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commercial Meter Stacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Miscellaneous Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pricing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T6-2 V12-T6-2 V12-T6-2 V12-T6-3 V12-T6-4 V12-T6-7 V12-T6-8 V12-T6-8 V12-T6-9 V12-T6-9 V12-T6-9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T6-1 6 1 Meter Centers Meter Centers Product History Product Description 2 3 In the beginning, all multiple metering applications were assembled at the job site using wire troughs, individual meter sockets and enclosed circuit breakers. 6 In the early 1960s, factoryassembled meter packs began to be made on a jobby-job basis. Soon after, modular metering was introduced for single-phase 200A maximum ring-style applications. 7 Product History Time Line 4 5 8 9 10 11 12 In 1981, a few utilities began to require ringless meter covers and, in 1983, the first three-phase commercial meter modules with lever type bypass were introduced. The Westinghouse Meter Center designs, Type WM and/or WP, and facilities were sold to Thomas & Betts in 1994. Today, wall-hung multiple metering is used in virtually all areas of the country for both residential and commercial applications. Product WCG3 Meter Center Cutler-Hammer® Meter Centers from Eaton’s electrical business are designed for use where an individually metered distribution center is required. Meter centers house meter sockets that measure power consumption at service entrances. Metering is designed for use with multi-family dwelling units, commercial units and light industrial applications. Main ratings range from 250 to 2000A, and 125, 200 and 320A sockets are available in both single-phase and threephase versions. 1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 Present Westinghouse QS, QP Cutler-Hammer CG2, 4 Cutler-Hammer CG3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Westinghouse WM, WP Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse WCG3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Cutler-Hammer 1MM, 3MM, 35MM, 37MM, 35SS, 37SS Replacement Capabilities Type Accessories Covers Jaws Bussed End Caps CG3 ■ ■ ■ ■ CG5 ■ ■ ■ CG7 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ CG9 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ CG11 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 16 WCG3 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ WCG5 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 17 WCG7 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ WCG9 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 WCG11 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 1MM ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 19 3MM ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 35MM ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 20 37MM ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 35SS ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 21 37SS ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 13 14 15 Tenant Breaker Hinged Cover Drip Hoods Socket Replacement ■ ■ ■ ■ 22 23 24 25 V12-T6-2 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 6 Meter Centers Meter Packs 1 Wireway Cover 2 Utility Pull Section Cover 3 Meter Socket Assembly 4 Tenant Breaker Cover 5 6 7 8 Meter Cover 9 10 Endwall Meter Pack 11 Meter Packs 12 Catalog Number Meter Pack Utility Pull Section Cover 1MP2122R Wireway Cover Meter Socket Assembly Tenant Breaker Cover MP2122UCVR MPCCVR01 1MMMS 1MP3124R MP1234UCVR MPCCVR04 1MP4124R MP1234UCVR MPCCVR05 1MP5126R MP1256UCVR 1MP6126R MP1256UCVR 1MP2204R 1MP3206R Meter Cover Endwall (with Knockouts) Endwall (without Knockouts) Vertical Busbars 1MMBC1 1MMCP1 1 MP122NWLK MP122NWL MM1223VBUS 1MMMS 1MMBC1 1MMCP1 MP1234NWLK MP1234NWL MM1223VBUS 1MMMS 1MMBC1 1MMCP1 MP1234NWLK MP1234NWL MM1224VBUS MPCCVR02 2 1MMMS 1MMBC1 1MMCP1 3 MP1256NWLK MP1256NWL MM1223VBUS MPCCVR03 2 1MMMS 1MMBC1 1MMCP1 3 MP1256NWLK MP1256NWL MM1223VBUS MP202UCVR MPCCVR06 1MMMS 1MMBC2 1MMCP2 MP2024NWLK MP2024NWL MM202VBUS MP2034UCVR MPCCVR09 1MMMS 1MMBC2 1MMCP2 MP2024NWLK MP2024NWL MM2023VBUS 1MP4206R MP2034UCVR MPCCVR10 1MMMS 1MMBC2 1MMCP2 MP2024NWLK MP2024NWL MM204VBUS 1MP5206R MP2056UCVR MPCCVR07 4 1MMMS 1MMBC2 1MMCP2 MP2056NWLK MP2056NWL MM2023VBUS 1MP6206R MP2056UCVR MPCCVR08 4 1MMMS 1MMBC2 1MMCP2 MP2056NWLK MP2056NWL MM2023VBUS 1MP2122RRL 5 MP2122LUCVR MPCCVR01 1MMMS 6 1MMBC1 1MMRC125 7 MP122NWLK MP122NWL MM1223VBUS 1MP3124RRL 5 MP1234UCVR MPCCVR04 1MMMS 6 1MMBC1 1MMRC125 7 MP1234NWLK MP1234NWL MM1223VBUS 6 MM124VBUS 13 5 MP1234UCVR MPCCVR05 1MMMS 1MMBC1 1MMRC125 MP1234NWLK MP1234NWL 1MP5126RRL 5 MP1256UCVR MPCCVR02 1MMMS 6 1MMBC1 1MMRC125 7 MP1256NWLK MP1256NWL MM1223VBUS 1MP6126RRL 5 MP1256UCVR MPCCVR03 1MMMS 6 1MMBC1 1MMRC125 7 MP1256NWLK MP1256NW MM1223VBUS 1MP2204RRL 5 MP202UCVR MPCCVR06 1MMMS 6 1MMBC2 1MMRC200 7 MP2024NWLK MP2024NWL MM202VBUS 1MP3206RRL 5 MP2034UCVR MPCCVR09 1MMMS 6 1MMBC2 1MMRC200 MP2024NWLK MP2024NWL MM2023VBUS 1MP4206RRL 5 MP2034UCVR MPCCVR10 1MMMS 6 1MMBC2 1MMRC200 MP2024NWLK MP2024NWL MM204VBUS 5 MP2056UCVR MPCCVR07 1MMMS 6 1MMBC2 1MMRC200 MP2056NWLK MP2056NWL MM2023VBUS 1MP6206RRL 5 MP2056UCVR MPCCVR08 1MMMS 6 1MMBC2 1MMRC200 MP2056NWLK MP2056NWL MM2023VBUS 1MP4124RRL 1MP5206RRL Notes 1 For top position, use meter socket cover 1MMCP1T. 2 For center wireway cover, order MPCENCVR1. 3 For top position, use meter socket cover 1MMCP1T. 4 For center wireway cover, order MPCENCVR2. 5 For catalog numbers with a “B” suffix (ringless with horn bypass), all replacement parts are the same with the exception of the meter socket assembly. Refer to Footnote 6 for correct catalog number. 6 For ringless style meter packs with horn bypass, order 1MMMSB. 7 For top position, use meter socket cover 1MMRC200T. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T6-3 6 1 2 Meter Centers Main Devices Drip Hood Front Cover 3 4 End Caps 5 6 7 8 9 10 Endwall 11 12 Meter Main Device End Caps 13 Description Catalog Number Right side (bumped) 47-28172-2A 14 Left side (flat) 47-24139A 15 16 Terminal Box Catalog Number Terminal Box Front Cover Drip Hood Endwall (with Knockouts) Endwall (without Knockouts) 1MTB800R MMFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 17 1MTB1200R MMFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 3MTB400R MTBFCVR1 MMDH4 MTBEW1 MTBEWNK01 18 3MTB600R MTBFCVR1 MMDH4 MTBEW1 MTBEWNK01 3MTB800R MMFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 19 3MBT1200R MMFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T6-4 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 6 Meter Centers Main Circuit Breaker 1 Catalog Number Circuit Breaker Front Cover Drip Hood Endwall (with Knockouts) Endwall (without Knockouts) Main Breaker Cover 1MCB250R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 1MHCB250R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 1MCB300R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 1MHCB300R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 1MCB350R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 1MHCB350R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 1MCB400R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 1MHCB400R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 1MCB500R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 1MHCB500R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 1MCB600R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 1MHCB600R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 1MCB700R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 1MHCB700R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 1MCB800R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 1MHCB800R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 1MCB900R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 1MHCB900R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 1MCB1000R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 1MHCB1000R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 1MCB1200R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 1MHCB1200R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 1MCB1400RB MCBFCVR3 MCBDH1 — MMEWNK03 49-7060 1MCB1400RT MCBFCVR3 MCBDH1 — MMEWNK03 49-7060 1MCB1600RB MCBFCVR3 MCBDH1 — MMEWNK03 49-7060 1MCB1600RT MCBFCVR3 MCBDH1 — MMEWNK03 49-7060 1MCB2000RB MCBFCVR3 MCBDH1 — MMEWNK03 49-7060 1MCB2000RT MCBFCVR3 MCBDH1 — MMEWNK03 49-7060 3MCB250R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 3MHCB250R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 3MCB300R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 3MHCB300R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 3MCB350R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 3MHCB350R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 3MCB400R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 3MHCB400R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 3MCB500R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 3MHCB500R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 3MCB600R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 3MHCB600R MCBFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 3MCB700R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 3MHCB700R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 3MCB800R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 3MHCB800R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 3MCB900R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 3MHCB900R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 3MCB1000R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 3MHCB1000R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 3MCB1200R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 3MHCB1200R MCBFCVR2 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 49-7060 3MCB1400RB MCBFCVR3 MCBDH1 — MMEWNK03 — 3MCB1400RT MCBFCVR3 MCBDH1 — MMEWNK03 — 3MCB1600RB MCBFCVR3 MCBDH1 — MMEWNK03 — 3MCB1600RT MCBFCVR3 MCBDH1 — MMEWNK03 — 3MCB2000RB MCBFCVR3 MCBDH1 — MMEWNK03 — 3MCB2000RT MCBFCVR3 MCBDH1 — MMEWNK03 — 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T6-5 6 1 2 Meter Centers Main Fusible Switch Catalog Number Fusible Switch Front Cover Drip Hood Endwall (with Knockouts) Endwall (without Knockouts) MMEWNKO1 1MFS400RB MMFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 3 1MFS400RT MFSFCVR1 MMDH1 — MMEWNKO1 1MFS600RB MMFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNKO1 4 1MFS600RT MFSFCVR1 MMDH1 — MMEWNKO1 1MFS800RB MMFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNKO1 1MFS800RT MFSFCVR1 MMDH1 — MMEWNKO1 1MFS1200RB MFSFCVR2 MMDH2 MMEW2 MMEWNKO2 MMEWNKO1 5 3MFS400RB MMFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 6 3MFS400RT MFSFCVR1 MMDH1 — MMEWNKO1 3MFS600RB MMFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNKO1 7 3MFS600RT MFSFCVR1 MMDH1 — MMEWNKO1 3MFS800RB MMFCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNKO1 8 9 10 11 3MFS800RT MFSFCVR1 MMDH1 — MMEWNKO1 3MFS1200RB MFSFCVR2 MMDH2 MMEW2 MMWENKO2 Drip Hood Endwall (with Knockouts) Endwall (without Knockouts) Main Bolted Pressure Contact Switch Catalog Number Bolted Pressure Contact Switch Front Cover 1BPS1200RB No replacement parts available at this time. 1BPS1200RT 3BPS1200RB 12 3BPS1200RT 13 3BPS1600RT 14 3BPS1600RB No replacement parts available at this time. 3BPS2000RB 3BPS2000RT Main Fusible Switch with Pullbox 15 Catalog Number 16 Fusible Switch with Pullbox Front Cover Pullbox Cover Drip Hood Endwall (with Knockouts) Endwall (without Knockouts) 1MFS400RUG MFPFCVR1 MFPBCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 1MFS600RUG MFPFCVR1 MFPBCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 1MFS800RUG MFPFCVR1 MFPBCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 1MFS1200RUG MFPFCVR2 MFPBCVR2 MMDH2 MMEW2 MMEWNK02 18 3MFS400RUG MFPFCVR1 MFPBCVR1 MMDH1 MMEW1 MMEWNK01 3MFS600RUG MFPFCVR3 MFPBCVR3 MMDH5 MMEW4 MMEWNK04 19 3MFS800RUG MFPFCVR3 MFPBCVR3 MMDH5 MMEW4 MMEWNK04 3MFS1200RUG MFPFCVR2 MFPBCVR2 MMDH2 MMEW2 MMEWNK02 17 20 21 22 23 24 Pullbox Catalog Number Pullbox Front Cover Pullbox Cover Drip Hood Endwall (with Knockouts) Endwall (without Knockouts) 1UGPB400R PBFCVR1 PBDH1 PBEW1 PBEWNK01 1UGPB800R PBFCVR2 PBDH2 PBEW2 PBEWNK02 1UGPB1200R PBFCVR3 PBDH3 PBEW3 PBEWNK03 3UGPB400R PBFCVR1 PBDH1 PBEW1 PBEWNK01 3UGPB800R PBFCVR2 PBDH2 PBEW2 PBEWNK02 3UGPB1200R PBFCVR3 PBDH3 PBEW3 PBEWNK03 25 V12-T6-6 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 6 Meter Centers Residential Meter Stacks—Ring 1 Drip Hood 2 3 Wireway Cover 4 Meter Socket Assembly 5 6 7 Tenant Breaker Cover 8 Meter Cover Endwall 9 Ring Style Meter Stack 10 Residential Meter Stacks—Ring Catalog Number Meter Stack Wireway Cover Meter Socket Assembly Tenant Breaker Cover Meter Cover Endwall (with Knockouts) Endwall (without Knockouts) Drip Hood Vertical Busbar 11 3MM212 MMCCVR2123 — 1 1MMCP1 2 MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM1223VBUS 3MM212R MMCCVR2123R 1MMMS 1MMBC1 1MMCP1 2 MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM1223VBUS 1MM312 MMCCVR3121 1MMMS 1 1MMCP1 2 MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM1223VBUS 1MM312R MMCCVR3121R 1MMMS 1MMBC1 1MMCP1 2 MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM1223VBUS 3MM312 MMCCVR3123 1MMMS 1 1MMCP1 2 MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM1223VBUS 3MM312R MMCCVR3123R 1MMMS 1MMBC1 1MMCP1 2 MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM1223VBUS 1MM412 MMCCVR4121 1MMMS 1 1MMCP1 2 MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM124VBUS 1MM412R MMCCVR4121R 1MMMS 1MMBC1 1MMCP1 2 MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM124VBUS 3MM412 MMCCVR4123 1MMMS 1 1MMCP1 2 MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM124VBUS 3MM412R MMCCVR4123R 1MMMS 1MMBC1 1MMCP1 2 MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM124VBUS 1MM512 MMCCVR5121 1MMMS 1 1MMCP1 2 MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM125VBUS 1MM512R MMCCVR5121R 1MMMS 1MMBC1 1MMCP1 2 MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM125VBUS 3MM512 MMCCVR5123 1MMMS 1 1MMCP1 2 MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM125VBUS 3MM512R MMCCVR5123R 1MMMS 1MMBC1 1MMCP1 2 MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM125VBUS 1MM612 MMCCVR6121 1MMMS 1 1MMCP1 2 MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM126VBUS 1MM612R MMCCVR6121R 1MMMS 1MMBC1 1MMCP1 2 MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM126VBUS 3MM612 MMCCVR6123 1MMMS 1 1MMCP1 2 MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM126VBUS 3MM612R MMCCVR6123R 1MMMS 1MMBC1 1MMCP1 2 MM12N1WLK MM12N1WL MMDH3 MM126VBUS 3MM220 MMCCVR2203 1MMMS 1 1MMCP2 3 MM20N1WLK MM20N1WL MMDH4 MM2023VBUS 3MM220R MMCCVR2203R 1MMMS 1MMBC2 1MMCP2 3 MM20N1WLK MM20N1WL MMDH4 MM2023VBUS 1MM320 MMCCVR3201 1MMMS 1 1MMCP2 3 MM20N1WLK MM20N1WL MMDH4 MM2023VBUS 1MM320R MMCCVR3201R 1MMMS 1MMBC2 1MMCP2 3 MM20N1WLK MM20N1WL MMDH4 MM2023VBUS 3MM320 MMCCVR3203 1MMMS 1 1MMCP2 3 MM20N1WLK MM20N1WL MMDH4 MM2023VBUS 3MM320R MMCCVR3203R 1MMMS 1MMBC2 1MMCP2 3 MM20N1WLK MM20N1WL MMDH4 MM2023VBUS 1MM420 MMCCVR4201 1MMMS 1 1MMCP2 3 MM20N1WLK MM20N1WL MMDH4 MM204VBUS 1MM420R MMCCVR4201R 1MMMS 1MMBC2 1MMCP2 3 MM20N1WLK MM20N1WL MMDH4 MM204VBUS 3MM420 MMCCVR4203 1MMMS 1 1MMCP2 3 MM20N1WLK MM20N1WL MMDH4 MM204VBUS 3MM420R MMCCVR4203R 1MMMS 1MMBC2 1MMCP2 3 MM20N1WLK MM20N1WL MMDH4 MM204VBUS 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Notes 1 Type 1 meter stacks do not come with breaker covers. 2 For top position, order meter cover 1MMCP1T. 3 For top position, order meter cover 1MMCP2T. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 12 25 V12-T6-7 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Meter Centers Residential Meter Stacks—Ringless Residential Meter Stacks—Ringless Catalog Number Meter Stack Wireway Cover Meter Socket Assembly Tenant Breaker Cover Meter Cover Endwall (with Knockouts) Endwall (without Knockouts) Drip Hood Vertical Busbar 3MM212RRL 1 1MM312RRL 1 3MM312RRL 1 1MM412RRL 1 3MM412RRL 1 1MM512RRL 1 3MM512RRL 1 1MM612RRL 1 3MM612RRL 1 3MM220RRL 1 1MM320RRL 1 3MM320RRL 1 1MM420RRL 1 3MM420RRL 1 MMCCVR2123R MMCCVR3121R MMCCVR3123R MMCCVR3121R MMCCVR4123R MMCCVR5121R MMCCVR5123R MMCCVR6121R MMCCVR6123R MMCCVR2203R MMCCVR3201R MMCCVR3203R MMCCVR4201R MMCCVR4203R 1MMMS 2 1MMMS 2 1MMMS 2 1MMMS 2 1MMMS 2 1MMMS 2 1MMMS 2 1MMMS 2 1MMMS 2 1MMMS 2 1MMMS 2 1MMMS 2 1MMMS 2 1MMMS 2 1MMBC1 1MMBC1 1MMBC1 1MMBC1 1MMBC1 1MMBC1 1MMBC1 1MMBC1 1MMBC1 1MMBC2 1MMBC2 1MMBC2 1MMBC2 1MMBC2 1MMRC125 3 1MMRC125 3 1MMRC125 3 1MMRC125 1MMRC125 1MMRC125 1MMRC125 1MMRC125 1MMRC125 1MMRC200 1MMRC200 1MMRC200 1MMRC200 1MMRC200 MM12NWLK MM12NWLK MM12NWLK MM12NWLK MM12NWLK MM12NWLK MM12NWLK MM12NWLK MM12NWLK MM20NWLK MM20NWLK MM20NWLK MM20NWLK MM20NWLK MM12NWL MM12NWL MM12NWL MM12NWL MM12NWL MM12NWL MM12NWL MM12NWL MM12NWL MM20NWL MM20NWL MM20NWL MM20NWL MM20NWL MMDH3 MMDH3 MMDH3 MMDH3 MMDH3 MMDH3 MMDH3 MMDH3 MMDH3 MMDH4 MMDH4 MMDH4 MMDH4 MMDH4 MM1223VBUS MM1223VBUS MM1223VBUS MM124VBUS MM124VBUS MM125VBUS MM125VBUS MM126VBUS MM126VBUS MM2023VBUS MM2023VBUS MM2023VBUS MM204VBUS MM204VBUS Commercial Meter Stacks Commercial Meter Stacks (Lever Bypass) Catalog Number Meter Stack Wireway Cover 35MM120R12 35MM220R12 35MM320R12 35MM420R12 37MM140R12 37MM120R12 37MM220R12 37MM320R12 37MM420R12 MSLWCVR1 MSLWCVR2 MSLWCVR3 MSLWCVR4 4 MSLWCVR9 4 MSLWCVR5 4 MSLWCVR6 4 MSLWCVR7 4 MSLWCVR8 4 — — — MSLWCVR13 5 MSLWCVR14 5 MSLWCVR15 5 MSLWCVR16 5 MSLWCVR17 5 MSLWCVR18 5 Meter Socket Assembly Tenant Breaker Cover Meter Cover MSLMSA1 MSLMSA1 MSLMSA1 MSLMSA1 MSLMSA2 MSLMSA2 MSLMSA2 MSLMSA2 MSLMSA2 MSBCVR1 MSBCVR1 MSBCVR1 MSBCVR1 MSBCVR1 MSBCVR1 MSBCVR1 MSBCVR1 MSBCVR1 MSLMCVR1 4 MSLMCVR1 4 MSLMCVR1 4 MSLMCVR1 4 MSLMCVR1 4 MSLMCVR1 4 MSLMCVR1 4 MSLMCVR1 4 MSLMCVR1 4 37MMSK1 5 37MMSK1 5 37MMSK1 5 37MMSK1 5 37MMSK1 5 37MMSK1 5 37MMSK1 5 37MMSK1 5 37MMSK1 5 Endwall (with Knockouts) Endwall (without Knockouts) Drip Hood — — — — — — — — — MSLEW1 MSLEW1 MSLEW1 MSLEW2 MSLEW1 MSLEW1 MSLEW1 MSLEW1 MSLEW2 MSLDH1 MSLDH1 MSLDH1 MSLDH2 MSLDH1 MSLDH1 MSLDH1 MSLDH1 MSLDH2 Commercial Meter Stack (Test Bypass) Catalog Number Meter Stack Wireway Cover Meter Socket Assembly Tenant Breaker Cover Meter Cover Endwall (with Knockouts) Endwall (without Knockouts) Drip Hood 35SS120RAB 35SS120RAC 35SS120RBC 35SS220RAB 35SS220RAC 35SS220RBC 35SS320RAB 35SS320RAC 35SS320RBC 37SS120R 37SS220R 37SS320R MSTWCVR1 MSTWCVR2 MSTWCVR3 MSTWCVR4 MSTWCVR5 MSTWCVR6 MSTWCVR7 MSTWCVR8 MSTWCVR9 MSTWCVR10 MSTWCVR11 MSTWCVR12 MSTMSA1 MSTMSA1 MSTMSA1 MSTMSA1 MSTMSA1 MSTMSA1 MSTMSA1 MSTMSA1 MSTMSA1 MSTMSA2 MSTMSA2 MSTMSA2 MSBCVR1 MSBCVR1 MSBCVR1 MSBCVR1 MSBCVR1 MSBCVR1 MSBCVR1 MSBCVR1 MSBCVR1 MSBCVR1 MSBCVR1 MSBCVR1 MSTMCVR1 MSTMCVR1 MSTMCVR1 MSTMCVR1 MSTMCVR1 MSTMCVR1 MSTMCVR1 MSTMCVR1 MSTMCVR1 MSTMCVR1 MSTMCVR1 MSTMCVR1 MSTEW1 MSTEW1 MSTEW1 MSTEW2 MSTEW2 MSTEW2 MSTEW2 MSTEW2 MSTEW2 MSTEW1 MSTEW2 MSTEW2 MSTEWNK01 MSTEWNK01 MSTEWNK01 MSTEWNK02 MSTEWNK02 MSTEWNK02 MSTEWNK02 MSTEWNK02 MSTEWNK02 MSTEWNK01 MSTEWNK02 MSTEWNK02 MSTDH1 MSTDH1 MSTDH1 MSTDH1 MSTDH1 MSTDH1 MSTDH1 MSTDH1 MSTDH1 MSTDH1 MSTDH1 MSTDH1 Notes 1 For catalog numbers with a “B” suffix (ringless with horn bypass), all replacement parts are the same with the exception of the meter socket assembly. Refer to Footnote 2 for correct catalog number. 2 For ringless style meter stacks with horn bypass, order 1MMMSB meter socket assembly. 3 For top position, use meter socket cover 1MMRC125T. 4 Used for product built October 2002 and prior. 5 Used for product built after October 2002. V12-T6-8 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Meter Centers 6 Miscellaneous Parts 1 Miscellaneous Parts Description Part Number Phase balancing kit, single-phase commercial metering 99-4177-3 A and C phase balancing kit (3MM) 99-4184 Breaker mounting kit, commercial metering (one three-pole breaker per kit) 99-4176-2 Breaker mounting kit, 1MM/1MP, 200A, (one two-pole breaker per kit) 99-4176 Mounting kit, meter center 99-4172 Mounting kit, meter pack 99-4173 Bonding strap kit, all meter packs (except CECHA three and four socket) 99-4174 Bonding strap kit, CHECA three and four socket meter packs 99-2379 Sealing screw kit, ringless devices (six screws) 99-4175 Sealing screw kit, three and four meter sockets, ringless devices (four screws) 99-2589 Padlock bracket 99-2512-5 Mounting bracket kit—all breaker and fusible mains 99-4183 Mounting bracket kit—400 and 600A 3MTB 99-4183-3 Exterior breaker cover 49-6070 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Further Information Publication Number Description RP32A01BTE Renewal parts data for new 1MM, 3MM, 35MM, 37MM, 35SS and 37SS RP00501001E Renewal parts data for multiple metering 11 12 Pricing Information 13 Price and Availability Digest (PAD) Vista/VISTALINE™ Discount Symbol 22-CD 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T6-9 Safety Switches Safety Switch Product Family 7 Safety Switches Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product History Time Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pricing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T7-2 V12-T7-2 V12-T7-2 V12-T7-2 V12-T7-2 V12-T7-2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08105001E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T7-1 7 1 Safety Switches Safety Switches 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Safety Switch Product Family The Westinghouse safety switch design and facilities were sold to Thomas & Betts in 1994. Prior to this, there were various design and code changes that caused changes in catalog numbering and utilization of the switches. In 1984, an “N” was added to the middle of the catalog numbers to signify the new National Electrical Code® (NEC®) regulations. During this time period, Westinghouse’s safety switches were manufactured in Beaver, PA. In 1989, the manufacture of the switches was moved to Vidalia, GA. There was then another code change in 1992 that necessitated another change in catalog numbering. The previous “N” in the middle of the catalog number was deleted for the 400 to 1200A units. Product History Time Line Product Description Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer® series of safety switches have a number of applications from service entrance to branch circuit protection. They are also horsepower rated for use as motor circuit switches. Non-fusible safety switches provide a means to manually connect or disconnect the load from the source. Fusible safety switches provide a means to manually open and close a circuit and overcurrent protection by means of installed fuses. Safety switches offer a wide variety of switching capabilities with general-duty, heavy-duty and double-throw switches. Product 1955 1960 1965 1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 2005 2010 Present Cutler-Hammer 4103 Cutler-Hammer 4105 Cutler-Hammer K-Series Westinghouse HFN365N (Bacalyte Base) Westinghouse HFN365N Westinghouse HF365N (Red Base, 400–1200A) Eaton R-Series Rotary Disconnects Cutler-Hammer C362/C363 Rotary Disconnects Eaton’s Pringle® Bolted Pressure Switches Replacement Capabilities Product History Eaton began manufacturing safety switches with the 4103 line in 1957. In 1977, the new 4105 line was moved from the New York plant to the manufacturing facility in Lincoln, IL. The last design change came in 1983, where the manufacture of the new K-Series switch was moved to Eaton’s Cleveland, TN, facility. The K-Series design represents our current product offering and is still manufactured at the Cleveland plant. Type Operating Handle Ground Neutral Fuse Base Fuse Block Line Shield Operating Mechanism Switching Base K-Series ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Note: Specific applicable renewal parts for safety switches are identified on the inside door label of the product. Further Information Publication Number Description RP00801001E Safety Switch Renewal Parts CA08100003E Commercial Distribution Catalog, Volume 2, Tab 1 (Switching Devices) CA08104001E Consulting Application Guide CA08100006E Motor Control & Protection Catalog, Volume 5, Tab 8 (Rotary Disconnects) PG00802002E Rotary Disconnect Product Guide Pricing Information 20 Price and Availability Digest (PAD) 21 Vista/VISTALINE™ Discount Symbol SWD-1, SWD-2, SWD-3 for Safety Switches 22 23 24 25 V12-T7-2 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08105001E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Dry-Type Distribution Transformers Family of Dry-Type Distribution Transformers 8 Dry-Type Distribution Transformers Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product History Time Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pricing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T8-2 V12-T8-2 V12-T8-2 V12-T8-3 V12-T8-4 V12-T8-4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T8-1 8 1 Dry-Type Distribution Transformers Dry-Type Distribution Transformers 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Family of Dry-Type Distribution Transformers Product History manufactured numerous varieties of transformers for countless applications worldwide. Originally a Westinghouse Product The first transformer built in the United States was manufactured by Westinghouse Electric in 1892. It was a 2 kVA drytype transformer. For over a century, Westinghouse The Westinghouse design transformer is now available through Eaton. Dry-type transformers, the workhorse of modern industry, are the foundation of modern AC power distribution. It is a transformer that solves the problems of maintenance, installation, safety and efficiency by using air to cool the coils instead of liquids. Many older transformers, which in some cases pre-date the product families listed above, can be updated to the modern designs currently manufactured by Eaton. Product History Time Line Product Description Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer® series of dry-type distribution transformers are electrical devices that transfer energy by magnetic induction from one circuit to another. They are typically used to change the voltage in an electric power system from its distribution level to the proper level for practical and safe use. Typical loads for dry-type distribution transformers include lighting, heating, air conditioning, fans and machine tools. Such loads are found in commercial, institutional, industrial and residential structures. Type 1955 1960 1965 1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 2005 DS-3 DT-3 MTA MTC EP EPT MPC MD KT NEMA TP-1 HMT CSL3 NEMA Premium Different types of dry-type distribution transformers are used for various applications throughout facilities. Therefore, dry-type distribution transformers are classified in distinct product groups as follows: general purpose—sand and resin encapsulated (EP and EPT); general purpose—ventilated (DS-3, DT-3, CSL3-2007, NEMA® Premium®); energy efficient (NEMA TP-1); shielded isolation; motor drive isolation (MD); nonlinear (KT); mini–power center (MPC); hazardous location, Buck-Boost and industrial control (MTA and MTC). 22 23 24 25 V12-T8-2 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 2010 Present 8 Dry-Type Distribution Transformers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Capabilities 1 Replacement Parts 2 Terminal Lug Kits for Type DT-3 Transformers 1 Typical Sizing Terminal Lugs Cable Range Terminal Lugs Quantity Hardware Bolt Size Hardware Quantity 15–37.5 kVA single-phase 15–45 kVA three-phase #14–#2 #6–250 kcmil 8 4 1/4–20 x 3/4 8 LKS1 50–75 kVA single-phase 75–112.5 kVA three-phase #6–250 kcmil 12 1/4–20 x 3/4 1/4–20 x 1-3/4 8 8 LKS2 100–167 kVA single-phase 150–300 kVA three-phase #6–250 kcmil #2–600 kcmil 3 22 1/4–20 x 3/4 3/8–16 x 2 3 16 LKS3 5 500 kVA three-phase #2–600 kcmil 29 3/8–16 x 2 18 LKS4 6 Rodent Screens Rodent screens are used to discourage entry by birds or rodents. 3 4 Replacement Parts for Mini–Power Centers Frame Size(s) 2 Description Catalog Number 908, 909 RS01 910A, 911, 912 RS02 913B, 914B, 915B RS03 916 Frame Deadfront Cover (Breaker Cover) Part Number Front Cover Part Number 283 47-37503 7074C98H04 284 47-37503-2 7074C98H01 285 47-37503-3 7074C98H02 286 47-37503-4 7074C98H02 287 47-37503-5 7074C98H03 289 47-37459 7074C44H01 290 47-37459-2 7074C44H02 291 47-37459-3 7074C44H03 289A 47-42072-1 7074C44H01 290A 47-42072-2 7074C44H02 291A 47-42072-3 7074C44H03 Catalog Number RS04 917, 918, 918A RS05 919, 920 RS06 916A, 916B RS07 922 RS08 923 RS09 814, 821 RS11 815 RS12 816 RS13 817, 818 RS14 819, 820 RS15 912B RS16 914D, 915D RS17 924 RS18 928 RS19 929 RS20 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Notes 1 Lugs are rated Al/Cu and are suitable for use with either aluminum or copper conductors. 2 Effective June 1, 2001, frame numbers have a prefix of FR, i.e., FR819. Dimensions, accessories, etc. are still applicable as if the FR did not exist. 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T8-3 8 1 Dry-Type Distribution Transformers Replacement Capabilities Replacement Parts Case Parts for Ventilated Transformers 2 Panels Front or Back Part Number Side (Two Required Per Transformer) Part Number Bottom Part Number Top Cover Part Number 3 Frame(s) 1 4 908, 909 7073C37P01 1714C44P03 7073C20P05 1714C45P01 910, 911, 912 1714C46P01 1714C44P01 7073C20P01 1714C45P01 5 6 7 8 9 10 Three-Phase, 600V Class 913A, 914A, 915A 1714C47P03 1714C44P07 7073C20P02 1714C45P02 916 1714C60P01 1714C56P01 7073C20P03 1714C58P01 917, 918 1714C65P01 1714C64P01 7073C20P04 1714C67P01 918A 47-41801 47-41800 47-41799 47-41802 919, 920 2D46331P03 (upper panel) 2D46331P04 (lower panel) 2D46332P01 2D46331P01 (cutout cover plate) — — 2D46331P02 922 2D46391H03 (back upper panel) 2D46391H06 (front upper panel) 2D46391H08 (lower panel) 2D46392H01 — — — 2D46391H02 923 47-45927-1 47-45925-1 47-45759-1 47-45926-1 910A, 911A, 912A 47-40592 47-40591 47-40589 1714C45P01 913B, 914B, 915B 47-40580 47-40578 47-41789 47-41792 1714C45P02 916A 47-41790 47-41789 47-41788 47-41791 FR916B 47-47351-1 47-47350-1 47-47-347-1 47-41791 912B 47-49323-1 47-49321-1 47-51964-1 47-49322-1 914D, 915D 47-49317-1 47-49315-1 47-51965-1 47-49316-1 924 47-53089-2 (upper panel) 47-53089-1 (lower panel) 47-53088-1 47-53087-1 47-53089-1 13 928 47-53777-1 47-53779-1 47-53778-1 1714C67H15 929 47-53786-1 47-53788-1 47-53787-1 47-41802-3 14 Single-Phase, 600V Class 809 7073C16P03 7073C18P04 7073C14P03 7073C17P01 15 810, 811, 835 7073C16P01 7073C18P01 7073C14P01 7073C17P01 812, 813, 836, 837, 838 7073C16P02 7073C18P02 7073C14P02 7073C17P02 16 814 7073C54P01 7073C18P05 7073C14P04 7073C17P03 815 47-39433 47-39430 47-39429 47-39431 17 816 47-40452 47-40451 47-40449 47-40453 817, 818 47-40457 47-40456 47-40454 47-40458 18 819, 820 47-40574 47-40573 47-40459 47-40575 11 12 Further Information Pricing Information Publication Number Price and Availability Digest (PAD) Description 20 B.36B.01.S.E K-Factor Dry-Type Distribution Transformer Brochure CA08100003E Commercial Distribution Catalog, Volume 2, Tab 2 21 CA08104001E Consulting Application Guide B1228A Industrial Control Transformer Binder 22 B.36F.01.S.E Mini–Power Center Brochure B.36D.01.S.E Class 1, Division 2, Hazardous Location Transformer Brochure 19 Vista/VISTALINE™ (Discount Symbol DT-1) Notes 1 Effective June 1, 2001 frame numbers have a prefix of FR, i.e., FR819. Dimensions, accessories, etc. are still applicable as if the FR did not exist. Parts listed are for standard catalog listed transformers. Units with modifications may require different parts. (Frame No. from transformer nameplate required.) Transformer nameplate and UL® label are not field replaceable. 23 24 25 V12-T8-4 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Busway (Low Voltage) Circuit Breaker Enclosure 9 Busway (Low Voltage) Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product History Time Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vintage Busway Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Ampere Busway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Plug-In Busway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard and Low Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick-Assembled Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CP2, CP3 or CP4 SAFETYBUS Busway Plug-In Units . . . . . . . . . . Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clipper Power Systems, Busway TVSS Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . IQ Energy Sentinel for Bus Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pricing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T9-2 V12-T9-2 V12-T9-3 V12-T9-4 V12-T9-4 V12-T9-4 V12-T9-6 V12-T9-7 V12-T9-8 V12-T9-10 V12-T9-11 V12-T9-14 V12-T9-14 V12-T9-15 V12-T9-15 V12-T9-15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T9-1 9 1 Busway (Low Voltage) Busway (Low Voltage) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Standard Plug-In Product Description Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer® low voltage busway consists of aluminum or copper bars inside a metal housing used for power distribution. Busway is available in ampere ratings of 100–5000A. Busway is available as feeder (indoor or outdoor) and plug-in. Feeder busway routes power from point-to-point, whereas plug-in busway allows for power to be tapped off along a run as needed. Busway is typically used in manufacturing buildings and high-rise office buildings. Product History Westinghouse began marketing low voltage busway in 1938. The first product offering was power distribution busway, using a multiple bolt joint that later evolved into standard plug-in busway. Victory bus duct was developed during the Second World War to comply with federal limitations placed on usage of materials such as steel and copper, which were critical to the war effort. In 1947, Westinghouse began manufacturing busway at the newly acquired facility in Beaver, PA, with standard plug-in and feeder bus in ratings up to 1500A. All of these early designs used separated, uninsulated busbars inside a totally enclosed or perforated steel housing. In 1951, low impedance feeder busway was introduced as the first design to use heat-shrinkable tubing for insulation on the busbars and a ventilated steel housing. An internal ground bus was not available with this product line, but provisions were made for mounting an external ground bus directly to the busway housing. Low impedance feeder and standard plug-in busway accounted for the majority of busway business written by Westinghouse through the 1950s and into the 1960s. Low impedance plug-in busway was introduced in 1961. With this design, the product offering was expanded to a maximum of 5000A for feeder and 4000A for plug-in. During the 1950s, various other designs were introduced to meet specific customer needs. Westinghouse Lifeline Unibus, rolled out in 1955, provided low impedance characteristics with plug-in openings and incorporated flexible armored cable into the design for use as elbows, offsets and flat to edgewise adapters. Westinghouse high frequency busway was introduced in 1958 to address the inherent problems of transmitting power at frequencies from 180 to 20,000 Hz. CutlerHammer high frequency BV (balanced voltage) busway was also marketed during the late 1950s and early 1960s. Westinghouse high frequency busway and Cutler-Hammer BV busway both found success in aircraft manufacturing plants, industrial induction heating systems, military missiles and radar bases. Electric utility busway was also introduced by Westinghouse in 1958 and was designed to conduct direct current with low voltage drop. By 1963, electric utility busway had been expanded to meet the growing industrial market for direct current power and was marketed simply as DC busway. This product line was applied to feeding plating processes, welding installations, mill drives and motors. In 1958, Westinghouse sold the rights to the Life Line Unibus product line to EDP of Allentown, PA, which marketed EDP Unibus until 1962 when EDP became a wholly owned subsidiary of Eaton. Eaton successfully marketed Unibus until the product line was discontinued in 1974. In 1966, Westinghouse introduced its first true sandwich bus design with H5000 feeder busway. H5000 was also the first single bolt joint design offered by Westinghouse and it initially used a PVC shrink tubing and later a Mylar® wrap for busbar insulation. A combination of steel and aluminum channels were used to form a lightweight non-magnetic housing. The grounding method for H5000 was similar to low impedance busway and an external ground bus mounted onto the housing was the only offering. H5000 plug-in busway rolled out in 1968 as a non-sandwich design with separated and uninsulated busbars. In 1970, the Eaton’s CutlerHammer Bethlehem, PA, plant introduced CP2 SAFETYBUS that used an innovative single bolt, bridge joint design with a steel housing for plug-in, and a combination of steel and aluminum channels for the feeder housing. CP2 used a Mylar wrap for busbar insulation and an Alstan® process for plating. The feeder busway was a sandwich design while the plug-in design used separated busbars that were braced and supported by corrugations formed in the housing sides. 18 19 Standard Plug-In H5000 Feeder Low Impedance Feeder High Frequency Electric Utility (DC) Low Impedance Plug-In 20 21 H5000 Plug-In 225–1000A Current Limiting 22 23 Typical Pow-R-Way Plug-In Straight Length Typical Pow-R-Way II Plug-In Straight Length 24 25 V12-T9-2 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Busway (Low Voltage) Westinghouse introduced the Pow-R-Way product line in 1971. Pow-R-Way employed the sandwich design in both feeder and plug-in. At that time, Pow-RWay used a combination of PVC, applied by the fluidized bed process, and Mylar sheeting for busbar insulation that achieved a Class A, 105°C rating. Silver-plating of all joint and contact surfaces was applied by a Zincate process. Pow-R-Way is a bolt-end/slot-end design with a single bolt connection at the joint and is rated from 600 to 5000A. Pow-R-Way II was rolled out in 1975 with ratings of 225A and 400A in feeder and plug-in. Pow-RWay II is a single, captive bolt per bar design for indoor, horizontal applications only. During 1980, the CutlerHammer busway design was upgraded and they began marketing CP3 SAFETYBUS. CP3 featured an improved bridge joint package and a polyethylene terephthalate wrap for busbar insulation. CP3 maintained the CP2 housing design with busbar separation in the plug-in product configuration. Cutler-Hammer CP4 SAFETYBUS was introduced in 1985 and incorporated the sandwich design into the plug-in busway. CP4 featured a UL® recognized case ground path rating and 130°C Mylar busbar insulation. CP4 used the CP3 bridge joint package and accepted CP2 and CP3 bus plugs. The CP4 product line was successful in both the commercial and industrial markets until it was discontinued in 1994. In 1988, Westinghouse moved the busway product line to the Greenwood, SC, manufacturing facility. At that time, an improved Alstan plating process was implemented for silverplating the joint and contact surfaces. In 1993, the automated fluidized bed process was changed to Class B, 130°C, epoxy insulation. 9 Cutler-Hammer Pow-RWay III® was introduced in 1997. As in the past, specific customer needs have driven the design of this product line. High short-circuit ratings, finger-safe protection at the plug-in openings, integral housing ground path, twopiece extruded aluminum housing and an optional 200% neutral are just some of the features with this product line. 2 3 4 5 6 7 Product History Time Line Product 1 8 1935 1940 1945 1950 1955 1960 1965 1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 Present Power distribution bus 9 Victory bus duct Standard plug-in 10 Low impedance bus Life line Unibus 11 High frequency bus Cutler-Hammer BV bus 12 Current limiting bus 13 Electric utility bus DC busway 14 100 ampere busway Low impedance plug-in 15 Cutler-Hammer Unibus H5000 feeder 16 H5000 plug-in Cutler-Hammer CP2 17 Pow-R-Way 18 Pow-R-Way II Cutler-Hammer CP3 19 Cutler-Hammer CP4 Pow-R-Way III 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T9-3 9 1 2 Busway (Low Voltage) Replacement Capabilities—Plug-In Units Replacement Capabilities Vintage Busway Products Plug-In Units ● Replacement Capabilities Busway Types Bus Adapter 1 Plugs Power distribution bus No No No Victory bus duct No No No 4 Standard plug-in Yes No Yes Low impedance bus No Yes — 5 Life line Unibus No No No High frequency bus No No No 6 Cutler-Hammer BV bus No No No Current limiting bus No Yes — 3 7 Electric utility bus No No No DC busway No No No 8 100 ampere busway Yes No Yes Low impedance plug-in No Yes Yes Cutler-Hammer Unibus No No No H5000 feeder No No — 10 H5000 plug-in No No Yes Cutler-Hammer CP2 No Yes Yes 2 11 Pow-R-Way Yes No Yes Pow-R-Way II Yes No Yes Cutler-Hammer CP3 No Yes Yes 2 Cutler-Hammer CP4 No Yes Yes 2 Pow-R-Way III Yes — Yes 9 12 13 14 Notes 1 Busway adapter (transposition) available from old line to Pow-R-Way III only. 2 Fusible units only. No breaker units available. ● ● Replacement pieces or additions to vintage CutlerHammer bus (CP2, CP3, CP4) are being handled whenever possible by making transition to Eaton’s current design Pow-R-Way III bus Obtain style number and complete nameplate information from existing busway and contact your local Eaton Field Sales office for pricing and availability Plugs for vintage Cutler-Hammer bus, Pow-R-Way bus, and Pow-R-Way III bus are not interchangeable Pow-R-Way Plug-In Unit Stab base assembly for breaker and fusible types. Vintage Busway Plug-In Unit Stab base assembly for breaker and fusible types. Top View Bottom View Fuse Base Assembly For all busway. 30A Maximum Top View 15 200A Maximum 16 17 Bottom View 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T9-4 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 9 Busway (Low Voltage) Replacement Capabilities—Plug-In Units Originally a Westinghouse Product Breaker Plug-In Units Reference Catalog Number for Existing Complete Plug-In Unit 1 Replacement Stab Base Assembly Pow-R-Way IBPFB 1 Fusible Plug-In Units Reference Catalog Number for Existing Complete Plug-In Unit 1 Replacement Stab Base Assembly Replacement Fuse Base 2 3 Pow-R-Way 2528D04G01 ITAP321 2528D04G02 5009D52G01 IBPFBP 2528D04G01 ITAP361 2528D04G02 5009D52G13 IBPFCL 2528D04G01 ITAP322 2528D04G02 5009D52G03 IBPFD 2528D04G01 ITAP362 2528D04G02 5009D52G04 IBPJD 2528D04G12 ITAP323 2528D04G02 5009D52G05 IBPKB 2528D04G07 ITAP363 2528D04G02 5009D52G05 IBPKD 2554D03G06 ITAP324 767A373G02 2532D78G01 IBPLAP 2532D45G06 ITAP364 767A373G02 2532D78G01 IBPLB 2554D03G05 ITAP325 2554D03G03 627B426G02 IBPLCL 2554D03G03 ITAP365 2554D03G03 627B426G02 IBPMC 2537D17G03 ITAP326 2554D03G02 627B426G04 IBPNBP 2537D17G07 ITAP366 2554D03G02 627B426G04 4 5 6 7 8 9 Standard Plug-In and Low Impedance Busway 2 ITAP367 2554D03G01 2553D93G02 BPFB 2528D03G01 ITAP361H 2528D04G02 2535D92G09 BPFBP 2528D03G01 ITAP362H 2528D04G02 2535D92G10 BPFCL 2528D03G01 ITAP363H 2528D04G02 2535D92G11 BPFD 2528D03G01 ITAP364H 2568D13G09 2532D78G02 BPJD 2528D03G10 ITAP365H 2554D03G03 1205C02G02 BPKB 2528D03G07 ITAP366H 2554D03G02 2599D97G02 BPKD 2537D20G06 Standard Plug-In and Low Impedance Busway 2 12 BPLB 2537D20G05 TAP321 2528D03G02 5009D52G01 BPLCL 2537D20G01 TAP361 2528D03G02 5009D52G13 13 BPMC 374D017G03 TAP322 2528D03G02 5009D52G03 TAP362 2528D03G02 5009D52G04 TAP323 2528D03G02 5009D52G05 TAP363 2528D03G02 5009D52G05 TAP324 767A373G01 2532D78G01 TAP364 767A373G01 2532D78G01 TAP325 2537D20G04 627B426G02 TAP365 2537D20G04 627B426G02 TAP326 2584D73G01 627B426G04 TAP366 2584D73G01 627B426G02 TAP361H 2528D03G02 2535D92G09 TAP362H 2528D03G02 2535D92G10 TAP363H 2528D03G02 2535D92G11 TAP364H 767A373G01 2532D78G02 TAP365H 2537D20G04 1448D09G05 TAP366H 374D017G03 373D043G06 Notes 1 Check Vista for pricing and minimum order quantities. 2 Replacement stab base assembly and fuse base style numbers specified correspond to the most recent design of the reference catalog number for the complete plug-in unit. For verification that this style number is the correct replacement for your existing plug-in unit, contact your local Eaton Field Sales office. 10 11 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T9-5 9 1 Busway (Low Voltage) Replacement Capabilities—100 Ampere Busway 100 Ampere Busway Fusible Plug-In Units Voltage Rating Ampere Rating Fusible Enclosure Catalog Number Ground (If Required) Catalog Number 240 30 FAN321 PIGS100 240 60 FAN322 PIGS100 3 240 100 FAN323 PIGS100 600 30 FAN361 PIGS100 4 600 60 FAN362 PIGS100 600 100 FAN363 PIGS100 2 5 Circuit Breaker Plug-In Units 6 7 8 9 10 11 Elbow, Busway and Cable Tap Box 100 Ampere Busway—Copper (Includes 50% Internal Ground Bar) Three-Phase, Four-Wire FN 277/480V Catalog Number Single-Phase, Three-Wire 120/240V Catalog Number 10 ft (3048 mm) CST13G CST14G CST13NG 5 ft (1524 mm) CST135G CST145G CST13N5G 3 ft (914.4 mm) CST133G CST143G CST13N3G Description Straight Lengths 2 ft (609.6 mm) 12 1 ft (304.8 mm) CST132G CST131G CST142G CST13N2G CST141G CST13N1G Elbows 13 Forward CFE13G Rearward CRE13G CRE14G CRE13NG 14 Upward CUE13G CUE14G CUE13NG Downward CDE13G CDE14G CDE13NG 15 Tees Forward CFT13G 16 Rearward CRT13G CRT14G CRT13NG Upward CUT13G CUT14G CUT13NG 17 Downward CDT13G CDT14G CDT13NG 18 Ampere Rating QUICKLAG HQP 15–50 PINQP LCNQP PIGS100 HMQP ED, EHD, FDB 15–100 PINFD LCNFD PIGS100 HMFD Voltage Rating Three-Phase, Three-Wire 600V Maximum Catalog Number CFE14G CFE13NG Ground (If Required) Catalog Number External Handle (Required for Hook-Stick Operation) Catalog Number Circuit Breaker Enclosure Catalog Number Receptacle Enclosure Catalog Number Accessories Item Catalog Number End closer EC1 Outlet cover OC1 Edgwise hanger EH1 “C” clamp hanger FH1 Slip-on wall flange WF1 End Closers—EC1 Replacement Outlet Cover—OC1 CL Joint CFT14G Outlet Cover CFT13NG 4.00 (101.6) Cable Tap Boxes 19 Description Three-Wire or Four-Wire Catalog Number Ground (If Required) Catalog Number Plug-in PIB14 PIGS100 20 End EB14 GL100 Center CBIB14G (Included) 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T9-6 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 9 Busway (Low Voltage) Replacement Capabilities—Standard Plug-In Busway Standard Plug-In Busway 1 Originally a Westinghouse Product 2 3 4 Typical Standard Plug-In Straight Length 5 Catalog Numbers Duct Only Includes One Hanger per 10 Feet of Busway 1 Catalog Number for 10-Feet Lengths 2 Ampere Rating Aluminum Catalog Number Fittings (Price of Footage Through Each Fitting Must be Added) Copper Catalog Number Universal Cable Tap Box (Lugs Included) 3 Catalog Number End Closer Aluminum Catalog Number Copper Catalog Number 6 7 Three-Phase, Three-Wire, 600V with 50% Ground Bus 225 AST302G ST302G UCTB302G UEC10 UEC10 400 AST304G ST304G UCTB304G UEC20 UEC15 600 AST306G ST306G UCTB306G UEC35 UEC20 800 AST308G ST308G UCTB308G UEC50 UEC30 1000 AST310G ST310G UCTB310G UEC60 UEC40 8 9 10 Three-Phase, Four-Wire, Full Neutral, 277/480V with 50% Ground Bus 225 AST502G ST502G UCTB402G UEC10 UEC10 400 AST504G ST504G UCTB404G UEC20 UEC15 600 AST506G ST506G UCTB406G UEC35 UEC20 800 AST508G ST508G UCTB408G UEC50 UEC30 1000 AST510G ST510G UCTB410G UEC60 UEC40 11 12 13 Cantilever Hangers Ampere Rating Miscellaneous Accessories Aluminum Catalog Number Copper Catalog Number Three-Phase, Three-Wire, 600V 14 Description Wall/floor flange 15 Extra cantilever hangers 225 CLH10 CLH10 400 CLH20 CLH15 600 CLH35 CLH20 800 CLH50 CLH30 1000 CLH60 CLH40 Hookstick kit (8–14 feet) HS8-14 4 16 Renewal Parts Joint hardware–EXWK10 17 Access covers (two) Splice plates (two) Three-Phase, Four-Wire, Full Neutral, 277/480V 225 CLH10 CLH10 400 CLH20 CLH15 600 CLH35 CLH20 800 CLH50 CLH30 1000 CLH60 CLH40 Notes 1 When ordering from stock, all hangers must be shown as a separate item marked included in price. 2 Suitable for horizontal mounting only. Contact your local Eaton Field Sales office for pricing and lead times. 3 If UCTB is used on end of run, an end closer must also be used for that end. 4 Normally available from stock. 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T9-7 9 1 2 Busway (Low Voltage) Replacement Capabilities—Standard and Low Impedance Standard and Low Impedance Circuit Breaker Selection and Interrupting Ratings Originally a Westinghouse Product Circuit Breaker Plug-In Units Breaker Frame Ampere Rating Symmetrical Amperes 240 Vac 480 Vac EHD 15–60 18,000 14,000 — 70–100 18,000 14,000 — The enclosure, circuit breaker, neutral and ground are ordered and shipped assembled. 3 Note: Breaker and fusible plugs must be ordered as assembled units. See V12-T9-10 for instructions on how to build the assembled catalog numbers. 4 5 6 Circuit Breaker Plug-In Unit (Closed) 7 Note: For units mounting at the joint and feeder type ducts, see bolt-on units—standard plug-in, low impedance and H5000. FDB FD HFD FDC 8 9 10 11 JDB Circuit Breaker Plug-In Unit (Open) JD HJD Catalog Numbers Neutral (If Required) 1 12 Breaker Frame 13 EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC (15–150A) Enclosure Catalog Standard Plug-In Number Catalog Number BPFD 3 Low Impedance Catalog Number N110 (15–110A) 3 ZN110 (15–110A) 3 N250KB (125–150A) 3 ZN250KB (125–150A) Ground (If Required) 2 Catalog Number JDC GS104 3 14 JDB, JD, HJD, BPJD 3 JDC (70–250A) N250KB (125–250A) 3 ZN250KB (125–250A) 3 GS104 3 15 KDB, KD, HKD, KDC (125–400A) N400 (250–400A) 3 BPKD 4 ZN400 (250–400A) 3 4 GS104 3 4 16 LDB, LD, HLD, LDC (300–600A) BPLD 17 MC, HMC (500–800A) BPMD N/A 4 4 NC, HNC (900–1200A) BPND 4 4 4 18 19 20 FB (TRI-PAC®) BPFBP (15–100A) LA (TRI-PAC) (125–400A) NB (TRI-PAC) (500–800A) 21 N110 (15–100A) 3 ZN110 (15–100A) GS104 3 BPLAP 5 N400 (125–400A) 3 ZN400 (125–400A) 3 GS104 3 BPNBP 4 4 GS104 3 600 Vac 15–60 18,000 14,000 14,000 70–100 18,000 14,000 14,000 110–150 18,000 14,000 14,000 15–60 65,000 25,000 18,000 70–100 65,000 25,000 18,000 110–150 65,000 25,000 18,000 15–60 100,000 65,000 25,000 70–100 100,000 65,000 25,000 25,000 110–150 100,000 65,000 15–60 200,000 100,000 50,000 70–100 200,000 100,000 50,000 50,000 110–150 200,000 100,000 70–225 65,000 25,000 18,000 250 65,000 25,000 18,000 70–225 65,000 25,000 18,000 250 65,000 25,000 18,000 70–225 100,000 65,000 25,000 250 100,000 65,000 25,000 70–225 200,000 100,000 50,000 250 200,000 100,000 50,000 KDB 250–400 65,000 35,000 25,000 KD 250–400 65,000 35,000 25,000 HKD 250–400 100,000 65,000 35,000 KDC 250–400 200,000 100,000 50,000 LDB 300–600 65,000 45,000 25,000 LD 300–600 65,000 45,000 25,000 HLD 300–600 100,000 65,000 35,000 50,000 LDC 300–600 200,000 100,000 MDL 400–800 65,000 50,000 25,000 HMDL 400–800 100,000 65,000 35,000 NP 400–1200 65,000 50,000 25,000 HND 400–1200 100,000 65,000 35,000 FB (TRI-PAC) 15–100 200,000 200,000 200,000 LA (TRI-PAC) 70–400 200,000 200,000 200,000 70–400 200,000 200,000 200,000 600–800 200,000 200,000 200,000 600–800 200,000 150,000 200,000 NB (TRI-PAC) Notes 1 Full neutral. For half neutral, contact your local Eaton Field Sales office. 2 Not available for low impedance bus duct. 3 Normally available from stock. 4 Contact your local Eaton Field Sales office for delivery. Order by description on suffix BUS. 5 Obsolete; no longer available. 22 23 24 25 V12-T9-8 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 9 Busway (Low Voltage) Replacement Capabilities—Standard and Low Impedance Originally a Westinghouse Product Fusible Plug-In Units ● For standard plug-in and low impedance plug-in busway (not for use on Pow-R-Way busway. Not available for low impedance bus duct) ● Fuses not included ● Mechanical lugs only ● Plug-in unit, neutral and ground can be ordered separately and shipped unassembled Fusible Switch Horsepower Ratings 240V 480V NEC® Standard Time Delay NEC Standard Time Delay NEC Standard Time Delay 30 3 7-1/2 5 15 7-1/2 20 60 7-1/2 15 15 30 15 50 100 15 30 25 60 30 75 200 25 60 50 125 60 150 400 50 100 100 250 125 350 600 75 100 200 400 200 500 Special Industry Fusible Plug-In Units ● Special industry plugs are I2t rated ● Knockouts are not provided ● Grounding lug included on 200A and above ● Lugs ordered and shipped separately ● Fuses are not included ● If neutral or ground assembly is required, contact your local Eaton Field Sales office 2 3 4 5 6 Fusible Plug-In Units 1 Neutral (If Required) Fusible TAP 1 600V Ampere Rating Ampere Rating 600V Catalog Number 240V Catalog Number Standard Plug-In Catalog Number Low Impedance Catalog Number Ground (If Required) Catalog Number 30 TAP361 2 TAP321 2 N110 2 ZN110 2 60 TAP362 2 TAP322 2 N110 2 100 TAP363 2 TAP323 2 N110 2 200 TAP364 2 TAP324 2 N250KB 2 400 2 Class R Fuse Clips (If Required) 600V Catalog Number 240V Catalog Number GS104 12 RFK161 2 RFK121 2 ZN110 2 GS104 12 RFK262 2 RFK222 2 ZN110 2 GS104 12 RFK464 2 RFK464 2 ZN250KB GS104 12 RFK464 2 RFK464 2 12 2 RFK666 2 2 GS104 TAP365 TAP325 N400 RFK666 600 TAP366 TAP326 N400 23 ZN400 2 4 RFK666 2 RFK666 2 800 5 5 — 4 — — — If Required 8 9 10 11 12 Special Industry Fusible Plug-In Units Three-Wire, 600V Plug-In Unit 7 13 Terminal Kits for Industry Fusible Plug-In Units Mechanical Lugs 2 Compression Lugs 2 Ampere Rating Catalog Number Neutral Catalog Number Ground Catalog Number Catalog Number Lugs Per Phase Wire Size Catalog Number Lugs Per Phase Wire Size 30 TAP361H 6 6 MTK30SC 1 #14–#4 CTK30SC 1 #12–#10 60 TAP362H 6 6 MTK160SC 1 #14–1/0 CTK60SC 1 #8 100 TAP363H 6 6 MTK160SC 1 #14–1/0 CTK100SC 1 #4 200 TAP364H 6 6 MTK200SC 1 #6–350 kcmil CTK200BSC 1 2/0 400 TAP365H 6 6 MTK400DPW 2 #2–4/0 CTK400SPW 1 750 kcmil 600 TAP366H 6 6 MTK600DFW 2 500 kcmil CTK600DPM 2 500 kcmil Catalog Number 600 GND36 15 16 17 18 Three-Wire—Ground Detector and Neutralizer Plug Maximum Volts 14 19 20 Notes 1 Not available for low impedance bus duct. 2 Normally available from stock. 3 Only half neutral available. For full neutral, use a TAP366BO or TAP326BO unit. 4 Must be factory assembled. Order by description on suffix BUS. 5 Plug-in unit not available. Contact your local Eaton Field Sales office for bolt-on type. 6 Must be factory assembled. Order by description. 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T9-9 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 Busway (Low Voltage) Replacement Capabilities—Quick-Assembled Plugs Quick-Assembled Plugs The Mod Center in Spartanburg, SC, will perform the assembly of the bus plugs in 3 days or less for most orders. Bid Manager™ enables you to “build” the appropriate catalog number. When the order is entered in Bid Manager, it will automatically transfer the order to suffix “QAP.” Please see the following rules for building the assembled catalog number. Catalog Numbering Selection Quick-Assembled Plugs—Breaker Unit 12 P3B HFD 3 015 G N Bus Style P3B = PRWIII IBP = PRW BP = Old-line Breaker Frame (Example FD, JDC, KDB) Three-Pole Only Trip Rating (Example 015, 060, 150, 400) Ground Option G = 50% internal I = Isolated ground (PRWIII only) Neutral Options N = 100% neutral N2 = 200% neutral (PRW III only) ZN = Low Z (old line only) Quick-Assembled Plugs—Fusible Unit 234 7 P3F 3 6 4 R G N 8 Bus Style P3F = PRWIII ITAP = PRW TAP = Old-line 9 10 Three-Pole Only 11 12 Voltage 6 = 600V 2 = 240V Ampere 1 = 30 5 = 400 2 = 60 6 = 600 3 = 100 7 = 800 4 = 200 Fuse Clips R or J ≤ 600A T or L for 800A Neutral Options N = 100% neutral N2 = 200% neutral (PRW III only) ZN = Low Z (old line only) Ground Options G = 50% I = Isolated (PRW III only) Notes 1 Do not leave space between characters. Example: P3BHFD3015GN. 2 Contact your local Eaton Field Sales office for help in assigning a catalog number for a specific application. 3 Do not leave space between characters. Example: P3F264RGN. 4 “H” clips are standard for Pow-R-Way and vintage busway products unless specified by adding “R” or “J” in the catalog number. Example: P3F264RGN, ITAP361JGN. 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T9-10 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 9 Busway (Low Voltage) Replacement Capabilities—CP2, CP3 or CP4 SAFETYBUS Busway Plug-In Units CP2, CP3 or CP4 SAFETYBUS Busway Plug-In Units Circuit Breaker Selection and Interrupting Ratings 6 Originally a Westinghouse Product Breaker Frame Ampere Rating Symmetrical Amperes EHD 15–60 18,000 14,000 — 70–100 18,000 14,000 — 15–60 18,000 14,000 14,000 70–100 18,000 14,000 14,000 110–150 18,000 14,000 14,000 15–60 65,000 25,000 18,000 Bolt-On Units 1 Breaker Frame Ampere Rating Enclosure Catalog Number Neutral 2 (If Required) Catalog Number Ground 3 (If Required) Catalog Number FDB Circuit Breaker Bolt-On Units (Breaker Not Included) 240 Vac 480 Vac EHD, FDB, FD HFD, FDC 15–150 BPFDBO 4 4 JDB, JD, HJD, JDC 125–250 BPJDBO 4 4 KDB, KD, HKD, KDC 250–400 LDB, LD, HLD LDC 300–600 BPLDBO 4 4 MDL, HMDL 400–800 BPMDBO 4 4 FB (TRI-PAC) 15–100 BPFBPBO 4 4 70–100 200,000 100,000 50,000 4 110–150 200,000 100,000 50,000 4 BPKDBO 4 LA (TRI-PAC) 125–400 BPLAPBO 4 NB (TRI-PAC) 500–800 BPNBPBO 4 4 FD HFD FDC JDB Fusible Bolt-On Units 5 240V 30 4 4 60 TAP322BO 4 4 100 TAP323BO 4 4 200 TAP324BO 4 4 400 TAP325BO 4 4 TAP326BO 4 4 600 600V TAP321BO JD HJD JDC 1 600 Vac 70–100 65,000 25,000 18,000 110–150 65,000 25,000 18,000 15–60 100,000 65,000 25,000 70–100 100,000 65,000 25,000 110–150 100,000 65,000 25,000 15–60 200,000 100,000 50,000 70–225 65,000 25,000 18,000 250 65,000 25,000 18,000 70–225 65,000 25,000 18,000 250 65,000 25,000 18,000 70–225 100,000 65,000 25,000 250 100,000 65,000 25,000 70–225 200,000 100,000 50,000 250 200,000 100,000 50,000 250–400 65,000 35,000 25,000 800 TAP327BO 4 4 KDB 30 TAP361BO 4 4 KD 250–400 65,000 35,000 25,000 250–400 100,000 65,000 35,000 60 TAP362BO 4 4 HKD 100 TAP363BO 4 4 KDC 250–400 200,000 100,000 50,000 4 LDB 300–600 65,000 45,000 25,000 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 200 TAP364BO 4 400 TAP365BO 4 4 LD 300–600 65,000 45,000 25,000 600 TAP366BO 4 4 HLD 300–600 100,000 65,000 35,000 800 TAP367BO 4 4 LDC 300–600 200,000 100,000 50,000 MDL 400–800 65,000 50,000 25,000 HMDL 400–800 100,000 65,000 35,000 NP 400–1200 65,000 50,000 25,000 HND 400–1200 100,000 65,000 35,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 FB (TRI-PAC) 15–100 2 15 16 17 LA (TRI-PAC) 70–400 200,000 200,000 200,000 70–400 200,000 200,000 200,000 NB (TRI-PAC) 600–800 200,000 200,000 200,000 600–800 200,000 150,000 200,000 Notes 1 Factory assembled. Contact your local Eaton Field Sales office for delivery and order entry information. When ordering, you must specify: 1. Load left or load right. 2. Front or rear mounting. 3. Type of busway to which unit is to be mounted. 2 Full neutral. For half neutral, contact your local Eaton Field Sales office. 3 Not available for low impedance bus duct. 4 Order by description with bolt-on unit. 5 These bolt-on units include an adapter for mounting at the joint. They do not require a power take-off unit. 6 Refer to the current Price and Availability Digest (PAD) for breaker list prices. 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T9-11 9 1 Busway (Low Voltage) Replacement Capabilities—CP2, CP3 or CP4 SAFETYBUS Busway Plug-In Units Originally a Cutler-Hammer Product Fusible Switch Plug-In Units 2 Class R Fuse Clip Included 3 240V, Three-Phase, Three-Wire 30 7-1/2 CP4HD321 5 CP4HD421 4 60 15 CP4HD322 10 CP4HD422 100 30 CP4HD323 25 CP4HD423 5 200 60 CP4HD324 60 CP4HD424 400 100 CP4HD325 250 CP4HD425 6 600 4 100 CP4HD326 400 CP4HD426 Maximum hp Rating 1 Ampere Rating Catalog Number Maximum hp Rating 12 Catalog Number 3 120–208V, Three-Phase, Four-Wire 600V, Three-Phase, Three-Wire 277–480V, Three-Phase, Four-Wire 7 30 20 CP4HD361 15 CP4HD461 60 50 CP4HD362 30 CP4HD462 8 100 75 CP4HD363 60 CP4HD463 200 100 CP4HD364 100 CP4HD464 400 350 CP4HD365 250 CP4HD465 600 4 500 CP4HD366 400 CP4HD466 9 10 Plug-In Cable Tap Boxes—Plug Into CP2, CP3 or CP4 Busway 5—600A and 800A Sizes Also Have Bolt-On Clips 11 12 Approximate Dimensions in Inches Volts Three-phase, three-wire 600V maximum 13 14 15 16 17 18 Three-phase, four-wire 120/208V or 277/480V 100% neutral Mounting Clearance Ampere Rating Wide High Deep Top Front Conduit Sizes Load Lugs Each Phase Catalog Number 225 15.50 8.10 6.90 6.30 10.50 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3 (1) #6–300 kcmil Al/Cu CP2SB34 400 22.30 8.10 7.90 7.00 11.30 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3 (1) #1/0–750 kcmil Al/Cu 6 CP2SB35 600 37.20 15.80 11.70 12.50 16.80 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3 (2) #2–600 kcmil Al/Cu CP2SB36 4 800 37.20 15.80 11.70 12.50 16.80 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3 (3) #2–600 kcmil Al/Cu CP2SB37 4 225 15.50 8.10 6.90 6.30 10.50 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3 (1) #6–300 kcmil Al/Cu CP2SB44 6 400 22.30 8.10 7.90 7.00 11.30 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3 (1) #1/0–750 kcmil Al/Cu 600 37.20 15.80 11.70 12.50 16.80 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3 (2) #2–600 kcmil Al/Cu CP2SB46 4 800 37.20 15.80 11.70 12.50 16.80 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3 (3) #2–600 kcmil Al/Cu CP2SB47 4 CP2SB45 Notes 1 Maximum hp ratings apply when time delay fuses are used. 2 120–208V hp ratings are based on 200V motor usage. 3 All units ship as three-phase, four-wire plugs. 4 Requires two adjacent plug-in outlets that do not span a busway joint. 5 For ground stab to engage internal ground bus, add suffix “G” to catalog number. 6 Also accepts (2) #1–300 kcmil Al/Cu. 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T9-12 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 9 Busway (Low Voltage) Replacement Capabilities—CP2, CP3 or CP4 SAFETYBUS Busway Plug-In Units Originally a Cutler-Hammer Product Approximate Dimensions 1 Required Mounting Clearances 2 Typical Side and Front E Edge of Busway 44° Ref. C .34 3 A 4 ON 5 B 6 OFF 7 Plug-in Busway 8 D F 9 Plug-In Units—May be Used with Either CP2, CP3 or CP4 Plug-In Busway Sections—Fusible Switch Type Frame or Type Maximum Ampere Rating A B C D E F Conduit Sizes Top, Bottom and Side Wire Size Range Al/Cu CP4HD 30 19.30 11.50 8.80 5.20 7.00 9.00 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1-1/4, 1-1/2, 2 (1) #14–2 60 19.30 11.50 8.80 5.20 7.00 9.00 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1-1/4, 1-1/2, 2 (1) #14–2 100 19.30 11.50 8.80 5.20 7.00 9.00 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1-1/4, 1-1/2, 2 (1) #14–1/0 200 23.00 16.50 9.20 6.00 7.50 13.30 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3 (1) #6–300 kcmil CP4HD Dimensions in Inches 10 11 12 12 45.60 24.30 15.80 13.10 14.00 20.50 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3 (1) #1/0–300 kcmil or (1) 750 kcmil 600 12 45.60 24.30 15.80 13.10 14.00 20.50 1-1/2, 2, 2-1/2, 3 (2) #2–600 kcmil 400 13 14 Notes 1 Provided with busway bolt-on clip and straps for 0.50-inch hanger rods. 2 Unit extends 10.50 inches below busway. 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T9-13 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Busway (Low Voltage) Technology Upgrades—Clipper Power Systems (TVSS) Technology Upgrades Clipper Power Systems, Busway TVSS Protection The low voltage busway aftermarket product offering includes transient voltage surge suppression (TVSS), which is ideal for busway fed distribution systems. Eaton has developed the Clipper Power System (CPS) family of products to ensure that the quality power required to maximize productivity in today’s competitive environment is supplied to commercial, industrial, medical and institutional facilities. Without power protection devices, microprocessors and electronic-based loads are not provided with the noise and disturbance-free power that they require. Because microprocessor-based loads are now common in every facility, engineers must ensure the AC power supply is properly filtered. The CPS busway family of products consists of TVSS and filter components (TVSS filter) integrated into a bus plug with a fusible disconnect. TVSS bus plugs are available for the following types of plug-in busway: 12 13 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Westinghouse standard plug-in Westinghouse low impedance plug-in Westinghouse H5000 plug-in Cutler-Hammer CP2 plug-in Cutler-Hammer CP3 plug-in Cutler-Hammer CP4 plug-in Westinghouse Pow-R-Way Westinghouse Pow-R-Way II Cutler-Hammer Pow-R-Way III Significant performance advantages are achieved by integrating TVSS filters into busway systems. Because the TVSS unit is directly connected to the busway, the CPS minimizes let-through voltage. This is a significant performance advantage compared to cable-connected TVSS solutions. Due to the integrated design, the CPS bus plug also saves the user wall space and greatly reduces the installed project cost. Catalog Numbering Selection Visor Series Bus Plug 10 11 ● P3BCPS 250 480Y S A Bus Style P3BCPS = Pow-R-Way TAPCPS = Std. plug-in ZTAPCPS = Low impedance HTAPCPS = H5000 CP4CPS = CP2/CP3/CP4 ITAPCPS = Pow-R-Way 14 15 Surge Rating (kA/Phase) 100 = 100 120 = 120 160 = 160 200 = 200 250 = 250 300 = 300 400 = 400 500 = 500 Voltage Code Three-phase wye (4W+G) Three-phase delta (4W+G) Voltage Requirements 120/208 230/400 277/480 347/600 240V 400V 480V 600V 208Y 400Y 480Y 600Y 240D — 480D 600D Diagnostics Package A = AdVisor complete with status indicator lights on each phase. Form C. Audible Alarm—Enable/Disable S = SuperVisor complete with status indicator lights on each phase, 1-Form C. Audible Alarm— Enable/Disable, Transient Counter, Push-to-Teat. PQ Meter (no date stamp) N = NetVisor complete with status indicator lights on each phase. Form C. Audible Alarm—Enable/Disable, Transient Counter, Push to Test, PQ Meter (no date stamp). Modbus® and Ethernet Communications Port, % Life Remaining, % Voltage THD 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T9-14 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 9 Busway (Low Voltage) Technology Upgrades—Submetering—IQ Energy Sentinel IQ Energy Sentinel for Bus Plugs Bus Plug with Energy Sentinel Customer Required Information If Originally a Westinghouse Product 1. Style number or shop order number from existing busway nameplate and complete nameplate information. 2. Height and width dimensions of housing from existing busway. 3. Order by style number on suffix Q77. If Originally a Cutler-Hammer Product 1. Check Vista for pricing. 2. Order by catalog number on suffix Q73. The Cutler-Hammer IQ Energy Sentinel™ was designed as part of the PowerNet™ system and is a highly accurate, microprocessorbased submeter that monitors power and energy. It offers a centralized alternative to individually mounted wattmeters, watthour meters and watt demand meters. Key advantages include unmatched savings in space, lower installation costs, and the capability to communicate data readings in a variety of ways. IQ Energy Sentinels with built-in current transformers (CTs) and communications have the added benefit of overall system accuracy. The IQ Energy Sentinel mounts on the load side of CutlerHammer F, J and K breakers within the bus-plug enclosure. Further Information The IQ Energy Sentinel is also available with a universal mounting that uses external CTs and is offered for fusible bus plug applications. Sub-metering application examples for the IQ Energy Sentinel include energy monitoring and demand management, energy cost analysis/allocation, and tenant or interdepartmental billing. To accomplish the communications system, the customer must provide a twisted pair communication cable in 1/2-inch conduit between the IQ Energy Sentinel bus plug and a Cutler-Hammer Central Energy Display, or customer computer to display the information. IQ Energy Sentinel bus plugs are available for Pow-R-Way, Pow-R-Way II and Pow-R-Way III busway. Note: Additional information may be required for manufacturing. Publication Number Description AD 30-560 Application Data for Pow-R-Way AD 30-560 Application Data for Pow-R-Way II TD01701001E Technical Data for Pow-R-Way III TD01701002E Technical Data for 100 Ampere Busway 1 2 3 4 Pricing Information 5 Vista/VISTALINE™ Discount Symbols CE3 and CE4 Note: Contact your local Eaton Field Sales office. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T9-15 IQ Products Power Management Products 10 IQ Products Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product History Time Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Information Metering Selection Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protective Relay Selection Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technology Upgrades Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 Series Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Xpert 2000 Series Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IQ 250/260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IQ 130/140/150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IQ 150S/250S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IQ 35M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosed Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Products IQ Analyzer 6400/6600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IQ DP-4000/4100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IQ Energy Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IQ 230. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP-3000 Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FP-5000 Feeder Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digitrip 3000 (DT-3000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories IQ Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IQ 250-PMAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IQ DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IQ Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IQ Floor-Mounted Enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addressable Relay II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Discontinued Product—Recommended Replacement IQ 2000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IQ Analyzer 6000/6200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RTD Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IQ 1000 and IQ 1000 II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IQ Data Plus and IQ Data Plus II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IQ Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IQ Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IQ 300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IQ 210/220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IQ 110/115 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IQ Power Sentinel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pricing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T10-2 V12-T10-3 1 V12-T10-3 2 V12-T10-4 3 V12-T10-12 4 V12-T10-15 5 V12-T10-17 V12-T10-18 V12-T10-19 V12-T10-20 V12-T10-21 V12-T10-22 6 7 V12-T10-23 8 V12-T10-24 9 V12-T10-25 V12-T10-26 V12-T10-27 V12-T10-28 V12-T10-29 10 11 V12-T10-30 12 V12-T10-31 13 V12-T10-31 V12-T10-31 V12-T10-31 V12-T10-31 V12-T10-32 V12-T10-32 14 15 16 V12-T10-33 17 V12-T10-36 18 V12-T10-36 V12-T10-36 V12-T10-37 V12-T10-37 V12-T10-37 V12-T10-38 V12-T10-38 V12-T10-39 V12-T10-40 V12-T10-41 V12-T10-42 V12-T10-43 V12-T10-43 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-1 10 1 IQ Products Electronic Metering and Protection Product Description 2 Eaton’s electrical business IQ Metering and Protection group of Cutler-Hammer® series products are multifunctional communicating products based on microprocessor technology. They are designed to replace existing electromechanical devices and can be applied at low, medium and high voltage points in the electrical distribution system. These devices offer communications capabilities to link electrical distribution equipment to Eaton’s PowerNet™ Power Management Software. 3 4 5 6 Power Management Products 7 8 These products generally surpass capabilities available with older analog/electromechanical technologies. Depending on the features available from each device, information from these devices may be used to record and analyze power system and power quality events or problems and may improve power systems protection and coordination. With communications, these devices may be used for energy monitoring and management with trended data for use in future power system planning. 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T10-2 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 10 IQ Products Product History Originally a Westinghouse Product In the early 1980s, power metering and protective relaying functions were performed by electromechanical devices. Analog meters and induction disk protective relays were found on virtually every switchgear lineup manufactured up to that time. With the maturing of solid-state electronics, microprocessor-based replacements for the electromechanical devices became available. These new devices provided increased functionality and flexibility, in a smaller space, for less cost. Westinghouse led the movement toward electronic metering and protection devices with the introduction of the IQ 2000 motor protection and control relay. In 1987, the IQ 2000 functions were split and two new products were introduced—the IQ 1000 and the IQ Data Plus. The IQ 1000 provided all current monitoring and motor protection functions and was developed for use on AMPGARD® medium voltage starters and low voltage motor control assemblies. The IQ Data Plus provided complete electrical metering and system voltage protection, and was developed for use on low and medium voltage switchgear, as well as AMPGARD and low voltage motor control assemblies. The latest next generation addition to metering is the Power Xpert® Meter product series. The Power Xpert Meter power quality instrument monitors critical aspects of an electrical distribution system. This premier power quality metering instrument uses the latest in advanced technology to make it simple to use, powerful, scalable and highly flexible. Power Xpert Meters offer a new level of intuitive user interface design, presenting critical electrical distribution system information in a simple-to-navigate and easy-to-understand information architecture. The Power Xpert Meter’s 4000/6000/8000 graphic display visualizes the information from up to 16 Power Xpert PQ instruments. The embedded Web server displays complex power quality data using standard Internet browsers and allows for device configuration from the browser. Both the local graphic display and the embedded Web server present real time, historical and event information in a browser-style graphical format to help the user interpret key circuit information such as current loading, voltage and power levels, power factor, energy usage, I/O status and power quality measurements, as well as harmonic plots, disturbance and transient waveforms, and an ITIC disturbance summary screen. The Power Xpert 2000 Series Meter offers the same level of intuitive user interface design as the Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 Meter with its embedded Web server to provide data logging and e-mail and the ability to visualize steady-state harmonic content as well as waveform recording that is critical for power quality analysis. Since then, the IQ Metering and Protection product family has grown to include additional products for both metering and protective functions. The IQ 250 and IQ 260 meters provide revenue grade accuracy with standard Modbus® communications and optional I/O capability. The IQ 130/140/150 meters provide basic monitoring and energy metering for feeder applications and optional Modbus communications. The IQ DP-4000 and the IQ AnaIyzer provide advanced metering functions including the ability to monitor power quality parameters. IQ Energy Sentinels provide a low cost method to monitor energy usage for individual feeders or loads. The Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter provides cost-effective and space-saving energy submetering for a wide variety of applications. The IQ 35M provides energy monitoring at the panelboard level as well as retrofit applications. The MP-3000 added increased motor protection capability. The FP-5000, introduced in 2001, provides overcurrent protection for distribution feeders. The IQ 150S/250S provides wireless energy metering. The enclosed metering offering adds flexibility in monitoring with Eaton’s latest line of meters where metering is needed. Product V12-T10-36 IQ 2000 Model (A) V12-T10-36 IQ 2000 Model (B) V12-T10-37 IQ 1000 V12-T10-37 IQ 1000 II V12-T10-28 MP-3000 V12-T10-37 IQ Data Plus V12-T10-37 IQ Data Plus II V12-T10-25 1980 1990 1995 2000 2005 2010 IQ Generator IQ Energy Sentinel (Breaker Mount) IQ Energy Sentinel (Universal Mount) 15 16 Digitrip MV V12-T10-30 17 DT-3000 CED CED II V12-T10-24 IQ Analyzer V12-T10-36 IQ Analyzer 6000/6200 V12-T10-24 IQ Analyzer 6400/6600 V12-T10-15 Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 V12-T10-17 Power Xpert 2000 V12-T10-29 FP-5000 V12-T10-19 IQ 250/260 V12-T10-27 IQ 230 V12-T10-38 IQ 300 18 19 20 21 IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter V12-T10-42 IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II V12-T10-40 IQ 110/115 V12-T10-41 IQ Power Sentinel V12-T10-39 IQ 210/220 V12-T10-20 IQ 130/140/150 V12-T10-21 IQ 150S/250S V12-T10-22 IQ 35M V12-T10-23 Enclosed Meters 8 14 AR (Addressable Relay) V12-T10-26 7 13 IQ Data V12-T10-26 6 12 IQ 500 ARII (Addressable Relay II) 5 11 IQ DP-4000 V12-T10-32 4 Present AEM II V12-T10-38 3 10 1985 AEM V12-T10-37 2 9 Product History Time Line Page 1 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-3 10 1 2 IQ Products General Information Metering Selection Chart—Dimensions in Inches (mm) Device Name Accessories See Page V12-T10-31 Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 Series Power Xpert 2000 IQ 250/260 Series Section Page Number V12-T10-15 V12-T10-17 V12-T10-19 3 4 5 Electrical Parameters Volts 0.1% of RV + 0.02% FS 0.1% of RV 0.1% of RV 6 Amperes 0.05% of RV + 0.01% FS 0.1% of RV 0.1% of RV Current range (% of nominal) 0.005–20A (400%) 0.1–200% 0.1–200% 7 Watts 0.1% of RV + 0.0025% FS 0.2% of RV 0.2% of RV VARs 0.1% of RV + 0.0025% FS 0.2% of RV 0.2% of RV 8 VA 0.1% of RV + 0.0025% FS 0.2% of RV 0.2% of RV PF-apparent 0.1% 0.2% of RV 0.2% of RV 9 PF-displacement 0.1% — — Frequency ±0.01 Hz ±0.03 Hz 10 11 12 13 THD-voltage 127th THD-current 127th 40th 2345 ±0.03 Hz 40th 6 40th 6 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1 VAR-hours ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1 VA-hours ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1 Ampere-demand 0.05% of RV + 0.01% FS ±0.1% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class ±0.1% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class Watt-demand ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1 VAR-demand ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1 1 1 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1 Watthours VA-demand 14 40th 2345 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class Class 1 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class Revenue accuracy ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 ANSI C12.20 (0.2%) ANSI C12.20 (0.2%) Individual ampere harmonics 85th 7 40th 345 — 15 Individual voltage harmonics 85th 7 40th 345 — Interharmonics Yes — — 16 Minimum and/or Maximum Values Volts L-L, L-N, N-G, VAUX L-L L-L, L-N L-L, L-N 17 Current A, B, C, N, G A, B, C, N A, B, C Power Watt, VAR, VA Watt, VAR, VA Watt, VAR, VA 18 Power Factor Apparent/displacement Apparent Apparent Frequency Hertz Hertz Hertz 19 THD Amperes/volts (L-L, L-N, AUX L-L) Amperes/volts 2345 Amperes/volts 6 Demand values kW, kVAR, kVA, amperes kW, kVAR, kVA, amperes kW, kVAR, kVA, amperes 20 Trend analysis 2 / 4 8 / 8 9 GB 256 / 512 2 / 768 345 MB 128 KB j 21 22 23 24 Event logging 2 / 4 8 / 8 9 GB 100,000 alarms/events with timestamp k Disturbance recording 2 / 4 8 / 8 9 GB 60 cycles per event 768 MB 45 up to 64 cycles per event 45 — Notes 1 Under typical operating conditions. 2 PXM 2260 only. 3 PXM 2270 only. 4 PXM 2280 only. 5 PXM 2290 only. 6 IQ 260 only. 7 8 9 j k Individual values reported to 85th harmonic; anti-alias filtering prevents higher frequencies from distorting readings (see IEC 61000-4-7). PMX 6000 only. PXM 8000 only. Optional. At computer only. Legend: PG = Programmable FS = Full scale RV = Read value Auxiliary voltage (optional) = Provides three additional voltage inputs to the meter: Va2, Vb2, Vc2. Interharmonics = Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000 supported. 25 V12-T10-4 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com IQ Products General Information 10 Metering Selection Chart—Dimensions in Inches (mm), continued Device Name Accessories See Page V12-T10-31 Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 Series Power Xpert 2000 1 IQ 250/260 Series 2 3 Section Page Number 4 V12-T10-15 V12-T10-17 V12-T10-19 Storage 2 / 4 1 / 8 2 GB 256 / 512 3 / 768 4 MB Standard 128 KB for logging, up to 8 parameters every 15 minutes for 30 days PG output relays 5 maximum Optional (2) Form C, 5A or (4) Form A, 120 mA Optional (2) Form C, 5A or (4) Form A, 120 mA Other Features PG analog outputs — Optional (4) 4–20 mA or (4) 0–1 mA Optional (4) 4–20 mA or (4) 0–1 mA Discrete contact inputs 8 Optional (2) or (4) Optional (2) or (4) Analog inputs — — — Synch-input kW utility Via status input Via end of interval pulse with optional digital inputs Via end of interval pulse with optional digital inputs Auxiliary voltage 5 Yes — — kWh pulse initiator Yes Yes Yes Waveform display Local/computer 6 — Waveform capture, samples/cycle Yes, 512 (4096 oversampling) Yes, up to 64 7, up to 512 8 — Frequency distribution display — — — Display type LCD 9 Red LED Red LED 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Display lines/character Graphic (320 x 240 pixels) 3 lines, 4 characters 3 lines, 4 characters Display character height 5.5 mm H x 4 mm W 0.56 (14.2) H 0.56 (14.2) H Communications Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII Network: Modbus TCP, Ethernet TCP/IP, HTTP, SNMP, SMTP, FTP, DNP 3.0 9 Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII, DNP 3.0 Network: Modbus TCP, BACnet/IP, Ethernet TCP/IP, HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP, SMTP Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII, DNP 3.0 Network: Modbus TCP via Power Xpert Gateway 13 14 Setup configuration Via Web browser/display Via Web browser/display Via configuration software/display Dimensions Refer to TD02601007E Refer to TD02601017E Refer to TD02601016E Operating temperature range –20° to 60°C display unit –20° to 70°C meter base unit –20° to 70°C –20° to 70°C Reference literature TD02601007E TD02601017E TD02601016E Notes 1 PXM 6000 only. 2 PXM 8000 only. 3 PXM 2260 only. 4 PXM 2270 only. 5 The auxiliary voltage option adds three additional voltage input channels to Power Xpert Meters. 6 At computer only. 7 PXM 2280 only. 8 PXM 2290 only. 9 Optional. 12 15 Legend: PG = Programmable FS = Full scale RV = Read value Auxiliary voltage (optional) = Provides three additional voltage inputs to the meter: Va2, Vb2, Vc2. Interharmonics = Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000 supported. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-5 10 1 2 IQ Products General Information Metering Selection Chart, continued Device Name Accessories See Page V12-T10-31 IQ 130/140/150 Series IQ 150S/250S Series IQ 35M Series Section Page Number V12-T10-20 V12-T10-21 V12-T10-22 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Electrical Parameters Volts ±0.25% of RV 0.1% of RV 0.4% +0.015% per °C deviation from 25°C Amperes ±0.25% of RV 0.1% of RV 0.4% (5–100%), 0.8% (1–5%) +0.015% per °C from 25°C Current range (% of nominal) 0.1–200% 0.1–200% 1–120% Watts 0.5% of RV 1 0.2% of RV 0.5% per ANSI C12.20 and IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S VARs 0.5% of RV 1 0.2% of RV 2.0% per IEC 62053-23 Class 2 VA 0.5% of RV 1 0.2% of RV Calculated: vector sum of watts and VARs PF-apparent 0.5% of RV 1 0.2% of RV Calculated: Watts / VAs PF-displacement — — — Frequency ±0.03% Hz 1 ±0.03 Hz ±0.02 Hz THD-voltage — — — THD-current — — — Watthours ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 2 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 0.5% per ANSI C12.20 and IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S 2 11 Varhours ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class ±2.0% per IEC 62053-23 Class 2 VA-hours ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 2 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class — 12 Ampere-demand ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 2 ±0.1% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class — Watt-demand ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 2 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 0.5% per ANSI C12.20 and IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S VAR-demand ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 2 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 2.0% per IEC 62053-23 Class 2 VA-demand ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 2 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class Calculated: vector sum of watts and VARs Revenue accuracy ANSI C12.20 (0.5%) ANSI C12.20 (0.2%) 0.5% per ANSI C12.20 and IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S Individual ampere harmonics — — — Individual voltage harmonics — — — Interharmonics — — — 13 14 15 16 Minimum and/or Maximum Values Volts L-L, L-N L-L, L-N — 17 Current A, B, C A, B, C — Power Watt, VAR, VA Watt, VAR, VA — 18 Power factor Apparent 1 Apparent Apparent (low alert) Frequency Hertz 1 Hertz Hertz (out of range alert) 19 THD Ampere/Volts — — Demand values kW, kVAR, kVA, amperes 1 kW, kVAR, kVA, amperes kW, kVAR, kVA; Maximum kW, kVAR, kVA 20 Trend analysis 3 2 MB 5 — Event logging 3 2 MB 5 Logging on demand interval or Modbus command 4 Disturbance recording — — — 21 22 23 Notes 1 IQ 140 and IQ 150. 2 IQ 150 only. 3 At computer only. 4 Optional. 5 IQ 250S only. Legend: PG FS RV = Programmable = Full scale = Read value 24 25 V12-T10-6 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com IQ Products General Information 10 Metering Selection Chart, continued Device Name Accessories See Page V12-T10-31 IQ 130/140/150 Series IQ 150S/250S Series 1 IQ 35M Series 2 3 V12-T10-20 V12-T10-21 V12-T10-22 4 Storage — 2 MB 2 10 registers (16 bit) by 5760 entries each (115 KB) 1 5 PG output relays — — — PG analog outputs — — — Discrete contact inputs — — 2 pulse inputs with BACnet Analog inputs — — — Synch-input kW Utility — — Optional demand synchronization via Modbus Auxiliary voltage 3 — — — kWh pulse initiator 1 Yes Yes Section Page Number Other Features Waveform display — — — Waveform capture — — — Frequency distribution display — — — Display type Red LED Red LED Backlit LCD 6 7 9 10 Display lines/character 3 lines, 4 characters 3 lines, 4 characters 2 lines by 5 characters each (full alphanumeric top row) Display character height 0.56 (14.2) H 0.56 (14.2) H 7.5 mm Communications Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII 1 Network: Modbus TCP 1 Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII, DNP 3.0 Network: Modbus TCP, wired or wireless Serial: Modbus RTU 1, BACnet MS/TP 1 Network: Modbus TCP via Power Xpert Gateway Setup configuration Via configuration software/display Via configuration software/display Via display/configuration software Dimensions 4.85 (123.2) H x 4.85 (123.2) W x 4.97 (126.2) D 7.90 (200.7) H x 7.50 (190.5) W x 3.10 (78.7) D 3.60 (91.4) H x 4.20 (106.7) W x 2.30 (58.4) D Operating temperature range –20 to 70°C –20 to 70°C –20 to 70°C Reference literature TD02601015E TD02601019E TD02601015E Notes 1 Optional. 2 IQ 250S only. 3 The auxiliary voltage option adds three additional voltage input channels to Power Xpert Meters. Legend: PG FS RV 8 11 12 13 14 = Programmable = Full scale = Read value 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-7 10 1 2 IQ Products General Information Metering Selection Chart—Dimensions in Inches (mm), continued Device Name Accessories See Page V12-T10-31 IQ Analyzer 6400/6600 Series IQ DP-4000 Series IQ 230 Series Section Page Number V12-T10-24 V12-T10-25 V12-T10-27 3 4 5 Electrical Parameters Volts ±0.2% FS 1 ±0.3% FS ±0.5% FS 6 Amperes ±0.2% FS 1 ±0.3% FS ±0.5% FS Current range (% of nominal) 3–800% 10–250% 1–200% 7 Watts 0.4% FS, 6 RV 2 ±0.6% FS ±1.0% FS VARs 0.4% FS, 6 RV 3 ±0.6% FS ±1.0% FS 8 VA 0.4% FS, 6 RV 2 ±0.6% FS ±1.0% FS PF-apparent 0.8% FS 1 ±1.0% FS ±2.0% FS 9 PF-displacement 0.8% FS 1 ±1.0% FS ±2.0% FS ±0.17% FS ±0.1% Hz 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 Frequency 0.04% THD-voltage 50th 31st — THD-current 50th 31st — Watthours 0.5% RV 2 ±0.6% FS ±1.0% per ANSI C12 Varhours 1% RV 3 ±0.6% FS ±1.0% per ANSI C12 VA-hours 0.5% RV 2 ±0.6% FS ±1.0% per ANSI C12 Ampere-demand ±0.2% FS 1 ±0.3% ±0.5% per ANSI C12 Watt-demand ±0.4% FS 1 ±0.6% ±1.0% per ANSI C12 VAR-demand ±0.4% FS 1 ±0.6% ±1.0% per ANSI C12 VA-demand ±0.4% FS 1 ±0.6% ±1.0% per ANSI C12 Revenue accuracy ANSI C12.20 (0.5%) — ANSI C12.1 (1%) Individual ampere harmonics 50th — — Individual voltage harmonics 50th — — Interharmonics — — — L-L, L-N L-L, L-N or 0.01 Hz Minimum and/or Maximum Values Volts L-L, L-N 17 Current A, B, C, N, G A, B, C A, B, C Power Watt, VAR, VA Watt, VAR, VA Watt, VAR, VA 18 Power factor Apparent/displacement Apparent/displacement Apparent/displacement Frequency Hertz Hertz Hertz 19 THD Amperes/volts Amperes/volts — Demand values All All All 20 Trend analysis Time/date 2 alarms 4 Event logging 504 events w/timestamp 4 4 21 Disturbance recording 10 waveform events — 22 23 Notes 1 From 3–300% of FS. 2 At unity power factory and 5–300% of FS. 3 At a power factor <±0.5 and 5–300% of FS. 4 At computer only. — Legend: PG FS RV = Programmable = Full scale = Read value 24 25 V12-T10-8 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com IQ Products General Information 10 Metering Selection Chart—Dimensions in Inches (mm), continued Device Name Accessories See Page V12-T10-31 IQ Analyzer 6400/6600 Series IQ DP-4000 Series 1 IQ 230 Series 2 3 Section Page Number V12-T10-24 V12-T10-25 V12-T10-27 Storage 90 KB 15 parameters — PG output relays (4) 10A Form C 1 (3) 10A Form C 2 (2) 100 mA Form A PG analog outputs (4) 0–10/4–20 mA — — Discrete contact inputs (3) + 30 Vdc differential (1) kW Demand 2 (2) +30 Vdc differential Analog inputs (1) 0–20/4–20 mA — (1) 4–20 mA 4 5 Other Features Synch-input kW Utility At device or via communications At device or via communications 2 Via communications only Auxiliary voltage — — — kWh pulse initiator Yes Yes 2 Yes — — Waveform display Local 2/computer 6 7 8 9 Waveform capture, samples/cycle Yes, 128 — — Frequency distribution display Local 2/computer — — Display type Graphic LCD with LED backlight 7 Segment LED Backlit LCD Display lines/character 7 lines, 147 characters 1 line, 7 characters 4 lines, 20 characters Display character height Up to 7 lines 1 line 1.60 (40.6) H x.09 (2.3) W Communications Serial: INCOM 3 Network: via Power Xpert Gateway 3 Serial: INCOM 3 Network: via Power Xpert Gateway 3 Serial: INCOM, Modbus RTU 4 Network: via Power Xpert Gateway Setup configuration Via configuration software/display Via configuration software/display Via configuration software/display Dimensions Refer to TD1702BTE Refer to TD1703ATE Refer to TD1706ATE Operating temperature range –20° to 70°C –20° to 70°C 0° to 50°C Reference literature TD1702BTE TD1703ATE TD1706ATE Notes 1 Relays programmable to operate on any measured function. 2 Optional. 3 An IPONI is required. 4 IQ 230M only. Legend: PG FS RV 10 11 12 13 14 15 = Programmable = Full scale = Read value 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-9 10 1 2 IQ Products General Information Metering Selection Chart—Dimensions in Inches (mm), continued Device Name Accessories See Page V12-T10-31 Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter IQ Energy Sentinel Section Page Number V12-T10-18 V12-T10-26 3 4 5 Electrical Parameters Volts ±0.2% RV — 6 Amperes ±0.2% RV — Current range (% of nominal) — — 7 Watts ±0.5% RV ±1.0% FS VARs ±0.5% RV — 8 VA ±0.5% RV — 9 10 11 PF-apparent ±0.5% RV — PF-displacement — — Frequency ±0.1 Hz — THD-voltage — — THD-current — — Watthours ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 class ±1.0% FS VAR-hours ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 class — VA-hours ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 class — 12 Ampere-demand — — Watt-demand ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 class ±1.0% FS 13 VAR-demand ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 class — VA-demand ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 class — 14 Revenue accuracy ANSI C12.20 (0.5%) — Individual ampere harmonics — — 15 Individual voltage harmonics — — Interharmonics — — 16 Minimum and/or Maximum Values Volts L-L, L-N — 17 Current A, B, C — Power Watts, VAR, VA — 18 Power factor Apparent — Frequency Hertz — 19 THD — — Demand values Watts (Delivered & Received), Watts (Q1–Q4), VA — (Q1, Q4), VA (Q2, Q3) 20 Trend analysis Interval data 1 Event logging 20 latest events and historical 1 21 Disturbance recording — — 22 Note 1 At computer only. Legend: PG FS RV = Programmable = Full scale = Read value 23 24 25 V12-T10-10 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com IQ Products General Information 10 Metering Selection Chart—Dimensions in Inches (mm), continued Device Name Accessories See Page V12-T10-31 Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter 1 IQ Energy Sentinel 2 3 V12-T10-18 V12-T10-26 4 Storage 256 MB standard, 2 GB optional — 5 PG output relays 1 standard, 8 each module 1 — Discrete contact inputs 3 standard, 8 each module 1 — Analog inputs — — Synch-input kW utility Via communications and digital input Via communications only Auxiliary voltage — — kWh pulse initiator Aggregate or main-digital output, LED output on meter modules (accuracy check) — Waveform display — — Waveform capture — — Frequency distribution display — — Display type LCD color touchscreen — Display lines/character 6-inch diagonal — Display character height Graphics — Communications Serial: INCOM Serial: Modbus RTU 1 Network: Modbus TCP, BACnet/IP, Ethernet TCP/ Network: via Power Xpert Gateway IP, HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP, SMTP, SFTP Section Page Number Other Features Setup configuration Via PXMP configuration software Via configuration software Dimensions Refer to TD150006EN Refer to TD1707TE Operating temperature range –20° to 70°C –25° to 70°C Reference literature TD150006EN TD1707TE Note 1 Optional. Legend 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 PG = Programmable FS = Full Scale RV = Read Value 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-11 10 1 IQ Products General Information Protective Relay Selection Chart DT-3000 FP-5000 MP-3000 TD.17.10.T.E TD02602003E TD.17.11.T.E 2 3 4 For Further Details and Information, See TD02600001TE. Device Name Technical Data Number IEEE Device Number 5 Protection Functions Directional power 32 ■ 6 Phase directional 67 ■ Ground directional 67N 7 Phase inst. OC 50 ■ ■ ■ Phase TOC 51 ■ ■ ■ Calc. residual ground IOC 50G 8 9 10 ■ ■ ■ Calc. residual ground TOC 51G Ground inst. OC (measured) 50G (N) ■ Ground TOC (measured) 51G (N) ■ Phase voltage restrained OC 51VR No. of curves (ANSI/IEC/thermal) ■ ■ 11 10 Negative sequence OC (unbalance) 46 ■ Negative sequence voltage 47 ■ 12 Overvoltage 59 ■ Undervoltage 27 ■ Underfrequency 81U ■ Overfrequency 81O ■ Breaker failure 50BF ■ 14 15 1 ■ TOC time reset 11 13 ■ ■ ■ Zone interlocking ■ ■ Thermal overload 49 ■ Locked rotor 49S/51 ■ Jam/stall 51R 16 Cold load pickup 17 Power factor ■ ■ ■ Loss of load ■ 55 Control Functions ■ 18 Synchronization check Remote open/close ■ ■ Trip only 19 Programmable I/O ■ ■ ■ 20 21 22 25 Programmable logic ■ Multiple setting groups ■ Number of starts limit ■ Starts per hour ■ Time between starts ■ Emergency restart ■ ■ Reduced voltage starting Trip lockout ■ ■ ■ 23 24 25 V12-T10-12 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com IQ Products General Information 10 Protective Relay Selection Chart, continued DT-3000 FP-5000 1 MP-3000 2 3 For Further Details and Information, See TD02600001TE. Device Name Technical Data Number IEEE Device Number TD.17.10.T.E TD02602003E TD.17.11.T.E 4 Amperes ■ ■ ■ 5 Ampere demand ■ ■ Metering Functions Volts ■ Phase angle current voltage ■ Positive, negative and zero sequence ■ Watts ■ Watt demand ■ Watthour ■ VARs ■ VAR-demand ■ VAR-hour ■ VA ■ VA-demand ■ VA-hour ■ Frequency ■ Trending (load profile) ■ Minimum/maximum recording ■ 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Monitoring Functions Trip circuit monitor ■ Breaker wear ■ Failure to close ■ Oscillography ■ Sequence of events ■ Trip target data Clock 14 15 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number of starts ■ Acceleration time ■ RTD temperature ■ Hottest RTD ■ 16 17 18 19 Communications ■ Local HMI ■ Local communication port RS-232 ■ Local communication port RS-485 ■ ■ 20 21 Remote communication port ■ ■ ■ FSK ■ ■ Optional Addressable ■ ■ ■ 22 ■ ■ ■ 23 Protocols INCOM™ Modbus ■ 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-13 10 1 IQ Products General Information Protective Relay Selection Chart, continued) DT-3000 FP-5000 MP-3000 TD.17.10.T.E TD.17.30.T.E TD.17.11.T.E ■ 2 3 4 For Further Details and Information, See TD02600001TE. Device Name Technical Data Number IEEE Device Number 5 Construction Panel-mount case ■ ■ 6 Drawout Optional ■ Optional Operating temperature range –30°C to +55°C –40°C to +60°C –20°C to +60°C 7 Power supply options 120–240 Vac 48–125 Vac/Vdc 120–240 Vac 24–250 Vdc 100–240 Vac/Vdc 8 Dual source power supply Optional AC current inputs ■ 9 AC voltage inputs 10 ■ ■ ■ ■ Wye PTs ■ Delta/open delta PTs Binary inputs 1 8 2 11 Alarm outputs 2 Form C 2 Form C 3 Trip outputs 2 12 Analog outputs Local display 13 LEDs (local targets) 14 15 16 5 1 Optional 1 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ANSI ■ ■ ■ IEC ■ ■ ■ UL® ■ ■ ■ CE DT-3030 only ■ CSA® ■ ■ Standards ■ 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T10-14 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com IQ Products Technology Upgrades Power Xpert 4000/6000/ 8000 Series Meters The Power Xpert Meter 4000/ 6000/8000 graphic display uses a simple “twist and click” navigation control dial to easily navigate the menus and drill down into increasing levels of important detail. A “back” key enhances the browser-like navigation of the graphic display. The Web server provides the energy and demand readings required to help manage the cost of energy. It also provides critical information regarding power quality, such as harmonic distortion, flicker, crest factor, K-factor and more. 10 Note: Features and functionality may vary depending on the meter model and options being used. Review the Features and Benefits chart on Page V12-T10-16 for details. 4 The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Series monitors the critical aspects of an electrical distribution system. This premier power quality metering instrument is simple to use, powerful, scalable and highly flexible. The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 offers a new level of intuitive user interface design, presenting critical electrical distribution system information in simple-to-navigate and easyto-understand information architecture. The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 graphic display visualizes the information from up to 16 meter modules. The embedded Web server displays complex power quality data using standard Internet browsers and allows for device configuration from the browser. Both the local graphic display and the embedded Web server present real time, historical and event information in a browserstyle graphical format to help the user interpret key circuit information, such as: ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Current loading Voltage and power levels Power factor Energy usage I/O status Power quality measurements Harmonic plots Disturbance and transient waveforms ITIC disturbance summary screen 5 Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 Meter 6 PXM 8 0 5 1 A 1 B B General Description 2 3 Catalog Number Selection Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 Series Display and Meter 1 7 8 Model Series 4 = 4000 (Standard power quality, 2 GB) 6 = 6000 (Enhanced power quality, 4 GB) 8 = 8000 (Premium PQ with transient capture, 8 GB) Voltage Input Configuration 0 = Standard (V1, V2, V3, V4) 2 = Standard plus auxiliary (V6, V7, V8) Power Supply Configuration 1 = Standard 100–240 Vac or 110–250 Vdc power supply 4 = 24–48 Vdc option (future option) 9 Card Slot 3 Configuration A = No card option B = I/O option card (8 digital inputs, 2 solid-state outputs, 3 relay outputs) 10 Card Slot 2 Configuration A = No card option B = Communication expansion card for LAN/WAN Ethernet networking with 10/100Base-T, 100F, RS-485, RS-232 ports 11 12 Card Slot 1 Configuration 1 = Standard Communications Module with RS-485 13 14 Example 1: PXM8251A1BB (PXM 8000 meter, w/ VAUX, std. pwr., com. exp. and I/O cards) Example 2: PXM6251A1BA (PXM 6000 meter, w/ VAUX, std. pwr., com. exp.card) 15 Accessories 16 Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Description Catalog Number Graphic display module PXD-MMG Communication expansion card for LAN/WAN Ethernet networking: 100FX fiber-optic, 10/100T, RS-485, RS-232 PXMCE-B 1 Digital I/O card: eight digital input, two solid-state output, three relay output PXMIO-B 1 Panel mounting bracket assembly for back-to-back meter to graphic display mounting PX-PMBA Panel mounting bracket assembly for retrofitting a graphic display to an IQ Analyzer cutout PX-PMBB Panel mounting bracket assembly for reduced graphic display rear clearance PX-PMBC Power Xpert Meter 4000 to 6000 license upgrade key PXM-4KUPG 18 19 20 21 Notes 1 These items can be ordered separately or preinstalled in the meter by selecting option B in the model number. Communication cable (standard Modbus RTU) is not included in the package for meter module connection. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 17 22 23 24 25 V12-T10-15 10 1 2 IQ Products Technology Upgrades Features and Benefits Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 Meters Power Xpert Feature 4000 6000 8000 Benefit 3 General Embedded Web server ■ ■ ■ Use a standard Web browser to monitor and manage the meter over the network, Internet 4 TOU metering support ■ ■ ■ Time of usage can be set up to support 4 different schedules Firmware flash update support ■ ■ ■ Enables you to flash the meter with the latest firmware updates 5 Self-learning capability (characterizes “normal” per circuit) ■ ■ ■ The meter can automatically adjust to the environment and alarm only when “real” events occur Voltage, current: per phase minimum, maximum, average, trend graph analysis, export, print ■ ■ ■ Review voltage and current trends, export, print and analyze parameters right on the meter or external software 7 Energy and demand plot comparisons month-to-month, week-to-week ■ ■ ■ Plot two months or two weeks for vivid energy or demand comparison Power: power factor, apparent, real, reactive, frequency ■ ■ ■ Review power usage and power factor and avoid potential PF penalties 8 Energy, demand: forward, reverse, net, sum, tou, profile, previous month comparison, graph analysis, export, print ■ ■ ■ Keep track of your energy usage, compare time of usage and usage against previous month, identify peaks to conserve energy usage Statistical analysis (min., max., average) ■ ■ ■ Review statistical trends, identify past and future problem areas Sag and swell monitoring, management and recording ■ ■ ■ Capture electrical sags and swells and analyze the waveforms Symmetrical Components: Zero, Negative, Positive ■ ■ ■ Analyze possibly unbalanced three-phase power systems Low frequency transient detection and capture ■ ■ ■ Capture lower frequency transient waveforms for retrospective analysis or e-mailing Sampling rate, maximum samples/cycle 4096 1 4096 1 100,000 Extremely high sampling rate will effectively capture impulsive transients “Number of Nines” uptime data (e.g., 6 nines = 99.9999%) ■ ■ ■ Review uptime availability per cent 12 K-factor ■ ■ ■ Review the ratio of eddy current losses, e.g., when driving nonlinear and linear loads Crest factor ■ ■ ■ Review the peak-to-average ratio of the waveform 13 Security ■ ■ ■ Define appropriate security access level per user 14 Communications and I/O Modbus TCP ■ ■ ■ Easy integration with standard protocol to power management and other software 15 Modbus RTU ■ ■ ■ Integrate meters to existing Modbus networks, daisy chain several (1–16) meters together HTML ■ ■ ■ Communicate to the meter over the Internet via standard Web browser 16 SNMP (simple network management protocol) ■ ■ ■ Communicate with the meter via Simple Network Protocol; hook to existing NMS system SMTP (simple mail transfer protocol) ■ ■ ■ Send e-mail messages via standard Simple Mail Transfer Protocol 17 FTP (file transfer protocol) ■ ■ ■ Access, copy, paste, cut waveform capture files on the meter with an FTP Client NTP (network time protocol) ■ ■ ■ Network Time Protocol support enables the meter to synchronize time over the network up to the 1 millisecond resolution COMTRADE, open IEEE Standard file format for Waveform capture export ■ ■ ■ Import waveform captures in standard IEEE (C37.111-1999) COMTRADE file format to third-party software DNP 3.0 over Ethernet (Distributed Network Protocol) ■ ■ ■ Communicate with the meter via DNP 3.0 over Ethernet; hook to existing utility systems Trend measurements CSV file export ■ ■ ■ Easily export trend measurements to third-party applications, e.g., Microsoft Excel in standard CSV file format I/O (8 digital inputs, 3 relay outputs, 2 solid-state KYZ outputs) ■ ■ ■ The Power Xpert I/O Card is extremely flexible and can be used in a large variety of different applications. Digital inputs and relay outputs can be programmed to interact during various conditions defined by the user. Various third-party devices, such as alarm, pulse meters, trip units, sensors can be easily integrated to the Power Xpert Meter. Triggers and events can be tied to the meters standard functions such as e-mail, logs and trends 6 9 10 11 18 19 20 Power, Energy and Demand Power Quality Analysis Secure 5 level user access privileges 21 22 23 Notes 1 Delta-Sigma A/D oversampling rate. These specifications are subject to change without notice and represent the maximum capabilities of the product with all options installed. This is not a complete feature list. Features and functionality may vary depending on selected options, firmware version and product model. Please refer to the technical data sheet and User Manual for detailed specifications. 24 25 V12-T10-16 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com IQ Products Technology Upgrades Power Xpert 2000 Series Meters information in a browser-style graphical format to help the user interpret information such as current loading, voltage and power levels, power factor, energy usage, I/O status, power quality measurements, as well as harmonic plots. The embedded Web server also allows for waveform capture and for visualizing steady-state harmonic content that is critical for power quality analysis. 10 The Web server provides the energy and demand readings required to help manage the cost of energy. 1 2 3 4 5 Catalog Number Selection 6 Power Xpert 2000 Meter 7 PXM 2250 M A 6 5 1 0 5 Model Series 2250 = Energy meter 2260 = Power quality meter 2270 = Power quality plus meter 2280 = Power quality plus with up to 64 samples/ cycle waveform recording meter 2290 = Power quality plus with up to 512 samples/ cycle recording meter Meter Type M = Meter (with integral display) T = Transducer only (no display) Power Xpert 2000 Series Frequency 5 = 50 Hz system 6 = 60 Hz system General Description The Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series power quality instrument monitors the most critical aspects of an electrical distribution system. This premier power quality metering instrument uses the latest in advanced technology to make it simple to use, powerful, scalable and highly flexible. The Power Xpert Meter 2000 offers the same level of intuitive user interface design as the Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000, presenting critical electrical distribution system information in a simple to navigate and easy-to-understand information architecture. The embedded Web server displays comprehensive power quality data using standard Internet browsers and allows for device configuration from the browser. The embedded Web server presents real time, historical and event 8 9 I/O Slot 2 5 = Gateway card 10 I/O Slot 1 0 = None 1 = 2 Relay outputs/2 status inputs 2 = 4 KYZ pulses/4 status inputs 3 = 4 Analog outputs: 0–1 mA 4 = 4 Analog outputs: 4–20 mA 11 12 Power Supply 1 = 90–265 Vac/Vdc 4 = 24–60 Vdc 13 14 Current Input 1 = 1 Amp secondary 5 = 5 Amp secondary 15 Example 1: PXM2270MA65145 (PXM 2270 Meter/Display 60 Hz, 5A, 90–265 Vac/Vdc W/4AO) Example 2: PXM2250MA65105 (PXM 2250 Meter/Display 60 Hz, 5A, 90–265 Vac/Vdc) Accessories 16 Power Xpert 2000 Meter 17 Description Catalog Number Panel-mounting bracket assembly for retrofitting a PXM 2000 to an IQ Analyzer/IQ DP-4000/IQ Data cutout IQ250-PMAK PXM 2000 Gateway Card kit to upgrade an IQ 250/260 to a PXM 2000 PXM2000-GCK 18 19 20 Power Xpert Meter 2000 I/O Cards Description Catalog Number PXM 2000 I/O card—2 relay outputs/2 status inputs IQ250/260-IO1 PXM 2000 I/O card—4 KYZ Pulses/4 status inputs IQ250/260-IO2 PXM 2000 I/O card—4 analog outputs—0–1 mA IQ250/260-IO3 PXM 2000 I/O card—4 analog outputs—4–20 mA IQ250/260-IO4 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T10-17 10 1 IQ Products Technology Upgrades Power Xpert™ Multi-Point Meter 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter General Description Eaton’s Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter is an ANSI C12.20 revenue class Web enabled electronic submetering device that can be mounted in panelboards, switchboards or enclosures. When mounted in a panelboard or a switchboard, the Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter provides customers with an integrated power distribution and energy metering solution that saves space, reduces installation labor and lowers total cost. The Eaton Power Xpert MultiPoint Meter (PXMP Meter) offers a highly modular approach to high-density metering applications in electrical power distribution systems. The PXMP Meter is compatible with most threephase industrial, commercial and single-phase residential low voltage electrical power systems. The PXMP is equipped with two Modbus RTU communication ports for local display and remote serial communications. The PXMP also has optional pulse input and digital output modules along with one standard digital output and three digital inputs. The PXMP Energy Portal Module is Web enabled, making it suitable for use with Ethernet networks and modems. The Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter can measure up to any of the following number of circuits: ● ● ● Sixty single-phase, two-wire (single-pole) Thirty single-phase, three-wire (two-pole) Twenty three-phase, four-wire (three-pole) V12-T10-18 The circuits listed above can be mixed provided that the total number of current sensors does not exceed 60. Product Selection The Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter can be used with three different ratings of current sensors: 100 mA, 10 mA or 333 mV. Switchboard/ panelboard applications will use the 100 mA current sensors, which are highly accurate, self-protecting in the event of an open circuit condition under load and are supplied with an integral plug-in connector. The PXMP automatically detects the rating of the current sensor that is connected. The PXMP can also use 10 mA current sensors that were previously installed for IQMESII retrofit applications. Additionally the PXMP can use 333 mV split core current sensors for retrofit applications where metering has not previously existed. The 10 mA and 333 mV current sensors are also self-protecting in the event of an open circuit condition under load. Description Application Description KIT, PXMP CS125 sensor, quantity of 3 PXMP-CS125-3 The Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter is ideally suited to handle submetering in low voltage power distribution equipment applications with the use of voltage and current transformers. KIT, PXMP CS250 sensor, quantity of 3 PXMP-CS250-3 KIT, PXMP CS400 sensor, quantity of 3 PXMP-CS400-3 The Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter provides a cost-effective solution for residential or commercial metering installations, including: ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● High-rise buildings Government institutions K–12, universities and campuses Office buildings Medical facilities Apartment and condominium complexes Airports Shopping malls Industrial sites Mixed-use facilities Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter Products Catalog Number Meter Bases and Meter Modules with ABCN Voltage Inputs PXMP meter base—three-phase with ABCN voltage inputs PXMP-MB PXMP meter module with six 100 mA inputs for use with PXMP current sensors PXMP-MM100MA PXMP meter module with six 10 mA inputs for use with IQMESII current sensors PXMP-MM10MA PXMP meter module with six 333 mV inputs for use with 333 mV current sensors PXMP-MM333MV Meter Bases and Meter Modules with ABN Voltage Inputs PXMP meter base—single-phase, three-wire with ABN voltage inputs PXMP-MB-AB PXMP meter module with six 100 mA inputs for use with PXMP current sensors PXMP-MM100MA-AB PXMP meter module with six 10 mA inputs for use with IQMESII current sensors PXMP-MM10MA-AB PXMP meter module with six 333 mV inputs for use with 333 mV current sensors PXMP-MM333MV-AB IO Modules PXMP meter pulse input module with eight inputs PXMP-PIM PXMP meter digital output module with eight outputs PXMP-DOM Communication Module PXMP meter energy portal module PXMP-EPM Current Sensor Kits Current Sensor Cable Kits KIT, PXMP sensor cable, 4 ft (1.2m), quantity of 3 PXMP-SC4-3 KIT, PXMP sensor cable, 6 ft (1.8m), quantity of 3 PXMP-SC6-3 KIT, PXMP sensor cable, 8 ft (2.4m), quantity of 3 PXMP-SC8-3 KIT, PXMP sensor cable, 12 ft (3.7m), quantity of 3 PXMP-SC12-3 Current Sensor Extension Cable Kits KIT, PXMP sensor extension cable, 8 ft (2.4m), quantity of 3 PXMP-SCE-8-3 KIT, PXMP sensor extension cable, 16 ft (4.9m), quantity of 3 PXMP-SCE-16-3 Interface Modules PXMP current sensor interface module for 333 mV, kit X 3 PXMP-IM333MV-3 Note Total sensor lead length must not exceed 28 ft (8.5m). Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter Support Products Description Catalog Number Communication cable, 1000 ft (305m), 600V insulation IMPCABLE PXMP meter display—6-inch color touchscreen (with cable) PXMP-DISP-6 Power supply—single-phase 90–264 Vac, 24 Vdc at 2.5A PSG60E Power supply—three-phase 360–575 Vac, 24 Vdc at 2.5A PSG60F Power supply—three-phase 600 Vac, 24 Vdc PSS55D Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com IQ Products Technology Upgrades IQ 250/260 Electronic Power Meters 10 Catalog Number Selection 1 IQ 250/260 Meter 2 IQ 250 M A 6 5 1 1 0 Model Series 250 = Power 260 = Power quality Meter Type M = Meter (with integral display) T = Transducer only (no display) The IQ 250 and IQ 260 Meters provide capabilities you would not normally expect in affordable, ultracompact meters, such as fast sampling rate and accurate metering for a full range of power attributes. Providing the first line of defense against costly power problems, Eaton’s IQ 250 and IQ 260 electronic power meters can perform the work of an entire wall of legacy metering equipment using today’s technology. When space is at a premium, yet you need ANSI C12.20 accuracy, the IQ 250/ 260 series fit the bill. These meters are ideal for electrical equipment assemblies, machine control panels, such as panelboard and switchboard mains and feeders, low voltage metalenclosed switchgear feeders and motor control centers. Requiring far less space than other meters with similar functionality, IQ 250/260 series fit into a standard ANSI or IEC cutout on a panelboard or other electrical equipment, and therefore fit easily into retrofit applications. 0 = None 1 = Two relay outputs/two status inputs 2 = Four KYZ pulses/four status inputs 3 = Four analog outputs: 0–1 mA 4 = Four analog outputs: 4–20 mA Frequency 5 = 50 Hz system 6 = 60 Hz system IQ 250/260 Electronic Power Meter Data Logging A = None L = Data logging General Description 3 I/O Slot 2 Current Input 1 = 1A secondary 5 = 5A secondary Power Supply 1 = 90–265 Vac/Vdc 4 = 24–48 Vdc 4 5 I/O Slot 1 0 = None 1 = Two relay outputs/two status inputs 2 = Four KYZ pulses/four status inputs 3 = Four analog outputs: 0–1 mA 4 = Four analog outputs: 4–20 mA 6 7 8 Accessories 9 IQ 250/260 Meter Catalog Number 10 Panel-mounting adapter for retrofitting an IQ 250/260 to an IQ Analyzer/IQ DP-4000/IQ Data cutout IQ250-PMAK 11 PXM 2000 Gateway Card kit to upgrade an IQ 250/260 to a PXM 2000 PXM2000-GCK Description 12 IQ 250/260 Meter I/O Cards Description Catalog Number 13 IQ 250/260 I/O card—2 relay outputs/2 status inputs IQ250/260-IO1 IQ 250/260 I/O card—4 KYZ pulses/4 status inputs IQ250/260-IO2 14 IQ 250/260 I/O card—4 analog outputs—0–1 mA IQ250/260-IO3 IQ 250/260 I/O card—4 analog outputs—4–20 mA IQ250/260-IO4 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-19 10 1 IQ Products Technology Upgrades IQ 130/140/150 Series Electronic Power Meters IQ 130/140/150 Meters 2 IQ 150 M A 6 5 1 1 3 Model Series 130 = Volts/amps 140 = Power 150 = Energy 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Catalog Number Selection IQ 100 Electronic Power Meter General Description The IQ 100 Meter family provides capabilities you would not normally expect in affordable, compact meters, such as fast sampling rate and accurate metering for a full range of power attributes. Providing the first line of defense against costly power problems, Eaton’s IQ 100 series electronic power meters can perform the work of an entire wall of legacy metering equipment utilizing today’s technology. Meter Type M = Meter (with integral display) T = Transducer only (no display) Frequency 5 = 50 Hz system 6 = 60 Hz system Current Input 1 = 1A secondary 5 = 5A secondary Communications 0 = None 1 = Modbus RTU and KYZ pulse 2 = Modbus TCP and KYZ output (RJ45) Power Supply 1 = 90–265 Vac/Vdc 4 = 24–48 Vdc Accessories IQ 130/140/150 Meters Description Panel Mounting Adapter for retrofitting an IQ 100 to an IQ Analyzer/IQ DP-4000/IQ Data Cutout Catalog Number IQ250-PMAK When space is at a premium, yet you need ANSI C12.20 accuracy, the IQ 100 series fit the bill. These meters are ideal for electrical equipment assemblies, machine control panels, such as panelboard and switchboard mains and feeders, low voltage metalenclosed switchgear feeders and motor control centers. Requiring far less space than other meters with similar functionality, IQ 100 series fit into a standard ANSI or IEC cutout on a panelboard or other electrical equipment, and therefore fit easily into retrofit applications. 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T10-20 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com IQ Products Technology Upgrades IQ 150S/250S SelfEnclosed Electronic Meters 10 Catalog Number Selection 1 IQ 150S/250S Meter 2 IQ 150 S A 6 5 1 1 Model Series 150 = Energy 250 = Energy plus Meter Type S = Self-enclosed meter Frequency 5 = 50 Hz system 6 = 60 Hz system Current Input 1 = 1A secondary 5 = 5A secondary 3 Communications 1 = Modbus RTU (RS-485) 2 = Modbus RTU (RS-485) or TCP—(RJ45) or 802.11b (Wi-Fi) 4 5 Power Supply 1 = 90–400 Vac/Vdc 6 7 8 IQ 150S/250S Self-Enclosed Electronic Meters General Description 9 With energy costs skyrocketing, you need the ability to verify the accuracy of utility billing and allocation of energy costs among business units, different manufacturing areas or facilities, and tenants. Production equipment and IT systems are vulnerable to power anomalies; therefore, you must ensure that power is always up to specifications. If your infrastructure is an established facility, you may not currently have metering or may have addressed these concerns by deploying a variety of analog gauges and meters—one for volts, one for amperes and so on, with separate meters for each measurement. 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 If you’re planning an upgrade or a new power infrastructure, no doubt you would like to capitalize on the latest technology to improve upon that cumbersome architecture and its patchwork view. 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-21 10 1 IQ Products Technology Upgrades Catalog Number Selection IQ 35M IQ 35M Meter 2 IQ35M A 1 1 3 Model Series 4 Enclosure Type 1 = Standard energy 2 = Four quadrant energy 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Accessories IQ 35M General Description The Eaton IQ 35M Meter is a DIN rail meter that combines exceptional performance and easy installation to deliver a cost-effective solution for energy and power monitoring applications, as well as submetering applications. Most models include pulse output, alarm contact and phase alarms for true versatility. The BACnet version offers two digital inputs for accumulating other meter pulses in place of the digital output and alarm contact. The Modbus output options offer added flexibility for configuration and data analysis. The IQ 35M allows you to: ● ● ● ● ● Output Option 1 = Pulse output only 2 = Pulse output + Modbus 3 = Pulse output + Modbus + data logging 5 = Pulse inputs + BACnet + data logging Verify energy bills Make informed load shifting and shedding decisions Fairly and accurately allocate energy costs to users Identify wasteful practices Decrease unnecessary usage Produce an energy profile Secure the optimum utility rate structure IQ 35M Accessories Description Catalog Number IQ35M enclosure, NEMA 4X IQ35M-ENC IQ35M fuse pack, single, 1/2A slow-blow IQ35M-FP1 IQ35M fuse pack, double, 1/2A slow-blow IQ35M-FP2 IQ35M fuse pack, triple, 1/2A slow-blow IQ35M-FP3 IQ35M replacement mounting clips IQ35M-RMC IQ35M DIN rail IQ35M-DR IQ35M DIN rail stop clips (10 pack) IQ35M-DRSC IQ 35M Current Transformers Description Catalog Number Solid Core IQ35M CT, solid core, 5A:0.33 Vac, 0.30 inch IQ35M-SO-030-5 IQ35M CT, solid core, 20A:0.33 Vac, 0.30 inch IQ35M-SO-030-20 IQ35M CT, solid core, 50A:0.33 Vac, 0.50 inch IQ35M-SO-050-50 IQ35M CT, solid core, 50A:0.33 Vac, 0.75 inch IQ35M-SO-075-50 IQ35M CT, solid core, 100A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch IQ35M-SO-125-100 IQ35M CT, solid core, 200A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch IQ35M-SO-125-200 IQ35M CT, solid core, 250A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch IQ35M-SO-125-250 IQ35M CT, solid core, 300A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch IQ35M-SO-125-300 IQ35M CT, solid core, 400A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch IQ35M-SO-125-400 Split Core IQ35M CT, split core, 5A:0.33 Vac, 0.75 inch IQ35M-SP-075-5 IQ35M CT, split core, 30A:0.33 Vac, 0.75 inch IQ35M-SP-075-30 IQ35M CT, split core, 50A:0.33 Vac, 0.75 inch IQ35M-SP-075-50 IQ35M CT, split core, 100A:0.33 Vac, 0.75 inch IQ35M-SP-075-100 20 IQ35M CT, split core, 200A:0.33 Vac, 0.75 inch IQ35M-SP-075-200 IQ35M CT, split core, 250A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch IQ35M-SP-125-250 21 IQ35M CT, split core, 300A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch IQ35M-SP-125-300 IQ35M CT, split core, 400A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch IQ35M-SP-125-400 22 IQ35M CT, split core, 600A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch IQ35M-SP-125-600 IQ35M CT, split core, 800A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch IQ35M-SP-253-800 23 IQ35M CT, split core, 1000A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch IQ35M-SP-255-1000 IQ35M CT, split core, 1200A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch IQ35M-SP-255-1200 24 IQ35M CT, split core, 1600A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch IQ35M-SP-255-1600 IQ35M CT, split core, 2000A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch IQ35M-SP-255-2000 25 IQ35M CT, split core, 2400A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch IQ35M-SP-255-2400 19 ● ● V12-T10-22 Note: Specifications are subject to change without notice and represent the maximum capabilities of the product with all options installed. This is not a complete feature list. Features and functionality may vary depending on selected options, firmware version and product model. Please refer to User Manual for detailed specifications. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com IQ Products Technology Upgrades Enclosed Meters multi-unit enclosed meter solution helps meet any measurement and verification requirement to show energy efficiency improvements and 10 results. In addition to the standard offering, Eaton can also provide an enclosed metering solution tailored around your project needs. 1 2 Catalog Number Selection 3 Single Unit Enclosed Meter 4 NEMA 12 Single- and Multi-Unit Enclosed Meters PXM2250MA65105 - 2 B 5 General Description The Eaton enclosed meter line provides a complete energy metering and data acquisition solution in a single enclosure. Designed for Eaton’s IQ 35M, IQ 150, IQ 250/260, and Power Xpert® 2000/4000/6000/8000 and Multi-Point Meters, Eaton’s enclosed meter line offers mounting and installation flexibility, especially in retrofit applications where no metering compartment or mounting space is available in the existing electrical distribution equipment or where installation time is a premium. Factory designed and wired, Eaton’s enclosed meter line offers savings in labor and installation costs because input current and voltage wiring as well as I/O wiring is prewired to terminal blocks inside the enclosure. The enclosed meter line has two standard offerings: single-, prewired unit (specific IQ 150, IQ 250/260, PXM 2000, PXM 4000/6000/ 8000 or PXMP) and a multiunit (specific IQ 150, IQ 250/ 260 or IQ 35M models). Because the multi-unit automatically includes Eaton’s Power Xpert Gateway 200E, it facilitates measurement and verification of the energy usage on processes and in buildings. This provides a convenient way to monitor energy usage from multiple points, collect and log specific energy use parameters, and display and generate logs for historical energy usage reports. Simply put, Eaton’s Meter Type PXM4051A1BA PXM2270MA65105 PXM4051A1BB PXM2270MA65115 PXM6051A1BA PXM2270MA65145 PXM6051A1BB IQ250MA65100 PXM8051A1BA IQ250MA65110 PXM8051A1BB IQ250MA65114 PXM2250MA65105 IQ260MA65100 PXM2250MA65115 IQ260MA65110 PXM2250MA65145 IQ260MA65114 PXM2260MA65105 IQ150MA6511 PXM2260MA65115 IQ150MA6512 PXM2260MA65145 NEMA Rating 2 = NEMA 12 3 = NEMA 3R 4 = NEMA 4X CPT Option A = 120/240 Vac (no CPT) B = 480 Vac (CPT) 6 7 8 9 10 Enclosed PXMP Meter 11 PXMP - 2 B D Meter Type PXMP-MB PXMP-MB-AB NEMA Rating 2 = NEMA 12 3 = NEMA 3R 4 = NEMA 4X 12 Display A = None D = 6-inch color touchscreen CPT Option A = None B = 120/240 Vac C = 480 Vac D = 600 Vac 13 14 Multi Unit Enclosed Meter 15 IQ150MA6511 - 2 B 4 C Meter Type IQ35MA12 IQ150MA6511 IQ250MA65100 IQ260MA65100 NEMA Rating 2 = NEMA 12 1 3 = NEMA 3R 4 = NEMA 4X 16 Communications C = Includes PXG-200E CPT Option A = 120/240 Vac No CPT B = 480 Vac CPT 1 17 Number of Meters 4 = 4 meters 18 Accessories 19 Meter Subpanel Assembly Catalog Number 20 Meter subpanel assembly for PXM 2000 and IQ 150/250/260 Meters PXM2K-MSPA-A 21 Meter subpanel assembly with CPT for PXM 2000 and IQ 150/250/260 Meters PXM2K-MSPA-B Description 22 Notes 1 Not available with IQ 35M. 23 Other meter models available upon request in single- and multi-unit enclosed versions. 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-23 10 1 IQ Products Current Products IQ Analyzer 6400/6600 ● 2 ● 3 ● 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Features and Benefits ● IQ Analyzer 6400/6600 General Description Eaton’s IQ Analyzer 6400/ 6600 is a complete solution for users who want to monitor all aspects of their electrical distribution system. It provides extensive metering, power quality analysis, remote input monitoring, control relaying, analog input/outputs and communications capability. All programming can be done through the faceplate or through the communications option. Its online Help pushbutton feature displays information on device operation, programming and troubleshooting. 14 All information is accessible through the communications port Quality true rms readings through 50th harmonic Meets ANSI C12.16 Class 10 revenue metering specifications Accurate readings for nonsinusoidal waveforms with up to 3.0 crest factor ● ● ● ● Screens display auto ranging units, kilo units and mega units as needed 10-digit energy readings Displays multiple parameters at the same time Programmable custom screens The new IQ Analyzer Model 6600 with waveform display at the device and sub-cycle voltage disturbance capture provides the capability to monitor a wide range of harmonic parameters. These include harmonic voltage, current magnitudes and phase angles as well as system disturbances such as transient voltage disturbances and sub-cycle voltage interruptions. Product Selection IQ Analyzer 6400/6600 Ordering Information Description Catalog Number IQ Analyzer, separate source power module IQA6410 IQ Analyzer, 24–48 Vdc power module IQA6420 IQ Analyzer, three-phase power module IQA6430 IQ Analyzer, separate source power module with waveform display and sub-cycle voltage distribution capture IQA6610 IQ Analyzer, 24–48 Vdc power module with waveform display and sub-cycle voltage distribution capture IQA6620 IQ Analyzer, three-phase power module with waveform display and sub-cycle voltage distribution capture IQA6630 IQ Flange, to provide extra clearance when mounting IQFLANGE 45.00-inch (114.3 mm) extension cable for remote mounting of power module IQA45CABLE 24–48 Vdc separate source power module IQMDCPM 100–240 Vac and 100–250 Vdc separate source power module IQMSSPM Three-phase, self-powered power module IQM3PPM INCOM communication module IPONI RS-485 communication module with Modbus protocol MPONI 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T10-24 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com IQ Products Current Products IQ DP-4000/4100 Features and Benefits ● ● ● ● ● IQ DP-4000/4100 General Description Eaton’s IQ DP-4000 is a microprocessor-based meter providing complete electrical metering and system voltage protection. In one compact, standard package the IQ DP-4000 provides an alternative to individually mounted and wired conventional meters and switches. The IQ DP-4000 also monitors apparent power (VA), reactive energy (VARhours), apparent energy (VAhours), and % total harmonic distortion (THD) to provide the user with basic power quality information. The IQ DP-4000 meets and surpasses UL/CSA/CE standards. ● ● ● ● Space savings in structure—replaces conventional individual metering devices Standardization of design—one doormounted device Direct voltage input up to 600V New DIP switch design Standardization of CT and PT connections With additional PTs and set points the device can be used in HV setting Relaying included in I/O module (Model 4100) Optional interface capability to computer network for data collection, storage and/ or printout via PowerNet— Eaton leading power distribution monitoring network Retains present parameters through power failure with non-volatile memory 10 Product Selection 1 IQ DP-4000/4100 Ordering Information Description Catalog Number Separate source without I/O capability IQDP4010 Separate source control power without I/O, DC supply IQDP4020 Three-phase without I/O capability IQDP4030 Separate source with I/O capability IQDP4110 Separate source control power with three Form C relay output contacts and one sync pulse input, DC supply IQDP4120 Three-phase with I/O capability IQDP4130 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-25 10 1 IQ Products Current Products IQ Energy Sentinels™ 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 IQ Energy Sentinels Eaton’s IQ Energy Sentinel is a highly accurate, microprocessor-based submeter designed to monitor power and energy readings. It represents an alternative to installing separate wattmeters, watthour meters and wattdemand meters. Key advantages include unmatched savings in space, lower installation costs, and the capability to communicate data readings in a variety of ways. IQ Energy Sentinels with built-in CTs and communications have the added benefit of greater overall system accuracy. Conventional metering often is less accurate because external CTs and separate transducers may each have inaccuracies of 1% or more. The IQ Energy Sentinel provides a unique and cost-effective method to implement energy submetering at lower levels in the distribution system economically. Submetering application examples for the IQ Energy Sentinel include energy monitoring and demand management, product cost analysis, process/machine tool efficiency and productivity improvement. Additional applications include energy cost allocation of tenant billing for commercial, industrial, recreational and residential facilities. Retrofitting The space-saving design characteristics of the breaker mount IQ Energy Sentinels allow them to be added to existing Series C® circuit breakers at any time—often with no additional space or modifications required. Or, they may be installed when upgrading to Series C from older circuit breakers—often with no additional space or modifications required. Product Selection IQ Energy Sentinels Ordering Information Description Catalog Number For F-Frame breakers IQESF_ _ _ 1 For J-Frame breakers IQESJ_ _ _ 1 For K-Frame breakers IQESK_ _ _ 1 Universal with internal CTs IQESUI_ _ _ 1 Universal for external CTs IQESUE_ _ _ 1 Note 1 Final three characters of catalog number are for voltage rating,i.e., 2 0 8 for 120/240, 240, 208Y/120 systems. The Universal Mount IQ Energy Sentinel with internal CTs may be used wherever breaker mounting is not feasible or possible. The Universal Mount IQ Energy Sentinel for external CTs may be used for monitoring loads larger than 400A or for when the use of existing CTs is desired. 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T10-26 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com IQ Products Current Products IQ 230 IQ 230 General Description Eaton’s IQ 230 compact size and flexible mounting capabilities make it perfectly suited for machine control panels such as panelboard and switchboard mains and feeders, low voltage metalenclosed switchgear feeders, motor control centers, and especially for individual load monitoring. The base module can be display mounted, panel mounted, DIN rail mounted or side mounted. The display fits into a standard 1/4 DIN cutout, and for retrofit applications, a 100 mm ANSI collar is available. One IQ 230 provides an alternative to an assortment of individually wired and mounted ammeters, voltmeters, ammeter and voltmeter switches, wattmeters, VAR-meters, power factor meters, frequency meters, watthour and demand meters. 10 ANSI C12 Class 10 revenue metering accuracy makes the IQ 230 an ideal choice for submetering and subbilling applications. Product Selection The IQ 230 can be easily programmed and monitored from the faceplate keypad that features a 4 line x 20 character LED backlit LCD display. Opting for the compatible PowerNet system allows the user to program and monitor the meter remotely from a PC. IQ 230 complete meter with base module, display and 14.00-inch IQ230 (355.6 mm) cable—with INCOM communications, pulse output, two contact outputs, two digital inputs, one analog input and anti-tamper seal 3 IQ 230M complete meter with base module, display and 14.00-inch IQ230M (355.6 mm) cable—with RS-485 Modbus communications, pulse output, two contact outputs, two digital inputs, one analog input and anti-tamper seal 4 1 IQ 230 Ordering Information Description Catalog Number 3 foot (0.9m) Category 5 cable IQ23CABLE 6 foot (2.0m) Category 5 cable IQ26CABLE 10 foot (3.0m) Category 5 cable IQ210CABLE Retrofit Opportunities Retrofit of existing electrical distribution systems with the IQ 230 for load and energy monitoring ● Five mounting options makes installation easier 2 5 6 7 ● 8 9 Ratings ● Application to 200 kV, no PTs to 600V ● CT ratios selectable 5 to 8000A ● Single-phase two- or three-wire; three-phase three- or four-wire 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-27 10 1 IQ Products Current Products MP-3000 Motor Protection 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 MP-3000 Motor Protection General Description Eaton’s MP-3000 motor protection relay is a multi-functional microprocessor-based protective relay for the protection of three-phase AC motors. Though it may be applied to any size motor at any voltage level, it is most commonly applied on medium voltage or larger motors. The MP-3000 relay is a current only device that provides complete and reliable motor protection, monitoring and starting control functions. The MP-3000 motor protection relay is available in either a fixed mount, semiflush case or in a semi-flush quick release drawout case. Both housings are compact and fit a standard IQ cutout. The optional quick release drawout case features twostage contact disconnects and self-shorting CT circuit terminal blocks. A spare self-shorting terminal pair is available for use as relay removal alarm or for continuous motor operation (non-failsafe mode) on relay removal. The optional communication module is externally mounted on the fixed mount case and internally mounted in the drawout case. The MP-3000 motor protection relay has three phase and one ground current inputs. Both a 5A and 1A version are available. The ground protection and metering functions can be used with either a zero sequence ground CT or from the residual connection of the phase CTs. The zero sequence ground CT provides greater ground fault sensitivity than the residual connection. The unit is userprogrammable for 60 Hz or 50 Hz operation. The MP-3000 motor protection relay provides adaptive overload trip characteristics based on motor temperature when motor RTDs are connected through an optional URTD module. Metering of RTD inputs (individual winding, motor bearing, load and auxiliary temperatures) is also provided. The MP-3000 motor protection relay has two discrete inputs, four Form C (1NO and 1NC) contacts and one 4 to 20 mA analog output. The relay provides maximum user flexibility to configure the I/O. All inputs and outputs (except for the trip output) are userprogrammable. In addition, the relay has 10 LEDs for the indication of protection on, program mode, monitor mode, view setting mode, history mode, log mode, trip, alarm, auxiliary 1 and auxiliary 2 operation. A test page in the program mode provides display indication of the discrete input states and testing of the output relays, target LEDs and analog circuit. A user-friendly operator interface and display provides quick access to the settings, monitored values, motor history and operational logs. Large LED alphanumeric character display provides easy viewing from any angle in any light. Simple keypad operation provides quick and easy navigation through all settings and stored data. The program mode and emergency override buttons are access restricted via sealing provisions and latched cover. An integrated help function provides an online description display of functions, abbreviations and operations. Optimum Motor Protection The MP-3000 motor protection relay has been designed for maximum motor operation and protection. It permits running the motor as close to its design limits while protecting it against excessive heating and damaging overload conditions. The MP-3000 field-proven protection algorithms were developed based on motor designs and operating parameters for optimum operation and protection while minimizing nuisance tripping. The MP-3000 motor protection relay uses a protection algorithm and measurement technique based on proven positive and negative (unbalance) sequence current sampling and true rms calculations. Product Selection MP-3000 Motor Protection Ordering Information Description Catalog Number Motor protection in fixed case, 5A CT, communication capable with PONI MP-3000 Motor protection in drawout case, 5A CT, no communication MP-3001 Motor protection in drawout case, 5A CT, with INCOM PONI MP-3002 Motor protection in fixed case, 1A CT, communication capable with PONI MP-3100 Motor protection in drawout case, 1A CT, no communication MP-3101 Motor protection in drawout case, 1A CT, with INCOM PONI MP-3102 Motor protection drawout case inner chassis, 5A, CT, no communication MP3001-IC Motor protection drawout case inner chassis, 5A, CT, with INCOM PONI MP3002-IC Motor protection drawout case inner chassis, 1A, CT, no communication MP-3101-IC Motor protection drawout case inner chassis, 1A, CT, with INCOM PONI MP3102-IC Motor protection drawout case outer chassis MP3-OC Motor protection, 5A, URTD, INCOM PONI, fiber optic link MP3000VPI Motor protection, 1A, URTD, INCOM PONI, fiber optic link MP3100VPI 16-foot (5m) fiber optic cable for MP-3000/URTD communication MPFO-5 Universal RTD module URTP 22 23 24 25 V12-T10-28 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com IQ Products Current Products FP-5000 Feeder Protection Feeder Protection FP-5000 General Description ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Microprocessor-based protection with monitoring and control for medium voltage main and feeder applications Current, voltage, frequency and power protection for electric power distribution systems Complete metering of voltage, currents, power, energy, minimum/ maximum and demand functions Programmable logic control functions for maintie-main transfer schemes Trip logs, event logs and waveform capture for better fault analysis and system restoration Data Logger to provide energy usage profiles for better planning, utilization and energy usage Compact, drawout case design Meets ANSI, UL and cUL® standards Multiple setting groups ANSI, IEC and thermal protection curves for greater flexibility Application Description Eaton’s FP-5000 feeder protection relay provides complete three-phase and ground overcurrent and voltage protection plus metering in a single, compact drawout case. It may be used as primary protection on feeders, mains and tie circuit breaker applications, and as backup protection for transformers, high voltage lines and differential protection. The relay is most commonly used on medium voltage switchgear applications. The FP-5000 takes full advantage of its microprocessor technology providing the user new freedoms and a wealth of datagathering features. The relay performs self-checking of all major hardware and firmware protection elements to ensure their operation in the event of a system or component electrical failure or fault. Protection functions are well suited for main and distribution feeder circuit applications. Programmable logic control functions make the FP-5000 relay ideally suited for main-tiemain and main 1/main 2 transfer schemes. The multiple settings groups can be used for arc flash mitigation when an alternative setting group, set to have instantaneous elements only is activated using a selector switch and the programmable I/O in the FP-5000. When an electrical fault or disturbance occurs, the FP-5000 begins to store the following in non-volatile memory: ● ● Features and Benefits The zone interlocking feature can be used for bus protection instead of an expensive and complicated bus differential (87B) scheme. The FP-5000 works directly with the Eaton Digitrip 3000 and Digitrip MV relays. Breaker failure logic provides faster remote backup clearing times for stuck breaker operation. The FP-5000 provides trip and close circuit monitoring and alarming features. It continually monitors the complete trip and close circuits for continuity and readiness to trip. Open and close pushbuttons are conveniently located on the front of the relay for local breaker operation. 10 ● Voltage and current sampled data Calculated values Status of internal protection functions, logic, contact inputs and outputs Retrieval and viewing of the data is easy, aiding in the quick analysis and restoration of your electric power system. When the FP-5000 isn’t responding to disturbances in the power system, it’s providing valuable metering information at the relay and remotely. It provides energy usage and demand reading, and can alarm when usage reaches a set value. Power factor measurements can be used for capacitor bank switching to control cover demand. Inboard data trending can provide load profiles for up to 40 days. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 14 15 16 FP-5000 Feeder Protection 17 FP5 2 00 - 0 1 Control Voltage 0 = 48 – 125 Vac/Vdc 1 = 100 – 240 Vac/Vdc 2 13 Loss-of-vacuum monitoring is activated when the breaker is open. Residual current is monitored and alarmed if detected. Catalog Number Selection Current Range 2 = 5 Amperes 3 = 1 Ampere 1 18 Communications Protocol 0 = INCOM 1 = Modbus 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-29 10 1 IQ Products Accessories Digitrip 3000 (DT-3000) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 DT-3000 General Description ● ● ● ● ● Microprocessor-based, three-phase and ground overcurrent relay Independent phase and ground measuring circuits and operation ANSI, IEC and thermal protection curves Fixed mount or drawout design Dual-source power supply option for AC control power applications Eaton’s Digitrip 3000 trip unit (DT-3000) is a multifunction, microprocessor-based overcurrent trip unit designed for both ANSI and IEC applications. The DT-3000 design provides true rms sensing design of each phase and ground current. It can be power from either AC or DC control power. The DT-3000 can be used for any application where instantaneous and/or time overcurrent protection is required. The DT-3000 may be applied as the transformer primary protection or as backup to the differential protection. The DT-3000 also has zone selective interlocking to minimize equipment damage resulting from a phase or ground fault in an area where long time and/or short time delay is in use. The integral Dual-Source Power Supply allows the DT-3000 to operate solely from the main CTs during a fault if the normally connected AC voltage is not available, i.e., an electromechanical or electronic “self powered” relay. Electrical Power System Protection The DT-3000 provides phase and ground protection for most types of medium voltage electrical power distribution systems. Protection curves are similar to those on low voltage power circuit breaker trip units, and provide close coordination with downstream devices, as well as upstream fuse and/or electromagnetic relays. Just one DT-3000 replaces the normal complement of three or four conventional electromagnetic overcurrent relays, an ammeter, a demand ammeter, an ammeter switch and, in some situations, a lockout relay switch (device 86). Product Selection DT-3000 Ordering Information Description Catalog Number DT-3000 protective relay DT3000 DT-3000 protective relay Chicago version DT3100 DT-3030 protective relay (24–48 Vdc CE Mark version) DT3030 DT-3000 drawout case protective relay DT3001 DT-3000 Chicago version drawout case protective relay DT3101 DT-3030 drawout case protective relay (24–48 Vdc CE Mark version) DT3031 DT-3000 protective relay with 120 Vac dual-source power supply DT3010 DT-3000 protective relay with 240 Vac dual-source power supply DT3020 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T10-30 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 10 IQ Products Accessories IQ Flange Panel Mounting Adapter Kit for IQ 100/200 Series and PXM 2000 Meters IQ DC Power Supply IQ Cable 1 2 3 4 5 IQ Cable IQ Flange For applications where extra door-mounting space is required, a flange-mounting unit is available. Eaton’s IQ Flange provides an extra 2.50 inches (63.5 mm) of clearance for the device. Product Selection IQ Flange Description Catalog Number IQ Flange option, to provide IQFLANGE extra clearance when mounting IQ DC Power Supply Panel Mounting Adapter Kit The flange adapter plate can be installed as follows: 1. Remove the old meter from the panel or door. Many IQ metering products use the typical IQ drilling pattern shown in for mounting. 2. Install the flange adapter plate. Mount it from the rear using the six screws provided in the kit. The flange adapter plate screw hole pattern should match the typical IQ drilling pattern. If not, perform the next step. 3. Drill six holes in the panel or the door to mount the flange adapter plate. Follow the typical IQ drilling pattern. You need only the top, center and bottom sets of holes. The IQ DC Power Supply is a DC to AC inverter module intended for use where DC power is available, but some AC is required. The unit will operate an MP-3000 or other AC powered IQ devices requiring no more than 75 VA of power at any power factor. For applications where remote mounting of the power supply is required, an extension cable is available. Two types of cable are available. The first (catalog number IQCABLE) is for the obsolete IQ Data, Generator, and Data Plus II. The second (catalog number IQA45CABLE) is for the IQ Analyzer and IQ DP-4000. Product Selection Product Selection IQ Cable IQ DC Power Supply Description Catalog Number IQ DC power supply IQDCPS Description Catalog Number 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) extension cable IQ Data, Generator, Data Plus II IQCABLE 45.00-inch (1143.0 mm) extension cable IQ Analyzer/IQ DP-4000 IQA45CABLE 9 10 11 12 13 15 17 18 19 20 21 22 Ordering Information Catalog Number 23 IQ250-PMAK Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 8 16 Product Selection Panel mounting adapter kit IQ 100/200 and PXM 2000 Series adapter kit to IQ Analyzer/IQ DP-4000/ IQ Data 7 14 4. Install the new IQ 100/ 200 Series or PXM 2000 meter in the flange adapter plate. Secure it from behind with four flat washers, lock washers and nuts provided with the meter. Description 6 24 25 V12-T10-31 10 1 IQ Products Accessories IQ Floor-Mounted Enclosure Addressable Relay II Eaton and Westinghouse have produced a number of different meters dating back to the 1980s. Many of these meters used and continue to use power modules to provide voltage sensing isolation and control power to the meter. 2 3 4 5 Addressable Relay II The Addressable Relay II has two status inputs and a Form C contact output. 7 ● 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Power modules are available to power the meter directly from the voltage source being sensed or for separate control power input. Renewal part power modules are available for the meters shown in the table below. Product Selection 6 8 Power Modules Two 10-Inch Wide Enclosures (Shown with Optional 10-Inch High Bus Compartment) Type 1 Standard AMPGARD structure construction, painted ASA-61. To be used as a lineup extension for mounting IQ products. Each 10.00-inch (254.0 mm) wide section comes with (two) doors with “works-in-adrawer” drawout panel. Each door has three standard IQ cutouts with device panels, and can be supplied with or without IQ devices. ● Input rating: 48–120 Vac, 48–125 Vdc Output contact rating: 10A at 277 Vac, 10A at 30 Vdc Features include a communications watchdog and relay pulse. Baud rate is selectable. Product Selection Addressable Relay II Description Catalog Number Addressable Relay II ARII Power Modules Description Used with Meter Style Number Power Module Catalog Number Old IQ DP-4000 and IQ Analyzer self-powered three-phase power module 2D82302GXX 1 4D13110GXX 1 IQA3PPM Old IQ DP-4000 and IQ Analyzer separate source 110 to 240 Vac or 110 to 250 Vdc power module 2D82302GXX 1 4D13110GXX 1 IQASSPM New IQ DP-4000 and IQ Analyzer self-powered three-phase power module 66D2045GXX 1 66D2040GXX 1 IQM3PPM New IQ DP-4000 and IQ Analyzer 24/48 Vdc power module 66D2045GXX 1 66D2040GXX 1 IQMDCPM New IQ DP-4000 and IQ Analyzer separate source 110 to 240 Vac or 110 to 250 Vdc power module 66D2045GXX 1 66D2040GXX 1 IQMSSPM Note 1 The adjacent power modules will work with each basic meter style, regardless of the last two digits of the meter style number. Product Selection IQ Floor-Mounted Enclosure Description Style Number 10.00-inch W x 30.00-inch D 2147A95G35 x 90.00-inch H (254.0 mm W x 762.0 mm D x 2286.0 mm H) Bus compartment optional 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T10-32 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 10 IQ Products Accessories Current Transformers (CTs) Product Selection 1 Solid Core ANSI Metering Accuracy Primary Current Rating ANSI B0.1 Metering Class at 60 Hz (Accuracy in %) Window Size in Inches (mm) Diameter Catalog Number Mounting Bracket Catalog Number 1.25 (31.8) Window Current Transformers (CTs) General Description 50 1.2 1.25 (31.8) S060-500 1 100 0.6 1.25 (31.8) S060-101 1 150 0.3 1.25 (31.8) S060-151 1 200 0.3 1.25 (31.8) S060-201 1 300 0.3 1.56 (39.6) S050-301 S050BRAC 400 0.3 1.56 (39.6) S050-401 S050BRAC 500 0.3 1.56 (39.6) S050-501 S050BRAC 600 0.3 1.56 (39.6) S050-601 S050BRAC 750 0.3 1.56 (39.6) S050-751 S050BRAC 800 0.3 1.56 (39.6) S050-801 S050BRAC 1000 0.3 1.56 (39.6) S050-102 S050BRAC 1200 0.3 1.56 (39.6) S050-122 S050BRAC Split core CTs are specifically designed to be installed around primary conductors without disconnecting wires or breaking the circuit to be monitored. These current transformers are perfect solutions for energy management applications and are manufactured for installation ease. 4.25 (108.0) Window 3 4 5 1.56 (39.6) Window Eaton’s low voltage current transformers are available in both solid core and split core designs. Engineered for electronic metering applications, all solid core designs and selected split core designs offer ANSI metering quality accuracy. The solid core designs also meet ANSI C57.13 relay accuracy requirements including over-ranging capabilities. The current transformer offering has a 5 ampere secondary at the rated primary current. 2 6 7 8 9 3.25 (82.6) Window 400 0.3 3.25 (82.6) S080-401 S080BRAC 500 0.3 3.25 (82.6) S080-501 S080BRAC 600 0.3 3.25 (82.6) S080-601 S080BRAC 750 0.3 3.25 (82.6) S080-751 S080BRAC 800 0.3 3.25 (82.6) S080-801 S080BRAC 1000 0.3 3.25 (82.6) S080-102 S080BRAC 1200 0.3 3.25 (82.6) S080-122 S080BRAC 12 13 500 0.3 4.25 (108.0) S090-501 S090BRAC 600 0.3 4.25 (108.0) S090-601 S090BRAC 750 0.3 4.25 (108.0) S090-751 S090BRAC 800 0.3 4.25 (108.0) S090-801 S090BRAC 1000 0.3 4.25 (108.0) S090-102 S090BRAC 1200 0.3 4.25 (108.0) S090-122 S090BRAC 1500 0.3 4.25 (108.0) S090-152 S090BRAC 1600 0.3 4.25 (108.0) S090-162 S090BRAC 2000 0.3 4.25 (108.0) S090-202 S090BRAC 2500 0.3 4.25 (108.0) S090-252 S090BRAC 3000 0.3 4.25 (108.0) S090-302 S090BRAC 10 11 14 15 16 17 6.31 (160.3) Window 600 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-601 S025BRAC 750 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-751 S025BRAC 800 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-801 S025BRAC 1000 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-102 S025BRAC 1200 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-122 S025BRAC 1500 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-152 S025BRAC 1600 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-162 S025BRAC 2000 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-202 S025BRAC 2500 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-252 S025BRAC 3000 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-302 S025BRAC 3500 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-352 S025BRAC 4000 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-402 S025BRAC 18 19 20 21 22 23 Note 1 Contact Eaton for further information. 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-33 10 1 2 IQ Products Accessories Split Core ANSI Metering Accuracy Split Core Current Transformers Primary Current Rating Primary Current Rating ANSI B0.1 Metering Class at 60 Hz (Accuracy in %) Window Size in Inches (mm) Catalog Number Accuracy at 60 Hz (in %) Window Size in Inches (mm) Catalog Number 0.80 x 1.95 (20.3 x 49.5) 2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7) 3 400 2.4 2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7) M000-401 100 5.0 0.80 x 1.95 (20.3 x 49.5) M030-101 500 2.4 2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7) M000-501 150 5.0 0.80 x 1.95 (20.3 x 49.5) M030-151 4 600 2.4 2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7) M000-601 200 4.0 0.80 x 1.95 (20.3 x 49.5) M030-201 800 1.2 2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7) M000-801 300 2.0 0.80 x 1.95 (20.3 x 49.5) M030-301 5 1000 1.2 2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7) M000-102 400 2.0 0.80 x 1.95 (20.3 x 49.5) M030-401 1200 0.6 2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7) M000-122 1.42 x 1.53 (36.1 x 38.9) 6 1500 0.6 2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7) M000-152 100 5.0 1.42 x 1.53 (36.1 x 38.9) M040-101 1600 0.6 2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7) M000-162 150 4.0 1.42 x 1.53 (36.1 x 38.9) M040-151 2000 0.6 2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7) M000-202 200 1.5 1.42 x 1.53 (36.1 x 38.9) M040-201 300 1.5 1.42 x 1.53 (36.1 x 38.9) M040-301 1.5 1.42 x 1.53 (36.1 x 38.9) M040-401 7 4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3) 8 600 4.8 4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3) M050-601 400 750 4.8 4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3) M050-751 2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9) 9 800 2.4 4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3) M050-801 200 1.0 2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9) M060-201 1000 2.4 4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3) M050-102 300 1.0 2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9) M060-301 1200 1.2 4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3) M050-122 400 1.0 2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9) M060-401 10 1500 1.2 4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3) M050-152 500 1.0 2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9) M060-501 2000 0.6 4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3) M050-202 600 1.0 2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9) M060-601 2500 0.6 4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3) M050-252 750 1.0 2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9) M060-751 3000 0.6 4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3) M050-302 800 1.0 2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9) M060-801 3500 0.6 4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3) M050-352 1000 1.0 2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9) M060-102 4000 0.3 4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3) M050-402 1200 1.0 2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9) M060-122 11 12 13 2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8) 500 1.0 2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8) M080-501 14 600 1.0 2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8) M080-601 800 1.0 2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8) M080-801 15 1000 1.0 2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8) M080-102 1200 1.0 2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8) M080-122 16 1500 1.0 2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8) M080-152 1600 1.0 2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8) M080-162 17 2000 1.0 2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8) M080-202 2500 1.0 2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8) M080-252 3000 1.0 2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8) M080-302 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T10-34 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com IQ Products Accessories Clamp-On Current Transformers 10 Product Selection 1 Ordering Information Description Catalog Number 150–300–600A IQAPORT0600CT 500–1000–1500A IQAPORT1500CT 2 3 4 5 IQ Accessories—Clamp-On CTs 6 General Description Eaton’s optional Clamp-on Current Transformers (CTs) are designed to be used in cases where there are no existing CTs or the existing CTs cannot be accessed, these clamp-on CTs can be used. 7 These clamp-on CTs are packaged individually. Most applications will require at least three clamp-on CTs, one for each phase. 10 8 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-35 10 1 2 ■ IQ Products Replacement Capabilities—Discontinued Product—Recommended Replacement Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. IQ 2000 IQ Analyzer 6000/6200 ● 3 ● 4 ● 5 ● 6 7 ● IQ 2000 Model A 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Features and Benefits IQ 2000 Model B Recommended Replacement Production of IQ 2000 devices has been discontinued. The IQ 2000 can be replaced with the MP-3000 electronic motor protective relay and the IQ DP-4000 electronic meter. The MP-3000 provides motor current protective relaying, while the IQ DP-4000 provides complete electrical metering and voltage protective alarming functions. For specific application consideration, contact your local Eaton Field Sales office. IQ Analyzer 6000/6200 Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer IQ Analyzer 6000/6200 is a complete solution for users who want to monitor all aspects of their electrical distribution system. It provides extensive metering, power quality analysis, remote input monitoring, control relaying, analog input/outputs and communications capability. All programming can be done through the faceplate or through the communications option. Its online Help Pushbutton feature displays information on device operation, programming and troubleshooting. ● ● ● All information accessible through communications port Quality true rms readings through 50th harmonic Meets ANSI C12.16 Class 10 revenue metering spec Accurate readings for nonsinusoidal waveforms with up to 3.0 crest factor Screens display auto ranging units, kilo units, mega units as needed 10-digit energy readings Displays multiple parameters at the same time Programmable custom screens.The IQ Analyzer Model 6200 with waveform display at the device and sub-cycle voltage disturbance capture provides the capability to monitor a wide range of harmonic parameters. These include harmonic voltage, current magnitudes and phase angles, as well as system disturbances such as transient voltage disturbances and sub-cycle voltage interruptions. This unit is also available in a portable version. RTD Modules Universal RTD Module Recommended Replacement The RTD Modules for the IQ 2000 have been discontinued. Now available is the new Universal RTD Module that replaces all of the RTD modules for the Model A and B IQ 2000 units, as well as the IQ 1000, IQ 1000 II and all current IQ metering and protection products. Product Selection Universal RTD Description Catalog Number Universal module URTD Recommended Replacement Eaton’s IQ Analyzer 6400/ 6600 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T10-36 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com IQ Products Replacement Capabilities—Discontinued Product—Recommended Replacement ■ 10 Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. IQ Data Plus and IQ Data Plus II IQ 1000 and IQ 1000 II 1 IQ Data ● IQ 1000 II IQ Data IQ Data Plus II Recommended Replacement Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer IQ Data Plus was discontinued in 1989 and was replaced by the IQ Data Plus II. The IQ Data Plus II was discontinued in 1998. Both the IQ 1000 and the IQ 1000 II have been discontinued and replaced by the MP-3000 for complete motor protection. A detailed application note (MP3K01R4.PDF) describing replacement of the IQ 1000 II with an MP-3000 is available at www.eaton.com. Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer IQ Data provides simultaneous current and voltage metering. In one compact, standard package, this device provides an alternative to individually mounted and wired ammeters, voltmeters, and ammeter and voltmeter switches. Recommended Replacement IQ DP-4000 Retains preset parameters through power failure with use of field-settable DIP switches (no batteries) Product Selection 3 IQ Data 4 Description Catalog Number Basic metering IQDATA ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 5 Basic metering with IQDATAPM three-phase power module 6 Recommended Replacement 7 IQ DP-4000 8 9 10 Features and Benefits ● 2 11 Space savings in structure—replaces ammeter, voltmeter, selector switches and frequency meter (IQ Generator) Standardization of design—one doormounted device Direct voltage input up to 600V—no additional potential transformers (PTs) required User-friendly—fieldsettable DIP switches Standard model derives power from separate source 120/240 Vac supply Only two style numbers No need to stock multiple units for different current transformers (CT) and PT ratios Interface capability to computer network for data collection, storage and/or printout via IMPACC Membrane faceplate, designed and tested to perform in a harsh industrial environment (Type 3R, 12) 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-37 10 1 2 ■ IQ Products Replacement Capabilities—Discontinued Product—Recommended Replacement Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. IQ Generator ● 4 5 9 10 11 12 Features and Benefits ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 21 ● 23 ● 24 25 ● ● IQ 300 20 22 IQGENPM Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer IQ 300’s thin display and flexible mounting capabilities make it perfectly suited for any application where an accurate, multifunction meter is desired, such as panelboard and switchboard mains and feeders, motor control centers, and both low voltage and high voltage metal-enclosed switchgear. 15 19 IQGEN Basic metering with three-phase power module Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer IQ Generator provides simultaneous current and voltage metering. In addition, the IQ Generator monitors frequency. This device provides an alternative to individually mounted and wired ammeters, voltmeters, ammeter and voltmeter switches, and frequency meters. ● 18 Basic metering IQ Generator 14 17 Catalog Number IQ DP-4000 13 16 Description Recommended Replacement 6 8 Features and Benefits IQ Generator 3 7 IQ 300 Product Selection Space savings in structure—replaces ammeter, voltmeter, selector switches and frequency meter (IQ Generator) Standardization of design—one doormounted device Direct voltage input up to 600V—no additional PTs required User-friendly—fieldsettable DIP switches Standard model derives power from separate source 120/240 Vac supply Only two style numbers No need to stock multiple units for different CT and PT ratios Interface capability to computer network for data collection, storage and/or printout via IMPACC Membrane faceplate, designed and tested to perform in harsh industrial environment (Type 3R, 12) Retains preset parameters through power failure with use of field-settable DIP switches (no batteries) V12-T10-38 Bright display with eight large numeric digits along with a 10-character description of the measured value makes the IQ 300 ideal for switchgear mounting Base unit can be display mounted for simple, onehole installation Base unit can be mounted up to 10 feet (3m) away from display and has three mounting options Product Selection IQ 300 Description Catalog Number IQ 310 complete meter with base module, display and 14.00-inch (355.6 mm) cable—no communications, no pulse output IQ310 IQ 320 complete meter with base module, display and 14.00-inch (355.6 mm) cable—with INCOM communications and pulse output IQ320 IQ 330 complete meter with base module, display and 14.00-inch (355.6 mm) cable—with INCOM communications, pulse output, two contact outputs, two digital inputs, one analog input and anti-tamper seal IQ330 IQ 330M complete meter with base module, display and 14.00-inch IQ330M (355.6 mm) cable—with RS-485 Modbus communications, pulse output, two contact outputs, two digital inputs, one analog input and anti-tamper seal IQ 300D display module only Recommended Replacement IQ DP-4000/4100 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com IQ300D IQ Products Replacement Capabilities—Discontinued Product—Recommended Replacement ■ 10 Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. IQ 210/220 IQ 210/220 General Description Eaton’s IQ 210/220 compact size and flexible mounting capabilities make it perfectly suited for machine control panels such as panelboard and switchboard mains and feeders, low voltage metalenclosed switchgear feeders, motor control centers, and especially for individual load monitoring. The base module can be display mounted, panel mounted, DIN rail mounted or side mounted. The display fits into a standard 1/4 DIN cutout, and for retrofit applications, a 100 mm ANSI collar is available. One IQ 210/220 provides an alternative to an assortment of individually wired and mounted ammeters, voltmeters, ammeter and voltmeter switches, wattmeters, VAR-meters, power factor meters, frequency meters, watthour and demand meters. 1 ANSI C12 Class 10 revenue metering accuracy makes the IQ 200 an ideal choice for submetering and subbilling applications. Product Selection Description Catalog Number 3 The IQ 200 can be easily programmed and monitored from the faceplate keypad that features a 4 line x 20 character LED backlit LCD display. Opting for the compatible PowerNet system allows the user to program and monitor the meter remotely from a PC. IQ 210 complete meter — includes base, display and 14.00-inch (355.6 mm) cable IQ210 IQ 220 complete meter — includes base display module and 14.00-inch (355.6 mm) cable with INCOM communications and KYZ output IQ220 4 IQ 220 transducer base only with INCOM communications and KYZ output IQ220TRAN IQ 200D IQ 210/220 display module IQ200D 3 foot (0.9m) Category 5 cable IQ23CABLE 6 foot (2.0m) Category 5 cable IQ26CABLE 10 foot (3.0m) Category 5 cable IQ210CABLE Retrofit Opportunities ● Retrofit of existing electrical distribution systems with the IQ 210/ 220 for load and energy monitoring ● Five mounting options makes installation easier Recommended Replacement 2 IQ 210/220 Ordering Information 5 6 7 8 IQ 230 9 10 Ratings ● Application to 200 kV, no PTs to 600V ● CT ratios selectable 5 to 8000A ● Single-phase two- or three-wire; three-phase three- or four-wire 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-39 10 1 2 ■ IQ Products Replacement Capabilities—Discontinued Product—Recommended Replacement Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. IQ 110/115 Electronic Power Meters Features and Benefits ● 3 4 ● 5 ● 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ● IQ 110 Electronic Power Meter General Description The IQ 100 Meter family provides capabilities you would not normally expect in affordable, compact meters, such as fast sampling rate and accurate metering for a full range of power attributes. Providing the first line of defense against costly power problems, Eaton’s IQ 100 series electronic power meters can perform the work of an entire wall of legacy metering equipment utilizing today’s technology. ● ● ● Measure and display realtime information about critical power parameters with a sampling rate of 400 samples per cycle Monitor power utilization and quality with ANSI C12.20 accuracy (0.5%) Verify meter accuracy with KYZ test pulse selfcertification capabilities Optional Modbus RTU communications Available as transducer only or with display Designed to accommodate upgrades Integrate into Eaton’s Power Xpert Architecture for a holistic systemlevel view Product Selection IQ 110/115 Ordering Information Description Catalog Number Measures voltage and current IQ 110 Measures voltage, current and frequency IQ 115 Recommended Replacement IQ 130/140 When space is at a premium, yet you need ANSI C12.20 accuracy, the IQ 100 series fit the bill. These meters are ideal for electrical equipment assemblies, machine control panels, such as panelboard and switchboard mains and feeders, low voltage metalenclosed switchgear feeders and motor control centers. Requiring far less space than other meters with similar functionality, IQ 100 series fit into a standard ANSI or IEC cutout on a panelboard or other electrical equipment, and therefore fit easily into retrofit applications. 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T10-40 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com IQ Products Replacement Capabilities—Discontinued Product—Recommended Replacement ■ 10 Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. IQ Power Sentinel ● ● ● ● IQ Power Sentinal General Description Like the IQ Energy Sentinel, the IQ Power Sentinel is a highly accurate microprocessor-based submeter designed to monitor power and energy. In addition to watts, watthour and wattdemand, the IQ power sentinel monitors current, voltage, reactive power (VARs), apparent power (VA), power factor and frequency. The IQ Power Sentinel offers an accurate and economic alternative to separate meters and transducers. The IQ Power Sentinel is only available in the universal mount with internal CTs up to 400 amperes. Features and Benefits Features ● Monitors (accuracy stated full scale) ● AC line current (each phase) ±0.5% ● AC line-to-line voltage ±0.5% ● AC line-to-neutral voltages ±0.5% ● Watts (each phase and total) ±1.0% ● VARs (each phase and total) ±1.0% ● VA (each phase and total) ±1.0% ● Apparent Power Factor (each phase and total) ±0.5% ● Displacement Power Factor (each phase and total) ±0.5% ● Demand (total watts) ±1.0% ● Frequency ±0.5% ● Watthours ±1.0% ● ● ● Built-in CTs version up to 400 amperes Panel or DIN rail mounted Powered directly off the line Built-in communication capability ● Address set by DIP switches ● Communication at 9600 baud ● Noise immune INCOM protocol Choice of operator interfaces ● Subnetwork Master Local Display ● Breaker Interface Module ● Power Management Energy Billing software ● Power Management Software UL and CSA listed CE mark 1 Product Selection 2 IQ Power Sentinal Ordering Information Description Catalog Number 3 Universal with internal CTs, 120/240, 240, 208Y/120 IQPSUI208 Universal with internal CTs, 220/380, 230/400, 240/415 IQPSUI400 4 Universal with internal CTs, 480, 480Y/277 IQPSUI480 Universal with internal CTs, 600, 600Y/347 IQPSUI600 Recommended Replacement 6 PM3 7 8 9 10 11 12 Benefits ● One device replaces multiple meters and/or transducers ● Improved system accuracy ● Savings in product cost ● Savings in space ● Savings in installation cost ● No external power source is needed ● Permits remote monitoring and interconnection with programmable logic controllers and building management systems. For further information see section on Power Management Software Systems 5 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 ● Designed to interface directly with Power Management Software Energy Billing software ● Flexibility—displays what is needed where it is needed 23 Power Management Software 24 ● 22 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-41 10 1 2 ■ IQ Products Replacement Capabilities—Discontinued Product—Recommended Replacement Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II ● ● 3 4 ● 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 ● IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II General Description Eaton’s IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II is a revenue class electronic submetering device that can be mounted in panelboards or switchboards. When mounted in a panelboard or switchboard, the IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II provides customers with an integrated power distribution and energy metering solution that saves space, reduces installation labor and lowers total cost. ● ● ● ● ● Features and Benefits The IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II offers low-cost metering of kW and kWh for multiple tenants of residential and commercial office buildings for one- to three-phase voltage loads not exceeding 347/600 volts. The IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II contains INCOM networking to chain together multiple meters in locations throughout the facility. See above for a typical apartment building layout. ● ● ● ● ● ● Flexible metering configuration Monitors single-phase and three-phase loads from 120 Vac to 600 Vac in three voltage ranges Monitors power in watts and energy in watthours for up to 16 Current Sensors Very low profile design, less than 1.50 inches (38.1 mm) in height Energy values stored in non-volatile memory Stores extensive energy profile data for each metering point. Can be used to identify coincidental peak demand contribution Space-saving stacking design allows two units to be mounted together Supports Time-of-Use energy monitoring Demand interval adjustable from 5 to 60 minutes Measures bus voltage Front panel LEDs provide status of unit and communication activity Meets rigid ANSI C12.1 and IEC 61036 accuracy specifications for revenue meters Can be directly mounted in a UL-approved panelboard or switchboard Product Selection IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II Ordering Information Description Catalog Number IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II 120V with INCOM IQMESIIN1 IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II 277V with INCOM IQMESIIN2 IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II 347V with INCOM IQMESIIN3 Current Sensors—5 amperes, Qty. 3 CS005 1 Current Sensors—50 amperes, Qty. 6 CS050 Current Sensors—70 amperes, Qty. 6 CS070 Current Sensors—125 amperes, Qty. 3 CS125 Current Sensors—200 amperes, Qty. 3 CS200 Current Sensors—400 amperes, Qty. 3 CS400 Current Sensor Extensions—4 feet (1.2m), Qty. 6 CSET04 Current Sensor Extensions—8 feet (2.4m), Qty. 3 CSET08 Current Sensor Extensions—16 feet (4.9m), Qty. 3 CSET16 1 CS005 is not discontinued and is still being used. Recommended Replacement Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter Multipoint electrical energy metering Built-in communication interface 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T10-42 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com IQ Products Replacement Capabilities—Discontinued Product—Recommended Replacement 10 Further Information Publication Number 1 Description 2 Metering Devices TD02600001E TD02601007E TD02601017E TD150006EN TD02601016E TD02601015E TD02601019E TD02601018E TD.17.02B.T.E TD.17.03A.T.E Selection Chart Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 Power Xpert 2000 Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter IQ 250/260 IQ 130/140/150 IQ 150S/250S IQ 35M IQ Analyzer IQ DP-4000 TD.17.31.T.E TD.17.06A.T.E TD02601003E TD.17.07.T.E IQ 300 IQ 200 IQ 110/115 IQ Sentinels TD17C02TE TD17C01TE TD17C03TE IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II Portable IQ Analyzer Optional Clamp-on CTs TD.17.08A.T.E TD.17.08A.T.E TD02601002E IQ DP-4000 I/O Module IQ Analyzer/IQ DP-4000 Auxiliary Power Supply Current Transformers 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Protective Relays TD02600001E TD.17.10.T.E TD.17.11.T.E Selection Chart Digitrip 3000 Overcurrent Relay MP-3000 Motor Protection Relay 10 TD.17.30.T.E TD.17.12.T.E TD.17.13.T.E FP-5000 Feeder Relay Dual-Source Power Supply Digitrip 3000 Optional Drawout Case 11 TD.17.14.T.E TD.17.08A.T.E Universal RTD Module IQ DC Power Supply 12 13 Pricing Information IQ/PXM Products 14 Vista/VISTALINE™ Discount Symbol C10-S24. 15 DT-3000 Vista/VISTALINE Discount Symbol MV-3. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T10-43 Communication Systems Monitoring Software and Communications 11 Communication Systems Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PowerNet Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Eaton’s Electrical Services & Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Xpert Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Xpert Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communications Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mMINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Xpert Gateway 200E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PONI Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPONI/MPONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MINT II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addressable Relay II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IMPCABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pricing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T11-2 V12-T11-2 V12-T11-3 V12-T11-4 V12-T11-6 V12-T11-8 V12-T11-12 V12-T11-12 V12-T11-13 V12-T11-16 V12-T11-25 V12-T11-25 V12-T11-25 V12-T11-25 V12-T11-26 V12-T11-26 V12-T11-26 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T11-1 11 Communication Systems Product Description 1 PowerNet Software 2 PowerNet™ (available on the Power Xpert® Software DVD). Updates to the PowerNet system are available; however, the recommended update path is to upgrade to Power Xpert Software. See Page V12-T11-4 for details on Power Xpert Software. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Integrated PowerNet Support General Description The features of Eaton’s PowerNet software suite are available as a standard part of Power Xpert Software. PowerNet is a family of software applications, client/ server configuration, that help provide a window into an electrical distribution system. Existing PowerNet systems can be easily integrated with Power Xpert Software. PowerNet Features ● Connectivity bundle ● Communication to 1000 INCOM™ devices ● Auto learn of all INCOM connected devices for maximum usability ● Security configuration ● Trending/logging configurations ● Device set point editing/ printing/viewing ● MSDE/SQL data storage ● Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) server ● OLE for Process Control (OPC) server ● Modbus RTU Gateway to data from Eaton INCOM communicating devices ● Power quality bundle ● Viewing of captured waveforms ● Up to eight cycles of actual waveform ● Zoomed-in view of high-speed waveform samples ● Spectrum chart showing frequency content and magnitude (Fourier analysis) ● CBEMA/ITIC representation of events ● Top down access to specific Waveform events from event lists and CBEMA/ITIC curves ● Trip curve display for coordination and selectivity needs ● Log-log coordination curve plotted on-screen for trip units and motor protective relays with the click of a button ● ● ● ● ● ● Online modification of trip curve pickups and time delays; instant verification of coordination with an updated trip curve Automatic scale adjustment based on device pickup level Addition or removal of trip curves directly from the display screen Color-coded curves tied to the device description for added clarity Overlay multiple curves View motor start profiles next to motor protection relay trip curve 11 12 PowerNet Digitrip Screen Viewed in Power Xpert Software 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T11-2 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Communication Systems Product Description Eaton’s Electrical Services & Systems monitoring of the plant with industry experts in energy and power quality are all services provided by our local field representatives. These services will ensure that you get maximum return on all of your system investments. PowerNet Software Supplementing the hardware and software, Eaton’s Electrical Services & Systems can provide local startup and integration services to customize the PowerNet system to your specific business needs. Basic field startup, integration of PowerNet into other plant systems, and remote Note: PowerNet systems do not consist of exclusively CutlerHammer® (Eaton) products. Hundreds of drivers exist to communicate with many thirdparty meters, protective relays and PLCs. Flexible Network Architecture A PowerNet network can be built in a variety of configurations. Systems can be built using existing Ethernet networks as the backbone, as well as on a dedicated twisted shielded pair running throughout a facility. Telephone, radio and fiber modems can be used to create networks where it is cost prohibitive to run dedicated cables. The most flexible, highest performance network architecture includes a dedicated twisted shielded pair network within the switchboard or equipment room connecting into a high speed Ethernet backbone. For a layout of a typical facility network, refer to the 15th Edition of the Consulting Application Guide. Ethernet Backbone TCP/IP Ethernet networks have become the worldwide standard for moving information. Industry has recognized Ethernet as a high 11 speed, flexible, low-cost network that is not vendor dependent. The PowerNet network uses a standard TCP/IP Ethernet as the high speed backbone for carrying information to clients across the plant or across the world. 1 Dedicated Twisted Shielded Pair 4 Customers who desire to run a dedicated network for the power monitoring network have a choice between a dedicated Ethernet network or running a twisted shielded pair. A network of 1000 devices running up to 10,000 feet can be networked through one twisted shielded pair of wire. 5 2 3 6 7 8 9 10 Eaton PowerNet System Load Interrupter Switchgear Medium Voltage Unit Substation Medium Voltage Starter Transformer Personal Computer with Eaton PowerNet Software ■ Power quality ■ Metering data ■ Energy information ■ Switch/breaker starter status/control ■ Time stamped events ■ Breaker operations ■ Motor runtime ■ Motor winding/bearing temperature ■ Trip curve monitoring/configuration ■ Transformer data 11 12 13 14 Load Interrupter Switchgear ■ Power quality ■ Metering data ■ Energy information ■ Starter/breaker status/control ■ Time stamped events ■ Breaker operations ■ Trip curve monitoring/configuration Low Voltage Secondary Unit Substation Transformer Low Voltage Switchboard Lighting Control Panelboard Motor Control Center Adjustable Frequency Control ■ Power quality ■ Metering data ■ Energy information ■ Starter/breaker status/control ■ Time stamped events ■ Breaker operations ■ Motor operations runtime ■ Trip curve monitoring/configuration ■ Drive status ■ Drive metering data ■ Drive speed adjustment/control 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T11-3 11 Communication Systems Product Description 1 Power Xpert Software Product Selection Guide Key Features General Description ● 2 Power Xpert Software aggregates the information arriving from different types of device families via various communication methods. Its unique Web-based design, alarm bubble-up and advanced trend and waveform analysis tools help you to quickly turn your attention to the most important events and to identify reliability issues and cost-saving opportunities. The standard custom graphic package, the Layout Manager, with an icon library and standard vertical templates, allows you to import and mimic your physical environment and gauges. Open protocol support makes Power Xpert Software compatible with most newer generation third-party equipment. Older legacy, proprietary protocols are supported by Power Xpert Gateways (see Page V12-T11-13), and custom software drop-in drivers made available by Eaton. Power Xpert Software is the first power system software of this caliber to put all these powerful features at your fingertips. Power Xpert Software Professional Edition ● Geared toward end users, with built-in support for Eaton power distribution products such as switchgear, UPSs, breakers, PDUs, RPPs, meters, relays, VFDs and MCCs, among others ● Eaton products connect with the software directly via an Ethernet connection, while legacy devices use a Power Xpert Gateway to Web-enable their communications ● A subset of third-party meters and devices are supported as standard via the gateway connection Power Xpert Software Enterprise Edition ● Geared toward advanced power users, system integrators and enterprises with heterogeneous device spectrum and system developers who can take advantage of the included SNMP and Modbus integration development utilities ● Extensive support for third-party devices via standard SNMP and Modbus TCP protocols ● Large variety of ready made, optional third-party drop in drivers available ● 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ● ● ● ● ● Connects to your existing network Data trending and graphing for detailed information for troubleshooting, problem prevention and costs savings Web-based views that allow access to critical information from any location via a Web browser A modular, scalable architecture that allows the addition of capabilities and devices as the power system expands Alarm conditions bubble up through the system to allow personnel to identify which device is in alarm and where it is located All the functionality of Eaton’s PowerNet software suite Connectivity to a wide range of Eaton and thirdparty devices. For a full list of compatible devices, refer to the hardware compatibility list found at www.eaton.com/pxs Power Xpert Software Layout Manager The Power Xpert Software Layout Manager module provides the user a library of powerful design tools and standard templates for the creation of custom Human– Machine Interface (HMI) graphical layouts. Objects can be easily animated, various gauges can be selected, and custom bitmaps can be imported with little effort. Power Xpert Software Edition Features Feature Sets Power Xpert Software Professional Edition Power Xpert Software Enterprise Edition Server module ■ ■ Trend viewer module ■ ■ Layout manager module ■ ■ Quality manager module ■ ■ Eaton device support (switchgear, UPSs, breakers, ePDUs, meters, relays, VDFs, MCCs, etc.) ■ ■ 18 Power Xpert Gateway third-party device support ■ SNMP connector ■ 19 Modbus connector ■ Optional third-party driver support ■ 20 Custom third-party device driver support ■ 16 17 ■ Note: For a full list of supported devices, see the Hardware Compatibility List at www.eaton.com/pxs. 21 For detailed information regarding Power Xpert Software modules, system requirements, supported devices and more, please see www.eaton.com/pxs or the Consulting Application Guide, CA08104001E, Tab 2. 22 23 24 25 V12-T11-4 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Communication Systems Product Description 11 Power Xpert Software General Features 1 Features Features General UPS Shutdown Web browser user interface File saving during shutdown Web-based monitoring capabilities Automatic, orderly and sequential shutdown Downloadable software version updates Parallel redundant UPS shutdown capability Event Notification Security and Administration Event notification via e-mail notification Windows authentication security Event notification via pagers, text message or third-party interfaces Two tier secure system access support Alarm state management SSL Event indicator displayed without Web page active Secure Web browser access (support for HTTPS) Alarm/event searching and filtering Trend object support Waveform attached to applicable power event Time Synchronization Web browser based waveform viewing Time synchronization support for connected devices with 1 millisecond time resolution Alarm capabilities based on device driven events Export and Integration Analysis and Trending Extended Excel® spreadsheet support Graphic trend viewer SQL database query support Chart or data option selection Logs Multiple trends display System log Multiple axis support Error log View multiple variables (i.e., Ia, Ib, Ic, Vab, Vbc, etc.) for a single waveform Service Standard COMTRADE file format support Eaton help desk services (1-877-ETN-CARE) Customizable trend viewer look and feel Turnkey startup service Fixed or custom time frames System Backup Trend analysis capabilities Power Xpert Software system backup Data export Documentation and Training Videos Custom Graphics and Layouts System Administrator’s Guide Custom graphics development via Web browser Power Xpert Software User’s Guide Four user view example templates included as standard Layout Manager Guide iFrame capability Quick Start Guide Browser portal widget support Power Xpert Software introduction and training video Streaming media support Power Xpert Reporting introduction and training video 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Graphic object library included as standard ISO standard electrical picture objects available 17 Graphic files import capability Graphic object animation capability 18 Gauge object library support External Web Links support 19 Alarm bubble-up support through several page layers 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T11-5 11 1 2 Foreseer Software (one or more instances) 4CR Data Acquisition Engine 6 10 11 12 Greenhouse Gas Report: Captures the six offensive greenhouse gasses: carbon dioxide, sulfur dioxide, nitrogen oxide, mercury, methane and nitrous oxide broken down by selected locations within a facility ● Utilities Report: Captures consumption of water, air, gas, electricity and steam (WAGES) Power Xpert Reporting 5 9 ● Power Xpert Reporting Architectural Overview 4 8 Product Description Power Xpert Reporting 3 7 Communication Systems Power Xpert Software (one or more instances) Device Aggregators (PowerNet, Gateways) ● Capacity Summary Report: The summary of top- and bottom-loaded circuits, as well as loading details for each circuit according to user-defined date/time range and facility hierarchy location ● Branch Circuit Monitoring Report: Determine branch circuit loading levels at a glance with color-coded graphics indicating loading status against capacity. Redundant sources can be reviewed, as well as single source loads Power Xpert Devices (Meters, Gateways, Other) Third-Party Devices, Non-Power Xpert Devices Power Xpert Reporting brings the power system information together to compare and contrast. Power Xpert Reporting provides a standard set of reports, including: ● Greenhouse Gas Report Data Center Efficiency Report: A summary of data center infrastructure efficiency and power usage effectiveness, including such information as temperature and humidity, and energy consumption 13 14 Capacity Summary Report Branch Circuit Monitoring Report 15 Utilities Report 16 17 18 Data Center Efficiency Report 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T11-6 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 11 Communication Systems Product Description ● Energy Summary Report: The summary of consumption (kWh) and demand (kW) for a userdefined date/time range and facility hierarchy location ● Power Quality Report: The distribution and trend for amps, volts and THD according to user-defined date/time ranges and facility hierarchy location Joint Commission Report: Standard Joint Commission Compliant Report supports hospital power test requirements. It checks events, key metrics of generators and automatic transfer switches (ATS) during generator testing at user-defined date/time ranges and facility hierarchy location Startup Service Packs Include the Following Services ● Startup Scope Determination: Eaton services will help you to evaluate your service needs and check that the service pack you have selected has appropriate coverage for your circumstances ● Pre-Installation Checkup: Eaton services will contact you to go through the preinstallation checklist, which ensures efficient, prime quality installation and configuration services ● Installation and Configuration: Eaton services will install Power Xpert Software and configure it for operation with your equipment according to startup scope determination. Configuration may also include creating custom graphic layouts if necessary and if required ● System Test: Eaton services will test the Power Xpert Software for operability and will validate communications with key components ● Optional Hands-On Training: If required, Eaton services can provide hands-on training for Power Xpert Software, using the software on-site or using simulated demo systems Joint Commission Report Energy Summary Report ● ● Energy Cost Allocation Report: The total energy bill dollar value or a cost per kWh across a facility hierarchy for a user-defined date/time range Service Offerings Power Quality Report ● Event Summary Report: Provides a Pareto chart of events according to userdefined date/time ranges and facility hierarchy location Energy Cost Allocation Report Available Power Xpert Startup Service Packs At Eaton, we want to make it as easy and non-disruptive as possible to implement our Power Xpert products. Eaton offers several startup service packs from partial help to full turnkey solution implementation. All services are performed by authorized Eaton’s Electrical Services & Systems group personnel. Power Xpert 1 Day Power Xpert 2 Day Power Xpert 5 Day 15–30 2 31–75 2 >75 2 Non-Eaton Devices 3 ■ 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 19 20 ■ ■ Customer Fixed Price Quote 4 Event Summary Report 3 18 Number of Eaton Devices to be Integrated <15 2 2 17 Selecting the Appropriate Service Pack 1 Startup Service Product 1 ■ ■ Notes 1 Available and valid in continental United States only. 2 Typical number of Eaton devices that can be configured in the Power Xpert Software during the course of the selected Startup Service Pack. 3 We strongly recommend a review of the latest Hardware Capability List at www.eaton.com/pxs. 4 Please call the Technical Resource Center for custom Startup Service at 800-809-2772, option 4, 1, for a price quote. The number of devices that can be configured during the course of a selected Start Pack can vary depending on the devices’ installation readiness levels. Maximum numbers indicated require full configuration readiness levels defined in the Power Xpert Startup Services Checklist document in the service’s brochure at www.eaton.com/pxs. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T11-7 21 22 23 24 25 11 1 2 3 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Technology Upgrades Technology Upgrades The INCOM network consists of a twisted shielded pair of conductors that interface to one of the following hardware devices: ● 4 5 Communication Systems ● Master INCOM Network Translator II (MINT II) attached to the COM port of computer Power Xpert Gateway (PXG 200E, PXG 400E, PXG 600E, PXG 800E) When updating the software at an existing installation, careful consideration should be administered and all new PowerNet interface hardware options considered when constructing the update bill of material. In some instances, the computer running the Series III software is an industrial computer that has no monitor, keyboard or mouse, and is installed as a part of a larger system solution. This device is referred to as the Power Xpert Gateway, catalog numbers PXG 200E, PXG 400E, PXG 600E and PXG 800E. In these situations, there is, typically, a main system computer that uses additional software solutions to integrate the system. The Power Xpert Gateway is used as a way of using the infrastructure of the currently installed Local Area Network (LAN) as a means of collecting data from remote substations. This is not the only item that will require updating if existing in the system. 20 Series III system solutions, in some cases, incorporated a lot of non-standard equipment to meet various connectivity needs. In some instances, where multiple COM ports are required, port splitters were used to expand one COM port into 8, or even 16, equivalent COM ports for communications with remote or local MINT II devices (DIGIBOARD). These various system configuration requirements will have to be ascertained and accounted for before updating. Inventory Existing Series III Software Series III software consists of the main Series III package that includes the engine communicating to the devices through the MINT II hardware. Series III came in various packages supporting 20, 200 and/or 1000 devices. The Series III software included most functionality in a single operator interface. It included, but was not limited to, the following features: ● Update Path Note: When updating the computer for the new system software, ISA slots may not be available. In these instances, PXG-E products are typically employed. ● ● ● MINT II devices are compatible with PowerNet and will not require updating NetLink products should be replaced with PXG 600E or PXG 800E hardware mMINT For those unique applications that may have Ethernet and Modbus® on the same gateway node. For Ethernet, use the correct PXG-E model, and for Modbus serial, use the mMINT. ● ● ● ● Monitoring of all real-time parameters from the configured devices Access to change or to view the set points of those devices that support this functionality Logging of selected parameters to ASCII Comma Separated Variable (CSV) files Device Alarming notification and confirmation viewable via user interface and historically captured in ASCII CSV files Built-in Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) server capabilities In addition to the basic Series III software package, add-on applications were available that expanded the basic functionality of the monitoring software including, but not limited to, the following features: ● ● ● ● Energy billing and cost allocation Waveform display Trip curve display Modbus Gateway capabilities Master PC Requirements When planning to update a Series III system, replacement of the personal computer will be required. Due to the operating system as well as memory requirements, the Series III computer will not meet the requirements for a PowerNet computer. Update Path The PC requirements may change with later versions of the PowerNet software applications. Please refer to the Eaton website for updated information on PC requirements: www.eaton.com. In all other instances where custom third-party equipment was used to achieve connectivity solutions, thirdparty vendors should be consulted for appropriate update paths and careful consideration of compatibility with the new PowerNet software to ensure a smooth update path. 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T11-8 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 11 Communication Systems Technology Upgrades Series III and Old NetPower Codes with PowerNet Product Codes 1 NPBILLDDE NPBILLTRACK NPBILL1000 NPBILL200 NPBILL20 NPCOREMOD NPMODBUS NPDDE NPOPC NPETREND Energy Billing NPSETPOINT NPWAVEFORM NPEVENT NPMONITOR NPCORE1000 NPCORE200 NPCORE100 Add-on Mods NPCORE20 ETRACK ETREND EBILLUL EBILL200 EBILL20 ELOG3 TRIPDPS3 MODGATE3 WDISP3 S31000 Energy Billing NPCORE2 Core Add-on Mods S30200 New PowerNet v. 3.3x Product Codes PowerNet v.3.22 and Older Product Codes Core S3020 Description IMPACC Series III Product Codes Connectivity Bundles Device Support 5-device PNCONNECT5 10-device PNCONNECT10 32-device PNCONNECT34 100-device PNCONNECT100 200-device PNCONNECT200 500-device PNCONNECT500 1000-device PNCONNECT1000 5 ■ ■ ■ 6 ■ ■ 7 ■ PowerNet Bundles Standard client PNSTD Power quality PNPQ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 8 ■ ■ ■ 9 Integrator Package Includes OPC, PNINTEGRATOR DDE, and Modbus Gateway Identify Graphics Interface Used The IMPACC Series III software was sold with an option for an Enhanced Graphics application, a Wonderware InTouch software HMI solution. The screens were typically developed by Eaton as a turnkey solution, but this software could be purchased separately with development performed by the customer, or by independent local integrators. The graphics application could be located on the local Series III computer or on remote networked computers. It is important to identify all computers in the system that have the Enhanced Graphics application installed. ■ Update Path PowerNet is compatible with Wonderware InTouch version 7.1 and above. All HMI software locations will require updating to the latest version via the following catalog numbers: Note: When updating the graphics application to interface with the PowerNet DDE Server, due to DDE Tag changes, a review of the Tags displayed and used for control will be required for proper modification. Development time must be allocated for this update. For those computers networked and running Wonderware InTouch runtime or view-only nodes, PowerNet DDE can be removed and local DDE Server client applications installed for more reliable and quality local DDE communications. 3 4 ■ ■ 2 ■ Identify Connectivity Solutions Employed Communication system solutions will, in some cases, implement software and/or hardware equipment to share the information gathered from installed meters, relays and I/O devices with other software and/or systems including Distributed Control Systems (DCS), Building Management Systems (BMS) or Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC). ■ ■ ■ 10 When reviewing an installation, this fact may not be readily discernible and some investigation may be necessary. 11 12 Update Path When updating the Series III software in the section above, DDE comes as a part of the update path. 13 Note: For remote nodes running Wonderware or any other HMI software application, the following catalog number can be purchased and installed on the remote PC, eliminating the need for implementation of the Microsoft® NETDDE solution. 15 Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) NPDDE PowerNet DDE Server client application software. 18 Used in conjunction with Human Machine Interface (HMI) software applications such as Wonderware and Intellusion. These applications could also be installed on remote computers when PowerNet DDE is used to share information over a network. Locate this software on the same computer as the HMI software. 19 Connectivity with the Series III system solutions included the following methods: 14 16 17 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T11-9 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Communication Systems Technology Upgrades Modbus (Series III Computer as Modbus Gateway) Modbus (Industrial PC as Modbus Gateway) RS-232 (MINT II with Custom Driver in Master System) Used in conjunction with Building Management Systems, Distributed Control Systems, or even PLCs where the Modbus master equipment is connected to the communication serial port of the Series III computer. The Modbus add-on to Series III enables the COM port of the computer to be configured as a Modbus slave, providing the customer the ability to configure input and holding registers. Used in conjunction with Building Management Systems, Distributed Control Systems or even PLCs where the Modbus master equipment is connected to the communication serial port of the Series III computer. Available for sale was an industrial computer (no monitor, keyboard or mouse) with a Modbus server software application installed. The functionality of the software installed on the industrial PC focuses on Modbus register configuration and availability. Other monitor, DDE and trending features common to Series III are not available. Used in conjunction with Building Management Systems, Distributed Control Systems or even PLCs. In this case, the customer has written or contracted to have written a custom driver that communicates directly to the installed INCOM devices via the MINT II RS-232 interface. Update Path NPMODBUS: Client application that turns the COM port of the computer into a Modbus server application. Client can be located on any computer with appropriate operating system and on the same network as the rest of the PowerNet system software. NPCOREMOD: Turns the COM port of the computer running the PowerNet software core into a Modbus server. This can only be located where the Core software application is located. 15 Update Path Power Xpert Gateway Update Path Series III software is not a part of this configuration. There is no update path; the MINT II is still a viable solution. For those applications that connect with the Johnson Controls® Metasys® System via the MINT II and Metasys Integrator, the JMI should be used. RS-232 (Series III PC COM Port Gateway, Custom Driver in Master System) Used in conjunction with Building Management Systems, Distributed Control Systems or even PLCs. Most common applications include BMS software such as Johnson Controls Metasys System integration. Where customers implemented this solution, the need for the functionality of the Series III is apparent but the sharing of data is required. When updating to PowerNet, customers must pay close attention to this need. Update Path Series III had the ability to configure the COM port of the computer into a gateway, which made the COM port look like a MINT II to the master communicating software application. This functionality is not included in the PowerNet software suite of applications. Connectivity is left to DDE, OPC or Modbus communications. Before updating, the master software suite vendor should be consulted as to which of the above protocols is supported and the appropriate steps for integration taken. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T11-10 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 11 Communication Systems Technology Upgrades PowerNet Device Selection Chart ■ ■ ■ Current phases ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Current ground ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 2 Quad XYZ ■ ■ Power Manager ■ ■ Addressable Relay II ■ ■ IQ Transfer Switch ■ ■ Advantage FP-5000 ■ ■ RTD Module Network Protector Relays ■ ■ IQ 500 Digitrip RMS 910 ■ ■ MP-3000 Digitrip 1150 ■ ■ Digitrip 3000 Power Sentinel ■ Voltage (phase-neutral) Digitrip RMS 810 IQ 200/IQ 300 Voltage (phase-phase) Energy Sentinel Communicating Device Function Selection Chart ■ 1 Miscellaneous Devices IQ DP-4000/ IQ DP-4100 Digitrip OPTIM 750 Protective Relays Digitrip OPTIM 1050 LV Breaker Trip Units IQ Analyzer Metering Devices 4 5 ■ 6 Power kW ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ kWh ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ kVA ■ ■ ■ ■ kVAh ■ ■ ■ VARs ■ ■ ■ VARh ■ ■ ■ PF ■ ■ ■ ■ kW demand ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ kVA demand ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Ampere demand ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ kVAR demand ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 11 THD 50 31 ■ 12 Current THD ■ ■ Voltage THD ■ ■ CBEMA/crest factor ■ Frequency ■ Current waveform ■ Voltage waveform ■ ■ ■ 3 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 7 8 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 9 ■ Demand ■ ■ 10 ■ Power Quality ■ 31 ■ ■ ■ 31 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 13 14 ■ ■ ■ ■ 15 Other Features ■ ■ Operations count ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ High load ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Trip target data ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Remote open/close ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Downloadable set points ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 16 17 ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 ■ Start profile Auxiliaries Input/Output Digital input 3 1 3 Digital output 4(3) Analog input 1 Analog output 4 8 1 2 5 4 2 4 1 20 11 1 21 Communication Modules IPONI ≥1.06 INCOM communications std. BIM ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 19 ■ ■ ■ 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T11-11 11 Communication Systems Communication Hardware 1 Communications Hardware 2 mMINT 3 Features Simplified Wiring Rules The mMINT module is a slave device on the Modbus network and as such requires a master that will exchange register objects with the mMINT module. INCOM Network The following simplified rules apply to a given system consisting of a single daisychained main cable link between master and slave devices (see figure below). For more complex considerations including star configurations, please refer to the IMPACC wiring specification T.D. 17513. ● 4 ● 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 mMINT Module Product Description The mMINT (Modbus Master INCOM Network Translator) Module is an Eaton accessory product that will provide communication between a Modbus RTU network and an INCOM (INdustrial COMmunications) network (see the mMINT in a Communications Network figure). This module is transparent to the Modbus network. It communicates to a master on the Modbus network using the Modbus RTU (Remote Terminal Unit) protocol. It communicates to slave devices on the INCOM network using the IMPACC (Integrated Monitoring, Protection, and Control Communication) protocol. The catalog number of this product is mMINT. 17 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Handles generic passthrough commands (Modbus/INCOM/Modbus) Capable of passing Modbus register objects from Eaton’s existing products and newer PnP (Plug-‘n-Play) products to a Modbus RTU master Data in IEEE® Floating Point format and fixed point Modbus RTU communications data transfer rates of 1200, 9600 or 19,200 baud with one start bit, eight data bits, no parity, and either one or two stop bits Up to 32 products connected to INCOM network port (246 unique addresses maximum) Flashing Status LED to indicate an active module LED indicators for INCOM transmit and receive communications exchanges LED indicators for Modbus RS-485 transmit and receive communications exchanges Input power for the module from either 120 Vac or 24–125 Vdc DIN rail mount package 0° to 60°C ambient operation 18 ● 19 Module Mounting When mounting the mMINT, verify that an 11 mm H x 28 mm W DIN rail is used and that it is within an enclosed space. 20 21 Modbus RS-485 Network The following simplified rules apply to a given system consisting of a cable link between master and slave devices (see figure below). For more complex configurations, please refer to standard Modbus RTU wiring specification rules for the RS-485 network. ● mMINT in a Communications Network Modbus RTU Serial Network ● (Slave) Modbus mMINT Modbus Master (Master) INCOM Network INCOM Slaves ● ● ● ● Recommended INCOM cable styles are Belden 9463 or C-H style 2A957805G01 The maximum system capacity is 10,000 feet of communications cable and 32 slave devices on the INCOM network under the mMINT Non-terminated taps, up to 200 feet in length, off the main link are permitted, but add to the total cable length Make sure that there is twisted-pair wire that is recommended for IMPACC network use. Use shielded twisted-pair wire to connect each slave to the INCOM network, daisy-chain style. The polarity of the twisted pair is not important ● The recommended Modbus cable has twistedpair wires (24 AWG stranded 7x32 conductors with PVC insulation) having an aluminum/mylar foil shield with drain wire The maximum system capacity is 4000 feet of communications cable and 247 devices on the Modbus RTU network Make sure that there is twisted-pair wire that is recommended for Modbus RTU network use. Use shielded twisted-pair wire to connect each slave to the Modbus RTU network, daisy-chain style. The polarity of the twisted pair is critically important mMINT Module Dimensions RS-485 Modbus A B COM SHD J3 4.25 (108.0) J2 J1 24–125 Vdc 120 Vac Shield INCOM 3.54 (89.9) Burden ● 24 Vac/Vdc, 3 VA Safety Standards ● UL® ● CSA® ● CE mark 22 23 Communications Speed ● INCOM: 1200, 9600 baud ● N2 bus: 9600 baud 24 25 V12-T11-12 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Communication Systems Communication Hardware Power Xpert Gateway 200E Fixed list of supported devices (no ability to add new product support via EDS upload); however, new supported devices will be added during firmware updates. Power Xpert Gateway 200E ● Product Description The Power Xpert Gateway 200E (PXG 200E) is designed to provide a Web-enabled gateway to serially communicating energy meters via a standard Web browser. These can be new or existing meters. The PXG 200E supports revenue grade single and multipoint energy meters via Modbus RTU and INCOM. This product provides a cost-effective, retrofit hardware solution for better energy management without the need for software. The PXG 200E allows you to: ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Monitor energy usage patterns and reveal opportunities for efficiency improvements using existing communicating meters Remotely monitor real-time conditions and profile 5-minute interval trend logs, and export data in csv, without a software implementation Allocate energy costs to departments or processes Reduce peak demand surcharges Reduce power factor penalties Identify billing discrepancies Allows user to daisy-chain multiple Ethernet compatible downstream devices via RJ-45 port (for specifics, see Page V12-T11-15, PXG-E Daisy Chain Application) Connect to downstream devices via a Web browser, Modbus master or SNMP client separately or concurrently ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● IQ 35M IQ Energy Sentinel IQ 130 IQ 140 IQ 150 IQ 220/230 IQ 220M/230M IQ 250 IQ 260 IQ MESII DIM KYZ (WAGES) EI NEXUS 1200 Series PM710 11 Technical Data and Specifications 1 PXG 200E Part Numbers 2 Style Number Catalog Number Power Xpert Gateway 200E 103008420-5591 PXG200E Power supply—24 Vdc ELC-PS02 ELC-PS02 Mounting bracket kit 66B2146G01 PXGACC01 Description Features Features PXG 200E Total number of supported devices 64 Maximum number of INCOM devices supported 64 Maximum number of Modbus devices supported 32 Protocols supported on downstream devices: (INCOM and Modbus RTU) Yes Number of downstream communication ports 2 2 For detailed technical specifications, please reference the Technical Data Sheet for this product at www.eaton.com/pxg, then the Power Xpert Gateway 200E link. USB port for configuration Yes Power Xpert Gateway Screenshots Home Page Bus Page Two RJ-45 Ethernet ports—10/100Base-T Yes Modbus TCP/IP protocols supported Yes SNMP client access v.1 Yes INCOM slave action commands supported Yes INCOM date and time settings supported Yes Modbus write commands supported from Modbus master Yes Device summary screens per main, bus and device Yes Event notification via the Web interface Yes Secure Ethernet communications—SSL encryption Yes Secure communication ports via access control/trusted host list Yes IPv4 support Yes Save and restore configuration file Yes Interval logging—csv file format, downloadable to Excel Yes Ability to upload additional or modified EDS files No Device waveform access and storage—COMTRADE file format No Set user-defined events No Trend graph displayed Yes Data logging—csv file format, downloadable to Excel No Event logging—csv file format, downloadable to Excel No E-mail notification on events and threshold alarms No Custom summary Web page creation No Ability to create custom events No Supports SAM3Z energy meters No BACnet/IP support 1 4 5 PXG 200E Features Number of downstream protocols supported simultaneously ● 3 Yes Note 1 Expected availability 2Q12. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Device Page 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T11-13 11 1 2 3 Communication Systems Communication Hardware Supported Devices Supported Devices Web Services INCOM Pass-Thru File Export csv Modbus Pass-Thru Protocol Device Type Device Name INCOM I/O DIM KYZ (WAGES) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ INCOM Meter IQ MESII ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ IQ 220/230 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ INCOM Meter HTTP MB TCP SNMP BACnet/IP INCOM Meter IQ Energy Sentinel ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Modbus Meter IQ 130 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Modbus Meter IQ 140 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 5 Modbus Meter IQ 150 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Modbus Meter IQ 220M/230M ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 6 Modbus Meter IQ 250 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Modbus Meter IQ 260 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 7 8 9 10 11 12 Modbus Meter EI NEXUS 1200 Series ■ Modbus Meter IQ 35M ■ The Eaton Power Xpert Gateway 200E Includes: ● ● ● The Power Xpert Gateway module Mounting provisions and required hardware for panel and DIN rail mounting CD-ROM: contains the user manual, Modbus register maps, USB driver and other associated files ■ Power Xpert Gateway with DIN Rail Mounting (Brackets Included) 13 Power Xpert Gateway—Dimensions in Inches (mm) 14 Power Xpert Gateway 200E 15 16 17 18 19 20 24 Vdc Input Power COM 1 Port: RS-485 Connection for up to 32 Modbus RTU Devices INCOM Port: RS-485 Connection for up to 64 INCOM Devices RJ-45 Connection to the LAN RJ-45 Connection to the Other Ethernet Devices USB Connection for Local Configuration Capability Power and Traffic Indicator Lights 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T11-14 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Communication Systems Communication Hardware 11 Power Xpert Gateway 200E with Standard Panel Mounting (Brackets Included) Ø 0.19 (6) (4.8) 1 10.75 (273.1) 10.25 (260.4) 2 3 0.56 (14.2) 1.60 (40.6) 2.00 1.12 (50.8) (28.5) 0.56 (14.2) 4 0.24 (6.1) 8.75 (222.3) 5 0.25 (6.4) Front 6 Power Xpert Gateway 200E 7 8.75 (222.3) 8 9 10 11 4.30 (109.2) 12 13 14 0.60 (15.2) 15 PXG-E Daisy Chain Application The PXG-E allows for units to be connected together through two RJ-45 10/100 connectors on the front of the PXG-E series of products. This arrangement is a pass-through of Ethernet communications allowing a single network drop to 16 connect up to five Ethernet communicating devices. The maximum length of a copper cable run should not exceed 295 ft (90m) total. 17 18 Note: In this configuration, if any of the PXG-E units go offline or lose power, the communication to the downstream Ethernet devices will lose connection to the LAN. 19 20 PXG-E Daisy Chain Application 21 Ethernet LAN 22 LAN Connection 23 Cat-5 Patch Cables 24 295 ft (90m) 25 PXM2000 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T11-15 11 1 Communication Systems Communication Hardware Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Power Xpert Gateways 400E, 600E and 800E Power Xpert Gateways 400E, 600E and 800E are typically installed in an electrical assembly—a motor control center, low/medium voltage switchgear or switchboard to consolidate data available from components such as trip units, meters, motor controllers and protective relays. It can be installed later to provide the same valuable information. Product Description Power Xpert Gateways 400E, 600E and 800E (PXG 400E/ 600E/800E) provide a costeffective method to easily Web-enable Eaton and thirdparty products. The PXG 400E/600E/800E series offers improved performance over the previously offered series, including logging in the PXG 600E/800E, daisy chaining capabilities (Page V12-T11-19, Figure PXG-E Daisy Chain Application) and design enhancements including a new processor and additional RAM and Flash memory. The gateway consists of an embedded Web server that allows the user to connect to installed Eaton products such as breakers, meters and relays found in MCCs, LV and MV switchgear and switchboards —to name a few—that communicate via Eaton protocols INCOM and QCPort, in addition to third-party products that communicate via Modbus RTU. The Gateway provides the central connection point for the power metering/monitoring/ protective devices, allowing their parameters to be monitored via the Web. V12-T11-16 The PXG 400E/600E/800E provide data communications to Eaton’s Power Xpert Software and other thirdparty systems to facilitate centralizing and gathering data for long-term data archival, analysis and trending features. The PXG 400E/600E/800E are compatible with and facilitate integration with many third-party building and factory automation systems via Modbus TCP and Web services. In the PXG 400E/600E/800E, information is presented in organized, user-friendly Web pages and includes, but is not limited to, the following: ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Note: Enclosed solution available. Contact your Eaton sales office for more details. The PXG 600E/800E allow you to enable pre-selected parameters to be trended for each supported device. Selecting the trend symbol will generate a real-time graph for that parameter and can be viewed for the past 24 hours, seven days, 30 days or all past history. The PXG 600E/800E also offer direct e-mail notifications to up to 10 users. Select from event notifications, data logs, interval log, event logs and heartbeat e-mails. The PXG 800E brings this communication hardwareonly solution closer to those requirements that have previously only been met by a software package. The PXG 800E includes all the functionality of the PXG 600E. Additional features include: ● ● ● Creation of custom summary Web pages on the user interface Ability to create custom events from existing device parameters or events Ability to communicate wirelessly with the SAM3Z submetering system Device status Comm status Voltage Current Power Power factor Energy Power quality Temperature I/O states Power Xpert Gateway Screenshots Downstream devices on the Power Xpert Gateways often report key operating status information that warrants immediate attention. The PXG identifies a set of key status values for each device and generates “Events” in response to changes in these status values. An example of a device event is an overcurrent trip on a circuit breaker. In addition to displaying events on its home page, the PXG reports events to monitoring software such as Power Xpert Software. These events will then be integrated with those from across the power system, providing unified enterprise level event management. Home Page Bus Page Device Page Trending Page (PXG 600E/800E Only) For detailed technical specifications, please reference the Technical Data Sheet for this product series at www.eaton.com/pxg, then the Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E link. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 11 Communication Systems Communication Hardware Features of the PXG-E Product Offering Features PXG 400E PXG 600E PXG 800E Total number of supported devices 64 96 96 Maximum number of INCOM devices supported 64 64 64 Protocols supported on downstream devices: (INCOM, Modbus RTU and QCPort) Yes Yes Yes Number of downstream communication ports 2 3 3 Number of downstream protocols supported simultaneously 2 3 3 USB port for configuration Yes Yes Yes Two RJ-45 Ethernet ports—10/100Base-T Yes Yes Yes Modbus TCP/IP protocols supported Yes Yes Yes SNMP client access v.1 Yes Yes Yes INCOM slave action commands supported Yes Yes Yes INCOM date and time settings supported Yes Yes Yes Modbus write commands supported from Modbus master Yes Yes Yes Device summary screens per main, bus and device Yes Yes Yes Event notification via the Web interface Yes Yes Yes Secure Ethernet communications—SSL encryption Yes Yes Yes Secure communication ports via access control/trusted host list Yes Yes Yes IPv4 support Yes Yes Yes Ability to upload additional or modified EDS files Yes Yes Yes Save and restore configuration file Yes Yes Yes Device waveform access and storage—COMTRADE file format No Yes Yes Set user-defined events No Yes Yes Trend graph displayed No Yes Yes Data logging—csv file format, downloadable to Excel No Yes Yes Interval logging—csv file format, downloadable to Excel No Yes Yes Event logging—csv file format, downloadable to Excel No Yes Yes E-mail notification on events and threshold alarms No Yes Yes Custom summary Web page creation No No Yes Ability to create custom events No No Yes Supports SAM3Z energy meters No No Yes BACnet/IP protocol supported 1 — — — The Eaton Power Xpert Gateway includes: ● ● ● The Power Xpert Gateway module Mounting provisions and required hardware for panel and DIN rail mounting CD-ROM: contains the user manual, Modbus register maps, USB driver and other associated files 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Power Xpert Gateway with DIN Rail Mounting (Brackets Included) 17 18 19 20 21 Note 1 Expected availability 2Q12. 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T11-17 11 1 Communication Systems Communication Hardware Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E 2 3 4 5 6 24 Vdc Input Power COM 1 Port: RS-485 Connection for up to Either (32) QCPort or Modbus RTU Devices INCOM Port: RS-485 Connection for up to 64 INCOM Devices RJ-45 Connection to the LAN RJ-45 Connection to the Other Ethernet Devices USB Connection for Local Configuration Capability 7 Data and Link Indicator Lights: Available Only with 800E 8 9 10 COM 2 Port: Either RS-485 or RS-232 Connection for up to Either (32) QCPort or Modbus RTU Devices 11 Power and Traffic Indicator Lights Wireless antenna available only with 800E for communication to SAM3Z device PXG 600E or 800E 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T11-18 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Communication Systems Communication Hardware PXG-E Daisy Chain Application The PXG-E allows for units to be connected together through two RJ-45 10/100 connectors on the front of the PXG-E series of products. This arrangement is a pass-through of Ethernet communications allowing a single network drop to connect up to five Ethernet communicating devices. The maximum length of a copper cable run should not exceed 295 ft (90m) total. 11 Note: In this configuration, if any of the PXG-E units go offline or lose power, the communication to the downstream Ethernet devices will lose connection to the LAN. 1 2 3 4 PXG-E Daisy Chain Application Ethernet LAN 5 LAN Connection 6 7 Cat-5 Patch Cables 8 295 ft (90m) 9 PXM2000 Technical Data and Specifications 10 PXG Part Numbers Description Style Number Catalog Number 11 Power Xpert Gateway 400E 103008421-5591 PXG400E Power Xpert Gateway 600E 103008422-5591 PXG600E 12 Power Xpert Gateway 800E 103008423-5591 PXG800E Wireless energy meter for PXG 800E P-103000007-591 SAM3Z Wireless repeater module for SAM3Z P-103000008-591 EZR Power supply—24 Vdc ELC-PS02 ELC-PS02 Mounting bracket kit 66B2146G01 PXGACC01 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T11-19 11 1 Communication Systems Communication Hardware Data Acquisition and Integration Table for Supported Devices Supported Devices 2 PXG 400E/600E/800E Modbus TCP (BMS and SCADA) Pass-through INCOM (PowerNet) SNMP (NMS) BACnet/IP SMTP (E-mail Client) File Export (Data File Format) Accutrol 400 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Drive AF97 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ I/O Universal RTD ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ I/O DIM ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ I/O DIM KYZ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Meter IQ DP-4000 1 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Meter IQ Energy Sentinel ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Meter IQ 220/IQ 320 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Meter IQ 230/IQ 330 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 9 Meter IQ Analyzer (6000/6200) 1 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Meter IQ Analyzer (6400/6600) 1 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 10 Meter IQ Data 1 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Meter IQ Data Plus 1 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Meter IQ Data Plus II 1 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Meter Power Manager ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Meter IQ Power Sentinel ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 12 Meter point IQ MES II ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Protective Digitrip 3000 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 13 Protective Digitrip 3200 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Protective FP-6000 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Protective FP-5000 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Protective FP-4000 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Protective MP-3000 1 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 5 6 7 8 11 14 Device Type Device Name INCOM 15 Protective MP-4000 1 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Protective Digitrip 520MC ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 16 Protective NRX520 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Protective IQ 500 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Protective MPCV Relay ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Protective Digitrip 1150/DT1150V ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Protective Digitrip 810 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Protective Digitrip 910 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Protective Digitrip MV ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Protective Digitrip OPTIM 1050 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Protective Digitrip OPTIM 550 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Protective Digitrip OPTIM 750 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 20 Starter Advantage 2 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Starter Advantage ACM 2 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 21 Subnetwork master AEM II 1 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Subnetwork master BIM II 1 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Subnetwork master CMU 2 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Subnetwork master IQ CED II 1 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Subnetwork master IQ MES II ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 23 Transfer switch ATC-400 1 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Transfer switch ATC-600 1 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 24 Transfer Switch ATC-800 1 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 17 18 19 22 25 File Export (Waveform File Export) Web Services (Power Xpert Software) Drive 4 Pass-through QCPort (CHStudio) HTTP (Web Browser) 3 PXG 600E/800E Only Notes 1 Required IPONI for connection to the Power Xpert Gateway. 2 Required a WPONI for connection to the Power Xpert Gateway. V12-T11-20 ■ ■ Information subject to change without notice. Visit www.eaton.com/pxg for latest up-to-date details on connectivity. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 11 Communication Systems Technology Upgrades Communication Hardware Data Acquisition and Integration Table for Supported Devices (continued) 1 Supported Devices 2 BACnet/IP SMTP (E-mail Client) File Export (Data File Format) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ SVX9000 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Insulation monitor InsulGard ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Meter IQ 130 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Meter IQ 140 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Meter IQ 150 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Meter IQ 220M/230M ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Meter IQ 250 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Meter IQ 260 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Meter IQ 35M ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Meter Nexus 1262 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Meter SQD CM3000 Series ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Meter SQD CM4000 Series ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Meter SQD PM710 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Meter SQD PM850 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Meter PML 7350 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Meter PML 7550 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Meter PML 7650 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Meter PM3 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Protective GE 369 Motor Relay ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Protective GE 469 Motor Relay ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Protective FP-4000/FP-5000 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Protective FP-6000 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Overload relay C441 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Temp monitor Qualitrol 118 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Temp monitor TC-50 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Temp monitor TC-100 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Transformer differential relay ABB TPU 2000 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 I/O D77A-AI16 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ D77A-AI8 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 19 I/O I/O D77A-DI16 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ I/O D77A-DI8 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Starter IT. S811 (MV811) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ File Export (Waveform File Export) SNMP (NMS) MVX9000 Drive Device Name Pass-through QCPort (CHStudio) Drive Device Type Pass-through INCOM (PowerNet) Modbus TCP (BMS and SCADA) 3 Web Services (Power Xpert Software) PXG 600E/800E Only HTTP (Web Browser) PXG 400E/600E/800E Modbus 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 QCPort 1 Starter IT. Starter Starter IT. Starter QSNAP 1 4 20 21 22 Notes 1 Requires a QSNAP for connection to the Power Xpert Gateway. 23 Information subject to change without notice. Visit www.eaton.com/pxg for latest up-to-date details on connectivity. Additional supported devices will be available via firmware updates. Contact your local Eaton sales office for help with devices not currently listed in table above. 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T11-21 11 Communication Systems Technology Upgrades Communication Hardware 1 The table below represents many of the parameters displayed on the Web page for a given device; however, it is not exhaustive. For the complete list of parameters display, per device, refer to the Device Data Map file at http://www.eaton.com/pxg. 2 Web UI Device Parameters Displayed via Power Xpert Gateway 6 ■ ■ ■ Average V Voltage (line-line) V ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Voltage (line-neutral) V ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 7 Average A 8 Phase A Ground A ■ ■ Neutral A ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Peak A ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Demand A ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Apparent VA ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 11 Reactive VAR ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Real W ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Apparent PF ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Displacement PF ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Power Factor ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 13 Energy Real Wh 14 Forward Wh ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Reverse Wh ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Apparent Vah ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Reactive VARh ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Leading VARh ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Lagging VARh ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ THD % ■ ■ ■ ■ Current THD % ■ ■ ■ ■ Voltage THD % ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Frequency Hz Waveform capture N/A 19 Temperature 15 16 17 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Power Quality ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Ambient C° Auxiliary C° ■ ■ Load bearing C° ■ ■ Motor bearing C° ■ ■ 21 Winding C° ■ ■ Phase (L, C, R) C° 22 Terminal block C° 20 Input Status Number of inputs 23 24 25 EDR-3000 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 10 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Power 12 FP-6000 MP-4000 MP-3000 FP-5000 FP-4000 MPVCV Relay IQ 500 Digitrip 3200 Digitrip 3000 Digitrip MV Digitrip OPTIM 750 Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Digitrip RMS 810 Digitrip RMS 910 Digitrip 520MC Digitrip 1150 Power Manager Protective Relays Voltage Current 9 IQ 35M IQ 150 IQ 140 IQ 130 IQ MESII IQ Energy Sentinel IQ Power Sentinel IQ 260 IQ 250 IQ 230/330M IQ 230/330 IQ 220/320 IQ DP-4000 IQ Analyzer 6400/6600 Units Circuit Breaker Trip Units IQ Analyzer 6000/6200 5 IQ Data 4 IQ Data Plus 3 IQ Data Plus II IQ Meters Status/cause of trip ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 2 2 Thermal memory Pole temperature Winding temp. Fan status ■ Alarm/trip relay V12-T11-22 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 11 Communication Systems Communication Hardware Web UI Device Parameters Displayed via Power Xpert Gateway (Continued) TC-100 TC-50 2 PM3 Nexus 1262/1272 Qualitrol 118 ABB TPU 2000 GE 469 Motor Relay GE 369 Motor Relay PML 7650 PML 7550 PML 7350 SQD PM 850 SQD PM 710 SQD CM 4000 Series SQD CM 3000 Series Universal RTD D77A-DI8 DIM KYZ D77A-DI16 ■ D77A-AI8 ACT-800 ■ 1 Third-Party Devices D77A-AI16 ACT-600 ■ I/O Digital Input Module ATC-400 SVX & MVX Drives C441 Overload Relay Transfer Switches IT. Starters/QSNAP IT. S811 Advantage Starters AF97 Accutrol 400 Units InsulGard Insulation Motor Starters Monitor and VFDs Voltage Average V Voltage (line-line) V Voltage (line-neutral) V ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 6 Current ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Average A Phase A Ground A Neutral A ■ ■ ■ Peak A ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Demand A ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■◗ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 7 ■ 8 ■ 9 Power ■ 4 5 ■ ■ ■ 3 Apparent VA Reactive VAR ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Real W ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 10 Apparent PF ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Displacement PF ■ ■ ■ 11 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Power Factor 12 Energy ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Real Wh Forward Wh ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Reverse Wh ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Apparent Vah ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Reactive VARh ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Leading VARh ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ VARh ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Lagging 13 14 ■ 15 Power Quality ■ THD % Current THD % ■ Voltage THD % ■ ■ Frequency Hz Waveform capture N/A ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 16 ■ 17 Temperature ■ ■ ■ Ambient C° Auxiliary C° ■ Load bearing C° ■ ■ ■ Motor bearing C° ■ ■ ■ Winding C° ■ ■ ■ Phase (L, C, R) C° ■ Terminal block C° ■ ■ ■ 19 ■ ■ Input Status Number of inputs ■ ■ ■ Status/cause of trip ■ ■ ■ ■ Thermal memory ■ ■ ■ ■ Pole temperature ■ ■ 8 16 8 16 8 4 8 2 ■ ■ Winding temp. ■ ■ ■ ■ Fan status ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Partial discharge intensity (PDI) ■ 21 23 24 25 Note: Information subject to change without notice. Visit www.eaton.com for latest information. Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 20 22 ■ Alarm/trip relay 18 V12-T11-23 11 Communication Systems Communication Hardware 1 Power Xpert Gateway—Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E with Standard Panel Mounting (Brackets Included) 3 4 5 Ø 0.19 (6) (4.8) 0.56 (14.2) 1.60 (40.6) 2.00 1.12 (50.8) (28.5) 0.56 (14.2) 6 0.24 (6.1) 8.75 (222.3) 7 8 10.75 (273.1) 10.25 (260.4) 0.25 (6.4) Front Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E 8.75 (222.3) 9 10 11 12 4.30 (109.2) 13 14 15 16 0.60 (15.2) 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T11-24 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 11 Communication Systems Communication Hardware Product Operated Network Interface (PONI) Devices PONI Family The Product Operated Network Interface (PONI) cards attach to CutlerHammer/Eaton devices to enable communications. These cards serve various functions from Ethernet-type applications, to non-Ethernettype applications, ultimately playing a key role in facilitating the access to information that each of the Cutler-Hammer/ Eaton devices offer. The IPONI enables communications over a twisted shielded pair INCOM device network. Each PONI attaches to its associated product. The PONI modules obtain power from the host product. PONI modules can be used as solutions for various applications. The non-Ethernet product offerings include the IPONI and the MPONI. These devices are typically applied where there are more than one device connected in a network of devices by a dedicated twisted shielded pair of conductors (Ref. IMPCABLE). The communications medium is formatted to enable clean noise-immune communications even when routed around areas of high noise and typical electrical communication disrupting equipment. The IPONI and MPONI daisy chain are in the same format as that used in devices that have built-in communications such as the Digitrip trip units and can be used in series with these communication network wiring. To Ethernet enable IPONI and MPONI products, use the PXG-E series Power Xpert Gateways. The PXG-E with IPONI or MPONI product offering puts a Cutler-Hammer/Eaton metering product on the Web. No other software is required when specifying a PXG-E. All software needed to enable any internet browser program such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox is packed into the PXG-E. The data can then be viewed directly in any Internet Web browser window. The WEBPONI provides live updating data for the meter being monitored, as well as waveform display capabilities and e-mail direct from the device to defined key e-mail addresses that need to know when an event occurs. IPONI/MPONI With the addition of the IPONI or the MPONI card, a Cutler-Hammer/Eaton device or series of devices can communicate with the PowerNet software via a master unit such as a MINT II and the PXG-E. The PONIs can be easily mounted to the appropriate CutlerHammer/Eaton device and daisy chain together to form a robust deterministic communication network of devices in a system solution. Systems employing the IPONI/MPONI type communications medium provide deterministic communication performance relied on by those critical solution applications, where this is of the utmost importance. The MINT II can be used to interface multiple IMPACC devices to Broadband LANs, telephone modem or short haul modem. It can also be used to allow additional branches of the INCOM data line (five additional branches per MINT II). The MINT II can be either table or panel mounted and requires a 120 Vac, 60 Hz supply. Selectable communication rate of 1200 or 9600 baud is available. The burden for the MINT II is 7 VA. Addressable Relay II (ARII) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MINT II 11 Master INCOM Network Translator (MINT) II The MINT II interfaces the IMPACC network to a master control unit with an RS-232 port, such as a personal computer serial port, a programmable controller RS-232 “smart card,” building management system interface card, etc. (Some software will have to be written in the master control unit to request and receive messages. The MINT II protocol is 10-character, ASCII coded hex.) 12 Addressable Relay II The Addressable Relay II is designed for use where information or control of non-communicating devices is required remotely. The relays communicate on the PowerNet system. Devices are assigned a three-digit address to uniquely identify them on the daisy-chained twisted shielded pair network. The ARII has a Form C relay on board with two status indicating circuit inputs. The output relay can be activated and monitored remotely. Input status 1 and 2 can be monitored remotely. 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T11-25 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Communication Systems Communication Hardware IMPCABLE IMPCABLE The IMPCABLE was designed to be run in switchgear where codes require a 600V insulation rating. Typical “blue hose” cables are rated at 300V. The IMPCABLE is an 18 AWG cable with a 100 ohm impedance at 100 kHz tuned to work optimally with the FSK signal from CutlerHammer/Eaton devices. The cable has been designed with characteristics that allow up to 1000 devices or distances up to 10,000 feet from the master. Polyethylene Filler Aluminum Shield PVC Outer Jacket Tinned Copper Braid Publication Number Description TD.17.15.T.E PowerNet 10 PowerPort TD02603010E Power Xpert Gateway 200E 11 TB02603002E Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E TB02603002E mMINT 12 TD.17.19.T.E MINT II RS-232 Converter TD.17.20.T.E PONI Communication Modules 13 TB02603002E MPONI TD.17.22.T.E Addressable Relay II 14 TD.17.24.T.E Breaker Interface Module (BIM) TD.17.26.T.E Advantage Central Monitoring Unit (CMU) TD.17.28.T.E IMPCABLE 16 17 Polyethylene Insulator Further Information TD17B.01.T.E 15 Drain Wire Conductors Pricing Information Price and Availability Digest (PAD) Vista/VISTALINE™ Discount Symbol C10-S25 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T11-26 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Programmable Logic Controllers Programmable Logic Controllers 12 Programmable Logic Controllers Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D32LT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product History Time Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Discontinued Products—Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100/110 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D120 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MPC1 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D500 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Support Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pricing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T12-2 V12-T12-2 V12-T12-2 V12-T12-2 V12-T12-3 V12-T12-3 V12-T12-3 V12-T12-3 V12-T12-4 V12-T12-4 V12-T12-4 V12-T12-4 V12-T12-4 V12-T12-4 V12-T12-4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T12-1 12 Programmable Logic Controllers 1 Programmable Logic Controllers 2 Product Description D32LT 3 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 The company has offered programmable controller products since the early 1970s. These products have been marketed under several trade names such as Numa-Logic and model names such as D100. 4 5 Product History D32LT Cutler-Hammer® D32LT from Eaton’s electrical business handles applications that are too large for a D50 but don’t quite need the power and performance of the D320. The D32LT is expandable up to 256 I/O points, capable of handling analog, digital, high speed inputs and outputs making the D32LT one of the more versatile PLCs on the market. With access to the real-time clock, 8 PID loops and two communication ports allow you to interface with multiple networks including Modbus® RTU, ASCII, binary, or interface to a RS-232 to Ethernet adapter. Westinghouse entered the solid-state logic and control business with the NumaLogic 300 series products. The 300 series was a set of hardwired logic components that could be custom wired to perform the desired logic functions. Westinghouse NL-500 The Numa-Logic 500 was a remote I/O system that consisted of a “master” chassis and a “slave” chassis connected by a single twisted pair cable. Signals entered into one chassis would be repeated over the twisted pair and made available as a signal at the opposite chassis. 14 Chronology 1975 through 1980 (largely superseded by remote I/O capabilities of PC700 and PC900). 15 Replacement D320 Remote I/O PLC. 13 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 D320 D320 The D320 PLC delivers superior processing power, modular flexibility, enhanced scan speed, and advanced functions and communications capabilities with a combination of 2K program memory, up to 2048 I/O expansion points, real-time clock functionality and PID loop control capability. I/O modules cover all standard control voltages and current ranges for both digital and analog signals. Special function modules provide an array of specific-purpose solutions, such as networking and remote I/O applications. Note: NL-500 is different than PC-500. Westinghouse PC-900 The PC-900 programmable controller supported up to 128 digital and 16 analog I/O, either local or remote with up to 3.5K of memory. Chronology 1981 through 1998. Replacement D32LT PLC. Westinghouse PC-1100/1200/1250 This family of programmable controllers featured built in LAN, PID functions and supported up to 16K memory. Chronology 1982 through 1998. Replacement Direct replacement unavailable, best replacement D32LT or D320 PLC. Westinghouse I/O Plus Operator interface that was originally manufactured by Cincinnati Electrosystems and brand-labeled with the Westinghouse logo for Westinghouse. Chronology 1989 through 1992. Replacement No direct replacement available, but the PanelMate product family provides far more functionality. Westinghouse PC-700 The PC-700 was a programmable controller that supported up to 256 digital and 32 analog I/O, either local or remote with up 8K of memory. Westinghouse PC50/55 Programmable controller manufactured by Siemens® (S5-90, S5-95 for PC50 and PC55, respectively) and brand-labeled with Westinghouse logo for Westinghouse. Chronology 1980 through 1998. Chronology 1992 through 1994. Replacement D32LT PLC. Replacement Siemens still offers replacement parts for this system. Westinghouse PC-500 Programmable controller manufactured by Siemens (S5-100U, S5-102U, S5-103 for PC500, PC502 and PC503 respectively) and brandlabeled with Westinghouse logo for Westinghouse. Chronology 1988 through 1997. Replacement Siemens still offers replacement parts for this system. Westinghouse PC-2000 Programmable controller manufactured by Siemens (S5-115U) and brand-labeled with Westinghouse logo for Westinghouse. Chronology 1988 through 1997. Replacement Siemens still offers replacement parts for this system. Eaton entered the market with its first programmable control in 1977. The unit was called the D120 and was a true programmable control with no hardwiring required. Many models have been introduced since then. Today, three PLC product families are available: D50, D32LT and D320. One software package can program each of these platforms. Contact your local Eaton salesperson or distributor for more details. 23 24 25 V12-T12-2 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Programmable Logic Controllers 12 Product History Time Line Page Product 1965 1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 1 2000 Present 2 Westinghouse PC50/55 V12-T12-3 Westinghouse NL100/110 V12-T12-3 Westinghouse NL300 V12-T12-4 Westinghouse PC400 V12-T12-2 Westinghouse NL500 3 4 Westinghouse PC700 5 Westinghouse PC900 Westinghouse PC1100 6 Westinghouse PC1200/1250 Westinghouse PC1500/1700 7 Westinghouse PC500 Westinghouse PC2000 8 Westinghouse I/O Plus V12-T12-4 Cutler-Hammer D120 V12-T12-4 Cutler-Hammer MPC1 9 Cutler-Hammer D100 V12-T12-4 10 Cutler-Hammer D500 Cutler-Hammer D200 11 Cutler-Hammer D50 Cutler-Hammer D300 V12-T12-2 Cutler-Hammer D320 V12-T12-2 Cutler-Hammer D32LT Replacement Capabilities Discontinued Products 100/110 Series 100/110 Series The Numa-Logic 100/110 Series, known as “the Pico,” consisted of the PC-100 and PC-110 models. Both products were “brick” style PLCs and provided a small number of digital inputs and outputs mounted in the same enclosure as the processor. Various styles offered the ability to select the type and amount of l/O required. I/O expanders were available to expand the l/O capacity. 12 13 All 300 Series components can be identified by catalog numbers of NL-3XX. 300 Series Chronology The 100/110 Series PLCs were offered as current product from 1981 until 1989. In 1989 the product was discontinued. Replacement No direct replacement available, contact a local Eaton salesperson or distributor about upgrading to a D50, D32LT or D320 PLC. 300 Series The Numa-Logic 300 Series was Westinghouse’s original solid-state controls offering. The 300 Series consisted of printed circuit boards (modules) that performed specific logic functions (AND, OR, NOT, etc.). These modules could then be custom wired by the user to perform the required control functions. Chronology The Numa-Logic 300 Series products were manufactured by Westinghouse beginning in the early 1970s and continuing until 1988. Replacement products are currently available from Instrument Specialties, Inc. Replacement For replacement of the 300 Series, contact: Instrument Specialties, Inc. 248-542-5640 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T12-3 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Programmable Logic Controllers 400 Series The Numa-Logic 400 Series was Westinghouse’s first PLC offering. After being manufactured for twoyears, the 400 Series was replaced by the 700 Series of products. Few, if any, 400 Series systems remain in service today. Chronology The 400 Series was manufactured by Westinghouse in Madison Heights, Ml from 1975 until 1978. The product was no longer manufactured after 1979. 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 ATS Inc. Peoria, lL 1-800-328-7287 MPC1 Series D120 Series D500 Series The D500 family of PLCs consisted of several l/O cards and the racks used to mount them. The D500 was a full function programmable logic controller offering all of the capabilities of larger frame PLCs in a compact, economical, space-saving design. Product Support Services Technical Application Assistance Eaton can provide technical application assistance via the Technical Resource Center. Available by telephone, Eaton personnel quickly respond to customer needs, including troubleshooting, analyzing system operation, and coordinating component repair or replacement. The Technical Resource Center can be reached at: 1-800-356-1243 Further Information Publication Number CA08100011E Chronology The Cutler-Hammer D500 products were offered from 1985 through 1994. MPC1 Series D120 Series D500 Series Replacement For replacements of the D120 products, contact: Replacement No direct replacement available, contact a local Eaton salesperson or distributor about upgrading to a D50, D32LT or D320 PLC. 11 15 Chronology The Cutler-Hammer D120 products were offered from 1976 through 1983. The MPC1 was a complete PLC system for applications up to 128 I/O. Programmed in easily understood relay ladder logic with digital and analog capabilities. Analog processor has the same functions as the discrete version and supports “intelligent” analog input and output modules. The D120 family of PLCs consisted of several l/O cards and the racks used to mount them. Chronology The Cutler-Hammer MPC1 products were offered from 1983 through 1993. The self-contained troubleshooting was identical in concept to the buzzer and jumpers common to relay controls. The D120 requires no new language. It utilizes decimal numbering and memory size is determined simply by adding all elements on the ladder diagram. Replacement For replacements of the MPC1 products, contact: Replacement or parts are no longer available for D500 products. Description Volume 9—OEM Product Guide Pricing Information Vista/VISTALINE™ Discount Symbol 2CD-3. ICS Inc. Decatur, lL 217-422-6700 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T12-4 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Motor Control Motor Control 13 Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjustable Frequency AC Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starters (Medium Voltage). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-2 V12-T13-69 V12-T13-73 V12-T13-84 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-1 13 Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes 1 Contents 2 Pre 3-Star Product History Time Line, Replacement Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-4 3-Star Product History Time Line, Replacement Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-5 Citation Product History Time Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-6 Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-7 Type N Product History Time Line, Replacement Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-22 A200 Product History Time Line, Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-23 Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-26 A202 Product History Time Line, Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-33 V201 and V200 Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-36 Freedom Product Description, Product History Time Line . . . V12-T13-37 Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-38 Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-46 IT. Electromechanical NEMA Product Description, Product History Time Line, Replacement Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . V12-T13-47 IT. Electromechanical IEC Product Description, Product History Time Line, Replacement Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . V12-T13-48 XT IEC Power Control Product Description, Product History Time Line, Replacement Capabilities, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-49 Advantage Product Description, Product History Time Line, Replacement Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . V12-T13-51 Definite Purpose Product History Time Line, Replacement Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-52 JF Autostarter Product History Time Line, Replacement Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-53 ME and MD dc Contactors Product Description, Product History, Product History Time Line, Replacement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-54 Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12-T13-57 C80 Mill Type dc Contactors Product Description, Product History Time Line, Replacement Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . V12-T13-58 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Description 24 Page Description Page 511 AC and DC Brakes Product Description, Product History Time Line, Replacement Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . .V12-T13-61 DPM-Contactor Product Description, Product History Time Line, Replacement Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . .V12-T13-62 AVD-Contactor Product Description, Product History, Product History Time Line, Replacement Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . .V12-T13-63 D-Contactor Product Description, Product History, Product History Time Line, Replacement Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . .V12-T13-64 Reversing/Assignment Contactors Product Description, Product History, Product History Time Line, Replacement Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . .V12-T13-65 P- & S-Contactors Product Description, Product History, Product History Time Line, Replacement Capabilities, Technology Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . .V12-T13-66 Overview Type N Contactor Citation Starter Product Description Cutler-Hammer® Starters and Contactors from Eaton’s electrical business were and are designed to control functions of a connected motor by starting, stopping, reversing, regulating and protecting. When functions do not include speed regulation, this device is known as a starter rather than a controller. Applications for starter functions are fans, pumps, constant horsepower, constant or variable torque machine tools, constant torque metalworking machinery, variable torque and horsepower fans and blowers, constant power heating, lighting, pumps and motors for all types of applications. 25 V12-T13-2 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes 13 Product History Freedom IT. The Cutler-Hammer line of contactors and starters dates back to the early 1920s in Milwaukee, WI. Changes in coil construction, making the first moisture-proof vacuum with impregnated coils, were innovations in this line of contactors and starters manufactured before the 3-Star line (now known as the Pre 3-Star). Eutectic alloy overloads were used later in this design with the design change to the 3-Star line. A few of the new features of the 3-Star line of contactors and starters were the first standard three-coil overload relays, new molding compounds, new metals and cast resin coils. The Type F magnetic contactor is the first magnetically controlled contactor in our Westinghouse® records. It was open in design, simple in construction and was state-of-the-art due to its magnetically controlled armature. The Type F contactor was replaced by the DE-ION® contactor, which featured the Westinghouse trademark DE-ION arc quenching. The DE-ION was followed by the Type DN, Type N and the Type A, today known as the A200. The Type B was developed in the late 1970s and was obsoleted two or three years later. The A200 open control is still a current offering. Prior to 1985, some of the larger sizes (5–9) were known as GCA and GCD. 1 The Citation line of contactors and starters was introduced in 1968 with many new features: the new CI nonwearing totally enclosed permanent air gap magnet structure; dual wound magnet coil with plug-in feature; color coded, twin break dust-safe contacts; and straight-through wiring. Although the Citation line was obsoleted in 1997, replacement contact kits, magnet coils and heater coils will continue to be available. 2 3 4 5 6 7 Today, the Freedom™ contactor, launched in 1986, coexists with the solid-state heaterless IT. contactor, a microprocessor-controlled magnetic contactor introduced in 2002. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-3 13 1 2 Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes Pre 3-Star Product History Time Line for Pre 3-Star, Bulletin 9586 1 Originally a Cutler-Hammer Product 1920 1940 1960 1980 2000 Sizes 00 – 5 3 4 5 Size Size 1 Contactor 6 Replacement Capabilities Technology Upgrades There are no replacement parts available. Replace with new contactor or starter. Size 00–3—Freedom or IT. Sizes 4–5—Freedom, Vacuum or IT. Note 1 For all NEMA® rated starters, please contact Standard Open Control Aftermarket at 1-800-535-8992. 7 8 9 10 Size 2 Contactor 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Size 5 Contactor Parts are no longer available for Pre-3 Star. 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T13-4 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Present 13 Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes 3-Star Originally a Cutler-Hammer Product Product History Time Line for 3-Star, Bulletin 9560, 9586, 9589, 9591, 9556, 9658, 9736 and 9739 1 Size 1950 1955 1960 1965 1970 1975 1985 2000 1 Present 2 Size 0 3 Size 1 Size 2 4 Size 3 Size 4 5 Size 5 Typical Size 0—Starter Replacement Capabilities Technology Upgrades There are no replacement parts available. Replace with new contactor or starter. Sizes 00–3—Freedom or IT. Sizes 4–5—Freedom, Vacuum or IT. 6 7 8 Note 1 For all NEMA rated Bulletin 9586 starters, please contact Standard Open Control Aftermarket at 1-800-535-8992. 9 10 11 Typical Size 1—Contactor 12 13 14 15 16 Typical Size 5—Starter 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-5 13 1 Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes Citation Originally a Cutler-Hammer Product 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Catalog Number 9 10 11 12 Coil 1 Series Product History Time Line for Citation A10, A11, A13, A30, A31, A40, A41, A50, A51, A70, A71, A80, A81, B10, B11, B50, B51, B52, C10, C30 and C50 NEMA Size Series Size 00 1965 1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 A1 B1 C1 D1 14 Size 0 A1 Size 1 A1 15 Size 2 A1 16 Size 3 A1 17 Size 4 A1 18 Size 5 A1 Size 6 A1 B1 B1 B1 B1 19 C1 Size 7 A1 Size 8 A1 B1 21 22 Contact Kit Citation Starter and Nameplate 13 20 Parts Publication B1 Note 1 Although the number “9” is not imprinted on the coil, it must be used when ordering. For example, the proper ordering number for a 120V, 60 Hz, AC magnet coil would be 9-1887-1 (refer to the style numbers on Page V12-T13-7). 23 24 25 V12-T13-6 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Present 13 Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes Replacement Capabilities 1 Replacement Capabilities—Contacts and Coils Style and Part Numbers Coil Suffix Size 00 Size 00 Size 00 Size 00 Series A1 1 Series B1 Series C1 Series D1 — 6-21 2 2 2 6-22 Three-pole without interlock — 6-21-2 2 2 2 6-22-2 6-23-2 6-24-2 6-34-2 6-25-2 6-35-2 Three-pole with interlock — 6-21-3 2 2 — — — — — — — Description Size 0 Size 1 Size 2 Size 2 Size 3 Size 3 Series A1 Series B1 Series A1 Series B1 6-24 6-34 6-25 6-35 Contact Kits 3 4 Part number on contactor or starter nameplate Two-pole without interlock 2 6-23 5 Four-pole without interlock — — — — — 6-22-3 6-23-3 — 6-34-3 — — Five-pole without interlock — — — — — 6-22-4 6-23-4 — 6-34-4 — — 6 120V, 60 Hz or 110V, 50 Hz A 9-1945-1 9-2183-1 9-2650-1 9-2823-1 9-1887-1 9-1887-1 9-1889-1 9-2526-1 9-1891-1 9-1889-1 7 240V, 60 Hz or 220V, 50 Hz B 9-1945-2 9-2183-2 9-2650-2 9-2823-2 9-1887-2 9-1887-2 9-1889-2 9-2526-2 9-1891-2 9-1889-2 480V, 60 Hz or 440V, 50 Hz C 9-1945-3 9-2183-5 9-2650-3 9-2823-3 9-1887-3 9-1887-3 9-1889-3 9-2526-3 9-1891-3 9-1889-3 600V, 60 Hz or 550V, 50 Hz D 9-1945-4 9-2183-19 9-2650-4 9-2823-4 9-1887-4 9-1887-4 9-1889-4 9-2526-4 9-1891-4 9-1889-4 208V, 60 Hz E 9-1945-5 9-2183-17 9-2650-5 9-2823-5 9-1887-5 9-1887-5 9-1889-13 9-2526-5 9-1891-13 9-1889-13 24V, 60 Hz T 9-1945-8 9-2183-16 9-2650-7 9-2823-18 9-1887-7 9-1887-7 9-1889-20 9-2526-6 9-1891-15 9-1889-20 Magnet Coils 380V, 50 Hz L 9-1945-6 9-2183-3 9-2650-6 9-2421-18 3 9-1887-8 9-1887-8 9-1889-14 9-2526-7 9-1891-14 9-1889-14 277V, 60 Hz H 9-1945-16 9-2183-18 9-2650-13 9-2823-12 9-1887-16 9-1887-16 9-1889-31 9-2526-15 9-1891-26 9-1889-31 120 Vdc 4 A1 — — — — 9-2024-2 9-2024-2 9-2025-2 9-2626-2 9-2026-2 9-2025-2 240 Vdc 4 B1 — — — — 9-2024-1 9-2024-1 9-2025-1 9-2626-1 9-2026-1 9-2025-1 24 Vdc 4 T1 — — — — 9-2024-4 9-2024-4 9-2025-4 9-2626-4 9-2026-4 9-2025-4 48 Vdc 4 W1 — — — — 9-2024-3 9-2024-3 9-2025-3 9-2626-3 9-2026-3 9-2025-3 9-2823-17 Style and Part Numbers Description Size 4 Size 4 Series A1 Series B1 Size 5 9 10 11 12 13 Replacement Capabilities—Contacts and Coils, continued Coil Suffix 8 Size 6 Size 6 Size 6 Size 7 Size 7 Size 8 Size 8 Series A1 Series B1 Series C1 Series A1 Series B1 Series A1 Series B1 14 15 Contact Kits Part number on contactor or starter nameplate Two-pole — 6-26 6-36-3 6-27 6-28 — 6-601-2 6-28 — — — Three-pole — 6-26-2 6-36-4 6-27-2 6-28-2 6-570 6-601 6-28-2 6-570 646C829G05 6-571 120V, 60 Hz or 110V, 50 Hz A 9-1891-1 9-1891-1 9-1891-1 9-1875-1 9-2651 9-2698 9-1875-1 9-2651 438C805G12 9-2654 240V, 60 Hz or 220V, 50 Hz B 9-1891-2 9-1891-2 9-1891-2 9-1875-2 9-2651-2 9-2698-2 9-1875-2 9-2651-2 438C805G11 9-2654-2 480V, 60 Hz or 440V, 50 Hz C 9-1891-3 9-1891-3 9-1891-3 9-1875-3 9-2651-3 9-2698-3 9-1875-3 9-2651-3 438C805G10 9-2654-3 600V, 60 Hz or 550V, 50 Hz D 9-1891-4 9-1891-4 9-1891-4 9-1875-4 9-2651-4 9-2698-4 9-1875-4 9-2651-4 — 9-2654-4 208V, 60 Hz E 9-1891-13 9-1891-13 9-1891-13 9-1875-14 9-2651-6 9-2698-5 9-1875-14 9-2651-6 438C805G11 9-2654-6 24V, 60 Hz T 9-1891-15 9-1891-15 9-1891-15 — — — — — — — 380V, 50 Hz L 9-1891-14 9-1891-14 9-1891-14 — 9-2651-5 9-2698-6 — 9-2651-5 438C805G15 9-2654-5 277V, 60 Hz H 9-1891-26 9-1891-26 9-1891-26 — — — — — — — 120 Vdc 4 A1 9-2026-2 9-2026-2 9-2026-2 — — — — — — — 240 Vdc 4 B1 9-2026-1 9-2026-1 9-2026-1 — — — — — — — 24 Vdc 4 T1 9-2026-4 9-2026-4 9-2026-4 — — — — — — — 48 Vdc 4 W1 9-2026-3 9-2026-3 9-2026-3 — — — — — — — Magnet Coils 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Notes 1 Citation overload relays are no longer available. A Freedom overload may be an option. Contact Control Aftermarket at 1-800-535-8992. 2 Replace complete contactor. 3 Non-encapsulated coil. 4 For use in existing DC operated devices. Not for conversion of existing AC operated devices to DC. 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-7 13 Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes 1 2 3 4 5 Three-Pole Contact Kit, Size 3, Series B1 Magnet Coil, 120V/60 Hz for Size 3, Series A1 Three-Pole Contact Kit, Size 5 Replacement Capabilities—Overload Relays Style and Part Numbers 6 7 8 9 10 Size 00 Size 00 Size 00 Size 00 Series A1 Series B1 Series C1 Series D1 Standard trip (Class 20) Eutectic — 1 Element 3 Element 3 Element with alarm circuit 1 1 1 1 1 Slow trip (Class 30) Eutectic — 1 Element 3 Element 1 1 1 1 Description Size 0 Size 1 Size 2 Size 2 Size 3 Size 3 Series A1 Series B1 Series A1 Series B1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overload Relays Without mounting plates— for replacement on existing starters 11 Replacement Thermal Elements Standard trip eutectic 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 12 Slow trip eutectic 10-5018 3 10-5018 3 10-5018 3 10-5018 3 10-5018 3 10-5018 3 10-5018 3 10-5018 3 10-5018 3 10-5018 3 13 Replacement Capabilities—Overload Relays, continued Style and Part Numbers 14 Description 15 Without mounting plates— for replacement on existing starters 16 17 Size 4 Size 4 Series A1 Series B1 1 1 Standard trip (Class 20) Eutectic — 1 Element 3 Element 3 Element with alarm circuit 2 Slow trip eutectic 10-5018 19 — 23 24 1 2 Current transformer 22 Size 6 Size 6 Size 7 Size 7 Size 8 Size 8 Series A1 Series B1 Series C1 Series A1 Series B1 Series A1 Series B1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 — — — — — — — — 42-3418-3 4 42-3418-3 4 — — — — Replacement Thermal Elements Standard trip eutectic 21 Size 6 Overload Relays 18 20 Size 5 Technology Upgrades Sizes 00–3—Freedom or IT. Sizes 4–6—Freedom, Vacuum or IT. Sizes 7–8—Freedom Adapter Plates The adapter plates make it possible to replace a Citation starter with a Freedom or Advantage starter and the same mounting holes can be used. 3 10-5018 — 2 3 10-5018 — 3 Notes 1 Citation overload relays are no longer available. Replace with up-to-date starter, or contact Standard Open Control Aftermarket at 1-800-535-8992 to determine Freedom overload relay compatibility. 2 No longer available. Replace with up-todate overload relay or starter. 3 Will no longer be available once stock is depleted. If stock is out, replace with up-to-date overload relay or starter. 4 On Vista; no price. Adapter Plates Ordering Information NEMA Size Adapter Plate Catalog Number Freedom Advantage 00, 0 C321CMP0 — 1 C321CMP1 WBASE12 2 C321CMP2 WBASE 12 3 C321CMP3 WBASE 34 4 C321CMP4 WBASE 34 5 C321CMP5 — 25 V12-T13-8 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 13 Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes Heaters Heater Selection Index Overload relays do not include heaters. Please see table for heater element index. Note: Use this index to cross-reference tables on Pages V12-T13-9 through V12-T13-21. 1 Index of Overload Relay Heater Selection Tables 2 Heater Selection For Replacement in Existing Applications Only Heaters are rated to protect 40°C rise of motors; and, open and drip-proof motors having a service factor of 1.15 where the motor and the controller are at the same ambient temperature. Starter Type Catalog Prefix Type A10 Open ST-1 ST-3 ST-5 ST-7 ST-16 ST-10 ST-11 ST-12 Enclosed ST-2 ST-4 ST-6 ST-7 ST-16 ST-10 ST-11 ST-12 A11 A13 For other conditions: 1. For 50°C, 55°C and 75°C (122°F, 131°F and 167°F) rise motors and enclosed motors having a service factor of 1.0, select one size smaller. 2. Ambient temperature of the starter lower than the motor by 26°C (79°F), use one size smaller. 3. Ambient temperature of the starter higher than the motor by 26°C (79°F), use one size larger. Ultimate tripping current of heaters is approximately 1.25 times the minimum current rating listed in the tables. Heater Selection Table Number 3 NEMA Size of Starter 00-0-1 (1-1/2) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Open BNC-1 BNC-3 BNC-5 BNC-7 BNC-9 — — — Enclosed BNC-2 BNC-4 BNC-6 BNC-7 BNC-9 — — — Open LT-2 LT-4 LT-6 LT-7 LT-8 — — — Enclosed LT-1 LT-3 LT-5 LT-7 LT-8 — — — A30 and A40 Enclosed ST-9 ST-3 ST-6 ST-7 ST-16 ST-10 ST-11 ST-12 A31 and A41 Enclosed BNC-8 BNC-3 BNC-6 BNC-7 BNC-9 — — — A50 Open ST-1 ST-3 ST-5 ST-7 ST-16 ST-10 ST-11 ST-12 Enclosed ST-2 ST-4 ST-6 ST-7 ST-16 ST-10 ST-11 ST-12 A51 Open BNC-1 BNC-3 BNC-5 BNC-7 BNC-9 — — — Enclosed BNC-2 BNC-4 BNC-6 BNC-7 BNC-9 — — — A70 and A80 Enclosed ST-9 ST-3 ST-6 ST-7 ST-16 ST-10 ST-11 ST-12 A71 and A81 Enclosed BNC-8 BNC-3 BNC-5 BNC-7 BNC-9 — — — A400-A420 Enclosed — — ST-14 ST-15 ST-16 ST-10 ST-11 ST-12 A460 1 Enclosed ST-2 1 ST-4 1 ST-6 1 ST-7 1 ST-16 1 ST-10 1 ST-11 1 ST-12 1 A490 2 Enclosed ST-2 2 ST-4 2 ST-6 2 ST-7 2 ST-16 2 ST-10 2 ST-11 2 ST-12 2 A700 Open ST-1 ST-3 ST-5 ST-7 ST-16 — — — Enclosed ST-2 ST-4 ST-6 ST-7 ST-16 ST-10 — — A800-A803 Enclosed ST-9 ST-3 ST-5 ST-7 ST-16 ST-10 ST-11 — A804-A806 Enclosed ST-9 ST-3 ST-5 — — — — — A808-A809 Enclosed — ST-13 ST-5 ST-5 — — — — B10 and B50 Enclosed ST-1 ST-3 ST-5 ST-7 — — — — B11 and B51 Open BNC-1 — — — — — — — Enclosed BNC-2 BNC-3 BNC-5 — — — — — C300 Open and enclosed ST-1 ST-3 ST-5 ST-7 — — — — C301 Open and enclosed BNC-1 BNC-4 BNC-5 BNC-7 — — — — C303 Open and enclosed LT-2 LT-4 LT-6 LT-7 — — — — Notes 1 Select heaters for 50% of rated full load current. 2 Select heaters for 68% of rated full load current. 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton. 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-9 13 1 2 3 4 5 Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes Overload Relay Heater Selection Tables Type ST Standard Trip Eutectic Alloy For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor. Table ST-1 Table ST-2 Table ST-3 Table ST-4 Table ST-5 NEMA Sizes 00, 0, 1, 1-1/2 NEMA Sizes 00, 0, 1, 1-1/2 NEMA Size 2 NEMA Size 2 NEMA Size 3 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A10, A50, A460 1, A490 2, A700 For Open Type Catalog Prefix A10, A50, A700, B10, C300 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix B10, C300, A30, A40, A70, A80, A800-A803 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A10, A50, A460 1, A490 2, A700 For Open Type Catalog Prefix A10, A50, A700, B10, C300 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A70, A80, A800-A803, A808-A809, B10 For Open Type Catalog Prefix A10, A50, A700, B10, B50, C300 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix B10, B50, C300 Heater Ampere Range Heater Catalog Number 6 0.167–0.187 0.155–0.173 — — — H1101 0.188–0.210 0.174–0.195 — — — H1102 7 0.211–0.237 0.196–0.220 — — — H1103 0.238–0.266 0.221–0.247 — — — H1104 0.267–0.298 0.248–0.278 — — — H1105 0.299–0.334 0.279–0.310 — — — H1106 0.335–0.376 0.311–0.349 — — — H1107 0.377–0.422 0.350–0.391 — — — H1108 0.423–0.474 0.392–0.441 — — — H1109 10 0.475–0.532 0.442–0.495 — — — H1110 0.533–0.598 0.496–0.555 — — — H1111 11 0.599–0.672 0.556–0.624 — — — H1112 0.673–0.757 0.625–0.703 — — — H1113 12 0.758–0.855 0.704–0.795 — — — H1114 0.865–0.959 0.796–0.895 — — — H1115 13 0.960–1.07 0.896–0.999 — — — H1116 1.08–1.21 1.00–1.12 — — — H1117 14 1.22–1.35 1.13–1.25 — — — H1018 1.36–1.52 1.26–1.41 — — — H1019 1.53–1.70 1.42–1.58 — — — H1020 1.71–1.90 1.59–1.77 — — — H1021 1.91–2.10 1.78–1.96 — — — H1022 2.11–2.33 1.97–2.17 — — — H1023 2.34–2.62 2.18–2.44 — — — H1024 17 2.63–2.93 2.45–2.72 — — — H1025 2.94–3.27 2.73–3.04 — — — H1026 18 3.28–3.64 3.05–3.38 — — — H1066 8 9 15 16 3.65–4.06 3.39–3.73 3.72–4.10 — — H1027 19 4.07–4.55 3.74–4.18 4.11–4.59 3.86–4.31 — H1028 4.56–5.03 4.19–4.63 4.60–5.07 4.32–4.77 — H1029 20 Notes 1 For A460 controllers, select heaters at 50% of rated full load current. 2 For A490 controllers, select heaters at 58% of rated full load current. 21 Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton. 22 23 24 25 V12-T13-10 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes 13 Type ST Standard Trip Eutectic Alloy, continued For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor. Table ST-1 Table ST-2 NEMA Sizes 00, 0, 1, 1-1/2 1 Table ST-3 Table ST-4 Table ST-5 NEMA Sizes 00, 0, 1, 1-1/2 NEMA Size 2 NEMA Size 2 NEMA Size 3 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A10, A50, A460 1, A490 2, A700 For Open Type Catalog Prefix A10, A50, A700, B10, C300 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix B10, C300, A30, A40, A70, A80, A800-A803 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A10, A50, A460 1, A490 2, A700 For Open Type Catalog Prefix A10, A50, A700, B10, C300 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A70, A80, A800-A803, A808-A809, B10 5.04–5.59 4.64–5.15 5.08–5.65 4.78–5.31 5.60–6.25 5.16–5.68 5.66–6.29 6.26–6.92 5.69–6.30 6.93–7.75 6.31–7.05 For Open Type Catalog Prefix A10, A50, A700, B10, B50, C300 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix B10, B50, C300 2 3 Heater Catalog Number 4 — H1030 5.32–5.90 — H1031 5 6.30–7.00 5.91–6.55 — H1032 7.01–7.82 6.56–7.33 — H1033 Heater Ampere Range 7.76–8.63 7.06–7.76 7.83–8.79 7.34–8.15 8.32–9.27 H1034 8.64–9.59 7.77–8.63 8.80–9.67 8.16–9.03 9.28–10.1 H1035 9.60–10.6 8.64–9.51 9.68–10.8 9.04–10.1 10.2–11.4 H1036 10.7–11.9 9.52–10.5 10.9–12.0 10.2–11.2 11.5–12.8 H1037 12.0–13.3 10.6–11.8 12.1–13.4 11.3–12.5 12.9–14.3 H1038 13.4–14.7 11.9–13.1 13.5–14.9 12.6–13.9 14.4–16.0 H1039 14.8–16.6 13.2–14.8 15.0–17.6 14.0–15.7 16.1–17.8 H1040 16.7–18.8 14.9–16.7 17.7–19.0 15.8–17.5 17.9–20.3 H1041 18.9–21.2 16.8–18.9 19.1–21.5 17.6–19.8 20.4–22.9 H1042 21.3–23.9 19.0–21.3 21.6–24.5 19.9–22.3 23.0–26.0 H1043 24.0–27.0 21.4–24.1 24.6–27.9 22.4–25.4 26.1–29.5 H1044 — 24.2–27.0 28.0–32.0 25.5–28.7 29.6–33.5 H1045 — — 32.1–36.6 28.8–32.5 33.6–37.8 H1046 — — 36.7–41.8 32.6–36.6 37.9–42.8 H1047 — — 41.9–45.0 36.7–41.0 42.9–48.5 H1048 — — — 41.1–45.0 48.6–55.1 H1049 — — — — 55.2–62.3 H1050 — — — — 62.4–69.5 H1051 — — — — 69.6–79.1 H1052 — — — — 79.2–90.0 H1054 — — — — — H1055 — — — — — H1056 — — — — — H1057 — — — — — H1058 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Notes 1 For A460 controllers, select heaters at 50% of rated full load current. 2 For A490 controllers, select heaters at 58% of rated full load current. 19 Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton. 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-11 13 Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes 1 Type ST Standard Trip Eutectic Alloy, continued For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor. 2 Table ST-6 Table ST-7 Table ST-8 Table ST-9 Table ST-10 NEMA Size 3 NEMA Size 4 NEMA Size 5 NEMA Size 0 and 1 NEMA Size 6 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A10, A30, A40, A50, A460 1, A490 2, A700 For Open Type Catalog Prefix A10, A50, C300 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A10, A30, A40, A50, A70, A80, A460 1, A490 2, A700, A800-A803 For Open and Enclosed Catalog Prefix A10, A50, A30-40, A70, A80, A400, A410, A420, A460, A490, A800-A801 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A30, A40, A70, A80, A800-A803 For Open Type Catalog Prefix A10, A50, A700 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A10, A30, A40, A50, A70, A80, A400, A460 1, A490 2, A700 — — — 0.164–0.183 — H1101 — — — 0.184–0.205 — H1102 — — — 0.206–0.232 — H1103 — — — 0.233–0.260 — H1104 — — — 0.261–0.293 — H1105 — — — 0.294–0.328 — H1106 8 — — — 0.329–0.369 — H1107 — — — 0.370–0.414 — H1108 9 — — — 0.415–0.465 — H1109 — — — 0.466–0.522 — H1110 10 — — — 0.523–0.586 — H1111 — — — 0.587–0.659 — H1112 — — — 0.660–0.743 — H1113 — — — 0.744–0.839 — H1114 — — — 0.840–0.943 — H1115 — — — 0.944–1.05 — H1116 — — — 1.06–1.17 — H1117 13 — — — 1.18–1.31 — H1018 — — — 1.32–1.47 154–171 H1019 14 — — 92–101 1.48–1.66 172–192 H1020 — — 102–113 1.67–1.85 193–215 H1021 — — 114–125 1.86–2.04 216–237 H1022 — — 126–139 2.05–2.26 238–263 H1023 — — 140–157 2.27–2.54 264–295 H1024 — — 158–175 2.55–2.85 296–330 H1025 — — 176–196 2.86–3.18 331–369 H1026 17 — — 197–218 3.19–3.53 370–410 H1066 — — 219–243 3.54–3.95 411–458 H1027 18 — — 244–270 3.96–4.41 459–512 H1028 — — — 4.42–4.88 513–574 H1029 19 Notes 1 For A460 controllers, select heaters for 50% of rated full load current. 2 For A490 controllers, select heaters for 58% of rated full load current. 20 Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton. 3 4 5 6 7 11 12 15 16 Heater Ampere Range 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T13-12 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Heater Catalog Number Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes 13 Type ST Standard Trip Eutectic Alloy, continued For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor. 1 Table ST-6 Table ST-7 Table ST-8 Table ST-9 Table ST-10 NEMA Size 3 NEMA Size 4 NEMA Size 5 NEMA Size 0 and 1 NEMA Size 6 2 For Open Type Catalog Prefix A10, A50, C300 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A10, A30, A40, A50, A70, A80, A460 1, A490 2, A700, A800-A803 For Open and Enclosed Catalog Prefix A10, A50, A30-40, A70, A80, A400, A410, A420, A460, A490, A800-A801 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A30, A40, A70, A80, A800-A803 For Open Type Catalog Prefix A10, A50, A700 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A10, A30, A40, A50, A70, A80, A400, A460 1, A490 2, A700 — — — 4.89–5.42 — H1030 — — — 4.89–5.42 — H1031 — — — 6.08–6.64 — H1032 — — — 6.65–7.43 — H1033 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A10, A30, A40, A50, A460 1, A490 2, A700 Heater Ampere Range 3 Heater Catalog Number 8.24–9.19 — — 7.44–8.23 — H1034 9.20–10.1 — — 8.24–9.19 — H1035 10.2–11.3 — — 9.20–10.1 — H1036 11.4–12.7 — — 10.2–11.3 — H1037 12.8–14.1 — — 11.4–12.6 — H1038 14.2–15.8 — — 12.7–14.0 — H1039 15.9–17.7 — — 14.1–15.7 — H1040 17.8–20.1 — — 15.8–17.7 — H1041 20.2–22.7 20.6–23.3 — 17.8–19.8 — H1042 22.8–25.5 23.4–26.3 — 19.9–22.0 — H1043 25.6–28.9 26.4–30.8 — 22.1–24.9 — H1044 29.0–32.5 30.9–34.0 — 25.0–27.0 — H1045 32.6–36.7 34.1–38.3 — — — H1046 36.8–41.0 38.4–43.4 — — — H1047 41.1–46.0 43.5–49.3 — — — H1048 46.1–51.8 49.4–55.8 — — — H1049 51.9–58.6 55.9–63.1 — — — H1050 58.7–64.6 63.2–70.4 — — — H1051 64.7–72.7 70.5–79.9 — — — H1052 72.8–83.1 80.0–92.7 — — — H1054 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Notes 1 For A460 controllers, select heaters for 50% of rated full load current. 2 For A490 controllers, select heaters for 58% of rated full load current. 17 Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton. 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-13 13 Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes 1 Type ST Standard Trip Eutectic Alloy, continued For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor. 2 Table ST-11 Table ST-12 Table ST-13 Table ST-14 Table ST-15 NEMA Size 7 NEMA Size 8 NEMA Size 2 NEMA Size 3 NEMA Size 4 For Open Type Catalog Prefix A10, A50, A700 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A10, A30, A40, A50, A70, A80, A400, A460 1, A490 2, A700 For Open Type Catalog Prefix A10, A50, A700 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A10, A30, A40, A50, A70, A80, A400, A460 1, A490 2, A700 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A808, A809 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A400 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A400 Heater Catalog Number 3 4 Heater Ampere Range 5 — — — — — H1101 — — — — — H1102 6 — — — — — H1103 — — — — — H1104 7 — — — — — H1105 — — — — — H1106 — — — — — H1107 — — — — — H1108 — — — — — H1109 — — — — — H1110 — — — — — H1111 10 — — — — — H1112 — — — — — H1113 11 — — — — — H1114 — — — — — H1115 — — — — — H1116 — — — — — H1117 229–255 — — — — H1018 256–287 384–429 — — — H1019 288–321 430–482 — — — H1020 14 322–359 483–538 — — — H1021 360–397 539–595 — — — H1022 15 398–439 596–657 — — — H1023 440–492 658–741 — — — H1024 16 493–551 742–827 — — — H1025 552–615 828–924 — — — H1026 17 616–685 925–1027 — — — H1066 1028–1147 — — — H1027 18 764–855 1148–1285 3.89–4.35 — — H1028 — — 4.36–4.81 — — H1029 19 Notes 1 For A460 controllers, select heaters for 50% of rated full load current. 2 For A490 controllers, select heaters for 58% of rated full load current. 8 9 12 13 20 686–763 Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton. 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T13-14 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes 13 Type ST Standard Trip Eutectic Alloy, continued For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor. Table ST-11 1 Table ST-12 Table ST-13 Table ST-14 Table ST-15 NEMA Size 7 NEMA Size 8 NEMA Size 2 NEMA Size 3 NEMA Size 4 For Open Type Catalog Prefix A10, A50, A700 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A10, A30, A40, A50, A70, A80, A400, A460 1, A490 2, A700 For Open Type Catalog Prefix A10, A50, A700 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A10, A30, A40, A50, A70, A80, A400, A460 1, A490 2, A700 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A808, A809 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A400 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A400 Heater Catalog Number 4 — — 4.82–5.35 — — H1030 — — 5.36–5.96 — — H1031 5 — — 5.97–6.63 — — H1032 — — 6.64–7.41 — — H1033 — — 7.42–8.23 7.84–8.71 — H1034 — — 8.24–9.19 8.72–9.67 — H1035 — — 9.20–10.2 9.68–10.8 — H1036 — — 10.3–11.4 10.9–12.0 — H1037 — — 11.5–12.8 12.1–13.5 — H1038 — — 12.9–14.1 13.6–15.0 — H1039 — — 14.2–15.9 15.1–16.8 — H1040 2 3 Heater Ampere Range — — 16.0–18.1 16.9–19.1 — H1041 — — 18.2–20.4 19.2–21.6 19.5–21.9 H1042 — — 20.5–23.3 21.7–24.5 22.0–24.7 H1043 — — 23.4–26.5 24.6–27.8 24.8–29.0 H1044 — — 26.6–30.3 27.9–31.5 29.1–31.9 H1045 — — 30.4–34.7 31.6–35.5 32.0–36.1 H1046 — — 34.8–39.6 35.6–40.3 36.2–40.7 H1047 — — 39.7–45.0 40.4–45.6 40.8–46.2 H1048 — — — 45.7–51.8 46.3–52.4 H1049 — — — 51.9–58.6 52.5–59.2 H1050 — — — 58.7–65.2 59.3–66.3 H1051 — — — 65.3–74.3 66.4–75.1 H1052 — — — 74.4–86.3 75.2–87.1 H1054 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Notes 1 For A460 controllers, select heaters for 50% of rated full load current. 2 For A490 controllers, select heaters for 58% of rated full load current. 16 Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton. 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-15 13 1 2 3 Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes Type BNC Bimetal For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor. Table BNC-1 Table BNC-2 Table BNC-3 Table BNC-4 NEMA Sizes 00, 0, 1, 1-1/2 NEMA Sizes 00, 0, 1, 1-1/2 NEMA Size 2 NEMA Size 2 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A11, A51, B11, B51 For Open Type Catalog Prefix A11, A51, B11, C301 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A31, A41, A71, A81, B11 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A11, A51, C301 Heater Catalog Number For Open Type Catalog Prefix A11, A51, B11, B51, C301 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix C301 4 Heater Ampere Range 0.180–0.201 0.167–0.187 — — H1101 5 0.202–0.226 0.188–0.210 — — H1102 0.227–0.254 0.211–0.236 — — H1103 6 0.255–0.285 0.237–0.266 — — H1104 0.286–0.320 0.267–0.297 — — H1105 7 0.321–0.357 0.298–0.332 — — H1106 0.358–0.402 0.333–0.373 — — H1107 0.403–0.451 0.374–0.419 — — H1108 0.452–0.506 0.420–0.470 — — H1109 0.507–0.568 0.471–0.528 — — H1110 0.569–0.638 0.529–0.592 — — H1111 0.639–0.716 0.593–0.663 — — H1112 0.717–0.799 0.664–0.743 — — H1113 0.800–0.911 0.744–0.847 — — H1114 11 0.912–1.01 0.848–0.951 — — H1115 1.02–1.14 0.952–1.06 — — H1116 12 1.15–1.29 1.07–1.20 — — H1117 1.30–1.44 1.21–1.33 — — H1018 13 1.45–1.61 1.34–1.49 — — H1019 1.62–1.80 1.50–1.67 — — H1020 14 1.81–2.03 1.68–1.89 — — H1021 2.04–2.25 1.90–2.09 — — H1022 15 2.26–2.49 2.10–2.32 — — H1023 2.50–2.76 2.33–2.57 — — H1024 16 2.77–3.05 2.58–2.83 — — H1025 3.06–3.39 2.84–3.15 — — H1026 17 3.40–3.83 3.16–3.51 3.87–4.18 — H1066 3.84–4.22 3.52–3.87 4.19–4.60 3.94–4.33 H1027 18 4.23–4.63 3.88–4.25 4.61–5.10 4.34–4.78 H1028 4.64–5.19 4.26–4.76 5.11–5.60 4.79–5.27 H1029 19 Note Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton. 8 9 10 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T13-16 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes 13 Type BNC Bimetal For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor. Table BNC-1 Table BNC-2 NEMA Sizes 00, 0, 1, 1-1/2 1 Table BNC-3 Table BNC-4 NEMA Sizes 00, 0, 1, 1-1/2 NEMA Size 2 NEMA Size 2 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A11, A51, B11, B51 For Open Type Catalog Prefix A11, A51, B11, C301 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A31, A41, A71, A81, B11 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A11, A51, C301 Heater Catalog Number 5.20–5.73 4.77–5.27 5.61–6.20 5.28–5.83 H1030 5.74–6.49 5.28–5.90 6.21–6.92 5.84–6.51 H1031 6.50–7.32 5.91–6.63 6.93–7.76 6.52–7.29 H1032 7.33–8.07 6.64–7.35 7.77–8.63 7.30–8.07 H1033 8.08–9.03 7.36–8.15 8.64–9.67 8.08–9.03 H1034 For Open Type Catalog Prefix A11, A51, B11, B51, C301 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix C301 Heater Ampere Range 2 9.04–9.99 8.16–8.87 9.68–10.5 9.04–9.99 H1035 10.0–11.1 8.88–9.99 10.6–11.8 10.0–11.1 H1036 11.2–12.5 10.0–11.1 11.9–13.2 11.2–12.3 H1037 12.6–14.1 11.2–12.5 13.3–15.0 12.4–14.1 H1038 14.2–15.9 12.6–14.1 15.1–17.2 14.2–16.1 H1039 16.0–18.0 14.2–16.1 17.3–19.1 16.2–17.8 H1040 18.1–19.8 16.2–17.7 19.2–21.5 17.9–19.9 H1041 19.9–22.2 17.8–19.8 21.6–23.6 20.0–21.9 H1042 22.3–25.0 19.9–22.2 23.7–27.0 22.0–24.7 H1043 25.1–27.0 22.3–25.0 27.1–30.6 24.8–27.9 H1044 — 25.1–27.0 30.7–35.1 28.0–31.6 H1045 — — 35.2–39.8 31.7–35.3 H1046 — — 39.9–45.0 35.4–39.4 H1047 — — — 39.5–44.4 H1048 — — — 44.5–45.0 H1049 — — — — H1050 — — — — H1051 — — — — H1052 — — — — H1054 — — — — H1055 — — — — H1056 — — — — H1057 — — — — H1058 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Note Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton. 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-17 13 1 2 3 Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes Type BNC Bimetal, continued For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor. Table BNC-5 Table BNC-6 Table BNC-7 Table BNC-8 Table BNC-9 NEMA Size 3 NEMA Size 3 NEMA Size 4 NEMA Sizes 0 and 1 NEMA Size 5 For Open Type Catalog Prefix A11, A51, C301 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A11, A31, A41, A51, A71, A81 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A31, A41, A71, A81 For Open and Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A11, A31-41, A51, A71, A81 For Open Type Catalog Prefix A11, B11, A51, C301 For Enclosed Type For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A11, A31, Catalog Prefix B11, A71, A81 A41, A51 Heater Catalog Number 4 Heater Ampere Range 5 — — — 0.176–0.198 — H1101 — — — 0.199–0.221 — H1102 6 — — — 0.222–0.249 — H1103 — — — 0.250–0.279 — H1104 — — — 0.280–0.313 — H1105 7 — — — 0.314–0.350 — H1106 8 9 10 — — — 0.351–0.395 — H1107 — — — 0.396–0.442 — H1108 — — — 0.443–0.497 — H1109 — — — 0.498–0.556 — H1110 — — — 0.557–0.626 — H1111 — — — 0.627–0.703 — H1112 H1113 — — — 0.704–0.783 — — — — 0.784–0.895 — H1114 — — — 0.896–0.999 — H1115 12 — — — 1.00–1.12 — H1116 — — — 1.13–1.25 — H1117 13 — — — 1.26–1.40 — H1018 — — — 1.41–1.56 — H1019 14 — — — 1.57–1.74 96.8–108 H1020 — — — 1.75–1.97 109–121 H1021 15 — — — 1.98–2.19 122–135 H1022 — — — 2.20–2.42 136–149 H1023 — — — 2.43–2.68 150–166 H1024 — — — 2.69–2.95 167–182 H1025 — — — 2.96–3.29 183–203 H1026 — — — 3.30–3.72 204–229 H1066 — — — 3.73–4.10 230–253 H1027 — — — 4.11–4.49 254–283 H1028 — — — 4.50–5.04 — H1029 11 16 17 18 19 Note Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton. 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T13-18 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes 13 Type BNC Bimetal, continued For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor. 1 Table BNC-5 Table BNC-6 Table BNC-7 Table BNC-8 Table BNC-9 NEMA Size 3 NEMA Size 3 NEMA Size 4 NEMA Sizes 0 and 1 NEMA Size 5 For Open Type Catalog Prefix A11, A51, C301 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A11, A31, A41, A51, A71, A81 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A31, A41, A71, A81 For Open and Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A11, A31-41, A51, A71, A81 For Open Type Catalog Prefix A11, B11, A51, C301 For Enclosed Type For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A11, A31, Catalog Prefix B11, A71, A81 A41, A51 Heater Ampere Range 2 Heater Catalog Number — — — 5.05–5.56 — H1030 — — — 5.57–6.23 — H1031 — — — 6.24–7.03 — H1032 7.57–8.47 7.57–8.39 — 7.04–7.75 — H1033 8.48–9.35 8.40–9.27 — 7.76–8.71 — H1034 9.36–10.1 9.28–10.1 — 8.72–9.59 — H1035 10.2–11.2 10.2–11.1 — 9.60–10.5 — H1036 11.3–12.2 11.2–12.1 — 10.6–11.8 — H1037 12.3–13.7 12.2–13.6 — 11.9–13.3 — H1038 13.8–15.7 13.7–15.5 — 13.4–14.9 — H1039 15.8–17.3 15.6–17.2 — 15.0–16.9 — H1040 17.4–19.9 17.3–19.8 — 17.0–18.5 — H1041 20.0–22.9 19.9–22.7 20.0–22.9 18.6–20.7 — H1042 23.0–26.4 22.8–26.0 23.0–26.4 20.8–23.0 — H1043 26.5–30.6 26.1–30.0 26.5–30.6 23.1–25.7 — H1044 30.7–35.5 30.1–34.4 30.7–35.5 25.8–27.0 — H1045 35.6–41.2 34.5–39.5 35.6–41.2 — — H1046 41.3–46.5 39.6–44.3 41.3–46.5 — — H1047 46.6–52.4 44.4–49.9 46.6–52.4 — — H1048 52.5–57.8 50.0–54.3 52.5–57.8 — — H1049 57.9–63.6 54.4–59.8 57.9–63.6 — — H1050 63.7–69.9 59.9–65.1 63.7–69.9 — — H1051 70.0–79.5 65.2–73.1 70.0–79.5 — — H1052 79.6–90.0 73.2–83.9 79.6–92.0 — — H1054 Note Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-19 13 1 2 3 4 Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes Type 8LT Slow Trip Eutectic Alloy For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor. Table LT-1 Table LT-2 NEMA Size 00, 0, 1, 1-1/2 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A13 For Open Type Catalog Prefix A13, C303 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix C303 Table LT-3 Table LT-4 Table LT-5 Table LT-6 Table LT-7 Table LT-8 NEMA Size 2 NEMA Size 2 NEMA Size 3 NEMA Size 3 NEMA Size 4 NEMA Size 5 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A13 For Open Type Catalog Prefix A13, C303 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix C303 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A13 For Open Type Catalog Prefix A13, C303 For Open Type Catalog Prefix A13, C303 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A13 Heater Ampere Range For Open and Enclosed Type Heater Catalog Prefix A13 Catalog Number 0.167–0.186 0.167–0.186 — — — — — — H1001 0.187–0.209 0.187–0.209 — — — — — — H1002 0.210–0.233 0.210–0.233 — — — — — — H1003 0.234–0.260 0.234–0.260 — — — — — — H1004 0.261–0.293 0.261–0.293 — — — — — — H1005 7 0.294–0.329 0.294–0.329 — — — — — — H1006 0.330–0.373 0.330–0.373 — — — — — — H1007 8 0.374–0.417 0.374–0.417 — — — — — — H1008 0.418–0.471 0.418–0.471 — — — — — — H1009 9 0.472–0.531 0.472–0.531 — — — — — — H1010 0.532–0.591 0.532–0.591 — — — — — — H1011 10 0.592–0.660 0.592–0.660 — — — — — — H1012 0.661–0.739 0.661–0.739 — — — — — — H1013 11 0.740–0.823 0.740–0.823 — — — — — — H1014 0.824–0.919 0.824–0.919 — — — — — — H1015 12 0.920–1.01 0.920–1.01 — — — — — — H1016 1.02–1.14 1.02–1.14 — — — — — — H1017 13 1.15–1.27 1.15–1.27 — — — — — — H1018 1.28–1.41 1.28–1.41 — — — — — — H1019 14 1.42–1.61 1.42–1.61 — — — — — — H1020 1.62–1.86 1.62–1.86 — — — — — 96.8–111 H1021 1.87–2.01 1.87–2.01 — — — — — 112–120 H1022 2.02–2.27 2.02–2.27 — — — — — 121–136 H1023 2.28–2.51 2.28–2.51 — — — — — 137–150 H1024 2.52–2.80 2.52–2.80 — — — — — 151–168 H1025 2.81–3.21 2.81–3.21 — — — — — 169–192 H1026 3.22–3.51 3.22–3.51 — — — — — 193–210 H1066 3.52–3.86 3.52–3.86 3.67–3.99 3.67–3.99 — — — 211–231 H1027 3.87–4.36 3.87–4.36 4.00–4.51 4.00–4.51 — — — 232–261 H1028 4.37–4.78 4.37–4.83 4.52–5.03 4.52–5.03 — — — 262–293 H1029 5 6 15 16 17 18 19 20 Notes Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton. Individually boxed heater coils master packed 10 per carton. 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T13-20 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes 13 Type LT Slow Trip Eutectic Alloy, continued For replacement in existing applications only; for motors with 1.15 service factor. Table LT-1 Table LT-2 NEMA Size 00, 0, 1, 1-1/2 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A13 For Open Type Catalog Prefix A13, C303 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix C303 Table LT-3 1 Table LT-4 Table LT-5 Table LT-6 Table LT-7 Table LT-8 NEMA Size 2 NEMA Size 2 NEMA Size 3 NEMA Size 3 NEMA Size 4 NEMA Size 5 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A13 For Open Type Catalog Prefix A13, C303 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix C303 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A13 For Open Type Catalog Prefix A13, C303 For Open Type Catalog Prefix A13, C303 For Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A13 Heater For Open and Catalog Enclosed Type Catalog Prefix A13 Number 2 Heater Ampere Range 4.79–5.35 4.84–5.41 5.04–5.59 5.04–5.59 — — — — H1030 5.36–6.00 5.42–6.07 5.60–6.20 5.60–6.20 — — — — H1031 6.01–6.59 6.08–6.66 6.21–6.88 6.21–6.88 — — — — H1032 6.60–7.35 6.67–7.51 6.89–7.80 6.89–7.80 — — — — H1033 7.36–8.14 7.52–8.31 7.81–8.71 7.81–8.71 8.16–9.11 8.24–9.19 — — H1034 8.15–9.11 8.32–9.27 8.72–9.59 8.72–9.59 9.12–9.99 9.20–10.0 — — H1035 9.12–10.0 9.28–10.3 9.60–10.5 9.60–10.7 10.0–11.2 10.1–11.3 — — H1036 10.1–11.3 10.4–11.7 10.6–11.8 10.8–12.0 11.3–12.3 11.4–12.5 — — H1037 11.4–12.5 11.8–13.0 11.9–13.3 12.1–13.4 12.4–13.9 12.6–14.1 — — H1038 12.6–13.9 13.1–14.5 13.4–14.8 13.5–14.9 14.0–15.5 14.2–15.7 — — H1039 14.0–15.5 14.6–16.3 14.9–16.6 15.0–16.8 15.6–17.4 15.8–17.6 — — H1040 15.6–17.0 16.4–18.1 16.7–18.5 16.9–18.8 17.5–19.6 17.7–19.8 — — H1041 17.1–18.9 18.2–20.3 18.6–20.7 18.9–21.1 19.7–21.9 19.9–22.1 20.0–22.3 — H1042 19.0–21.2 20.4–23.0 20.8–23.3 21.2–24.1 22.0–24.7 22.2–25.2 22.4–25.5 — H1043 21.3–23.3 23.1–25.9 23.4–26.5 24.2–27.3 24.8–28.1 25.3–28.7 25.6–28.9 — H1044 23.4–26.1 26.0–27.0 26.6–30.0 27.4–31.3 28.2–31.8 28.8–32.7 29.0–33.7 — H1045 26.2–27.0 — 30.1–33.7 31.4–35.5 31.9–36.1 32.8–37.3 33.8–37.5 — H1046 — — 33.8–37.5 35.6–40.3 36.2–40.7 37.4–42.3 37.6–42.6 — H1047 — — 37.6–41.9 40.4–45.0 40.8–45.5 42.4–47.9 42.7–48.2 — H1048 — — 42.0–45.0 — 45.6–52.0 48.0–55.4 48.3–55.9 — H1049 — — — — 52.1–58.2 55.5–61.9 56.0–62.3 — H1050 — — — — 58.3–63.2 62.0–67.9 62.4–68.4 — H1051 — — — — 63.3–68.3 68.0–73.3 68.5–73.7 — H1052 — — — — 68.4–79.9 73.4–87.9 73.8–88.7 — H1054 Notes Individually boxed heaters master packed 10 per carton. Individually boxed heater coils master packed 10 per carton. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-21 13 1 2 Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes Type N Product History Time Line for Type N Originally a Westinghouse Product Size 1940 1950 1960 1970 1980 1990 2000 Present 0–4 3 Replacement Capabilities 4 Contact Kits NEMA Size Poles Style Number 0 3 1605226 6 1 3 1605212 2 3 1605202 7 3 3 1625563 4 3 1625564 5 8 AC Coils Type N Contactor 9 Part Number Two-, Three-Pole Voltage Hz Original Four-, Five-Pole New Original New 9969D90G18 10 Sizes 0, 1 220/380/440 25/50/60 1470243 9969D90G03 1470263 11 550 60 1470244 9969D90G04 N/A N/A 120 60 1605268 9969D90G09 N/A N/A 12 115/208/230 60/60/60 1605513 9969D90G15 N/A N/A 600 60 1470245 9969D90G20 N/A N/A 9969D93G02 13 Size 2 110/208/220 25/60/60 1470202 9969D92G02 1470222 14 220/380/440/480 25/50/60/60 1470203 9969D92G03 N/A N/A 600 60 1470205 9969D92G08 1470225 9969D93G08 15 120/110 60/50 1605478 9969D92G10 N/A N/A Size 3 16 110/208/220 25/60/60 1490646 9969D96G05 1490646 9969D96G05 220/380/400/440 25/50/50/60 1490647 9969D96G06 1490647 9969D96G06 120/110 60/50 1600770 9969D96G09 1600770 9969D96G09 600/500 60/50 1490649 9969D96G21 1490649 9969D96G21 17 Size 4 18 19 20 110/208/220 25/60/60 1490658 9969D96G11 1597724 9969D96G02 600/500 60/50 1596635 9969D96G16 1490649 9969D96G21 440 60 1490659 9969D96G12 N/A N/A 120/110 60/50 1600771 9969D96G20 N/A N/A Technology Upgrades 21 Sizes 00–3—Freedom or IT. Sizes 4–5—Freedom, Vacuum or IT. 22 23 24 25 V12-T13-22 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 13 Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes A200 Originally a Westinghouse Product Product History Time Line for A200, A201, A203, A204, A206, A210, A211, A213, A214, A216, A220, A223, A224, A226, A250, A251, A600, A603, A604, A606, A700, A703, A704, A706, A800, A804 and A806 Size Model 00–3 J 4 J 4 K 5–6 Electrically held 5–6 Mechanically held 1960 1965 1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 Present 4 5 6 9 7 Replacement Capabilities Contact Kit for A200 Model J, Size Two-, Three-Pole 8 Kits for Model J, Sizes 00, 0, 1 and 2 1 Description Poles Size 00 Size 0 Size 1 Size 2 Contact kit 2 373B331G17 373B331G02 373B331G07 373B331G11 3 373B331G18 373B331G04 373B331G09 373B331G12 4 373B331G18 373B331G04 373B331G09 373B331G13 2 5 373B331G19 373B331G05 373B331G10 373B331G14 3 2–4 6714C74G01 6714C74G02 6714C74G03 6714C74G07 (two-, three-pole) 5 6714C74G04 6714C74G05 6714C74G06 6714C74G08 (four-, five-pole) Arc box 4 Cross bar A200 AC Coil, 120/110V, 60/50 Hz, Two-, Three-, Four-Pole, Sizes 00, 0 and 1 2–3 N/A N/A N/A 672B788G32 4–5 N/A N/A N/A 672B788G34 Upper base (for single rated coils only) 2–3 N/A N/A N/A 672B788G33 4–5 N/A N/A N/A 672B788G35 Lower base 2–3 N/A N/A N/A 1250C33G09 4–5 N/A N/A N/A 1250C33G05 KO spring (pk. of 10) All N/A N/A N/A 503C796G01 Terminal line/load (pk. of 3) All N/A N/A N/A 371B870G03 9 10 Sizes 00, 0 and 1 Size 2 11 12 13 14 15 16 AC Coils Voltage Hz Two-, Three-, Four-Pole Five-Pole Two-, Three-Pole Four-, Five-Pole 120/110 60/50 505C806G01 505C808G01 505C806G01 505C818G01 208 60 505C806G02 505C808G02 505C806G02 505C818G02 600/550 60/50 505C806G05 505C808G05 505C806G05 505C818G05 380 50 505C806G07 505C808G07 505C806G07 505C818G07 240/220 60/50 505C806G12 505C808G12 505C806G12 505C818G12 480/440 60/50 505C806G13 505C808G13 505C806G13 505C818G13 24 60 505C806G16 N/A 505C806G16 505C818G15 277 60 505C806G18 505C808G16 505C806G18 505C818G16 240/480 5 60/60 505C806G03 505C808G03 505C806G03 505C818G03 5 60/60 505C806G10 505C808G10 505C806G10 505C818G10 120/240 2 3 7–8 A200 Size 1 Starter 1 Notes 1 Model C contact kits and coils 00–4, two-, three-, four- and five-pole contactors are same as Model J. All other parts are unavailable. 2 Use quantity two—373B331G11 (two-pole kit). 3 Use one each of 373B331G11 (two-pole kit) and 373B331G12 (three-pole kit). 4 Mounting hardware included. 5 Dual voltage coils. Use only on contactors or starters originally supplied with a dual voltage coil. 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-23 13 Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes DC Coils 1 1 Size 0 Size 1 Size 2 Voltage Single-, Two-, Three-, Four-Pole Single-, Two-, Three-, Four-Pole Single-, Two-, Three-, Four-Pole 12 1268C86G07 1268C86G07 1268C86G07 24 1268C86G04 1268C86G04 1268C86G04 48 1268C86G05 1268C86G05 1268C86G05 125 1268C86G02 1268C86G02 1268C86G02 4 250 1268C86G01 1268C86G01 1268C86G01 125/250 2 1268C86G03 1268C86G03 1268C86G03 5 Kits for Model J–K, Sizes 3 and 4 3 2 3 A200 AC Coil, 110/120V, 60 Hz, Size 6 Description Contact kit 6 7 A200 AC Coil, 120/110V, 60/50 Hz, Two-, Three-Pole, Sizes 3 and 4, Model J Arc box 8 Cross bar 9 Upper base Lower base 10 11 Poles Size 3—Model J Size 4—Model J Size 4—Model K 4 5250C81G16 2 626B187G12 626B187G16 3 626B187G13 626B187G17 5250C81G17 4 626B187G14 5 626B187G18 7 5250C81G18 5 626B187G15 6 626B187G19 8 5250C81G19 2–3 6714C74G09 6714C74G11 6714C74G11 4–5 6714C74G10 6714C74G12 6714C74G12 2–3 672B788G36 672B788G36 672B788G40 4–5 672B788G38 672B788G38 — 2–3 672B788G37 672B788G37 672B788G52 4–5 672B788G39 672B788G39 — 1250C33G10 2–3 1250C33G03 1250C33G03 4–5 1250C33G06 1250C33G06 — KO spring (pk. of 10) All 503C796G02 503C796G02 672B788G50 Terminals line/load (pk. of 3) All 372B357G12 372B357G13 372B357G13 AC Coils 12 Model K, Size 4 9 Model J, Sizes 3–4 13 14 15 16 17 Voltage Hz Two-, Three-Pole Four-, Five-Pole Two-, Three-Pole 120/110 60/50 505C633G01 505C635G01 5250C79G01 Four-, Five-Pole 5250C80G01 208 60 505C633G02 505C635G02 5250C79G02 5250C80G02 600/550 60/50 505C633G05 505C635G05 5250C79G05 5250C80G05 380 50 505C633G07 505C635G07 5250C79G07 5250C80G07 5250C80G12 240/220 60/50 505C633G12 505C635G12 5250C79G12 480/440 60/50 505C633G13 505C635G13 5250C79G13 5250C80G13 24 60 505C633G34 N/A 5250C79G34 N/A 277 60 505C633G14 N/A 5250C79G14 N/A 240/480 j 60/60 505C633G03 505C635G03 5250C79G03 5250C80G03 120/240 j 60/60 505C633G10 505C635G10 5250C79G10 5250C80G10 DC Coils k Model J, Sizes 3–4 18 Voltage Two-, Three-Pole 24 1255C68G04 48 1255C68G05 125 1255C68G01 20 250 1255C68G02 125/250 1255C68G03 21 Notes 1 Use only on contactors originally supplied with a DC coil. 2 Dual voltage coils. Use only on contactors or starters originally supplied with a dual voltage coil. 3 Model C contact kits and coils 00–4, two-, three-, four- and five-pole contactors are same as Model J. All other parts are unavailable. 4 Model K replaces Model J. 5 Use quantity two–626B187G12 (two-pole kits). 6 Use one of each of 626B187G12 (two-pole kit) and 626B187G13 (three-pole kit). 7 Use quantity two–626B187G16 (two-pole kit). 8 Use one each of 626B187G16 (two-pole kit) and 626B187G17 (three-pole kit). 9 Model K replaces Model J. j Dual voltage coils. Use only on contactors or starters originally supplied with a dual voltage coil. k Use only on units originally supplied with DC coil. 19 22 23 24 25 V12-T13-24 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 13 Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes Kits for GCA 530/630, Sizes 5–9—and GPD Sizes 7–9 1 Kit Size 5 2 Size 6 Size 7 Size 8 Size 9 1 2066A10G11 461A757G17 646C829G05 5264C42G01 (rear connected) — — — — 5264C42G02 (front connected) Arc box 2050A15G45 2066A10G45 831D580G01 831D580G01 9917D69G02 Magnet assembly 2050A15G46 2050A15G46 N/A N/A N/A Magnet spacing kit 2050A15G47 2050A15G47 N/A N/A N/A Arc cup kit 2050A15G48 N/A N/A N/A N/A Load connection kit 2050A15G49 2066A10G49 N/A N/A N/A Line connection kit 2050A15G50 2066A10G50 N/A N/A N/A KO spring-6 2050A15G51 2066A10G46 N/A N/A N/A CT 300/5 655C285H03 N/A N/A N/A N/A CT 400/5 655C285H04 — — — — CT 600/5 N/A 2066A10G18 3 N/A N/A N/A CT 800/5 N/A 2066A10G19 3 N/A N/A N/A Contact kit (one per pole) 477B477G05 3 4 5 6 7 Phase barrier N/A N/A 640C441G01 640C441G01 5264C35G03 (rear connected) Cross bar 2050A15G12 2066A10G15 N/A N/A N/A Shunt N/A 2066A10G48 650C129G01 646C831G02 (set of three) 5264C39G02 (set of four) Coils Voltage 2 8 9 Coils Hz Size 5 Size 6 Line Voltage Sizes 7–8 Required Size 9 110/120 60 2050A14G05 2050A12G05 115 Vdc 438C805G01 2 110/120 50 2050A14G06 2050A12G06 125 Vdc 438C805G04 2 100 Vdc 5264C34G01 (contains coil and resistor) 200/208 50 2050A14G07 2050A12G07 230 Vdc 438C805G02 2 220/240 50 2050A14G08 2050A12G08 250 Vdc 438C805G03 2 200/208 60 2050A14G09 2050A12G09 110/120 Vac 47 438C805G12 2 220/240 60 2050A14G10 2050A12G10 220/240 Vac 57 438C805G11 2 277/303 60 2050A14G12 2050A12G12 380 Vac 67 438C805G15 2 380/415 50 2050A14G14 2050A12G14 440/480 Vac 67 438C805G10 2 67 438C805G13 2 2050A12G15 550/575 Vac 440/480 50 2050A14G16 2050A12G16 550/600 60 2050A14G17 2050A12G17 Notes 1 Catalog No. A201/A200 Series replaces GCA/GPD Series. Renewal parts are the same. 2 Use 477B477G06 for Silver Tungsten applications. 3 CT Kit replaces the single molded one CT assembly used on the old Size 6 airbrake. The kit includes a single molded three CT assembly, two busbars and hardware. This CT Kit also replaces the single molded three CT assembly used on the present Size 6 airbrake and Size 6 vacuum contactor. 4 Rectifier 125V 2018A40G01 (one required). 5 Rectifier 250V 2018A40G02 (one required). 6 Rectifier 600V 2018A40G03 (one required). 7 These coils require an external rectifier. If the rectifier needs to be replaced, order by the appropriate style number. 550/600 50 2050A14G18 2050A12G18 60 2050A14G19 2050A12G19 120/240 60 2050A14G20 2050A12G20 24 DC — 2050A14G21 2050A12G21 48 DC — 2050A14G22 2050A12G22 125 DC — 2050A14G25 2050A12G25 250 DC — 2050A14G27 2050A12G27 12 14 2050A14G15 380/415 11 13 60 440/480 10 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-25 13 Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes Accessories for Size 5–9 AC Contactors—Coils 1 AC Contactors 2 3 4 5 Size 5 DC Coil Conversion Kit— Style Number 7864A29G01 A rectifier circuit converts the AC supply to DC supply. This conversion provides quiet operation and improves pickup and dropout characteristics. All necessary parts are included in the kit. Size 6 Voltage AC/DC Coil Conversion Kit Replacement Coil 120 Vac 7864A28G01 7856A15G05 240 Vac 7864A28G02 7856A15G10 480 Vac 7864A28G03 7856A15G15 120 Vac 7864A29G01 7856A16G05 240 Vac 7864A29G02 7856A16G10 480 Vac 7864A29G03 7856A16G15 Accessories for Size 5–9 AC Contactors—Auxiliary Electrical Interlock Contactor Size Catalog Number (Obsolete) Style Number (Obsolete) Circuits Catalog Number (Current) Style Number (Current) 00–6 (L-56) (2609D01G01) 1NO and 1NC J11 9084A17G01 (L-56D) 8 (L-56E) (2609D01G02) 2NO J20 9084A17G02 (2609D01G03) 1NO and 1NC J11 9084A17G01 (L-56B) (2609D01G04) 2NO J20 9084A17G02 9 (L-56H) (2609D01G05) 2NO J20 9084A17G02 (L-56J) (2609D01G06) 1NO and 1NC DB J1C N/A 10 (T-56A) (2609D01G07) N/A N/A N/A 6 7 L63—Style Number 578D461G01 (T-56A) (2609D01G07) N/A N/A N/A 11 (T-56B) (2609D01G08) N/A N/A N/A (L-56F) (2609D01G09) N/A N/A N/A 12 (L-56G) (2609D01G10) 1NO and 1NC DB J1C 9084A17G04 9084A17G03 (L-56C) (2609D01G11) 2NC J02 (L-56M) (2609D01G12) N/A N/A N/A (L-56P) (2609D01G17) 1NO and 1NC J11 9084A17G01 (L-56R) (2609D01G18) 2NC J02 9084A17G03 (L-56S) (2609D01G19) 1NO and 1NC J11 9084A17G01 7–8 L63 — NO — 578D461G01 L63 — NC — 578D461G03 9 L64 — NO/NC — 843D943G04 L64 — 2NO — 843D943G05 L64 — 2NC — 843D943G06 13 14 L64—Style Number 843D943G04 15 16 17 Technology Upgrades Sizes 00–3—Freedom or IT. Sizes 4–6—Freedom, Vacuum or IT. Sizes 7–8—Freedom Size 9—No upgrade available 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T13-26 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 13 Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes Manual Reset, Class 20, Thermal Type B Overload Relay Type B Overload Relay, Panel Mounted Operation Ambient Compensation Design Standards The Type B overload relay is a bimetallic actuated device. The bimetal elements are operated by precisely calibrated heaters. The heater elements connect either directly in the circuit to be measured, or through current transformers on applications NEMA Size 5 and larger. The Type B ambient compensated design is supplied as standard on all A200 starters. This design uses a second compensating bimetal responsive to ambient air temperature in the surrounding enclosure. This feature reduces nuisance tripping in applications using compact control panels and motor control centers where internal temperature rise is significant compared to motor ambient temperature. The compensating characteristic is maintained in ambient temperatures from 40°C to 77°C. UL® 508, CSA®, ANSI/NEMA ICS 2-222. As the bimetals are heated by motor current flow, a deflection force is produced. Upon a sustained level of abnormal current flow, the deflection becomes great enough to open the snap action output contact. 4 5 6 7 8 9 Starter Mounted Catalog Number Field-Mountable Alarm Contact Note: Alarm contact available as factory modification of field mountable. For factory modification, add suffix B. Panel Mounted Catalog Number Replacement for Type B Overload Relays Replacement for Type A Overload Relays in Manual Reset Mode (Three-Pole Only) 1 Ambient Comp. Non-Comp. Ambient Comp. Non-Comp. Ambient Comp. Non-Comp. Single-Pole (One NC Contact) 0.25–26.2 BA11JP BN11JP BA11A BN11A — — 26.3–45.0 BA21JP BN21JP BA21A BN21A — — 19.0–90.0 19.0–135.0 The Type B overload relay is designed to protect industrial motors against overload conditions. Using modern block-type, bimetallic design, this relay will provide Class 20 operation in either singlephase or three-phase applications. Three-Pole (One NC Contact) Features ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Ambient compensation standard Alarm contact field mountable Class 20—600V design Inverse time delay trip Test trip device for weld check High visibility up-front trip indication Trip-free reset mechanism 10 11 12 13 Use three-pole design, wire three-poles in series Application Description 2 3 Overload Relay Selection Table For replacement in existing applications only. Motor Full Load Amperes 1 14 0.25–26.2 BA13JP BN13JP BA13A 2 BN13A 2 BA13J BN13J 26.3–45.0 BA23JP BN23JP BA23A BN23A BA23J BN23J 19.0–90.0 BA33P BN33P BA33A BN33A BA33A BN33A 19.0–135.0 BA43P BN43P BA43A BN43A BA43A BN43A Alarm Contact Kit Selection Heaters Type B Overload Relay Size Catalog Number 1, 2 3, 4 B3NO-2 B3NO-4 Price of overload relay does not include heaters. Select from the tables on Pages V12-T13-30 to V12-T13-32. 15 16 17 18 19 Notes 1 Includes contactor mounting bracket, overload relay and connection straps to contactor. 2 For replacement on B200 sizes 00, 0 and 1, use BA23A instead of BA13A and use BN23A instead of BN13A. 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-27 13 1 2 Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes Auto/Manual Reset, Class 20, Thermal Type A Overload Relay 3 4 5 6 Three-Pole Panel Mounted 7 8 Operation Automatic Reset Design Standards The Type A overload relay is a bimetallic actuated device. The bimetal elements are operated by precisely calibrated heaters. The heater elements connected either directly in the circuit to be measured, or through current transformers on applications NEMA Size 5 and larger. The Type A overload relay can be supplied as an option on all A200 starters to provide automatic reset operation. The overload relay is always shipped in the non-automatic mode. To set up auto operation, reposition the reset rod by loosening and retightening a hold-down clamp at the base of overload relay. UL 508, CSA, ANSI/NEMA ICS 2-222. As the bimetals are heated by motor current flow, a deflection force is produced. Upon a sustained level of abnormal current flow, the deflection becomes great enough to open the snap action output contact. Overload Relay Selection Table For replacement in existing applications only. 9 Motor Full Load Amperes Panel Mounted Catalog Number Starter Mounted Catalog Number Ambient Comp. Ambient Comp. Non-Comp. AN11A Non-Comp. 10 Single-Pole (One NC Contact) 11 0.25–26.2 AA11P AN11P AA11A 26.3–45.0 AA21P AN21P AA21A AN21A 19.0–90.0 AA31P AN31P AA31A AN31A 19.0–135.0 AA41P AN41P AA41A AN41A AA13P AN13P AA13A AN13A 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Single-Pole Panel Mounted Application Description The Type A overload relay is designed to protect industrial motors against overload conditions. Using modern block-type, bimetallic design, this relay will provide Class 20 operation in either singlephase or three-phase applications. Features ● ● ● ● ● ● Field selectable manual/ auto reset Alarm contact factory available Class 20—600V design Inverse time delay trip Adjustable trip rating ±15% Color-coded reset rod: Compensated (gray) Non-compensated (red) Three-Pole (One NC Contact) 1 0.25–26.2 26.3–45.0 AA23P AN23P AA23A AN23A 19.0–90.0 AA33P AN33P AA33A AN33A 19.0–135.0 AA43P AN43P AA43A AN43A Heaters Price of overload relay does not include heaters. Select from the tables on Pages V12-T13-30 to V12-T13-32. Notes 1 Three-pole Type B Overload Relay is a suitable alternative to a three-pole Type A Overload Relay in Manual Reset Mode. For example, use BA13JP for AA13P and BN23J for AN23A, etc. (See Page V12-T13-27.) Alarm contact available only as factory modification on Type A relay. 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T13-28 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 13 Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes Type FT Fast Trip, Class 10 Overload Relay Single-Pole Fast Trip, Panel Mounted Operation The Type FT overload relay is a bimetallic actuated device. The bimetal elements are operated directly from line current, thus separate calibrating heater elements are not used. The overload relay may be wired directly in the motor circuit, or through current transformers on applications larger than 150A. 1 As the bimetals are heated by motor current flow, a deflection is produced. Upon a sustained level of abnormal current flow, the deflection becomes great enough to open the snap action output contact. 2 3 4 5 Overload Relay Selection Table For replacement in existing applications only. Motor Full Load Amperes 6 Panel Mounted Catalog Number Starter Mounted Catalog Number 1 Single-Pole 1 NEMA Size Three-Pole 2 Single-Pole 7 8 Single-Pole (One NC Contact); Three-Phase (Three NC Contacts in Series) Three-Pole Fast Trip, Panel Mounted Application Description The Type FT overload relay is designed to protect special purpose motors having restricted thermal and locked rotor capabilities. Using modern block-type, bimetallic design, this relay will provide Class 10 operation in singlephase or three-phase applications. Features ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Class 10—600V design Inverse time delay trip Color-coded reset rod— green Alarm contact factory available Field selectable manual/ auto reset Adjustable trip rating ±20% Ambient compensation included 0.76–1.1 FT11P-1.1 FT13P-1.1 — FT11A-1.1 1.1–1.6 FT11P-1.6 FT13P-1.6 — FT11A-1.6 1.6–2.4 FT11P-2.4 FT13P-2.4 0, 1 FT11A-2.4 2.4–3.6 FT11P-3.6 FT13P-3.6 0, 1 FT11A-3.6 3.6–5.4 FT11P-5.4 FT13P-5.4 0, 1 FT11A-5.4 5.4–8.0 FT11P-8 FT13P-8 0, 1 FT11A-8 8.0–12 FT11P-12 FT13P-12 0, 1 FT11A-12 12–18 FT11P-18 FT13P-18 1 FT11A-18 16–24 FT11P-24 FT13P-24 1 FT11A-24 22–32 FT11P-32 FT13P-32 0, 1 FT11A-32 24–36 FT21P-36 FT23P-36 2 FT21A-36 36–54 FT21P-54 FT23P-54 2 FT21A-54 22–32 FT31P-32 FT33P-32 3 FT31A-32 32–48 FT31P-48 FT33P-48 3 FT31A-48 48–72 FT31P-72 FT33P-72 3 FT31A-72 72–110 FT41P-110 FT43P-110 4 FT41A-110 100–150 FT41P-150 FT43P-150 4 FT41A-150 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Notes 1 Single-pole (one NO–NC contact): Add suffix B. 2 Three-pole (three NO–NC contacts): Add suffix B. Example: FT13PB-12. 17 Alarm contact available only as factory modification on FT relay. 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-29 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes Heaters for Thermal Types A and B Overload Relays Product Description Heater Selection for Types A and B Overload Relays, Sizes 00, 0, 1 and 2 Starters Non-Compensated Open Starters and Ambient Compensated Open and Enclosed Starters Non-Compensated Enclosed Starters Block-Type Overload Using Three Heaters Block-Type Overload Using Three Heaters Single-Pole Type Overload Heater Catalog Number Single-Pole Type Overload Each heater is identified by a catalog number stamped on one terminal. The heater application table indicates the range of full load motor current to which a given heater may be applied. Full Load Current of Motor (Amperes) Heaters should be selected on the basis of the actual full load current and service factor as shown on the motor nameplate or in the manufacturer’s published literature. When motor and overload relay are in the same ambient and the service factor of the motor is 1.15 to 1.25, select heaters from the heater application table. If the service factor of the motor is 1.0, or there is no service factor shown, or a maximum of 115% protection is desired, select one size smaller heater than indicated. When motor and overload relay are in different ambients and when using non-compensated overload relays, select heaters from the tables on Pages V12-T13-30 through V12-T13-32 using adjusted motor currents as follows: decrease rated motor current 1% for each °C motor ambient exceeds controller ambient. Increase rated motor current 1% for each °C controller ambient exceeds motor ambient. For temperature compensated overload relays, select heaters according to the tables on Pages V12-T13-30 through V12-T13-32 and selection information above regardless of ambient. 12 For Sizes 0, 1 and 2 Starters 0.25–0.27 0.29–0.31 0.24–0.25 0.28–0.30 FH03 0.28–0.31 0.32–0.35 0.26–0.28 0.31–0.34 FH04 0.32–0.34 0.36–0.39 0.29–0.31 0.35–0.37 FH05 0.35–0.38 0.40–0.43 0.32–0.35 0.38–0.42 FH06 0.39–0.42 0.44–0.48 0.36–0.39 0.43–0.47 FH07 0.43–0.46 0.49–0.53 0.40–0.43 0.48–0.52 FH08 0.47–0.50 0.54–0.58 0.44–0.47 0.53–0.56 FH09 0.51–0.55 0.59–0.64 0.48–0.51 0.57–0.63 FH10 0.56–0.62 0.65–0.71 0.52–0.57 0.64–0.70 FH11 0.63–0.68 0.72–0.79 0.58–0.63 0.71–0.77 FH12 0.69–0.75 0.80–0.87 0.64–0.70 0.78–0.85 FH13 0.76–0.83 0.88–0.96 0.71–0.77 0.86–0.94 FH14 0.84–0.91 0.97–1.06 0.78–0.85 0.95–1.03 FH15 0.92–1.00 1.07–1.16 0.86–0.93 1.04–1.13 FH16 1.01–1.11 1.17–1.28 0.94–1.03 1.14–1.25 FH17 1.12–1.22 1.29–1.41 1.04–1.13 1.26–1.38 FH18 1.23–1.34 1.42–1.55 1.14–1.25 1.39–1.52 FH19 1.35–1.47 1.56–1.71 1.26–1.37 1.53–1.67 FH20 1.48–1.62 1.72–1.87 1.38–1.51 1.68–1.83 FH21 1.63–1.78 1.88–2.06 1.52–1.65 1.84–2.01 FH22 1.79–1.95 2.07–2.26 1.66–1.81 2.02–2.21 FH23 1.96–2.15 2.27–2.48 1.82–1.99 2.22–2.43 FH24 2.16–2.35 2.49–2.72 2.00–2.19 2.44–2.66 FH25 2.36–2.58 2.73–2.99 2.20–2.39 2.67–2.92 FH26 2.59–2.83 3.00–3.28 2.40–2.63 2.93–3.21 FH27 2.84–3.11 3.29–3.60 2.64–2.89 3.22–3.53 FH28 3.12–3.42 3.61–3.95 2.90–3.17 3.54–3.87 FH29 3.43–3.73 3.96–4.31 3.18–3.47 3.88–4.22 FH30 3.74–4.07 4.32–4.71 3.48–3.79 4.23–4.61 FH31 4.08–4.39 4.72–5.14 3.80–4.11 4.62–4.9 FH32 4.40–4.87 5.15–5.6 4.12–4.55 5.0–5.5 FH33 4.88–5.3 5.7–6.2 4.56–5.0 5.6–6.0 FH34 Notes 1 Based on 60°C and 75°C wire for 30A or less. 2 Based on 60°C wire for 31 to 95A. Heaters are packaged in strips of six. Minimum ordering quantity is 12. Protect the starter against short circuits by providing branch circuit protection per National Electrical Code® (NEC®). 24 25 V12-T13-30 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 13 Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes Heater Selection for Types A and B Overload Relays, Sizes 00, 0, 1 and 2 Starters, continued 1 Non-Compensated Open Starters and Ambient Compensated Open and Enclosed Starters Non-Compensated Enclosed Starters Block-Type Overload Using Three Heaters Single-Pole Type Overload Block-Type Overload Using Three Heaters Single-Pole Type Overload Heater Catalog Number 5.4–5.9 6.3–6.8 5.1–5.5 6.1–6.6 FH35 6.0–6.4 6.9–7.5 5.6–5.9 6.7–7.3 FH36 6.5–7.1 7.6–8.2 6.0–6.6 7.4–8.0 FH37 7.2–7.8 8.3–9.0 6.7–7.2 8.1–8.7 FH38 7.9–8.5 9.1–9.9 7.3–7.9 8.8–9.7 FH39 Full Load Current of Motor (Amperes) 12 For Sizes 0, 1 and 2 Starters 8.6–9.4 10.0–10.8 8.0–8.7 9.8–10.5 FH40 9.5–10.3 10.9–11.9 8.8–9.5 10.6–11.7 FH41 10.4–11.3 12.0–13.1 9.6–10.5 11.8–12.7 FH42 11.4–12.4 13.2–14.3 10.6–11.5 12.8–14.0 FH43 12.5–13.5 14.4–15.7 11.6–12.6 14.1–15.3 FH44 13.6–14.9 15.8–17.2 12.7–13.8 15.4–16.6 FH45 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 15.0–16.3 — 13.9–15.1 — FH46 16.4–18.0 — 15.2–16.7 — FH47 9 17.3–18.9 — 16.7–18.3 FH46 10 For Sizes 1 and 2 Starters — — 19.0–20.8 — 18.4–20.0 FH47 18.1–19.8 20.9–22.9 16.8–18.3 20.1–21.9 FH48 19.9–21.7 23.0–25.2 18.4–20.2 22.0–23.9 FH49 21.8–23.9 25.3–27.6 20.3–22.2 24.0–26.2 FH50 24.0–26.2 — 22.3–24.3 — FH51 — — 24.4–26.6 — FH52 13 14 11 12 For Size 2 Starters — 27.7–30.3 — 26.3–28.8 FH51 26.3–28.7 30.4–33.3 — 28.9–31.4 FH52 28.8–31.4 33.4–36.4 26.7–29.1 31.5–34.5 FH53 31.5–34.0 36.5–39.9 29.2–32.0 34.6–37.9 FH54 34.6–37.9 42.0–43.9 32.1–35.2 38.0–41.9 FH55 38.0–41.5 — 35.3–38.5 42.0–45.0 FH56 41.6–45.0 — 38.6–42.3 — FH57 15 16 17 Notes 1 Based on 60°C and 75°C wire for 30A or less. 2 Based on 60°C wire for 31 to 95A. 18 Heaters are packaged in strips of six. Minimum ordering quantity is 12. 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-31 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes Heater Selection for Types A and B Overload Relays, Sizes 3 and 4 Starters 123 Heater Selection for Types A and B Overload Relays, Sizes 5 and 6 Starters 4 Ambient Compensated Enclosed Starters Compensated Overload Relay Non-Compensated Enclosed Starters All Applications Full Load Current of Motor (Amperes) 1 Open Starter Heater Catalog Number For Sizes 3 and 4 Starters Enclosed Starter Full Load Current of Motor (Amperes) Heater Catalog Number Size 5 (With 300/5 Current Transformers) — — FH23 118–129 118–129 FH24 12.8–14.1 11.9–13.0 FH68 14.2–15.5 13.1–14.3 FH69 130–141 130–141 FH25 FH70 142–155 142–155 FH26 156–170 156–170 FH27 FH72 171–187 171–187 FH28 FH73 188–205 188–205 FH29 206–224 206–224 FH30 FH75 225–244 225–244 FH31 245–263 245–263 FH32 264–292 264–292 FH33 FH78 293–300 — FH34 Size 6 (With 600/5 Current Transformers) 15.6–17.1 17.2–18.9 19.0–20.8 20.9–22.9 23.0–25.2 25.3–27.8 14.4–15.9 16.0–17.4 17.5–19.1 19.2–21.1 21.2–23.2 23.3–25.6 FH71 FH74 27.9–30.6 25.7–28.1 FH76 30.7–33.5 28.2–30.8 FH77 33.6–37.5 30.9–34.5 37.6–41.5 34.6–38.2 FH79 41.6–46.3 38.3–42.6 FH80 46.4–50 51–55 56–61 42.7–46 47–51 52–56 — — FH23 FH81 236–259 236–259 FH24 FH82 260–283 260–283 FH25 284–310 284–310 FH26 311–340 FH27 FH83 62–66 57–61 FH84 311–340 67–73 62–67 FH85 341–374 341–374 FH28 375–411 375–411 FH29 FH87 412–448 412–448 FH30 FH88 449–489 449–489 FH31 490–527 490–527 FH32 For Size 4 Starters 528–585 528–540 FH33 15 93–101 586–600 — FH34 102–110 92–99 FH90 16 111–122 100–110 FH91 123–129 111–122 FH92 17 130–133 123–128 FH93 — 129–133 FH94 12 13 74–78 79–84 85–92 14 — 18 68–72 73–77 78–84 85–91 — FH86 FH89 FH89 Size 7 and Larger Advise full load current Notes 1 Based on 60°C and 75°C wire for 30A or less. 2 Based on 60°C wire for 31 to 95A. 3 Based on 75°C wire for greater than 95A. 4 Based on 75°C wire. Heaters are packaged in strips of six. Minimum ordering quantity is 12. 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T13-32 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 13 Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes A202 Lighting Contactor (Electrically Held/ Magnetically Latched) Originally a Westinghouse Product Product History Time Line for A202 Lighting Contactor (Electrically Held/Magnetically Latched) Size Amperes Model Size 1 30 Size 2 60 Size 3 100 Size 4 200 J Size 4 200 K 1965 1970 1975 1980 1 1985 1990 1995 2000 Present 2 3 4 Replacement Capabilities 5 A202 Kits for 30 to 200A 6 Description Poles 30A 60A 100A 200A— Model J 1 200A— Model K 2 Contact kit 2 373B331G07 373B331G11 626B187G12 626B187G16 5250C81G16 3 373B331G09 373B331G12 626B187G13 626B187G17 5250C81G17 4 373B331G09 3 5 7 5250C81G18 5 373B331G10 4 6 8 5250C81G19 2, 3, 4 6714C74G03 6714C74G07 6714C74G09 6714C74G11 6714C74G11 30A, Four-Pole Magnetically Latched Arc box 7 8 9 10 5 6714C74G06 6714C74G08 6714C74G10 6714C74G12 6714C74G12 Cross bar 2–3 — 672B788G32 672B788G36 672B788G36 672B788G40 4–5 — 672B788G34 672B788G38 672B788G38 — Upper base (for single rated coils only) 2–3 — 672B788G33 672B788G37 672B788G37 672B788G52 4–5 — 672B788G35 672B788G39 672B788G39 — Lower base 2–3 — 1250C33G09 1250C33G03 1250C33G03 1250C33G10 4–5 — 1250C33G05 1250C33G06 1250C33G06 — 13 14 Electrically Held Only KO spring (pack of 10) All — 503C796G01 503C796G02 503C796G02 672B788G50 Terminal line/load (pack of 3) All — 371B870G03 372B357G12 372B357G13 372B357G13 Notes 1 For 200A A202 Magnetically Latched Lighting Contactors, order three-pole contact kit style 672B788G07. 2 Model K replaces Model J, offering superior design and life characteristics. Renewal parts are different. Use parts for proper model only. 3 Use quantity two–373B331G11 (two-pole kit). 4 Use one each of 373B331G11 (two-pole kit) and 373B331G12 (three-pole kit). 5 Use quantity two–626B187G12 (two-pole kit). 6 Use one each of 626B187G12 (two-pole kit) and 626B187G13 (three-pole kit). 7 Use quantity two–626B187G16 (two-pole kit). 8 Use one each of 626B187G16 (two-pole kit) and 626B187G17 (three-pole kit). 11 12 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-33 13 1 120V Coil for Electrically Held Lighting Contactor— Style Number 505C633G01 Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes AC Coils Electrically Held 30A 60A Voltage Hz Two-, Three-, Four-Pole Five-Pole Two-, Three-Pole Four-, Five-Pole 120/110 60/50 505C806G01 505C808G01 505C806G01 505C818G01 208 60 505C806G02 505C808G02 505C806G02 505C818G02 600/550 60/50 505C806G05 505C808G05 505C806G05 505C818G05 380 50 505C806G07 505C808G07 505C806G07 505C818G07 240/220 60/50 505C806G12 505C808G12 505C806G12 505C818G12 480/440 60/50 505C806G13 505C808G13 505C806G13 505C818G13 5 24 60 505C806G16 N/A 505C806G16 505C818G15 227 60 505C806G18 505C808G16 505C806G18 505C818G16 6 240/480 1 60/60 505C806G03 505C808G03 505C806G03 505C818G03 120/240 1 60/60 505C806G10 505C808G10 505C806G10 505C818G10 Four-, Five-Pole Two-, Three-Pole 2 3 4 7 AC Coils Electrically Held, continued 8 200A—Model K 2 100 and 200A—Model J Voltage Hz Two-, Three-Pole 120/110 60/50 505C633G01 505C635G01 52050C79G01 5250C80G01 208 60 505C633G02 505C635G02 52050C79G02 5250C80G02 600/550 60/50 505C633G05 505C635G05 52050C79G05 5250C80G05 380 50 505C633G07 505C635G07 52050C79G07 5250C80G07 11 240/220 60/50 505C633G12 505C635G12 52050C79G12 5250C80G12 480/440 60/50 505C633G13 505C635G13 52050C79G13 5250C80G13 12 24 60 505C633G34 N/A 52050C79G34 N/A 9 10 13 14 Four-, Five-Pole 227 60 505C633G14 N/A 52050C79G14 N/A 240/480 1 60/60 505C633G03 505C635G03 52050C79G03 5250C80G03 120/244 1 60/60 505C633G10 505C635G10 52050C79G10 5250C80G10 Notes 1 Dual voltage coils. Use only on contactors or starters originally supplied with a dual voltage coil. 2 Model K replaces Model J. Renewal parts are different. Use parts for proper model only. 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V12-T13-34 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com 13 Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes AC Coils Magnetically Latched Hz Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Five-Pole 1 110/120 50/60 7874A93G01 7874A93G01 7874A93G01 7874A89G01 2 208/240 50/60 7874A93G02 7874A93G02 7874A93G02 7874A89G02 277 50/60 7874A93G03 7874A93G03 7874A93G03 7874A89G03 440/480 50/60 7874A93G04 7874A93G04 7874A93G04 7874A89G04 575 50/60 7874A93G05 7874A93G05 7874A93G05 7874A89G05 4 110/120 50/60 7874A93G01 7874A93G01 7874A87G01 7874A87G01 5 208/240 50/60 7874A93G02 7874A93G02 7874A87G02 7874A87G02 277 50/60 7874A93G03 7874A93G03 7874A87G03 7874A87G03 440/480 50/60 7874A93G04 7874A93G04 7874A87G04 7874A87G04 110/120 50/60 7874A93G01 7874A93G01 7874A87G01 7874A87G05 7 110/120 50/60 7874A85G01 7874A85G01 7874A83G01 7874A83G01 208/240 50/60 7874A85G02 7874A85G02 7874A83G02 7874A83G02 8 277 50/60 7874A85G03 7874A85G03 7874A83G03 7874A83G03 440/480 50/60 7874A85G04 7874A85G04 7874A83G04 7874A83G04 550/575 50/60 7874A85G05 7874A85G05 7874A83G05 7874A83G05 Voltage 30A 3 60A 6 100 and 200A 9 10 Terminals (Line and Load) 11 Size Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Five-Pole 30A N/A N/A N/A N/A 60A 179C755G17 179C755G16 179C755G17 1 179C755G16 + G17 2 100A 179C755G19 179C755G18 179C755G19 1 179C755G18 + G19 2 200A Model K Model J Model K Model J Model K Model J Model K Model J 179C755G28 179C755G31 179C755G27 179C755G30 179C755G28 1 179C755G3 1 179C755G27 + G28 2 179C755G30 + G3 2 12 13 Other Accessories Size Control Module (Rectifier) 30 to 200A 3915B98G01 14 15 16 Notes 1 Order quantity of two for four-pole design. 2 Group numbers for the five-pole terminals represent the combination of the two-pole and three-pole number. 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—November 2013 www.eaton.com V12-T13-35 13 Motor Control Contactors, Starters and Brakes 1 V201 and V200 Vacuum Contactors and Starters Heater Coils Replacement Coils 2 Originally a Westinghouse Product Heater Coil Selection for Type B Overload Relay Vacuum Contactor—Replacement Coils Motor Full Load Current in Amperes for Use with Three Heaters Only Description 3 Open Starter Ambient Compensated Overload Relay 4 Size 4 and 160A 5 6 7 8 Heater Catalog Number 1 Size 4 Vacuum Contactors 9 10 11 12 13 14 12.8–14.1 14.2–15.5 15.6–17.1 17.2–18.9 19.0–20.8 FH68 FH69 FH70 FH71 FH72 20.9–22.9 23.0–25.2 25.3–27.8 27.9–30.6 30.7–33.5 FH73 FH74 FH75 FH76 FH77 33.6–37.5 37.6–41.5 41.6–46.3 46.4–50 51–55 FH78 FH79 FH80 FH81 FH82 56–61 62–66 67–73 74–78 79–84